BEHAVIOR, ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

OF STEELWORK CONNECTIONS

VOLUME(3)
BY
Dr. EL-SAYED BAHAA MAC HALY
Professor of Steel Structures
Faculty of Engineering, Cairo University

Sixth Edition
.,
j

j Based on the Egyptian Code of Practice

of Steel Constructions and Bridges (2001).
l Allowable Stress Design (ASD)

2008
 To My Beloved
Egypt

.Jl nghts reserved. No part of this book may be reprodu~ or disti:ibuted in any
1ains, or stored in a database br retrieval system, without the prior written permission ToNy Father
rom the author. On The Occasion Of His
...,...t:t(ll t.r" ~r- <Jr. JZ jf.:. ':1 , 4Ji,# c}JI cJ .;.:-
· · 23rd Memorial
~ J.l j.l 0" t;.t5 ,:,;~ ':/1 \.,. ll,...) ~~ .10/4/198S
 PREFACE
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This modest work is my third volume which ptovides the
havior and analysis of the common structural connections. The I would _like to express my deep appreciation to the work
team without whom I could not have accomplished this book . This
:td path through the steel components is analyzed and then followed team includes:
· stress checks .

Chapters 1 to 3 provide the required background necessai?' to

:sign the non-pretensioned and the high strength bolted :onnectt_ons
well as the welded connections. Chapters 4 to 6 gtve detailed
:scriptions of the flexible,· rigid an~ semi~ri~id connecti?ns.
aapters 7, 8 and 9 provide. in detmls the sphces, the fattgue
quirements and the base connections .
The material of this volume is a national and up-to-date tool
r the design ofsteelwork connections. The material h~re will serve
ndergraduate. ~~ Postgraduate Students as well as Engmeers.
This fourth edition applies the modifications included in the
~w edition of the Steel Egyptian Code ofPractice for Constructions
td Bridges (2001) using the Allowable Stress Design (ASD) concept
(1) Dr. Karam Maalawi, who received this book hand written.
He made the review .
(2) Dr. SherifSafar, who solved the majority ofthe examples in
the previous editions knowing that only some modifications
regarding the allowable stresses for different fasteners have
(3) been applied.
Eng. Saad Ghaprial Yakoub, who drew the illustration, the
graphics and the tables using Autocad, Artist and Excell
programs respectively. Eng. Saad Printed also this book
using both Winword and Chiwriter programs.

I acknowledge this volume to my beloved Egypt.

~.11~~
Prof. Dr. El..:sayed Bahaa Machaly
01/01/2008
Prof. Dr. El-sayed Bahaa Machaly
01/01/2008
 CONTENTS
Page Solved Examples. -------------------------------- 37

REFACE iv CHAPTER 2 HIGH STRENGTH BoLTED CONNECTIONS :

71
2.1 Introduction.
CKNOWLEGMENTS v
2.2
------------------------------ 72
Different Types of High Strength Bolts. ----
73
ONTENTS vi 2.3 Tension-elongation Curve for High Strength
Bolts. -~----------------------------------- 75
HAPTER 1 RIVETED AND NoN-PRETENTIONED <ORDINARY) BOLTED 2.4· Installation Procedures.
2.5 The Bolt Pretension.
------------------- 77
CONNECTIONS 1
2.6
----------------------- 81
Friction-Type and Bearing-Type High Strength
1.1 Introduction. -----~------------------------ 2
1.2 Different Types of Rivets and Method of Bolted Connections. ------------------------ 82
2.7
Friction Type High Strength Bolted Connection. 82
Installation. ------------------------------ 2 2.8
Bolted Beam to - Column connections and the
1.3 Material Properties, Types and Method of Ins~
tallation of the Non-pretensioned Bolts. 4
Prying Force Effect. ----------------------- 97
2.9 Tee-Stub Bolted Connections. ---------------
i. 4 Positioning of Holes for Bolts and Rivets. 8 104
2.10 End Plate Moment Connections.
1.5 Different Types of Connections. ------------ 13 -------------- 109
1.6 Non-pretensioned Bolts Subjected to Concentric Solved Examples. -------------------------------- 121
Shear. --------------~---------------------- 19
1.7 Eccentric Shear Connections. --------------- · 24 CHAPTER 3'WELDED· CONNECTIONS
169
1.8 Bolts of Non-pretensioned Subjected to External 1
Introduction .. -------~--------------------- 170
Tensile Force. ----------------------------- 27 3.2 Process of Welding.
1.9 Bolts of Non-pretensioned Subjected to External 3.3 Welding Positions.
----------------------- 170

Tension in Addition to Shear. -------------- 28 3.4

------------------------ 172
Different Welding Processes. --------------
1.10 Moment Connections. --------------~--------- 28 3.5 173
Veldability and Steel.Properties. --~---~--
1.11 Connections Subje.cted to Bending Moment in 3.6 177
Different Types of Velds.
addition to Shearing Force and .External ----------------- 179
3. 7 ·:Electrode Re.quirements. -------------.,.-----
Tensile Force. --------------·---------------""":" 30 180
3 .. 8 Design and Strength of Butt (Groove) Welded
1.12 General Considerations Regarding the Use. of Connections.
Rivets and Ordinary Bolts. 31 3.9
------------------------------ 183
Design, Strength and Limitations
1.13 Summary. 36 of Fillet
Welded Connections.
----------------------- 192
 3.10 Fillet Welded Connections Subjected to CHAPTER 5 RIGID CONNECTIONS :
371
Concentric Shear. ------~------------------ 196 5.1
Welded Beam-to~Column Connection Horizontal
3.11 Eccentric Fillet Welded Connections. ------ 205
Stiffener Configuration. ------------------- 373
3.12 Fillet Welded Connections Subjected, to 5.2
Vertical Tee Stiffeners Connected Either to
Bending Stresses. ------------------------- 211
Column Web or to Column Flange. ------------ 385
3.13 Plug Velds, Slot Velds and Fillet Velds in 5.3 Welded Vertical Plate St iffeners
Holes and Slots. 213
Configurations. ---------------
3.14 Welded Moment Corner Connections. -----~---- 216 5.4 ------------- 398
Connecting Plates Welded to Either the
3. 15 Technological Considerations .. --:------------- 228
Column Flange or the Column Web: ----------- 402
3. 1E> Veld, Insp,ection Methods. -:---~------------- 229 5.5
Different Comments. -~----------~----~------ 414
3.17 Summary. --------~-------------------------- 230
5.6 Welded Knee Connections. -------------------
321
5. 7 The Portal 'F · · ·
rame Connections. -------------- 462
Solved E~amples. 232
;!-
5.8 Continuous Grid Beam Connections. ----------
475
5.9 General Comments Regarding the Analysis of
::;HA~TER 4 fLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 265
the Moment End Plate High-:Strength Bolted
4.1 Introduction. 266 Connections.
------------------------------- 482
4.2 .Flexible Beam-to-Column Connections. ------ 268
Solved Examples.
4.3 Double Yeb Framing Angles. ---------------- 270 ------------------------------ 490
4.4 Single Yeb Framing Angle. ----------------- 283
CHAPTER 6 SEMI-RIGID CONNECTIONS :
4.5 The Cleat Plate Web-Beam Shear Connection. 286 589
4.6 The Shear End Plate-Web-to-Beam Connection. 289 6.1 Introduction.
-----------------------------~ 590
4. 7 The Bearing End Plate Connection. ------·--- 292 6.2
The Moment-Rotation Curve. ---------------
591
4.8 The Directly Welded Beam-Web Connection. -- 293 6.3 Moment-Rotation Curves of Typ1·cal co t·
nnec 1ons 592
4.9 The Unstiffened Seated Beam-Connection. ---- 295 6.4 Methods of Prediction of (M-e)
Curve. ------ 595
4.10 Stiffened Rectangular Seat Bracket. 301 6.5 Behaviour and analysis of
Nonrotating
4.11 Triangular SUffened Seat Brackets~ 306 . Suppor_ ts Structural systems W1. th .
semi-Rigid
4.12 Stiffened Seat Bracket Whose Plane is Normal Connections. ----------------·
6.6
---------------975
to the· Beam Web Plane. ---------------~----- 309 Design of the. steel components
of Welded
4.13 Stiffened Seat-Angle Connection. ----------- 312 Semi-Rigid connections.
6.7 Design of Semi-Rigid
-------------------- 601
4.14 Beam-to-Beam Flexible Connections. --------- 314 Connections with
Rotating Supports.
Solved Examples. 323 ------------------------- 604
 6.8 Analysis of Plane Frames with Semi-Rigid Solved Examples. ---~---------------------------- .731
Connections using the Matrix Approach. ----- 607
CHAPTER 9 BASE CoNNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS : 789
9.1 Introduction.
Solved Examples~ 624 ---------------------------- 790
9.2 Main Types of Base Connections. ------------
IAPTER 7 BEAM. CoLUMN AND BEAM-COLUMN SPLICES : 641 790
9.3 Semi-Hinged Base Connections. -------------- 794
7.1. Vhy a Splice is Required?. ~--------------- 642. 9.4 Ideal-Hinged Base Connections. ------------- 813
7.2 Splice Location. -----------~------~-------- 642 9.5 Hinged-Base Connection of Columns with
7.3 Analysis and Strength Requirements. -------- 643
Hollow Circular Sections. ------------------ 820
7.4 Beam-Column Splices. -------------:---,------- 650 9.6 Fixed Base Connections. _.__ ,..,... _____ :,_.;....:_ _: ____ _
820·
7.5 Different Types of Beam Splices. ----------- 650 9. 7 General Remarks Regarding the Ho.lding-Down
7.6 The Different Types of Column- Splice Bolts·. -------------------------------.:.. ____ _ 844
Connections. ------------------------------- 654 9.8 Pocket Base Connections.
------------------- 849
Solved Examples.
9.9 Grillage Base Connection. -----'7------------ 850
9.10 Main Types ·of Support Connections. ---"':""---r-- 852

IAPTER 8 CRANE GIRDERS. AND BRACKET CONNECTIONS : 695 Solved Examples. -------------------------------- 857
8.1 Introduction. --------------------M--------- 696
References .
8.2 Crane Wheel Loads. ------------------------- 697 945
8.3 Different Types of Crane Girders. ---------- 700 ·
8.4 Analysis of Yelded and Bolted Minor Axis
Brackets. ---------------------------------- 700
8.5 Analysis of Yelded Major Axis Column
Brackets. ---------------------------------- 704
8.6 Analysis of Bolted Major Axis Column
Brackets. ---------------------------------- 709
8.7 Vertical Supports for Heavj Cranes. -------- 712
8.8 Detailing of Vertical Support Crane Girder
Connections. ------------------------------- 714
8.9 Beam Lateral Supports. --------------------- 714
8.10 Fatigue Stress Computations. ,=:-,...--:------::---- 716
 CHAPTER 1

RIVETED AND NON PRETENSIONED ( ORDINARY )

R ·1 ' BOL TEO CONNECTIONS

1.1 Introduction:
A. practical steel structure would be an assemblage of
individual structural elements joined together by connections.

By their nature, connections are jumble of local effects.

Loads can be applied through welds, pins, bolts, or rivets and
may be distributed unevenly to small portions of the joint. Most
connections are highly indeterminate with the distribution of
stress depending upon the. deformation of the fastepers. Local
restraints may prevent the deformation necessary for a desirable
stress distribution. For these reasons, a purely theoretical
approach to connection problem is always difficult and often
nearly impossible.

Currently, the major connecting devices in structures are

rivets, bolts, and welds. Pins and miscellaneous mechanical
connections used to a lesser degree. Rivets, bolts, and welds
are used extensively and freqqently. The economic advantage of
one over the other is so small as to be uncertain. At one time
riveting prevailed, but it has been superseeded in importance by
welding and high strength bolting.

This chapter ·deals ·with· connections using mechanical·

fasteners. It presents a discussion of the tYPes, properties,
and installations of rivets and bolts followed by an analysis of
each type of connections. Design procedures are based on the
provisions of the Egyptian Code of Practice for Steel Structures
(2001).
 3 4 CHAPTER I._.
. . CHAPTER!
of Rivets and Method of Installation!
1. 2 D~fferent Types · . Figs .1.1.c-d show a countersunk rivet as manufactured with
the oldest methods of join1ng
The use of rivets is one of driven countersunk head. This type of rivets is used only for
seldom used as a main fitting
metal elements. Rivets are, now, special cases of connections.
Fig. 1. 1. a shows the • general
in structural steel fabrications. Rivet holes are made either by punching a small thickness
~1·vet head and a shank.
layout of a rive t ••hich
w
consists of a • (material is damaged around the hole) or by drilling (perfect
·s usually of the same strength as the parent
The rivet material 1 hole). The diameter of the hole is made larger than that of the
structure. rivet; t.d<L 5 mms, wher.e t.d is the difference between shank's
essentially that of heating diameter before closing and hole diameter.
The method of installation is
t" ·t into a hole
light cherry-red color, inser 1Ug 1
the rivet to a at the 1. 3 Material properties , types and method of installation of
to the pref.o_rmed head while,
and then applying pressure
plain end of the rivet to form a the non-pretensioned bolts (ordinary bolts) :-
same time, squeezing the
·. 1 1 b During this process the 1.3.1 Material Properties :
rounded head as indicated in F 1g. · ·
nearly fills the hole into which i t For non-pretensioned bolts where the forces acting
rivet shank completely or
. the rivet shrinks, thereby transverse to the shank of the bolt are transmitted either by
has been inserted in. Upon coo 1 1ng, . .
· force varies from rivet shear or bearing as will be given in section 1. 6 , the nominal
"d.' g a clamping force action. Th1S
prov1 1n to count on in desigl values of the yield strength F and the ultimate tensile strength
.·
to ·rivet · d , therefore, is difficult
an . YB
FUB are given in table 1.1 :-
calculations.
Table 1.1
Countersunk head
Button head / a s manufactured

-~--~----tr~
as manufactured Bolt grade 4.6 4.8 5.6 6.8 8.8
5.8 10.9
Y}
_\]_______ __ ]JDiameter
Tl d
i.
2
FYB (t/cm ) 2.4 3.2 3.0 4.0 4.8 .6.4 9.0

[ Length j Length j 2
{c) 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
(a) FUB (t/cm )
Driven ·
Driven bead

The bolt grades are used in conjunction with structural

components in steel up to 52.
Bolts of grades lower than 4.6 or higher than 10.9 'shall not
Crlp Grip be utilized.
(d) Bolts of grades 4. 6 up to 6. 8 are made from low or mild
(b)
.Fig. . 1. 1 General Layout'
. of a Rivet and carbon steel and are the least expensive type of bolt for light
Method of Installation,
structures.
 5 6 CHAPTER II,
ICHAPTERl
(b) Unfinished Bolts 'Without Fit):
at-treated high strength steel and grade . .
Grade 8.8 is Of he These bolts must not be used to interact with rivets. and
b tis· also of alloy steel.
10.9·is also of heat-treated • u fitted bolts in the same copnection. Hole clearance ranges from
1 mm. to 3 mms .
1 .3.2 Different types:
·narv bolts ) can be of a hexagonal nut
Non-pretensioned. ( Ordl. " These bolts are also called common, machine or rough bolts
countersunk head (see Figs.
and head, square nut and head, or of a and may have either hexagonal or square heads and nuts.
1.2.a, b, c).
1.3. 3. Holes, clearances, washers and nuts requirements

-~
1. 3. 3. 1 Holes :
1 - Holes for bolts may be drilled or punched unless
·specified.
2 - 'Where drilled holes are required, they may be sub-punched
Head { bl
and reamed.
3 - Slotted hole's shall either be punched in one operation,
or else formed by punching or drilling. Two round holes are
0 completed by high quality flame cutting and dressing to ensure
90
that the bolt can freely travel.
Length
{C)
1.3.3.2 Clearances in holes for fasteners :
1 - Except for fitted bolts or where low clearance or
Fig. 1.2 Types of Ordinary Bolts: oversize holes specified, the nominal clearance in standard holes
shall be as follows :-
The two .main types are as follows
1mm for M12 and M14 bolts.

(a) Fitted Bolts or Turned Bolts: 2mm for M16 up to M24 bolts.
the finished hole as much 3mm for M27 and larger.
These are bolts whose shank fil 1s
than 0.3 mms.(Ad~0.3 2 - Holes with 2mm nominal clearance may also be specified
as possible. The hole clearance is less
ed · connections which for .M12 and M14 bolts provided that the desig~ meets the
roms). This type of.bolts was primarily us l.n
itting. in drilled holes, · sueh as riveted requireme~ts specified in sections 1.6.1.1 and 1.6.1.2.
required Close f
. bl to drive satisfactory 3 - Unless special clearance are specified the clearance of
construction where it was not possl. e . .
· ed · ordinary structural fitted bolts shall not exceed 0.3 mms.
rivets. They are now rarely if never us l.n .
.. lt better and cheaper.
connections, . since high stren~th bo s are.
They can be used to interact with rivet.
~CHAPTER! 7 8 CHAPTER! . . . .

1.3.3.3 Nuts constructional precautions Or up to the point where an impact wrench first starts

1- For-structures subject to vibration, precautions shall be to impact.

.·.taken to avoid any loosening of nuts.
2 - If non-pretensioned bolts are used in structures subject
to vibrations, the nuts should be.secured by locking devices or
• other mechanical means.
3 - . The nuts of pretensioned bolts may be assumed to be
sufficiently secured by the normal tightening procedure.
1.3.3.4 Vashers utilities·:
1 - Vashers are not required for non..:;pretensioned bolts
exc~pt as follows :-
- A taper washer shall be used where the surface is
inclined at more than 3°to a plane perpendicular to
the bolts axis.
- Vashers shall be used where this is necessary due to a
requirement to use longer bolt in order to keep the
bolt threads out of a shear plane or out of a fitted
hole.
2 - Hardened washers shall be used for pretensioned bolts
-A hardened washer_shall be used under the bolt head
as well as under the nut, whichever is to be rotated.
1.3.3.5 Tightening of bolts :
1 - Non-pretensioned bolts· shall be tightened sufficiently to
1.3.4. Installation:
As it has been mentioned before in Section 1.3.1 there
exists a clearance between the hole and the diameter of the
bolt. This clearance allows the installation of the bolt in the
hole of the connected plates. The bolt being installed, we turn
the nut till complete tightening. To achieve this, two keys are
used, one· to.turn the nut and the other to prevent rotation of
the head. The most common types of keys used are· shown in
Fig.· 1. 3.
Fig. 1.3 Types of Keys used for Installing
Non Pretensioned (Ordinary Bolts}.
1.4 Positioning of holes for bolts and rivets :-
1.4.1 Definitions and Notations:
- Gauge line: It is the line on which rivets or bolts axe
located.
I s I s Ie. I t.Sd < (e 1and e 2 ) ~ 12t or
150mms

]:'
ensure that sufficient contact is achieved between the connected (The lesser)
DlreclUon -----4---+ ..
parts.
2 - It is not necessary to tighten non-pretensioned bolts to
.. .of
loed
. _ __;__~+--+
3d < (S and g )
- ~14t or
200mms
transfer
(The lesser)
predetermined value. However. as an indication, the tightening
required should be :-
- That which can be achieved by one man using a normal
t =The smallest connected thickness.

prodger spanner. Fig. 1. 4. a Spacing in Tension or Comprel;lsion Members.

lckAPTERl 9
10 CHAPTER II,
If one uses one gauge line, as shown in Fig.1.4.a it must be
located at equal distances from the inside·· of the angle.
l.Sd < (e and e2) ~ 12t or
1 Spacing "S": Distance b~tween centers of rivets or bolts in
15011UDS
(The lesser) direction of load transfer (Pitch)

Compression· 3d < (S and g ) < 14t or - End distance "e ": Distance between the center of any rivet or
- 1
20011UDS bolt to the edge in the direction parallel to the axis of the
(The lesser)
steel structural element.
t = The smallest connected thickness. Spacing "g": Distance between two rows of rivets or bolts

Fig. 1.4.b Symetrically Staggered Spacing perpendicular to the axis of the direction of load transfer

in Compression ~embers. (gauge distance)

- e : Edge distance from the center of a fastener to the adjacent
2
l.Sd < (e and e2) ~ 12t or edge of any steel element measured at right angles to the
1
15011UDS
(The lesser) direction of load transfer.
- -outer
- --
row
- d- Oiameter of rivet or bolt.
14t > s1,o < 200mm
Inner
-----
.. !'OW
- tP' Diameter of hole = d + ~d
28t > sl . < 40011UD
,l. 1.4.2 Limitations
1.4.2.1 Basis :
1 - The positioning of the holes for bolts and rivets shall
Fig. 1.4.c Staggered Spacing in Tension Members.
be done such as to prevent corrosion and local buckling, and to

3d < p < 14t or 200mms facilitate the installation of the bolts and rivets.
L L (The lesser) 2 - The positioning of the holes shall be also in conformity
l.Sd < (e and e ) ~ 12t or 150mms with the limits of validity of the rules used to determine the
3 4
(The lesser)
design bearing strength of the bolts and the rivets as given in
Short l.Sd ~ e ~ (14t-1.4d) or (200-1.4d)
5 section 1.6.1.2
(The lesser)
Long d < e < (14t-2.5d) or (200-2.5d) 1.4.2.2 Minimum end distance
5
(The lesser)
1 - The end distance e
from the center of a fastener to the
1
d (mm) 12 16 20 22 24 > 27 adjacent end of any steel element, measured in the direction of
load transfer (see figure 1.4.a) should not be less than l.Sd,
Short L (mm) 12+5 16+7 20+7 22+7 24+8 d + 10
where d is the nominal bolt diameter.
Long L (mm) 30 40 so 55 60 2.5 d 2 - The end distance e
should be increased if necessary to
1
Fig. 1. 4. d Slot ted Holes. provide adequate bearing resistance (see section 1.6.1.2)
 12 CHAPTERlL
lcHAPTERl 11 be less than 1.Sd (see figure 1.4.d) •
1. 4.2.3 Minimum distance : 2 - The minimum distance (e ) from the center of the end
4
radius of a slotted hole to the adjacent end or edge of any steel
element should not be less than 1.5d (see figure 1.4.d)

1.4.3 Considerations Conc•en~1 the thickness of the Connected

1.4.2.4 Maximum end and edge d'istance Plates:
The maximum end or edge distance should not exceed the lesser (a) Considering "t" as the minimum thickness of the connected
of 12 times the thickness (t) of the smallest connected part or plates, the following conditions must be satisfied:
150mms.
d>t+2nuns if t ~ 20 mms.} ( to avoid .the bearing
1.4.2.5 ~M=in~imum~~~~~ d > 22 mms if t ~ 20 mms. failure of bolts).
1 - The spacing (S) between centers of fasteners in the n
direction of load transfer (see figure 1.4.a) should not be less (b) The total thickness of the connected plates E t.:E t. < 4 d
1 i=1 1
than 3d • (to avoid bending failure of bolts).
2 - The spacing (g) between rows of fasteners, measured Vhere n is the total number of the connected plates and ti is
perpendicular to the direction of load transfer (see figure 1.4.a) the thickness of the i th plate.
should not normally be less than 3d •
1.4.4 Diameters and Nominal Cross Sectional Areas of Non-
1.4.2.6 Maximum spacing in compression members Pretensioned (Ordinary Bolts) :-
The spacing (S) of the fasteners in each row and the Table 1.2 gives the stress cross sectional area A and the
s
spacing (g) between rows of fasteners should not exceed the lesser shank's area of non-pretensioned (ordinary bolts) for different
of 14t or 200mm. Adjacent rows of fasteners may be symmetrically standard values of the bolt's diameter.
staggered (figure 1.4.b) .
Table 1.2. Section Properties of Ordinary Bolts
1.4.2.7 Maximum spacing in tension members:
In tensoin members the center to center spacing s 1 ,1. of fasteners Diameter
12 16 20 22 24 27 30 33 36
"d" in mms
in inner rows may be twice that given in Section 1.4.2.6 for
compression members , provided that the spacing s1 • 0 in the outer Area of shank 1.13 2.01 3.14 3.8 4.52 5.73 7.06 e.s6 10.18
2
row along each edge does not exceed that given in Section 1.4.2.6 A =Rd (cm2)
(see figure 1.4.c) .
Stress cross
1.4.2.8 Slotted holes
sectional area 0.84 1.54 2.45 3.03 3.53 4.59 5.61 6.94 8.17
1 - '!Jle minimum distance (e ) from the axis of the slotted
3 (cm2)
A
hole to the adjacent end or edge of any steel element should not s
.~CHAPTER! 13
14
1.5 Different Types of Connections: CHAPTER I . ,
There are many types of connections to join the different
Type Configuration Shearing Force .-Q"
structural steel members. In this chapter, they will be
classified according to the manner of stressing the fasteners.

(a) Concentric Shear Connections:

Figs. 1.5.1 and 1.5.2 shows some typical connections of the
concentric shear type. The common types are as given below:
Truss member connection.

Splice of truss members.

Splice of girder's flange.

Splice of beam-column flange~

Continuity of beams.

In all such types, the fasteners are. subjected to a

concentric axial shearing force that will induce shear and
bearing stresses.

(b) Eccentric~Shear Connections:

Some typical configurations of

f~~~tt~jtti==!===='!~! ~
..--lftl~~...
this type as depicted in Q= Slrength of Member
Fig. 1.6, are:
s.:
Q) t- =!!!!·
Jl
1- Crane bracket connection.
s
Q)

2- Flexible beam-to~column connection.

::s
"'"'s..
:;l
3-· Flexible secondary-to-main

4~ Sp.lice of beam's web.·

beam connection.
-
t--
0
Ill

·[:
~2.
Q= Slrength of Member
5- Splice of beam-column's web. 0..

]
{f)
I . ·.
Cll
In all such types of connections, shear and bearing stresses . . .
. .
will result from the applied shearing· force and· torsional
.
.
moment. . .
Fig. 1.5.1 Concentric Shear Connections.
 ~CHAPTER I 15
16 CHAPTER 1 a,.
'ype Configuration · Shearing Force "Q"·
Type Configura lion She~t:ing Torsional
Force Moment

~cJ :·r:; ::~:: :·: ·-· ID·

., J:
+l•;r
u
liD
.::: ~
Cll
r:::
~

-...cu
1111
......
cu
.2
•"•:
F=M/db .!>(
0
cu .-l.l ' Q=P Mt=P.e
""...
. . . F 0
Cll
...
.:::
.:::
0 •t•: !
-r.r
-
5
.o
41
.2
· · · · I~._-;:_-;:±
•••• ····
====• ••=••t·-·-·· t=====
. Q=F IIlU

- I

r:::
I
e
I
I

-a
en ····I···· ......
o.2 .iR

t
0
C?
I E cu
Cll .:::
cu .:::
1Il8 -~ Q=R
M
.....--.... .! .::: ~ 'R Mt =R.e
I
E Ft Nt JF ~ E
G:l
Q) I )<
cu-
::I
IR ..
...
CQ db. ...:. M - M.lr
,- I rru
- 0
-li-e
0 +:+ N

Q)
110
c::
+:+
+I+
N _N.A 1
,- A ...,
>.
"tl tRl
-..A..-
Cll
+:+ 8E
••• ~
c;: ' F=Mr/db+Nr/2
... . +:+
0
cu cu
Cll
Clliil 0r:::
~,
~
0
-s:: +:+ Q=F .! c ~ • 'Rl I; Q=Rr Mt=R 1 .e
~1 •
Cll

--
0
~0
Cf
E
:1

rJ
II ~iii~
~
rr . . u
-
::e .:::
0 0 c::4a ·1 t=
-1 1-e
"<!'
u ~
Nf F t'J
1
M ., Q
·e
TIT Cll
cu H
t-}{-l1•${=~}===' -
III

I
ac==
+1+:++ Mt=M.+Q.e
IIi
E llJ
0
w( +,+I++ )M . Q=Q

·ti iii U.·}·

cu M = M.lw
G:l
Cll
0
·- .0
• +j+:++
... .... 1...... w I
- cu
...
CQ

0
j! !! F=M/db ~~
..,.I -l 1-e
....>. r· Q=F N I
·:; E . I'~

::::t
·=....c::
CII.C
cu cu
............
M
i -Q=Q
·(t - E.,
III~
............. -r~- Mt=M.+Q.e

: :: .J)·}
'··
0
u
It)
I
0
cu
.2
-
.:::
::I
Q~
............
======
............
j_: ~if.=
II
. 1"
JQ-N.Aw
:- A
M _M.Iw
.- I
l ~8
I
~ M
10
JN
Fig. 1.5.2 Concentric Shear Connecticms "Cont."·
Fig. 1.6 Eccentric Shear Connections.
.~CHAPTER 1 17 18 CHAPTERlL
'Pure Tension Connections:
~o illustrative examples are shown in Fig. 1.7. Type Configuration Shearing Moment+
Force Ext. Tension
Hanger connection.
·Truss-to-column connection.
1exl=F
Q=P
Such connections are subjected to a pure tensile force M=P.e+F(h+a}

ucing tensile stresses. in the connecting bolts .

(a) Hanger Connection. .{b) Truss to Column Connection. Q=Q

A4 r- -..,-
B B

,....,.,.
Pure Tension
f.!~r•
Q=N 1.cose Text=N 1.stne
-Q 1 .sine +Qrcose
.:::1" F
~~.;
f- . M=M

A.,..f
Text=F2 .sine
Text.= F -Fl
Q=F 2 .cose
Text.= F M =Fl.el-
F2.e2.sine

.
Sec. B-B Q=P M=P.e

F c
0
:;;
0
c"'
0
c
0
I
)~} Q=Q
~
I
Fig. 1.7 Pure Tension Connections. CD

Fig. 1.8 Moment Connections.

 fCHAPTERl 19
qb = bolt allowable shear stress.
20 CHAPTER I L
:Moment Connection:
:This type of connection is subjected to a moment inducing As~ the tensile. stress area.of bolt.
sile stresses in the fasteners. In addition, the connection m = number of planes subjected to shear.
be subjected to normal and shearing forces. If all straining
. '
2 - The allowable shear stress qb for bolt grades 4.6, 5.6
ions are present, they will produce shear and bearing
and 8.8 shall be taken as follows :-
esses in addition to the tensile stresses.
1.2
· Some typical moment connections are illustrated in Fig. 1.8.
:ch are as follows: 3For bolt grades 4.8, 5.8, 6.8 and 10.9 the allowable·
-
Bracket crane track-girder connection. shear stress qb is reduced to the following :-.
Beam- column rigid connection. qb = 0. 2 FUb : .....• • • • 1. 3
Corner end plate rigid connection.
Column-truss conriection 7 4 - For bolts where the threads are excluded from the shear.
Seat angle connection. plane, the gross crossectional area of bolt (A) is to be utilised.
Beam-to-column T connection.
5 - The values for design of shear strength given in
6. Non-Pretension Bolts Subjected to Concentric Shear: equations 1.2 and 1.3 are to be applied only where the bolts in
.6.1. Modes of Failure and Nominal Stresses: holes are of nominal clearances not exceeding those. for standard
There are several possible modes of failure that can holes as specified in 1.3.3.2 .
:cur in riveted and bolted connections. The most common modes of
ailure will be considered in the following:
6 :- M12 and ..M14 bolts may be used in 2mm clearance holes
provided that for bolts of strength grade 4.8,. 5.8, 6.8 and 10.9
. 6.1.1 Shear Failure: the design shear stress is to be reduced by 15Y. •
1 The shearing failure may be either in the shank. of the
1olt as indicated in Fig.1.9.a. or in the plate as in Fig.1.9.b.
7 - The shear failure of plate (Fig. 1.9.b )can be avoided by
rhe shearing failure through bolt shank may be avoided by providing sufficient edge distance as given in figure 1.4
?roviding·a sufficient number of bolts to reduce the nominal shear
stress to the value prescribed by E.C.P. (2001) as follow :- 1.6.1.2 Bearing Failure:

1 - The bearing failure of the bolt itself may be prevented

R . 1.1
. shear by providing a sufficient number of bolts to reduce the stresses
to the values prescribed by E.C.P. The behavior is shown in Fig.
Where R h = resistance of rivet or b.olt. in shear ..
s ear 1. 9. c.
I cHAPTER I 21
22 CHAPTERlL

= Fb.d. t.

I
(case of' 2 plates)
~

Rshear ~ ~~
1.4
12
~ = Fb.d. min of Et (case of several plates) : LRshear
~-i -
R shear 12
F-_...,..,._ __.
j,-...__ __.____,_ _

'here m=1 m=2

= resistance of rivet or bolt in bearing. (a) Shear Failure of Bolts

= allowable bearing stress.
= diameter of bolt.
Min of E t = smallest sum of plate thicknesses in the same
direction of bearing pressure.

2 - For distance (s) center to center of bolts not less than

3d • and for end distance in the line of force not less than 1.5d, (b) Shear Failure of Plate
~he allowable bearing stress Fb (t/cm2 ) is as follows •
. . . . .. . . . 1. s
;rhere
FU = the ultimate tensile stress of connected plates.
As the limitation of deformation is the relevant criteria the
a-values of equation 1.5 are given in table 1.3
Table 1.3

End distance in directi·on of force

( e1 ) (c) Bearing Failure of Bolts

< 3.0d
-< 2.5d -< 2.0d -< 1.Sd

a 1.2 1.0 0.80 0.6

3 - The.. bearing failure of· bolts (Fig. 1.9.c) is prevented

(dl Bearing Failure (e) Tensile Failure (f) Bending Failure
either by using sufficient number of bolts or by using thicker of Plate . of Plate ofBoHs

plates. The bearing failure of plates (Fig. 1.9.d) is .prevented by

providing sufficient end distance.
Fig. 1.9 Shear and Bearing Failure.
~CHAPTER! 23 24 CHAPTER 1
The exterior rivets carry more than twice their share of the
a,.
i.6.1.3 Tensile Failure:
The tension failure of plate (Fig.i.9.e.) can be avoided by total force, and the interior rivets carry very little •. The
roviding sufficient- breadth of plates as given in Section ·distribution of forces depends
,. on the stiffness of the connected
.4.1. plates, the initial friction, the alignment of fasteners and
holes, the degree of hole filling, and the deformations of the
.6.1.4 Bending Failure of Bolts:
different components. For long joints where the distance between
The bending failure of bolts (Fig. 1.9.f) can be avoided by
the centers of end fasteners is more than 15d the shear and
sing the limitations previously outlined in Section 1.4.3.
bearing stresses are reduced according to Section 1.12.3.

.6.2. Real Distribution of Forces: Refer to the following examples:

The analysis of riveted or bolted connections is a.
Example 1.1: Bolted connection of separate truss members.
:omplicated structUral problem. As long as the connection Example 1.2: Bolted connection of an unloaded lower chord-truss
·emains elastic and the load transmitted from one plate to connection of separate members.
mother by rivets (or bolts), the distribution of forces is not Exampl,e 1.3: Unloaded chord continuous connection.
tniform. Fig. 1.10, shows a six-row joint where the distribution Example 1.4: Bolted connection· of a loaded upper chord-truss
•f forces is not uniform. connection of continuous separate members.
Example 1.5: Separate loaded chord connection.

t----+-+--+--+--+ +-++--+].....· Example 1.6: Splice of a truss member.

Example 1.7: Connection of a continuous beam.
12mm Example 1.8: Flexible beam-to-beam connection.

F
1.6.3. Notes:
The allowable shear and bearing stresses previously given in
!}2-0c~ jt2.0c~ jt2.0c~ l,ta.Ocm jt2.0c~ 1
Eqs. 1.2, 1.3 and 1.5 are valid only for case of loading (I).
For case (II) values of qb and Fb are to be increased by 20% .

___..,.......
.360F
--....
.104F
--,.....
.036F
--.....-.
.036F
-----
.104F
~
.360F
1.7 ~ccentric Shear Connection:
"Shearing force Q=P, and Torsional moment M =P.e"
--~~~--~--~~~~~~==~====~=t----

Th.e basicassumptions considered in the analysis of eccentric

connection, shown in Fig. 1.11.a, are as follows:
(1) The center of gravity C.G. of the group of bolts is assumed
to coincide with the center of rotation of the connection
Fig. 1.10 Typical Force-Distribution in a Riveted
C.R. This assumption is only true if we consider that the
(Bolted) connection.
 CHAPTER I 25 26 CHAPTERlL
two bracket plates are rigid enough.
(2} The concentric shearing· .force Q=P will be asswned to be
equally distributed on the whole nwnber o.f bolts "n" and
act in the same direction as the shearing .force:
(a}
C.G.

(3) The resulting .force on bolts due to the moment Mt = P.e is C.R.
asswned to be proportional to the distance r. and acts
1
perpendicularly to it "F.~ r."; r. being the distance .from
1 1 1
the center o.f the ith bolt to the C. G. o.f the group . o.f
bolts.
e
I This assumption will lead to the .following relation:
I T.
I = F /r
n n
= Constant. .l
'
1

\Multiplying by ri / ri , we get:
.II
I

2 2
= F 1•• r 1./r.1 = = F .r /r = constant
n n n
(a) Bracket Plates. (b) Force Acting Upon the i ·lh Boll
Due to Torsional Moment.
Fl rl + F2 r2 + ..... + F.1 r.1 + ••• + Fnnr F
n
i.e.
2 2 2 2
=
r = Constant
rl + r2 + •••. + r. + ... + r n
1 n - - - - - F0 sine
I
I
n n : Fn
2
Hence: E F.1 r.1 / E ri = F n/rn (b)
yF,;cose
i=l i=1
t Q/n Cose=x 0 /rn
(4) From equilibrium o.f moments, we have: Sine=yn/rn

= P.·e (c)
C_.G1 len .,
Substituting .from (C) into (b), we get:

Mt /
n
L
2
r.1 = Fn /rn
r
c
Force Acting Upon the i lh Boll
Due to Torsional Moment.
i=1 Fig. 1.11 Ecc:e11tric Shear· Connections.
!
28 CHAPTERIL
'CHAPTER t 27
Therefore: single bolt { Rt) shall be the allowable tensile bolt stress (Ftb)
times the bolt stress area ( A )
s
1.6
~A 1.8
= Ft.b s
It is quite clear that the farthest bolt from the C.G. is
with . . . . . . . . . 1. 9
the most stressed one as deduced from assumption (3).

1.9. Bolts Subjected to External Tension in Addition to Shear:

(6} The resultant force can be obtained by combining Equ. 1.6
If the bolted connection is subjected, in addition to the
with equation (a}' and it should be checked as
external tensile force
"T " to a shearing force "Q", the
indicated in Fig. 1.11.c. ext '
following circular interaction equation is to be satisfied :-

Rn
Rn

= The
=

summation of the induced forces on

r the most
1.7

stressed where
[
R
sh.a
R
t.a

r < 1 1.10

bolt or rivet due to shear and torsional moment R = the actual shearing force in the fastener due to
sh.a
respectively. the applied shearing force.
R = the actual tension force in the fastener due to
t.a
R <R .the applied external tension force.
n - least
Rsh and Rt are the allowable shear and tensile strength of
Where Rleast is the least resistance as prescribed by Equations the fastener as previously given in equations 1.1 and 1.8 •
1.1 and 1.4
1.10. Moment Connection:
Refer to the following Examples The tensile forces of the moment connection of Fig. 1.12.a
Example 1. 9: Column-truss connection with framing - angles. are transmitted by the bolts while .the compressive forces are
Example 1.11: Bracket connection. pressing the end plate toward the.column.

This isi.due to the installation of ordinary bolts which does

1.8. Bolts of Non-pretension type Subjected to External Tensile
not need to reach any specified torque, and so separation exists
Force:
between the connected plates. Hence the initial pretension is
Vhen bolts of the non-pretension type are externally loaded
small and can be neglected.
in tension by a tensile force Text , the tensile· strenath
•...,. of a
 ~ '

-CHAPTER I 29 30 CHAPTER!~
induced stress can be calculated as follows:
ft.,n

ft.b(M)

h
b y3
I - - 3- +mAs [ <scv> 2 + cs2-Yl 2 + • + <sc¥> 2 + • + (Sn-'1> ]
2

(b)
The most stressed bolt must be checked in accordance to clause
6.4.3. E.C.P. 2001, and previously given by Equ 1.9

b
(a) (b) (c)

Fig. 1.12 Pure Moment Connections. Notes:

- For the computation of the position of the neutral axis we
When applying a moment "M", the neutral axis will be at a can assume that Y is equal to h/6 or h/7.
listance Y from the· lower edge of the compressed end: plate The bolts lying inside the area in contact (b X rl have been
[Fig. 1.12.b.). The neutral axis. can easily be determined neglected in equations (a) and (b).
;onsidering that the ordinary bolts above the neutral axis will
De subjected to tensile stresses, while the portion of the end 1.11. Connections Subjected to Bending ~oment in addition to
plate below the neutral axis will be subjected to a compressive · Shearing Forces and .External Tensile Force:
stress. When the connection is subjected to shear (Q), a tension
(T t) and a bending moment (M), the design strength for the
By taking the first moment of area about the neutral axis we ex
most stressed bolt, ·must satisfy the following:
get:

b
2
y2 = mA
s
((S -Y) + (S -Y) + •• + (S.-Y) + •• + (S -Y.)]
1 2 1 n
(a)
Text M • (S -
n
Y)
R = + A ( a )
t.a n s
Where m = number of rows.
Q
A = Stress cross sectional·. area of bolts as given by = n
( b )
.s
. Table 1.2.
whe.re
Solvirtg·equation (a) y can be. computed. The most stressed R R
t.a ' sh.a
= th~ acttia~ tensile and shearing force in the
bolt (n) will be tbe farthest bolt (Fig. 1.12.c. ). and the fastener respectively.
 f
~
CHAPTER l
n = the
31
total number of bolts in the
32 CHAPTERlL

connection.
The circular interaction equation 1.10 is to be satisfied:

f-[ < 1

lfer to the following examples:

tample 1.9: Bolted column-truss connection using angles.
~le 1.10: Bolted column-truss connection using T-section. 1
cample 1.11: Bracket connection with braking force .

• 12 General Considerations Concerning the Use of Rivets and

Fig. 1.13 Failure by Tearing out of shaded area.
Non-Pretensioned bolts (Ordinary Bolts) :-
The following considerations are in·accordance to E.C.P. 2001 1.12.2 Long Grip
lauses (6.6), (6.7.1), (6.7.2), (6.7.3), (6~7.4) and :(6.7.5), 1 - Bolts of grade 4.6 and 4.8, which carry calculated
bich are as follows : stresses fulfilling section 1.6. with a grip exceeding 5 times the
bolt diameter (d) shall have their ritunber increased 17. for each
.. 12~ 1 Allowable Shear Rupture Strength :
1mm increase in the grip
At beam end connections, where the top flange is coped and
:or similar situations where failure might occur by shear along a 2 - This provision for other grades of bolts shall be
?lane through the fasteners or by a combination of shear along a applicable only with grip exceeding 8d.
plane through the fasteners plus·tension .along any perpendicular
plane such as the end of a beam ·web or as thin bolted gusset 1.12.3 Long Joints :
plates in double shear (see Fig. 1.13) the allowable shear stress 1 - Yhere the distance L. between the centers of · end
~

acting on the plate net shear area Ash is to be increased by fasteners in a joint, measured in the direction of the transfer of
157. , L e :- force (see Fig. 1.14) is more than 15d, the allowable shear and
q = 0.4 F 1.11
y bearing stresses qb and Fb of all the fasteners calculated as
specified it( Sections 1. 6. 1.1 and 1. 6.1. 2 shall be reduced by a
Yhile the allowable tensile strength. on the net tension area
reduc~ion factor BL given by the following :-
:At is to be ·increased by 25i! , L e . :-

. . . • • • • • 1. 12 . B = 1 - .•....• 1. 13
200 d
I cHAPTER!
Where 0.75 ~
33
BL < 1.0
34 CHAPTERlL

2 - This provision is not to be appplied, where there is a

uniform distribution of force. transfer over the length of the
joint such as the ~ransfer of the web of !-section to the column
flange. t.O .
0.8
!
------l-----------------------~-,;::____ I
Lt
'I
1.12.4 Single Lap Joints with One Bolt : 0.76: .
~~~~~~~$~~$~iij!iii t
1 - In single lap joints with only one bolt. {see Fig. 1.15)
the bolt shall be provided with washer under both the head and nut
0.8
I
:
lol111 Joints
)
L! Lt
I

I
0.4 • j
I•
to avoid pull-out failure.
0.2 ·: s auuu uutu:. )

2 - The bearing strength is determined in accordance with

section 1.6.1.2 shall be limited to :-
o.o I
L__.:.._ _ _ _ _ __..___
15d
_,.. Lt

Fig. 1.14 Long Joints.

~ < o.75 F • d. t ...... 1.14
0

3 - In case of high strength bolts of grades 8. 8 and 10.9

hardened washers should be used for single lap joints with only
one bolt.
Fig. 1.15 Single Lap Joint with one bolt.

1.12.5 Fasteners Through Packings :

1.12.6 Anc~or Bolts and Tie Rods :
1 - where bolts transmitting load in shear and bearing pass
1 -:- The allowable shear and tensile stresses through the
through packings of total thickness t greater than one - third of
threaded portion as prescribed in Sections 1. 6. 1. 1 and 1. 8 are
the bolt diameter d. the allowable shear stress calculated as
restricted to bolts of different grades.
specified in Section 1.6.1.1 shall .be reduced using a reduction
factor Bb as follows .
2 ·- :For other threaded parts with·eut threads as anchor bolts·
9d or threaded''tie rods fabricated from round steel bars, where the
Bb = ~.....::_:::____ ; ••.••.• 1. 15
8d + 3t threads are cut by the steelwork fabricator and not by a
p
specialist. bolt manufacturer, the allowable shear and tensile
stresses given by equations 1.2. 1.3 and L9 are to be decreased
Where by 15Y..
 CHAPTER l 35
36 CHAPTERIL
Table 1.4 "Non-Pretensioned (Or d 1nary
. ) Bolted Connections" 1. 13 Swnmary:

Straining Allowable Stresses Table 1.4 swnmarize the allowable stresses in accordance with
Type Configuration
Actions (E.C.P. 2001)
·the E. C. P. 2001 for majo~ types of Non-Pretensioned (ordinary
Qb~Rieul bolted) connections.
Q=F R leul Smaller of:-
R.ha=F/n
** **

e -1 p. . Q=P

v
Rl =Veclorlal Summation
Ml=P.e
Rb,q=P/n of Rb.ln and RIJ,Q

~,.r
Rb.ln= r2

Texl =F
Texl
Text..b =-n-

-!- ~<q
Q=F.cose
I A• - b

I'
. Ten =F.sine
Q b=F.c.ose/n T;~b ~. 0.33 FUb
I
- F Tm.."b =F.slne
I

e n· + Equ (1.10}

N--N
Q=Q
Qb=Q/n
M-Text..K
(Equ 1.11) + Equ (1.10}

Texl-+N Qb <
Q=Q --:;;;-- qb

Text.b =N/n T exl,b + Text..l( ~

+fu.oo .A.
(Equ 1.11) 0.33 Fub

Qb=Q/n
+ Equ (1.10}
 38
~CHAPTER I
CHAPTERtL
37
Example ( 1. 2):
~mple ( 1. 1): Design the shown bolted bottom
Determine the no. of bolts of the non-pretension type· Grade
chord connection Grade (5.8~ of Non-
6 required to connect a compression member (D.F. = - 22.5 ton
Pretensioned bolts considering the
se (I)) with a gusset plate of St. 37 with 1.0 em thick. The
two bottom members Separate.
mber is 2 < b.t.b. (90 x 90 x 9}.
s Gusset Plate thickness is 1.0 em.

~~~ng b~lts_of the non-pretensi~~~!~~-= (d =16mm- Grade 4.6)

Member D. F. Case X. Section
2 •••.•• Equ. 1.2 1 10.?0 t (II) 2< 4Sx45x5
= 0.25 x 4 = 1.0 t/cm s
2 2 -5.90 t (II) 2< 5Sx55x6
n (1.6) Shear planes are excluded s
Rd.sh.= 2 X 1.0 X 4 from threaded portion) 3 16.3 t (II) 2< 60x60x6
s
= 4.02 tons.
4 22.8 t (II) 2< s 70x70x7
.
.ssuming • e
1
= 2d ·, a = 0.80
. . 2 A. Using Bolts of the non-pretension type: (d = 16 mm)
Fb = 0.80 X 3.6 :::: 2.88t/cm
(Table 1.3) 2
= 0.2 x 5 = 1.0 t/cm Eqn. 1.3 )
:::: 2.88 X 1.60 X 1.0
Rb ear1ng
. !90x<J0x9l ~ Case loading (ll)
2
= 4.608 tons. ( Equ 1.4 ) Rd.sh = 2 X 1.0 X n (1.6) X 1.20 = 4.82 t.

2
No. of Non-Pt·et.ensioned bolts required: Fh = 0.80 x 3.6 = 2.88 t/cm ( e
1
= 2d )

22 • 50 -- 5 • 59 !!! 6 • 0 b 0 lts Rb :::: 2.88 X 1.60 X 1.0 X 1,20 :::: 5.53 ton.
4.02

B. Using High Strength Bolts: (10.9) (d 16 mm) Member D. F. X. Section n (req.) n(chosen)
p
s
= 3.16 x 2 = 6.32 tons.
1. 10.2 t 4Sx45x5 2.11 3.0
Td.sh
12 -5.90 t 55xSSX6 1.22 2.0
22.50
No. of H. S. B required: - --
6.32
= 3. 56 = 4. 0 bolts
16.3 t 60x60x6 3.38 4.0
3
'4 22.8 t 70x70x7 4.73 5.0
fcHAPTERl 39
It has to be noted that no need to use Grade (5. 8) as the
40 CHAPTER 1 a,
Example (1.3):
lure is governed by shear. If we use Grade· ( 4 .. 6) we get the
Design the same connection of Example (1.2) i f members ·(3)&
~ number of bolts.
.(4) were continuous. The svction to be used for the lower chord
is 2 < b.t.b. (70x70x7).(Case of loading (ll) for all members).
It is also to be noted that no need to increase the· end s
Bolts are of Grade ( 4. 6) - Gusset Pl. is of St. 37 and its
1tance e in ord~r to increase ~ as the failure is governed by
1 thickness is 10 mms.
~ shear failure.
Solution
Using High Strength Bolts: (10.9) (d = 12 mm) (~ = 0.4) Casell

P
s
=2 x 2.01 = 4.03 tons.

Member D. F. X.Section n(req.) n(chosen)

1 10.2 t 45x45x5 2.53 3.0 A. Using Bolts of the non-pretension type: (d = 12 mm)
2 -5.90 t 55x55x6 1.46 2.0
2
3 16.3 t 60x60x6 . 4.04
= 0.25 x 4 = 1.0 t/cm
5.0
2
4 22.8 t 70x70x7 5.65 6.0 R =2 X 1.0 X fl ( 1 · 2 ) x 1.20
d.sh

= 2~71 tons. ( The shear plane is outside the threaded

portion )
2
Fb = 0.80 X 3.6 = 2.88 t/cm = 2d )

= 2.88 X 1.20 X 1.0 X 1.20

~aring
= 4.14 tons ..

Member D. F. X. Section n
(req.) n(chosen)

1 10.2 t 45x4Sx5 3.76 4.0

·2 -5.90 t 5Sx55x6 2.17 3.0

·j
;,
41 42 CHAPTERlL
;cHAPTER l
Example {1.4}: (Loaded Connection}
22.8 - 16.3 = 2.39 = 3.0 bolts.
In the lower chord: n req. = 2.71 Design the given 'top chord
or ·connection where (1} & (2} are
n = n1 cos 30° + n 2 cos 60°
req.
a continuous member.
= 4,cos 30° + 3.0 cos 60°

= 4.96 = 5.0 bolts. Thickness of gusset plate

= 1.0 em .
Take which is greater

= 5.0 bolts. Triangle of Forces

n(chosen}
(to Get the Resultant}

B. Using High Strength Bolts: (10.9} (d = 12 mm} (~ = 0.4} Caseii To get the No. of bolts for members (3} & (4}, proceed as
Members (1} & (2} remains with the same no. of H.S.B as Example (2. 1}.
Ex. (1.2}.
For the Top Chord: Resultant force R = 5.0 tons. (from diagram}
P = 2 x 2.01 ·= 4.02 tons
s Case (I}

10.2 A. Using Bolts of the non-pretension type: (d = 12 mm} Grade (4.6}

n (Member 1} =
4.02
= 2.53 (use 3 H.S.B.}
R
d.sh
= 2.26 tons. R
-bearing = 3.45 tons (from Ex. 1. 5}
5.9
n (Member 2} =
4.02
= 1.46 (use 2 H.S.B.}

22.8 - 16.3
no. of bolts required = 5.0
2.26 =
2.20 = 3.0 bolts.
= 1.61 = 2.0 H.S.B.
req. =
In the lower chord: n 4.02
N.B. Ye must check: n _ = n cos 75° ± n cos 60°
1 2 3 4
or
And then take the greater no. of bolts.

n = 3.0 cos 30° + 2 cos 60° = 3.59 B. Using High Strength Bolts:(~= 0.4}
req.
H.S.B. (10.9) - d = 12 mms - P = 2 x 1.69 = 3.38 tons.
= 4.0 H.S.B. s

5.0
no. of IJ.~s.B. =
3.38 = 1.14 = 2.0 H.S.B.
 ~CHAPTER I 43 44 CHAPTERlL
txample (1.5): (Loaded Connection)
Distance L. between the distance of end fasteners is
1
For the connection shown in the figure below find the no. of
bolls in members (1) & (2) which are separate. (Case of loading I)
.L. = 7 s = 7 X 3 d 21 d > 15 d
1

'
U~e·eqn 1.13 to get the reduction factor BL:

L.1 - 15d
21d - 15d
B = 1 - --=2o=-o:;;;--d.--- =1 200d = 0.970
qb = 0.25 X 4 X 0.970 0.970 t/cm2

2
(1.2)
R h= 2 x 0.970 x
8
li X
4
= 2.19 tons

16 1
.A. Using Bolts of the non-pretension type: (d = 12 mm) (Grade 4.6) n1 -- • .= 7.30 = 8 · 0 bolts ·
2.19

B. Using High Strength Bolls: (~ = 0.4)

(10.9) (d = 12 mm) P
s
= 3.38 tons.

12 72
n
1 = ·
3.38 = 3.76 = 4.0 H.S.B.

16 10
n2 -- • ~ 4.76 =50
• H· S · B·
= 0.25 X 4 = 3.38

2
Rd.sh = 2 X 1•0 x rr (41 • 2 > = 2.26 tons

= 0.80 x 3.6 = 2.88 t/cm2 e = 2d )

1
I
~, = 2.a8 x 1.2 x 1 = 3.45 tons

=
•n 1 . 216.10
_26 = 7 . 10 = 8.0 bolts.

- 12.72-
n 2 - 2:26"- 5.60 =6.0 bolts.
i
;;
~CHAPTER 1 45 46 CHAPTER 1 . . . .
xample (1.6): Splice of Truss Members Rb = 4.32 x 2.0 x 0.80 = 6.91 tons.
It is required to design a splice for a lower tens.ion member· (d=20)'
Field Splice
f a roof truss. The cross section is composed of 2 <s back to ./. .

ack 75x75x8. Use Non-Pretensioned bolts of Grade 5.6 - d = 20 mms. n1 = ~:~ 1 x 1.15 = 0.93 take 1 bolt
he design force of the member is ~4
tons (case 1). Thickness of
2 For one bolt connection reduce Fb according to Eqn 1.14
~sset plate = 8 mms o£ St 37 ( FU = 3.6 t/cm ). Then redesign
;he connection using H. S. B.
~ = 0.75 x 3.6 x 2.0 x 0.8 = 4.32 tons ; n
1
= 5.6/4.32 = 2 bolts

Solution 2. Dimensions of Splice Plate (2):

·c b .
2.2 1 t 2 = 21.67 = 15.47 em
2
2 - 2 X
1 •40
Alternative (1) [Two Splice Plates]

l. Dimensions of Splice Plate (1):

Choose b = 18 ems.
Splice plate (1) [7.2x8 mm] can transmit (7.2 - 2.2) x 0.80
2

K 1.40 = 5.6 tons. t = (18 15 47

· = 1.13 em take t = 12 mms.
2 - 2 X 2.2) 2

Sp\ke p\ate<!> Non-pretension .bolts :- Grade 5.6

2
R = 0.25 x 5 x
nx (21
= 3.927 tons
I s.sh 4
I I
(d =20)
ili
I I I
y~-~/ '------..y
~ n2 n2
e
.~ = 1.2 x 3.6 x 2 x 0.80 = 6.,1 tons.

Max Strength =2 (11.5 - 2.2 x 0.8) .x 1.4 = 27.27 tons

(d = 20)
The remaining force to be transmitted = 27.27 - 5.6
(By splice plate (2)) = 21.67 tons. n
2
= 21.67
_
3 927
x 1.15 = 6.34 take n
2
= B bolts
(4 bolts on each row)
2
= 0.25 x 5 = 1.25 t/cm ( Grade 5.6 )
Using High Strength Bolts: (10.9 ) - ~ =0.4 - M20
2
R =2 X 1.25 X
nx (2)
= 7.85 tons
P
s
= 4 .• 93 tons
d.sh 4
(d. = 20) 5.6
n1 = 2x4.9J x 1.15 = 0.65 = 1 H.S.B. (10.9)-(d=20 mnis)
2
Fb = 1.20 x 3.6 = 4.32 t/cm ( take e = 3d )
1 n .= 21.67.
_ x 1.15 = 5.054 = 3 bolts on each .angle (H.S~B-10.9)
2 4 93
 48 CHAPTER I . . .
.CHAPTERl 47
Example (1.7): Continuity of Beams- Concentric Shear:
Alternative (2) fSplice Angles]
Design a bolted moment splice connection allowing £or
continuity M = 7.0 mt. ~R = 7;20 tons. The secondary beam is a
S.I.B. No. 30 while the main beam is a B.F.I.B. No. 50. Use
Itt tit+ tl 1 d = 16 ~- - Grade 5.6 - All steel elements are of St 37 ( FU =
3.6 t/em ).

Net area o£ splice angles ~ Net area o£ member angles.

Solution

Net area o£ member angles = 2 (11.5 - 2 x 2.2 x 0.80).

= 15.96 em •
2 ... ·• . .. . .
.
Net area o£ splice angles= 2 (14.3 ~ 2 x 2.2 x 1.1) '
..
•• . .. .
For the Determination of (n 1 ) and (n2 ):
= 18.92 em2 > 15.96 em2 (o.k).
l
R
n1 {

Plalll! are 7
•· -e 4e~
S·I·S·30
l
IR
.....
+
.¥
~
fl
tt• • ••
....
+-~...,....,.

+ lt~ ..
finished to bear B·F+ 50

Rs.sh = 3.927 tons.

(d = 20) Elevation Plan of the Cau~ection

~ = 6.91 tons
(d = 20)
n1 = n2 =
27.27 x
1.15
= 1.99 take {2 bolt,.s)
1. Top Plate:
4 x 3.927 bolts
Force in top piate = ~ = (~o~/~~) = 24.66 tons.
I£ Grade (4.6) is utilised .
2 For the top·plate use the same breadth as the S.I.B. No. 30
2
Rs.sh= 0.25 x 4 x « : ( ) = 3.14 tons b = 12.50 ems while the thickness equals 2 ems.

£t
=2 U.66
(12.5 - 2 x 1.80) = 1.38 t/cm
2
< 1.40 Safe
~ = 0.8 x 3.6 x 2 x 0.8 = 4.608 tons

27.27 X 1.15 49 Take { 3 bolts }

2. H.S.B. d = 16 DillS - Ps = 3.16 tons
. - 1L = 0.4
= 4·x 3.14 = 2•
.n -- 24.66
• = 7.8 use 8 H.S.B. (10.9) M.16.
3 3 16
 lcHAPTERl 49 50 CHAPTERl . . .
Example ( 1. 8): Beams to Main Beams
7.20 Design the flexible connection
= 1.13 take 2 H.S.B. ·(10.9)- M 16.
shown in Fig. using:
R2=6·8t~ R1:13 t
Using Bolts of the non-pretension type: (d = 16 mm) (Grade 5.6)
Ordinary bolts d = 20 roms. H 1-- 24s75•75•8
-2 S·I·B·~ ":z {~ .V
P P 1a t e
1 Rs.sh = 0 . 25 x 5 x
3.14 X 1.6
= 2.51 tons.
Grade (4.6)
2~s75•75 x8 / t!: ... :>-01 S.l-8·40

~ = 0.8 x 3.6 x 1.62 x 1.60 = 7.46 tons.(e

1
= 2d) ~ ~ -'

For group of bolts (3) cons ider e, ""' 1 e1

24.66 negle cted

n
3
= _
2 510
= 9.80 bolts take 10 bolts. 5 bolts in each row that the eccentricity is
B.F.J.so·
and compare the·results with the case

. I. B. No. 30 where eccentricity is taken into

consideration.
Rs.sh = 2.510 ton.
Use for the.framing angles two angles 75 x 75 x 8.
Rd.s =2 x 2.510 = 5.020 tons
Solut.ion
~ = 0.8 x 3.6 x 1.08 x 1.60 = 4.97 tons
1. Connection of Web Secondary to the Framing Angles:
= 1.44 em.
n1 = n 2 = !:~~ = 1.43 bolts take "2" bolts S. I. B. No. 40 t
w

(a) Using Ordinary Bolts:

N.B. The bottom flange of the S. I. B. No. 30 must be finished to 2
n x 2
bear in order to transmit the compression force by contact. Rd.sh =2 x 0.25 x 4.0 x = 6.27 tons.

·~.= 0.8 X 3.6 X 2 X 1.44 = 8.29 tons. (~

1 = 2d)
n1 =6 ~~7 = 2.07 = 3.0 bolts

S. I.B~ No. 30 tw = 1.08 em.

Rd.sh = 6~27 tons.

~ = 0.8 x 3.6 x 2 x 1.08 =6.22 tons.

 ~
j
51 52 CHAPTERl&r
l!cHAPTER 1
Connection of Connecting Angles with Main Beam " Eccentricity

n = 6 · 80 = 1.09 = 2.0 bolts. Considered"

2 6.22
ConnectiQP of Main Beam with

b) Using H.S.B~: P
s
= 2 x 3.16 = 6.32 tons. - M 16 mms. S. I. B. No.
7 5 0 8
= 4.15
...
e = · ; · + 0.8 ems
n
1
-- 13~0
_
6 32
-- 2.05 take n
1
= 2 n2 = 6.80 1 07
6.32 = • 5
Mt = 6.50 x 4.15 = 26.975 t.cm
-T-
' Connection of Framing Angles with Main
Neglected)
take n
2
= 2.0
Beam : ( Eccentricity
Q = 6.50 tons
[
12cms
••
. ..
6-st1kst
B. F. I N ~ 50 t = 1.6 ·a---') 26.975 X 12
w . (M ) = = 1.123 ton
2
t 2 X 12

= = 0.80 1-·- 2 -2
Rs.sh 3.135 tons. Rb X 3.6 X 2 X 1.60 Rtotal = ~2.16 + 1.123 = 2.43 tons< Rss (o.k)
R = 6.27 tons. = 9 . 21 tons.
d.sh
Connection of S.I.B. No. (30)
Having from previous paragraph n
1
= 3.0 bolts. ; n
2
= 2.0 bolts.
with the Main Beam

Then we'll use on the outstanding leg 6.0 bolts and 4.0
bolts respectively for the S.I.B. No. 40 and No. 30.(Front+Back)

Load per bolt from S.I.B. No. 30 =

6 80
4 = 1. 70 ton < R h
R(~)
Mt

Q
= 3.40
= 3.40
= 3 4
x 4.15 = 14.11 t.cm

tons

; = 1.70 tons
. .
3A t1t3At
s.s
= 1.175 ton
13.0
Load per bolt from S.I.B. No. 40 = ---
6- = 2.16 tons< R (o.k)
ss
l-2 -2
Load on common bolt= 1.70 + 2.16 =3.86 tons< Rd (o.k)
Rtotal = ~1.7 + 1.175 = 2.06 tons < Rss (o.k)
.s
N.B. For H.S.B:;:proceed as for O.B. and compare Rt with Ps.
{b) Using High Strength Bolts: M16 - P = 3.16 tons
s
R = 2.43 tons < P { 3.16 tons) O.K.
Load per H.S.B. S.I.B. No. 30 = 6.8 - 1. 7 tons.· total s

13
Load per H.S.B. S.I.B. No. 40 =6= also Rtotal ~ 2.06 tons < Ps { 3.16 tons) o~K.
2.16 tons.

Load on common H.S.B. = 1. 7 + 2.16 = 3.86 tons< 2 p

s
I cHAPTER I 53 54 CHAPTERIL
Example (1.9): Design of Column - Truss Corner Connection Member 2 < 65 X 65 X 7
s
Bolts of the non-pretensioned type Grade 4.6 and the
D.F. = + 7.055 tons (o.s)
connecting angle are of St 37.
. •. F
1
= 2.0 tons ; F ='5.05 tons
2

TakeS= 0.70 em
-==mL-=!2.13cms
r
IS.Ocms
Comectirv;~
angle
~ --i5·37Cm5
L1 =2 X
2
0.70 X
0 _72 + 2 X 0.70 = 1.98 + 1.40 = 5.0 + 1.40

= 6.40 ems.

L GrouDIZl-
{100x100x14 I

2L65x6S!C7
e1 = 18.7 + 2.13-19
=1..83 ems
L2 = 2 X
5.05
0.70 X 0.72
+ 2 X 0.70 = 5.0 + 1.40 = 6.4 ems.

ez = 13.0 + 2.13 -1~ 1. 2. Design of Group of Bolts (1): ( M20 }

=1.87 ems
Assume to use connecting angle (100 x 100 x 14)

Take {6) bolts 3

B·F·I·B·26 pitch = : = 6 ems.

End distance = 2d = 4 ems.

1. Using Ordinary Bolts (d

1.1. Design of Welds:
= 20 mm):
I Straining Actions:
Q = 7.055 cos 45° = 5.0 tons ~

N = 9.47 - 7.055 cos 45° = 4.48 tons ~

Member (1): 2 < 75 X 75 X 8
s 38
Mt= 9.47 (-z- 2.13) + 7.055 cos 450 .e where e = .A-~.83 ems
D.F. = - 9.47 tons (I) thickness of gusset plate = 1.0 em 1 1
from Fig.
F = 9.477. X502.13 = 2 · 68 t F = 9.47 X 5.37 _ 6 78 t M = 168.9: t.em.
1 ons ; 2 7. 50 - • ons
• Q. . 5·0 0 83 t
Take s1 = 0.80 em as the thickness of angle. • •. b(Q)~ = 6.0 = • on

•. . L1 = 2 X
2.68
0.80 X 0.72 +
2 x o.8o = 2.32 + 1..60 = 6.60 ems.

6.78
L2 = 2 X 0.80 X '0.72 + 2 X 0.8 = 5.88 + 1.6 = 7.48 ems.
 ~CHAPTER I
56 CHAPTERlL
55
4
em.

j
Q ·
total=
(4.02. + 0. 746)
2
+ (0.83)
2
= 4.~'?! tons
Straining Actions:

bolts of Grade (4.6). M20 .

Q = 7.055 sin 45° 5.0 tons. -!-

2
N = 9.47 - 7.055 cos 45° = 4.47 tons·~
R h = 2 X 0.25 X 4 X
n x_ 2
=.6.27 tons.
d.s . 4 0 M = 9.47 (5.83 - 2.13) + 7.055 cos 45° (19 - 5.83 - 1·.87)

Where e 2.87.cms

fm<M)·f~
~ . = 0.8 X 3.6 X 1.0 X 2.0 = 5.76 tons. 2
ear1.ng (end distance 2d)
M =81.4 ton.cm
Qtotal ,;, 4 • 'b'-9.< ~earing ·. · Safe

= _8_t._+~·-:x=(n:3:,4-·__,-,_,.-G-~o_._·) = O. 2 ~5"Vcm2 ~ fCQ)

fta(M) .5"$07. .f ..;
.3. Designof Group of Bolts (2·):
In order to guess the position of the N.A. we can assume
fta(N) = _4_._4_8_ = 0.152 t/cm 2~
hat it lies at h/1 from the upper edge.
12x 2.45

Then h/1 = 73 '8 = 5.4:2. ems which means that we have 5 rows of
•ol ts in tension while the 6 th row 1.s
. . "de
1.ns1. the compressi on f
ta
(total) = 0.23-.f- 0.152 = ·o.. 083t/cm2 •

:one.
R
s.sh
= 0.25 x 5.0 x 2.45 = 3.063 tons
.
The first moment of area
'
1bout (x-x) will give the
Rt =.0.33 x 3.6 x 2.45 = 2.910 tons
Following equatlon:
-2 . 2
= o. 083x = 0 .. 2
Zl.O y _ 2Dx2 x0.75
-2-- 4.o rr(f(}-y) A = 0.108 x 2.45
s

5
+(16-y)+(22..-y)+ R
sha
= -
12
= 0.416 tons < R
s.sh

Applying the interaction circular (equ. 1.10)

2 2 .
y = 6.o .. ems. 2. ' = 0 . 02 2..
[ . o.
0.416 ] + ] < 1 Safe
[ 3.063 ( 2. 910

r~ -2+~2+.
3 2
I = Uti:. 0 ) x21
+ 2nx24 xo.
.
75X .• Q "J 0;'()
· . 16.,2
.c+
X 3
-·--:2 -~2]
2 2-.• o +Zo .;a·
~CHAPTER I 57 58 CHAPTERIL
1.4. Design of Connecting Angle: QbQ = 0.83 ton~
Text (total) = fta (total) x Area of bolt (As = 2.45 cn?r
Qb = j (QbN + QbM)~ + (QbQ)2 = 4 .. ~3 tons.
= D~OSJx 2.45 = 0.2 tons = Rta = Tb
For steel (37) and ~ = 0.4 case of loading (1).
P
s
= 3.16 x 2 = 6.32 tons

(dou~e shear)
m = (10 - 1.4..
-J - 1.4 = 2.9 ems
2
Q < p . · . Safe
b s
K = 0. ~~ t.cms.
s 2.2. Design of Group of Bolts (2):
Straining Actions:
6 x o.5j B-H-D-
t
req. 6 X 1.40 Q = 5.0 tons ~

N = 4.48 tons r-

M = 9.47 (19-2.13) -
7.055 cos45 x 2.87
= 146.9 t.cm

If at (s-s) ve consider the full solid section use F = o. 72 F -3

2 2 b y IX 38 1~ 21 = 96026 cm4
= 1. 728 t/cm instead of 1.4 t/cm - t = 0. -~Baas.
146.9 X 19 2
Hence choose for the framing angles 100 x 100 x 10.
96026
= 0.029 t/ cm

2. Using High Strength Bolts: 1116

f2
= 146.9 x
96026
13 = 0 _02 t/cm2
Assume using 6 bolts (10.9)
G.029 + 0.02 21
Text.(M) = 2 x 7 x ~
2.1. Design of Group of Bolts (1): --7

Straining Actions:
= 1.8 ton

H = 4.48 tons +- .. 4.48 ~

Text.(N) = l 2 = 0.373 ton.
Q = S.Otons +
~(Q) = ~ = 0.83 ton~ (6 bolts_in
II = 173.85 ton.cm. . - compress1on)

• •• QbN = 0. 746 tl)n +- ~~~ = 4. 0'.}. tons +- From E.C.P. (Table 2.5 ), using H.S.B .
 lcHAPTERl 59
60 CHAPTER I . . .
LO. 9) ( M16 ). ----) (T = 9. 89 tons Ps = 3.16 tons)

?s = 3.16 tons > Qb(Q) Safe

~s no pure tension exists

1 8
a.8 x • 9.89 =0.22 < 1.0 Safe

.3. Design of Connecting Angle:

e =14 + 2.13 M 28.5/2
Text(total)
· = 1.8 - 0.373 = 1.88 ems
= 1 .. 427 ton. ew=3.88 ems

M= 2 X 1.427 X (2 X 5. 7 + 1. 0)
8
= 4.42 ton.cm. B.F.l 28

t
.< ·
: j67 X
X
4.42 = 1.64 em >
1.40
1. Design of H.S.B. Connecting End Plate to Column Flange:
Straining Actions:
req.
N =9.47 - 7.055 cos 45° = 4.48 tons ~
(t< 1.40 em) Unsafe Q ~ 7.055 sin 45° = 5.00 tons ~
actual
28 5
.. M = 9.47 ( 2 - 2.13) + 7.055 cos45 • e e = 1.88 em from Fig.
If plastification is allowed (Refer to chapter 4):
M = 124 ton. em.
.ence: t
<
= 166 X 3. 72
2.4
= 1.24 em·< 1.40 ems {o.k) ,. !1-5 ~- 2·5 1
X 3
I (28.5) x.20 4
req. X = ...:...__-=1-;:;-2--
124 X 14.25
= 38581.88
2
cm fc
J.
.. . l I •
38581.88,
= 0.046 t/cm
.1. ·r· t 28-Scms

+
124 X 7.1 . 2
f2 = 38581.88 · = 0 "023 t/cm ·

= 0.046 + 0.023
+LJQ:Lj+ J
l
T X 10
ext(M) 2
---? .1-
x 7.15 = 2.46 tons.
2·0L_
ernst
. 4 48 f--
Text(N) = S.O = 0.56-ton
 lcHAPTERl 61 62 CHAPTER! . . .

Where ew = 3.88 ems (from Fig.)

~(Q) =~ = 1;25 ton+ (4 ·bolts in compression)
M = 134 ton. em.
Assume to use 4 bolts (8.8) (d = 12 mm).
Assume size of weld S = 1.0 em
From E.C.P. (T = 5. 29 X 0. 70 = 3. 71 tons, Q = 1.69 x 0. 70
= 1.183 ton)
•.. p s = 1. 183 > ~(Q) Safe

T' 134 X 28.5 / 2 -----? ~ 2

ext(M) 3858.19 0.495 t/cm
As no pure tension exists :s 1.0
..,.,-;=--::::--
0.8 T
~
2 46 4.48
.,..---::=--'-·-'- =-=---= = 0. 58 < 1. 0 Safe f~ =·
2 = 0.078 t/cm2
0.80 X 5.29 WNl. X l.Ox 28.5
.
-----?
2. Design of End Plate: ft = 0.495 + 0.078 = 0.573 t/cm2
l.
Text(.total) = 2 .. 46 - 0 .. 56 = 1.9 ton.

M = 2 Text(total) x L / 8
q
[W/]
+
-- 2 X
4 48
"
1.0 X 28.5
= 0.078 t/cm2 l
. M= 2 X 1. 9 X 10.50
= -LI)-
2Text
(lotall
2Text
(totaiJ
f f eq. = J(0.573)
2
+ 3(0.078)
2
= 0.588 t/cm2 < 0.72 x 1.1

t;t: Section (2-2):

req.
Take t:t: = 2.0 ems =.0.078 t/cm
2

3. Design of Weld:
= 0.078 t/cm
2

:-~·- """"
Section (1-1): (no contact) /
.(!)

Q = 5.00 tons +·
'..®
-"' ~

t/cm2
N = 4.48 tons ~
. t+ = 0.495
·q(M )

( 2 ~· 5
N. B. H119:: Hn 2 2 = 0.578 t/cm2
M= 9.47 X 2.13) + q total
· = J(0.078) + (0.078 + 0.495)
2
< 0. 72 t/cm .
7.055 cos45 x e
w
~CHAPTER! 63
64 CHAPTER 1 a,.
Example (1.11):
. ·. We can reduce size of weld according to equivalent stresses
Design.the bracket ShOWn in Fig. to resist a vertical·load

S = 1.0 x 0.578. = 0.73 em= 8 mms.

V = 21.0 tons and H = 1.60 ton.
t
The braking force = 2.857 tons.
1.1x0.72 Design the bolts considering that the applied loads are static
loads. Bolts Grade 4.6 . The bracket plate is of St. 37

Solution
4. Check on Gusset Pl~te Thickness: {Critical Sec. A-A)
N = 4.48 tons ~ Preliminary Dimensioning:

Q = 4.48 tons J..

M = 9.47 (~ 82 5 - 2.13)
The dimensions of the bracket can be assumed as shown. Yhere
the thickness of the bracket is taken equal to the column flange.
+ 7.055 x cos45 x eg
The vertical applied force Qy = .21.0 tons is transmitted to
1-Qcms

Yhere e = e = 3.88 .ems (from Fig.)

1r the column flanges via the two lower triangular gusset plates.

M = 134 ton.cm.
g w
l
28·5cms
Yhile the horizontal .shock 1.6 tons is transmitted directly via
the horizontal upper plate.

=
J
For a case of loading (I} only the vertical Q 21.0 tons
y
is included in the design. Neglect the effect of lateral shock
(1.6 tons} its effect is transmitted directely to the column.
i'
f = 4.48 + 134 X (28.5 / 2) = 1.147 t/cm2
b 28.5 X 1.0 1.0 X (28.5
12 1.1. Straining Actions:
Q
y
= 21.0 tons.
For s.olid rectangub.r section
M = 21 x 44 = 924 t.em.
2 2 X
= 1. 728 t/cm > 1.147 t/cm (O.K.)
1.2. Properties of Area:

q
3 X 4.48 = 0.235 t/cm
2
< 0.35 x.2.4 ( A= 2 X 54.0 X 1~0 2
.= 108 cm .
2 X 1.0 X 28.50
(o.k) where the thickness of the triangular gusset plates = 1. 0 em.

-3
54 1.0
I = 2· x
X
-""7;;----- = 26244 em.4 ·
X
I cHAPTER! 65
3 X 21 2
66 CHAPTERlL

q(B) 2 x 108 = 0.29 t/cm < 0.35 x 2.4 (o.k)

r
2. Ordinary Bolts Connecting Bracket to Column:
Use· two rows of 4 bolts each.

I
180ans
Vertical pitch = 135 mms ; Horizontal pitch = 150 mms.
_l

2.1. Straining Actions:

Q = 21.0 tons.
y

Kt ·= 21. X (44 + 15) = 1239 t.cm.

..
~ · 30-0cmsI 2.2. Properties of Area:
..;;;-..::; == Assume diameter o£ bolts d = 20 mms
I
32.0cms
.j Threads are excluded £rom the shear plane
-~j-
L . -- -·::::.:
--- -- .~

{Al Case of Loading ffi without Bracking Force

r
2
= j(7.5) 2 -+{20.25) 2 = 21.594
.
ems;

--2 2
~= 2 X 4 X 3.14 X (10.09 + 21.594) =.14.27 X 103 4
em

2. 3. Stresses:
21
R +
Q
= 2 X 8
= 1.31 tons

1.3. Stresses:
-11! = '1.239
R.. ' X 7.5 =
4544. 8
2 45
·
to
ns

M
£(A)=~=
z
924
x
27 2
= 0 • 95 Vcm < 0.72 Fy . t/cm
2
(o.k)
X
26244
R~
-]It
=' 239 x
20 25
4544.8
• = 5.52 tons
(solid section)
~CHAPTERl 67
68 CHAPTERlL
1.2. Properties of Area of bracket plate
2
A =2 X 54.0 X 1.0 = 108 em .
2
lT d 3
R = 0.25 X 4 X 3.14 tons (Grade 4.6} 54 X 1.0 4
ss I
X
=2 X = 26244 em

3
1), = 1.2 x 3.6 x 1.0 x 2 = 8.64 tons (e
1
= 6.75 em > 3d) I =2 X [54 X t + 54 X LOx 16. s ]
2
= 29412 4
em .
y 12
> R Unsafe
ss 4
I
p
= 26244 + 29412 = 55656 em .
Hence:
2 1. 3. Stresses: (For case IT stress are increased
use bolts of Grade (10.9) M22 ( A = 3.8 em
Point (A):
I
Wh~re:
with 2 rows and 4 bolts in each.
924 X 27 125.7 X 17 2
fA = 26244
+
29412 = 1. 0 t/cm
Rss = 0.2 x 9 x 3.8 = 6.84 tons > Rtotal

= 182.8,x 31.90 = 0 _1 t/cm2

(B) Case of Loading (II) with Braking Force 55656

2
B. F. = Braking force = 71 x 2 x 10 = 2.857 tons f
equ.
= 1.03 t/cm < 1.1· x 1.4 x 1.2
(o.k)
The braking force is assumed to be resisted by one bracket. Point (B):

~Q = 32 xX 21
108
= 0.29 t/cm
2
1.

1.1. Straining Actions: 182.8 X 17 2

55656
= 0.056 ttem
= 21.0 tons.
2 '
q
total
= 0.29 + 0.057 = 0.34 t/cm < 1.2 x 0.35 x 2.4 (o.k)
M
X
= 21 x 44 = 924 t.cm.
2. Non-Pretensioned Bolts Connecting Bracket to Column Flange:
M
y
= 2.857 x 44 = 125.7 t.cm Straining Actions (10.9) ~ M22

5
Mt = 2.857 x (36 + 1 + ~ ) = 182.8 t.em M
X
= 2.857 X (36 + 1 + 54 )
2
= 182.84 t.cm.

M = 2.857 X (44 + 15) 168.56 t. em.

y '
-~CHAPTER! 69 70 CHAPTER 1 a,.
182.84 X 38.25 X 2.45
Mt = 21 x {44 + 15) = 1239 t.cm. = -c---4-;;-1.,-2=c36~.-c6:-.:8:-=7=---- = 0.513 tons

Q
y
= 21.0 tons. ; N = 2.857 tons 168.56 X 17.5 X 2.45
= 0.74 tons
12075
2.1. Properties of Area:
2.857
T
3 (N) = -ys-- = 0.357 tons

(The braking ~orce will compress one gusset and will move outward
the other .gusset - Hence use 8 bolts).

y
T (total) = 0.513 + 0.74 + 0.357 = 1.61 tons
! ·v l
.. • I
I
I
I
Rt-= 0.3:3 FUb. -~ = 0.33 x 10 x 3.-03 = 9~99 tons> 1.61 tons
O.K .

• .,. I
I
II

.. !
t:
• I
I
1
Q~ = 21/16 =1.313 tons 1239 X 7.5
= 2.04 tons
1
tl/ 4544.8

.
~-
~y.
"I
.
Q~·=· 1239 x 20.25 = 5 _52 tons
Mt 4544.8
Yz•S.~ sl
2-5
lS·O J
M (2-2) - As = 3.03 cm
2
A = 3.8 cm2
Rs.sh = 0.2 x 9 x 3.8 = 6.84 tons (Grade 10.9 ) (M22)

Assume y
-
1
= 6h = 654 = 9 ems Q(total) = j(1.313 2
+ 2.04) + (S.s2? =6.46 tons < 6.84 tons
O.K.

Appling the circular interaction equation we get .

where 2 2
6 ..46 1. 61 ]
2
A = 3.03cm (d= .22 liDS)
s
[ 6.84 X 1.2
]
+
[
9.99 X 1.2 = 0 · .63 < 1 Safe

I
. XX
=41269.86 cm4
. -
Assume_y
2
= 630 =.S.O_cms
 II
I CHAPTER 2
HIGH STRENG"\H BOLTEO CONNECTIONS

.2 2.1 Introduction:
As has been previously outlined, when Non-Pretensioned
bolts are used the nuts are tightened sufficiently to prevent
relative movement between the connected members. This will
induce an initial tension in the bolts. No attempt is made to
control this initial tension and so it was neglected.

For many years the same uncontrolled methods of tightening

were used with higher strength bolts in structural connections.
Such bolts were employed in lieu of rivets where driving was
difficult.

Aside from the high permissible bolt stresses, design

procedures were the same as for ordinary mild steel bolts. In
particular initial tension was neglected since it was
indefinite.

Within the last thirty years high strength bolts have become
the prime field fastener of structural steel. High strength
bolts are tightened to a desired initial tension and the
desirable features of the large clamping forces obtainable in
high strength bolts have been recognized.

The bolts used are either the type (8.8) or (10. 9).
Simplified methods of controlling tension under field conditions
are avai'!able.
r

It is assumed that, whenever high-strength bolted joints are

considered; they are to be pretensioned according to one of the
established methods.
. . CHAPTER2. 73 74 CHAPTER2L
2.2 Different Types of High Strength Bolts: Table 2.2 shows the mechanical characteristics of the two
At the present time the two basic types of high strength types of bolts (8. 8) and· (10. 9).
bolts as specified by the E.C.P. 2001 are the (8.8) and the
(10.9} types. Both types have hexagonal heads and have shorter Table 2.1. Dimensions of High Strength Bolts
thread lengths which makes it easier to exclude the threads from
the shearing plane.
Nominal
Fig. 2.1 and Table 2.1 show the different dimensions
diameter 18 20 22 24 27
characterizing the two types.
d mms.

a 31.2 34.6 36.9 41.6 47.3

h 12 13 14 15 17

1(1) 28 29 31 32 35
b
1(2) 33 34 36 37 40

c 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5

Fig. 2.1 General Layout of Bolt, Nut and Washer. s 27 30 32 36 41
For high strength bolts (10.9) a hardened washer under each k 15 16 18 19 22
bolt headand nut must be used in order to develop a good
dl 19 21 23 25 28
distribution of stresses throughout the plates as shown in
F.ig. 2 ..2. 34 36 40 44 50
d2

c 4 4 4 4 4

- f

g
1.5

1.7
1.5

1.7
1.5

2.2
2

2.2
2

2.2

Dimensions are in roms.

(1) For 1~80 roms.

Fig. 2.2. Stress Distribution in Plates (2) For 80 rom < 1 < 300 mm.
of a Bolted Connection
 lcHAPTER2 75 76 CHAPTER2L
lable 2.2

. 2
Type Fyb(t/cm } FUb (t/cm2) Fyb / FUb
Load /Curve No.1) Pure tensile tes

8.8 6.4 8.0 0.8

v
~
~ ~---~~t

-K
7
- ~

10.9 9.0 10.0 0.9

I v itCurve N. . 2.1 Torsio
~yic
a. Axial stress bv
g .11 torque only.

II 20•!.-1 o•1• .I

Connections made with high strength bolts may be of

riction type (material joined being clamped together by the
ension induced in the bolts by tightening) or of the bearing
th~ Proof
Load -
if
ype (material joined being prevented from moving by the bolt
hank). In bearing type bolt threads may included in or
xcluded from the shear plane as has been given in Chapter (1). Etong.1t1on

:.3. Tension-elongation Curve for High Strength Bolts: Fig. 2.3. Load-elongation Curve of High Strength Bolts
The load-elongation characteristics of a high strength
tolt are more significant than the stress-strain diagram of the Curve 2 of Fig. 2~3. is obtained by tightening a ~ut against
1arent metal because performance is controlled by the threads. the.compressive resistance of the connected material. As torque
llso the stress varies along the bolt as a result of the gradual is applied to the nut, the portion not resisted by friction
lntroduction of force from the nut and the change in section between the nut .and the gripped material is transmitted to the
from the threaded to the unthreaded. portion. bolt. Vhile the torque is active, it causes torsional shearing
stresses which combine with the tensile stress to result in a
Curve 1 of Fig. 2.3 is a typical load-elongation curve of a condition different from that in a pure tension test. If

(8.8) high strength bolt which has been placed in holding tightening is continued beyond the normal limit, it is possible,
device, mounted in a testing machine, and tested to failure in in this way,. to reach fracture of the bolt. Ultimate axial
simple tension. In practice, · pretension is not applied in strength of bolts (8.8) twisted to failure are approximately 10
simple tension. percent le~s than those of bolts pulled to failure. The total
elongation at rupture is reduced by a percentage ranging from 20
to 60.
lcHAPTER2 77 78 CHAPTER 21,.
In practice, bolts are often tightened into the inelastic the product of the pretension and the bolt diameter,
·ange. The question then arises as what will happen if we apply
:ensile force following a tightening torque. The prior plastic Ma = K.T.d. (2.1}
;orsional ·deformation appears to have a neg~igible effect on
tensile resistance. Tests have s~own that even when torque where d = nominal bolt diameter.
~eaches the ultimate strength in a torque-tension test before T= bolt pretension.
:ontinuing loading in simple tension, there is no significant K = dimensionless coefficient of proportionality
iecrease in ultimate tensile strength as shown in Fig. 2.4. Ma = the torque to be applied.

Although K may be expected to vary with the material and the

. surface condition of the plates, nuts, and washers, a fair
Load Simple tension

----
/ approximation of the required torque is obtained by taking K=0.2

,£-
v
_,< - when a hardened washer is used
turned,
Under whichever element
the nut or the bolt head. When this method is used,
is

IA ---- r-- ""- Simp e- tension

installation is checked by a hand torque wrench or controlled by

rI \ \
~fer nination of

Ton1ue -ter sion

torquing.
i
i
a pneumatic impact wrench set· to· stall or otherWise indicate the
attainment of the desired torque.

b,,
,r
Many structures were erected successfully using this
I[
:. procedure but improved methods were sought because:
Equation 2.1. is approximate.
When one tries to obtain the proof load through torque
control, there is a relatively small margin of safety against
Elongation
the ultimate strength·of the bolt as indicated in Fig. 2.3.
Fig.2.4
Current specifications permit two methods of tightening:
2. 4 Installation, Procedures:
(a) Calibratt;d wrcmch method:
Current installation procedures aim to pretension high
The E.C.P. (2001} " clause 6.5.3." permits the use of the
stren,gth bolts to their specified proof load (pretension load). (
calibrated wrench tightening method.. In this method, calibrated
One of the earlier working methods was based on the observation
wrenches are used in which either the amount of torque or ~le
that, while the bolt remains elastic, the torque (Ma) .required
of rotation of the nut is-indicated.
to produce a. given pretension is approximately proportional to
 ~CHAPTER2 79 1
I
80 CHAPTER2L
'iTorque wrenches which have a cut-out device to limit the One half turn of .the nut from the snug-tight position strains
ount of torque must be employed. Yrenches may- be of the i the bolt one half thread-pitch, but- the corresponding elongation
bual, pneumatic. or electric type. Equation (2.1) is used to fall within a narrow range as indicated by Fig. 2. 5. It is
mpute the required torque. important to notice that i~t generally takes 2. 5 turns from the
snug position until fracture of the bolt. This means that there
) The turn of nut method: is a margin of safety against fracture during tightening of
In the turn of nut method the pretension force in the bolt about 5 to 1. Even one full turn leaves a margin of about 2.5
developed by applying a specific rotation to the nut from an to 1.
1itially snug position which causes a specific amount of strain
It has to be noticed that when using the calibrated wrench
i the bolt. A nut is considered to be snug when impacting
method the criterion of failure is the strength~ Fig. 2.5. shows
1gins as it is being tightened by an impact wrench. This
the corresponding margin of safety against fracture. Thus there
lugness or initial tightness position_ will induce a clamping
is a greater margin of safety against fracture through
1rce and is corresponding to half a turn of the nut. This
inadvertent over tightening than when torque control is used.
tduced clamping force occurs sufficiently far along the flat
)rtion (Fig. 2.5) but exceeds the proof load.
Table 2. 3 shows the required nut rotation from snug tight
position for the different cases of high strength bolts.

1/2liurn 2 Turns Table 2.3. Required Nut Rotation for High Strength Bolts
_li.'XC6S~
I
load •
Margin of safety ;against fracturli.' by

--
Ultimatli.' bad : nut rot~tion ·
..
I

r;::r
I
I 'When both oui;.er faces of bolted parts 'When both outer faces of
1·0
-~ 1 turn J ~ are normal to the bolt axis, or when bolted parts are sloped
~ o.e .t:::;;;
. !,urn
2 . one face is normal to the axis, and not more than 1:20.
toad
Margin of
,J 0.6 I the other face is sloped not more ( Beveled washers not
safety
>.J.Iibr.ated agains t 0.4 than 1:20. (Beveled washer not used). used.
Wrli.'nch tractutli,' by
{ li.'XC!i.'ssiw
0-2
torquII,'
Bolt length up Bolt length exceed- For all bolt lengths.
0 0.2 0.6 0.8 1.0 to 8 diamete~s - ing 8 diameters or

Snug- light Position. Elongttion or 20 ems_. 20 ems.

( tn Turn) Ultimatli,' li,' tongation
1 2 3
2 turn 3 turn 4 turn
Fig. 2.5 Comparison of Tension Control Mehtods.
.,
i
~
82
'

81 CHAPTER2L
lcHAPTER2
=Yield stress of the bolt material (Table 2.2).
N.B. Nut rotation is the rotation relative to bolt regardless
of which element (nut or bolt) is turned. A
s
= Mean of outer and inner areas of the threaded
section ~ st~ess area as given in Table (2.5).
Bolt length is measured from the underside of the head to
the end of the shank.
2.6. Friction-Type and Bearing-Type High Strength Bolted
Connections:
In clause 6.5.3 the E.C.P. 2001 states following two
E. C.}). (2001) allows for two categories of high strength
different methods for the achievement of the turn of nut method
bolts, the friction type and the bearing type. Bolts in either
a) The parts to be joined are first brought into contact by types are installed by the same process so that the same
making the bolts sung tight by a few impacts of an impact wrench. pretension is provided. The difference between the two types
Following the initial step each nut is'tightened one half turn. lies entirely in the factor of safety provided against slip.

b) The bolt is first tightened using a wrench until the The friction type is so-called because it has a higher
several plies of the joint achieves a " sung fit " after which the factor of safety against slip and, therefore, it is most
nut is further turned by the amount suitable when stress reversal or cyclical loading may occur.
The higher factor of safety provides good fatigue resistance.
0: = 90° + t + d (2.2)
Where The bearing type allows slip condition to occur and then
o: = Rotation in degrees. brings the bolt shank into contact with the side of the hole.
t = Total thickness of connected parts in mms. The clearance· Ad varies from 1 mm to · 3 mm according to the
d = Bolt diameter in mms. corresponding bolt diameter as previously outlined in section
1.3.3.2.
2.5. The Bolt Pretension:
From the early 1950's the minimum required pretension was 2.7. Friction Type High Strength Bolted Connection:
taken equal to the proof load. But it has been observed that 2.7.1. Single High Strength Bolt Subjected to Concentric Shear:
~hen the turn of the nut is used, the proof load may not be Fig. 2.6. shows the forces induced in a typical high
1chieved due to the relaxation factor and other parameters. We strength bolted connection. The pretension acting on the head
need 70 percent of the maximum tensile strength in order to and nut of- the bolt produces a clamping forces T which brings
I
create the. pretension which can be computed as follows: the two· plates into ·contact. The clamping forces, in turn,
produce a resistance to shear P
which is a product of the
s
T = (0.7) • Fyb • As (2.3) f
clamping force T and the coefficient of friction ~ between the

where two steel surfaces as given by E.C.P. (clause 6.5.2.2).

T = pretension force. P
s
=~ T /
.
v· (2.4)
 CHAPTERl 83 84 CHAPTER 2 a.,
The E.C.P. 2001 in clause 6.5.2.2. sets the frictlon of
coefficient 1.1 which depends on the condition of preparation
according to the f.ollowing :-

ll = 0.5 for class "A" surfaces.

J! = 0.4 for ciass "B" surfaces.
ll = 0.3 for class "C" surfaces.
--Ps
~--~-rhr----~
The different classes depend on the following treatements
In class "A" :-
- Surfaces are blasted with shot or g~r:t with any loose rusts
Fig. 2.6. Forces in a Typical Bolted Connection. removed , no painting.
- Surfaces are blasted with shot or girt and spray metallized
where
p with Aluminium.
s The safe frictional load carried by one H.S. bolt
Surfaces are blasted with shot or girt and spray metallized
with one plane of shear.
with a Zinc based coating.
T = pretension in the bolt.

ll = friction coefficient. In class "B" .

- Surfaces are blasted with shot or girt and painted with an
'If = safety factor with regard to slip.
aikali - zinc sillicate painting to produce a coating thickness of
The coefficient of friction 1.1 depends on many factors such 50 80 flm.
as the condition of the plates, including the presence of oil,
paint, or mill scale. The slip coefficient is determined using In class "C"
the load at which the friction bond is definitely broken and the - Surfaces are cleaned by wire brushing or flame cleaning,
two surfaces slip with respect to each other by a relatively with loose rust removed.
large amount. It is recommended to prepare the contact surfaces
by an appropriate method such as: Tables 2.4 .illustrates the appropriate values of the safety
factor 1f which is in accordance to the E. C. P. (2001) clause
{a) Sand blasting.
6.5.2.3.
(b) Steel girt blasting.
(c) Flame Cleaning.
 ...,
.,
0
(')
(11
;i
N
-4
N
I( l"l
I<

~.... ~....
l"l l"l

J.... J.... J.... 8'

l"l
ai
....
~ (11
~
I(
~....
,
~
.,
(11
!-1
!>
C"l
Ill
{/)
~
til
~
....
(j

=
>
.... ~
0 (11 (11 (11 (11 (11
(11 (11 (11
> 0'
{/""') lgl = ... ... .... .... . (ll

~
..... .....
~Q. 1-'• .
.... .... . .... '-'
....
0
.... .... {/)
.... ..... (])

!ll
....

~(11 ~
(11 Qq
::r
-4 0'1
..
VI
.."" ..w
..
N ...... (11::r
..., &
(11

N
...,
0

....
~

.,....0 ...,0
..
.,....
tl'l C"l
0
::s
tl'l
~
....
e
i., ~ I., ~ .,g.
!""' !""' ~ §= c:: ~ 0 VI 0
~
~

.... 5 ........
{ll'TJ
(11 .... 1-'•
0
0' 0
....::s ..., Qq
~
{/)
(') ~.... g
1-'•
~
(11 (11 (11 0
~
0 (11
~ .,
0
1-'•
~{/) ~""'
..
1-'• (11 (') 0'
~ .... 1-'• ....
0 (11

.,....c:: . ....., .
0 {/) Q. til {/)
::r ...,0 ...... Q.
......
....!ll= 5
(11
""'
.... '-'
Q. (11
Q.
::s ~
1-'•
0
Q.
...,
(11

~ .... lS'
....
'< .... .... ""' ~
a 1-'• .... ...,
0
~ {/) c:: ~ .,....c:: G
...,0 I<
.M)
.,
0 g 0
N

()
0
9 0
::s
(11
Q. o:l
til
til
{/) til
til Ill
{/) {ll d.) ~.... 0
= a a ""
... .
1-'•
() 00 .... ........
= 1-'•
....
:X ....
1:
~ ~Ill ~
g. 5
0
(')
(')
0
(')
0 (')
.,
.... <11
..Ill Q. ~
1-'•
N
a!
tl'l
....
""'
QO
U1
.... .... 5 5 c:: ~ ~

~ ""'
0 0
()
.,
()
(11
(11
5 00
·~ .... VI

~
(') {/)
0' (')
.... .... (')
.... (') <11 (11
0 Ill
....
(11
,...r:l' a() .... ....
;l
~ ~
1-'•
0
=
1-'•
0
=
1-'•
0 0
::s
(')
r:l'
1-'• g. .,
(]) ::r ()"
()
(11
.... <
!ll
....
r:l'
..,0
()

..,0'
0'
c.... tl'l
-..
(')
,..._ ,..._
o·
= .,
()
Ill

...,
0
("11
"tt
c:
(11 ...,0
!ll
()
(')
c::
0'
0
::s
til
()
(')
0
,..._ (") Ill .., Ill

~ r:l'
(11
c....
(])
....
1-'• '2 ::s
r:l'
(11
Ill ::r
1-'·
'TJ 1: !ll ....
1-'• ::;1 (ll ...,
0
...,~
(11
.... Q. (')
.... e
0
~
r:l' =
1-'•
C::·
~
.,
!ll
Qq
::r N
0
!+Q.
::r 0 <:::: (])
r:l'
&. .,.... i~~
Ill '<
(') r:l' c::00 (11 0 .... til 0
....
Q.Sf...,
0
::s
::s()
0
....
0
c::
c::
:g
c:
til
....
(])

.... .~
0
r:l'
.... ....
0'1 (11
0'

.....
(')
Ill
:g ., ::r ""
.,~ s: I"• Qq Qq
0
....
1-'•
0 gj. Fi
(')
.,
(])
(11

.,1:
(11 (11
0' ~
(11 (') (])
., .ll)
.... Q..
= ~ (11
.... 0 (])

.,....::s .,~
!ll ., (")
1-'• g. (')
g. 0
.... c:(11 Q. {/) .,
{/)

!ll
1-'•
~
1-'•
(')
0
a Q. .,::r
0
Q.
0
a
r:l'
00 til
til
~
...,
0
---- '--
.. ~
Ill

Table 2.5
High Strength Bolts (Quality 10.9 )*

Resistance of One Bolt per One Friction Surface ( Ps ) t

Bolt Bort Stress Prest- Requ- '

Ordinary Steel Work Bridge & Cranes

Diam- Area Area ressing ired
eter. Torque St. 37 & 42-44 St. 50-55 St. 37 & 42-44 . St. 50-52
(d) (A) (As) (T) (Ma) _(u=0.4) (u=O. 5) (u=0.4) (u=O. 5)
mm cm2 em tons Kg.m Case of Loading Case of Loading I

I II I II I II I II
M12 1.13 .0.84 5.29 12 1.69 ' 2.01 2.11 2.52 1.32 1.56 1.65 1.95 QO
0\
M 16 2.01 1.57 9.89 31 3.16 3.37 3.95 4.71 2.47 2.92 3.09 3.66 1

M20 3.14 2.45 15.43 62 4.93" 5.9 6.17 7.36 3.85 4.56 4.82 5.71
M22 3.80 3.03 19.08 84 6.10 7.27" 7.63 9.1 4.77 5.65 5.96 7.06

M24 4.52 3.53 22.23 107 7.11 8.45 8.89 10.6 5.55 6.58 6.94 8.22
(j
M27 5.73 4.59 28.91 157 9.25 11.03 11.56 13.78 7.22 8.55 9.03 10.70
:c
M30 7.06 5.61 35.34 213 11.30 13.48 14.13 16.86 8.83 10.46 11.04 J-i3.07 • >
~
M36 10.18 8.17' 51.47 372 16.47 19.64 20.58 24.55 12.86 15.24 16.08 19.05 ~
;::::l
' -··-- -·-··- ~-
~
"

T = 0.7. Fvb. As M 11 =0.2d. T Ps =p.• T I v

*For H . S. B. of Quality 8.8, the above Values shall be reduced by 30% .

,; Jl CHAPTER 2.
~ 87
88 CHAPTER 2 a,.
over the range considered, the force in each will be
t.nical. configuration of this type and the anaiysis will be
proportional to the change in length, AL, i.e.,
s1oill:ar :to that given in Section .1.7 of the ordinary bolted
C!:lft'JtleCil::ions.
T = Kb-AL
The tinily difference will .be in the limiting upper value

Effect of shear
of Rt.
C = K .AL
p
} (a)

where T = pretension force in the bolt.

Effect of torsional moment ··- c = contraction force in the plates (Clamping force).
K ,K
-0. p
= spring constants of bolt and plates respectively.
2
F
·n = Mt . rn / L ri
{2.5)
Resultant Force .

\Where : (b) (c)

(a)
n = the total number ~f H.S.B.
.Fig.2.7.
The following must be satisfied •
Rt < P ; P follows Equation 2.4 or Table 2. 5.
- s s ·For simplicity we can approximate Kbas being equal to ~E/L
and K. as eqUal to A E/L, where ~and A are the effective
p p p
Befer to the. following examples:
acting areas of holt .and plates respectively. Relation (a} can
1.9. Column-truss connections with framing angles.
be writteQ in .the .following form:
1.10. Column-truss connections with a Tee-stub.

l
2.1. Bracket connection. T = (~ElL) AL
(b)
2.7.3. Single High Strength Bolt Subjected to Pure Tensile ·C = (~A .E/L) AL
.·. p
Force:
cConsider two plates connected together by a single high
It has to
..;b~ noted tha:t the force T is concentrated in the
bolt, uhiler-C is resisted by a larger effective area of the
strength bolt (Fig. 2 •.7.a. ). As the nut ·is tightened by a ' .
plate. For practical·· conditions where d is the diameter of
specified torque in order to obtain the pretension force. the
bolts we can consider an' effective plate area {2 .. 5 d X 2.5 d)
bolt will elongate and compress the plates as shown in
which gives.:
Fig. 2. 7. b. Assuming that the bolt and plates remain elastic
 lcHAPTER2 89 90 CHAPTER21,
2
II d Vhen separation between plates occurs Cf = 0 or from the
A/~ = (2.5 d X 2 . .S d)/ ( X 0.8) a! 10
4 previous.equation, AT= T./10. The external force and bolt-force
2 1
II d
here: x 0.8 ~ the stress bolt area. at this point are then equrl to 1.1 Ti.

From equilibri~ of forces for the position {b) we can write:

At higher loads the bolt force increases directly with the
applied load to the point of failure.
T. = C (c)
1 i

Next applying an external pure tensile force T t b {Fig. · The Egyptian code of practice _2001 (Clause 6. 5. 2. 4.) allows a
ex ,
.• 7.c.) both the bolt and the plates will expand. . I f the maximuin permissible external tension in the direction of the

~xpansion is not greater than the initia,J. contraction of the axis not exceeding 0.8 of the pretension of the bolt. This

·lates, some compression will remain and we can write the gives the following relation:

'ollowing:
T < 0.8 T (2.6)
ext,b
(d)

In addition to the applied force T . , _the bolts shall be

ext,b
Up to the point at which the plate regain its· ()riginal proportioned to resist the additional induced prying force (P) as
mstressed thickness, the expansion of the bolt and the plates snown in figure 2.8.
I

llUSt be the same~ calling this common· elongation AL , and

:onsidering that a part of the external force T t is taken· by
.- ex ,b
~he bolt {i.e. AT) and the other part by the plates (i.e. AC),
~bus:
Text,b + P S 0.8 T Text,b + P S 0.8 T

AT = {~E/L) AL
. P = Prying force+ t f +P =Prying force
'
AC = (Ap E/L) AL (e)

and AT/AC = ~/~

Using the previous value of ~/~= 10 in (e) ·we deduce that

.AT= 0.1 AC, or AC = 10 AT.

Since C. Fig. 2.8 Prying Force.

1
lcHAPTER2 91 92 CHAPTER2L
The prying force (P) depends on the relative stiffness and
will be at the mid-height of the connection as indicated.
:he geometrical configuration of the steel element composing the
:onnection. The prying force (P) should be determined according to The stress distributions depicted in Fig.2.9 are described in
;ection 2. 8 and hence the following check is to be satisfied :- the following:
(a) Initi.al compressive stress on contact area (Fci}.
T +P< 08T (2.7)
ext,b · · {b) stress on contact area due to applied moment (Ft.M = Fc.M).
{c) Final stress on contact area is the superposition of cases
~- 7. 4. High Strength Bolts . Subjected to External Tension
(a) and (b).
Combined with Shear:
Bolts in a connection may be subjected to external tensio[l
in! addition to shear. The external. applied tension· in the
ii~ection

.
of the bolt axis reduces the clamping action of the
I • iii v
bolt (pretension in bolt).
:~
@. . =ra ··~
I The safety of high strength bolts must be . checked against . . .. •• d

the following: (E.C.P. 2001 clause 6.5.2.5.). -- --j- K -

-· -- -·- --,--
...
(2~8)
@"
.
.. •• II
' !-~
d

Text,b + P < 0.8 T (as 2.6} :~

~
... :~ A
I
Refer to Example (2.2): Combined tension and shear. b
(a) (b) (c)
2.7.5. High Strength Bolts Su,bjected to. Tensile Stresses
Fig. 2. 9 Pure Moment Connections.
Resulting from Moment:
Method "A": .The initial compressive contact stress is assumed to be
llhen the fasteners used are high strengt~ bolts (10.9) or uniform over the area (bxd) and. is equal to:
(8.8}, an initial tension will result from the installation f .
C1
= L T.lb.d.
1
(a)
procedure. Assuming that the proof load in the bolts is not
Where 2:
exceeded, the plates or sections making up the.connection will ' T.+- =The pretension
' load times the number of bolts.

be in complete contact with the column. Considering the pure

The tensile stress ft.M at the top due to the applied moment
moment connection in Fig. 2.9, the position of the neutral axis
is given by :-
 CHAPTER2 93 94 CHAPTER2L
Method "B":

ft,M
= M.d/2
I
=6 M/bd2 (b)· It is to be well observed that the behavior of the end·plate
moment connection is a. function of the detailed steel
For simplicity, the compt;:"essive stress on contact areas components (i.e. thickness of end plate, diameter of bolts,
(fci) can· be neg 1ec t e d . Na t ural ly this is a conservative spacing between bolts, .. (etc). Thus it is no longer possible to
approach. The induced net tension toad on the bolt will be equal present definite methods of analysis.
to the product of the corresponding area of each fasteners time
In the following paragraphs another approximate method is
presented. This method is based on the following assumptions:
The most stressed bolt is the farthest bolt from the neutral (a) The clamping force between plates is acting only at the
axis which can be checked as follows: neighborhood of the washers and is of indeterminate
Calculate distribution. Hence its effect can be neglected on the
overall behavior of the connection.

(b) The compression force is.· transmitted via the lower ~am
ft M ft M (d/2-a)
, = .• " d / 2 ' flange to the end plate and then to the column flange Hence
the action line of this compressive force may be assumed to
f + f
T =( t,M 2 . t,M) a.b (2.9) lie at mid-thickness of the lower compression flange.
ext,b,M
(c) The resulting tension forces in the bolts are assumed to be
In addition to the resulting Text , b , M) of Equ. 2.9 the
. proportional to their corresponding lever arms (Yi) as sho~
bolts shall be proportioned to resist the addtional induced
in Fig. 2.10.
prying force (P). This prying force (P) should be determined
according to Section 2.8.
"
. .
The induced maximum tensile Force· ( Text,b,M) due to the --
.. applied moment (M) in addition to prying force (P) that may . . .. T

occur, must not exceed the condition given by the E.C.P. 2001 in
Clause 6.5.2.6 as follows :
. .
)u
'"
. . ..,
-- I . c c
Text,b,M + P < 0.8 T (2.10)
-
Equation 2.10 is in accordance with clause 6.5,2.6. of the
Fig. 2.10
E.C.P. 2001.
 96 CHAPTER2
lcHAPTER2 95
2.7.6. High Strength Bolts Subjected to Tensile Stresses
Fig. 2.10 illustrates the configuration of an end-plate
resulting from Moment in addition to Shear:
moment connection, which is in accordance with the previous
The E.C.P. (2001} clause (6.5.2.6) requires the
assumptions.
satisfaction of the following conditions:

From equilibrium of moments abC?ut point (o), we can compute

T + P < 0.8 T (as 2.10)
the :following: ext,b,H

·n
M= E Ti vi (a)
(as 2.11)
i=1

Vhere: In moment connections of the type shown in Fig 2.9 the loss
T
·n of clamping forces in region "A" is always coupled with a
=y- {b)
n cooresponding · increase in contact pressure in region "B". The
clamping force inducing the frectional resistance the shear is
The distance v1. y2' .•. , · Y are . known from ·the
.· n. . to be checked using Equ. 2.11 .
g~me~ry . of' the connection. equation (b) is combined witP,
(a) in terms of T ; we get the following relation:
n . 2.7.7. High Strength Bolts Subjected to Tensile Stress resulting
2 from Moment and.External Tension Force combined with Shear:
M=(T/Y )(Y2 +Y + •. -P.+ .. +y2·)
·n n 1 2 ~ · n Vhen the connection is subjected to a shearing force Q, an
external tension force Tex t' and a bending moment H, the induced
n
Le. M=(T/Y ).E ~ (c) forces in the most stressed bolt must :satisfy the following
n n i=1 ~
(E.C.P. 2001 clause 6.5.2.7) .
From relation {c) the value of Tn
= Text , b. , H. can be .
determined and then checked in accordance with the E.C.·P. clause
Qb < ~ ( T-Text,b ) / 0 (2.12)
6.5.2.6. i.e.

(as 2.10)
. Concerning the induced tensile. force, equations 2.7 and 2.10
will be combined according to the following equation:
N'.B. In chapter 6 the author proposes;a.~9r~ accurate analysis
. . ...
whiCh lies between methods CAl and· (B). The proposed
T +T +P < 0.8 T (2.13)
method is based on a parametric study which induces ext,b ext,b,M
the bolt pretension, the. clamping :forces, the- geometrical
configuration .•.• etc.
lcHAPTER2 97 98 CHAPTER2
: 2.7.8. Constructional Considerations: while the other available configurations are given in the
following sections.

In the following section the phenomenon of what we call

. .
PRYING FORCE is analyzed. Its effect on the behaviour of the end
.)

]
plate moment connections may be predominant.

PRYING FORCE EFFECT:

.
In order to clarify the PRYING FORCE phenomenon,consider a
Tee-stub which is assumed to be attached to a rigid support by
!A. high strength bolts as shown in Fig. 2.12.a. I f the bolts are
tightened by the corresponding pretension (T), a balancing
Fig. 2.11 Pitch "S'' and Edge distance "e " • "e2 "
1 compression (C.) equal to (T) is considered to be localized
1

The pitch "S" 'should preferably be taken 3d in the around the bolt (i.e. under the washer) as illustrated in Fig.
direction of the force as indicated in Fig ..2.1L On the other 2.12.b.
hand, the edge distance "e " should not be les~ than l.Sd, while
1
Rigid Support
the edge distance "e " not less than 1. Sd. Fig. 2.11. depicts
2 T T
the case of an end moment connection. The pitch "S" between the
tension and compression zones may have higher limits.

Refer to the following examples:

Example 1.9: Truss corner coruied:.ion using connecting angle.
Example 1.10: Truss corner connection using aT section.
Example 2.3: Corner rigid frame connection (constant·depth).
(a) Without (b) With (c) Stiff (d) Flexible
Example 2.4: Corner rigid frame connection (haunched).
Pretension Pretension Flange Flange
Example 2.5: Apex rigid .frame connection.
Example 2.6: Eave rigid connection (i,nclined end plates). Fig. 2.12

2.8. Bolted Beam-to-Column, Connections and the Prying Force Figs. 2.12.c and 2.12.d illustrate configurations of a
Effect: stiff flange_ and a flexible one respectively. If an external
The analyses of ordinary as well as high · strength bolted force Text is applfed to the Tee-stem, the flange will
connections carrying moments have been ·previously given in flex.Depending on the flange thickness, the two outer
Sections 1.10 and 2.7.5 respectively. In those sectio,ns, the end overhangings may press on the rigid support causirig a force P
plate moment connection was the only analyzed configuration, which we call PRYING FORCE. This will be the situation of the
 lcHAPTER2 99
100 CHAPTER2L
hexible £lange as shown in Fig. 2~_12.d. The prying_ action f'or
Fig. · 2.13, illustrates the mathematical model as well as
, stiff' £lange is of less importance compared to a flexible one.
the induced forces. where Fig. 2.13.a shows a Tee-stub attach~
IATIIEMATICAL MODEL: to a rigid support, with 4 bolts tightened to their pretension
In order to construct a mathematical model representing the (T). After tightening, a compressive force (Ci) is induced
prying .force as. well as. the applied force ( T t
(P) ) , the between the surfaces in contact with (T =C.).
ex 1
following assumptions are considered:
Fig. 2.13.b, illustrates the deformed shape of the Tee-stub
{a) The prying force is represented by a concentrated load where the external force Tex t is applied. Denoting by A the
{P) acting at the outer tips of' the £lange. deflection of' the £lange mid-thickness at the bolt centerline,
one can deduce that the £lange contraction will be subjected to
{b) The contact pressure between the' £lange and the rigid a relief'. An elongation A of' the bolt shaft will correspond
support will remain around the- bolts shaf't 'after the consequently to this stage of loading.
application of' the externaL force Te~t (i.e. stage of no
separation).
EQUILIBRIUM EQUATION:
Denote by P the created prying force per bolt at the tips
{c) The assumptions of' the beam theory will be considered of' Ule £lange at a distance "a" from the center of' the bolt
valid.
T . shaft and C the residual contact compression force {something
Text,b =~+P+C
less than T). From statics the induced total force in each bolt
a { Text,b) is :
T

T =T /4+P+C (a)
ext,b ext
{which will be consequently greater than {T).

=
number' of H.S.B. 4 Knowing the geometric dimensions a and b as well as the
2 H.S.B. in the front
+ 2 H.S.B. in the back pretension (T), three unknowns will .remain in: the model, namely
6 , Q and C.

(a) {b)
Deformation Equations:
In! tlal Shape Deformed Shape
The three unknowns A, P and C can be computed, if three
~

deformation equations are established as follows:

Fig. 2. 13. Simplif'ied _Mod_el
- The first corresponds to the bolt elongation.
 102 CHAPTER2L.
CHAPTER2 101
- The second corresponds to the flange expansion {relief of
contraction) in the region surrounding the bolt shaft.
The third corresponds to the deflection of the
mid-thickness line of the Tee-stub flange at the center of the p

bolt shaft. (a) Welded Flange with four

H.S.B. ( 2 bolts per
From bolt elongation we deduce:
row ).
Text/4 - T
I! = ~
(b)

p
From flange expansion we get: a
Tee-Stub with fqur
,:'I.
T - c H.S.B. 2 bolts·
I! = K
(c)
per row ).
p

where ~· Kp are the bolt and flange spring constants or

stiffnesses.

(c) Deflected Shape.

Using relation (a) in (c) we get:

(T t/4 + P) - (T - C)
(d) Corresponding Bending
I! = --~e_x~--~~----------- (d) P.a j P.a

~·~~ Moment per row of

Considering a
breadth 2W of the Tee-stub flange,
uniform distribution of forces along
thus the flange can be
the
"¢>'
P.a- Text.b
bolts.

assimilated to an elastic simple beam as shown in Fig. 2.14.

4

Fig .. 2.14.
Applying one of the known methods of theory of structures,
the deflection I! of the elastic beam can be computed as shown in
Fig., 2.14.c. PRYING FORCE EQUATION:

~ ( ~. ) + 1
Eliminating I! and (T - C) from equations (c), (d) and (e)
i.e. I! = _...,._a--.::.b:--2-
3
{ Text/4- : [ J.P.} (e)
and solving for P we get:
E(wt /12)
 104 CHAPTERZL
CHAPTER2 103

4
1 w.tp
2 30 a.b .A
2
p = (2.14) s (2.16)
•T
ex t/4 p
a a
- ( - + 1) +
b 3.b

If the second term in the numerator is greater than 1/2 the

Assuming (Ap) the area in contact between plates result of the calculation is negative, this means that the

surrounding the bolt shaft 1.5 times tke bolt shaft stress. area prying force does not affect the bolt force. On the other hand,

A (i.e. A= 1.5 A ) and replacing in Equ. 2.14 the_ values of K_ at higher loads, bolts will have elongated sufficiently to
s p s -o
and K by the following: permit separation of plates at bolt line. This will cause
p
complete relief of the local compression force C. In order to
deduce the corresponding equation for a separation stage one can
Kp = we obtain: replace C = 0 in Equations (c) and (d), thus Equ. 2.16
becomes

4
1 w.tp
2 2
30 a.b .A 4
s 1 w.tp ( 1 - T
T
p = . Tex t/4 (2.15) 2 2 /4)
4 12 a.b .A ext
a(a ) w.tp s
b 3b + 1 + 2 p = 4
. Text/4 {2.17)
30 a.b .A 3a a + 1) + w.tp
s ( ) (
4b 3b 2
12 a.b .A
s
Test results have shown some difference when compared to
those computed by Equ. 2.15 where the compressive stiffness of the flange K has no longer
p
any influence on the prying force.
In order to obtain correlation, an empirical modification
is suggested by putting the value (3/4 a) instead of (a) in the Refer to Example 2.5 and 2.6-
first term of the denominator. This modification is based on
the fact that the prying force is rather distributed on an area 2.9 Tee-Stub Bolted Connections:

rather than concentrated at the flange tip. This means that the The Tee-stub connection is a common configuration to

force (P) will be somewhat displaced towards the vertical center transmit. the beam moment to the supporting column. Its behaviour

line. Applying this modification. Equ. 2.15 becomes: and analysis is a straight forward application to the prying
 106 CHAPTER2
~CHAPTER2. 105
force phenomenon of Section 2.8. be
r "I
II
Generally shop bolts are vsed to connect the Tee-stub stem u

to the beam flange and field bolts ·to attach the Tee-stub flange
to the supporting column (see Fig. 2.15.a). The Tee-stub stem
• • II
a

may be shop-welded to the beam flange and the Tee-stub flange

field bolted t& the column flange. For this last configuration,
refer to Fig. 2.1S.a where the Tee-stub stem will behave as a
connecting plate.

The following analysis is based o~the equations of Section

2.8.1 for high strength bolts. The u~e of ordinary .bolts or
rivets applying the behaviour· outlined in Section 2.8.1. is
(a)
uncertain due to the absence of representative test data.

(a) Group of·Bolts (1):

The beam moment M is transmitted to the upper and lower
Tee-stub stems by two equal and opposite. forces (Tb = Cb = Mldb)
via the group of bolts (1) carrying each a shearing force (~ = Ml-
Mz
Tb/n >, where n is the total numb.er of bolts of group <1 l.

-
tw.st
1 1
One must check that the induced single shear (~) does not
Tb
T
'> Tb
T
Mz
exceed the frictional resistance (P ). Ml Tb+p
s 4

~ Structural Model
(b) Tee-Stub Stem: Half Tee Stub
Model for half Tee-Stub
Generally the Tee-stub section is obtained by cutting
(b)
the required length from a B.F.I section. Consequently the Tee
stem and the Tee flange thicknesses are respectively those of Fig. 2.15
the web and the flange of the HEA.OR HEB The Tee stem will be
subjected to tensile stresses, calculations are based on the T (f)
gross area if high strength bolts are utilized.
'b
st" t w. st
 CHAPTER2 107 108 CHAPTER2 . . .
Where bst = the breadth of the Tee stem at a s.ection {s-s)
6(greater of M , M l
passing through the nearest bolt row to the column. 1 2
ft = 2.18
w. t
p
\ •. st·= the Tee stem thickness.
With Ml = P.a
{c) Group of Bolts (2):
The force· Tb is then transmit ted to the group of bolts
M2 = P.a - Text,b . b } 2.19

{2) via the Tee-stub flange. In addition to the induced where Text.b = Tb/4
external tensile force (Tb/n2 ). a prying force P calculated as
in Section 2.8 is to be added. (see Fig. 2.1S.b).
(e} The Beam Compression Flange:
The compression beam flange will induce bearing
Force on bolts of group (2) = Tb + P {g)
stresses on the column flange which will tend to decrease the
n2
initial pretension. Thus no new design problems are revealed.
Where n2 = the total number of bolts of group (2).
It will be of good practice to consider the same dimensioning

It is to be noticed that the effect of the prying force for the compression region as for the tension one.

(P} can increase considerably the external tensile force induced

{f) Crippling of Column Web: (Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3.9}
in bolts(2). Since the main goal for this type of connections is
The concentration of stresses on the column flange are
to prevent any separation between the Tee-stub flange and the
to be checked against the phenomena of the web-column crippling
sqpporting column flange. the E.C.P. 2001 checks the separation
according to the relation of Section 3.9.5. Thus referring to
according to the following:
Fig. (2. lS ..c, d) one can deduce:

< 0.8 T {h)

t ::: (i)
I
~ere T = the pretension on bolt.
w.c t
w.st
+ 2.t + SK
p

Where
(d) The Tee-Stub flange:
The bending moments (M ) in the Tee-stub flange at the (g) aending of Column Flange: (Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3.9)
1
bolt line and (M2) at the outer edge of the fillet are to be. At the beam flange tension side. the column flange may
calculated. The prying force (P) is assumed to act at a bent if its thickness is not sufficient. Due to the lack of
distance (a). The induced bending stresses are computed as accurat;.e information in the existing literature regarding the
follows: analysis, the following, relation may be utilized:
~..ICHAPTER2 109 110 CHAPTER2L.
(a) the flushed end plate.
(j) (b) the ·extended end plate.
(c) the haunched end pla,t.e.
(h) Vertical Shear Resistance: (d) the apex end plate.
The beam reaction ~ can be transmitted to the column (e) the splice end plate.
flange using one of the configurations of Chapter (4).
Types (a). (b). (c) and (d)are analyzed in the following
Refer to Example 2.6.
paragraphs while type (e) will be presented in Chapter 7.
2.10. End Plate Moment Connections:
It is to be well observed that the behaviour of the end
Because of the large number of . bolts required~ together
plate moment connection is a function of the detailed steel
with the necessity to get more.rigid aonnections, the Tee-stub
components (i.e. thickness of end plate, diameter of bolts,
configuration has fallen into dissue.
spacing between bolts, ... etc). Thus it is no longer possible
Most of the common rigid bolted connections make use of end to present definite methods of analysis. Different laboratories
plates namely: the. end plate moment connections: Fig. 2.16, all over the world are still studying this type of connections.
illustrates the wide variety of their applications: The complexity is due to the different steel plate elements
comprising the connection which are subjected to concentration

• of stresses of all types .

J) :o cr In the following paragraphs the analysis

semi-empirical methods which allow a safe design for the bolts
is based on

and the end plat~ thickness.

2.10.1. The Flushed End Plate Moment Connection:

• For a connection having all the bolts located between the
cal Cbl CCI
two flanges of the beam we name it flushed end plate or short
end plate connection.

In order to compute the bolt external tensile force induced

by the beam moment one can proceed using one of the two methods
previously outlined in Section 2.7.5.

rd1 CCI The induced prying farce can be neglected. Its effect for
the flushed type is of minor importance.
Fig. 2.16. End Plate Moment Connections
 lll 112 CHAPTER2L
It is to be observed that .this type of' configuration is not 2.10.2. The Extended End Plate Connection:
very efficient structurally. the cancellation of' the row of' End plate connection wqere some of the bolts are situated
bolts outside the tension flange will increase considerably the outside the tension be~ flange is named the extended end plate
bolt forces, the lever arm being reduced. Thus it is, not moment connection. This type has the advantage that the bending
recommended to use this type of connection configuration unless lever arm of' the bolts is increased and thus decreasing the
the end moment is significantly less than the beam mid-span external tensile forces carried on the bolts. Also the bending
moment. in the end plate is reduced. It is to be noticed that the ideal
configuration is to locate the bolts at the immediate
For the determination of' the end plate thickness, it will
neighborhood of the beam tension flange.
be assumed that the critical section for bending is located at
the the nearest bolt row w. r. t to the' tension flange (see Fig.. The behavior at the neighborhood of the beam tension f.lange
2.17). The moment acting on this section is taken as the beam may be idealized as the Tee-stub connection analyzed in Section
tension force Tb = : time the distance f'rQm the center of the 2.8.2 as shown in Fig. 2.18.a by the dotted rectangle abed.
b Similarly as in the Tee-stub connection Equ. 2.16 is utilized to
beam tension flange to bolt center line i.e. (e + ~ tb). The
take the prying force into account (see Fig. 2.18.d}. Applying
induced bending stresses will follow the relation:
one of the methods previously outlined in Section 2.7.5, one can
Tb. (e + 1/2 tb) determine if only two rows of' bolts at the neighborhood of' the
(1)
f'b = beam tension flange are sufficient to overcome the beam moment
2.w.
(see Fig.2.18.b). Otherwise an additional row or rows are to be
2w pr?vided. It is essential to add a row of bolts near the beam
tt, compression flange in order to prevent this part from springing.
I!
Tb
e It is of' common practice to locate · the bolts at minimum

0 db spacing.
ensured,
Safety (lgainst crippling of' the column web is to be
otherwise stiffeners are to be utilized as will be
cb
....
.... given in Chapter 3 (Section 3.9) .
,..
••
. In order to facilitate the analysis one can proceed
according to the following steps: (see Fig. 2.18}
(a) Calculate the beam tension force (Tb= M/~}
Fig. 2.17
(b) As a first estimate assume two rows of bolts located.at
Hence. using the allowable bending stress the corresponding the neighborhood of' the tension flange. Use two bolts for each
end plate thickness is computed. row.
Refer to example 2.7.
;ire 113
i~CHAPTER2 114 CHAPTER2
{c) Compute the external tension force per bolt assuming
equal share (i.e. Text,b.M = Tb/4). (d) Calculate the required safe pretension
Make· use of the E.C.P. 2001 condition:

T < 0.8 T
ext,b,M
1P
------,b I
I
I
' 1i
+ .. (A (e) Use Table 2.5. to choose the appropriate bolt diameter.
For building structures use diameters till 22 mms. otherwise

• ... (8 use an additional row in the tension zone .

(f) Compute an approximate end plate thickness using the

(( model shown in Fig. 2.18.c where the effect of the prying force
-t -+- is neglected. The end plate is assumed to be a beam with fixed
·-·
supports at the bolts center lines. Hence the induced bending
fc
I. 2w
"ethod (AJ "ethod <B• moment is M. = TbL/8 where L is the distance between the two upper
{a) Configuration. {b) Stress Distribution, bolts rows ( L = 2b + 2s + tb). Thus t
p
= J2.w.Fb
6
·M (F = O.SSF
b y
=
the allowable bending stress. The following equation can be

"'~
utilised:

•·¥)>]}'· j M.(2bdb.w.Fb2s
+ + tb)

ApProximate
{c)
~
~
Where :-
t
p
= 0.6123 2.20

Binding "oment
in end ·Plate (d) Prying Effect. M = Beam Moment.
b = Internal .distance of bolts with respect to the Tee-Stub

e2 ., Edge Distance
web or t~e beam flange.
p = Pifl:b w = Breadth of end plate or Tee-Stub flange regarding one
s =Size of fillet weld

.
c?lumn of high strength bolts.
= Half breadth of end plate or half breadth of Tee-Stub
L=
flange for the case of two columns of H.S.B.
s = Fillet weld size. ·
tb =Flange beam thickness ; db = h - tb.
h = Height of beam cross section.
ISOMETRIC
tf & ~= Flange beam thickness and depth.
Fig. 2.18 Fb = Allowable bending stress of end plate material.
 115 116 CHAPTER2
,.CHAPTER2
(g} Compute the induced prying force using Equation 2. 16 If the bolts can withstand the beam moment without
where the end plate thickness corresponds to step (f). separation and the end plate thickness is sufficient, stop the
( Text / 4 = Tb / 4 ) design. otherwise repe1t the process increasing the end plate
thickness. Consequently the prying force P will be affected,
(h) Proceed an exact analysis using one of the methods (A)
thus the bolts •are to be rechecked.
or (B) given in Section 2. 7. 5, ·to determine the exact stress
distribution. Then calculate the induced external bolt tensile Refer to Examples 2.8, 2.9, 2.10 and 2.11.
force T ( ). Fig. 2.18.b shows the corresponding
ext,b,M
distribution of forces and stresses. 2.10.3. The Haunched End Plate Connection:
If the beam end moment becomes of great importance,
( i) Check if there is any separation between the column consequently the required number.of bolts increases considerably
t
flange and the end plate using the following relation: and the maximum allowed fillet weld thickness will be

Text,b, M + P < 0.8 T.~ (m) insufficient.

where T t. b M is the exact induced external tension force on the

ex , , • II
II
most stressed bolt using either Method (A) or (B)
....:r. .....
P = The corresponding prying force. .....::. ....
II
T = The bolt pretension. !.
..
..•
•II+
(j) Compute the exact induced bending moment in the end .. jr+
!'
•
plate choose the greater of M1 and M2 of Fig. 2.18.c.
= P.a
'Where M1
M2 = P.a - T
ext,b,M •
b } (as 2.19)
(bl

Hence calculate the induced bending stress choosing M=

Greater of M1 and M
2
and hence .

tp =J (as 2.18)

Where :
w = Half breadth of end plate = half breadth of Tee-Stub
flange. ( case qJ two columns of bolts ) Fig. 2.19
..lcHAPTER2 117 118 CHAPTER 2 &;-·
Hence one can think first to retain the extended end plate
of' Section 2.8.2 using a greater number of 'bolts ·and groove
(butt) welds as shown in Fig. 2.19.a. A second alternative·
configuration is illustrated in Fig. 2.19.b where the Tee-stub
is designed to transmit the e!ld beam moment to the column
flange. The number of bolts is consequently increased. A bearing
end plate is welded to the beam web to transmit the beam
vertical reaction to the column flange via the bolts located in
the compression zone~

The third alternative is to provide the connection with a

haunch as illustrated in Fig. 2.20. The question now is what is
the size of the haunch to be provided?. Choose if possible the
haunch depth as the beam depth; the fabrication cost is
minimized as the haunch section will be that of the beam. This
will allow to cut the haunch fr_om the same rolling section· as
the beam. Fillet welds will attach the haunch to the column
flange. It is of good practice to provide a Slope 1:2 to 1:5 Fig. 2. 20. Haunched End Plate Connection
or to choose the haunch length one tenth the span.
For the analysis and the design consider the haunch ABCDEF
The notations regarding Fig. 2.20 are as follows: of Fig. 2.21 subjected to the following forces:

(1) Fillet welds connecting haunch web to beam flange. ®

Tle-or~~====================:3.,-r•T2
®
(2) .(3). and (4) Fillet welds connecting beam and haunch
Vertical
flanges to the end plate. Stiffene:....r_---!'1
(5) Fillet welds connecting the haunch web to the end plate. ~~~~~(~~-~(~1~)~~~~~~~~(2
(6) Fillet welds connecting the haunch flange to the beam
flange.
Equilibrium
(7) Tension bolts.
of Forces
(8) End plate.
(9) stiffener.

Fig. 2.21
. , . CHAPTER 2 119
120 CHAPTER2

- At joints (A) and (C) the t~o horizontal forces T and c Table 2 6 High Strength Bolted Connections (Friction Type).
1 1
are equal and opposite in direction, ~here: Straining Allowable Stresses
Type Configuration
Actions (E.C.P. 2001)

- At joints (F) and (E) the t~o horizontal forces T and c

2 2
are equal and opposite in direction, ~here:
d Q=P R L=Vect.Orial Summo.Uon
a
...
o
::3
!l a lit =P.e o_r Rb,llt and Rt>.q
s::'"' Cll
Cll 01 c RQ=P/n
a cu s::
a;::: o
r.l
I
en u -~li
RI(L- I
N
- At (C) the horizontal force c1 can be replaced by a _ ..

vertical component c1 tane and an inclined one c /cose.

1 Texl =F
Texl.b .S 0.8T + P· ·
TexL.b =F/n
- From equilibriUIIl conditions at joint (D) at the abrupt
change of cross section, the beam flange portion BD will be
subjected to a compression force equal to (C - C ). While the
2 1 Q=F.cose
vertical component c1 tane will tend to compress the joint D,
TexL =F.sine
thus requiring a vertical stiffener (shown dotted in Fig. 2.21).

Once the diagram of forces of Fig. ~. 21 has been

.,··,
determined, the design of the different structural steel
components can be accomplished. M=J(
Q=Q
In order to avoid repetition Refer to Example 2.7. Qb=Q/n
T•xl.b.K .S 0.8T + P
M-Texl,b,M
N. B. •
N=N
Table 2.6 summarizes the different types of high strength Q=Q
bolted connections with the limiting stresses as. specified by T..,.t =N
E.C.P. 2001. Qb=Q/n
Texl,b =N/n
T..xt.b + Text,b.K .S 1
0.8T o.oT
M-Texl,b,l(
..lcHAPTER2 121 122 CHAPTER2
Example (2.1): Using table 2.5 choose 8 H.S.B (10.9) d = 22 ms.
Design the bracket ·connection ·previously outlined in Where: P = 6.1 tons< 6.46 tons. '(Unsafe)
s
chapter (1} (example 1.11). Using high strength bolts.
The difference being less than 5Y. the design can b~ allowed
(Applied loads are static).
where ·the friction between plates has been neglected which will
Soluti,on
increase the resistance.

(A) Case of Loading (I)' (B) Case .of Loading. {II) with Braking Force
2. High Strength Bo.lts Connecting Bracket to Column:
Without Braking Force
Use H.S.B. •s: Try .two rows of 4 bolts at 135 mms vertical
The design of the triangular gusset plates transmitting the
pitch and 150 mms horizontal pitch as shown in figure.
~pplied loads from the crane track girdpr to the column flange
~s as previously given in example (1.11) of chapter (1). 2.1. Straining Actions:

1'. High Strength Bolts Connecting Bracket to Column:

M
X
= 2.857 x (36+ 1: + 27} = 182.84 t.cm.

Use H.S.B (10.9) ; tllo rows of 4 bolts each vertical

M = 2.857
y
'* (44 + 15) ;, 168.56 t.cm.
pitch = 135 mms ; Horizontal pitch = 150 mms.
.Mt = 21 x (44 + .151 = 1239 t.cm
1.1. Straining Actions:
Qy = 21.0 tons 21.0 tons N = 2.857 tons

The lateral shock H = 1.6 tons is directely transmited

the column.
'
Mt = 21. x (44 + 15) = 1239 t.cms

1.2. Properties of Area and Check of Stresses:

The friction between the triangular gusset plate and the
column flange is neglected and hence the analysis will follow
exactly that when using ordinary bolts.

Choose the·. SliUJie geometricl:ll configuration as -previously.

given in example (1.11) and from previous results we have :-

1.313t ; ~(M )1 = 2.045t -7

Q(M ) = 5.520t
t . t
 CHAPTER2 123 124 CHAPTER2
Properties of Area:
0.4 x T ]
I =2 x 54
3
x 30 / 12 = 787320 cm
4
( clamping between Qb. ~u =[ t. 2s . <1 - o.j?s7r x t ~ 2o
X
bracket and the
-3 4
I
y
=2 x 30 x 54 / 12 = 243000 em
column flange ) Use 16 bolts M (22} H.S.B. Type (10.9) 8 bolts on each
4
I
p
= IX + I
y
= 1030320 cm side of' the column. T = 19.08 tons )

2.3. Stresses:
Qb all = [6.1 X (1 - ~g~~~)] X 1.20
182.84x20.25
787320
x 15 x 13.50 = 0.95 ton

= 7.18 tons> Qb saf'e

= 168 • 56x7 • 50 x 15 x 13.50 = 1.05 ton.
243000

T (due to N}
3
= 2.857/8 = 0.357 ton

Ttotal = 0.95 + LOS + 0.357

= 2.357 tons

Tex t • N · = 0.357. tori

Q~ = 21/16 = 1.313 ton

Q~ = 1239 x 7.50. = 2 • 015 tons

2
Mt 2 X 4 X (10.092 + 21.594 }

~= 1239 x 20.25 = 5 _52 tons

t _2_x_4~x-=-::(1~0;::_::0::=922+=--.:;;2::;;:1=.5;;;:9;:4;:22f:")

2
Q
total
= ~1(5.52) 2 + (2.045 + 1.313) = 6.46 tons

~ = 6.46 tons.

= [-.-'¥- (1 e~t,N)
f:l T T ]
Qb,all - x 1.20
. . CHAPTER2 125 126 CHAPTER2
Example (2.2): Example (2.3):
Design the shown connection using high-strength bolts of Design the connection shown in the Fig. below. Compute tbe
friction type (d ~ 20 mms) type (10.9); P
s
= 4.93 t; T = 15.43 t. prying force according tb Section 2.8.1.

Solution

B·F·I·B 20 p 1~~2<ms ~ .4
4 3

B·F· I 20 !-~·
1-2t- ·T .! /fQ. e~s ems
~ 1-i
2L 7Sx7Sx8 F===t:~!=r==f~ .. . 0.8
. lf . ems
Mono rait Jl / B·F·I :14
~.b
P ::10 Tons t" 10cms I
•j
X+· · · · I ··-X
ft
Solution

(1) Dimensioning of H.S.B:

23 The tension per bolt

n1 =2 x 4 . 93 = 2.30 bolts Take n
1
= 3.0 bolts
Text,b = 10/4 = 2.5 tons. (External tension)
For the Group of Bolts (n ):
2
Having the condition: T t b + P ~ 0.8 T
ex ,
Q = 23 cos 45° = 16.26 tons; T = 23 sin 45° = 16.26 tons Assume as a first approximation 0.7 instead of 0.8
16 26 T
Text,b-
- -4• --- 4.065 tons < 0. 80 X 15.43 Safe ext, b <:: 2.5
Hence:
0.7 0.7 <:: 4.16 tons.

Q~ = 16 · 26 = 4 065 tons.
bolt 4 · From table 2.5 choose 4 H.S.B (10.9) M (T 5.29 t).
12
ll (T - T ex t) · 0.4 (15.43 - 4.065}
Qb,all = ~ = 1.25
= 3.60 tons. For the computation of the prying force use Equation 2.16
< 4.065 tons
a = 3.4 ems 2 b = 14- 0.8 - 2 x 3.4 - 2 x 1.2
./ ./ \..
=4 ems
.
Hence use 6 bolts M 20 it will be safe. web ~hickness a fillet dimension
 127 128 CHAPTER2
,,.JCHAPTER2
Example (2.4) Moment Split Beam Tee-Stub-Connection:
b =2 ems ; w = 20/2 = 10 ems ( as we have 2bolts per row )
Design a split-beam T-connection of a B.F. I# {30). · The

t =1.2cms A == 0.84 em •
2 connection is subjected tota moment M = 8.00 mt. The European
p s
T-Sections can be ~tilized in the connection.
4 Solution
wtp

l
1 2
30 a b As
.,A
':r
2 T
p ={ wtp
4 ext. b
r-
Group 11)
<!~ <:b + 1) + 2
30 a b A
s
I .
p = 0.245 x·z.5 = 0.61 tons.
·+--~ 30
} 3·6
7·2
Hence the total -force carried by each bolt. is: B·F·II3o 3-6

2.5 + 0.61 = 3.11 tons < 0.8x5.29 < 4.23 tons. o.k. I :11

. ~~12l Sec. A - A

(2) Check of Thickness of Monorail Flange (1) High Strength Bolts:

- Bolts Group (1):
M
1
=0.61 x 3.4 = 2.07 t.cms.
M 8 X 100
Tb = db = (30 _ Z) = 28.57 ton.
Hz= 0.61 X 3.4- 2.5 X 2.0 = 2.93 t.cms.
Assume no. of bolts = 8.0 bolts.
2 2 • T - 28.57 - 3 57 t
ZXX = ( 10 X t ) / 6 Fb = 1.4 t/cm • . ext, b - - 8 - - • on. Text. b + P < 0.8 T

Use as a first approximation 0.7 instead of 0.8

t p -- J6 X 2. 93 -- 1 • 12 ems. < 1 • 2 ems. o.k.
1.4 X 10 T
= _e~x~t~·~b
0.80
= _3._5_7
0.80
- 4.46 tons
-
Note that if we consider that the section regarding M2
being a solid rectangular section (Fb = 0.72 Fy.!.• but as the Use 8 H.S.B'S M{16) type (10.9) ( Ti = 9. 89 ton].
behaviour of the end plate is complicated we prefer to be
- Bolts Group (2): Use H.S.B's M type (10.9) P = 3. 16 toris.
coservative (Fb = 0.58"Fy.!.: 16 s

No. of bolts req. = n = 28 x8003 _16 = 9.04 ~ 10.0 bolts

Assume to use 5 bolts per row. Hence number of rows = 2

. . . CHAPTER2 129 130 CHAPTER2
(2) Thickness of T-Stub Web: (Eqn. 2.16)
soo· · 2
Area required = 28 x 1 . 40 = 20.40 em . a = 1.5 d = 2.4 ems b = 1.5 d = 2.4 ems
2 Assume to use two rows of bolts of 2 bolts each :-
b x t = 20.40 cm

20.40 28 · 57 - 7.1425 tons

Text,b = -4---
t =
w st
req.
As Text , b + P -< 0.8 T (use the factor 0.7)
(3) Thickness of T- Stub flange:
a= 1.5d = 2.4 em ; b = 1.5d = 2.4 em ; s = l.Oem ; tw st = l.Ocm 7.1425
T
ext,b = ~~~ = 10.2 tons (H20)
L = 2b + 2s + t t = 2x2. 4 + Zxl. 0 + 1. 0 = 7. 8 ems.
w s
30 2
T
800
= 28 = 28.57 tons.
w =--
. 2 =15.0 ems ,·
,.
t
p
2.0 ems = A = 2 .. 45 em ; T- 15.43 tons
s
two bolts per raw
28.57 X 7.8 = 27. 85 :t. ems • (Approximat_e) Applying in Equation (2.16) we get:
8
4
6 X 27.85 wtp
t = = 1.99 ems · take t = 2.0 ems. 1 2

I
p,req 30 X 1.4 30 a b A
2- s
Equation 2.20 will give the same value of t p;req p =[ 4
T
ext, b
3~
a wtp
(4b (4b + 1) + 2
30 a b As
M. (2b+2s+tb)
t = 0.6123
.p db . w ~ Fb p = 0.224 Text , b = 0.224 X 7.1425 1.6 tons.

800(2x2.4+2x1+1) ·
28x(30/2)x1.4 = 1 • 99 ems.
Total force carried by each bolt of group "1" = 7. 1425 + 1. 6
= 8.74 < 0.8 X 15.43
O.K .
. ---'\;.
s = size of fillet weld M1 = 1.6 x 2.4 = 3.84 t.cms.

r
}. Equ. 2.19

~T.
M = 1.6 x 2.4 - 7.1425 x 2.4 = 13.3 t.em.
2

[)"
6 X 13.3
H s=1.0cms 1.4 X 15 = 1.95 ems < 2.0 ems. o.k (Equ. 2.18)
Approximate
 CHAPTER2 131
132 CHAPTERl-...
Example {2.5):
T :: M M 24 X 100
Design an extended end-plate mome.nt beam to column b h - t = d= {30 _ 21 = 85.70 tons.
. fb b
connection subjected to a moment M = 24 mt and shear Q = 16.0
tons. The beam is a B.F.I. 30 and the column is a B.F.I. 30. If we use four boits per row:'
Hence:
Solutio'n T _ 85.70
bolt- 2 x 4.0 = 10.70 ton.
{1) Welds:
As an approximation where the prying force is neglected use
Use k-welds around the the factor 0.7 instead of 0.8 get the following
flanges as the fillet weld
T 10.70
will not withstand the full b,req = ~ =· 15.28 ton.
moment capacity of the beam.
Use high strength bolts M22 UO. 9) [r = 19.08 tonJ>
Around the web, the • {B) End - Plate Design:
fillet welds are used to carry. ·Consider the end-plate
the shearing force Q = 6. 0 to be a fixed beam at the

r ,
ton. tfb:2·0cms
locations of the upper two
rows of bolts,
having a
Lw = h - 4 X tfb h:30·0 ems · h-4hb::Z2cms concentrated load "T .. at the
b
_j
= 30 - 4 x 2 = 22 em
L ~==.:J
mid-span.

Where: Tb = : = 85.70 ton.

b
b = 1.5d = 3.3 em
16
0.505 em
2 X 22 X 0.72 L = 2b + tfb = 2 x 3.3 + 2 = 8.60 ems
Tb.L
~
M =---- = 85.7 X 8.60
Take s = 6 mm. 8 · 8 =92.13t.em.

{2) Approximate Analysis:

-112

-T/2 J Tb
6 X 92.13
{A) High Strength Bolts:
Assume that the flange } d=h-tfb 30 x 1.40 = 3 · 63 em.

tension force will be resisted lc, Equation 2.20 can be utiliesed :-

equally by the two upper rows : (2b+tb)

M.
of bolts.
--L..J'-- tp= 0.6123
J ~·. Fb w.
~·CHAPTER2 133 134 CHAPTER la,.
Check of Shear Stresses on bolts:
· 800(2:ic3. 3+2) = 3.627 ems. The safe shear load value of a ~ = 6.91
t p = 0.6123 28x(30/2)x1.4 2 bolt = Ps ton.
This corresponds to the row of H.S.B. in the compression
=_3.80
t ep_ zone.
take _ _em.
__ 16
Qbolt = -4--- = 4 •0 ton < ps · · safe;
(3) Exact Analysis:
(A) High Strength Bolts: · (B) Check the Prying Forces in Bolts:

I
For working stress design, the prying force is;
2400 20.3 2
= 30
X
= 0.29 t/cm . 4

:t:
--3

~
X 40.6 ./12
2
- 30 A
-M~x=--y-2 = 0.29 20.3
X 12.7 = 0.18 t/em2. p = --- - - - - - ·_s--'--t~4-- · Text, b ,M = 0.015 T t b M
f2 = 3
(~) (~ + 1) +
ex , ,

-
[ w p
4b 4b . 30 a b 2A
Row "1": s
+ 0- 18 x 7.60 x 30 = 13.4 'Where: --··-r
= 0.29 ton.

g
Text,b,M 2
Text,b,M
· = force/bolt.= 13.4 ton.
0.80 T.
1
= 0.80 x 19.08 = 15.26 ton. > Tbolt (o.k) 3-3
.
w = 30/4 = 7.5 cms.(4 columns B
of bolts) 2·0 :::
t = 3.80 ems. B I m

H 1- . •l: .. • Row 111

As
p

= 3.03 em2 .
I
1
L-
·- . !-
_..J
: n

••. .
3-3 I
-2·0 ::::::: I
Row {21
H 1- a =b = 3. 30 em.

+ . .. +
15·0 p :::: 0.015 X 13.4
...___ -Row {3)
:::: 0.2 tons
7-7
2·0 :--~
Text, b. M + P = 13.4 + 0.2
4·0 li
= ·•' I

1. 3o ·0 ems
13.6 ton.
< 0.8 X 19.08
-..!-.::-.+
·' 'I
Stress distribution
Row "2":
< 15.26tons
O.K •. +4
••
.(j)-
0.18 30 (C) Check of End-Plate Thickness:
Text, b, M -- -2- x 12.7 x -
4
= 8,57 tons. I

M1 = P.a :::: 0.2 X 3.3

Sec. A - A
0.80 Ti = 15.26 > Tbolt (o.k)
= 0 .. 66 t.cms.
. . . . CRAPTER2 135 136 CRAPTER2

= P. . a - Text • b • M b = 13.6 X 3.3 - 0.66

= 0.76 ems. (Area) ( bst / tst < (25 / ~ = 16) )
= 44.22 t.cms.
t = 14 = 0.875 ems (local buckling)
t
ep -- j6 X. 44.Z,2
1.4 x (30/4)
s 5 . 0 ems.
st

take tst = 0.9 ems • bst 14.0 ems.

It is to be noticed that the consideration of the prying
force has increased the end-plate thickness to 5 ems. instead of Tension of Column Flange: Refer to Chapter (3) - Section (3.)
3.8 ems.
Minimum thickness required to colWIUl flange:

(4) Crippling of Column. Web, Te.nsion · of ColWIUl Flange and

Stability of Corner Web: Ref~r to Chapter (3) - Section (3.9)
tfc <:: 0.40 J3o x 2 = 3.10 em.
- Crippling:
K =2 X 2.0 = 4.0 ems • Use stiffeners 140 x 10 mms as before.

tfb = 2.0 ems. t

p = 5.0 ems
of the Corner: Refer to Chapter (3) - Section (3)
L = 2.0 + 2 X 5.0 + 2 X

2.5 X 4 32.2 ems.

Q =T = M 2400
db - 30 - 2
2·0
Resisting area = 32.2 x 1.2 = 85.70 ton .
= 38.64 ems
Resistance of ColWIUl Web in Shear:
_Applied area = 30 x. 2
= 60 ems.
Unsafe.
= 30 X 1.2 X 0.84
Hence use 2 stiffeners = 30.24 tons.

A = 60 - 38.64
= 10.68 em
2
. Q
all.
= 30.24 tons< 85.70 tons.
st 2
. •. Unsafe.
30 - 1.2
b = 14.4 ems take bst = 14.0 ems.
st 2
 CHAPTER2 137 138 CHAPTER2L
Example (2.6):
Design a rigid frame bolted end-plate connection subjected
Remaining Shear = Q - Q = F
all. to a moment M = 28 mt and ~hear Q = 16.8 tons. Axial tension in
8S.70- 30.24 the beam= 1.SO ton. The beam is a S.I.B. #SO and the column
= 55.46 ton. is a B.F.I. # 30.

Solution
Resultant force R = SS.46
cos {3

rr l[

Where: ®_·
.....
fD~JD •::+
--~ 2·7cms
It
I'--..,...--~ ..

R = SS.46 rz = 78.44 ton.

®'.--
. .
''Q)
... ••
~ ~em
B·F·I 30 S·l·B 50
87.44
Area of one stiffener = = 28.01 crl.
2 X 1.4

Take bst = 14.0 em

. .
•
lr--··~
+
.
I
: ••
I

.._/I
\
:1 l• [:

t
st
= 28 01
·
14.0 =
- 2.0 em II 18·5 l
22·0 ems

(1) Welds of Beam to end-plate: (Refer to Chapter (3) - welded

connections :-

To Estimate the Weld Size Around the Flanges:

Assume that the moment "M" is transmitted to the
end-plate through the flange welds only. (Section 2-2)

. .T
.• b =. M
~=(SO_
28 x 100
2 _70 ) = S9.20 ton.

Length of weld lines around one flange:

L = bfb + (bfb- twb- 2x2.7) (see Sec. 1-1 next page)

. w
= 18.SO + (18.SO - 1.80 - S.4) = 29.8 em.
..... CHAPTER2, 139 140 CHAPTER2
. =s
Tb 59.20 .
Required weld size =
L XF = 29.8 X 0.72 1.50 2800 X 27.7
0.72 t/cm
2
(Safe).
w pw f = 200.12 + 107208
s = 2.76 em.
For point (B) the stresses will be unsafe, hence increase
Use fillet welds of 2.70 em thickness around the weld size around the web to 8 mms.
beam flanges which correspond to the flange thickness. 4
I
X
= 110220 em.
Weld Size Around the Beam Web: 2
A = 223.64 em.
w
Only the shearing force Q will be transferred by the 1.50 2800 X 27.70 2
welds around the web: ftA = 223.64 + 110220 = 0.71 t/cm (Safe).

Weld length= 2 (50- 2 x 2.70) = 78.40 em.

Weld size = s = 78.4016x• 8 0. 72 = 0 · 297 em. qB =2 17 0

•
X 0.8 X 39.2
2
= 0.27 t/cm .

. ·. Use weld size of 5 mm thickness around the web.

feq =J(o.5) 2 + 3(0.27)
2 = 0.687 2
t/cm < 0.72 x 1.1 ton/em
2

Check of Safety of Welds at Section (1-1): (Exact Analysis): B

• • • Safe.
m =( 18.5- 1.8- 2x2.7 ) / 2 = 5.65 ems
The. size of weld s = 2. 7 ems is excessive, hence it is
-
39 32 [ recommended to use a haunch beam-to-column connection as given
I =2 X 0.50 X · + 4 5.65
A~"
X
in Example 5.17.

l n=-
2 2·7
X 2.70 X (22.3 - 1.35) ] 2·7

~mr
8 (2) Approximate Analysis:
+ 2 [18.50 X 2.70 X
Design of High Strength Bolts:
(25 + 1. 35)

4
2
] l.L -· 39·2cms
X Assume that the flange force in the beam is carried by the
upper two rows of bolts, i.e. those adjacent to the beam tension
I ::;: 107208 em. flange.

A
w
X

::;: 78.40
2.70 + 2
X 0.50 + 4
X 18.5 X
X

2.70
5.65 X L- -
n
m=5.65
Tb = N + M _ 1.50 +
db- -2---
2800
(50- 2.7) = 59 · 95
t
on.

2
= 200.12 em. L18·5 ems .j Text,b,M = -59.95
4- = 14.99 ton. as Text,b,M + P < 0.8 T

Sec. 1 - 1 Use 0.7 instead of 0.8 to overcome (P).

N M.y
ftA = Aw +-I-
X Y. = ~~7~9 = 21.23 ton.
req.
 CHAPTER2 141 142 CHAPTER 2 a,
. . . Use H.S.B. M24 (10.9) (T. = 22. 23) . M.y1 2800 X 32.45 2
1
:f1 - - 1- = 3
. = 0.18 t/cm
X 22 X 64.9 /12
End Plate Thickness:
a= b = 1.5d = 3.6ems s = 2.7 ems t:fb = 2. 7 em M.y2 2800 X 21.2
:f2 = - 1 - - = 0.117 t/em2
L = 2b + 2s + t:fb 3
X 22 X 64.9 /12
= 2x3.6 + 2x2.7 + 2.7 = 15.3 ems.
-
a
T
b
= M
db +
N
2 = 59. 2 .
O + 1 SO M .
b Upper Row: T = 0.18 + 0.117 22
x 2 x
11 25 = 18 · 37 t
= 59.95 ton. ext,b,M · on.
~ SJ 1 5
= 0. 25
M = 8
Tb.L
=
59.95 x 15.3 M
,.-1 sj T
ext,b
= ·
6
tons.

= 114.65 t.cm .
.
bl Text,b + Text , b , M = 0.25 + 18.37 tons > 0.80 x 22.23 ton

~i
. ·. Unsa:fe
::; j6 X 114.65 :.:: 4 _. 72
~22 x 1.40 ems. Choose H.S.B. M(27) (10.9) (T = 28.91 ton).

For this new con:figuration use an edge distance 4.0 ems

Use end-plate o:f thickness 5.0 em.
instead o:f 3.6 ems, 6.75 ems instead o:f 6.3 ems.

(3) Exact Analysis: Hence check the sa:fety o:f the high strength bolt as
:follows:

Tex t , b , M = 21.16 tons T

ext,b
= 0.25 tons < 0.8 x 28.91

Text,b,M + Tex t , b = 21.61 + 0.25 = 21.86 tons

Shear:
Q/bolt = 18.6/2 = 9.3 ton.
T
=P (1- ext, b)
s T.1
0 25
= 10.51 (1 - ·
29.10
) = 10.3 ton > Q/bolt Sa:fe

(4) Check.the Prying Forces in Bolts:

The prying :force is calculated according to (Eqn. 2.16):-
 CHAPTER2 143 144 CHAPTER2L

4 18.50 - 1.20
= 8.65
P =
1 30 :t: 2
-=2- - - - - - - s___t-:4:----
A J· ( Text, b + Text ,.b, M
·b
st = em ..

[ (3~ (~ + 1) + w p
4b 4b 30 a b 2A
s
2
·take tst = 0. 7 -em: Ast = 8.6 X 0.7 = 6.0~ cm
Where: Total tension/bolt = 21.61 + 0.25 = 21.86 tons
. •. Safe.
22
Y = :2 = 11.0 em. Tensioning of Column Flange: Refer to Chapter {3) - Section (3.9)
Minimum thickness required for column flange.
a = b = 4.0 ems.
j~

~
p =
t 5.0 em. 2f .

A
s
= nominal area of a
~: 2:: o.4o J2. 70 x 18.50 = 2.83 em. > 2.0 ems unsafe
= 4.59 em2 .
LU·Ocms .J Use stiffeners 86 x 7 mms as crippling.
P = -ve, Hence the prying
force has no effect. Stability of the Corner: Refer to Chapter (3) - Section (3.9)
Having 21.61 + 0.25 = 21.86 tons< 0.8 x 29.1 < 23.28 tons
M N
• ·• Safe Q =T = ~ + 2 = 59.95 ton.·
(S) Crippling of Column Yeb, Tension of Column Flange and the
Stability of the Web Corner: Refer to Chapter (3) - Section (3) Resistance of Column Web in Shear =
Crippling: he x twc x qall
K =2 x 2.0 = 4.0 ems, tb = 2.7 ems, t = 5.0 ems
p
=30 X 1~2 X 0.84
L = 2.7 + 2 x 5.0 + 2 x 2.5 x 4 = 32.7 ems. = 30.24 tons.
2
Resisting area= 32.7 x 1.2 = 39.24 cms • Remaining force = 59.95 - 30.24
Applied area= 18.5 x 2.7 = 49.95 em .
2
= 29.71 tons
Use 2 additional cover plates with thickness (t ) where,
Use 2 stiffeners c
(30 ;..;·4 X 2) x 2 t x 0.84 = 29.71 tons.
c
Ast = 49.95 - 39.24 = 10 • 71 2
em · . ·. t
c
=
0.804 em.
i.e. Use two additional cover plates each of 9 mmsthickness.
Take the stiffeners widt.h eqtial to the . beam flange (hatched area)
width.
. . CHAPTER2 145
146 CHAPTER2
Example (2. 7):
Section (2-2)
Design the connection of Example 2. 9 using a haunch cut
30.2
from the beam section. ~ = (18.5 + 2 X 5.65) 1.5 = 0.67 < 0.72 t/cm2 o.J{.
Solution
Section (1-1)
Size of weld around flanges and web 15mms and 4mms respectively
v- I
Height of welds around web= 95.5 - 4 x2.7 2x2.75 = 79.2 ems.
30~ 9)-r,b

r lfr·'"
B·f.l
,
--3
7
-~ Ixx = 2 x 0.4 x ~2 6 + 4 X 5.65 X 1.5 X
--2
43.68 + 2 X 18.5 X
S·I·B 50
1.5 X
---2
49.1 = 228.441 X 10 3 em4
h1= 50 50cms
M=28t 28 X 100 X 50.45 2
f tA = 228441 = 0.618 t/cm < 0. 72 (o:k}
(}: 16-8

[--
ftB = 0.618x:~:! 5 = 0.518 t/cm2 qB =2 16.8 = 0.274 t/cm2
X 76.6 X 0,4

h2=45.5 Part of S·I·B SO 45.5cms F

equ(b)
= 1(0.518) 2 + 3 (0.274) 2

II.
LA.
~--cb
~
\

ef 5
~
1

cose~0.98
5.65
M
_.__CJc===:~ =12.74cms
Sec.1-1
= 0.7

(2) Design of H.S.B.:

2
t/cm < 1.1x0.72

Approximate Design:
h = 50 ems
1
= ~(9-5~.__,5,__28___,.1-.X-=-3s=-_-.1,.....-=3=7=7....-)
100

h2 = (50- 2 x 2.7) / cosa = 45.5 ems = 30.2 tons.

(1} Design of Velds: Assume to use 2 rows of 2
Section (2-2) bolts each around the tension
flange.
= ~:-~2=8~x~1~0~0~.-~~
(95.5 - 1.35 1.375}
= 30.2 tons.
T 30 2
= 4..,.- X-·...,0;7
---'= = 10.78 tons.
req
30.2 / cose
~ = (18.5 + 2 X 5.65) S Let ~ = 0.72 2
t/cm. Choose M16 (10.9) T = 9.89 tons
Somet~ing less than 10.78 tons because we have a third row of
Get s = 1.43, Take s = 15 mms.
H.S.B. which will participate to resist the moment.
. . . CHAPTER2 147 148 CHAPTE~2L
End Plate: Effect of PryingForce:
Tb.L
H=-8- Tb = 30.2 tons T · ·t b + T xt b. H = 7. 54 tons.
ex • e , ,
L = 3.9 + 2.7 + 3.9 = 10.5 ems a= 2.4 em; b = 2.4 em;
V = 11.0 em; ·t
p
= 3.0 em.
H = ---=8=----
30.2 X 10.5 = 39 .6 t. em
p = ·[ 0.5 -
0.93+
1.37]· (T
1.37 ext.b
+ T
ext,b.H
)
t
p
= J622 XX39.6
1.4
= 2. 77 ems,
=- ve
Take t = 3.0 ems. The prying force has not effect on the bolts.
Then having. 7.547 < 0.8 x 9.89 < 7.92 tons Safe

Exact Analysis:
(3) Crippling of Column Web Refer to Chapter (3) - Section (3. 9):-
3 ArE!a of applied force =
ftl = 28 X 100
I
X 52.4
I
XX
=
22 X104.8
12 = 2110207.9 em
4
18.5. x 2.75 x cose = 49~9 em
2
XX

ftl = 0.0695 t/cm2 Resisting area =

0. 0695 X 44.75 2 .1. 2 (2. 75 + 2 X 3 + 5 X 2 X 2} .
= ----;;:,...-.,...-- = 0. 0593 t/em
52.4
2
= 34.50 em
0.0695 X 31.5
ft3 = --~5~2~.~4--- = 0. 0418 t/cm2
49.90 -34.50 (
=
Group (1): 5

T = !_ (0.0695 + 0.0593 )
ext, b,H 2 .2 X 22 X 7 .65 = 5.4 ton Choose bst = 14.0 ems ;
Group (2):
1 0 0593 0 0418 tst= 0.9 ems to prevent local buckling
Text,b,H = -2 ( · ; · ) x 22 x 13.25 = 7.36 tons

Group (3): (4} Bending of. Column Flange:

1 1
Text,b,H =z X z X 0.0418 X 22 X 31.5 = 7.2 tons
t ~ 0.4 J18.5 x
. fc ...
2~7 <= 2.82 ems

The effect of tension force= 1 5 = 0.187 tons. 8

Unsafe. hence use 2 sti:ffeners

Total Tension force per bolt= 7.36 T 0.187 = 7~47 tons as for crippling.

2 stiffeners "B" (14.0 x 0.9} ems

._lcHAPTER2 149 150 CHAPTER2
(5) Shear Resistance of Corner Web:
2 7
M Resistance= 1.2 ( " ·+ 2 x
Applied Shear = ~ = 30.2 tons. cos 8
t
we
~ + 5 X 7
r
X 2) X

l
e
.Resistance= 30 x 1.2 x 0.84 = 30.24 tons.
1.8 = 62.14 tons. st) H=Z·ao· t .m. '
Remaining Shear = 30.2 - 30.24 =Zero f ./ Q:10-8
crp

The corner is safe regarding the shear resistance. Safe and no need to use
stiffeners opposite to the comp-
(6) Design of Stiffener "C": ression flange.

Fe = T X cos
sin e
e = 30.2 X·0.2
.
(8) Bending of Column Flange (Exact Analysis):
Applied force = 30.2 tons.
= 6.04 tons.
-2
Resistance = 0.8 (7 X 2 X 1.4 + 0.15 X 18.5 X 2.7)
.6.04 21
Ast = 2 x 1.4 = · 5 em
2 = 37.35 tons.
{c) Safe and no need to use stiffeners opposite to the tension
flange.
Choose bst = 18 •5 ;
1 8
• = 8. 35
N.B.
t ·
st
= 0.6 ems. (local 1. It is to be noticed that regarding steps (7) and (8)
buckuling prevented) where the crippling and the bending of column flange show that
using ~ exact analysis there are no need to use stiffeners.
N.B. It is to be noticed that the crippling and the bending of.
Ve have to note that the E.C.P. 2001 does not allow to use
column flange have been analyzed on ultimate design basis. This
these analysis.
naturally is . leading to a conservative dimensioning .. While if
one would like . to apply . an allowable de~ign approach; the 2. Regarding the shearing force Q = 16.8 tons the
following is. to be considered. assumption previously utilized were the bolts in the compression
zone are·resisting this shear is unsafe where.
(7) Crippling: 16.8
2
= 8.4 tons > ( P
s
= 3.16 tons
28 X 100 =
C = T = 95.5 - 1.35 - 1.37 30.2 tons.
So we can use 4 H.S.B. in the compression zone {10.9) M 20 .
C = Applied horizontal force ·Q =
16.8
= 4.2 tons > ( P = 4.93 tons )
4 s
 CHAPTER2 151 152 CHAPTER2L
Example (2.8): As we have only 2 rows in the tension zone Tb is resistec
M = 43.13 mt. totally by these 8 bolts.
N = - 6.30 tons. Having the condition T
l ext,M
+ P < 0.8 use for first

Q. ·= 7. 0. taus. approximation without the prying force (P) the factor 0.7 instead
of 0.8.
1. Welds:
13 1
Fillet welds result an unsafe Trequired -- 0. 70
• = 18• 7 t ons ·
connection, hence use k - welds
to connect the beam flanges to Refer to table <2.5) and choose H.S.B. (10.9), d = 22 mms
the end plate. .· cos a. = 0.995 where T = i9.08 tons. This means that we·have:
Vertical fillet welds (1) will carry the shearing force Q.
Hence: *8 bolts M22 (10.9) in the upper two rows.
Q =7 =2 XL X s X 0.72
3. ·Thickness of End Plate:

~~Jr.2·5-4X2·6
L = 42.5 - 4 x 2.60 = 32.1 ems.
N
~~ =32·1 ems
= Mdb 2 = 104.90 tons
7
s = =-~~~~~= = 0.155 em
2 X 32.1 X 0.72
Weld Line G)
Tb =T cos a.·=-104.37 tons
Take S =4 mms. Tb.L
2. H.S.B.'s: M -
Approximate solution: (first estimate of the number of
bolts) Where as shown in Fig. of step (4) ( next page )
L = 3·. 7 + 2.61 + 3. 7 = 10.1 ems
Assume a tension force Tb = !_
db
- !! will
2
be earried by the two
/

rows of bolts around the tension fian~e. Ft =

M X

b.t /12
3
t/2
= 6M
b.
'
-4===ifcos ..
Tmso(=T
43 · 13 - 6 · 3 = 104.90 tons.
42.5-2.6 2 .
Where b = breadth of end plate = 30 ems
M
Tb = 104.9 cos a. = 104.37 tons t

no.·. of bolts/row =4 (2 rows)

= 4.32 ems 10·1 ems
T
ext,b,M
= 104.37
4 x.2
= 13.1 tons. Take t = 45 DDS. j_
 CHAPTER2 153 154 CHAPTER2&r
4. Exact Analysis: For the determination of the prying force P get the following
3 dimensions from figure below :-
{54.21) - 4
IX = 30 X 12 - 398270 em . a= 3.3cms tb = 2.6cms
r--- 30cms - - - ,
3.3 7.8 7.8 7.8 3.3
N/A ft 30cms
Jl -~
--,

••••
a=3.3cm s
.
b=3.7c ms

••••
3 .75 7.5,7.5 7;5 3.75
b
.
.a

~
-
3.7cms
2.61cms
4.5cms

Applying in equation 2.16 where .

4313 27.105
= 0.293 t/cm2
X
fl = 398270 Effect of cos « = 0.995 4
on vertical dimensions 1 w.tp
2 2
30 a.b .A
\lb.ere s
2 p =
0.203 t/cm . tb 2 .6 · Text, b,M
-COS«
- = -COS«
- = 2.61 3a a w.
( ) ( + 1) +
4b 4b
42 5 .As
f = ~ = 6.30 cos « 0.004 t/cm2 . h = COS«
· + 3.7 + 3.3 + 4.5
N A 54 X 30
= 54.21 ems. w = breadth of end plate regarding one column = 30/4 = 7.5 ems
FJ.r Group (1): 2
• As {M l = 3.03 cm
22
tp = 4.5 ems { from step 3 )
j Tension/bolt {due to M & N) = Text {total)
0.5 - 0.949
·- [{0.2932+ 0.203) - 0. 004] p = 0.818 + 0.949 = -ve
-'-----;:;:----.....:.. X 30

1 Having a negative sign the prying has no effect on the design

x 8.305 x = 15.19 tons.
4
neither for''bolts nor for the end plate.
For Group {2): Then :-

Text (total) = e/ 03
- 0.004] X18.8 X30 Xi= 13.74 tons
T
total
= 15.19 tons < 0.8 x 19.08 < 15.26 tons
·, ·• The bolts of group (1) are safe.
Consequently group of bolts (2) are safe.
 . . . CHAPTER2 155
156 CHAPTER2
Check on Shear:
s ..
2 Safety Against Tension Flange: Refer to Chapter 3 section (3.9)
For M(22) (10.9) H.S.B. : Ps = 6.'1 tons
twc . = 0.40 jAfbcostx Ei! 3.53 ems > 2.6 ems (Unsafe} -
Assume that the 4 bolts in the compression are transmitting m1n
the shear. Use 2 stiffeners (140 x 9) as those opposite to the
Qb = 4° = 1.75
7
ton< 6.1 tons compression flange.
Weld side S =4 mms.

5. Design of the Corner Connection:

5.3. Stability of Corner:_
Refer to Chapter 3 section (3.9}
5.1. Crippl~ng of Column Web: Q =M
~=
43.13 x 100
(42.5 2.6)
= 108 • 1 tons.

K = 2 t
c = 2 x 2.60 = 5.20 .ems. Here the applied compression force is neglected.
Applied area = 30 x 2.6 ~ 78 c~
2
Resistance = 42 ·
5
x 1.4 x 0.84 = 50.23 tons < Q Unsafe
= [~
cos lX -
Resisting area + 2t +5k] t
cos cc p we
Hence use 2 cover plates of thickness tc each.
= (2.61 + 2x4.5 + 5x5.2).1.4 = 52.65 em2 Remaining area= 108.1- 50.23 =57.86
= 78 - 52.65 57.86 = 2 t X (42.5 - 4 X 2. X 0.35 X 2.4
Area of one stiffener c
2 COSlX ;

z 12 .. 7 em
2
t
c
= 0.933 ems. )
~et
- b s t"ff _= 14.3 ems ~t Take t = 1 :r, em.
1 • -< 16 (local buckling condition). c

- Take t s t"f_f_
1 •
= 0.9 em to prevent
.
the local buckling.
The other alternative is to use 2 diagonal stiffeners where
the induced force is:
A 2
stiff. -- 14 · 3 x 0 · 9 = 12.87 cm (O.K)
F = (108.1- 50.23} cos 6° = 38.79 tons
D
Welds Connecting Stiffener: 2 sin 48°

Based on allowable
. stresses (Fc = 1.4 t/cm2 F
crp = o.75 fy> 38.79 2
we get: _ Ast.D = 1.4 = 27.7 em

78.0 X 1.4- 52.64 X 0.75 X 2.4 =.4 X (42.5- 2X5.2) X 0.72 X S

Choose b st = 14 ems • .tst = 2.0 ems
s = 0.16 em Takes= 4 nuns.
 ..JicHAPTERi . 157 158 CHAPTER2
Example (2.9);, Haunched Connection Use d = 20 mms 8 H.S.B. (10.9)
M = 43.13_-t.m ; N = -6 .. 3 t!>ns· ; Q = 7.0 tons. Having a third raw in the tension zone we can guess .that a
portion of T will be resisted by this raw. Hence we can try as a
2.41
.
first approximation M 16 instead of M 20.
'
r
Tb

---::-·--i.·
sfiB36
~
r -l t

"-!=36.18cms
2. Thickness of End Plate:

Tb =
M
~ = 64.74 tons
86.67
t.cm

~
d=64.8cms
69.09 _ Tb . L B·M·D·
c ms M- --8---
86.67
t.cm
Where L = 2b
~-·r
cos9=0.948 + 2s + tb

F -- __ L
a = b = 1.5 d = 1.5 x 1.6 = 2.4 ems
s = 1.8 ems ; tb = 2.4 ems
~T 30.0cms ~ L = 2x2.4 + 2x1.8 + 2.4 = 10.8 ems see Fig of step 2
h = 36 / cosoc = 36.18 ems.
1 M = ------,
64.74 X.-----
10.80= 87. 40 t. em
h = (36 - 2 x2.4)/ cosa = 32.91 ems. 8
1
S = 1.8 ems for fillet weld around flanges.

1. Design of H.S.B.:
t =J ~=
2w'f
t
6 X 87.40
30 X 1.40
=.3.53 ems.

Kpproximate Solution:
Take thickness of plate t = 36 mms.
4313
T = ~ = = 64.74 tons
b db . 69.09 - (2-.41/2) - 2.53/2)

Use 2 rows of bolts ar~urtd the tension flange of the beam

3. The Exact Analysis:
Neglect the effect of
-;Io;-;-----·
--t-- ---- . ~"-"Wl.lW.uw.w.ui

with 4 bolts per raw. compression .force which gives

_1·:~, ~-
ems
.
6 30
64.74
Tex t • b , M·. = ---_8--- = 8.09 tons f N -- 79.29 • X: 30 -- 0 . 0027 t/cm2
. ·-·-·-· 79.29
ems

<7~; 29J =
3
Having the T · + P < 0.8T. As a first
condition 4
ext,b,M IX = 30 X 1246221.5 em
~- approximation neglect the prying force· (P) and use factor 0. 7
fI
instead 0.8. 4313 X 39.645
! 2
f1 = 1246221.5 = 0.1372 t/cm
. 8.09
T ~ - --- = 11.56 tons.
req. 0 • 70 JO.Ocms
 CHAPTER2 159 160 CHAPTER2
4313 X 31.84_ 11 t / em 2
;;:_;:_-~--=-=--;:: - 0.
1246221.5 .0.5 - 1.934
p = 0.9375 + 1.934 = -ve No effect of the prying force.
_ 4313 x 18. 435: 0.064 t/cm2 Then for group (1) of 'H.S.B. :-
f3 - 1246221.5 .

For Group (1): Text,b,M = 8.746 tons> 0.8T where :-

. Text,b,M =
(0.1372 + 0.11)
X
7.805
4
x 30 = 7.23 tons.
0.8T = 0.8 x 9.89 = 7.9 tons (Unsafe)

For Group (2): Hence use M 20 instead of M 16 it will be safe.

(o.11 + 0.064)
T
ext,b,M =
.2
X rx 30 = 8.746 tons.
Check of Shear: As all the bolts have the same diameter Shearing
force will be divided equally by the lower row.
For the determination of the prying force ( P ) apply in
Equation 2.16 :- 30cms Q(bolt) = ~7 = 1.75 ton.
- r-----"1

•••• 4.
d = 20 mms. , Ps = 4.93 tons > Q{bolt)

For the design of the fillet weld lines as well as the

Safe

3. 75 7.53.5 7.5 . 3.75

crippling and the stability of the corner connection refer to

••••
1 I 1 1
the previous example .

\j

a = 1.5d = 2.4cms b = 1.5d = 2.4cms t

p
=
3.6cms < step 2 >
2
w per raw of bolts = 30 / 4 =7.5 ems A (M16) = 1.57 em
s

4
1 w.tp
2 2
30 a.b .A
8
p =
4
< -3a r <a w.tp
+ 1 > + _ _:.:..::.__._2::.----
4b .4b 30 a. b .As
 161 162 CHAPTER2L
CHAPTER2
Or we can use K - weld.
Example (2.10):
Design the apex connection shown in the figure where:
Section (2-2):

M =25 m.t. L = 30 + 2 x 11.70 = 53.40 ems.

S = 1.80 em.

2500
T = . _ _
42 5 2 6
= 62.7 tons.

~ T 62.70
q2 = A--.- = 53. 40x1. 80
weld Sec.{2-21
2 . 2
= 0.65 t/em < 0.72 t/cm •
(Safe)

2. Design of H. S.B.:
Approximate Solutions:

1. Welds: T
b
=~
db
= 62.70 tons.

Use fillet welds:

S {around web) = 1.40 em. S {around flange) = 1.80 em. This .tension force will be carried by the two rows of bolts
adjacent to the tension flange.
Assume to use 2 raws of H.S.B. (10.9) around the tension
Neglect the small effect of the inclination.
Section {1-1):
I = 2 x 30 X 1.80 {21.25+0.9)
2
t 11cms J
flange.
* If we use H.S.B. d 22 mms (10.9) Tbolt = 19.08 tons.
X

+ 4 X 11.70 X 1.80 X number = 62.70 x cos a_

0.80x19.08 - 4.0~ ~ 5 bolts
2
(18.65-0.90) + 2 X 1.40 X

3 Use 5 bolts d 22.mms. in ·the lower two rows.

(32.1}
.;;._=--=--'-- = 87246 em •
4
12
3. Thickness of End Plate.:
Mx y
Ft(point a) =---I-=
2500x(21.25+1.80)
87246 T = Md = 62.70 tons.
Sec. l1 -1)
_ T1 = 62.70 x cos ax 12.40
=0.66 t/cm
2
< 0.72 Ml- 8
Safe
. . . CHAPTER2 163 164 CHAPTER2~.'
= 96.63 cm.t
0.8 Tbolt = 0.80 x 19.08 = 15.26 tons> Text(M) (Safe)·

Group (2):
Take t = 3.80 ems.
Text(M)/bolt = 0 • 11 x 17.75 x 30 x ~ = 14.6 tons< 0.80 Tbolt

4. Exact Analysis: (Safe)

N.B.
The prying force is not affecting the design as Eqn. 2.16 is
I
:.- p..acms
7 negative.

T
27-25 ems
+
i
i
~--
\4-9

12M 20('D·9ll
l
sr.-s ans

d
Example (2.11): End Moment High Strength Bolted Connections

L~
-+-· 4-9
J Erid plates - Type (3)-
. _ ·_tt1:5¢+S)

-
~
+ _. _ 3·3=l1.:?Pl • -splice Flange Plates - Type· (1)-

Design the following moment connection using high strength

30cms bolts (10.9). Choose two different concepts as follows:

{a) End plate moment connection;

3 (b) Splice plate flange connection.

I
X
= 30 X (
54 • 5 )
12.
= 404696.55 em
4

f = 2500 x 27.25 = 0 168 t/cm2

1 404696.55 • . = 30 mt
"t
17.75 . 2
f
2
= 0.168 x •
27 25
= 0.1Utt/cm Q1 = 3.0 tons

N1 = 10 tons
Group (1):
 165 166 CHAPTER2
"'CHAPTER 2
Moment 4. Exact Solution:
· Connection 3
30 X (54.78) 4
12 = 410966 cm
'
3000 X 27.39 2
f1 = 410966 = 0.2 t/cm
1. Straining Actions:
19.9 2
H = 10 sin 53.5° + 3 cos 53.5° f
2
= 0.2 x _
27 39
= 0.145 t/cm
= 9.81 tons.

Q = 10 cos 53.5° - 3 sin 53.5° Text= i [(0.2; 0.145) X 7.49 X 30] Sec.l1-11

= 3.52 tons .. (M)

= 9.7 tons< 0'.80 X 15.43 tons.
M = 30.0 mt.
3.52
Qbolt= -:;r-- = 0.88 ton < P = 4.93 tons.
s
2. Approximate Solution:
d = 36 - 2.40 = 41.8 .ems. The normal force "N" -compression- has been neglected.
sin 53.5°
H.B. Butt welds are used to connect flanges to the end plate.
Fillet welds are used to connect web to the end plate.
T =M 3000
-d = - - = 71. 77
41.8
tons

Connection
,Assume to use 2 rows each
{4) bolts. Assume.moment is resisted by bolts in.friction.

7.17 ( from Table (2.6) ~se

Tbolt = ""8-x___,o,....-=8~0 Force per bolt's group =M
d-
3000
(36-2.4) =
89.28 tons
required d = 20 mms)
= 11.20 tons 89~28
n
4.93 = 18.1 Take n = 20 H.S.B. M20 (P
s
= 4.93 tons)
3. The End Plate:
71.77 X 8.98 =
M
end plate = 8 = 80.56 t.cm. Stress in splice plate

80.56 X 6 2
t
end plate = 30 X 1.40 =
3.39 ems Take t = 4.0 ems. Allowable stress = 1.40 t/cm ; t = 2.2 ems

Force in diagonal plate =2 x 89.29 cos 53.5° = 106.22 tons.

 167 168 CHAPTER2
. . . CHAPTER2
Design the connection shown in Fig. in order to resist a
106.22 2·
Stress i~ diagonal plate = 30 X 2.6 1.36 ton/em < 1.40 moment ·of 15 mt. and a shear of 21 tons. Assume that the top
Saf'e flange connection resists'· the moment and the web connection
T
thickness of the diagonal plate resists the . shear. Determine the number of 20 mms diameter
high-stre~th bolts of the friction type.

Solution

lt.300x 28 ·
For H.S.B. d = 20 mms.

P
s
= 4.93 tons

i 1500
= -:::--;;----::--:::-
i F .
(top cover plate) 26- 1.8
i
B.f.I·B ·36 61.98 tons
I
! n
1
=
61.98
_
4 93
= 12.50 bolts ~=:=:=:=:=:::::1 ==ttcpl

Take n
1
= 14 bolts (see figure)

61.98
Example (2. 12): t
(cover plate)- 26 X 1.4
= 1.703 ems
n1 ·(over plate
('i ~ v')
(v ~. v) Take t = 1.8 ems
n. A ,.. ·~
High Stre~th Bolts

~{
.<
Type No. 1 Number of bolts required for the web:
) M=15-0mt

21 0
f.H-I-B-26 n
2
= 4.93
·
-
4.78 bolts, Take n
2
=6 bolts

f=
0. 21·0 to~s
B·f·I·B· 26

A
 CHAPTER 3
WELDED CONNECTIONS

3.1. Introduction:
The analysis and behavior of welded connections
presented in this chapter will be in many ways similar to the
bolted connections previously illustrated in chapters 1 and 2.
Generally welded connections are simpler because drilling of
holes for bolts is avoided and gusset plates can be eliminated.
Using welding, smaller connections are available and are usually
lighter in weight.

3.2. Process of Welding:

Welding is the process of joining two or more pieces of
material. There are many different welding processes, but those
used to weld steel all have in common the idea of beating the
pieces to be joined until they become soft enough to fuse. Heat
is used to melt the base metal and filler material in order that
flow of material will occur i.e., the fusion will occur.

The most common welding process~s. particularly for .

welding structural steel, use electrical energy as the heat
source; the most often used method is the electric arc welding.

There are many varieties of arc welding. but those of

interest here have in common the employment of a steel rod as
one electrode and the pieces to~e joined as the other. After
being connected to a generator, the tip of. the rOd is brought
close to the area to be welded. An arc is struck, and a current
passes through the system, mel,ing the end of the rod and local
regions of the parts to be connected. By directing and moving
the rod in.the proper fashion, molten metal from it is deposited
. . . . CHAPTER3 171 172 CHAPTER3L
in the desired amount and to the desired form in the gap between
3.3. Welding Positions :
the two main pieces. This .filler metal fuses with the melted
As the most common welding' processes. use electrical energy as
regions of two parts and, when cool, forms an integral bridge
the heat source, the most. often used is the electric arc. Since
between them. The properties of the w.ilding rod (usually called
the deposi ling of weld metal in metal-arc welding is by the ·
the electrode) must be as carefully controlled as those of the
electromagnetic field and not by gravity, the welder is not
main parts. Careful control of current and voitage and a degree
limited to flat or horizontal welding positions. The four basic
of manipulative skill on the part of. the welder are also
welding positions are shown :,.in Fig. 3. 2 where
required to produce a weld of desired strength.
a) In the flat position weld metal can be deposited faster

Arc welding may be done. either by hand or by machine. because gravity is working with the welder, so large electrodes

The former is most suited to the field 1and irregular welds in and high currents can be used.

the shop. The latter is most adaptable to reguiar production b) In the vertical and overhead positions, electrode diameter

type of work in the shop and, occasionally, the field. below 4 mm ( or at most 5 mm ) are to be utilized otherwise weld
Hand
welding is the older process, but the use of machine welding is metal runs down.

growing rapidly as automatic machi~es and production techniques

are developed. Generally, welds of equivalent size and strength
can.be produced by the two methods.

R-~·~
The zone to be welded is usually blanketed in an
atmosphere which protects the molten region from the

~9PP
encrc;>achment of impurities. This :atmosphere is supplied by a
Vertical Position
nuX:. which may be a fusible coating on the. welding rod, .a
fusible powder spread over the line of weld, or a gas sprayed
over the weld. Overhead Position

Fig. 3.2 Welding positions.

welding machine

Electrode c) The designer should avoid whenever possible the over head
position, since it is the most difficult one.
d) Wel-ds in the shop are· usually in the flat position, where
manipulating devices can be used to rotate the work in a flat

Electrode cable - position.

e) Field welds may require any welding position depending on
Fig. 3.1 Process of Welding
the orientation of the connec.tion.
 CHAPTER3 173 174 CHAPTER3

3.4. Different Yelding processes :- In this process, the coated electrode is consumed as the
. This section emphasizes the welding processes used in the metal is transfered from the electrode to the base material during
welding of carbon and low-alloy steel for buildings and bridges. the welding process. The Cfating is converted partly as follows :-

3.4.1. Shielded Metal Arc Welding (S.M.A.W.) :-

a) A part is converted into a shielding gas. ·
This is the most usual type of welding where beating is
b) A part is converted into other materials to refine the
accomplished by means of an electric arc between a coated
grain structure of the weld metal.
electrode and the material to be joined. The welding circiut is
shown in Fig. 3.3.a. c) A part is converted into a blanket of slag over the molten
Coated electrodes are utilized wbere"their compostion differ pool and the weld to protect it from oxygen and nitrogen in the
with respect to the welding steel as fbllows air, and also retards cooling.
a) For mild steel, electrodes are made. of low carbon
The storage of low hydrogen electrode must be in drying ovens
composition where the extruded coatings contain aluminium, silicon
near the points of use in the shop where unfortunately coatings
and other deoxidizers which offers excellent ductility and
will · pick up moisture if stored. under damp or high humidity
excellent crack resistance to weld shrinkage strains_.
· conpi tlons.
b) For high~carbon or low alloy steels, low hydrogen
electrodes are required with a ·carbonate of soda or "lime"
All welding positions are permitted (i.e flat, vertical,
coating.
overhead and horizontal).
c) The higher the tensile strength of steel being welded,
· ·the lower the electrode coating moisture must be to avoid weld
3.4;.2. Submerged Arc Welding (S .. A.W.) =~
cracking.
The submerged arc process can be achieved using automatic or
The coatings for electrodes E1o whose Min Tensile stress is
semi automatic equipment and usually used in shop. The major
2
4. 95 t/cm can contain a maximum of 0.04 percent moisture
limitation of this process is that the work must be positioned for
while the elecrodes E120 whose Min Tensile stress 8.4 t/cm2 is
near flat or horizontal positions.
limited to 0.0715 percent.
Co•tlngon .
electrode Electrode wire In this process, as shown in Fig. 3. 3. b, the arc is not
Molten
arc pool_ visible because it is covered by a blanket of granular, fusible
Gaseous
slllel ·material. The bar metal electrode is consumable in that i t is
deposited ~s filler materiaL The end of electrode is kept
continoussly shielded by the molten flux over which is deposited a
layer of unfused flux in its granular state ..

Fig. 3.3.a Shielded Metal Arc Welding.

 CHAI)TER3 175 176 CHAPTER3

The flux is the characteristic feature of this process and is For welding carbon steels the electrode is an uncoated mild

laid automatically afong the seam ahead of the advancing steel .deoxidized carbon manganeese steel, llhile for weld-ing low

electrode. It provides a cover which protects the weld pool alloy steel a deoxidiz~ low alloy electrode material is

against the atmosphere and serves to clean the weld metal. necessary.

Usually for welding carbon steel and low alloy steels the
best overall performance is obtained using a mixture of 80Y. C02
and 20Y. Helium as a shielding gas. A mixtuf-€! of 75Y. Argon and 25Y.
C0 can react with the weld metal.
2

The use of 100X co2as a shielding gas in ;,the least expensive

and has become extensively used for weldl~g of lower carbon and

Fig. 3.3.b Submerged Arc Process. low alloy steels usually used in building and bridges.

The electrodes are of mild steel having the notation E6 or E7 The shielding gas in addition to protecting the molten metal

and 4.95 t/cm2 from the atmosphere serves to control the metal transfer
indicating a minimum tensile strength of 4.25
characteristics, to affect the penetration and to control the
respectively. Fluxes are designated be a prefix F followed by two
undercutting.
digit numbers indicating tensile strength and impact strength
requirments for the required resulting weld. The combination of
3.4.4. Flux Cored Arc Welding (F.C.A.W.) :-
electrode and flux is usually designated together.
In this process, instesd of a coating on the electrode, which
The submerged arc process provide~? uniformaly high quality. is not feasible for a continously fed electrode wire, the coating
good ductility, high impact strength, high density and good material, or flux, is contained in the core of the electrode.
corrosion resistance.
This process may be achieved with or without external gas
Fluxes must be kept dry in storage to avoid moisture pickup shielding where usually a C0 shielding gas in utilised.
2
and the consequent chance of hydrogen cracking in higher yield
The appropriate electrodes used for obt~ining a butt weld
strength steels or in highly restrained joints particularly in
matching a base metal of grade St 37 is designated E6xt having a
thick members. 2
minimum yield' stress of 3. 45 t/cm . For other steel grades and
3.4.3. Gas Shielded Metal Arc Welding (G.M.A.W.) • other types of welds see Table 3.3.
In this process the shielding is provided entirely from an
This .process . is useful for field welding in severe cold
externally supplied gas or gas mixture while the electrode is a
wether condition and can be utilized in any welding position.
continous wire supplied from a coil through the electrode holder.
. . . . CHAPTER3 177
178 CHAPTER3
3.5. Veldability and Steel Properties .
The weldability is the capacity of a metal to be welded under
the fabrication conditions imposed. The weldability is inhanced by
low carbon. fine grain size and restrcted (low) thickness. E E
EE
oo
As carbon steel is the term applied to _steels containing the lt)\0
~N
II W
maximum percentages of elements other than iron :-
(a) carbon 1.7. (b) manganeeze 1.65, (c) silicon 0.6 and (d) 1'-
N
1'-
N
....N
copper 0.6 . The carbon steels includes material from ingot iron
containing essentially no carbon to cast iron which has at least
em~e.~edwa
(::>0 1
0
) 0 'h 'h
1. 7. percent carbon. The structural carbon steels are of the mild JS!Il""l l:'jl ~ ~
/
carbon category with (0.15 - 0.29) percent carbon. Satisfactory
£W:lJW:n 0 10 0
"<t 10
economical welding without ·preheat. postheat or special .welding "<t
ssau46no1 co <» ....
0

electrodes can usually be accomplished when carbon content does

£W:l/W:l"l "<t .... 0
not exceed 0.3 percent. The ideal chemical analysis of the carbon ~
(')
aJuamsa~ .... « ('")
steels for good weldability is as_giv~n in_Table 3.1.

Table 3.1 Carbon Steel Composition

0 0
. . ;:;.
for Good Weldability . ....
IQ
....
(')

Element Nominal Range Percent

Carbon 0.06 - 0.25

E
Manganeese 0.35 - 0.8
g
E
Silicon 0.10 max. ....
VI
Sulfur 0.035 max. v
E
Phosphorus 0.03 max. E
0

"'"
Table 3.2 abstracts the requirements covering weldability
E
related variables where the toughness and resilience are -measures E
~
of the ability of a metal to absorbe mechanical
obtained from the tension test of uniaxial test
energy are
(stress - strain
.. VI

diagram). The resilience, the toughness and the· transition

temperature from the Charpy V-notch impact test are the metal·
characteristec and are as follows :-
. . CHAPTER3 179 180 CHAPTER3
i) The resilience . is the amount of elastic energy able to welds. On theother hand, fillet welds are the most used types
be absorbed by a unit volume of.material loaded in tension i.e. it of welds and they represent about eighty percent, while groove
equals the area under the stress-strain diagram up to the yield welds are rep~~senting the remaining 15 percent.
··.;,.. '
stress.

ii) The toughness : relates to the total energy. both elastic

and inelastic, able to be absorbed by a unit volume of material
I
before it fractures. For uniax.ial tension, it is the area under ·pvzz%??2VZ4SSS\SSSSSSSSI

the tension stress-strain curve. out to the fracture point where (a) Groove Weld. {b) Fillet Welds.
the diagram terminates.

iii) Transition temperature of Charpy V-notch test :-

Since uniaxial tension rarely exists in ·real structures, a
more practical index of toughness is · used based on the more
complex stress condition {triaxial) below the root of a notch.
Notch toughness is the term used to desc.ribe the resistance of a
· {c) Slot Weld. {d) Plug Weld.
metal to the start of propagation of a crack at the base of
a standard notch. Notch toughness is most commonly measured by the Fig. 3.4
Charpy V-notch test. This test uses a small rectangular simply
3.7. Electrode Requirements :-
supported beam with a V-notch at midlength. The bar is fractured
Since welds must transmit the entire load from one member to
by a blow from a swinping ·pendulum. The amount· of. energy is
another , welds must be sized accordingly ·and to be formed from
calculated from the height the "pendulum raises after breaking the
the correct electrode material.
specimen. The Charpy V-notch test is widely us.ed to determine the·
The required electrode material depends on the base metal in
transition temperature T from brittle to ductile behavior.
cv the member as well as the process of welding and is as given in
3.6. Different Types of Velds: ·Table 3. 3.

The welds can be classified into four main categories After the proper electrode is specified to match the steel in
··which are the groove or butt welds, t11e fillet, the slot and the the pieces being joined the diameter of welding electrode must be
plug welds as shown in Fig. 3.4. Each basic type of weld has selected. 'J:Ile particular size of the electrode selected is based
specific advantages which determine the limits of its usage. on the size of the weld to be made and on Uie output of the
Thfi!se four types constitute all the structural welded welding apparatus since most welding machines have controls for
connections existing in practice. Slot and plug welds are reducing the current output. electrodes smaller than the maximum
rarely used. They represent five percent of the whole usage of capacity should be used.
.JI CHAPTER 3 181 182 CHAPTER3

Table 3.3 Electrodes used for welding. (partl) Table 3.3 Electrodes used for welding. (partii)

Type of welding and the Electrode Strength

Process Chemical 1leld
of corresponding base metal. Min Yield Min Tensile Remarks
Composition Position
Welding grade Stress Stress
t/cm2 t/cm2
Electrode:
Butt weld with St. 37 3.45 4.25 Storage of electrodes
Shield Low carbon
Metal Arc Butt weld with St. 52 All weld in drying ovens near
Coating:
Welding Fillet weld with St. 37, 4.15 4.95 Positions the points of use in
Aluminum, Silicon,
(S.M.A.W) St. 44 and St. 52 other deoxidizers the shop is a must.

Electrode:
Butt weld with St. 37 3.45 4.25 Medium Mn (1X) Flat or Flux must be kept in
Submerged
.Normal carbon (0.12~)
Arc Butt we~4 with St. 52 Horizontal storage, usually used
Flux : '
Welding Finely powdered weld in shop.
Fillet weld with St. 37, 4.15 4.95 constituents glued
(S.A.W) St. 44 and St. 52 together silitates Positions

Electrode:
Butt weld with St. 37 . 3.45 4.25 Uncoated mild ·rlat or C0 is the least
Gas Metal steel, deoxidized carbon 2
Arc Butt weld with St. 52 manganize steel Horizontal shielding used in
Welding Fillet weld with St. 37. 4.15 4.95 Shielding Gas: weld buildings and
75~ Argon
(G.M.A.W) St. 44 and St. 52 + 25~ co or .100~ CO2 Positions bridges.
2 .

. 3.45 Electrode:
Flux Butt weld with St. 37 4.25 . Useful for field
Cored Low carbon to.05~ Max) ; "'

Butt weld with St. 52 AU weld welding in severe

Arc Flux: · .
-·-. . ·, Filled inside the' Positions cold weather
Fillet weld with St. 37, 4.15 4.95
Welding electrode co~e .
St. 44 arid St. 52 (Self Shielded) conditions.
(F.C.A.1l) ~ .. _,.,
·• .
. '.
 .JicHAPTER3 183 184 CHAPTER3L
The common diameter of electrodes for hand welding are 4 and 3.8.2. Different Types of Butt {Groove) Velds •
s mms. For flat posion 6 mms can be used. A 8 mms fillet weld size Table 3.4 shows the different types of Butt (Gro·ove) welds
is the maximum size allowed in one run with 5 mms electrodes. For classified according to their particular shpae and named according
large sizes several runs in arc welding are to be made, while for to their specified edge penetration requiremwnt.
gas processes any size can be made ~n one run.
Table 3.4. Types of Groove Welding.
Table 3. 3 shows the strength properties and composition of
electrode to match the process of welding. the type of welding and
the corresponding base metal grade. For base metal of grades 44 1. ~Z?ZZ/?Z2AJS£SS$SSC~ 2. pzzzzzz~sssssi
and 52, only low hydrogen electrodes are to be utilized. Squat9 -Butt
• Welded from one side: Square Buttwfth Elacfdn; Bar
upiii 1.5 mm thidi-no gap.
• V".A!Idad !il!!r! both sides • Normal Eledmdea :
3.8. -··Design and Strength of Butt (Grt'love) Welded Connections .. uei!!S Nanna! Elac:lrade& : up to 5 mm.thil;k. 6mm IJ&P.
up to 3 mm.Uriok-no gep. up ta 13mm. thld:.lmm gap.
up io 5 nvn. thick.U.Ice
3.8.1. Nomenclature of the common terms :- 1.5mmgap. • Daep Panetrallon I!Jec:fmcles :
• \Neldocl from both sides uslna Up to 131liii Uiiiik. 6iririi pp.
Fig. 3.5 shows the nomenclature terms for groove welds. ~ ll8fHI(rallon elec:Wdes:
up IQ 16 mm. -no gap.

3.
-~ 4. r.#~~
Sing!& V Butt Weld
Groove angle
• lnc:ludlld AnjJM: Sinal& V DUll W.ld
~faelanle
Groove ce
edfor flat poslllon • . YWh Backir)g Bar
7cfl"ot'wdlcal posllion.
8d'(Of CHat IM!acl pordUon •
• included a11gllla aafll.

• Root Thiolcnpss;
• Gap3mm.·5nwn.
04mm. • Thlclcnela up. to 2S mm.
• Thickness up to 2S mm.
1.- • Grap1.5mm-amm.
1
!
~~ 6. ~H~
j 5.
Slnp "U" Butt Weld
Double V Butt 'INeld • lnculded angle 20•- .co•
• Included anp gap •Gap3 nvn.-6mm.
·111nd root th!ckni!H aiG) • Roo! thk:kn- 3mm.-6mm.
Full Penetration Partial Penetration Partial Penetration
• Thickness 13 mm.- 50 mm. • Root nidlua3mm.-10mm.
( When reinfon::ing fillet is specified )

• Thk:tnesia25mm.~.

Fig. 3.5 Butt (Groove) Veld Nomenclature.·

. . . CHAPTER3
7.
~~
Oouble "U" Bull Weld
. Dimanslona aa (6 ~
• Thickness 38 mm. upwards.
~~·
9.
Oouble ·r Bull Weld
• Dlmenslonsas(a~
• Thickness 38 mm upwards.
11.
~~· 12.~
Double Bevel Bull Weld
Dimensions as ( 10 ~
• Thickness 25mm. upwards •
Regarding the advantages,
each type, the following remarks are to be considered :-
i) Double-bevel, double-vee,
welds are more economical than single welds of the same type
because of less contained volume.
ii) Bevel or Vee grooves can be flame cut and therefore are
less expensive than J and V grooves which require planning or
arc-air gouging.
185
186 CHAPTER3L
iii) Single V welding is achieved from one side, it is
difficult to prevent distortion, This type is usually economical
8.
~~
Sln!lle "J' Butt Wekl
over 25 mms thickness.
iv) Single U welding is achieved from one side, the distortion
• Included angle 20'. 'YJ•.
• Gap 3mm. • 5mm.
• Root ttllcknesG 3mm..&nm.
is less than the single-Vee and is not economical under 19 mms
• Root radius 5mm.-10mm• thickness .
• ~ 25mm -50mm.
v) Double-Vee is a balanced welding with reduced distortion,
~~
requires reversals and is not recommended below 38 mms thickness.
10.
vi) Double-U is a balanced welding with reduced distortion,
Single Bevel Bull Wtld
• •
• Included angle 45 • 50 •
requires reversals and is not recommended below 38 mms thickness.
• Gap 3 m.m.- 6 mm.
• Root lhldr:ness 1..5nm-3inm. vii) Groove welds joining plates of different thickness shall
· • Thickness up to 25 mm. preferably be made with a gradual thickness change not exceeding
1:4 as shown in Fig 3.6.a. for tension members. In compress:ion
members there is no need for a gradual thickness transition. The
v
Ooub.. Bevel BlAtt Weld
difference in thickness may be balanced by a slop in the weld
metal rather than machining the parent metal as shown in Fig.
• Angles as shown.
3.6.b.
·Gap 1.5 mm.·3mm.
• Root thlckneas1.!Smm-3mm•
• Th~ up to 38 mm.
t b+d >l
lc e <3 mms
the economy, and the effects of ore" t/5
(a)
double-J and double-V . groove.
(c.)
(b)
Fig. 3.6 Groove Welds for Plates of Differ~nt Thickness.
'·
 CHAPTER3 187 188 CHAPTER 3 . . . .

viii) Tee-Groove welds of Fig. 3.6.c are accepted even if they Partial penetration butt welds as shown in Fig. 3.8. ·are ust•d
are not completely welded achieving a partial penetration groove in column splices and in connecting parts of built up. member-s
weld if the total weld thickness is greater than the parent metal when the weld is not required to develop substantial stress in the
thickness, i.e (b + d) > t and t/5 ~ c < 3 mms. If these connected material.
requirements are not fulfilled the Tee-Groove welds are to be
analysed as being fillet welds according to the provisions of It is not recommended to use partial penetration butt welds
section 3. 9. except in column splices or in other members subjected primarily
to axial compressive stress.
3.8.3. The Groove Veld effective
The effective area is the product of the effective thickness v

dimension times the length of the weld., The effective thickness

dimension of a full penetration groove weld is the thickness of
the thinner part joined as shown in Fig.3.7.a.

Incomplete pentetration groove

welds are not recolliiOOnded,
welds and unsealed
but when it is impossible to avoid
their use, the effective thickness of weld is taken as the sum of
the actual penetrated depths as shown in Fig.· 3.7.b and c.
groove

Column Splice
D
Buill-up SecUon

~*~
Fig.3.8.

3.8.4. Strength of Butt (Groove) Velds •

tg=tl Unsealed weld
The effective area of the complete penetration groove weld is
{a) {b) of the same strength as the base metal. For permissible stresses
two values are considered , the first for good welds fulfilling
the requirements of the specifications, the second value for
excellent welding· where all welds are examined to guarantee the
eZ:ficiency .of the joint as given in Section 3.16.
Incomplete weld Incomplete weld
i) Permissible stresses for static loading are shown in Table
(c) (d) 3.5.
VhePe Fe , Ft and q are the allowable compression, tension
Fig. 3.7 Incomplete penetration and unsealed welds.
and shear stresses of the base metal.
. . . CHAPTER3 189 190 CHAPTER3
p
f
ca =~ < 1.0 F (Good Weld). (3.2}
Table 3.5 w
c

Type of Kind of Allowable Stress for

joint Stress
Good weld Excellent weld
Butt Compression 1.0 F 1.1F
c c
and
K-weld Tension ·o. 7 Ft 1.0 Ft
Shear 1.0 q 1.1q

ii) For fatigue loading refer to Chapter 7

3.8.5. Behavior and Analysis of Butt Welded Connections:

3.8.5.1. Strength and Nominal Stresses:
A full penetration Butt weld, (Fig. 3.9.a) must have a
strength as high as the strength of the connected steel plates.
When using one of the electrodes available on the market, we must
be careful by choosing the appropriate electrode as mentioned by -jftaJ-

~ 1
Table 3.3.

It is clear now, that the design analysis of a -lf~.ol..-

full-penetration butt weld in a statically ·loaded structure is (b) (c)

thus qUite elementary. We must check only that the actual
stresses should not exceed the"· allowable stresses prescribed
by the E.C.P. 4001 as mentioned by Table 3.5.
Fig. 3.9

Fig. 3.9.b shows a butt weld subjected to an axial tensile On the other hand, Fig. 3.9.c shows ·a butt weld
force. The induced stresses are uniform and are· computed as: subjected to flexure (moment). The induced stress will follow
the relation:
fta= ~ ~ 0.7 Ft (Good Weld) (3.1) f
ca = -MZ -
< Fallowable (3.3)
w
2
where
· A·-·
w b.t, and ft a = the actual axial·
· · tensile stress. where z b t
= --:;6--
u· the force P is a compressive force equation (3.1) is still
Fallowable = Allowable stress as given in Table (3.5).
valid i.e.:
 CHAPTER3 191 192 CHAPTER3L
3.8.6. Constructional restrictions and remarks : b- \/here a flush surface is required, specially in dynamic
-------
1..:. Single V and U butt weld.s shall be sealed, loading, the butt weld shall be built up as given in (a) and then
possi.ble by depositing a sealing run of weld metal on the dressed flush.
the joint. Where this is not done, the max. stress in the
shall be (except as provided o.therwise below) not more 3.9. Design, Strength and Limitations of Fillet ~elded Connections:
one-half of the corresponding permissible stresses indicated 3.9.1. Nomenclature of the common terms

Table 3.5. Fig 3.10 shows the nomenclature of the commen terms for
fillet welds.
2- In the case of single and double V and U butt weld 18 ons.
and over in size, in dynamically loaded structures,
the first. run shall be cut out to a depth of at least
to the application of subsequent runs. The grooves thus
and the roots of single V and U bttt t we.lds shall be filled
SE"aled..

3- lorhen i t is imposible to deposit a sealing

metal on the back of the joint, then, provided backing material is
in contact ~ith the back of the joint, and pr~vided also the steel
parts are b~vell~d to an edge with a gap not less than 3 mrns.
not more tha~ 5 mms. To ensure fusion into the root of the V
the bar::king material at the back of the joint, the permiGsible .
stresses may be ta.ken as specified. in Table 3. 5.

4·· Possible defect that may resttlt in discontinuities Normal Throat Size
the weld are to be avoided. Some of the more common defect:> are : CONVEX CONCAVE

incoroplet.e fusion, inadequate joint penetration, pros:i.t.y,

underr::utting iclusion of slag and cracks (refer to Section 3.1~).

S.a- Rutt weJds shall be built up so that the thickness of

reinforce1nent at the center of the we;I.d is not less than
following
Uutt welds < 30 mms in size reinforce by 10 X
Butt. \-lelds > 30 mms in size reinforce by 3 mms Fig. 3.10 Fillet Weld Nomenclature.
 194 CHAPTER3
. . . CHAPTER3 193
Vertical welds made upwards in one run are generally
3.9.2. Different Types of Fillet Welded Connections :-
convex: Usually low currents produce the convex welds.
Fillet welds are made between plate surface which are usually
at right angles, but the angle between the plates may vary from 60o The penetration of ttle weld should reach the root where the
to 120°. Tee joints, corner welds and cruciform joints are all contour of penetration is usually as shown in (g) of Fig. 3.12.
combinations of fillet welds and are as shown in Fig. 3.11.
3.9.3. Strength of Fillet Velds :-
3.9.3.1. Effective Area of Fillet Velds •
Jl The effective weld section is equal to the largest triangle
Lap-Joint
Cruciform lr which can be inscribed between the fusion surface and the weld
surface, provided there is as a minimum root penetration, this

L penetration is not taken into account. The effective throat (t) is

·-I:
then the distance from the root to the surface of the isosceles
Out side Comer Weld trianglular weld along the line bisecting the root angle as shown
in Fig. 3.13.

Fig. 3.11 Combinations of Fillet Welded Connections.

The ideal fillet is normally of ·the mitre shape which is an j_~·

•throat"
isosceles 'triangle as shown in Fig. 3.12 (h). The mitre and convex· s 0
0

welds· are sronger than a concave fillet weld of the same leg Lls~
length when the weld is subject to static loadings, butt the
concave is stronger when subject to dynamic loadings.

(a) (b)
Concave Fillet Fig. 3.13 Dimensions of Size and Throat of Fillet Veld.
Equal Legs (e)

Fillet welds are stressed across the throat (t) of the weld,
while. their size is speified by the leg length (s) , where :
(d) (g)
. Unequal Unequal (h) t = K.s
Legs Contour of
Legs Mitre Fillet
Penetration The value of "K" depends on the angle betw.een the fusion face·
and it may be taken as follows :
Fig. 3.12 Fillet Veld.Configurations.
 195 196 CHAPTER3
..lcHAPTER3

Degree. 60°-90° 91°-100° 101°-106° 107°-113°. 114°-120° < 1.1 F . 3.5

pw
K 0.7 0.65 0.6 0.55 0.5
The· effective length of a fillet weld is usually taken as
the overall length of the weld minus twice the weld size (s) as
3.9.3.2. Strength and Permissible stresses of Fillet Weld deduction for end craters.
Connections :-
The actual ~stress in a fillet weld loaded in an arbi tary 3.10. Fillet Welded Connections Subjected to Concentric Shear:
direction can be resolved into the following components: The force acting on a fillet weld may be either parallel,
fL =The normal stress perpendicular to the axis of the weld. transverse or inclined to the axis of the weld as shown in Fig.
q// = The shear stress along the axis of the weld. 3. 14. a, b, c. Welds of tee joints (Fig. 3. 14. d} are also
qL = The.shear stress perpendicular to"the axis of the weld. fillet welds. The stress distribution in the weld depends on the
· relative orientation of load and weld axes. A few design
These stresses shall be related to the size (s) of the legs specifications take these differences into account, but most do
of the isosceles triangle inscribed in the weld seam if the angle not.
between the two surface to be welded is between 60° and-90°, when
this angle is greater than 90° the size of the leg of the
inscrib~ rectangular isosceles triangle shall be taken.

The permissible stresses F

pw
for all kinds of stress for
fillet welds must not exceed the following - ===:~:::::~5:
c=• =
{a) Transversal. · (b) Oblique.
I
.
All kind of stresses F · <
pw ..,.
0.2 F
0
3.4

Where FU is the ultimate tensile stress of the base metal.

In case where welds are simultaneously subject to normal

t t
shear
principal
an
stresses,

effective
_stresses.
stress
they shall
For
value
be
this
feff
checked
combination
may be
corresponding permissible weld stress is to be increased by 10 Y.
for the
of
utilized
stresses,
·and the
- ===~::::~::::::~:~~:
t:::l =~
T
·as follows ! (c) Longitudinal. (d) Tee Joint.

Fig 3.14. Axial Shear Fillet Welds

~CHAPTER3 197 198 CHAPTER3
3.10.1. Stress for Longitudinal Fillet Welded Connections:
l
Fig. 3.1S.a. shows a typical longitudinal fillet welded
connection of weld line (L). At distances, out of the welds,
the force in the upper and lower plates may be uniformely
(a} Longitudinal fillet welded connection.
distributed (Fig. 3.1S.b), but at sections near the welds it is
highly concentrated. 'ilnsile stresses in the upper plate

Fig 3.15.c shows the actual shear distribution in the

welded zone. The magnitude of its variation from points A to B
will depend upon the length of the weld line as well as the
ratio of the rigidity of the two plates b7ing joined. Tensile stresses in
(b) Teslle stresses distribution in ·the lower
the lololl!l' plate
and upper plates. ·
It is clear that· if we consider a uniform distribution
along the lines of welds (qaverage), the failure will occur

through the throat plane as indicated in Fig. 3.1:S.d.

(c) Shear stress distribution in the weld.

Using t}le assumption of uniformity, the problem is
becoming a very elementary one. The length of weld lines (L),
the size of welds (S), and the force (F), must maintain a shear
Actual shear
stress allowed by E.C.P .. as previously given in equation 3.4 : surface
(THROAT)

F
qa = 2L X S < (3.6)

Where:
qa = the actual weld shear stress.
(d) Mode of failure.
S = the size of the fillet weld.
L =the length of the lines of fillet welds.
··~ ~·

Fig. 3.15 Stress Distribution in Longitudinal Fillet Welds.

It is to be noticed t.hat according to the E.C.P. 2001
the computation of stresses are based on the size of weld while 3.10.2. Transverse and Tee-joint Fillet Welds:

in the American and European specifications the calculation of The typical shear stress distribution for transverse

stresses is based on the throat plane. fillet welds is shown in Fig. 3.16.a. The actual distribution is
unequal and will depend on the length of weld line (L) and on
the relative rigidities of the connected plates.
~CHAPTER3 199
200 CHAPTER3
If fillet welds are used to connect tee joints, the
stress distribution is somewhat more complicated as indicated in
Configuration Straining
Fig. 3.16. b. Acli'ons

- - Sec. 1-1
F

(a) Case of transvers fillet welds .

- A

Jl -1
?
_1
q1

· - 8--------C
1. q
lllfy l l
(b) Case ofT-jont.

=4fyav.
' r=!fyav.
__ T
F=M/d
t.L.
q .
y '<lJllllY
Fig. 3.16. Stress Distribution in Transverse Fillet Velds

IT l I
Exact analysis of such types of connections would be Shear
tedious. In order to eliminate complications of analysis, we Flow
consider a uniform distribution of shear stresses along all
This means that equat:1on 3.3 is· valid

~JJI
lines of fillet welds. N

for transverse and tee- joint · fillet welds. The .allowable

stresses of all kinds must not exceed 0.2 FU.
H

3.6.4. Different Types of llelded Concentric Shear Connections:

The different configurations
connections subjected to axial shear are shoWn in Fig. 3.17.
of fillet welded
B
Fig. 3.17 Concentric Shear Welded Connections.
. . . . CHAPTER3 201 202 CHAPTER3
Refer to The Following Examples: 3.10.4.2. Size of Fillet Welds
Example 3.1: Fillet welded connection of a single member. a) The maximum size of fillet weld should not exceed the
Example 3.2: Fillet welded connection of an unloaded joint. thickness of the. thinner P\ate to be welded.
Example 3.3: Fillet welded connection of a loaded joint.
Example 3.4: Fillet welded connectipn of a loaded joint (welding b) It is recommended that the following limitations in sizes
embedded). of fillet welds as related to the thicker part to be joined
should be observed as shown in Fig. 3.19.

t:*t2
3.10.4. Different Limitations Regarding Fillet Velds .
3. 10. 4.1. Deposited Fillet Veld Metal :- Below 20 mms. size .. 5 > s mms.
,1,

a} The limiting angles between fusion faces for load 20 30 mms. size "S" > 6 mms.
transmission shall not be greater than 126° and not less than 1
30 - 50 mms. size· "S" > 8 mms.
60° for flat and down hand welding. so - too mms. size "S" > 10 mms.
70° for vertical welding.
Fig. 3.19.
- 80° for overhead welding.
b) The minimum leg length of fillet weld as deposited shall c) The minimum size of fillet welds for buildings is 4 mms.
not be less than the _specified size. The throat of a fillet as and for bridges is 6 mms.
deposited shall be not less than 6/10 and 9/10 of the minimUm leg
length in the case of concave and convex fillets respectively aS 3.10.4.3. Fillet Veld Length :-
shown in Fig. 3.18 a) The effective length for load transmission should not be
Theoretical Profile
less than 4 times the weld size (s) or 5 ems whichever is largest.

r Profile in Practice
b) The maximum effective length of fillet welds should not
exceed 70 times the size. Generally in lap joints longer than 70 s
a reduction factor {3 allowing for the effects of non-uniform
distribution of stress along its length is to be utilized where :

{3 = 1.2 - 0.2L I 70s (3. 7}

L =~erall length of the fillet weld ; {3 < 1.0

c) There are no limitations for the length of fillet weld for

beam to column connections as well as for the flange to web weld
Fig .. 3.18. in welded built up plata girders (see Fig. 3.20~ ).
 CHAPTERJ 203
204 CHAPTER3
a) Intermittent welds shaH not be used in parts intended to
tr~nsmit stress~s in dynamically loaded structures.
No limilalions

I•~~
b) The clear distance between effective length ofeconsecutive
lt:_:::::¢===ro=l• wold .: intermit tent £illet welds, wether chained CL ) or staggered (L ).
1 2
shall not exceed 12 times the thickness of thinner part in
compression or 16 times in tension and in no case shall it exceed
20 ems (see Fig. 3.21).

(a) (b) (c ) c) In a line of intermittent fillet welds, the welding shall

extend to the ends of the connected parts. For staggered welds
Fig. 3. 20.
this applies generally to both edges but need not apply to
subsidiary fittings or components such as intermediate stiffeners.
3.10.4.4. Single Fillet Veld :-
a) Single Fillet welds subjected to normal tensile stress
d) For a member in which plates are connected by means of
perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the weld are not to
intermittent fillet welds, a continous fillet weld shall be
be utilized (Fig. 3.20.c).
provided on each side of the plate for a length (L ) at each end
0

b) For single side fillet weld between the flanges and web in equal to at least three quarters of the width of the narrower
I girders the weld shall be maqe with a penet,ration of at least plate connected (see Fig. 3.21).
half the web thickness.
e) Bridge stiffeners and girder connections are permitted to
c) For single side fillet· flange to web weld, this fillet be directly welded with the compression flange, in the case of the
weld shall be completed on the other side of the web and made tension flange , intermediate plates shall be inserted between the
symmetrical at supports and at the position of concentrated loads flange and the stiffeners in order to. prevent weakening of the
where the web is not stiffened by vertical stiffeners. flange by transverse welds. Where intermittent welds are used, the
clear distance between consective welds, whether chained or
d) Single side fillet welds may be utilized only for static
staggered shall not exceed 16 times the thickness of the
loads.
stiffener •.The effective length of such weld shall not be less
than 10 times the thickness of the stiffener in the case of
3.10.4.5. Intermittent Fillet Velds :-
saggered welds and 4 times in the case of chained weld~, or one
Intermittent fillet welds may be used to carry calculated
quarter the distance between stiffeners whichever is smallest.
stresses. Tbe,following restrictions are to be applied :~
~CHAPTER3 205 206 CHAPTER3
for proportioning such connections is similar to the method used
in riveted and bolted connections as previously outlined in
· section 1. 7. The tor$ional moment (Mt = P.e) and the
concentric shearing force (P) are treated separately. Then the
resulting stresses are superimposed.

( I

"Mt=P.e"
h
Ll "Q=P"
T T
r
L > 0.75 b or 0.75 b ~whichever is smaller.
0 1
Fig.3.22. Eccentric Fillet Welded Connection

- whichever is smallest. The following assumptions will be considered:

(tenstion member) (i) The center of rotation of the group of welds coincides
with their center of gravi.ty (C.Gl.
L & L < 12 t or 12 t or 200mms - whichever is smallest.
1 2 1 (ii) The shearing force is assumed to be uniformly distributed
{compression member)
over the full length of the group of welds.

Fig. 3~21~ Intermittent Fillet Velds. (iii) The torsional shear stress in the weld varies linearly
from the centroid of the effective weld area and is acting
3.11. Eccentric Fillet Welded Connections normal to the line joining the weld point to the center
"Shearing Force and. Twi~tlng Moment": of gravity.
3.11.1. Behavior and Analysis:
Referring to Fig. 3. 22. the weld is acted. upon by an In brief the above mentioned assumptions simplify the

eccentrically applied shearing force. The conventional method procedure of analysis into the following:
~CHAPTER3 207 208 CHAPTER3
a- Determine the center o£ gravity o£ the group o£ welds by
treating the welds as linear elements having unit thickness "t ..h/2
(c)
I
(S=1). Table 3.6 gives formulae £or the determination p
o£ position o£ the center o£ gravity £or di££erent
configurations. Mt • Cb-X)
(d)
I
p
b- The stress due to the direct shear "P" will follow the
relation: Rhere Mt = P.e
q-L-
Q
=p / A
w
(a)

The resultant shear stress qt must not exceed the

Rhere A = Summation o£ le.ngths o£ th« lines o£ welds.
w allowable values prescribed by the E.C.P. 2001 :-
= s . . (h + 2b) ..

c- The shear torsional stress can be computed £rom the relation: (_!_ + "t · (b-Xl 2 "t .h/2 2
A I ) + ( I ) < 0.2 Fu . (3.8)
w p p
(b).

Rhere Mt = the torsional moment = P.e In the above equation, one may use "qt= 0.2 Fu" in order
to determine the safe size "s" o£ the group o£ welds.
r = Radial distance. £rom the .
. centroid to the point
Rhere the stress is to be calculated.
I = Polar moment o£ inertia o£ the group o£ welds.
p

I /
/

The polar moment o£ inertia is illustrated in Table I• r / / qQ, I

3.6, for different weld configurations. The weld size "S" is

X
i /.
•/
ql Lp
taken equal to unity. h ~-----------
. c.c. --X
It has to be noticed that the most stressed weld point .I
is the· farthest weld point with respect to the center o£ I "Mc=P.e"
gravity.
e
For simplicity it is convenient to use cartesian
y
coordinates as indicated in Fig. 3.23.

Equation (b} will take the £o.rm Fig. 3.23

~CHAPTER3 209
Table 3.6 Sectional Properties of Fillet ''elds (
210 CHAPTER3
" Unit Thickness)

Type of Sec. e.G. Location Sec. Modulus Polar Moment of Type Configuration · Straining
Action
No. b=width
( x. v) Z=lx/ Y
Intertia
ci
h=height lp=at C.G. 0
::0 r-
.!. :.1 ~2P
-,-
l

iv
'II

1 h[l- =0 z =T
h2 h3 I:
I:
I

i t)
n~
X=Y lp=}2 u
0 Q=P
...
'II
f:flz :' Mt=P.e
.!<:

f+it fn:i
0
h(3b2 +h2 )
Ill
h2 1-.
2 X=Y = 0 z "'3 lp- 6 Cll
e Sec. 1-1
....I
-~
I._._
I

b(3h2 +b2 )
3 h __.J___ x= y = 0 z= bh s:l
.
__,_ I
lp:- 6 0
~':;l
0

w
s ~ fUW'
- b2 Ill t:
'II I:
~
Q=R
2
(b+h) -6b2 h2
4 mts
4 hi l-]Y
. j:!_f
X "'2(b+h)
- h2
y =2(b+b)
z =-a 4bh+h
lp= 12 (b+h} . .!! t:
~ s nmr
+I:
~

Mt =R.ez
X :I
u-0
UR
·II. - b2 -r..u
2 3 2
X = 2b+h 8b +6bh +h 3 h4 I
~R
5 z = bh+JL
6
lp-
12 -(ib+h)
N
el
ez
y = 0
b
I IJY X =0 2bh+h
2 b3 +6hb2 +8h3 h" 1:' Q=R
6
{f-1---J, y = 2ii+b h2 z =-3- lp=
12 -(2h+b)
til
'!;I

ae
0 .,
fDliii
' +
r-

I b I " 0ci
film " -m
Mt =R.ez
·2
'f. I-;;;;~
7
{S X== y = 0 z= bh+JL
3
I _(b+h
p- 6 ::0" -c ::Q
til "' "
x::l!t:
r;:;"
1..-u
0 !::
0
=
el-
F= ~R
'- ~R ' M=R.e 1

·~
i t'l

z .;,2b~+h
= 0 2 3
8h +b 3 h4
8
y
=
h2
2h+b
lp=
12 2h+b ..
0 Q

~ 2
b3 +3b +h3
2
·s"'
lll.ci
r-1!:1 .Q=Q

{3 .....
I
r-
9 x= v = 0 z = bh+JL lp " 'II II I

)w
Cllll=
3 II
f- 6
-" e"'
0 -
c
>M ( c.c.
+
II
II
II

..""
c.c.
+
Mt=M.+Q.e

~--
.2 ::I M = M.lw
ao "' w I
10 i = y = 0 Z = nr2 lp=2 n.rS ~u
..,.
i
)
.
F1g.· 3.24 Eccentric Shear 1lelded Connections.
 212 CHAPTER3
. . . . CHAPTER3 211
(i) Weld lines through section (1-1)
3.11.2. Different Types of Eccentric Welded Connections: The moment "M" is considered to be completely transmitted
Fig. 3.24 depicts the various types of eccentric welded via to the lines of yeld which are acting as rectangular
connections. elastic beam elements (see Fig. 3.25.b). The maximum stress
is regarded as bending stress along sectionl-1, therefore:
Refer to the following examples:

Example 3.5: Bracket.

(3.9)
Example 3.6: Seat angle.
Where
Example 3.7: Beam-column flexible welded connection. Z = I /(h/2} (2sh3 /12)/(h/2) 2
sh /3.
X X

3.12. Fillet Welded Connections Subjected to Bending Stresses: (ii) Weld lines through section (2-2) •
3.12.1. Analysis and Behavior: The fillet weld through section 2-2 will be subjected to a
In this section, the weld line through section (1-1)
torsional moment Mt= M and the stresses are to be calculated
be subjected to bending as shown in Fig. 3.25.a. Yhile weld as given in section 3.11.1. (see Fig. 3.25.c).
through section (2-2) will be subjected to torsion.
M ( ~2) ~ _M__,,....(=':"-2_) ~
2 2
p X

r_ttd[.Q ~ rr/Mt
_,-(!) q
I Where
= s.h2/12 zX = s.h 2/6
·~[H'- -· ~ ·:[r~- -·
I I IX
p = X

M 3 M
qMt =
.l 2(s.h /6)
2
s.h
2 -< 0.2 Fu (3.10)
til. ill. fca q ill. qMt

Sec.1-1 Sec.2-2
(b) (c) If a concentric shearing force "Q=P" is applied in addition
to the moment,· the induced shear stresses are computed as
follows:

q~ = P/2.s.h
//

(a) and either the principal_or the equivalent stresse~ would

be checked on. section 1-1, while on section 2-2 the vector
Fig. 3.25. Fillet Welds Subjected To Bending
. . . CHAPTER3 213
214 CHAPTER3
sum of shear stresses should be computed. The following observations are to be considered:

Refer to the following Examples: (i} Plug and slot welds should not be used to transmit
Example 3.6: Seat angle. . . (Refer to chapter 4 for more tension; that is, a force normal to the faying surface.
detailed-analysis) Tensile resistance depends largely upon the degree of
Example 3.7: Beam-column flexible welded connection. penetration of the weld, which is apt to be rather
uncertain in either a plug or a slot weid.
Example 3.8: Beam-Column rigid welded connection.
(H) Plug and slot welds are distrusted because of the
3.13. Plug Welds, Slot Welds, and Fillet Welds in Holes and difficulty of inspection.
Slots:
(iii) Plug and slot welds appear to be excellent on the surface
3.13.1. Behavior and Analysis :-
but may contain voids at the critical section (Fig.3.27).
Plug and slot welds (see Fig. 3.26) are used most often
to tie two plates together and, in particular, to reduce the
unsupported dimensions of cover plates in compression. This is
useful to prevent overlapping parts from buckling. They also
may be used for shear transmission. This use is generally
reserved for locations where it is impractical to use a fillet

--
weld.
Fig. 3.27

Welds of the type shown in Fig. 3.28 , are similar in

appearance · to slot welds but are simply fillet welds placed
around the edges of slots cut in the plate to increase the
length of edge available for welding.

Fig. 3.26. Plug and Slot Welds

The critical section for either a plug weld or a slot

weld is ·the faying .surface between the connected parts. The
unit shearing resistance on this section is essentially the same
as that of a fillet weld as has been mentioned in· section 3.10
Equ. 3.6.
Fig. 3.28. Fillet Welds -in Slots
~.._.CHAPTER 3 215 216 CHAPTER3
3.13.2. Proportions and Spacing of Holes and Slots :- N.B. It is to be noted that there are no limitations for the
The proportions and spacing of holes are illustrated in Fig. edge distances where the ends of slot and plug welds may extend to
3.29. and Table 3.7. the edge of the connected ~arts.

R
d . 1-- J . l
.:::...
j_ v
IFt
I R
The most simple rigid welded moment connection is the
r ~
"' corner beam to column connection. The beam is connected to the
p ' "'.,;r -oT
II'\ r _(
column by either direct butt weld (Fig. 3.30.a) or by Unes of
' \ j
fillet welds as shown in Fig. 3.30.b.

p I
p The butt weld is the simplest rigid connection, no
analysis is needed in a fully butt welded joint for' if . the

~l'~t: fH ~f 1/22222;: f zz z n ?itt weld metal is as strong as the parent metal, it is simply, a
continuation of the beam. Butt weld requires precision in
Fig. 3.29. fabrication and fitting-up that may render it less desirable
The minimwn and lllaXimwn of the diameter (d), the length of than other types.
plug weld (L), the spacing (p) and (p') between slot and plug
3.14.1. Behaviour and Analysis :-
welds as well as the depth of the filling weld metal (W) are as
Three Problems are associated with this type of
given in Table 3.7.
connections which are as follows:
Table 3.7 Beam Beam

Pl,ate Min. Hole

Holes an~ Slot proportions spacing c
:
thickness dia. or slot

~..
and depth of weld
(t) mms (dmin) mms Co ver
PIale
d > (t+8) mm preferably rounded next Ids

higher odd 2 mms also d < 2.25 t

5 & 6 14
or dmin + 3 mms whichever is
greater
Column
7 &8 16 .p > 4d Depth of filling of plug - t--
-
9& 10 18. 'p > 2L
- or slot weld . Jl

11 & 12 20 L < lOt

- - Where t < 16 mms,
- w=t
13 & 14 22 R = d/2 - Where t ?: .16 mms, w =-2t (a) Butt Weld Configuration. (b) Fillet Weld Configuration.
R >· t.
15 & 16 24 but not less than 16 mms Fig. 3.30
 217 218 CHAPTER3 . . . .
{i) Crippling of the web of the column at the vicinity of the (i) Crippling of Column Web:
compression flange of the beam (Fig. J.Jl.a). As has been previously outlined, the crippling of
the column web will exist in the region where the beam flange
(ii) The bending of the column flange opposite to the beam's causes compression. The behavior of the beam-column connection
tension flange (Fig. J.Jl.b).
is similar to that of the beams treated previously in Chapter
(5) volume (1)
(iii) The instability or the shear resistance at corners of the
column web (Fig. 3.31.c). · Assuming the beam and the column to be of the same
material, the parameters which one would suspect to control the
possibility of the column web crippling or yielding are:

sr· .,s T (a) The beam flange dimensions.

T ·-·-·-· T

)< Beam
)
(b) The column web thickness.

(cl The column flange fillet dimension "K".

c{~
<

( c For the analysis consider a beam compression flange

Crippling of bearirig against a column flange as shown in Fig. 3.32.
Column Web
Assume that when the compression flange reaches the
Column
yield stress the corresponding resultant compressive force C is
distriputed. along the base of the fillet (K) on a 1:2.5 slope
cal Crippling of Column as shown in Fig. 3.32.a. If the induced stresses along the
Flange
distance (tb + Sk) of the column web do not exceed the yield
stresses, one can deduce that the thickness of the column web is
sufficient to withstand crippling. This behavior can be
formulated as follows:

(
Fw = tbe. ultimate capacity of the column web = (tb+ SK).t
we
.F
y
Cbl Bending of Column Shear Resistance
Flange CC> at Corner
Equating C = F
u w we can compute the thickness of the
column web
· t we required to prevent crippling: (see clause 6. 9.4
Fig. 3.31 E.C.P .. 2001 ).
 220 CHAPTER3
?. . . CHAPTER3 219
(tb + SK)t we (3.12.a)

Ast =2 bst· tst

bst= width of the horizontal plate stiffener

tst= thickness of the plate stiffener.

These horizontal stiffeners are to be well fitted to the

column flange and in order to prevent the local buckling the ratio
bst/tst must follow :-

Fitted
< 25 / .fT (3.12.b}
y

.lGJJT
rn/~ (ii) The Bending of the Column Flange:
At the vicinity of the beam tension flange, the column
Equilibrium of flange tend to bend outward as shown by the dotted deflected
Forces .1.,.s s -s shape of Fig. 3.33.
Fitted

( bJ Stiffeners
Dimensions

(a)
t~t= c:=t::::..::::j:::::=J
X= twc+ 2! K- \d

Fig. 3.32. Crippling Phenomenon

i.e; (3.11)

If the condition of equation (3. 11) is not satisfied,

crippling will occur and a horizontal pair of stiffeners are to
be provided. For the determination of the cross sectional area
of these stiffeners the following relation is to be utilized:
(see Fig. 3.32.b} Fig. 3.33
--1. CHAPTER 3 221 222 CHAPTER3
The parameters which one would suspect· to control the the following form:
possibility of the column flange bending are:
(d)
1- The beam flange dimensions inducing the tensile force.
2- The column flange. thickness "tfc"· Equating

A yield-line analysis have been applied on a portion of

t2> (e)
the colUIIUl. flange as shown by the rectangle abed of Fig. 3.33.a. fc -

For the majority of beam-to-column connections X/bb

The results of the yield-line analysis assuming the
varies from 0.15 to 0.2 , one can choose the lower limit and
sides ab, be and cd fixed have proved that the ultimate load or
apply ·in equation (e) to get the required thickness of the
the ultimate capacity (P ) is:
u column flange to prevent bending. Hence:
p ::: a . F (a)
0.85 bbtb
u y -2
tfc >
Vhere a is a. factor which varies from 3.5 to 5.0 for the
common beam-to-column connection configurations. i.e. >· 0. 36j bb tb (f)
tfc

If the lower limit of the value of a is applied

One can decrease the ultimate capacity of equation (c)
in equation (a) we get:
by 20 percent. This decrease can be considered somewhat as a
factor of safety and hence equation (f) becomes:
p (b)
u
(3.13)
The total breadth of the column flange can be replaced
by three portions: two similar portions behaving each as
(iii) Instability or Shear Resistance of the Corner Veb:
previously given in equation (b) and a central portion of
The main problem here is the abrupt change in direction
"X" assumed to be stressed to the yield stress. Hence the tqtal
of flanges. It is to be ensured that the applied straining
ultimate capacity can be computed as follows:
actions (M, N and Q ) are safely transferred from one structural
steel element to the other.

Fig. 3.34. iilustrates a square corner connection where

i.e. p (c) the moment "M" is replaced by two opposite and equal forces "T"
u
and "C". For example the t.ension. force "T"- is transferred from
The ultimate applied tension force Tu can be written the beam to the column as shear through the corner web.
..lcHAPTER3 223
224 CHAPTER3
If Equ. 3.14 is not satisfied this means that the actual shear
stress exceeds the permissible stress (i.e. 0.35 F }, the actual
y
thickness of the corner ~b
"t " is insufficient. Some way must
we
be found to accommodate this situation by choosing one of the
alternatives (a} or (b).

M (a) The Use of Diagonal Stiffeners:

.......___.,.
A pair of diagonal stiffeners must be added to transfer the
remaining of the flange force "T" as a diagonal component.
II\ A

de The portion of the flange force "F "which may be transferred

a
he as shear within the web by stressing i t to the permissible limit
Fig. 3.34 "q = 0.35 F " is to be calculated (see Fig, 3.35}.
y

Having replaced the moment "M" by two equal and

F
a
= (0.35 F }.h .t
y c we
(c)
opposite forces, we can write the following:
M The remaining force F is computed using equations (a} and (c):
T =C (a) e
~
Where db = hb tb F
M
= - d - - ( 0. 35 F ) . h . t (d)
e b y c we
These forces T and C are transferred as shear into the
corner web within the distance d as shown in Fig. 3.34. The Hence the diagonal remaining force F induced in the
c 0
resulting shear stress "q " within the corner web is: diagonal stiffener as shown in Fig. 3.35 is:
a
T
q
a
= .,---.,--
t .h
(b)
F = [ M - (0.35 F } h . t 1 / cos a (3.15}
we c 0 db y c we

Where h = height of beam and column cross S(;ctions

c The required diagonal stiffening area is:
respectively.
t
we
= the thickness of the corner web.
with (b t/t t < 25/~ )
Combining equations (a} and (b) we get the following condition . s s - y

M / db where
t > (0. 35F }.h (3.14}
we y c F
c
= the allowable compressive stress = 0.58 Fy •
 226 CHAPTER3
. . . . CHAPTER3 225
In equation (3.16) the permissible shear stress "q" is
·replaced by (0. ·35 F ) and hence the thickness of the cover plate
y
"t c" can be computed. {se.p Fig. 3. 36 ).

3.14.2. Different of Welded Moment Connections:

Various types of welded moment connections are given in
Fig. 3.37.

Refer to the following Examples:

Example 3.9: Fillet welded corner connection.

(a) (b)
Example 3.10: Butt welded corner connection.
Fig: 3.35
Example 3.11: Haunched fillet welded corner connection.
(b} The use of Additional Cover Plates:
If the applied shear stresses of equation (3.14) exceeds 3.14.3 General Remarks regarding the coener connection .
the allowable limit the other possibility is to provide 1. Beam-to-column connection (Rolled
additional cover pl~tes of thickness (tc) welded to the
For beam-to-column connections with end plates of thickness
corner web. (t ) connected to the column flange with high strength bolts Equ.
p
Replacing t by the new developed thickness (twc + tc) 3. 11 to be modified to the following form :-
we 'Y .., jtp
in equation (C) and equating with equation (a) we get: I
I
.
/bb
I
I
I
t > (as 3. 11)
~
M - (0.35 F ).h .(t. + t )
- y c we c
(3.16)
we
.•
l.
I
I

I
I
I •
I
I
while Equs. 3.12, 3.13, 3.14, 3.15 l
I ltb
I
"'

0
I
and 3. 16 remain unchanged
)M
I
:
T -rs
s 2. Corner welded connections is a built
Equs. 3.11, 3.12 and 3.13 remain unchanged while in Equs.
3.14, 3.15 ..and 3.16 h c (height of column cross section) is to be
replaced by the height of the web only . (h c - tfc ). This is due to
II\ A the fact that the column web shear resistance for rolled
de
Sec. s-s sections is ( h . t
c we
0. 35 Fy ) , while for built up sections

I Fig. 3.36 the shear resistance equals [(h

c
7 2tf ) . t
c we
0.35 F
y
).
~CHAPTER3 227 228 CHAPTER3
3.15. Technological Considerations:
Type Configuration Straining · It can be noticed that the previous sections have
Actions
presented the different tYPes of welds, the strength and the
design. Concerning the factors affecting the quality o£ welded
Q=R
connections. the following restrictions are to be applied in order

f N=Zero
M=R.e
to avoid unfavourable weld details.

3.15.1. Lamellar Tearing :

Lamellar tearing is a separation (or crack) in the base
s:: • metal, cauSed through thickness weld shrinkage strains.
e
::I
r:J
0
Q=Q
-:::; The probability of' this failure can be minimized by .
0
0 0
01
N=N
r:: (i) Using small weld size providing the shrinkage to be
0
....
c0 M=M
u accommdated.
E,
til- II
Ill 110 II (ii) The welding procedure should also establish a welding
alii: II
I II sequence such that the component restraint and internal
N
restraints in the weldment are held to .minimum.
·(iii) The use of welding procedure with low hydrogen weld and an
effective preheating minimize lamellar tearing.
Some joints susceptible to lamellar tearing can be improved
Q=R
by careful detailing as shown in Fig. 3.38.
N=Zero
M=R.e

II
II (b)
rr- Q=R/2
I

[ N=Zero
IR M=R.e 1 /2
eL (c)

Fig. 3.37 Welded Moment Connections. Fig.3.38. Improved Welded Connections to Reduce Lamellar Tearing
. . . . CHAPTER3 229 230 CHAPTER3
3.15.2. and Brittle Fracture Table 3.8 Characteristics of Common Weld Inspection
The one sided fillet welds can result in severe notches as Methods.
shown in Fig.39.a. The remedy is to use two fillets one on each
side. A similar condition arises with partial penetration groove
Inspection Characteristics and Umltations
welds. Method Applications
Most common, most DetectS surface Imperfections
Backing bars can cause a fatigue weld notch if they are Vlsuai(VT) economical. Particularly good only.
for single pass.
welded as shown in Fig. 39. b. A remedy would be to weld in the
groove as in Fig.39.c, where any undercut would be filled, or at Detects surface Imperfections
only.
least backed up by the final weld joint. The backing bars should Dye Penetrant WU! detect tight cracks, open to Deep weld ripples and
(DPl) surface. scratches may give false
also be continuous through its length. Indications.

Will detect sUiface cracks and Requires relatively smooth

substnface cracks to about 2
Magnetic mm depth with proper
Particle (M1) magnetization.
lnaJCations can be prese!Ved
tacks can provide '+-+-:- on clear plastic tape.
notches (b) .
Detects porosity, slag, voids,
Radiographic Irregularities, lack Of fusion.
(Rl) Film negative Is permanent
record.
Detects cracks in any
orientation,
Slag, lack of fusion, Inclusions,
lamellar tears, voids.
Can detect a favorably
Fig.3.39. Notches and Brittle Fracture. UHrasonlc
oriented planar reflector
(UT)
smaller than 1mm.
Regularly calibrate on 1 ~ mm
3.16. Weld Inspection Methods : dla drilled hole.
Can scan almost any
The designer must specify in the contract document· the type commercial thickness.
of weld inspection required as well as the extent and application
of each type of inspection.
surface.
careless use of magnetization
prods may leave false
Indications.
Detects must occupy more
than about 1 115 CJb of
thlcknesa to raglster.
Only cracks partial to
Impinging beam register.
Radiation haZards
Exposure time increases with
thickness.
SUrface must be smooth,
Equipment must be frequenUy
calibrated.
Operator must be qualified.
Exceedingly coarse grains will
give false Indications.·
Certain geometric
configurations give false
Indication of flaws.

Table 3.8 summarizes the characteristics and capabilities of 3.17 Summary:

the five most commonly used methods for welding inspection. Table 3. 9 summarizes the allowable stress according to
the E.C.P. 2001 for major types of fillet welded connections.
.._,CHAPTER 3 231 232 CHAPTER3
Table 3.9 Fillet Welded Connections. Example (3.1):

Configuration Straining Allowable Stresses A truss member is composed of 2 angles b. to. b. (80x80x10)
Type
Actions (E.C.P. 2001)
(Steel 37). The member is welded to a gusset plate 10 mms
thick. Design the connection if · the force is 37 tons.
Q=F,
Geometrical length of the member is 250 ems.
<lw,....=F; /L.S

(,1 0
-~
bu
=
.. ..=
(,1
(,1
=
.::

0
p
4
It?/q:ll
,qQ...
qt
q
Mt=P.e
Q=P

•?" -as
- p
qt =Vertical Summation
of Rw,Mt and Rw,q
·--·-·-r·-------·-·-·
/
.==~-==h·34
__ _j_s·66cms
ems

r.lO
I q =Mt .r_,. qt ~0.2F11
t\1
t---h-J W,Ml Jp

~
(1)-(1)
Solution

~
<l,,.,=F/2L.S <lw,., ~0.2F11

(2)-(2)

£ lF (ID fw =F/2L.S
l..
f,
l..-
<0.2F11 2 34
F1 = 37 x -8-
· = 10.82 tons F2 = 37 x 5 = 26.18
5 66
tons.

(l)-(1)
Allowable stress·for fillet weld·= 0.2 FU = 0.72 t/cm2 •

Q=F.cose
.... T=F.sine
The thickness of angle being 10 mm.
~

.,ti
Ill ~1.1(0.2Fu)
take size of weld S = 10 mms.
.s
.D F1
0
E
0 L1 -2 X 0.72 X 1 + 2 s =2 X
10.82
0.72 X 1.0 + 2 X 1.0
I
-to
= 9.5 ems. < 70 s (o.k)
Q=Q
.M=M F2 26.18 .
N=N L2 =2 X 0.72 X 1 + 2 s 2 X 0.72xl.O + 2 X 1.0
q =_g__
W?.t 2.h.S
$1.1(0.2F11 )
= 20.18 ems. < 70 s (o.k)
M.h/2
(1)-{1) r •.t. =-~-
+ N
!L.S

** **
. . . CHAPTER3 233 234 CHAPTER3L
(

Example (3.2): · Member ( 1) :

Design the given bottom chord connection F = 6.67 X 1:23 = 1.82 ton F = 6 " 674.50
x ·
3 27
= 4.846 tons
1 4.50 2
(unloaded) using to two different concepts:
(I) Bottom chord members are separate. ChooseS= 0.50 em (thickness of angle); q = 0.2x3.6 = 0.72 2
t/cm
(II) Bottom chord is continuous. L
1
= 2 X. 0.72
1.82
X 0.50 + 2 X 0.50: 2.52 + 1.0 = 5.0 + 1.0
= 6~00 ems
Member 1 2 3 4 The effective length ~ 5.0 ems or 4 s (o.k)

D. F. 6.67 t (I) 3.85 t (I) 14 .. 5 t (I) 22.2 t (I) . 4.846

L2 =2 x 0.72 x 0.5 + 2 x 0.50 = 6.72 + 1.0 = 7.72 ems
Cross. Section 2 < 45x45x5 2 < 55x55x6 2; < 60x60x6 2 < 70x70x7

Member (2):
Solution
F
1
=3.855.50
X 1.56 =
1.092 F2 = 3 ' 855 ~5 ~· 94 = 2.758 tons.
A. Separate Connections
Choose S = 0.60 em.
{Unloaded Connection)
L1 . = ..--......-,~
2 X 0.72 ...:',:,09.: . X2=-:::--:,-,--
1
0.60 + 2 X 0. 60 = 1.16 + 1.20 = 5.0 + 1,-20
= 6.20 ems

2.758
L2 =2 X 0.72 X 0.60 + 2 X 0.60 = 3.18 + 1.20 = 5.0 + 1.20
= 6.20 ems

Member (3):
~ 14.5 X 1.69 _
F
1 - 6 _0 - 4.08 tons F2 = 14.56.0x 4.31 = 10.41 tons

Choose S = 0.60 em.

K. L =2 4.08
1-69cmsf=~ = 4.71 = 5.0
4.31cmsf- 1 X 0.72 X 0.60 ~ 2 X 0.60 + 2 X 0.60 + 1.Z0
=6.20 ems.
= 10.41
L2 2 X 0.72 X 0.6 + 2 X 0.60 = 12.04 + 2 X 0.60 = 13.24 ems.
 235 236 CHAPTER3L
CHAPTER3
Member (4}: 2.167
22.2 X 1.97 : 6.24 tons. F = 22.2 X 5.03 = 15.95 tons L1 = 2 X
_
0.70 X 0 72
+ 2 X 0.70 = 2.14 + 1.40 = 5.0 + L40
F
1
= 7.0 2 7.0
= 6.40 ems.

ChooseS= 0.70 em.

5.533 _
L2 = 2 0.70 X 0 72
+ 2 X 0.70 = 5.48 + 1.40 = 6.88 ems.
Ll =2
6.24 + 2 X 0.70 = 6.18 + 2 x 0.70 = 7.58 ems.
X
X 0.70 X 0.72

L2 =2 X
15.95
0.70 X 0.72
+ 2 X 0.70 = 15.81 + 2 X 0.70 = 17.21 ems

Example (3. 3):

Design the connection shown in figure where the top chord
member .is continuous (loaded connection).
B. Lower Chord Continuous

(Unloaded Connection)

Assumptions:
1. Line of action of the load transmitted by the purlin
(P = 4.0 tons) will intersect the center lines of
different members composing the connection.

2. The component of the load of the purlin {2 ton) acting

Lower Chord: parallel to the chord will induce a moment ·c H =2

F (lower chord) = r 4 - r 3 = 22.2 - 14.50 =7.70 tons. x 1.970 = 3.94 ton.cm) which will be neglected.

= F1 cos ·30° + F 2 sin 60°

3. ·On. the other hand the other component of 3.46 tons
= 6.66 x 0.86 + 3.85 :it 0.50 = 7.70 tons. acting perpendicular to the chord is assumed to be
transmitted equally by both members {1) & (2).
F x 1.97 = 2.167.tons.
= 7.707.0 F2 = 7 .. 70 X7 5.03 = 5.533 tons
1

ChooseS= 0.70 em.

 "'CHAPTER 3 237 238 CHAPTER3L
Continuous Members (B) Separate Members

F1 = 3.407.0
X 1.97
= 0 .956 t on F
2
=
3
.4~.~ 5 03
· = 2.44 tons.

3.46 t
Y1 = Y2 = -2- = 1. 73 on

1.97 ton.

R :
2
j (2.44)
2
+ (1.73)
2
= 2.99 tons.

ChooseS= 0.70 em.

L
1
= 0. 70 ~ 6. 72
1 9
X
2 + 2 X 0.70 = 1.95 + 1.40 = 5.0 + 1.40
= 6.40 ems
12.60 x 1.97 = 3.546 tons F~ = 16 x
1 97
• =4.503 tons
L
2 = O. 70 ;·~~?2 X
2 + 2 X 0.70 .;, 2.96 + 1.40 = 5.0 + 1.40 7.0

= 6.40 ems. ·F = 12.6 . x 5.03 _ O

2 7 0 - 9 . 54 tons F; = 16 ;.~· 03 =11.497 tons
l·
I)J:
 239 240 CHAPTER3
Member ( 1):
1. 73
= 0.865 ton " 1. 73
-2- 0.865 ton As previously calculated R
2
= 11.53 tons, R = 4.59 tons
1
Choose the thickness of'the gusset plate = 1.0 em.
II

R :::: 3.65 tons R2 = 9.09 tons R = 11.53 tons

2
1
Then failure will take place on either plane (1) or (2) due

Comparing the results of separate and continuous members we can to direct shear.
conclude that the purlin load can be neglected for the separate 11 53 = 16 . 01
L2 -- 2 X 0. 72• X 0. 50 + 2 X
0 • 50 + 1 " 0 = 17 • 01 ems
case.
< 40 x 0.50 o.k
Thickness of angle = 0. 70 em • hence take s2 = o. 70em.

o~7~ X
9
Example (3.4): L1 =2 X 0. 7 0 + 2 X 0.7 = 4.55 + 1.40 = 5.0 + 1.40
Design the connection given in example (3.3) using an embeded
= 6.40 ems.
welding (loaded Connection).
Member (2):
(A) Separate Connection R
1
= 3.65 tons R = 9. 10 tons.
2

o~7~ x
0
L2 =2 X 0.5 + 2 X 0.50 = 12.63 + 1.0 = 13.63 ems

3.65 2 0
=2.x0.72x0.70+ x · 70 = 3.87 + 1.40 = 5.0 + 1.4
= 6.40 ems.

(B) Continuous Chord Members

R = 1.97 ton
1
R
2
=2.99 t.

. L
.. ' 2
2 99
= :;:;----;~-;:;"::;;:-~-=
2 X 0.72 X 0.50
+ 2 X 0. 50

\~
7
• • •• L. 1 = 2 XO. X O.70 + 2 x 0. 70

= 1.95 +- 1.40 = 6.40 ems.

"'CHAPTER 3
241 242 CHAPTER3L
Example (3.5): 2.857 (36+1.0+27) 182.85 t. em. Qy = 21.0 tons.
Design the r~uired weld lengths of the bracket shown in Fig.
2.857 tons (Neglected for shear calculations only)
to resist a load V = 21. 0 ·tons and H = 1. 60 ton. The breaking
force = 2. 857 ton.
.
Design the. weld lines considering that the Properties of Area:
applied loads are static l6ads.
2
Solution A= 2x54x2.2 = 237.6 em ; I
X
= 2
[ 54 X - 3
2.2 HOcms 2-20 ems
I
y =2 12
+ 54 X 2.2
11 ( 1':
Preliminary Dimensioning:
2 4
The dimens.ions of the bracket can be asstimed as shown. llhere X 17. 1 ] = 69476.62 cm .
i
j.s . taken ~qual to the col~
the thickness of the bracket
i
flange.
The horizontal shock 1.6 tons is directely transmited to
I
p = IX y
4
+ I = 127213.416 em . ·--r-·-
the collllllii.
{A) With Braking Force Polnt (A): Sec. St - St
Case (II) M M
X y 924 X 27 125.7 X 18.20 2
fb = z +
zy 57736.8
+
69476.62
= 0.465 t/cm .
X
( 1) Section.. (S -s ):
1 1
Mt.rA 182.85 X 32.56 2
M = 21 x 44 = 924 .t.cm. =-I--= 127213.42 = 0.047 t/cm
X p

M =·2.857 :X 44
y
= 125.7 t.cm.
f
e
= j(0.465) 2 + 3{0.047)
2
= 0.47 t/cm2 .

< 1.4 X 1.1 X 1.2 (o.k)

Point (B):
21
qQ~ = 23 x _
237 60
= 0.133 t/cm
2

182,JI5 X 18. 20 2
f27213. 42 = 0 . 026 t/cm .
~:=.:;===r=ct=--
2
q = 0.159 t/cm . Safe
total
q-dist
The thickness of the gusset can be decreased to 1.0 em.
~·CHAPTER3 243 244
(2) Fillet Weld Connecting Bracket to Column:

CD
~ = 1349.25 X 27.0
' qMt 2 X 60689.25
.:..
: p

q~ = 1349.25 x 20.25 = 0 _225 t/cm2

Mt 2 X 60689.25

21 2
q~ = :;;----::--== = 0. 097 t/em
Section 1-1 beam web to fillet weld = 1.0 ems Q 2 X 108

A = 54 x 1.0 + 2 x 27 x 1.0 = 108 2

em .
2
qt =J (0.097 + 0.225) + (0.3)
2
0.44 t/cm2

- . (27} 2 b2·
X= 2 x 27 =6.75 ems (Table 3.6} x=
~
+ 54 (2b + b)
f
e = j (0.287)
2
+ 3(0.44)
2
= 0.814 t/cm2 1.1 x 0.72 x 1.2

I
X
: 54J X
12
1 · 0 + 2 X 27 X 1.0 X 27 2 = 52488 cm
4 (o.k)
At point (B):
-3
I =54 x 6.75 2 + 2 x 27 xt.O + 2x27x (13.5 -·6.75) 2 = 8201.25 em4
f - 2.857 182.84 X 27 + 183.56 X 6.75
t - 2 X 108 + 2 X 52488
= 0.135 t/cm 2
y 2 X 8201.25

21.0 2
I = IX + I = 60689.25 4
cm .
qQ~ = 2 x 108 = 0.097 t/cm
p y

~ 1349.25 X 27
Staining Actions: q
Mt(x)
= :;;-----:::==-...;:.:.
2 X 60689.25
M
X
= 2.857 X (36 + 1.0 + 27) = 182.84 t.cm.

M = 2.857 x (44 + 20.25} = 183.56 t.cm.

q T = 1349.25 X 6.75
0.075 t/cm 2
y Mt(y) 2 X 60689.25

Mt = 21 x (44 + 20.25) = 1349.25 t.cm.

Q
y
= 21.0 tons. N = 2.857 tons. q total = J(0.3)
2
+ (0.097 + 0.075) 2

. . 2
At Point (A): ::; 0.346 t/cm .

ft = NA_ + M M
x.y + y.x
-~- -I-·
2
X y f
e = j(0.135) + 3(0.346) 2

182.84 X 27 + 183.56 X 20.25 2

-;;;---;;;=..---:=-.=--- = 0. 287 t/em •
=2 X 108 + 2 X 52488 2 X 8201.25 0.613 t/cm
2
< 1.1 x 0.72 x 1.20 (o.k)
 CHAPTER3 245 246 CHAPTER3
Section 2-2 outstanding face of weld with steel plate of bracket (B) Without Force - Case (I}
21.0 tons will induce
A
2
= 0.097 t/cm
Refer to example (1.111.
2
0.097 t/cm
2. Fillet Welds the Bracket to the Column 1-1}
= 1349.25 t.cm will induce Sec. 2-2 2.1. Properties of Area:
2 4
q = 0.3 t/cm
2
; qA = 0.225 0.075 q = 0.3 t/cm2 A = 108 em ; I
X
= 52488 cm
Bj_ 27-ocms
r
A// j_

4 4
N = 2.857 tons I
y
= 8201.25 em I
p = 60689.25 em

2 857 2
2
·
X 108
= 0.013 t/cm x = 6.75 ems

2.2. Straining Actions:

M
X
= 182.84 t.cm (assume resisted by 2 horizontal lines Qy = 21 tons. ; Mt = 1349. 25 t. em
by force F)
M
X 182.84
= F = = 6.53 tons 2.3. Stresses:
(27 + 1)
Point (A)
6.53 2
2 X27 X 1
= 0.121 t/cm --7
qMt(x) = 0.3 t/cm
2
q~t(y) = 0.225 t/cm
2
A
r;::::$=~=*1--• QMt X

M
y
= 183.56 t.cm (assume resisted by the vertical line)
q~ = 0.097 t/cm
2 1 tlMt y

183.56 X 27 2
/ la.Q
fB = 3 = 0.189 t/cm
j_ {2 X 54 )/12 q
total = ~I< o. 225 + o. 097) 2 + <o. 3) 2

2 2
J(0. 189) 2 + 3 (0.097)
2 = 0.439 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm (o.k)
fB {e) =
2
Comparing the results of the two cases of loading we can conclude
= 0.83 t/cm < 1.1 X 0.72 X 1.2
that the case of loading (IT) is .more critical. Here the braking

It is quite clear that for this type of [ weld profile the force has been assumed to be totally transmitted to the column by
stresses regarding section (1-1) are critical compared to section one bracket which is very conservative. normally this braking
(2-2) (the difference is about 7Y.) . Hence no need to achieve this force is to be resisted by at least four brackets and hence the
tedious analysis regarding section (2-2). resulting stresses devided by "4".
. . . CHAPTER3 247 248 CHAPTER3
Example (3.6) (Neglect weld returns for the computation of stresses) Section (2-2): (Considering Contact)

-2
y X 20 = (12 y)\ 2
:: Weld return 2 2 1 1-0cm
l20cms
• 11I
It
"1 v -;r-
Get y 2.87 ems
It
3
H
II IX= 20 X ( 2 -~ 7 ) + 2 X 1 X
II
!t 3
( 9 . 13 ) = 664.97 cm4 .
3

27 X 9.13
I. 20·0cms J
664.97

2
2 f
eq.
=j {0.37)
2
+ 3{0.25)
2
= 0.569 t/cm
Design the fillet weld lines shown in Fig. Use E 60 < 0.72 x 1.1 t/em2 .
electrodes and steel 37, knowing that P =6 tons, e ~ 4.50 ems.
Decrease size of weld (S) according to shear stresses (qt}
Solution
on Section (1-1}.

Straining Actions: s 1 • 0 x 0.61

0 _70 = 0. 87 e 0.90 em.
Q =P =6 tons M = P x 4.50 =6 x 4.50 = 27.0 t.cm.

Section (2-2): Without Contact

-3
Section (1-1):
Neglect weld return at top of seat angle. Take S = 1.0 em.
I = 2 X 12 X 1.0
x 12
288 4
em ·
=

2 2
27 X 6.0 == 0 . 563 t/cm •
2 f
eq.
= j_co. 5625) 2 + 3{0. 25) = o. 7 ucm < 1.1 x o. 72 t/cm2
3 (o.k)
l 1 X 12
X 12 Take the size of weld = 1 •0 X O. 7
0. 72 X 1.1
= 0.88 em e 1.0 em.

2 2 2
q(t) = 1{0.25) 2 + {0.563) = 0.61 t/cm < 0. 72 t/cm (Safe}
~CHAPTER3 249
Section 2-2 outstanding face connected to angle leg :-
250 CHAPTER3

Example (3.7):
orie can assume that the vertical shear 6 tons is
transmitted by shear "q" to the vertical line (34x0.4) and by
normal stress£~ to the two horizontal lines (6.7x0.4).
Regarding the moment= 32.7 the transmition of forces will be
exactly as section (1-1).

12 2
f (A) .L = -=----:=--::-:
2 X 18.64 = 0. 321 t/em

2 ~ = 0 ..197 t/em2
= 0.063 t/em q
A(Mt)

Section 1-1 Faces of weld connecting angles to beam web :- 2 2 2 2

f(A)e= j(0.321) + 3 [(0.063) + (0.197) = 0.48 Vem ' < 0.72x1.1
Assume size of weld s = 0.4 ems (min size)
2 b2 It clear here also that it will be sufficient for weld
-- <6 · 3 ) - 0 85 ems x= (2b + h)
X - 2 x 6.3 + 34 - . profile [ to consider only section (1-1).
0.4 I
M ~ 12 x (7.5- 1.2- 0.85)
t
= 32.7 t.cms i Column Flange Connection weld lines (no Contact):
\ X Secti_on ( 1)- ( 1) : Assume size of wel-d = 0. 40 ems
12 0.321 t/cm
2 -~---·- 34.0
q//1 ~ 2 X 18.64 = ems Neglect weld returns
12 2
34
3 2 4 q .J- - -;:-----:;;;-;--...,.-= = 0. 44 t/em
I
X = 0.4 ( -
12
+ 2 X 6.3 X 17 = 2766.6 em // - 2 X 34 X 0.80

I = 0.4 2 2
[34 X 0.85 2 + 2(6.3 /12 + 6.3 X 2.3 )]
Mt =6 (7.5 x) = 39.9 t.em.
y
~ 39.9 34 / 2 2
= 53.15 em
4 q = X
= 0.517 t/cm .
Mt 0.40 x (34) 3 / 12
4
I =I + I = 2819.75 em
p X y Sec. S- S
2 < 0.72 O.K.
= (32.7 x 5.45)/2819.75 = 0.063 t/em
. 2 Section (2-2):
q ~
A(Mt)
= (32.7 X 17.0)/2819.75 = 0.197 t/cm
q;/= 0.44 Vqn
2
f~
M.y
= -I- = 0.517 t/em
2
X
2 2 2
q = j(o.321 + 0.063) + (0.197) = 0.431 t/cm
t(A) Sec. 2 -2 f
eq.
= ~1(0.517) 2 + 3(0.44)
2
= 0.92 t/em
2
> 0.72 x 1.1 Unsafe
 CHAPTER3 251 252 CHAPTER3L
Example (3.8):
Take s 0.4 x 0 · 92 = 0. 46.1 ems take s 0.5 ems Design the rigid connection shown in the Fig. below The beam
0. 72 X 1.1
is a B.F.I.B. No. (24). ~e column is a B.F.I.B. No. {30).
Considering Contact Area Between Angles and Column Flange
Solution
Section (2-2):
Assume size of weld = 0.4 ems.
M = 4.50 mt Q = 6.0 tons

-2 2
y X 15 : 2 X (34 - y) X 0.4
2 2
Get y = 6.38 ems.

1.0cms 1.0cms
-rr I I
1 (34~t
J ems
34.0

~Y- ~.x

-fl·fl~
Section {1-1): (With Contact)
. ~~

r _r y
Assume that.moment will be
ems ems
-.=:1'1«!
resisted by the whole effective noo

.Bl.~--
b
3 3 cross Section and that the
1
= 15x(6.38) + 2x0.4x(27.62) = 6917 cm4 24LO X
X shearing force will be resisted
by the vertical welds only. :1;:;:=4,.,
fl = 12x(7.5-0.85)x27.62 = 0 _318 t/c~ Assume size of weld S = 1.0 em. 1. 24·0 ems ~

Taking first moment of area about x-x, we get;

q - -:=-::::-:-1....,2~~ = 0.44 t/cm 2
//- 2x34. OxO .4
2
(24XL80) (24+1.0-y-0.90) + ( 24 +1.0-y-1.80) x 1.10 =
2
2
f 0.82 t/cm > 0.72 x 1.1 unsafe
eq. - 2
{24xl.O) (y-0.50) + 2{10.0xl.O) {y-2.80-0.50) + 2 {Y- 4 · 6 ) xl.O
2
Use size of welds = 0.5 ems it will be safe.
-
y = 12.67 ems.
 CHAPTER3 253 254 CHAPTER3

3 3
· 2 (10.53) x1.10 2x1.0x(8.07) 4.5o·x 100
I
X
= 24x1.80x(11.43) + 3 + 3 F
(24 - 1. 80)
= 20.27 tons.

2 4 ~ - 20.27 2 2
+ 2x10x1.0x(9.37)
2
+ 24.0x1.0x(12.17) = 11732.83 em qr
J.
- I:of24_+_2,..-x.__,1,..,o~> 0.4607 ton/cm < 0.72 t/cm

4.50 X 100 X 12.67 Safe

ft (point a) = 11732.83
Reduce S = 0.4607
0.72 X 1 .. 0 = 0.64 em= 0.70 em

=
ft (point b) =
4.50 X 100 X (12.67 - 4.6)
11732.83 °' 31 2
t/cm · From Sections (1-1) , (2-2) and (3-3) takeS= 0.70 em.
(The greatest).
6
= =---:~--=--...--- 0.178 t/cm2 . ,(vertical lines only)·
2 X 16.8 X 1. 0 ·section
----------): (Without Contact)
The N.A. will lie on the C.G. of the lines of welds (i.e. at
= 1.0cms
= 0.~3
2 2 mid height). - size of weld s
f
eq
(point b) = J(0.31) 2 + 3(0.178) t/cm
2 2
< 0. 72 X 1.1 t/cm . I
X
= 2x24x1.0 (12 + 0.5) + 4x10x1.0 (12 - 1.80 - 0.5) 2
3
+ (16.8) xl.O 4
2X 12054 cm
scan be reduced to 0.7 ems it will be safe.
12 . 24-0cms
1.__ _...;a 1
_x_~-lf~3x
450 X 13.0
Section (2-2): ft (point a) = 12054
24·0cms
_j
q// =2
= 0.178.
6.0
X 16.8 X 1.0

t/cm
2
ft (point b)
= 0.48

= 450
t/cm
2

x 8.4 = 0.31 t/cm2

< 0.72
--
N.A

!Jo-o
ems
j lr·o
ms
j
12054

0.167
Reduces= _ x 1.0
0 720 2
0.178 t/cm
= 0.23 em
Sec. S - S

Section ):
f
eq.
''(point b)= j (0.31)
2
+ 3(0.178)
2
= 0.43 t/cm2

t Assume that the moment is replaced by two forces acting on < 0. 72 x L 10 t/cm2
i the flanges.
Check stresses on Section (2-2) & Section (3-3) as before

1
._.CHAPTER 3 255 256 CHAPTER3L
We can reduce the size of weld according to stress at point
For Weld Section (1-1):
(a).
2 2
I 2x30x2.6 (21.25+1.3) +4x11.7x2.6 (18.65-1.3)
1.0 X 0.48 X
s = = 0.67- 0.70 em 3'
0.72 (16. 05x2) 4
+ 2 X 1 . 40 X 12 123672.5 em.

i.e. The size of weld for Sections (1-1) , (2~2) and (3-3)
will be taken s = 0.70 em. M.Y 4313x(21.25+2.6) 2
ft(point a)
I = 123672.5
0.83 t/cm

2
> 0.72 t/cm
Example (3.9):
Design the welded corner connection It is clear that this solution

shown in figure for the following will never give safe stresses in

straining actions: 2 welds.

,---- \

M = 43.13 mt.
To overcome this problem, we use either of the following;
- N =- 6.3 tons. (1) K - Welds.

- Q = 7.0 tons. (2) Haunched Connection.

Using the maximum size of welds:

s = 2.6 ems. (around flanges) Example (3. 10):
s = 1.4 em. (around web) Design the corner welded connection of example (3.9) using
K - Welds.
Solution
r .I
----·a·
30·0cms
ft

~-f_-:-pf
The K - Weld is considered
safe as long as the cross
section is safe.

~:~b--­ Check of Weld Line (1):

Fl.~: I I ~~0 .1 Weld line (1) will carry
8·f.I·8 42-5 only the shearing force Q.
8-f.I-8 42·5
. . . CHAPTER3 257 258 CHAPTERJL
L = 42.5 - 4 X 2.60

= 32.10 ems .. f.b = th. of beam flange.

7.0 =(1/2 (78 - 40.05)]/cosa

tc = th. of column flange.
S: 2 X 32.1 X 0.72 '' t = th. of column web.
no.Tof lines f~l.weld \-J = 18.98 2
em •
bf
we
= breadth of beam flange.

=0.15em. Detail K
IK -Weld ) b
stiff.
= 30 - 1.40
2
= 14.3 ems. bs t/t s t -< 25/~
y
< 16
-
Take s = 6.0 mms.
s = 6 mms (min. ) as the thickness
of the thicker plate (column web) =
to prevent local buckling.

take b = 14 ems , t = ~4 1 98
"" 1.4 em
bsaittB· l
bstif . _j 30·0cms

1.4 ems (o~k).

2
Astiff~ .. 1. 40 x 14 = 19.60 em
Design of Corn~r Connection:
(1) Crippling qf Column Web at Coinp. Flang.e: ~- . . .. "Welds Connecting Stiffener to the Column Web"
=
K 2 t ·= 2 x 2.6 = 5.20 ems. · t
c 2tf+- ----- f
= ( 21 (78 X 1.4- 40.05 X 0.75 X 2.4) )/COS<t
Resisting area of column web ir-- ~ 18.5 tons
= [5k + (tb/cos <t)]x twc = (5x5.2+2.61) x 1.40
L "" L1 = 42.5 - 4 X 2.60 = 32.1 ems ··- . ""r'· --=----..loot,
l
= 40.05 em2 .
Applied area from flange l1 v .......
18.5 0 4
S =2 X 32.1 X 0. 72 = • em ~ --,!

= 2.6 x.30 x 0.995 take s = 0.5 em ~fifferEr/ L,--coso<

A

·where : L =42.5 - 4 x 2.60 = 32.1 ems

Stiffeners must be used~ (2) Stability of the Corner:

db = 42.5 - 2.60 = 39.9 ems.
Area of one stiffener (inclined) Q =db=
M
108.10 tons.
. . . CHAPTER3 259 260 CHAPTER3
(B) Use Diagonal Stiffener:
Residual force= 108.10- 50.23

F = 57.87 ton~.

Taking the equilibrium in the horizontal direction we get:

R sin ~ =F cos «

llhere « = 6° ; ~ :i: i (90 + 6) = 48°

77.49 tons

77.49 2
Aone stiff. = :::---.;---;-;;;:
2 X 1.40
= 27.67 em
Resistance = 42.5
cos «
b
stiff.
= 14 ems.
2
a 11.. = 0.35
(q
. . Fy = 0.84 t/em )

42.5
tstiff. =27.67
~ = 1.97 ems.
=----
·COS «
x 1.40 x 0.84 = 50.23 tons.
Take tstiff. = 2.0 ems.
Resistance < Q
Check tb = 7.0 < 16 Safe
Use one of the following two solutions:

(A) Increase (tw>: Using 2 additional cover plates. (3) Safety Against Tension Flange:
t (min.)= 0.40 lAy coso:
c -1 beam
(108.. 1 ~ 50.23) = (42 • 5cos
- 4 X 2· 6 )
«.
X 2 t
c
X 0.84
~ 0.40 J2.60 X 3.0

tc = 0.949 em.
=.3.S3.cms > 2.60 ems
Choose t
c
= 1.0 em. (Unsafe)

Use two stiffeners as used for

Two additional corner plates each of thickness 1.0 em are to compression flange~
be added.
[b = t4 ems ,t = 1.4 em]
..lcHAPTER3 261 262 CHAPTER3
N.B. To determine the size of weld use the following approximate
The tension flange of the rafter analysis:
may be extended to act as a
stiffener. The tension force will 43.13 X 100
Compression force =
(67.2-2.4) cos e
be . transmitted to the column via t

fillet, weld llnes whose length (L] ·!g 70.43 tons

is: 70.43
s = (30+2x11.9)xp.72 = 1 · 81 em

L = 30+4x11.7+32.2x2 = 141.2 ems

Take (s) around flanges 1.8 em

T=C
= 43.13' X 100 = 108.1 tons (s) around web 1. = 1.4 em
(42.5 - 2.6)
~~
ems ems
108.1 2
= 1.06 em takes = 11 mms I = 2x1.80x30x(33.6 + 0.9) +4x1.8x11.9
s = ""'1-=4•1-.;;:;:2-x~o,...·.;:;7; :;:2 X
3
x (3i.2-0.9) 2 + 2x1.40x ( 28 · 80x 2 )
12
Example (3. 11):
given in example (3.8) 4
Design the corner welded connection = 251800 em .
using a haunched connection.
ft (point A) ---...,.=~----'- = 0. 60 t/cm2 < 0. 7 t/ em
2

(o.k)

f t ( po 1. n t B) = 0.60 X 28.80
(33.6 + 1.80)
= 0 · 49 t/ 2
em •

Point (B) will also carry a shear

force will be carried by vertical welds].

Q 7 2
q [Q}./] = -=-A_ _;;___ = ;::;'2-x----;(;-;2;-;8:--.-;:;8:-x----;2"').--x--.1-."4 = 0 • 043 t/ em ·
vert.weld

2 .
0.495 t/cm < 0.72 x 1.1 (o.k)
.For simplicity neglect fillet .welds (A) around flange. Weld
line will appear as shown in Sec. (1-1).
 . . . CHAPTER3 263 264 CHAPTER3L
Check of Sec (2-2) of Yeld: Hence use two additional cover plates of thickness (t )
c

T =~
db
=~
64.8
= 66.80 tons. 36 - 4 X 2.4
(66. 9 - 50) ;: -------------X 0.84 X 2 tc
coaoc
Lw = 30 + 2 x 11.90 = 53.80 ems.
use t =7 roms.
c
66.8/cos a 2
= (53.8 x 1.80) = 0 · 69 t/cm (3) Bending of Column Flange:
2
< 0.72 t/em

Safe tfc .ii!: 0.4 J30 x 2.4 x cos a .ii!: 3.31 ems

Design of Corner Connection: ,

3.31 ems being· greater than· 2.4 ems, use 2 horizontal
(1) Crippling of Column Yeb at Comp. Flange: (At the End of
stiffeners opposite to the tension flange of the rafter
Haunch)
(14.Q ems x 1.2 em).
K =2 t
c
=2 x 2.60 = 5.20 ems.
2
Applied inclined area= 30 X·2.4 x cos e = 68.3 em

Resisting area = \o~c(tb/cose + Sk) = ( 0~9:5 +Sx5.2) x 1.4

2
= 40.25 em

Hence use 2 horizontal st·iffeners

A = 68.30 - 40.25 = 14 _03 em2

st

14.03
Choose bst = 14 ems tst = 14" = 1.0 em

Take tst = 1.0 em b/t < 16 (o.k)

(2l Corner Stability:

Applied shear =~ M
coso: =·64.84313
x 0.995 = 66.9 tons

I
Resisting shear = 42 5
·
coso:
x 0.84 x 1.4 = 50 tons
unsafe.
 .CHAPTER 4
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

4.1. Introduction
In conventional analysis, 'the beam-to-column connection is
either assumed perfectly flexible, with complete freedom to
rotate, or completely rigid, with no relative rotation between
column and beam. These assumptions are not entirely consistent
with actual conditions, in which the angle subtended between
column and beam varies with the applied moment.

The American specifications provide for the design of

multistory steel buildings three approaches concerning the type
of connections: "Type 1. construction" which requires elastic
.frame analysis assuming rigid beam-to-column connections. "Type
2 construction" which assumes that· the beam-to-column
connections are free to rotate under gravity loads, while
offering moment resistance under lateral load.s. "Type 3
construction"which calls for elastic frame analysis accounting
for the behavior of semi-rigid beam-to-column connections. The
British Standard 449 allows for design by semi rigid as well as
simple or fully rigid connections. While the Egyptian Code of
Practice {2001] has not mentioned these classifications, leaving
the choice to the designer.

However. a more economical design· would result if the

effect of the rigidity of the connections were included in the
analys~s of a frame. This has not received sufficient attention
because of the lack of information about the actual connection
behavior, as well as the greater amount of time required for the
analysis, especially without the use of digital computers.
 . . CHAPTER4 267
A basic description o£ flexural connection behavior is its
268 CHAPTER 4 ._..
moment rotation relationship, .which expresses the moment
transmitted by the connection as a function o£ the relative
rotation o£ the slope lines at the point o£ intersection as M
shown in Fig. 4.1.

e
l I'
'I

l IIoJ
i 1:'I
I I•
I
Flexible
l
--~-- Ideally Flexible
e
1
!
I Fig. 4.2 Typical Moment-Rotation Diagram
!
I In this chapter all the available flexible connections are
! analyzed, while in chapters 5 and 6 the rigid and semi rigid
connections will·be investigated.
Fig. 4.1 Actual Moment-Rotation
Behaviour o£.Connection 4.2. Flexible Beam-to-Column Connections:
Flexible beam-to-column connections are simple connections
Fig. 4.2 illustrates various moment-rotation curves o£ which transmit shear only. The reactions induced at the ends o£
different types o£ connections.An ideally rigid connection is . the beams will' go through welds or bolts to the columns. Some
one that yields no relative rotation regardless o£ the moment parasite moments due to the eccentric! ties may appear inducing
acting on the joint. A rigid connection in practice allows £or a either torsional or bending stresses. These. ~tresses are to be
small rotation as th.e applied moment increases. A nexible added to the shear stresses specially £or welded connections.
connection offers some resistance to rotation · as the applied
moment increases. An ·ideally flexible. connection offers no A w.ide. variety o£ flexible connections is available as
~, .
resistance to rotation. Any connection in practice lies between shown in Fig. 4.3. These connections can be classified as
the ideally rigid and ideally nexible, and may be called. a follows:
I semd-r.igld connection. {a) Thet- double web framing angles connection.

I
I
(b) The one-sided web framing angle connection.
,_.CHAPTER 4 269 270 CHAPTER4
(c) The cleat plate web-beam connection.
(d) The end-plate web-beam connection.
=

t
(e) The bearing end ~ate connection .
• •• •• (f) The directly welded web-beam connection .
L!
t! •• •• (g) The unstiffened seated beam connection .
ti (h) The stiffened seat bracket connection.
(i) The triangular bracket plate connection.
(a) Double Framing. (b) .Single Framing.

In the following sections a detailed analysis of each

type is presented.

~·
~·
[! 4.3. Double Yeb Framing Angles:
4.3.1. Yelded Connections:
Fig. 4.4 illustrates a double welded web framing angles
(c) Cleat Plate. (d) Shear End Plate. (d) Shear End Plate. connection. The angles are shop welded to the beam's web with a
(Welded) (Bolted) hook weld extending along the whole leg leaving a set-back of 12
JmlS between the beam's edge and the column flange. Vhile the
other leg of the angles are field welded to the column flange
with a hook weld not exceeding 12 mms so the beam end is not
restraint from rotating under load.

In order to allow sufficient flexibility, it is recommended

(e) Bearing End Plate. (f) Direct Welding. (g) Seat. Angle. to choose the framing angles thinner as possible. For the
analysis of this type of connections, one should consider the
following:

(i). The determination of the framing angles size.

Ui) The analysis of the shop. welds attaching the beam web to
[7 ~ framing angles.
(iii) The analysis of the field welds attaching the column
(h) Stiffened Seat. (i) Tringule.r Seat Bracket.
flange to framing angles.
Fig. 4.~ flexible Beam-to-Column Connections
 ..lcHAPTER4 271 272 CHAPTER 4 L.
The flexural moment M =Rb. e tends to press the framing
(i) Framing Angles Size:
angles against the column flange. The lines of welds on face 1-1
Fig. 4. 4. b illustrates the expected bent position of the
will be subjected to tensil~ stresses f~ (Fig.4.4.c) which can
framing angles required to allow for sufficient flexibility.
be determined by following the path of forces from one
structural element to the other. The reaction ~ of the beam
will be transmitted to the shop fillet welds connecting the
beliUD' s web to the framing angles by a concentric shear Rb
Set Back
passing through the C. G of 1-shape fillet weld. Then to the
column's flange by a concentric shear ~ and a torsional moment
Mt= ~.e through face 2-2 of the field fillet welds "4". Then to
the column flange via face 1-1 of the fillet welds "4" by a
Weld 121 concentric shear~ and a flexural moment M·= ~.e.

Concerning the analysis, one can follow either method "A"

or method "B" as given below:
Field fillet
weld
Method "A" - Neutral Axis Lying at h/6:
Consider the neutral axis lying at a distance y=h/6 from the
<al lower edge of the framing angles.

2.... (1) Beam Veb. Draw the stress distribution as shown in.Fig. 4.4.c.
r-· ....
(2) Framing Angles.
- The external moment is given by the following:
(3) Shop Velds Connecting the
Beam-Veb to the Framing
2T (a)
Angles.
( 4) Field Velds Connecting
- \lhile the.internal moment can be computed from Fig. 4.4.c as
the Framing Angles to the
follows
Column Flange.
<bl
(b)

Fig. 4.4
. . . CHAPTER4 273 274 CHAPTER4
- Equating (a) and (b) , the applied tensile stress on face (1-1) Where a is the size of the framing angle leg. Stress along
of weld (4) can be calculated and then checked . sec.s-s at a distance k from the back of the angle, get:

2 (g)
f = (9 R e) / (5 h s) 4.1 fb - T (a-k)/z
tJ. -D
2 (h)
Method "B" - Exact Position of Neutral Axis: where Z = 1 X t / 6
- Determine the exact position· of the neutral axis by taking
Framing angles bending stresses:
the first moment of area about the neutral axis. The
Combining Equs.(e),(h) and 4.1 in Eq.{g), get the following:
following equation is to be solved to compute y :-

(c)
fb = 10.8 1\,e(a-k)/h2 t 2 4.3

- The corresponding inertia will be as follows: Replace fb by the allowable bending stress Fb = 0.58 Fy'
the thickness "t" of the framingangles can be computed.
1 -3 1 - 3
I = X 2a X y + X 2s(h-y) . (d) One can that the section s-s is a solid
3 3
rectangular section and. hence Fb = 0.72 Fy, but we prefer to be
- Apply in the stress equation (f=H.y/I), thus get ft
J. conservative as the is based on unverified

ft = 1\,.e.(h-y)/I 4.2. assumptions.

J.
The bending tensile stress of Eq. 4.1 or Eq. 4.2 will (ii) Shop Weld Lines Attaching the Beam to the Framing Angles:
induce a tensile force 2T per centimeter length of h which can The shop fillet welds connecting the beam web to the
be computed using the stress distribution of Fig. 4.4.c. framing angles is an eccentric welded shear connection. The
Thus: force Rb is the reaction of the floor deck, the superimposed
loads and the own weight of steel of main and seco:ndary beams
2T = f tJ. X 2s X 1cm (e)
from center to center of the neighbouring columns. These welds
This load 2T will bend the framing angles to the will transmitt the reaction Rb to the framing angles. Fig. 4.5
configuration shown in Fig. 4. 4. b. For welded connections the illustrates a typical configuration of this type of welds. For
behavior can be. approximated to a simply supported beam. The the design, .proceed as. follows:
critical section in flexure will be generally at the base of the - Choose tll.e size .of welds "s" equal to the thickness "t" of the
fillet of the angle • a distance k from the back of lhe angle framing angles previously deduced.
(section s-s of Fig. 4.4.b). - Assume a set back of 12 mms from the edge of the beam to the
I

H =T (a-k) (f) column's flange.

 CHAPTER4 275 276 CHAPTER4

- The reaction Rb and tl).e torsional moment Mt = Rb. x will q~\\ = ~/ 2.s.h (j)
create shear stresses along Section (1-1) as follows :-
- The equivalent stresses are to be calculated and checked
Rb
= --~~~~--~,.---
[2(a-12mms. )+hl s
Thus using Eqs. 4.1 and (j) we get:

qA(Mt)// = - M.(a-12mms-x)
-
I
p
} (i)
f
e
= j f
2
tl.
+ 3 q -2 s 1.1 co.2 Ful
~\\

On the other hand the induced stresses on section 2-2 will

where I
p
=IX + I
y
of the ] weld shape. be as follows:
- Concentric shear stresses:
<
q~\\ = ~/ 2.h.s (k)

Set Back
12mms a-12mms
-; r-- -Eccentric shear stresses due to Mt=Rb.e :
ArT!
' v
Rbr Hook Weld

I (L)

. .,}
Jh
}
I
I
:e.G. - The resultant shear stresses are checked as follows:
.:+
I
I
-2 -2
I
I

il .:
q
total-
- j q
~,,
+q
MtJ.
.S02F
· u
a-12mms
1\
lt is to be noticed that the vertical shear stress q for
'-- ~//

~ Sec. 1-1 both planes (1-1) and {2-2) is induced by the vertical reaction
~ Rbwhich is transmitted to these planes via an eccentricity
Fig. 4.5. {e' = a = leg size) of framing angle. This will induce an

--7
6Rb.a
(iii) Field Fillet Welds Connecting Column to Framing Angles: additional torsional stress (qMt = and a bending normal
i 2 s h
Referring to Fig. 4. 4. b • two different, planes ( 1-1) and 61\ . a
stress ( f = ) regarding planes {1-1) and
{2-2) are to be analyzed. For plane (1-1) the induced stresses ~.± 2 s h
2

will be as follows: respectively. These additional stresses may be added to the

-Tensile bending stresses as previously deduced in Equ. 4.1.
previous computed stresses.
- Vertical shear stresses due to the concentric shear ~ are
given by: Refer to Example 4.1.
...lcHAPTER4 277 278 CHAPTER4
4.3.2. Bolted Connections:
The procedure previously outlined in Section 4.3.'1, will y = 2t lle get:
be applied. One must differentiate between the behavior of
ordinary and high strength bolted connections. K )
4.4

4.3.2.1. Ordinary Bolted Connections:

·Where: P = pitch between bolts; the edge distance being
(i} The Framing Angles Size:
taken equal to p/2;
Fig. 4. 6. d, and 4. 6. b, illustrate the expected deflected
shape of the framing angles as well as the corresponding bending As = stress cross sectional area of bolt.
stresses on group of bolts (2).
Applying the allowable bending stress (Fb = 0.58 Fy} in
The reaction 1\ will be transmitted to the framing angles Equ. 4.4, . determine the required thickness (t) of the framing
via the group of bolts. (1) and then to the column's flange angles • One can say that tha section is solid rectanguar and F
b-
via the group of bolts (2). = 0.72 F , but we prefer to be conservative.
y~.------~------~~~~~~~

The induced moment (M = ~· (a + t}/2) will create tensile

stresses (ftb) on gr()UP of bolts (2} as shown in Fig. 4.6. b
The stress (ftb) is computed as previously given in
Chapter (1) in Section (1.10).

Once the tensile stresses (f tb) are computed , the. tensile

force T can be determined as follows:

(a) {bJ. (C l
0.8 H.S-8

The framing angles will behave as a simple beam of span

+ ·-ft-

_jl~~ ~~
:II···~·
(a + t + twb), thus the induced moment at the critical Section

(1-1) will be:

M = T ( a + t - K) .
2
(b) ~
a+ht,.b 'M
· ld> Deflected Shape lel Oetlected Shape
Applying in the stress equation (f = M. y ) using for 10·81 IH.SBI

M and T Equations (a), (b) we get: Fig. 4.6

 -;.~

.,Jfi CHAPTER 4 279 280 CHAPTER4

The additional stress (e) is to be added to the previously
ii} The Group of Bolts (1):
These bolts are subjected to concentric shear stresses computed vertical shear stress (d) and checked.

Refer to Example 4.2

(c)

4.3.2~2. High Strength Bolted Connections:

Where n = total number of bolts. (4 bolts as shown in Fig.
(i) The Framing Angle Size:
4.6.a). and 4. 6. c, illustrate the expected deformed
Fig. 4.6.e
A = the bolt shank area where threads lie outside the shape of the framing angles as well as the corresponding bending
two planes of shear. stresses on group of bolts (2).

iii) The Group of Bolts (2): The induced moment (M = Rb x (a+t)/2 ) will create bending
- These bolts are subjected to tensile stresses due to
stresses on group of bolts (2) as shown in Fig. 4.6.c.
_b (a + t) see F.1g. 4 . 6 . b and re f e r
M -- a_ to Section 1.10 of
2
(a)·
'''Chapter ( 1).

·~Shear stresses induced by the reaction Rb (single shear) This equation is deduced using Method (A) of Section 2.7.5
of Chapter 2.
(d)

Once the tensile stress (ftb) is calculated, the tensile

It is to be noticed that the induced shear stresses (q ) force T can be determined as follows:
...!-
are resulting from the vertical reaction ~which is transmitted

·to the group of bolts (2) via an eccentricity (e' = a ; t). T =ftb . p .a (b)

This eccentricity will induce additional torsional stresses

The framing angles will behave as a beam fixed at both ends
(~) on the group of bolts (2):
as shown in Fig. 4.6.e. The clamping force induced between the
---? (~/2) X (a+t)/2 X (h/2 - p/2) column's flange and the framing angles will create this
qMt = n 2
(e)
fixation. To be noticed that this phenomenon is only valid £or
AX L y.1
high strength bolts where a pretension is applied. The induced
i=1
moment due to T at support fixation is:
Where: a = the leg size of the framing angle.
2
yi = the bolt height (i.e. the distance between the M = T (a +
8
t + t wb)
corresponding bolt and the mid-height axis).
 282 CHAPTER4
. . CHAPTER4 281
thick angles will reduce the stresses (fb), and consequently
(c) the deformalion of the framing angles· will decrease
offsetting the required flexibility. Thus it is recommended
.
Applying in the stress equa t 1on f = ---
M.y
~
1 '
to choose the thinnest angles as possible.

t3 2- Also for flexibility purposes, the bolted connection is to be

Vhere: I = P; y = t/2; M, T, and ftb from equations (c),
dimensioned so that the pitch (P) is chosen as greater as
12
(b), and (a) respectively we get: possible. This means that the height of the framing angles
must be taken equal as possible to the height of the beams
2. 25 1\ (a + t + t wtl (a + t) (h - p)
minus its breadth but may be a little deeper.
4.5
t2.h3
3- The use of high strength bolts is to be omitted if
Applying the allowable bending stress (Fb 0.58 Fy> of the possible. . The induced pretension creates clamping forces
corresponding steel in Equation 4.5, the thickness of the that will reduce the flexibility of the connection. (i.e.
framing angles can be computed. will reduce the rotation).

4- For welded connections, erection bolts are generally placed

(ii) The Group of Bolts (1):
. These bolts are subjected to concentric shearing forces near the bottom of the angle, so that they do not restrain

Rbolt = Rb/n which must not exceed the frictional resistance Ps the beam end from rotating under the reaction ~·

of Table (2.6) where two planes of friction are to be 5- For deeper girders, these erection bolts may be placed near
considered. the top of the framing angles for stability requirements.
These bolts can be remoyed after field welding.
(iii) The Group of Bolts (2):
These bolts will be subjected to : 6- The analysis previously mentioned for H.S.Bolted connections

- Tensile external forces due to the induced moment. using Method (A) ( Section 2. 7. 5 ] neglects the clamping
effect, hence the deduced thickness (t) of the framing angles
M = ~ (a ; t) ; Refer to equation (b).
is very conservative.

- Concentric shearing forces induced by the reaction l\,·

Moreover, for the friction type H.S. Bolted connections
the clamping forces will reduce considerably the tensile
Refer to Example 4.2.
stresses (fb), hence the size of the framing angles can be
General Notes Regarding the Flexible Framing Angles Connections:
safely chosen according to the constructional requirements.
1- One may observe from the previous sections that the use of
~CHAPTER 4 283
284 CHAPTER4
7 A common practice today is to shop weld the angles to the (i) The Framing Angle Thickness:
beam and field connect them to the columns with high strength The deformed shape of the :framing angles is somewhat
bolts. · rather complicated. The si,mplified assumption is to consider a
cantilever beam behavior as shown in Fig. 4.7.c.
8- Leg of framing angles are usually from 8.0 ems till 10.0
ems. Sometimes unequal legs are necessary with the longer. The induced moment. about · the center line of the high
legs connected to the column flange. strength bolts chosen of the friction type is:

(a)
4.4. Single Web Framing Angle:
Generally, the use of single web framing angles is not
The induced bo 1 t bending stresses (f tb) are to be
recommended: the induced tensile stresses on the high strength.
computed according to the following relation:
llolts connecting the :framing angle to the column :flange are
relatively high and the corresponding thickness (t) o:f the angle 6 ~.e.(h-p)

uill be extremely thick. ftb = (b)

a

However, i:f this type of :flexible connections is utilized, The corresponding tension force T per high strength
tbe :following analysis can be adopted: bolts is:
T = :ftb X p X a
~
:j:
'lh·1
I•
where: p = the pitch between the high strength bolts

-+ a = the angle leg size

1~
p~t
+
+
+
Equating (b) and (c) get "T":

~ 6 ~.e. (h-p).p
... T = h3
(d)
:'u:t
I
(bl This tension :force "T" will induce bending stresses
{fb) along the high strength bolts center line regarding the
angle leg. These bending stresses can be computed as follows:

Jl:.tt~
2
¥. t
• •
k'wb
t

6T. (a/2+t/2-k)
T-· fb = p .t
2 (e)

(c)

Fig. 4. 7. Single Web Framing Angle Replacing "T" in equation (e) using relation (d) we
 CHAPTER4 285 286 CHAPTER4L

get: T as previously outlined in equation (d). The tension

(f) force "T" is be checked according to the prescriptions of sections
2.7.
Replacing in relation (f)
' fb by the allowable
It is to be observed that the computed thickness of the
compressive stress (Fb = 0.58 Fy), the angle thickness "t't can
framing angle may be excessively thick. For the common
be computed.
the Beam Web to the connections, the thickness of relation (f) was never respected.
(ii) The Shop Weld Lines Attaching
Fortunately the framing angles had never shown any signs of

Concerning the shop fillet weld lines connecting the failure.

beam to the framing angle an eccentric shear will be induced as However, it is suggested to allow for some yielded zones,
for the case of the double framing-angles'previously outlined in which means that the allowable bending stress. is. allowed to
section 4.3. _reach the yield stress "F ".
y

4.5. The Cleat Plate Web-Beam Shear Connection:

As an alternative to web framing angles, plate cleats

On the other hand the high strength bolts attaching (called also fin plates) may be used to transmit the beam

the framing angle to the column flange will be subjected to reaction to the column flange. They are specially used when

the following straining actions: attachments to the minor axis of small columns are required (see
Fig. 4.8). The cleat plates are shop welded to the column web
(a) The eccentric shearing force Q = ~ and then field bolted to the beam web. This configuration has
( a + t ) the advantage that welding access problems are avoided.
(b) The torsional moment Mt =~ . 2 Generally the beam flanges are to be notched, so that the
beam can be dropped into position.
(c) The flexure moment M = Rb.e
For this type of connections three aspects are to be safely
The corresponding induced forces on the most stressed analyzed:
high strength bolts are:
(a) The Bolts will be Subjected to Concentric Shear:
~
h}
Q4- = (g)
b n
Resultant
~olt = n
(a}
----? ~.(a + t).l. Sp < p
(h) s
QMt = 2 2 Where n is the total numl;>er of bolts behaving in single
2 [(O.Sp) +(1.5p) ]
shear.
..lcHAPTER4 287 288 CHAPTER41,
(c) The Thickness {t) of the Cleat Plate

t (b)

Fb in Equ. (b) is to be replaced by the allowable bending

stresses (Fb = 0.72
F }. Here the analysis is exact, the section
y .
being a solid rectangular section.
tbl
It is to be noticed that the beam web at section (a-a) is
to be checked against the bending stresses as follows :-

6~. e2
fb
h2 -< 0.72 F
y
(c)
twb"

If the beam web

thickness (twb) is not sufficient to
Fig. 4.8 Cleat Plate overcome the allowable bending stresses, one or two horizontal
stiffeners are to be utilized as given in Section 4. 14. 1.1.
· d
The value obtatne 1·n equat1."on {a) must not exceed either
ps for H.S.B or RLEAST for ordinary bolts.
It is to be noticed that the effect of shear stresses have
been neglected for the determination of the web cleat thickness
(b) The Stresses Induced in the Fillet Weld Lines are:
(t) as well as for the beam web thickness (twb).
Plane (1-1 ) :
ft = q = -=--=--s- In order to ensure that
.L -h..'. this
connectionstype of is
sufficiently flexible one can observe the following:
Hence calculate the equivalent stresses {fe} and check :
fe < 1.1 {0.2 F0 )
·- Once again the · use of ordinary bolts is recommended,

Plane {2-2): while;the high-strength-bolts show some rigidity created by the

q ::: -=-::-- pretension force which induces clamping forces between the cleat
-h..'. s plate and the beam web.
·
Hence- ca·1 culat e the resultant s.hear stresses to be < 0.2 F0
 ~CHAPTER4 289 290 CHAPTER <fa..
shear which must be safe against both single shear and bearing.
- The plate thickness must not exceed half of the diameter
Thus:
(0.5 d) of bolts for steel 37 and 0.4 d for steel 52 in order to
ensure bearing deformation of the cleat plate. ~lt = --
n
(b)

- The edge distance and the pitches are to be chosen as

greater as possible in order to allow sufficient flexibility.

- The used fillet weld lines must achieve a minimum

capacity. This condition can be ensured if the designer chooses
the size of welds E s not exceeding the thickness ( t) of the
cleat plate. ..J. ..J
Refer to Examples 4.4 and 4.5.

4.6. The Shear End Plate-Beam-to-Column Connection:

Fig.4.9, illustrates what we call the shear end-plate
Beam web
beam-to-column connections. Three different · configurations are
available where their corresponding behavior is as given below:

Configuration (a):
(;a I {bl
Fig. 4.9.a, shows an end plate welded/£o the beam web by a
shop fillet weld subjected to concentric shear stresses for both
planes (1-1) and (2-2). Thus: Fig. 4.9

q = 2.s.h
(a) Regarding the end plate thickness, one must check the

""''
The field fillet weld is subjected to the same concentric
safety against the shear capacity within the end plate on
critical section passing through the bolts holes. Hence:
shear (~) where equation (a) remains valid.
~
I q = (c)
.I 2t{h - nqt)
Configuration (b):
Fig. 4.9. b, illustrates an end plate shop welded to the Where .n. = the number of bolts .in one row.
beam web. This type of connections has the advantage that all d = the. bolt diameter.
hole drilling in the web are eliminated. The bolts connecting ¢ =d + 2 mms-
the end plate to the column flange are subjected to a concentric t thi.ckness of end plate.
 CHAPTER4 291 292 CHAPTER4L
The induced shear stress q of Equation (c) must not exceed 4.7. The Bearing End Plate Connections:
the allowable stress qall as prescribed by the E.C.p. 2001. It is
to be noticed that the existing eccentricity is so small to
introduce flexural stresses. 5

Configuration (c): , 1

The end plates may be extended on the :full depth of the

L _l. l.
beam. For such a configuration the upper and lower edges of the
' '
,.
2

.,.
2
end plates are fillet welded to the beam flanges. This will
increase the deformation of the top region of the connection
z
where the beam end rotation will be foreed down to th~ bottom
flange. Fig. 4.9.c, illustrates an end plate whose top is shop
fillet welded to the upper beam flange. This end plate is not
extended till the bottom flange. This extension is practically
unnecessary where the top edge ensures the required beam end
rotation.
- 1 1 • 1
Equations (a), (b), and (c) of the preceding paragraphs are
to be applied to check the safety against stresses.

It is to be noticed that in order to ensure the flexibility

of such type of connections, one must choose the thickness of
the end plate of the order of one third to half the bolt 2 - 2 2 - 2
diameter. This choice will provide failure of bolts by shear (a) (b)
rather than by bearing. Also the pitch between bolts must not
be less than four times the bolt diameter. A double fillet weld (1) The welded beam end plate.
lines is highly recommended rather than a single line. In order (2) The bearing beam end plate.
to ensure that the bottom flange of the beam will not bear on (3) The bearing column end plate.
the face of the column, the height of the end plate is to be (4) Bolts.
chosen half. the beam depth. (5) The beam.
(6) The column.
Refer to Examples 4.6.
Fig. 4.10
~CHAPTER4 293
294 CHAPTER 41-r
Two types of the so-called bearing end plate web-to-beam
If there is a gap between the beam web and the column
connections are shown in Fig. 4. 10. · a, b • Both types are
flange. the size (s) of the fillet weld.is increased by the same
generally utilized when the shear transmitted from the beam to
amount (see Fig. 4.11).
the column is relatively high.

Tests of this type of connections have shown initial signs

Fig. 4.10.a. illustrates the first configuration where the
of yielding adjacent to the lower ends of the weld lines at a
end plate (1) is shop fillet welded to the beam flange and beam
moment beam less than the yield one. It is to be noticed that
web. An end bearing plate (2) is fillet welded to the end plate
this type of connections does not ensure adequate rotation for
(1) on its upper and two longitudinal sides while the lower
flexibility requirements.
side is resting on the Ul>per edge of thet bearing plate {3). The
.
beam reaction is thus transmitted by bearing to the end plate
(3) and then to the column flange via the fillet weld lines
v v
attaching the end plate (3) ·to the column flange. Rb
•
..
}
Fig. 4.10.b, shows another configuration where the reaction
of the beam is transmitted· to the beam end plate (1) via the &
..
.J
shop fillet welds and then to the end plate (3) by bearing. This
configuration requires one·less plate and less welding.
II Gap
This Type of Conn~ctions Require: (a) excessive fabrication •
where ade<iuate bearing area must be provided to transmit the
vertical reaction of the beam. (b) it must be ensured that.there
are no possibility of the beam slipping off the column bearing
(c) nominal bolts ·(two bolts) ar~ to be
·q· (S+ Gap)

Beam Web
end plate (3).
positioned near the effective center of rotation . (d)· The
. bearing end plates (2) and (3} are only welded on thr_ee sides
and must be sufficient regarding the allowable shear stresses.

Welded Beam-Web Connection: Fig./ 4.11

The web may be welded·directly to the column. The weld
lines must have sufficient height (h) in order ·to tranamit For all these reasons. this configuration is not
safely the reac.tion ~ of the beam. recommended.
. . . . CHAPTER4
4.9.
295
The Unstiffened Seated Beam-Connections:
296 CHAPTER 4 a.,.
Thi.s phenomena is illustrated in Fig. 4.14 and will be
4.9.1. Welded Unstiffened Seated Beam Connection: discussed later in this section. Assuming a safe seat· angle
Fig. 4.12, illustrates a typical welded seated-beam thickness regarding bendi~g, the reaction ~ will be transmitted
connection. The reaction of the beam ~ will be transmitted to to the column flange by the shop weld (4) which is subjected to
the seat angle {2) by bearing. The seat angle tend to deflect a concentric shear, a torsional moment (Mt= ~.ef) and/or a
downward which induces bending stresses. The behavior of the flexural moment (M = Rb.ef). Th~ beam is preferably attached to
deflected seat angle is rather a complicated problem depending the seat a~gle by a beam-to-seat angle field weld (3). This will
mainly on the thickness of the seat angle. force the reaction ~ to act by bearing on the surfaces in
contact. The critical seat angle section will probably be at
the base of the fillet of the outstanding leg of the seat angle
(Section a-a Fig. 4.l3). The field weld (3) can be replaced by
two bolts as shown in Fig. 4.13.b. If the beam is not
attached to the seat angle, the critical section will be
Beam probably Section (b-b) as illustrated in Fig. 4.13.c.

As shown in Fig. 4.12, a top clip angle (1) is to be field

welded to the top of the beam in order to ensure the stability
AJ of the beam against the lateral torsional buckling. AnothE:r
B e
__j
l. configuration consists to use a top clip angle attached to the
A - A
beam web.
(1) Top clip angle
(2) Seat angle . FJeld FlUet Weld "3"

(3) Beam-tO-seat angle v v

weld (:field)
(4) Column-to-seat angle
1 I
!
weld (shop) a !
a
(5) Top clip-angle-to-
column weld (fieid)
(a) ( b} (c)
(6) Top clip-angle-tO- --J\........LJ'-..
B • 8
beam weld (shop)

Fig. 4.12 Fig. 4.13

. , . CHAPTER 4 291 298 CHAPTER4L
As the thickness of the seat beam is a direct function of
(a) The seat width (a}
the induced bending moment, one must observe the following (see
(b) The moment arms (e), (ef}
Fig. 4.14):
<c> The seat angl~ dimensions. (a, t)
(a) The conservative assumption considers the beam reaction (d) The weld lines size (h,s)
·· ~acti~. at the. centroid of· the bearing stress area (see
Fig. 4.14.a). (a) The Seat Vidth (a):
The seat width (a) depends on the bearing length (N) which is
based on the crippling stress Fcrp along Section (m-m). Referring
to the E.C.P.(2001), clause (3.6.6) the following equation can be
utilized:

< F < 0.75 F

(N + K) twb crp y

i.e. >K (a)

!b)

Assuming a gap of 12 mms between the beam edge and the

Fig. 4.14 column flange, hence "a" can be computed:

(b) The two other possibilities will follow the fact that when
the beam deflects downward, its ends wili rotate.
a =N + 12 mms (b)

Consequently the point of contact of the reaction ~ tends

{b)· The Moment Arms (e) and (ef):
.to move outward or inward for thick and thin seat angles as
From Fig. 4.15 one can deduce:
illustrated in Figs 4.14. b, c respectively.

Due to lack of accurate studies, we will consider the ef = N2 + 12 mms.

conservative assumption of Fig. 4.14.a in the analysis presented
(c)
below. 10 mms.

For the seat angle connection of Fig. 4~ 12, four aspects

are tQ be determined: (see Fig. 4.15)
 299 300 CHAPTER4
...lcHAPTER4
Applying in the stress equation

3
M y bt
fb I·= y t/2 we get:
I

t j F b. b
6 M
{e)

Where: F = allowable bending stress:

b

Equating (d) in (e) we get:

,.
A t=~ (f)

Regarding face (2-2) of the fillet welds, the ·induced

stresses are:

q = --;::--:--- =
~' s

Both shear stresses are to be added together vectorially

and checked against the allowable shear stresses of fillet
welds:

While for face (1-1), the induced stresses are:

Fig. 4.15 . Rb
q = -=--=-- =
~' 2.h.s
(c) The Seat Angle Dimensions:
-2
At the critical section (a-a), the induced moment (M) is: The equivalent stresses f
e
= q are to be
.J,''
M =.~ . e (d)
.calculated and checked against the allowable values.
 301 302 CHAPTER4
generally chosen 100 x 100 x 10 with
a maximum hook weld of 12 mms. ·

4.9.2. Bolted Unstiffened Seated-Beam Connection:

In this configuration all welds of Fig. 4.12 are replaced
by bolts. This means that:

(a) The vertical leg of the seat angle will be connected to

the column flange by bolts (shown dotted in Fig. 4.15}. These
bolts will be subjected to concentric shear 1\, and a flexural
moment (M = ~- ef}. (Refer to Sections (1.10} and (2.7.5) ~or
. . I
ordinary· and high strength bolted connections respectively.

(bl The horizontal leg of the seat angle will be connected

to .the beam flange by two bolts shown dotted in the side view of
the connection of Fig. 4.15.
I
. A .,..J ~ b=0·4h J
A- A

· (c) Top clip angle will be connected to the column flange

and to the beam top flange by four bolts two on each leg.

Refer to Examples 4.7 and 4.8.

4~10. Stiffened Rectangular Seat Bracket:

For relatively great beam reactions '\,• the seat angle B - 8
thickness. becomes excessive. An alternative configuration
consists to use vertical stiffeners attached by fillet welds to
(1) Top plate of bracket. (2) Vertical stiffener of bracket;
a top bearing plate.
(3) Velds. attaching top plate to vertical stiffeners;

Fig. 4.16. illustrates this type of connections where the (4) Hor~zontal velds attaching top plate to column flange;

plane of the beam web transmitting the reaction 1\, is located in (5) Vertical welds attaching stiffener t.o column flange;

the same plane as that of the rectangular vertical stiffener of (6) Velds attaching top plate to beam flange.

the bracket.
Fig. 4.16
..lcHAPTER4 303 304 CHAPTER4
EL) · transmitted from the lower beam flange (b) The Weld Lines (4) and (5):
The reaction ( _0 1s
to the top plate by bearing along a distance (N). The vertical The stiffened seat bracket is shop welded to the column
·t EL via the weld lines (4} and {5) to flange by a horizontal w~ld line (4) and two vertical weld
stiffener then transml s - 0
lines (5) of height (h). Generally the horizontal weld line (4)
the column f~ange.
is welded on the underside of the bracket top plate and for
The following steel structural elements are to be analyzed: simplicity of analysis is assumed to be a percentage of the
vertical weld length (h) (say ·o.4 h).
- The bearing length (N).
-,The moment arm (es).
The weld face along Section 1-1 will be subjected to the
- The weld lines {4) and (5).
following stresses:
- The vertical stiffener thickness (t) ·
_ The top plate thickness (t ), the weld size of the
1
q =
I\ (d)
horizontal weld line (3) and the dimensions of the 2.4 h.s
~"
weld lines ( 6).
e (f!-y)
=
I\ s
(e)
ft
e Moment Arm (es):
(a) The Bearing Length (N) and th
J_

The analysis follows that of the seat angle connection.

Where y and I are to be determined from Table 3. 2 for a unit
X
length size (s=l).
Refer to Fig. 4.16 to compute the following:

The equivalent stresses f 3 are to be

e
equated to the corresponding allowable va.lues (i.e 0.22 F ) and
0
Thus: hence h can be computed.
- K > K (a) It is to be observed that the weld size (s) may be chosen
equal to 3/4 the vertical stiffener thickness(t).

The beam is to be· extended beyond the bearing length a (c) The Stiffener Thickness (t):
·convenient distance say 30 to 50 millimeters~ Hence the moment The chosen stiffener · thickness ( t) must· satisfy the
arm e can be determined: followirig:
s
- The stiffener thickness (t) must be at least as thick
N (b)
es =
2 + c + 12 mms. as the beam web (twb).

(f)
and a = N + C + 12 mms. (c)
 . . . . CHAPTER4 305 306 CHAPTER4L
- In order to prevent the local buckling the thickness 4.11. Triangular Stiffened Seat Brackets:
(t) must ·satisfy the constraints previously outlined in Chapter Triangular bracket plates are utilized as support brackets,
5 - volume (1), where: as stiffeners and as buttqesses in heavy frame joints.

a
t 2: 16 (g)

- The· induced bending stresses must not exceed the

allowable limit.

This means that (t} can be computed using the allowable Beam

bending stress fb in the following relation:

~ (es- a/2)
+ (h)
t.

- If we assume that the maximum shear stresses will be

created simUltaneously in the vertical lines of welds · (5) as
well as in the stiffener (2), thus the following relation can
·.. (1) Top plate bracket;
be computed:
(2) Triangular stiffener;
2.h.s.(0.2 Ful = h.t.(0.58 FYJ (3) Veld attaching the top plate to the stiffener;
(4) Veld attaching the top plate to the column flange;
·Hence: t a: 1.66.s {i)
(5) weld attaching the stiffener to the column flange.
Where: (0.2 FU) and (0.58 FY) are the allowable shear stresses
for the fillet weld lines and the stiffener respectively. Fig. 4.17

It is to be noticed that h, t and s must be in accordance The behavior of the triangular stiffeners differs from the
. with Equations (d). (e). (f). (g), (h). a.I;ld (i).
rectangular one analyzed in the previous section. The stiffener
On the other hand the top plate thickness t is to be behaves as a plate supported at two sides and free at the
1
chosen equal to the beam flange thickness while the size of the
sloping edge. However plate .buckling and stress conditions will
weld lines (3) equal to the size (s) of welds (5). The weld ·.. deter.mine the required thickness of the stiffener while the two
lines (6) attaching the top plate to the beam flange is to be
. supported side dimensions will .be governed by the construction
at least of 50 mms length and 6 mms size.
conditions.

Refer to Example 4.9.

 .JI CHAPTER 4
Fig. 4. 17,
307
illustrates the configuration of a triangular (b) Yielding Condition:
308 CHAPTER4

stiffened seat bracket. It has been observed that the maximum Using the average stress relation in conjunction ·with
stress occurs at the free edge and that. the failure is governed Equation (a) we get:
by yielding rather than by buckling. An expression relating the
average stress on the loaded ~dge (fAV =~ / a.t) to the m . fMAX
maximum stress occurring at the free edge (fMAX) was found to
conform with the following relation: i.e. £MAX::: 0.58 F 0.58 F is the
y y
allowable stress)
(~) (~) 2 - (~)
3
m = 1.39 - 2.2 + 1.27 0.25 (a)

Thus: (e)

The triangular stiffeners will be governed by either the

buckling or the yielding conditions whichever is the most
critical: The thickness (t) must satisfy both conditions (d) and (e)
in order to overcome both buckling and yielding considerations.
(a}.Buckling Condition:
To be noticed that the top plate was considered in the analysis
(b) rigidly connected to the column flange, also it has been assumed
that the reaction Rb was uniformly distributed along the side a
and that it lies at a distance (es ) closer .as possible to the
where F is the maximum stress on the free edge which must not
cr column flange.
exceed the yield stress (F y ).

Concerning the other steel structural elements one can

Replacing in equation (b): f
cr
=fy IT= 3.14, E = 2100 proceed as follows:

and ~ = 0.3, Equation (b) becomes: (a) Choose the dimension "a'' equal to the bearing length
(N) as previously deduced without any extension of the beam

~~ 43.54 j ~y (c) flange over the bearing length.

required.to assure the rotation of the beam.
Only a set back of 12 mms is·

Using the appropriate theoretical values of K = 1.23,

i.e .. .a =N + 12 mms
Equation (c) becomes:

48 (d) e
8
-
N
2 + 12 mms
}
P.
._lcHAPTER4 309 310 CHAPTER41,

(b) . The welds connecting the top plate. of the bracket to

the column flange is chosen a butt.weld in order to ensure the
required rigidity previously assumed in the analysis.

(c) The weld lines connecting the stiffener to the column

2
flange are designed exactly as previously outlined in Section I

4.10. d

It is to be noticed that the actual analysis is based on

qualitative assumpti~ns. A more accurate analysis may apply a
three - dimensional finite elements approach considering the
different weld lines as springs of appropriate rigidities. Thus
both buckling and.yielding will be automatically included.

Refer to Example 4.11.

i
X j _)X ·
4. 12~ ·Stiffened Seat Bi-acket Whose Plane is Normal to the Beam I ·7]?b sin 8 · d + Rb costl. e5 cos6
Veb Plane: i
If the beam web is in a plane normal to the plane of the y
vertical stiffener (case of crane track girder). the analyses 1 - 1 1 ,. 1
previously presented in Section 4. 10 . and. 4. 11 are valid for ( bl
all the steel structural components. The vertical stiffener
only will behave differently The analysis must satisfy the Fig. 4.18
following considerations:

For the rectangular bracket apply in the stress equation:

Fig. 4.1B.a, illustrates the configuration of a rectangular
stiffened bracket. Section (1-1) passing through the .abrupt M .y M .X
N X + ·_y_ _)
=A+ ly
change of inclination is consid.ered to be the critical section X

where the maximum bending and shear stresses are to be computed

in order to determine the thickQess(t)~ by the following:

N = zero ;· MY= zero.

 ..licHAI)TER4 311 312 CHAPTER4
3 h However for a more accurate analysis, one can consider
th y
I = 1.2 2
X Section 2-2 with the induced moment ·(M ::: ~·es) while . the
resisting cross section will be that of the Tee section
Hence get:-
6 ~-d comprising the top plate and the vertical stiffener.
:s Fbc (a)
fbc
t.h2 Once again, these analyses as well as the assumptions
concerning the pass of forces from one steel structural element
On the other hand for the triangular stiffener shown in to the other are approximate. For an accurate behaviour, a
Fig. 4. 18. b, the critical Section 1-1 is that section three dimensional finite elements approach is to be applied
perpendicular to the free side. Having: where the weld lines can be represented by springs of
appropriate rigidities.
N = ~.sinS
4.13. Stiffened Seat-Angle Connections:
Some designers prefer to utilize the seat-angle connection
M
y
= zero of Section 4.9 adding one, two or three triangular stiffeners as
shown in Fig. 4.19.
Where: d (es ; ) . sinS
Design considerations are the same as previously outlined
2 in Sections 4.9, 4.11 and 4.12.
Rb.sin8 6Rb(escos 9 + d.sinB)
Get: + ------------~~------- :s (b)
a. sinS. t t. (a. sinS
Compute the bearing length (N) usi,ng Equation (a) of
In Equation (a) and (b) one can utilize the allowable Section 4.9, then add a set back of 12 mms for the calculation
bending compressive stresses (Fbc) instead of fbc to compute the of {he moment ai-m ( e ) . For simplicity we can assume a seat
s
required thickness (t). angle of equal legs i.e. take h =a = N + 12 mms.

It is to be noticed that for the rectangular bracket of The critical Section 1-1, perpendieular to the free edge of
Fig. 4.18.a, the following question arises: Why Section 2-2 was tl)e stiffener, will be subjected to the following straining
not considered as the critical section for the calculation of actions:
the bending stresses in Equation (a)? In fact this will lead to
a· higher moment (M = ~-es in&tead M = Rb.d) which consequently N =~sine

will induce higher stresses leading to an excessive thickness

(t). M= ~.cosa.es.cosa +~.sine.[<~ + 12 mms).sine - y]
...lcHAPTER4 313 314 CHAPTER4L
The position of the neutral axis y is to be computed hence
Refer to Example 4.10.
the inertia Ixx calculated. Applying in the stress ·equation by
the allowable bending stress the thickness t can be computed. 4.14. Beam-to-Beam Flexible Connections:
The beam-to-beam connection is a typical connection of
N M.(h cosa- y) floor beam systems where the secondary beams are connected to
= A+ Ixx s the main ·beams. The connection is either a flexible
copnection transmitting only the vertical reaction (concentric
It is to be noticed that the resisting cross section is shear) or a rigid connection ensuring -the continuity of the

comprising in addition to the stiffeners the angle section secondary beams (i.e. transmitting a concentric shear and a

intersecting Section (1-1) flexural moment).

(Refer to Fig. 4.19 Section 1-1). The behaviour of these .connections is generally the same as
the beam-to-co.J.umn connections previously analyzed. Only the
main features are discussed in the following paragraphs, while
for the design of the different steel structural components
v
refer to the previous sections.

it 4.14.1. \leb Framing Angles: .

4. 14. L 1. Beams Of Different .Heights:

{
' I

The most common type of flexible beam-to-beam

connection is the web framing angles connection. Naturally one
can differentiate between: a framing angle using only the
a .Jt1L. -{1L. .Jt1l-
J\
welding process to connect both webs of secondary and main beams
by shop and field welds respectively, and a framing angle
connected by bolts. A combination of welds and bolts is
possible where the framing angles are shop welded to the
Fig. 4.19 secondary beam web while the outstanding leg . is bolted to the
main beam web.
Once again all these assumptions are not probably very
accurate, but for lack of refined analysis one can follow the Fig. 4. 20, illus'trates a secondary beam connected to the
assumed previous behaviour. framing angles by bolts behaving in double shear. If the
secondary beams are of the same height, the erection process is
 316 CHAPTER4 . . .
' . . CHAPTER4 315
say the left secondary beam is to ·be
somewhat difficu lt Where Secordary
propped in some way until after the right secondary beam is Beam

placed and then the bolts are inserted. On the other hand _if
are of different heights one can provide Secondary
the two second ary beams . . Beams of
.
two additional bolts say to the• left secondary beam of the
Different
greatest height in order to suppor t th is beam and then the right Heights
secondary beam is placed and the bolts inserted.

Concerning group of bolts (1} of Fig. 4.20 and 4.21 one can
observe that these bolts will behave eit~er in single shear wh~n
only one of the neighboring spans is subjected to superimposed·
loads while the behaviour of these bolts will be in double shear Fig. 4.21
if the two neighboring spans are loaded.
For the determination · of the thickness of the framing
angles and the number of bolts for groups (1) and (2) refer, to
Secondary Sections 4.3 and 4.4.
Beam
In the preceding paragraphs the flanges for both the main
and secondary beams was not required to be. coplanar where the
secondary beams are allowed to be set a lower top flange level

'
A than the main beam.
coplanar one can
However, if the flanges are required to be
utilize the configuration of Fig. 4.22.a,
where the flanges of the secondary beams are notched.

The determination of the size of the framing angles, the

number of group of bolts (1) and (2) is. a straight forward
matter Vhile the region of the secondary beam, where the top
flange. i~ coped (notched) with a small part of the web (Fig.
4.22.b), can show signs of failure. Section (1-1) passing

A -A through the web will be subjected to a concentric shear (Rsb)

and a flexural moment M = Rsb (L - e) thus inducing principal
0
Fig. 4.20
 CHAPTER4 317 318 CHAPTER4L

stresses. This phenomenon is called the web tear-out shear.

Check the situation by calculat.ing the inertia of the cross
section passing through (1-1) composed of the web and the lower
flange .0 t the secondary beam and then compute the compressive
stress. The calculation of the induced shear stress on this
I

section is also required. If the state of compressive stresses

is critical, a stiffener is to be welded to the secondary beam
web. Only a stiffener from one side is sufficient to respond to
the over stressed situation. Concerning the size of the Shop weld
stiffener ...!.shown. dot.ted. in Fig . .4 22, a.pl one can choose the
same dimensions of a single outstanding secondary beam flange
with an extended length (L ) equal to the notched length (L0 ).
1

Cb l
t .. h
., Fig. 4.23 Flexible Beam-to-Beam
u!: Rsb fc Welded Connections
$ s
L. .J
tw As has been mentioned previously, one can use shop welding
to connect the framing angle to the secondary beam web and then
("- use field ~elding to connect the framing angle to the main beam
ft web. This field welding is very popular in some countries,
1- 1
fbi
while in others (like in Egypt) the field welding is not
recommended, the inspection being rather questionable. Fig.
Stiffener
4.23.a, illustrates a flexible beam-to'""beam connection
completely welded.

Fieid bolting being very rapid and requiring less skilled

fa> 1 - 1
labor then welding, one can utilize the shop welding in
conjunction with the field bolting as shown in Fig. 4.23.b.

Fig . .4.22 Refer to Example 4.12.

.._lcHAPTER4 319
320 CHAPTER4
4.14.1.2. Beams of Constant Heights:
If the ·cross section of the main and the secondary
beams are of constant heights, we can choose one of the

.•
following flexible connections:
• "'
•
;. ••
.___
t
~
<

._

Secondary Beam

Fig. 4.24

(a) Fig. 4.24, illustrates a configuration similar to that

given in Section 4.14.1.1 where the secondary beam is notched at
Fig. 4.25
the tension and compression flanges. The secondary beam web is
/

to be checked against bending stresses along Section 1-1. If

the web thickness is not sufficient an upper as well as a lower ~ -I <
stiffener are to be provided in order to increase the resisting
r.F'
.cross section. .•· Rb

(b) Fig. 4.25, shows an alternative configuration where

.
.
·:.
I
1
~
. notching the flange beam can increase ·the cost of fabrication, . I
,.--' ---.; ·.
hence a cleat web plate is first welded to the secondary beam
web and then welded .to two framing angles. The advantage of
a- a b - b
this type ~f connections is that the web cleat plate thickness
(t) can be chosen in accordance to a safe bending,stress along
Section (1-1). · The induced moment along Section ( 1-1) is
Fig. 4.26
~CHAPTER4 321 322 CHAPTER4L
Fig. 4. 27. a, illustrates a beam-to-beam connection where
the secondary beam is set below the main beam top flange. While
To be noticed that the group of bolts connecting the
Fig. 4.27.b, shows a connection where a coplanar top flanges is
framing angles to the main beam web will be subjected to a
required. For this last situation bending along Section 1-1 is
~lexural ~(e
vertical shear (Rb) as well as a
,•' •• I
moment M =
1 + e 2). to be checked where (M = Rb.e).

(c) The third alternative is to replace the web cleat Refer to Example 4.13.
plate by a channel as shown in Fig. 4. 26. The channel cross
section may be chosen in accordance to the safe bending stress
** **
~.e .
along Section (1-1) where M = 1

4.14.2. Flexible Shear End Plate Beam-to-Beam Connections:

In order to avoid repetition, refer to Section 4.6. The
same idea is utilized to provide a flexible beam-to-beam
connection. Vertical fillet weld lines will transmit the
secondary beam reactions to the beam shear end plates. These
reactions will be transmitted to the main beam via the bolts
behaving in double shear.

Stiffen~rs

1 - 1

{b)

Fig. 4.27
 324 CHAPTER4
CHAPTER4 323
3 2 4
Example (4.1): Welded Double Web Framing Angles: I
X
= 30 /12 + 2 X 5.8 X 15 = 4860 em
Design the flexible beam-to-column connection using a
--2 2 4
welded double web framing angles. The column and the beam are I
y
30 X 0.81 + 2 X 5.8 X (5.8/2 - 0.81) = 70.3 em
B.F.I No 30 and S.I.~- No 40 respectively. The beam reaction
is 10.0 loris (Rb = 10.0 tons). Refer to section 4.3.1. I
p =IX + I
y
4930.3 em
4

Solution
e = 7- 0.81 = 6.19 ems Mt = 10 x 0.81 = 8.1 t.cm

10 2
=2 ~--~~~~.---~
X (30+2x5.8) X 1.0
= 0.12 t/cm
S·l·B

8 1 30 2
q = · x
2 X 4930.3
= 0.0246 t/cm
A(Mt)
//

8.1 X (5.8- 0.81) O t/ 2

25cms 2 x 4930 .. 3 = "04 em

·-·. ·-1~(~~· (0.12+0.04)

2
+ (0.0246)
2
= 0.161 t/cm
2
< 0.72 t/cm
O.K.
2

Use s = 0. 161/0.72 = 0 .. 22cm take s = 0.4cm (min)

No need to check section (2-2) it will be safe.

2. Framing Angles Thickness:

Neglect the effect of the end return hook weld (12 mms).

Assume the N.A to be at a distance h/6 = 5.0 ems.

Sec.s-s Using Method (A) of Section 4.3.1:

M t ·
ex erna 1
= 10 x 6.19 = 61.9 t.cms.
Framing angles to beam web

1 2 5
1. Wel~s Attaching the Framing Angles to the Beam Web: M -
internal - 2 f t x 2s x 6 h x 3 h = 500 ft.s

Assume the size of fillet weld s = 1.0 ems. to use Table 3.2.
2
- b2 Equate M = M. and get: 0.124/s t/cm.
X =d + b (b = 5.8 ems; d = 30 ems) X = 0.81 ems. ex ~n

2
 CHAPTER4. 325 326 CHAPTER4
s=7mms M = 0.1358 X (7 - 2 X 0.7) 0. 76 t.ems ..
T -- I! -- 0. 76 X 6
f - put fb = 1.4 t/em2
b Z t2 X 1

t = 1.8 ems. (still excessive)

-s
It may be allowed .to reach the .yield stress.
\

= J 61
'1
X 0. 76 ·
t x 2.4 = 1.38 ems. use 2 < s 120x120x14.

Section (s-s):
T = 0.124/s x s x 1 em~ 0.124 tons ! (s 0.4 em). 3. Velds Attaching the Framing Angles to the Column Flange:
Chooses= 0.7 ems. (neglect hook weld) 1.0cms t.Ocms
M = 0.124 X (a-k) 0.124 x (7- 2 x 0.7) = 0:694 t.cm.
Plane 1-1: 11 ( 11
M 0.694 X 6 2
fb =z = put Fb = 1.4 t/cm get t: ft
~
= 0.194
.
j
X 1

t = 1.73 em. (angle thickness).

The same result can be obtained using Equation 4.3
q
~// X 3 X 0.7
10
- ::::-2---=o--=-= = 0. 238 2
t/em . ·.¢·~ ,_
=5 X 7 X 6 = 0.33 2
t/cm .
2
0.7 X 30

t
2
= 10.8 X 10 X 6.19 X (7- 2 X 0.7) ~ 30
. -2
X 1.4 = 0.73 t/em2 1.0cms
II
t = 1.73 em. (very excessive). (o.k).

Plane
Using Method (B) we get:
q = 0.238 t/em2
2 X 7 X YX~ y = 2 S (30 - y) X (
30
; y) y= 7.2 ems. ~//

= 10x(7-0.81)x 6 =
!XX=~ 3 4 2
X [2 X 7 X 7.2 + 2 X 0.7 X (30 7273.1 em 2 X 0.7 X 30 Sec.2·2
Framing angles
to column flange
_ 61.9 X (30 - 7.2) . 2 2
ft~- 10052.1
= 0.194 t/cm = 0.73 t/cm (o.k).

T = 0.194 x s x 1 em= 0.1358 tons.

 328 CHAPTER4
. . . . CHAPTER4 327
d :: 1.27 em .{a)
Example {4.2): Bolted Double Veb Framing Angles Connection:
Design a flexible bolted double web framing angles Qbolt = 2 · 50 4.032 d
connection. The beam is a S.I.B. #No {40) carrying a reaction of
. ·. d = 0.62 em • • • • • • . (b)
10 ton5. The column is a B.F.I. #No {30}. Use Non pretensioned
bolts (Grade 4.6}.Refer to s~ction 4.3.2. {t ·b=1.4cms) From (a) & (b) use 4 ordinary bolts 12 mm diameter.
we
Solution 2
~ = 1.13 cm A
s
= 0.84 cm2 .

Reaction
s = 7.5 ems ; s = 7.5/1.2 = 6.25 < 12 t = {12x0.7=8.4cms)
of Beam
~'-...v v
!ll
~.;._.;:...J Direct e1 = 3.75 ems ; e
1
= 3.75/1.2 = 3.125d > 3d . .• Fb = 1.2 Fu
... . ·+ Shear
... ·+ 2. Group of Bolts {2}:
.... ..
! -·
.
Bolts Group {1}
Assume the number of bolts per column 4 bolts .

Rsh = 0.25 x 4 x 1.13 = 1.13 tons

-!'----
~i 1 Rs h .a = 5.0 / 4 = 1.25 tons> 1.13 tons unsafe
Connecting angles
- Use connecting angles 70 x 70 x 7 .Use M16 - Rsh = 0.25 x 4 x 2·0 = 2 .0 t_ons > 1.25 tons (O.K.}
Shear
with height equals to 30 ems.
Torsion +
= 5 [{7 - 0. 7)/ 2 + x
r
max
= o-.. 77
From the construction condition
tension ~t.a 2 tons.
L ri
Bolts Group (2)
7 -0.70
d
max
= --,3: - - - = 2. 10 em. 2
L r.l. = 281.2 em2 •
1 r
max = 11.25 ems.

Column Flange
1. Group (1) of Bolts:
Resultant =J 0.77
2
= 1.46 tons

=410
= 2.50
1
Foundation
2
~Rd .sh . = 2 X 0. 25 X 4. X II4 d =. L 57 d 2 .. l t
Ia +T -K J

= 0.80 X. 3.6 X 1.40 X d = 4.032 d .

I Soil

Flow Chart of Reaction

I
= 2 .. 50 = 1.57. d 2 Path to ·soil
T
 CHAPTER4 329 330 CHAPTER4

e =7 + 0·7 = 3.85 ems.

( 0.33 X 4 ) X 1.57 2.072 tons
= 10 x 3.85 = 38.5 t.cms.
= 0.654 tons
Take ,the. first moment of area at the lower edge:
Then:
14 y x ~ =2 As [(11.25 - y) + (18.75 y) + (26.25 - y)]
2 2
1. 46 ] + [ 0. 654] = 0 795 < 1 . 0 safe
[ 2.0 2.072 .
i y2 + 6.93 y- 129.94 = 0.0
y = 3.842 ern. 3. The Framing Angles Thickness:
Referring to Section 4.3.2.1, regarding sec. (1-1) get the
I
X
= 3. 8423 x 14 + 2 x 1.155 [ - - 2 + 14.9082 + 2 2 . 4 0 82]
7.408 following:

4
I
X
= 2064.711 em. T ftb A = 0.417 X 1.57 = 0.655 tons.
s
38.50 X 22.408 2
2064.711
= 0.417 Vcm M :::: T • [a ; t - K] ::::
2
7
0.655 [7 + O. - 2 X 0. 7]

R = 0.417 x 1.57 = 0.654 tons. (A

2
= 1.57 em ) = 1.6 t.cm
t.a s
1.6 X 6 2
fb ·- put fb = Fb = 1.4 t/cm
N.B~ Whenever bolts are subjected to combined shear and tension, 7.5 X

they can be designed as follows: Hence:

t = 0.957 ems. (to get the same result use Equ. 4.4)
Bolts should satisfy the following interaction equation: If it is allowed to reach the yield stress, hence

< 1.0
t2 = 1.6 X 6 0.73 ems. t = 0.86 ems.
7.5 X 2.4

Choose 2 < s 70 x 70 x 10 (yield not allowed).

\/'here:
or
Rsh = 2.0 tons
2 < s 70 x 70 x 9 (yield allowed).
R
sh.a
= 1.46 tons . .
The other Section (2-2) can be checked according to the
eccentricity of the beam reaction as follows:
~CHAPTER4 331 332 CHAPTER4.

Connection:
10 tons
Design a bolted single web cleat connection. The beam is
20~ 0 t. em. a S. I. B. 40 carrying a reaction of 10 tons and the column a
B.F.I. # 30. Refer to section 4.4.
20 0 2 2 Solution
• ·x 6 = 0.067 t/em < 1.4 t/cm (o.k) Reaction
2
2 X 1.0 X 30
o£ Beam
- Use connecting a~gles 80 x 80 x 8
2 2 Direct
=2 3 X 10
X 2 X 30 X 1.0
= 0.25 t/em < 0.84 t/em (o.k) with height equals to 32 ems.
Shear
- From the construction condition
-rr-..;-.r----.-.~
8 - 0.80
0·7(!1\S d
max 3
= 2.40 em. Bolts Group {1)

~-fl--1--~
Sec. 2 2
1.

R
sh.a = 4-
10
Bolts ( Grade 4.6 )

2.50 tons.

n d2 2
Connecting angles

Shear
R
s.sh.
0.25 X 4 X = 0.785 d . Torsion +
tension

~ 0.6 X 3.6 X 0~80 d 2.16 d. Bolts Group {2)

(e
1
= 1.5 d)
2
Qbolt = 2.50 = 0.785 d
.Column Flange
= 1.78 em
d • . • . (a)

Qbolt = 2.50 = 1.728

j
••• d 1.44 em
d

. (b) I Foundation

From (a) & (b)

bolts (Grade 4.6) 20 mm
use 4 Non. pretensioned
diameter.
.I Soil
I
Flow Chart o£ Reaction
Path to Soil
2. Group o£ Bolts {2):
Assume to use 4 bolts d (20 mm)
 CHAPTER4 333 334 CHAPTER4
8 + 0.80 10 x 4.40 = 44 t.cm.
10 e1 = 2 = 4.40 ems = e2
Rsh.a = 4 = 2.50 tons.
R_> = 44.0 X 12.0 = 1 65 t
- Mt 2 [ -2
4 + -2]
12
· on.
.
Group 111 S· .
•
S·F·I 30

& . . Ill {
·

~J
...
·•
8·0
8·0
~I
r Resultant shearing force

= 0.25
j
= 2~5 2 +
2
1.65 2

= 3.14
= 2.995 tons.

i·~ e-o Rsh x 4 x 3:14 x {2) / 4 tons.

; - - ' 3-Q

~ ""-aeat angie
~ = 0.6 x 3.6 x 2 x 0.8 = 3.456 tons. (e
1
= 1.5 d)
_A clearance ( 60x8(h<8l
"
Flexural moment "Mx " = R x e
2 = 44 t .em.

Section ( 1-1 ) : d = 20 mms

A
s
= 2.45 co/

Take first moment of area to compute y

d::: 20mlllS

6·0 4 ¥2 = 2.45 [<11 - y) + (19 - y) + (27 - y)]

6·0
6·0
4 ¥2 + 7.08 y- 134.52 =0
3·0

~ton y = 4.981 em. - h/6 ~ 30/6 ~ 5.0 ems {can·be utilized).

Section A -A 3
4.981 X 8 [ 2 2 2
IX= 3 + 2.36 6.0:9 + 14.019 + 22.019 ]

4
I = 2023.07 cm .
X

r
30
OilS ·-f-·
f
tb
= 44 x 22.019
2023.07
= 0 _479 t/cm2

l ~ms
Rta = 0.479
0.33 X
x As= 0.479 x 2.45 = 1.17 tons

4 X A = 3.23 tons
s
Pitch ld=22l Cleat angle
critical section
 CHAPTER4 335 336 CHAPTER4
Example (4.4}: Welded Cleat Plate Web-Beam Shear Connection
2 2 (Section 4:5)
2. 995] + [ 1. 17 ] = 1 . 02 "" 1.0 ( O.K. )
[ 3.14 3.23 Design the connection previously given in Example 4.3 using
a welded cleat plate.
Solution
3. Check o:f Cle~t ·Angle:
Applying in equation (:f ) o:f Section (4.4) :-

2
e. ( h _ p ).(a+ t - 2k )) / ( h ~ t )
3
= {18 1\ .

r
:fb

1\ = 10 tons

B+I 30 ~ems.
e = 4.4 ems

p
=30ems

= 8.0 ems
Ih-~1
·~
L
fD Cleat.
a = 8.0 ems eiz. ~.
,(j) Plate
t = 0.8 ems cvF
ID
k =2 x 0.8 = 1.6 ems
1. Welds Attaching the Cleat Plate .to the Beam Web:

Assume .the following:

get t = 1.22 ems choose angle 80x80x14. h = height of vertical weld = 30.0cms.
b =breadth of horizontal wel~= 6.0 ems.
s = size of weld lines = 10 mms.

Use Table 3.2 .to compute the properties of the weld lines

2 2
i> 6.0
X = d + 2b = 30 + 2 x 6.0 = 0 "86 em.
e = 6.0 + 2.0·- 0.86 S! 7.14 ems.
.Jl CHAPTER 4 337
Example (4.5):
338 CHAPTER4

10 .2 2
:= 0:238 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm O.K. Repeat Example 4.4 using Non-pretensioned (Grade 4.6-) bolts
q~:= (30·+ 2 X 6.0) X 1.0
to attach the cleat plate to the beam web.
The torsional moment Mt 10 x 0.86 = 8.6 t.cm is small and
can be neglected.
Solution
1
s = 0- 238 x = 0.34 ems. , take s = 0.4 ems (min).
0.7

2. Welds Attaching the Cleat Plate to the Column Flange:

Plane 1-1:

q
~//
=2 X
(s

10
30 X S
= 1.0 ems)

= 0.166
s
t/cm2 r
})ems

f
l.
=
10
2
X 7.14
X S X
X 6
-2
30
=
0.238
s
t/cm
2 ~
ems
L
s = 0.42 em. take s 5 mms.

Plane 2-2:
10 2
q
I
= =---~~~~
2 X 30 X 0. 5
= 0.33 t/cm . The maximum length of cleat plate is
""//
10 X 7.14 X 6
= 0.476 2 40- 4 X tfb = 40- 4 X 2.16
= t/cm
2 X 0.5 X
= 31 .. 36 em ..

q~ = Jco.33) 2
+ (0.476)
2
= 2
0.578 t/cm < o.72 (o.k) Take length = 30 em.

3. Cleat Plate Thickness:

(1) Thickness of the Cleat Plate:
1.0 X 7.14 X 6 2·
fbc = put fb = Fb = 0.72x2.4 t/cm. The cleat plate must withstand the total reaction as a
t X (solid rectangular section)
shearing force in addition to the moment induced by the reaction
t = 0.52 em. take t = s = 0.6 ems. eccentricity of 6 em.

3 10
= 0.83 t/cm
2
< 0.84 O.K. Q = Rb = 10.0 ton.
q =2 X 0.6 X 30
M = Rb.e = 10 x 6 = 60 t.cm.
 Cll:\I'TEH. -l 339
340 CHAPTER4

6 M 6 X 60 = 0.4 t/cm2 Reaction Assume size of weld s 1 ems and then compute the
= 2 = t
t h t X of Beam appropriate weld size.
Direct
= 1.4 t/cm ,
2
get: Shear Section (1-1): At point (A)
10 2
q 0.17 t/cm .
t l!: 0.285 em. (a) Bolts at Beam 2 X 30 X 1
J,//
Web
3 10 2
6 X 10 X 6
0.20 t/cm2 •
2 X t 30 0.84 t/em 2
X 2 X 1 X (30)
Cleat Plate
t l!: 0.596 em. (b)

From (a) & (b) take t = 0.60 em Shear

+
Moment 5 0.26
(required) 0.36 ----) s = 4mm (a)
0. 72
(2) Bolts Attaching Beam Web to Cleat
Fillet Welds
Plate:
Section (2-2): At point (A)
Use Non pretension bolts M20 (Grade 4.6) .
M 6 M 6 10 6
t/cm2
X X
ft = = = 0.20
(2)2 1.. 2 s h2 2 LOx
R
s.sh
= 0.25 X 4 X TI
4
= 3.14 tons
X

Q 10 2
~= 0.80 X 3.6 X 2.0 X 0.60
2 s h
= ;:;------;,...--;~--;:;-;::
2x1.0x30
= 0.17 t/cm

= 3.45 tons ( Table 1.3 - e

1
= 2d)
Equivalent Stresses:
R
least
= 2.54 tons

10 2
number of bolts = 3.14-
- 3.18 bolts.
Flow Chart of Reaction
f
eq
1.10 x 0.72 t/cm.

Use 4 bolts Transmission to Soil

30 2 2 2
- 4 = 7.50 em = 4 d
P itch - ( e
1
= p/2 = 3.75 ems ) f
eq
(0.2) + 3 (0.17) = 0.36 t/cm

e 1 = 3.75/2 = 1.875d Fb = 0.6 Fu 1 .. 0 X 0. 3~ :::

s(req.) = 0.45 em.
1.1 0. 72
~ = 0.6 x 3.6 x 2 x 0.6 = 2.59 tons n ~ 10/2.59 = 4 bolts
X

s = 5 mms (b)

3. Welds Attaching Cleat Plate to Column Flange: From (a) & (b) ~ use weld size of 5 mm at both sides of
Q = 10 tons ; M = 10 x 6 = 60 t.cms. cleat plate.
 CHAPTER4 341 342 CHAPTER4
(4.6):Welded Flexible End-Plate Connections Refer to
=='-=----"'--- 0.785 d2 = 2,so ----7 d = 1.78 em.
Section 4.:2.4
Redesign Example 4.3 using an end-plate welded to the beam 1.728 d = 2.50 ----7 d = 1.44 em.
web and bolted to the column flange by ordinary bolts. d = 18 mms.
Solution
Use 4 Non-pretensioned bolts Grade (4.6) M20

(2) Fillet Welds Attaching Beam-Web to End-Plate:

i Height of end-plate = 2 x 2d + 6d = 10d

lr
-·j-20cms
I
·20cms
Weld Size:
= 20 ems.

iL l 10
= 2::;;-x--:2"'0".~o~x--o:-.-;::;7"'2
8-F-I 30 s = 0 · 347 em.

Take s =4 mms •.
End-Plate
Thikness =6~m
(3) Check of Shear Stresses on

{1) Bolts of End-Plate to Column Flange: 3 X 10 2 .

q = 2::;:-x--:2"'[...---2.-::0:----:::2 {"2-."0-+-:--:0".~2"""').........,].--x--=o-.-=-6
7 = 0.8 t/em < 0.35 x F
y
• Use end-plate with thickness 6 llllli.
< 0.35 X 2.4
• IF we use four bolts ( O.K.)

Force per bolt R 10 -

=~ - 2.50 ton.

Use Non pretensioned bolts of Grade {4.6) •

n d 2 · ·. 2
Single shear resistance
. . Rs.s h = 0.25 X 4 X - ---
4
= 0.785 d .

Bearing resistance JL
·
.
-bear~ng
= 0.8 x 3.6 x d x 0.60 = 1.728 d.
end distance = 2d
-~1 CHAPTER 4 343 344 CHAPTER4
Example (4.7)~ Unstiffened Seat-Beam Connection:
N = ~:::-8;;--.
7_0--=--=-=
1.80 X 1.10
3.60 = 0.79 em.
Refer to Section 4.9
Design an unstiffened seated beam connection of a floor N ~ K Take N = K = 3.60 ems.
beam having a span 6.0 ms. The spacing between beams is 4.0 ms.
Required seat angle width > 3.60 ems.
Assume: own weight of beam = 100 kg/m'.
2' Choose a seat angle (100 x 100 x 12).
Floor is R.C.slab = 250 kg/m .
2
Floor covering = 150 kg/m
Live loads = 300 kg/m
2
w t/m From Fig. ef = Clearance + ; = 1.2 +
3 6
2 = 3.0 ems.
,):J;'''''''''''''''~
Solution
f 6·00ms ~'
R
e = ef - t - 1.0= 3.0 - 1.2 - 1.0 = 0.80 em.
W = 0.10 + (0.25 + 0.15 + 0.30) X 4

W = 2.90 t/m' Use angle width = 24 ems = breath of beam flange.

-2
2.90 X 6
M
max
= = 8
= 13.05 mt. v
I

.... I
I
-;
13.05 X 100 3 i
zx req. = 1.40
= 932 em --7 choose B.F.I. No(24).

Reaction of the floor beam = 2.902 X 6

= 8.70 ton.

(1) Bearing Length of Seat Angle:

..• i! •..
R
N + K =F x tw K = 2 x 1.80 = :3.6 ems.
24·0cms j
crp

(2) Design of Seat Angle:

Top angle
i 8.70 X 0.80 = 6.96 t.cm

i 6 6.96
i t
req
=
24
X
1.40
1.12 em< 1.20 em O.K.
-t·-· B-F-I 24
X

i While conservative the allowable bending stresses Fb = 0.58 Fy,

i one can say the critical section of the steel angle is rectangular
i and hence Fb =
0. 72 F .• The utilized assumptions being somewhat
y
approximate we prefer to be conservative.
 CHAPTER4 343 344 CHAPTER4

Example (4.7): Unstiffened Seat-Beam Connection: 8.70

.N 3.60 = 0.79 em.
to Section 4.9 1.80 X 1.10
Design an unstiffened seated beam connection of a floor N::: K Take N = K = 3.60 ems.
beam having a span 6.0 ms. The spacing between beams is 4.0 ms.
Required seat angle width > 3.60 ems.
Assume: own weight of beam = 100 kg/m'.
2'
Floor is R.C.slab kg/m .= 250 Choose a seat angle (100 x 100 x 12).
2
Floor covering = 150 kg/m •
2
Live loads = 300 kg/m .
~lll!il!lli!!ill~
w t/ni From Fig. ef = Cl earance 2
3 6
+ N - 1.2 + •
2 - 3 . 0 ems.

Solution
fR §·OOms ~ •

e = ef - t - 1.0= 3.0 - 1.2 - 1.0 = 0.80 em.

W= 0.10 + (0.25 + 0.15 + 0.30) X 4
W = 2.90 t/m' Use angle width = 24 ems = breath of beam flange.

Mmax
WL2
= - - =
2.90 X 62 = 13. OS mt. v .
8
..-llr I
I t
zx req. = 13.05 X 100
1.40
= 932 em
3
~choose
'
B.F.I. No(24).

Reaction of the floor beam = 2.90 X 6

= 8.70 ton . .

(1) Bearing Length of Seat Angle:

•• •• I

N+ K = R
Fcrp x tw K =2 tbf 2 X 1.80 = 3.6 ems ..
l. 24·0cm$ ·I
(2) Design of Seat Angle:
..L
'f
! ". . Top angle
= 6.96
I W-.
8.70 x 0.80 t.em

i 6 6.96
i Clearance= 12mms
t = X
= 1.1Z em< 1.20 em O.K.
-r·-· ·-·-·-·-·-·-
B-F·l 24
req 24 X 1.40

K
i llhile'conservative the allowable bending stresses F F • = 0.58
A
i
i .
. Fseat angle
y
one can say the critical section of the steel angle is rectangular
and hence Fb = 0. 72 Fy • The utilized assumptions being somewhat
b

l'
approximate we prefer to be conservative.
..lcHAPTER4 345 346 CHAPTER4
(3) Bolts Attaching the Seat Angle to Column Flange:
--3
1.40 X 24
Use four high strength bolts of friction type as shown. I + 2 X
X 3
The diameter of bolts is governed by the construction condition.
2 2
1.91 (o.8o + s.2o ]
i.e. (10 - 1.2) > 2 x 3 d
4
. 24.0cms
I
X
= 121.33 em ..
d < 1. 50 ern. t1
H1 = R.ef = 8.70 X 3.00
= 26.1 t.cm.
"t [I]]
ems

u
ems

• •
I-T
1 1
ftb

Rt.a
= 26.10
= 1.11 X
X (2.2 + 4.4 - 1.4)

2.45
121.33

2.72 tons
= 1.11 t/crn
2

f
~My
-r =6 H
=
6 X 26.1
= 0.0652' t/cm
2 Rt = 0.33 X 4 X 2.45 = 3.23 tons
2
b 24 X (10)
R = 8.7 I 8 = 1.080 tons
10 sh.a
= !_ X 12 = 1..956 ton.
Tbolt 2
X-
2 rr (2.0) 2 X 0.25 X 4 = 3.14 tons
=
4
1.956
0.80
= 2.44 tons --4 Choose H.S.B. M16 (10.9)
Check by interaction equation .
2 2
~-
8 70 08 2 72
Qbolt = · = 2.175 tons. (Ps 3.16 ton safe) 1.
[ 3.14 ] + [ 3.23
• ] = 0. 91 < 1. 0 safe

Use 4 H.S.B. M 16 (10.9) * If Welds are Used to Connect Seat Angle to the Column:

y
\j i!
(4) Top Cleat: I
II
II
From the construction condition.
-!------' i.---!--'
(a- t) >3d > 4.80 ; choose.1 <55 x 55 x 6
- ·-~-- ·-·-+-

• If We Use Non pretensioned bolts of Grade (4.6) M20 . '

A
' A

yX 24 X~=:: 2 ~X [(2.20 - y) + (6.60 - y)] 10[

em ,,
11

Use bolts d=18 --7 A = 0.75 (1.8)2

X TI --4-- A = 1.91 2
em .
l. 24·0cms .1
s s
-2 -
12 y + 7.64 y - 33.60 =.0

y ~ 1.40 em.

Sec. 1 - 1
 347
348 CHAPTER4
8.70 x 3.00 = 26.10 t.cm.
Example (4.8):
Redesign Example 4.3 using. an Unstiffened Seated Angle
Q = R = 8.70 ton.
Connection. Refer to section 4.9.
Assume size of weld to be unity. Solution
Weld at Sec(1-1):
(1) Bearing Length on Seat Angle:

N + K = _,__R~­ K = 2 tbf =2 x 2.16 em.

M.ymax t .F
w crp
=
Yhere "t " is the "Fcrp" is the
beam web thickness,
w
2
allowable crippling stress which equals 1.80 t/cm (E.C.P. 2001).
2
= 0.781 t/cm .
10
N = 1.44 X 1.80- (2 X 2.16) = ..; 0.46 em.
q
=QA = -=---8-=-.7-=-0--:: = 0. 435 t/ cm.2
2 X 10 X 1
.J,// w
N ~- K Take N =K = 2 x 2.16 ~ 4.5 ems.
2 Unsafe
= 1.08 t /em > 1. 1 x 0. 70
End clearance of beam from face of column allow 10 IIIDS

clearance = 1. 0 em.
1 · 08 ~ 1.4 ems > Thickness of seat angle.
s req = .1.1x0.70-

Hence either to increase the size of the seat angle

I
or to reject the welded seat angle solution • I
I
-r·-.·
i
i
J
'.
•
B·Fj·I 30. t
'
I
j !,._Critica\ section

uL.;~m ·
!
-~·of the angle
....l..l......A--i.---1>- Seat angle
t 1·0cm (tOO x150 x14l
.l. 20.0cms _j
 CHAPTER4 349 350 CHAPTER4L
{2} Design of Seat Angle: . (3) Bolts Attaching the Seat Angle to the Column Flange:
Use high strength bolts (10.9) type.
Try seat angle 80 x 120 x 12
* Construction condition allows a maximum bolt diameter of
Assume critical section of angle to be at 1.0 em from the d = 15 - 1.40 = 2.26 em.
max
inner face of angle leg (as showri in Fig~). · f 30 ems ·

From Fig. :
-r-r- I ·1
ef = N
2 + Clearence = 4 2·50 + 1.0 = 3.25 ems.
= 10 X 3.25 = 32.50
t.cm.'t~ •(f:--!j},
e =ef.-t-1.0 f =6 X 3.25 X
2
10
= 0.03 t/cm2
/
30 X (15)
e = 3.25 - 1.20 - 1.0 = 1.05 em.

Moment at root of angie: T = O.OJ

2 X 15
2 X 30 = 3 • 375 t on.
= 10 x 1.05 = 10.5 t.cms.
Use two bolts row
Assume that the angle width is 20 em.
3.375
=-2- = 1. 6875 ton.
Req. thickness = j 206 xx 10.5
1 .40 = 1 • 5 ems > 1.2 ems Unsafe ext, M

• ·Minimum allowable diameter . of bolt from construction

, Try an unequal angle [ 100 x 150 x 14] condition:
d ml.n
"' = 152 - X
1.40
6
= 1 .. 13 em.

ef = ~ + Clearence = 4· 50 + 1.0 = 3.25 ems.

Use 4 H.S.B. M(12) (10.9). [Text, Mall.= 0.80 x 5.30]
e = ef - t - 1.0 = 3.25 - 1.40 - 1.0 = 0.85 ems
= 4.24 ton
> 1.687 t safe
Moment at the angle root = 10 x 0.85 = 8.5 t.cms.
Che.ck, .of Shear on Bolts:

= R.4 = 410 - 2.5 tons.

8.5
Req; thi c kness = j 6 X
20 x 1.40 = 1.35 ems < 1.4 ems (O.K)
Ps (M 121 = 1.92 ton < 2.5 tons Unsafe
 352 CHAPTER4
. . CHAPTER4 351
Example (4.9): Stiffened Seat Beam Connection:
Refer to Section 4:10
.Increase the bolt diameter to 16 mms [ps (M l6) · = 3. 58 tons If the total load on a floor beam of an industrial building
> 2.5 t is 5 t/m , span of the beam is 6.0 ms. Design a stiffened seated
Safe beam connection.
A
Use 4 H.S.B. M 16 [(10.9) type] Solution ,_..-~ w=s·o ttnl
f ~~II Ill! !11111111111~
\~~ I ~ · ..

(4) Top Cleat: (1) Design of the Beam Cross Section:

l 6·0m -1
From the construction condition where d = 16 mms.
s ...l
(a - t) < 3 d < 4.8 ems Choose l< 55 x 55 x 6 v .
__A

1.2cm
8-f-[30

M = 22.50 mt.
es R
C=3.0cms c IN K

zx = 22.50 X 100 J
req 1.40 I!U Ul t.L--
= 1607 em .
3
-44-
aL
Choose

Reaction . R
BFI #

= =5
(30)

x2 6
A
u
~
ems
= 15.0 tons.

(2) Determination of Seat Vidtb "V":

* Check ~gainst Crippling of Beam Veb:

R
N = -::o--=--.- - K
£~ 11 x tw

=2
]
x 2 ems. 0·2l ll-2l
'

15.0 .
N : 1.80 X 1.20 - 2 X 2 = 2.90 ems
ll
---
Jo._

N 2:: K ; N = 4. 0 ems. Sec. S - S

~CHAPTER4 353 354 CHAPTER4
Seat width a =N + Clearance + C 4.0 + 1.2 + 3.0 = 8.2 ems. 15 6 X 15 X 2.10
4.32 = 8.2 t + ~=-~~~~
S X t
where C is as shown in figure. s

Hence take a = 8.2 ems. t = 1.075 em. (a conservative design uses f

s max

(3) Stiffener Thickness "t ": D- Veld Condition:

. s
The stiffener thickness "t " is chosen such that several 2 (s) x 0.72 = 0.84 t
s
(s = size of fillet weld)
s
conditions are satisfied:
2 S X 0.72
A- t
s
~ t wb ~ 1.20 em. ts = 0.84
1.71 s

Where twb = thickness of beam web.

If we used weld of size 1.0 em.

B- Local Buckling Condition: t = 1,.71 ems.

s

ra < t6 t
s
>
8 2
· > 0.48 em.
From all the previous conditions. the stiffener thickness
s
"t s " can be estimated as; t = 1.80
__::s_ _ _ __
em.
C- Bearing Stress on Stiffener:
The reaction from the beam will be concentrated on the
far edge of the seat bracket.
(4) Determination of the Stiffener
A practical trend is to take the top-plate width as equal
From Fig. :
N 4
to ( = 0.40 L ; the stiffener plate length·. The stiffener length
es = a- 2 = 8.2 - 2 is chosen to satisfy the stress conditions of fillet welds.
= 6.20 ems.
Take s = 1.0 em.
b=0·2L A b=0·2L
e = a
2-
6.20 - 8.2
2 r-1 r-1
vf .
= 2 .. 10 ems. x·~J-·~ . ·-X
. ,.L_y) !
2 . I
= aR t + 6R.e
-2-- i L
s a .t
s
i
!
< = 4.32 t/cm2 .
fb ear1ng
. =
Jlli
Section in Veld Lines.
, ...lcHAPTER4 355 356 CHAPTER4
- 2LxL/2 L
y ~ (0.40 L + 2 L) = 2.40 -y
= 2(2Lb x +L2/ L)2 .A,---
v

L2 32cms
=
2 (b + L)
! II
I I
i=ft·Ocms
z X X L (L + 4 b)
IX L3 / 4 2 = YA ~

3
12cms 112cms
YA
=L / 2.40 = 0.60 L x(A) y J18 ems
-~---
II
II
II
2 =L (L + 4 X 12) l• A__
x(A) 3
I.. 30cms .I
=L (L + 48)
3

r Al.
= 15 X 7.5 X 3
L (L ·+ 48)
: 337.50
L (L + 48)

:req. + 3 q!.J..//
=J q - 15 - 7.50
.J..//- 2 L - -L-
2
< 0.72 x 1.1 t/cm .

2
337.5 7 5 2
This equation can be best solved by trial and error. :feq.= J ( L (L + 48)) + 3 C-(-l

Assume L = 15 em~ :req. = 1.10 t/cm

2
(Unsa:fe). By trial and error ~ L = 18 ems. :r
eq.
~ 0 . 79 t/c m2 . (0. K. )

L = 21 em ~ :r eq. = 0. 70 t/cm
2
(Sa:fe). N.B. The steel T-Section will be sa:fe against bending and
equivalent stresses.
Vidth b = 0.20 L = 0.40 x 21 = 8.40 ems.

But the width of' the top plate should not be less than b:fb,
which means that top plate width is to. be taken 32 em. The weld
width. "b" can be taken 12 em. The weld length "L" can thus be
deereased,
. . . CHAPTER4 357 358 CHAPTER4L
Example (4.10): Stiffened Seat-Angle Connection Section 4.13
2. Properties of Critical Section (s-s):
Redesign. Example 4.8 using a stiffened seat-angle
connection.
20 X 2.1 X 1.05 + 3 X 4.8 X 1 X 4.5
Solution y = 20 x 2.1 + 3 x 4.8 x 1.0 = 1 · 9 3 ems

4
I
X
= 170 em

From figure get e

1
= 2.65 em e
2
= 2.2 em
Oeararv:e
10mms
5.1.8. (40) 3. Straining Actions and Stresses:

M.= 10 sine x e 2 + 10 cos ex e

1
K
M !1:1 32.98 t.em · (cos a = 0~ 554 sin a = 0.832)
f = 32.98x1.93 = 0.374 Vcm2 (o.k)
•••• safe which means
that we can decrease
bt 170
Seat cleat the thickness of the
180 x120 x121
1. iD·O ems .I f = 32.98x4.95 = 0.96 2
t/cm (o.k)
stiffeners.
be 170
1. Geometrical
* Choose a seat angle (80 x 120 x 12) with 3 stiffeners of
thickness 1.0 ems each and of width 20.0 ems. 4 •. BOlts Attaching the Seat Angle to the Column flange:
Proceed as previously outlined in'example (4.8).
* The critical section (s-s) is assumed at 1.0 em from the
inner face of the angle leg. 5. Top Cleat:
Choose ·an angle 55 X 55 X 6 With 4 high strength 'bolts (d =
16 IIIIlS). · Two bolts are to ·be arranged on each leg.
s

s- s
 . ·~·

·~CHAPTER4 359
Example (4.11}: Triangular Stiffened Seat Brackets:
360 CHAPTER 4 a,.
Refer to Section 4.11 h F 1a·h.4
hence t ~ ~-
Y > 48 ~ 0 . 58 em .
Redesign the connection given in Ex. 4.9 using a triangular
stiffened seat bracket.
(b) Yielding Condition:

Solution
15.0
t ~
0.583 X 2.4 X m X 6.2

m = 1.39 - 2.2 (~S )

2
+ 1.27 <ia2 >2 - 0.25
2
(~8 ) 3
1.·2cm
Alt. <i) . Alt.(!) m = 0.763

r
hence t ~ 2.26 ems. Take t = 23 mms.
s

(2) Velds Attaching the Triangular Stiffener to the Column

1B.Ocms Flange:

L If alternative (1} is utilized hence refer to Example 4.9

. the reqilired size of welds is 20 mms.

o Referring to the results previously computed in Ex. 4.9. If alternative (2} is chosen. consider only that the two
N = 5.0 ems. Y = a = 1.2 + 5.0 = 6.2 ems. vertical lines of welds are transmitting the beam reaction to
the column flange; thus:
o The height "h" = 18.0 ems.
o The width of the top plate = 30 ems. (flange beam width}
q
15
= 2 x 1.0 x 18 = 0.416 t/cm •
2
"'//
(1} Triangular Stiffener Thickness:
,(D
I
Plane 1-1: I

(a) Buckling Condition: 2

0.416 t/em .

15 X 3.7 X 6 . 2.
= = 0.51 t/cm .
2
2 X 1 X (18}
 361 362 CHAPTER4
~xample (4.12): Flexible Beam-to-Beam Connection:
re· = ~j (0.51) 2 + 3 X (0.416) 2 = 0.88 t/cm 2 > 0:79 t/cm2 Refer to Section 4.3.1.1
It is required to design the web framing angles beam-to-beam
Hence s = 1.15 em. Take s = 12 mms.
connection shown by the dotted circle in the Fig. below. Use Non
pretensioned bolts of Grade (4.6) . Top of beams are to be
Plane 2-2:
coplanar.

q =~
0.416
= 0.347 2
t/cm •
Solution
,.,//

qM~t = 1.2
0.51 = 0.425 t/cin2 - - I
- -- I
I
I'-,

1.. I I
I i I
I 4· 0
I
I I

~ ,,_
I I
I
2 2 I ® / ®
;:. = jco.347J + (0.425) = 0.548 vcm2 < 0.72 (o.k) I
I \__l .I I
I
I I
I
I I 4·0
I l I
I I I
I
I
I - - ,I-
I I
I 4·0
I I
.I I
I I I
I
I It-
I
I 1
I I
I 4·0
1
I

,· -- I

- --
I
- -- - J-

c 10·0 ms tl·Oms

. Layout
Applied Loads:
Assume own weight of beam (A) = 100 kg/m' .
Floor (R.C.) slab 12 ems thick= 300 kg/m2

2
Floor covering = 150 kg/m .

2
Superimposed loads = 300 kg/m •
~CHAPTER4 363 364 CHAPTER4L
Assume diameter. of ordinary bolts d 20 mms.
1
RA(D.L) = 0 · x
10
+ (0.3 + 0.15) x 4.0 x ;o 9.5 tons. -2
2
Rsh =2 x 0.25 x 4 x TI : = 6.28ons.
10
RA(L.L) = 0.3 X 4.0 X z- = 6 tons.
: 0.8 X 3.6 X 1~4 X 2 = 8.064 tons. (where edge dist.
10
2 = 2.25d)
MA(D.L+L.L) = [ 0.1 + (0.3 + 0.15 + 0.3) X 4] X :a-
Number of bolts = 9.5 + 6
6.28
= 2.46 take 3 bolts
= 38 . 75 t . m.
Pitch = 12 ems and edge distance 4.5 ems.
zx(required) = 38.75 X 100
= 2767.8 3
ton .
Group of Bolts (2):
38.75 X 100 2
Choose a B.F.I No 40 (f = 3030
= 1.28 t/cm < 1 . 4) Right spari of beam (A) loaded by L.L. in addition to D.L.
o.k
~:L+L.L = 9.5 + 6.0 = 15.5 tons.
-2
-- 2 (9.5 + 6) X 8 + 0.2 X 8 : 63 6 t -2
MB(DL+L.L) 4 8 • .m. 2
Rs~ = 0.25 x 4 x 1.4 xU: = 3.14 tons

Choose a B.F.I. N ~55 (fb = 6360

4530
= 1.4 t/cm
2
< 1.4 (o.k). = 0.8 x 3.6 x 0.9 x 2 = 5.184 tons.
(where framing <s 90 x 90 x 9)
Group of Bolts (1):

15.5
Number of bolts = 3.14 = 4. 93 bolts, take2 columns of
4·45 4·45 3 bolts each.
1111
ft
+ + These bolts will be subjected to a torsional moment
8-F ·I No 40
... ... Mt -- 15.5 x (9 + 0.9) = 38 • 36 t .ems.
2
(see Fig. b)

+ ... 38.36x12
2
= 1.60 tons
1~51 t 1Si5
2 X 12
+ 0~9
No 50 In addition the eccentricity e =9 = 4.45 ems will
( b> induce a bending normal stress (i.e tensile force) on this group
of bolts'due to the live load reaction only <~.L= 6~5 t)
 365 366 CHAPTER4 .....
CHAPTER4
Assume contact between the framing angles and the main beam Framing Angles Thickness:
web. Either compute exactly the position of the N:A. or assume T = 0.266 x 2.355 = 0.626 ton.
its location at h/6 = 33/6 = 5.5 ems from the lower edge of the
M = o.626 x (a; t - K) = 0.626 x 3.15 ~ 2.0 t.cm.
framing angles.

A= 3.14 cm2 •
2.0 X 6
A = 2.45 em .
2 t = J 1.4 X (4.5 + 6)
= 0 .. 903 em.
s

!XX = j1 X 2 X 9 X
-3
5.5 + 2 X 2.45 X
-2-2
(11 + 23 ) Choose 2 < s 90 x 90 x 11.
4
= 2529 cm •
Check of Notch: (Section S-S Fig. a)
ftb = 15.5 x 4.95 x 23 = 0 _69 t/cm2

e = (34- 1.6)- (9 + 1.1) = 11 . 15 ems.

Rt.a = 0.69 x 2.45 = 1.69 tons 2 2

M = 15.5 x 11.15 = 172.825 t.ems.

Rt = 0.33 x 4 x 2.45 = 3.23 tons

R
sh.a.J..

---7
= 15.5 / 6

R(Mt) = 1.60 tons

= 2.583 tons

r
36crns

I
r
1-+--.-
L-- ----33-4 __

Resultant = J (2.853) 2 + (1.6)

2
= 3.038 2
t/cm .
I 1 30Cms .I
I
2
A =.30 x 2.6 + 33.4 x 1.4 = 124~76 em ..
I
Check using the interaction equation: 30 X 2.6 X 1.3 + 33 . 4 X 1 • 4 ~ (2.6 .+ 33 4
2• } .
y = ------~------~1~2~4~.7~6~.--~---------------= 8.0 ems.
3.038 ]2+ [ 1.69 ]2= 1.2 > 1.0 (unsafe)
[ 3.14 3.23
JXX =~ X 1.4[(33.4 + 2.6 - 8)
3 3
+ (8 - 2.6) ] + 30 X 2.6

Use 3 bolts Grade 5.8 will be safe. 2 4

x (8 - 1.3) = 13819 em .
. . CHAPTER4 367
Example (4.13): Flexible
368
Beam-to-Beam
CHAPTER 4
Connection
a.,
172.825 X 28 2 2
. 13819
= 0.35 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm (o.k)
End-Plates. Refer to Section 4.14.2 .
Redesign the connection previously given in Example 4.12
~ = (15.5 X sx) I (13819.1 X 1.4} using end-plates instead of the framing angles.

s
X
= 1.4 x 28 x 14 = 548.8 em •
3
Solution
2 2
q = 0.44 t/cm < 0.84 t/cm (o.k)
1. Bolts the End Plates to the Main Beam Web:

o ~.L+L.L = 15.5 tons. d = 20 mms.

·R
s.s.
= 3.14 tons.

~ = 0.8 x 3.6 x 1.0 x 2- 5.76 tons.

Where the thickness of the end-plate has been chosen 1.0 ems

15.5
Number of ordinary bolts=----= 4.93 bolts
3.14

Take two columns of 3 bolts each.

o 2 (R_ + R_ ) = 15.5 x 2 = 31 tons.

-lJ.L+L.L -lJ.L

Rd .s = 6.28 tons

~ = 0.8 x 3.6 X 1.6 x 2 = 9.216 tons.

31
'Number of bolts= _
6 28
= 4.93 bolts

Hence two columns of 3 bolts each is sufficient.

 CHAPTER4 369
370 CHAPTER4
• fc 4. Notch Stresses: s·ection S-S
r1 ----1 e
I
= (36-1~6 ) - 1.0 = 16.2 ems.
2
i-4 I
I
36cms M = 15.5 X 16.2 251. 1 t. ems.

c:t:====::::::J, J
I
y = 8.0 ems. I
XX
= 13819.1 em4

- 251.1 X (36 - 8) 2 2
fb - 13819.1 = 0.51 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm (o.k)
An
2
~ I
r'
,'
fj) ~ = 0.44 t/cm (o.k) (Refer to Ex. 4.12).
'
<ii ~- ''Q)
\

''(!)

2. Fillet Welds the End-Plate to the

Yeb:
Assume s = 1.0 ems.

Plane (1-1) and (2-2 :

15 5 2 2
q -
~//- 2 X 1.0 X (40 - 4.0 - 3.6)
• = 0.239 t/cm • < 0.72 t/cm •

s = 1. 0 x 0.239
_
0 72
= 0.33 ems.

Hence use the minimum allowed size s =4 mms.

3. End Plate Thickness: ·

Thickness of end plate = 1. 0 ems. shear at bolts
section is:

3 X 15.5 2
q = -;:;;2x2~("4"'0:----47".-:0::------=3-.6-::-----::3:-xZ-.:::--c.2::::.. -) = 0. 435 t /em < 0. 35 Fy
 CHAPTER 5.

RIGID CONNECTIONS

Rigid connections are those transmitting the induced

moments, shearing forces and normal forces from one structural
element to the other. The conventional rigid connections are
the beam-to-column connections either fully field welded or
partially field bolted generally used for multi-storey frames.
Two other rigid common connections are: the corner (eave) and
the apex connections either welded or bolted. On the other
hand i£ for a grid beam system it is required to . achieve the
continuity of the beams, one must proceed using a rigid
connection. Naturally, the design intent is to achieve no
relative rotation of members within the joint.

In the following sections four group welded and ·bolted

beam-to-column connections as outlined below are analyzed:
Group (I) Velded beam - to - column Connections :-
(a) Horizontal stiffener configuration. (Section S .1)

(b) Vertical Tee-stub stiffener configuration. (Section 5.2)

(c) Vertical plate stiffener configuration. (Section 5.3)

(d) Connecting plate configuration. (Section 5. 4)

Group (II) Bolted beam - to - column Connections .

(a) Bolted Tee-stub moment connection. (Section 2.8.2)

(b) ~plted end-plate moment connections ( flushed, extended

and haunched). (Sections 2.8.3.1, 2.8.3.2 and 2.8.3.3)

(c) .Bolted seat angle moment connection. (Example 5.12)

(d) Connecting plate moment connections. (Example 5.13)

, ·., ....
"",__.1
CHAPTER 5 373 374 CHAPTERS . . . .
Group (III) Different types of welded Knee Connections . 5!1.1, Behaviour:
(a) The square corner connection. (Section 5.6.3) The str·aight forward welded rigid beam-to-colUinn ·
(b) The corner knee with bracket. {Section 5.6.4) connection is that shown in Fig. 5. 1. Fully field welds are
needed for flanges. in order to transmit the m0ment from the beam
(c) The haunched tapered knee connection. (Section 5.6.5)
flanges to the column flange either by butt or fillet welds..
· (d) The haunched curved knee connection. (Section 5.6.6) The analysis of this type of welded . connections has been
. .
analyzed in Section 3.9. where three phenomenon are to be
Group (IV) Eave and Apex Connections :-
considered: (a) crippling of the column web opposite to the beam
(a) The direct welded eave connection. (Section 5.6.3.1)
compression flange; (b) the bending of the column flange
(b) The end plate eave connection. (Section 5.7.1.2)
opposite to the beam tension flange; (c) the shear resistance of
(c) The spli<;:e plate eave connection. (Section 5.7.1. 3) the corner column web.

·(d) The direct butt lolelded. apex connection. (Section 5.7.2.1)

. . .
(e) The splice plate apex conned.ion. (Section 5.7.2.3)

(f) The end plate apex connection. (Section 2.8.3.2)

Group (V) Beam- to - Beam rigid Connections :-

Detail -A·
nie continuous beam connections are classified as rigid
· . connections where the angle of. ro.tatioll is to be maintained. The
. following configurations are also analyzed:

(a) The direct butt welded beam-to-beam connection.(Sec. 5.8.1)

(b) The dir:ect fillet welded beam-to-beam connection.(Sec.5.8,1)

(c) The splice plate beam-to-beam connection either

welded or.bolted. (Section 5.8.2)
Detail ~a·
(d) The end plate beam-to-beam connection. (Section 5.8.2)

(e) The spliceend plate connection. (Section 5.8.2)

Gr:oup (l) -Sections 5.1, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4 .and 5.5 (1) Beam flanges butt :welds. (2) Beam web Fillet welds.
5.1, Welded Beam-to-Column Connections: (3) Cope holes . (4) column web stiffeners ..
. Horizontal Stiffener Configuration: Fig. 5.1
 CHAPTERS 375 376 CHAPTERS
In such connections fitted column web stiffeners (shown by I

It is to be obse.rved that a torsional moment (M) will result

Htem "4" in Fig. 5.1) are generally required. Cope holes should
on the fillet weld lines connecting the stiffeners to the column
:be provided to allow access for down. hand welding. Normally a
web. This moment can be computed as follows:
~back up plate is used to ensure a complete-penetration groove
'weld. bb - t we
(c)
4
.5.1.2. The Stiffener Choice Configuration:
As has been outlined in Section 3.9, the horizontal pair where: Fr = the remaining compression for.ce.
,of plate stiffeners (shown by item "4" in Fig. 5.1) at (A) must
,provide the following cross sectional area in order to prevent Fr =' C - t we • ( tfb + 5K). Fcrp. (d)

the crippling of the column web:

The induced torsional shear stresses qMt are to be added to
J.
(a)
the concentric shear stresses (q// = Fr / 4.Lst • s). and hence the
resultant shear stress are to be checked against the allowable
Concerning the stiffener configurations, Fig. 5.2.
values. These additional stresses are to be considered only for
1 illustrates three different possibilities:
short stiffeners.·
(a) If the stiffener is only required to overcome the local
(b) Fig •. 5.2.b, illustrates a long, singly fitted
· over stress close to the compression beam flange, one can
utilize a pair of plate stiffeners fitted and close to the stiffener, where the web column crippling is to be prevented.
The stiffeners are extended .but are not necessarily fitted to
loaded location (see Fig. 5.2.a). Their length (Lst) must be
the other flange. It is generally cheaper to curtail these
-~-.'"ff'icicr.t.•.fcr- filtlet:· weld lines trar.sliiH'ting, the ex~ss o£ load
stiffeners short of the unloaded flange a distance not exceeding
at the compression beam flange i.e:
5 times the web column thickness (5.twe )
C - t we .(tfb + 5K).F crp
(b)
(c) The fully fitted stiffeners shown in Fig. 5.2.c, must
satisfy the relation (a) and in addition the choice of the
where F =the allowable crippling stress= 0.75 F satisfy . the local buckling
crp y dimensions· (bst'tst) must

= the allowable fillet shear stress = requirements:

c =M / ~ ; db = beam height - tfb 25

i.e. < ( = 16.1 St37) (e)

s = size of fillet weld. ..rr-

y
 ·.r· ... ,

. . . CHAPTERS 377 378 CHAPTERS&..

p (b) The other possible configuration is shown in Fig. 5.3.b
where opposite to the compression flanges an inclined stiffener
he
(B) is utilized. This stiffener will be designed on the
remaining of the compression force (F /cos9), where F can be
r r
computed as in Equation (d).

CAl T1 T1

~ -..._{81
'~
H)
l'\
M~
e\ .:::-;;.;
c1 c1

-~.._ '-

ca1 Cbl CCI

Cbl CCI

Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.2
(c) Fig. 5.3.c, illustrates a third configuration where the
.For a.n~rn.Lerlor beam-tG-co;lumn ccnnccticn, if the .beams flange of the beam of the smallest height is forced by an
are of different heights on the opposite flanges of the coluinn, inclination (e) in order to achieve the same height at the
one can choose one of the following configurations: opposite side of the column. This will allow the use o.f one
horizontal stiffener (B). The excessive fabrication cost tends
(a) Fig. 5. 3.a, illustrates the straight forward solution
to reject this configuration, while configuration (a) remains
where a stiffener (A) is utilized to overcome the bending of the
the best one.
column flange on the tension side, .while opposite to the
compression beam ftanges, Refer to Examples 5.1 and 5.2.
t.~o stiffeners (B) and (C) are
provided to respo n d to th e · ·
rema1.n1.ng compression force F
5.1.3. the Use of Diagonal and Inclined Stiffeners:
computed as in equation (d) to prevent the crippling of th:
column web. Traditionally, horizontal fitted stiffeners are provided
on the lines of the compression and/or tension beam flanges (see
Fig. 5.4.a).
 CHAPTERS JtH
382
where:
(i)
= the induced force in the diagonal pair
stiffeners. Where F ·is the allowable compressive stress = 0. 58 F
c y

For the choice of the dimensions bst and tst relation (e) is
to be satisfied in order to prevent the local buckling.

5.1.4. Additional Information Regarding Stiffeners:

(a) Horizontal Compression Stiffener Cancelled:
The lower horizontal stiffener at the compression beam

twc = Web column thickness flange, can be omitted if the diagonal stiffener is designed to
carry the resultant of the forces (C ) and (C ) shown in Fig.
1 3
5.6.a.
d
c = c
h tfc

(b) MORRIS Stiffener:

db = ~ - tfb
Fig. 5.6.b, illustrates a recent stiffening configuration
namely MORRIS stiffener where a diagonal tension stiffener is
FD = Remaining diagonal
utilized. The different components of this type are to be .
Force
designed according to the following:

(i) The horizontal portion (1-2) of the MORRIS stiffener

Fig. 5.5
opposite to the beam tension flange must have a length not less

Replacing (q ) of equation (f) in (g) we get: than 10.0 ems to allow accessibility for welding. The
a
corresponding cross section will carry the remaining beam
tension flange force.

= [ :b
1
·1
- q. h . t
c we ~sa
/co: . (h)
(ii) The diagonaT portion {2;:.3) rnust be designed to resist

the rem,.aining shearing f_orce i f . the co1umn web thickness is not

sufficient. The ind1,1ced diagonal force will follow equation (h)
Hence. the dimensions of the diagonal stiffeners can be
computed: with the only difference that for the MORRIS type the induced
diagonal force is tension.
 ~CHAPTERS 383 384 CHAPTERS
compression beam flange is to be provided in accordance with
de
~
M4
r Equation (a).

, ,
{c) K Stiffener:
A T1 T1 If the column depth is considerably ·less than the beam
depth, one can use two diagonal stiffeners as shown in Fig.
o,
5.6.c. This type is named the K stiffener where the inclination
c! with the vertical lies between 30
0 0
and 60 . The analysis and the
B (1 (1

-r~ design will follow the equilibrium conditions using the computed
13
~~o T3 (3
relations outlined in the previous paragraphs.
(3 ~
{d) Yelding Details;

@~--of Fig· 5·6-a----~® @of Fig· H·b

Diagonal Tension Morris Type· K System

(a:) (b) {c)

Fig. 5.6

. Hence the dimensions bst and tst are computed ffiaking use of
relation (i), Fc is replaced by the allow~ble tensile stress Ft.

(iii) It is to be observed that the MORRIS stiffener is a

continuous stiffener. Hence the. horizontal portion (1~2) is to· ~' - - - - - - - - - - - o f Fig.~S·6·c _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _____,_)
0
be chosen as the diagonal one . {2-3).

Fig. 5.7
{iv) A horizontal sti££ener (3..:.4) opposite to the
~·CHAPTERS 385 386 CHAPTERS

The use of the diagonal stiffeners may lead to

.complications in the welding process. It is recommended to put
:f.irst in position the tension stiffeners and after that the
compression ones. Fig. 5.7, illustrates details of the. common Beam
seam
weld situations. ®--®
Refer to Examples 5.1 and 5.2.

5.2. Vertical Tee Stiffeners Connected Either to Column Veb or Vertical Stiffeners
to Column Flange:
Another configuration of fully welded beam-to-column
connections consists to use either vertical plate stiffeners or
~ertical tee stiffeners as shown in Fig. 5.8.

(a)
Usually the v~rtical stiffeners are chosen as Tee sections.
~igs. 5.8.a, b, illustrate a one way slab where beams (A) in one
lirection only are attached to the connection . Fig. 5.8.c shows
1 two way slab where beams in the two orthogonal directions
Beam (1) Vertical Velds attaching
:A-A) and (B-B) are attached to the connection. However both
®--® stiffener to column flange.
;ituations must consider the following four design aspects:

. (2j Vertical welds attaching

(a) The analysis of welds (1) attaching the stiffener to
stiffener stem to column web .
.he column flange.
Tees
(b) The analysis of welds (2) attaching the stiffener Tee · (3) Horizontal Welds attaching
:tem to the column web. Beam beam flange to column flange.
(c) The analysis of the vertical Tee stiffeners.
(4) Horizontal Welds attaching
(d) The analysis of the weld"lines (3) and (4) attaching s
s .J beam flange to stiffener flange.
he beam flange to the column flange or to the stiffener flange. t..

In the following sections, some assumptions are considered (c)

n order to facilitate the approach.

Fig. 5.8
 CHAI>TERS 387 388 CHAPTERSL
5.2.1. Path Flow of Forces: {1) Velds connecting column
Fig. 5~9, illustrates the path flow of forces from one flanges to Tee flanges.
steel structural element to the other. One can replace the beam (2) Velds connecting Tee
moment by two equal and opposite forces (F =_M/db). Thes~ forces stem to column web.
are transmitted to the butt weld lines connecting the beam (3) Velds attaching beam
flanges to the Tee flange. The Tee stem and the two lines of flange to column flange.
weld (1) will act as supports to the Tee_ flange. Experiments (4) Velds connecting beam
have shown that the force transmitted to the Tee stem is 5/8 F flanges to Tee flange.
;and that resisted by each line of weld (1 ) is 3 / 16 F. (5) Beam Flange.
(6) Tee flange.
The force carried by the weld (1) will b.e transmitted by (7) Tee stem.
direct contact to the column flange. On the other hand the force
resisted by the Tee stem will be transmitted to the column web Flange beam force
M
via weld lines {2) behaving either in bending or in shear F=Ci
b
depending on theface of weld lines under consideration.
Tensile or compressive
5.2.2. Analysis of Veld Lines Connecting the Column Flange to stresses
.I.
the Tee Flange:
A conservative approach assumes, only one thlrd of the Velds (4) connecting beam
·beam moment transmitted to each of the weld lines connecting the flanges to Tee flange
:olumn flange to the Tee flange.
"' 1
Fig. 5.10.a, illustrates the portions of the beam flanges
3/16F to welds 1 co- fs/SF to Tee stem
nnecting Tee flange
I 3/16F to welds 1 co-
necting Tee flange
'leighboring the weld lines transmitting each one third of the to column flange Tensil~~or compr- to column· flange
essive stresses
force F (i.e. 1/3 F = M/(3.db). Two configurations· are possible !
. TensJ.le or
.
or torsJ.onal mom- I
Tensile or
for the choice of the weld lines connecting the Tee flange to compressive ent stresses compressive
~he column flange: either a butt weld OJ," a fillet weld as shown Stresses "' stresses
.j,_
ln Fig. 5.10. b. Velds (2) connecting
column flange Tee stem to column
Concerning the butt weld configuration, the force 1/J F
web
rill induce normal compressive or tensile stresses as well as
Fig. 5.9
CH.<\PTER5 389
shear stress on Section (s-s) as shown in
390 CHAPTER 5
Fig. 5.10.c.
a,.
It has
been tested that a spread along lines ·1:2 1/2 are acceptable as
illustrated by Fig. S.lO.d. Applying these assumptions (see
detail (A} o£ Fig. 5.10), compute the following:
Fll fll •

Butt Weld
tE
Fillet Weld
M.cos
2
45
(a)

(b)

where:.

£w and <lw are the induced normal and shear stresses on

Section (s-s). It is to be observed that the equivalent
stresses are to 'be.computed and checked against the allowable
stresses.

Regarding the fillet weld configuration detail (B) the

q
previous assumptions remain unchanged. Faces (1-1) and (2-2) will
_ r-!-st (C)

a - a • Butt • Fillet be ·subjeGted to concentric shear ~tresses and normal stresses

Weld <tst .ri I Weld ($l

--
F/3
a
_,j
• Fi Het
Weld:::
Face 12 -21
Face!t-1l
., Butt
Weld (tstv'2>
respectively. (Refer to Fig. 5.1Q.e) •.Hence:

(c)

M
(d)
fw(2-2) =

The. stresses o£ Equations (c) and (d) must .not exceed the

fillet permissilUe stresses (i.e. 0.2 Fu>·

Detail ® Detail ®
5.2.3. Analysis o£ Weld Lines Connecting the.Tee Stem to the
' '~2 1e1
Fillet Weld Column Web:
Fig. 5.10
. . . . CHAPTERS 391 392 CHAPTER
Once again some assumptions are necessary in order to get Differentiation is to be made, if· one is calculating the
the design possible,- otherwise a sofisticated analysis is induced stresses on face {1-1) or·on face (2-2). However the
necessary .. These assumptions are:· straining actions . will remain the. same only the stress nature
wi 11 change.
(a) Only three quarters of the beam moment is tdmsmitted
to the Tee stem and then to the column web via the weld lines. Referring to ·Fig. 5.11. b, c, the tensile stresses f
w
induced on face (2~2) Based on a unit length for the weld size S
(b) These weld lines are assumed to be spreaded on lines
will be as follows :-·
inclined 1:2.5.

Making use of these assumptions and referring to Fig. 5.11 3 M

the fillet .weld lines connecting the Tee stem to the web columri
f
w = 4"'2
are subjected to 3/4 M (e)
3 3 h3 3
2 (h - a ) X 2 a
st st
\lhere: z = =
12 X hst 3.h
st

9.M.hst.
w =
i.e. f (f)

Vhile on face {1-1) the transmitted moment (3/4 M) will act

!bl
as a torsional moment inducing shear stresses (~:

9.M.hst
i.e. (g)
4 (h
3
st
-a~

5.2.4. Analysis and Proportioning of the Tee Stiffener:

The Tee stiffener dimensions is governed by two
considerations:
(a) Strength considerations.
(b) 'Practical or geometrical considerations.
(C)
{a} Strength Considerations:
Fig. 5.11 The beam tension flange tends to bend the stiffener Tee
flange following the same behavior·as in Section 3.9 .
._.CHAPTER 5 393 394 CHAPTERS
Equation (3.10} of Section 3.9, can be utilized. This
relation remains unchanged except that the applied tension force"
bst
will be reduced to 3/4 F which means consequently that the area
'I
transmitting the tension force will be reduced alsQ to 3/4

lflV:
I
I--,
bb.tb. Hence the stiffener flange thickness must satisfy: II . 311. F tb
tl
tb +Sk~t ! I1

As an approximate estimate of the Tee stem

(h)

thickness
II
tb+Sk 5l1
II
11
1\I

t!{lt.t
•
!a
I

_..
)M
lt,F tb
]· - ~st
1-L
hst

(t
w.s
t)' distribution lines 1:2.5 will to -spread the force 3/4 F tl ! I

on a length (tb + 5.Kst). The crippling·stress relation can be kst

s- s
used as a guide for the determination of t w.s t:

i.e.

t ?: (i)
w.st

(11) Practical or Geometrical. C~nsiderations: 'see Fig.

Fig. 5.12
5.12)
- The stiffener Tee width bst must be sufficient to _ It will be of good estimate to choose the stem tee
reach the column flanges i.e. thickness ( tw. st) equal to the beam web thickness ( twb l:

(j} (1)
bt?:h-2.t..,
s c t > t
~c w.st - wb

- The stiffener Tee depth (dst) must be sufficient to Refer to Example 5.3.
extend from the column web till the column outer edges:

b :.... t 5.2.5 Additional Observations:

c we (k}
2 First Observation:
It is to be noticed that the relations (a), (b), .• (i) are
. . . CHAPTERS 395 396 CHAPTER 51,.
deduced for a beam flange width (bb) approximately equal to the
Tee flange width {bst}. While i f the beam flange width (bb,!. v v-
tb2 tb,

-,r _c_
is significantly less than the Tee flange width (say, more than f4 FJ
f2 f1

I
4.0 ems), one must assume that the stem portion of. the Tee
s.tiffener will carry the entire mo~nt (Mb) and consequently
d2 Q)E '
M)<D dl d4 d3
relations (f), (g), (h) and (i) w.ilTbeas follows:

f2 F1 F4 h

f
w = (h3
3.M.h
st
<~w·=
3.M.h
st - r--
tfc:

Mt>M2
- a3) (h3 - a3) M3>M4
st · st (m)
®
bb. tb . 1t3.F4
t 2:: 0.4 bb.tb t 2::
st w.st tb+ S.K~t

Second Observation:

If two orthogonal systems of beams are connected to the

column, and if a vertical Tee stiffener 'is attached to . the
column· web as shown in Fig. 5.13, the analysis becomes a
combination of the assumptions previously taken in Section 3.9
:md· t.hos~·nansHlf'!roo in the previous. par<~.graphs. The analvsis of
Equations (p) , (q)
this configuration can be proceeded as follows:
<a> ( c}

(a) Beams (1) and (2) will transmit their corresponding

Fig. 5.13
moments M and M to the column flange by the forces F and
1 2 1
F (F =M /d and F =M /d ). The flanges of the Tee stiffeners Based on these assumptions the following relations are
21 1 1 2 2 2
and the colUmn web will act as supports to the column flange. computed:
.The assumptions of the preceding paragraphs are always valid.
This means that the column web will
while the carry.(3/4) F - Crippling of the column web:
1
flanges of the Tee stiffener will carry Fi/3 as shown in. Fig.
5.13.a.
t ~ (n)
we 4(tbl + S.K)
 398 CHAPTERS
CHAPTERS 397
As has been mentioned before the effective weld length can
- The bending of the column flange:
be assumed equal to {tb3 + S.tst) or (tb4 * S.tst).
(o}

Thus: F 13
2 (p)
-The flange of the Tee stiffener is designed to carry F /3 as fl.= s( tb4 + S.t st l
1
illustr3ted in Fig. 5.13.b.
and- F /3
4 {q}
(b} Beams (3) and (4} will· transmit their corresponding
q
//
= s( tb4 + S.t st

moments exactly as in section 5.1;2. The flange Tee thickness

It is of good practice to choose the size s = tst= tfc
is to be checked against bending. i.e tst = 0.4 J (3/4)b 3 .tb3
Where band tb are the breadth and thickness of beam Using Equations (p) and (q), deduce the equivalent stresses.
3 3
flange (3) respectively.
For butt weld detail (A} deduce the equivalent stresses the
(c) As shown in Fig. 5.13.b the Tee stiffener will be following equations (p) and (q) :
subjected to bending due to 3/4 F . In addition the forces F /3
3 1
and F /3 will induce additional normal stresses. An exact 2
2 1/3 (F2+F4) cos 45
analysis is somewhat complicated, one must use a plate model (, p)
f = )
w tst( tb4 + S.t st
with springs of appropriate rigidities along the vertical groove
weld lines. The Tee flange is considered to be relatively stiff,
·and tfiug ·'for simplicity the additional stresses caused by the_ ?. . -
1/S (1'2+1' 4 1 cos 4!>-
(, q)
forces F /3 and F /3 can be neglected. Their magnitude will be qw = tst( tb4 + s.tst
)
1 2
nill if the column web thickness is sufficient to respond to the
crippling phenomena based on the whole beam cross sectional area Third Observation:
(b .tb } instead of (3/4) b .tb • The effect of the applied shearing force on the behaviour of
1 1 1 1
the different steel elements was neglected.
(d) Regarding the fillet weld lines attaching the Tee flange
to the column flange (Detail (B) of Fig. 5 .13. c) forces F /3 the Refer to Examples 5.4.
1
and F /3 will induce on face 2-2 tensile or compressivestresses
2
·while the forces F /3andF /3will induce shear stresses. The 5.3. Welded Vertical Plate Stiffeners Configurations:
4 3
equivalent stresses are to be computed. Two vertical plate stiffeners configurations are analysed

according to the following:

 . . . CHAPTERS 399 400 CHAPTERS
.5 .. 3 .. 1 Configuration "A'': (b) The beam flange compression force F/3 will be transmitted

Fig. 5.14.a, illustrates the different components. The to the butt weld lines via a length (tb + stfc). thus inducing
applied beam moment (M) is replaced by two equal ·and opposite COIJlpressive and. shear stresses on the welds. (see Fig. 5.14.d}.
forces (F =
M/~). This means that:

Proceeding as in section 5. 2. 4 the following assumptions

can be utilized: f (b)
w

(a) The beam flange compression force {3/4)F is transmitted

to th e column web via th,e column web length (tb + SK) as
(c) The beam flange tension force 3/4 F is transmitted to
illustrated .in Fig. 5 .. 14. b; hence: the column flange trying to pull .it out as shown in Fig. 5.14.c;
hence the column flange thickness can be computed according to
the following relation:
t ~ (a)
we 4(tb + 5K)

,I
(c)
.I
. ttb
F
tb+S he f
(d) The stiffener thickness (tst) can be chosen ·equal to
<
L-f the beam flange thickness (tb). The normal stresses are

rl )M <
db
computed using the following relation:

~·;tk 1. F

A i (d)

(b) Crippling • (c) Bent at Tension.

,•tst · .
The geometrical. considerations previously outlined in
s
·.
t= ~··
·
· .. .
.;_
~c
·
F13
Tensile
Stresses
Section 5.2.4 are always valid ..

Refer to Example 5.5.

(a) Configuration "A". (d) Butt Weld ~

Fig. 5.14 5. 3. 2. Configuration "B".:
Fig. 5.15.a, illustrates the different steel components,
for this configuration. The different aspects regarding the
i... CHAPTER5 401 402 CHAPTERsL
iconnection behaviour are as given below:
acting separat.ely, the results will be conservative and the
following equation can be utilized:
. If an exact solution is required a three dimensional finite
:elements analysis is necessary, while for simplicity the plate
model shown in Fig. 5.1S.b is sufficient. (e)

For design purposes and due to lack of advanced studies,

one can proceed using the following assumptions: (b) The force (F) will be transmitted to the column flanges
via the butt weld lines as shown in Fig. S.lS.d, thus causing
(a) At the vicinity of the beam tension flange Fig. normal and shear stresses.
5.15.c illustrates the expected deformed shape of the stiffener
element. Only the tensile force (F) ..is taken ..into cons~deration.
· • It is to be noticed
In reality the compressive force at the lower flange Qf the beam relatively high. Hence it is not recommended to use the
is applied simultaneously. However if the tension force is taken vertical plate stiffeners configuration, the horizontal
stiffeners arrangements will satisfy the weld stress
requirements.

Refer to Example 5.5.

5.4. Plates Welded to Either the Column or

th'.!' Colum.r1 Peb:
This type of connections consists to use a connecting plate
(b) Plate Mode • · (c) Bent at Tension•.
either fillet or butt welded to the beam flanges. This
connecting plate is then welded to the column in order .to
transmit the beam moment to the column. Regarding the beam
_.,;.._'%! reaction, one of the configurations previously outlined in
Shear + Normal
Stresses Stresses Chapter (4)· can be utilized (framing angles, brackets ... etc).

Iri the following sections the common configurations are

(a) Configuration "B". (d) Butt Weld • analysed. The. transmission of forces from one steel. element to
Fig. 5.15 the other and the dimensioning are simple. To avoid repetition
of the analysis refer to the previous sections.
.CHAPTERS 403 404 CHAPTERS . . .
.. 4.1. Connecting Plates Welded to the Colu.rnn Flange:
Configuration(A):
Fig. 5.16.a, ·illustrates a beam-to-column ~onnection with T
top connecting plate. The transmission of forces and the
esign of the steel elements cari be · proceeded as follows:
(a) The reaction of·the beam (11,) is transmitted via fillet
c
~ld lines (3) to the leg of the framing angle (2). While the
;ther angle leg transmits this reaction to the column flange via
be fillet welds (4.). The design and dimensioning is as
reviously out.l:ined in Section 4.1.1. (1) Beam.

(2) Framing angles.

{bl The beam moment is replaced by two equal and opposite
(3) Fillet weld lines connecting
r:>rces T =-= C = M/db. The tensile fQr.cer {T) will be transmitted !al Configuration
ia ·the fillet weld lines {7)to the upper connecting plate, beam web to framing angle.
(4) Fillet weld lines connect-

il
tlb.jected to ~it.her tension or shear. Hence .

For Fillet welds(7):

...
(a) I E.::::D··
J .
!.Li•P.lWI. Ll
ing column flange
framing angle.
(5) Column.·
to

For Cor.necting plate(6): f = _ .._.- . (b)

t w. tc

::.~~[[:EJJ··j}
(6) Connecting plate.
llere:
w, \: = the width and thickness of the connecting plate· [ (7) Fillet welds connecting
beam ~lar..ge to cormecting
re.spectively .I 1
Lu 4 1.2~! ll plate.
= loaded.length

:
L of the connectingplate. M (8) Groove weld.
1

::~~n [:JJ.j}
(9) Backing bar .
. Fi~. 5.16.. b, shows different ~ontigurati_ons for the choice
(10) Groove weld.
the connecting plate. The breadth ""~
... at. tpe right edge is to
ch()sen less than the beam breadth .(bb) by 3.0 to 5.0 LL2~1·2WI L1 J . (11) Seat angle.
ns, while the left edge breadth ""z 1s t.o be chosen according t~ ! bl Connecting Plat!! Sfulpes (12) Fillet welds.
1e condition b ~. w2 ~ (1 2/3 R ).
1 (13) Fillet welds connecting
Erection seat angle to column flange.
In order to determine the required.- safe .·thickness (t )
c
>ply in Equation (b) using the allowable tensile stresses. The
Fig. 5.16 Configuration (A)
 405 406 CHAPTERS . . .
. . . CHAPTERS
unloaded length L of the connecting plate must be equal at
2
.least to 1.2 times the breadth wl.
(1) Beam.
I t is to be observed that the connecting plate is shop ~ (2) Top plate of bracket.

fillet welded to the beam flange. .l (3)Vertical stiffener of bracket

(4) Fillet welds connecting
The field groove weld (8) will transmit the tensile force·T bracket to column flange.
to the column. A backing bar (9) of 4 mms thick is to be (5) Fillet weld lines connecting
utilized. the top bracket plate to the
vertical·stiffener.
(c) The beam flange compression force is transmitted
directly to the column flange via the groove butt weld (10). (6) Connecting plate.

(d) The reaction being already transmitted. the seat angle

l
M
(7) Fillet welds attaching con-
necting plate to beam flange
(11) will serve as a backing bar to the .groove weld . (10). (8) Groove weld.
Dimensions of the seat angle are to be chosen ·of · minimum size (9) Backing plate.
and are attached to the column flange by the shop fillet weld (10) Groove weld.
(13).

Refer to Example 5.6. · . 5 • 17 . Configuration (B)

F lg.

Configuration (B): For the analysis and t he design of the bracket steel

Fig. 5.17. illustrates a second beam-to-colUmn components refer to Chapter 4.

configuration using connecting plates.
Refer to example 5.7.

The transmission of the beam moment is exactly as

configuration (A). The analysis and design of the connecting Configuration (c):

plate. the corresponding fillet and groove welds remain Fig. 5.18. illustrates configuration (c) ...
unchanged.
. . .

T~e transmission of the vertical beam reaction ~ follows

The reaction ~ will be. transmitted to the column flange
. t' . (B) of Fig 5.17. The tension force T is
via a bracket. This reaction is transmitted by bearing to the conf1gura 10n · .
transmitted to the column flange as in configuration (A) of Flg.
top plate (2) of the bracket and then to the column flange via
the vertical stiffener (3) and the shop fillet weld lines (4). 5.16.
 . . . . CHAPTERS 407 408
5.4.2. Connecting Plates Welded to the Column Veb:
CHAPTER? iL--
Configuration (D): (Fig. 5.19)
(1) Beam. The beam reaction Rb is transmitted by bearing·to the top

l (2) Top plate of bracket. plate of the bracket (2), then to the vertical stiffener (3),
11, (3) Vertical stiffner of bracket then to the shop fillet weld lines (4) and finally to the column
~ l ., y r.c ( 4 i Fillet welds connecting the flange. For the analysis of the bracket refer to Chapter 4.
~!I/ bracket to column flange.
(5) Fillet welds connecting top The tensile force T is transmitted to the upper connecting
plate to vertical stiffener. plate (9) via the field groove weld (7) where a backing bar (8)
·lr ( 6) Column. is added. This tensile force T is then transmitted to the
column flange via·the shop fillet weld lines (10). Referring
( 7) Connecting plate. to Section (b-b) and (d-d) of Fig. 5.19, we notice that the
l ( 8) Fillet welds attaching connec- connecting plate (9) can be welded to the column flange and
M
ting plate to beam flange. column web along the upper and lower faces of welds (10). The
( 9) Groove weld. following weld shear and tensile stresses are induced:
( 10) Backing bar.
( 11) (a)
Fillet welds connecting top
plate of bracket to beam
flange. It is to be ·noticed that if the upper face of welds (10)

is sufficient,. the weld lines on the lower face can be

Fig. 5.18-. Conf'igurat4on.·.,~c) omitted.

.The compression force C is transmitted from the compression

While the force C is transmitted· to the top plate of the
)racket ( 2) by beam flange to the top plate of the bracket (2) via the field weld
means of the field fillet weld lines (11)
lines (6). The following shear stresses ( q// )are induced:
:arrying the following weld shear stresses:
(refer to the Section e-e of Fig. 5.19)

q
//
= ··-=-=c~-
2.L.s (c)
(b)

he bracket top plate is utilized

as a connecting plate.
If the top bracket plate (2) thickness is the same as the
Refer to example 5.8.
beam flange, the induced c~pressive stresses will be
consequently within the allowable limits.
~CHAPTERS 409 410 CHAPTERS . . .
The force C is then transmitted to the shop fillet weld lines
(11). Referring to Section (e-e) of Fig.· 5.19 we notice that the
effective weld lengths (11) are L + 2L (Section e-e). ~ will be
1 2
d transmited by weld lines (4) to the column as shown by section
L
(e-e). Thus the induced shear and tensile stresses in the fillet

'
e
l~~F=====~~( ' e
weld lines (11) will follow:

c c
L J (c)

a - a

Once again if the weld lines {11) of the top plate upper
(1) Beam.
face are not sufficient, we can add two weld lines of length L
Jl (3) Top.plate
(2) of bracket.
Vertical stiffener of bracket
on the lower face of the top plate. If the upper connecting
2

Rb
plate and the bracket top plate thicknesses are chosen equal to
(4) Fillet welds connecting
the beam flange thickness, the induced stresses due to the
bracket to column web.
forces T and C will be consequently within the allowable limits.
(5) Column.
(6) Fillet welds connecting top
Refer to Example 5.9.
plate.of bracket to compress-
ion beam flange.
Configuration (E): (Fig. 5.20)
Tile reaction.~ is transmitted exactly. as Configuration (D)
of Fig. 5.19.
(8) Backing.plate.
(9) Connecting plate.
The compressive force C is also transmitted to the column
c - c (10) .Fillet welds attaching the
as Configuration (D).
connecting · plate to the
l column.
The force T is transmitted from the beam upper flange to the
M (11) Fillet welds attaching top
plate of bracket to the two upper connecting plates (7) ·. induc~ng tensile stresses (ft)
column flange.
T
ft = --;:::---;--
2.w.t
(d)
c
~ig. 5.19. Configuration (D)
. . . CHAPTERS 411 412 CHAPTERSL
where t
c
= the thickness of the upper connecting plates.

'b w = the width of each of the two upper connecting plate;

This tensile force is transmitted to the the plate (7) via

the field fillet weld lines (8) and then to the column.via welds
'
d
1~115=====-4!-c ' d (9). Referring to Section (b-b) of Fig. 5.20, we can compute the
induced shear stresses in fillet welds (8) and (9) as follows:

T T
~ ~(8) = ~(9) = 2L
(e)
3

Refer to Example 5.10.

(1) Beam.·

a (2) Top plate of bracket. Configuration (F) : (Fig. 5.21):

t. j 1),1 (3) Vertical stiffener of bracket The beam reaction ~ is transmitted to the cleat web plate
(4) Fillet welds connecting top (2) via the shop fillet weld lines (3), then to the colwnn web
!..:._! plate to vertical stiffener. via the field fillet weld lines (4). For the analysis refer to
(5) Fillet welds connecting chapter 4.
bracket to colwnn web.
(6) Colwnn. The tension force T will be transmitted to the column in a
similar way as in Configuration (D) of Fig. 5.19.
~.
{7.)· ~ C:~micq!ing -plati::;; . .
On the other hand, the compressive force C will be
(8) Fillet welds attaching con- transmitted to the lower connecting plate (10) via the shop

·~[ necting plate to beam

on flange.
tensi- groove weld (9), then to the column Vi!'l the field fillet weld
lines (11). To be noticed that the backing bars (12) are needed
M (9) Fillet· welds attaching con- for the groove welds (6) and (9).
~ 1 necting plate to colwnn.
(10) Fillet welds connecting top Once again if the thickness of the top and bottom
plate of bracket to beam connecting plates are chosen equal to the beam flange thickness,
flange. hence the induced stresses will be within the allowable limits.

Refer to Example 5.11.

Fig. 5.20. Configuration (E)
 ·-;~
• CHAPTERS 413 . ·._>:.'r .
. :_:;,· 414 CHAPTERS . . .
~: 5.5. Different Comments:
. One can observe that in Section 5. 1. the .distribution -of

'
a compression forces was assumed spreaded on lines sloping 1:2.5.
On the other hand the bending stresses on the column flange was
deduced by assimilating part of it as a plate subjected to line
loads with assumed end conditions.
'
b

While in Sections 5.2 and 5.3 the analysis of the vertical

Tee-stub stiffener was based on some experimental results
concluding that the Tee-stem is carrying 5/8 of the applied beam
flange force F while each of the two edge. tips of the Tee-stub
flange will carry the remaining force 3/16 F.

(1) Beam.
Unfortunately for design considerations doubt concerning
1 (3)(2) Cleat web plate.
Fillet we.lds connecting beam
test results has forced the designers to consider a force equal
1), to 3/4 F carried by the Tee-stub stem and a force F/3 carried by
web to cleat plate.
each edge tip of the Tee-stub flange.
(4) Fillet welds connecting cleat
a - a plate to colunm web.
This means that the steel structural elements are designed to
(5) column.
carry a total force (F = 3/4 F + 2/3xF = 1.4 F) which is greater
than the applied beam force (F = ~ =T = C).
~JV<p
.d
f(6) Groove weld.

~I l1
(7) Top connecting plate,
This situation seems to· be somewhat in contradiction. but the

~~
(8) Fillet welds attach inK top
main reason is the lack of exact analyses which can cover the
connecting plate to column.
M di-fferent configurations previously outlined.
(9) Groove weld.
b- b
(10) Bottom connecting plate. In the Structural Steel Division of the Faculty of
(11) Fillet welds attaching Engineering of Cairo University. a research study (12) has been
bottom connecting plate to conducted in 1991 where part of it has concerned the welded
column. beam-to~column connections. The main objectives were:
(12) Backing bars.
(a) To determine the real behaviour as well as the state of
stresses of the different steel elements comprising the
Fig. 5.21. Corifiguratioh (F)
,...,CHAPTERS 415 416 CHAPTERS . . .
beam-to-column connection (i.e. the beam flanges, the column Fig. 5.22, illustrates the normal stress results at column
flange, the column web and the stiffeners). fillet depth for tension· 'and compresslon beam flarige sides. One
can observe that:
{b) To check the existing available design equat~ons for
the web column crippling, the tensile bending stresses of the (a) The stress distribution in both tension and compression
column flange and the stiffener cross section. zones is not uniform, the shape is more or less triangular
rather than rectangular.
For the analysis, the finite element approach has been
utilized where a plate bending element was chosen to represent {b) The peak stress value for the majority· of the cases
the flanges and the web. While for the representation of welds, exceeds the allowable stress limit, but is always less than the
linkage elements of the spring type were utilized. yield stress.

The stiffness values of the butt weld in the different

directions were chosen such that the relative displacement between
the two connected nodes is· nearly zero where the strength of a
butt weld is considered as the parent material. Fillet welds
Column Cross Sechon'
being weaker than butt welds, the relative displacement between
Tension Side
nodes joined by fillet welds will be larger. The determination of 0·8
the fillet weld stiffness was based on experimental test results 6H·30
conducted in 1983 in theStructural Steel Division of Cairo 0·6
University (13) where a correlation was· made between
load-deflection curves for different fillet weld sizes
0·4

Three beam-to-column connections have been analyzed. The

beam cross section was maintained constant (i.e. B. F. I. 30). 0·2

while the column cross section was varying { L e. B. F. I. 30, 42 1/2

and SO). Horizontal stiffeners at· beam· compression and tension
-.2·5 -2·0. -1-0 -0·5 0·0 0·5 1·0 1·5 2·0 2·5
flanges were added, their cross sections corresponded to the
allowable normal stresses as specified by the E.C.P. of steel
Normal Stress (t/sq.cm)
structures. A fourth beam-to-column connection was chosen
according to the actual ·design rules concerning the stiffeners. Fig. 5.22.a Horizontal Normal· Stresses At Column Fillet Depth
This fourth configuration was necessary for comparison.
;~CHAPTERS 417 418 CHAPTERS&r

0·8
Compression Side

0·6

0·4

0·2

-2·5 -2·0 -1·5 -1-0 -0·5 0·0 0·5 1·5 2·0 2·5 Column B·f·l 42-5

Normal Stress (t/sq.cm)

Fig. 5.22. Horizontal Normal Stresses At Column Fillet Depth

Fig. 5.23. Principal Normal Stress in Column

N.B. Regarding the results deduced and illustrated in figures 5.22
Web with Stiffeners .
and 5. 23 the thickness of the stiffeners at neighbouring of the
'~"·---·'- ...
tension and compression beam flanges was 1.4 ems respectively
(d) The length along which stresses are spreaded was greater
compared to that calculated using the conventional inclination 1:2.5.
* Tension stiffener thickness = 1.4 ems
• Compression stiffener thickness = 1.6 ems
Fig. 5.23 shows the distribution of normal principal
(c) The stress dispersion in the column web is different : < stresses in the column web. A stress concentration at the
from the proposed value. The inclination was varying from 1:2.13
~eighborhood of the beam flanges can be observed. This
to 1:2.83.
concentration is more pronounced at tension than at compression
region.
. . . CHAPTERS 419
420 CHAPTERS&..
This can be attributed to the fact that the tension is
Concerning the stiffeners, the study has shown that the
applied via the fillet welds while the compression is assumed to
resulting stresses, for all the configUrations, were exceeding
be transmitted by direct contact via the compression beam
the allowable limits by about 30X which means that the stiffener
flange.
cross section must be increased.

The aim of the above discussion was to notify the reader

Column Flange that we may use a similar mathematical model for the welded
Tee-stub vertical stiffener configuration in order to obtain
more representative design rules.

Group (II) Bolted beam - to - column Connections :-

This group of connections have been analy~ed in Chapter 2 .
The corresponding sections as well as the example are as mentioned
in the following paragraphs :-
(a) Bolted Tee-Stub moment Connections •
Refer to Section 2.8.2.
Refer to Example 2.6.
(b) Bolted End-Plate moment Connections (flushed, extended and
haunched :-
The Flushed End Plate
Refer to Section 2.8.3.1.
Refer to Example 2.7.
The Extended End Plate
Refer to Section 2.8.3.2
Refer to Examples 2.8 and 2.9.
Fig. 5.24. Principal Normal Stresses The Haunched End Plate
in Column Flange Refer. to Section 2.8.3.3
Fig. 5.24 illustrates the contour lines of the principal Refer to Examples 2.10, 2. 11 and 5.14.
stresses in the column flange. Stress concentrations are (c) Bolted Seat- Angle moment Connections .
observed around the beam flanges, being higher at the vicinity Refer to Example 5.12.
of the beam tension flange. The obtained stresses have prooved
(d) Connecting plate moment Connections .
to be within the allowable stress limit.
Refer to Example 5.13.
~CHAPTERS 421 422
haunch connection
CHAPTERS
illustrated in Fig.
(c)
Group {III) Welded knee connections .
5.25.c is composed of a haunched built up section which allows
5.6. Welded Knee Connections:
to overcome the critical eave moment. Beams and columns may be
The corner beam-to-column connection is frequently named a
designed either rolled for COIJllllOn spans or built up for large
knee connection. These connections are either field welded or
spans. This type of connections will decrease the structural
bolted. In the following sections the analysis of the different
steel weight while the fabrication cost is somewhat elevated.
types of welded knee connections as well as their behaviour is
presented.
Rolled

The following sections represent a great importance for

the designers. The discussed knee connections (either bolted or
welded) are utilized in a largest scale and represent more than
50 percent of structural steel c~nnections.

5.6.1. Different Configurations:

Fig. 5. 25 illustrates the main types of connections
which can be classified as follows:

(a) The square corner connection. mainly used for beam and
column weld sections. As the critical moment for a gable frame
occurs generally at the eaves. one can conclude that the rafters
(be~) will not be efficient. the steel atthevicinity of the apex
is always subjected to low stresses. For this type of connections
the fabrication cost is minillllllll while the . weight of steel.· is
excessive. (see Fig. 5.25.a) !bl ICl ldl

Fig. 5.25
.improvement of the square type where a bracket (haunch) is added
(d) The curved haunch connection shown in Fig. 5. 25.d is
to the corner in order to withstand the critical moment at the
mainly 'utilized for large spans where the. beam and the column
eave. This haunch may be cut from the beam rolled section.
sections are chosen built up. The fabrication cost is elevated.
Inclination of the haunch flange goes from 1:2 till 1:5
This type can resist higher moments if compared to the previous
depending on the geometrical dimensions and the ben~ing moment
distribution. types.
• CHAPTERS· 423 424 CHAPTERS . . .
•~.6.2. The Moment-Rotation Diagram: Test results of Fig. 5.26 can answer to this question where
the moment-rotation curves of different knee connections are
As our concern is· to design a rigid connection, one can
illustrated.
isk: Yhat is the type of connections presented in Fig. S.25 that
till respond close to an ideal rigid connection?.
The square corner connection shows to be the most flexible
one. It possesses the greatest rotation capacity but on the
other hand its strength is somewhat close to the beam
Applied resistance. The slope of the straight portion of the curve
Moment
represents the stiffness of the connection, thus we can conclude
that the square corner type induces the smallest stiffness.
This can be attributed to the fact that a square corner
connection is a continuation of the beam section, thus behaving
as rigid as the connected members.

The square corner with bracket (which is similar to the

tapered haunch) shows to be more rigid. The stiffeness and the
strength of this type are increased due to the bracket (or the
haunch) added to the square corner type. The rotation capacity,
however is smaller compared to the square corner connection.

The curved haunch connection is the most rigid one which

possesses the highest strength, while the rotational capacity is
relatively small compared to the square corner type.

It is to be noticed that for an elastic analysis, the

rotation capacity is not of great importance. OUr main objective
for such an analysis is the initial stiffness and the strength
of the connection. Hence we can conclude that all types of Fig.
5.25 are. .suitable for an elastic design. Ho.wever the curved and

Unit angular rotation tapered haunch connections have the advantage of moving the beam
section·into a region of lower moment. Hence beam cross section

Fig. 5.26 will be fully utilized in positive as well as in negative

bending regions.
 CHAPTERS 425 426 CHAPTERS 1,.
Connection:
Analysis and Design:
The analysis and the design considerations have
been outlined in Sections 3.9 and 5.1. In order to avoid
repetition, only the missing features in the previous sections
are discussed in order to have a clear understanding of the
behavior. The corner connections can be classified as follows:

(a) Configuration (A):

I
Fig. 5.27.a illustrates a field welded corner connection
(a) Configuration (A). . (c) Configuration (B).
where the column is extended. The beam will "be either butt or
fillet welded to the column flange. If stiffeners. are reqUired
to overcome the crippling of the column web, the bending of the ®
.column flange, and the shear of the corner web one can add them
as sho.wn by tpe dotted lines of Fig. 5.27.a. From eqUilibrium
the induced force (FD) of the diagonal stiffener can be computed t
as follows:.

( Neglect effect of inclination of roof ,.a.

Flange
··:.,,
h .t
;:; we
.q l / cos e ...·(.a) (

(d)
Hence:

FD
= -F--
(b)

.
M
(b) lc
we
e

.
Yhere:
q the allowable shear stress = 0.35 F
y

F
c
= the allowable compressive stress = 0.58 F
y (e) Configuration (C).

< 25 I 4Fy (Local buckling condition) Fig~ 5.27

. . . CHAPTERS 427 428 CHAPTERS . . .

Fig. 5.27.b illustrates the details of welds required to Hence the size of the fillet weld \s) required to attach the
connect the different structural steel components. diagonal stiffener to the corner web is:

The size of the fillet weld (s) attaching the, diagonal

stiffener to the corner web must be sufficient to transmit the (f)
s =
force FD of Equation (b).

Hence:
Fig. 5.27.d, illustrates details of welds for Configuration
FD
s = ~--~--~--~~--~v---
4 [(h -2t )/(cosO)].a
(c) (B).
c we "W

Yhere (c) Configuration (C):

<lw = the allowable shear stress of fillet welds = 0.2 FU However, if the analysis of the corner web shows that the
thickness is insufficient, the other alternative i1,1stead of
t = the column web thickness~
we using a diAgonal stiffener is to provide the corner with a cover
.N.B. The inclination of the roof (a) is neglected. plate fillet welded to the web as show(') in. F.ig. S.27.e. The
. '

thickness o!" the cover plate t can be c.:Jmputedas follows:

. ' c
(b) Configuration(B):
Fig. 5. 27. c shows an alternative configuration where the
M .t + (h 4tf"c ).t c ].q (g)
column and beam sections are cut diagonally meeting together -d.= [h
c we c
-

with a diagonal stiffener. .t.

From equilibrium, the induced force FD in the diagonal Yhere:

stiffener is: t .. thickness of the web of t.he corner.

o.rc
M . M )
FD-
- ( + d . cos e (d)
t. - thickness of the additional cover plate.
b c c

N.B. The inclination of the roof (a) is neglected , e = 45° .. i:he allowable shear st_ress. (q = o.35 FY)

If the beam and the column are of the same height equation '<

(~.) Other Configurations:

(e) becomes:
Two ot.het• alternatives for the corner type are illustrated
(e) in Fig. 5. 28.
,-. . . CHAPTERS 429 430 CHAPTERsL
.
Configuration (E):
Configuration (D):
If the flanges of one of the rolled sections is.extended on Fig. 5~ 28. c, illustrates a typical connection atta<;hing

through the connection, they can act as stiffeners. members whose flanges are thick. Thus it is essential to
This
extension may be done either by extending the beam t;.ension transmit the corresponding straining actions by butt welds.

flange (Fig. 5.28.a) or by inserting a plate (A} fillet welded

to both the column tension flange, the beam compression flange Refer to Example 5.28.

and the beam tension flange (Section 1-1). Only a shaped

5.6.4. Corner Connection with Bracket: (Refer to Fig. 5.29.a)
stiffener (B) will be required as shown by (Section 2-2} of Fig.
As has been outlined in Section 5.8.3 a bracket (haunch)
5.28.b.
can be provided to the common corner connection to resist the
critical eave moment. It was foimd that the optimum

,..., configuration, in order to ensure a minimum weight of steel, can

lt.
2...,
be achieved using a haunch length of approximately one-tenth of

~
A 8
:! 1 the span. The practical situation consists to use a haunch cut
from the same section as the beam.(rafter).

[ ~
2... 1
L:.J. In order to avoid repetition, we must notice that the
main features of the analysis are exactly the same as Section
(a)
I..., I. de
{b)
{c) 5.6.3.
Configuration (D) Configuration (E)
However, the following aspects are to be considered:

Fig. 5.28 (a) Path of Forces:

Fig. 5.29.b, illustrates the di~ram of the path of forces.
The moments are replaced ·for simplicity by two equal and
The length of pl~te (A) is such that the fillet weld lines
opposite forces.
are capable- to transmit the corresponding strength.

M
L = -:::--.---'---
2 d .s.a
(h)
T
c
. c "W

This configuration is recommended for light sections where Hence, one can conclude the following:

the thickness of the steel plates allow~ to develop the strength -Just to the right_of joint (f) at the abrupt change of the

by fillet welds. cross section, the beam compression flange is subjected to the
·force cb.
.CHAPTERS 431 432 CHAPTER5L
- The haunch flange at joint (e) is subjected to the force
I. (Ch / costl).

r~o
- From equilibrium of forces at joint (f), the extension of
.! ~
- the beam flange just to the left of the joint (f) will be
·l subjected to the force ( cb - ch • cos 'ir ) •
cos ll .
..•.
., tl
-
fb II
.,lt
It (b) Stiffeners:
I Different stiffeners are to be utilized. Their location is
{4) Configuration s -s as follows:
(i) A Stiffener (A) is to be provided opposite to the
haunch flange (i.e. at joint ''e"). This stiffener will prevent

the crippling of the column web (see Fig. 5.41.b and c).

The cross section· of stiffener (A) is:

retL. de fcc
<b) Path of Forces (cl Crippling Asl(A) = [ "J...... cosfl - 'we[::,.. + SKJ l (a)
·'
Hence. the size of the fillet welds attaching the stiffener
~
1 to the column web is:
U tw.: IU
-IJ4-

(b)
s = ~-----------------------------------

s = the fillet weld size.

~ = the allowable shear stress of the fillet weld = 0.2 F0

F
crp
= the allowable crippling stress = 0.75 F .
Y
Fig. 5.29
. . . CHAPTERS 433 434 CHAPTERS . . .

(ii) A Stiffener (B) is to be provided opposite to the beam

tension flange if the column flange thickness is not capable to Th (e)
side b-e = cose
prevent the bending. The location of sti.ffener (B) is at joint
(c) and is to be utilized if the following condition. is not 'While the shear res~s
· t ance of th e column web at this
,satisfied: d
c (f)
outer side b-e = ( _c_o_se-,-- ) x twc x q
(c)

'Where q = the allowable shear stress. (q = 0.35 Fy ) •

It must be noticed that it is preferable to extend the beam
tension flange. The extended flange length will be fillet :force Of equatio. n (e) exceeds the shear
· I f the applle d
welded to the nearert column flange and to the column web. resistance (Eq. (f)) a diagonal .stiffener (D) is to be provided.
While the farther weld detail can be chosen as previously shown
in Fig. 5.27. Applying the equilibrium of horizontal forces at joint (b),
the following relation can be computed:
(iii) Stiffener (C) must be added at joint (f) to overcome
the abrupt change of the compressive forces. This stiffener is Th ( de ). t . q • cose + FD • cc)sa.
~ x cose = cose · we
~referably chosen normal to the beam flange and is subjected to
~ force (F ) which can be computed from the equilibrium of
c Hence: T - d . t . q
forces at joint (f) in a direction normal to the beam flange. h c . we (g)
FD = cosa:
sin;r
F
c = Ch cos{3
(d) It is to be noted that the. use ·of. (de) in Equs. (f) and (g)

is conservative.
Accordingly, the fillet weld length required to attach this
;tiffener to the beam web can be computed if the size of the The MORRIS Tension stiffener (Fig. 5.41.d, e):
reld is conveniently assumed. Once again, the MORRIS . tens. ion sti£fener is a continuous
stiffener combining of the horizontal column
t he func ti on
(iv) The Diagonal Stiffener (D) is subjected to a compression diagonal stiffe~er(D).
tension stiffener (B) and the
:ompression force FD as shown in Fig. 5. 27. b. In order to
.,etermine the force FD' let us proceed as follows: The design of the different steel components comprising
.this MORRIS stiffener has· been previously. outlined in Section
The applied force on the column web at the outer 5 .1. 4 ~ · The analysis can be proceeded as follows:
 ~CHAPTERS 435
436 CHAPTERS . . .
- The upper Horizontal Portion Of The Stiffener asMORRIS
shown in Fig. 5. 41. d will be subjected to the remaining tension provided opposite to the haunch compression flange following
force ( Tu - Pu) where: Equation (a).

Refer to Examples 5.10 and 5.14.

Tu is the maximum tension capacity of the beam tension
flange.
5.6.5. Tapered Haunch Connection:

Pu is the maximum capacity of the column flange. Their The tapered and curved haunch connections of Figs.
values · can be compu t e d f rom th e yield-line theory 5.25.c,d may extend over one tenth of the span. These types
as previously
outlined in Section 3.9. are not really connections in the proper sence of the term. The
Hence: actual design for most of the specifications is based on the
elastic behavior which was extensiv~ly studied. In addition
(h)
recent developments of the behavior in the inelastic range are
utilized for plastic analysis.
Pu = o. a (7 FY t 2fc + o.15 bb • tb . F y· cosa) {i)

However, in the E.C.P. of steel structures (2001), these

If Tu exceeds Pu the upper portion of types of connections are left to the judgement of the designers.
the MORRIS
stiffener will be subjected to the remaining tension force T , One Can make use of the design rules available in the
r literature.

-In the following paragraphs as .. well as in Section

5.6.6, elastic analysis is conducted and the corresponding
- ·The Diagonal Portion of the MORRIS Stiffener will be restrictions are deduced.
subjected
.. .. to. the force FD
As has been stated in Section 5.6.1, the tapered haunch
··Th-d .t
· c we .q connections are utilized to improve the esthetic appearance of
FD = ------c~o-s-a------~ (k) the structure. These connections placed al the maximum eaves
moments, the size of the rolled shapes required for the rafters
The MORRIS stiffener being a continuous stiffener, we
is reduced. Thus a considerable saving of steel is obtained.
conclude that the governing stiffener force will be the greater
For the analysis and the design, the following aspects are to be
of Equation_{j) and Equation (k).
considered:

It is to be noticed that in addition to the_ horizontal

(a) The strength of the steel elements comprising the
and diagonal portions, a hor1zon
· t a 1 stiffener (A) is to be
connection must be such that they can withstand the induced
.CHAPTERS 437 438 CHAPTER 5 a.,.
be stresses by (f/cos~ ).
straining actions due to the applied loads. 1 (iii) Hence the compressive haunch
flange thickness is to be increased by the same ratio· (i.e.
1/co~
(b) The location of the neutral axis for the tapered
1 }.
portion is to be determined in a safe manner. This will allow
the calculation of each section's modulus and hence the This means that:
corresponding stresses.
(a}

(c) The haunch is to be proportioned in a manner that will

(b) The straining actions are to be computed using a
provide resistance against the lateral buckling. At each joint
theorem of structural analysis. The ratio of column to girder
of abrupt change bracing are to be provided.
inertia is to be conveniently assumed, while for the haunch an
increased inertia is to be selected along its length.
(d) Stiffeners are to be util~zed at each joiJ1t of' abrupt
change to overcome the concentratioJ;I of; _compressive _forces.
The bending moment diagram is to be drawn perpendicular to
the girder axis as_ shown in Fig. 5.30.a .
.5.6.5.1. Strength and Location of the Neutral Axis:
(a) As a f'irst s.tep :we m,ust select the general proportions
If the points of inflection are known, one can compute the
of the haunch . . Its length along the girder (beam or rafter) can
bending moment at the different required sections as shown in
be chosen one-tenth of the span and the angle (~) between the
Fig. 5.42.b.
flanges not less than 12 degrees (see Fig.S.42.a). This
limitations of' inclination· will probably provide safe bending
i.e.
stresses regarding Section (2-2).

The ~readth and thickness of the tension haunch flange as (b)

well as the haunch web thickness may 'be chosen as ·the girder
(rafter) dimensions.

The compression lower haun~h flange thickness may be

(c) Regarding the location·of the neutral axis ne~essary to
increased by the ratio (1/cos~
1) due to the following reasons: . .
compute .the modulus section at the critical sections,
.
a simple
(i) Secction 1-1 just to the right in the rafter cross but conservative method is to extend the center lines ·of the
section may be stressed to the maximum allowable compressive beam and the column to intersect in the knee at point {0) as
stress (f). (ii) Regarding Section 1-1 just to the left in the shown in Fig. 5.30.a. Perpendicular sections to these center
haunch cross section, the lower compressive haunch f'lang~ will
 CHAPTERS 439 440 CHAPTERsL
lines are used to determine the section modulus with respect to The web is assumed to provide restraint in the direction
the axes lying on the corresponding center iines. This perpendicular to the haunch compression· flange. Hence only the
assumption is conservative and will lead to higher stresses in flange cross section is assumed to withstand the lateral
~he sloping flanges. buckling.

Another method assumes that the neutral axis is located on In order to deduce a safe limiting condition, the buckling
the axis passing through the center of gravity of sections strength of the compression flange acting as a column is given
normal to the axes of the beam and the column. The section by the following:
modulus is then computed with respect to the axis passing along 2
.F = II E
the center of gravity of the corresponding section. c = Fy (a}
(L/i)2

(d) The stresses are to be checked along Sections (1-1), Where F

c = the Euler buckling stress.
(2-2) and (3-3). If these stresses exceed the allowable limits,
it is suggested to increase only the haunch compression flange L = either L
12
or L
23
as shown in Ffg. 5.30.a
thickness while the other haunch dimensions remain unchanged.
The other possibility is to increase the haunch depth and Fy = the yield stress.
recheck the stresses.

5.6.5.2. The Stability Requirements: i = b/G (for a rectangular cross section of

As has been previously mentioned, the tapered haunch can breadth b)
suffer:- ,from instability. Tne haunch compression flange at
.
joints (1), (2) and (3) can buckle laterally. IN order to
Put in Equation (a):IT =3.14, E = 2100 t/cm2 ·F =2.4.t/cm2 ,
overcome this instability phenomenon, let us consider the i = b/~12 and use a factor of safety F.S ~ 3.0. y
following assumptions:
Get:
L
b:s; 100 (b)
(a) Provide bracing at the extremities and at the common
intersection points of the compression flanges. (i.e. at joints
If. Equation (b) is satisfied, and adequate bracing is
(1), (2) and (3)). These bracings ensure that the compression
utilized at joints (1}, (2) and (3) the lateral buckling of the
flange will not buckle late~ally at these joints.
haunch compression flange is prevented.

(b) Then consider the haunch compression flange between the

(c) The other instability phenomenon consists to ensure
bracing points acting as a column simply supported at the ends.
that the local buckling of the compression flange is prevented.
..I cHAPTERS 441 442 CHAPTERS . . .

One can make use of the results for stocky sections where the
following condition is to be satisfied:

c < (c)
tb f fy
5.6.5.3. Stiffeners:
A diagonal stiffener (B) as well as two transversal
stiffeners (A) and (C) are to be provided at the intersection of
the haunch flanges and at the abrupt change of ·cross sections.
The induced forces and the corresponding cross sectional areas
can be computed as follows:

(i} Diagonal Stiffener (B):

Fig. 5.30.c , illustrates the compressive flange forces.

induced in the diagonal stiffener (B):

Taking the equilibrium of forces in the horizontal direction

we can compute F from the following relation:
8

(d)

I I

M2
Vhere: F21 = -d-.1.----Q;,.. (e) Fu
COSpl d 11 cos[3
2 2 2

. .
ICl

The computed force (FB} (Equation . (d)) is the resulting

compressive force. An induced compressive force F
8
can result
··also from the equilibrium of the forces in the outer flanges. 1t
··t~~
:
l lh.COSA2
_.H2
Mt
db
1 tan A2 -
ft.= -!iiZ
11. +··-Q>·····--·Ian
"d2 A2
.
For the computation of this force we can proceed as fol~ows:

- The web of the haunch will resist a shearing force on

.
113
j£ .

tdl
'
~tllli61
'dz.
I

the outer inclined edge of length d2 /tan(; + 8):

Fig. 5.30
 443 444 CHAPTERS
5.6.5.4. Bracing Requirements:
Resistance =[ ",/tan <• +e)) .q .t.. As has been mentioned previously in Section 5.6.5.2
bracings are to be provided at joints (1), (2) and (3) to
prevent the lateral buckling of the haunch compression flange.
where q = allowable shear stress = 0.0 .. 35 F
y

It will be in accordance with the test ·results to take the

twh = thickness of the haunch web.
magnitude of the res~raining force in any restraining structural
element ( bracing element) of the order of 2 percent of the
Taking the equilibrium o:f :forces in the horizontal
flange compressive force. Hence from Fig. 5.31 we can deduce:
direction at the outer corner. the :following relation can be
deduced: 0.02 b. t.Fb
FB rac1ng
. =± .2 COS'!)
(h)
M d'
2 2
7
2
cosq = tan(:r + e) x q. twli"cos:r + F8 .cose (f)
Vhere: b.t = the area of the compression flange of either the
Hence calculate F8 and then chooset:he greater o:f Equations beam or the column :for joints (1) and (3) respectively
(e) and (f} to determine the required cross sectional area Fb = the allowable bending stress = 0.58 Fy.
(2bs t.ts t) with b s t/ts t~ 16.
'I) = the angle .of inclination of the bracing element,
usually taken 45 degrees.
(ii) Transversal Stif:feners:
. At the abrupt change of cross sections i.e. at joints (3) Generally the induced force in . the bracing element is
and (1), Fig. 5.30.d, illustrates, .the. e,qpilibriWD_ ..o:f forces. relatively small. The stiffness iimitation · is at least as
~ence the force in the corresponding sti:f:feners {A) ~~d (c) c~~ important as the strength criterion. Due . to · the lack of
. .
be computed. sufficient information, a limiting slenderness ratio of 100 is
From Fig. 5.30.d one can deduce the following: recommend.ed for diagonal bracing elements i.e:

Hz·
= --,- L/i ~ 100 (i)
FA .tan/31
d2
,, (g) Vhere: L = length o:f the diagonal bracing element.

F
M2
= --,-, .·tan/32
.i = the least radius of gyration.
c
d2
Fig. 5.31, illustrates the details of the two connections
It is to be noticed that sti:f:feners(A) and (C) ·are normal at joints (1) and (3) where the upper purlin was chosen a S.I.B
to the axes o:f·the ra:fter and the column respectively. section while the side purlin was a channel section.
. . . CHAPTERS 445 446 CHAPTERsL
than that of the beam (rafter), the design of the bracing
element will be based on the conditions appropriate to the
restraint column haunch intersection. Hence if one angle cross
section is chosen to respond to the compression force of
Equation (h), ·the leg angle size "a" i$ to be chosen according
to the following:

(j)
20

Yhere: d
c
= the column depth.

Then check the induced stress with respect to the allowable

buckling stress for compression members.

Similarly a bracing member of the same size is to be

provided at joint (2) and attached to either an upper purlin or
a side purlin. ·

5.6.5.5. Velding Details:

In order to avoid repetition. refer to Figs. 5. 7 and 5.27
which shows the details of the different configurations of butt
and fillet weld lines.

It is to be noticed that the transversal stiffeners are to

be fitted with the haunch compression flange, while the fillet
weld lengths are to be calculated according to the appropriate
induced ·compression forces.
Fig. 5.31

Refer to Example 5.15.

It is of common practice to standardize the ·size of the
bracing elements. As the column flange area is gen~rally larger
 447 448 CHAPTERS._.
. . CHAPTERS
5.6.6. The Curved Haunch Connections:
The main aspects of a curved haunch connection are the same
as a tapered one. The curvature will cause additional cross
bending stresses. In the following sections the analysis and
the design considerations are presented:

5.6.6.1. The Strength and the Location of the Neutral Axis:

(a) The design starts with the selection of the
geometrical configuration. For simplicity choose a symmetrical
location of the diagonal stiffener (B) with respect to the
inclined roof and the vertical side ( L e·. ·same-· inclination a }
as shown in Fig. 5.32.a. L~
(b>
(b) The length L may'. be selected one tenth ·o:f the··span,
12
thus the center of the curved lower haunch compression flange
can be determined and consequently·the length L ...
23
Unit
Length
(c) The neutral axis is assUmed to be located·at the center
lines of the rolled shapes o:f the girder and the column as has
been adopted for the tapered haunch.

(d) Apply one of the theorems o:f the theory of structures

to calculate the induced straining actions. The ratio· of the
column inertia to the girder inertia as well as the knee inertia
are to be reasonably assumed.

. <d)'
..,.I
I
The bending moment diagram may be . drawn as I I
,_ __ JJ ___..
shown in Fig. 5.32.a. I£ the points of inflection are
determined and the corresponding applied normal and shearing
tfl1Tf111l
fr
forces are knowq, hence the moments can be computed.
Fig. 5.32
. ._.CHAPTER 5 .449 450 CHAPTERS
compressive flange will induce a radial compressive force Fr in
(e) For the calculation of the critical stresses ~t is to
the web as shown in Fig. 5. 32. c. · The force F r acting radially
be observed that the critical section is unknown as where the
per linear unit length of the web is computed as given below:
~oment increases the modulus· ·section is also increasing. Hence
i t is suggested to compute the section modulus at Sections (1), c (a)
F
r =y
(2) and (3) and those which correspond · to the angles (a:/3),
(2a/3) as shown in Fig. 5. 32. b •.. The axial compressive force being assumed.to be uniformly
distributed across the width (b), hence the radial pressure (fr)
The haunch flange breadth and thickness as well as the
haunch web thickness are chosen.equal.to those corresponding to can be written as follows:

the girder dimensions. C x unit length c (b)

f
r
= Rxb =R:b

If the computed stresses are. within the allowable limits, As shown in Fig. 5.32.d the radial pressure (fr) tend to
the chosen dimensions are sufficient. Otherwise the thickness bend the flange which behaves a s a cantilever beam, since i t ls
of the curved compression flange is to be increased. Generally supported only along its center line by the web. The induced
I

th~ critical section was forind to be along an angle equal t.o 12? bending moment M is:

5.6.6.2. The Cross Bending Effect: [ ~ 12= ...£:.!_

2 8 R
(c)

As has · been mentioned previously if an axial force is

The corresponding critical stress is M / Z , hence:
changing its direction, suitable. steel components are required
to overcome the equilibrium of the components of forces. As an 3 C.b (d)
example, the tapered haunch of Fig. ·5.32.a was demanding three
stiffeners (A), (B) and (C) to. overcome the abrupt change at
joint~ ( 1), (2} and (3).
Vhere: z = 1. t 2 /6

For the curved haunch, the·change in direction of the axial tensile cross bending stress or the tensile.
ft= th e
. force is uniform along the curved edge of the flange. This will transverse stress.
induce radial compressive forces:in the haunch web as showri in
. Fig. 5.32.c. Replace C in Eq • (d) by t. he compressive stress (f) times
the compression fl ange .area of the haunch (bxt) i.e (c f.b.t): =
Replacing the applied moment by two ~qual and opposite 2
. M 3 f.b (e)
forces ( C = T =d), the applied compression force. (C) in the 4 R.t
 452 CHAPTERS
._.CHAPTER 5 451
In order to hold the transverse tensile stress (ft) to a
value not exceeding the flange· axial longitudinal compressive
stress (f) compute 'the following relation:

4 (f)
R. t :S 3

If relation (f) is not satisfied~ stiffeners attaching the

haunch compression flange to the neighbouring web are to be
utilized. For the computation of the forces acting on these
stiffeners, refer to Section 5.6.6.4.
(a) Elevation.

5.6.6.3. Concentration of Stresses:

(a) Concentration of Stresses at the Haunch Web-To-Flange
Attachment: (b) Strains.

In the preceeding Section the axial compressive stress of

the· flange (f) was assumed to be uniform along the flange
breadth (b). But unfortunately this assumption is not a correct
one where the cross bending action will tend to induce higher
stresses at the vicinity of the attachment of the web with the
flange while at the tips of the flange these stresses are
reduced.

In order to clarify what happens, let us consider a portion

of the curved flange (d¢) as illustrated in Fig. 5.32.a. Due to
the cro.ss bending effect of Section 5.6.6.2, the inducedradial
' pressure cr;_l will force the flange to deflect as a cantilever
beam. Because of the cantilever type deflection the axis of the
member longitudinal fibers at points such as (a) will strain (c) Longitudinal Stresses.
less · than. fibers directly below the web such as point . (b).
Fig. 5.33.b, illustrates the corresponding strains A.a and A.b.
Since the strain at (b) is greater than that at (a), the
resulting stress at (b) will be greater than at (a). This will Fig. 5.33
 CHAPTERS 453 454 CHAPTERS
force consequently the longitudinal stress distribution
nonuniform as shown in Fig. 5.33.c.
<D. t ~

.... ....
Bleich (10) has studied this situation and has carried an
0
..... Nl-
0
.tla:

"'"'::> ::>
analysis leading to the following:
~ ~

f
(g)
a:

Where: fMAX = the longitudinal compressive stress in line

with the web.

a: =a factor affected by the value of (b 2/R.t)

0
The maximum transverse tensile bending stress (cross :c.
bending stress) is found using the following relation:
:
~
(h) ..;
dl
u::
Where: ft.MAX = the maximum· transverse bending tensile
stress.
. 2
f3 =a factor which depends on the value (b /R.t)

For the determination of the values of a: and ~ we can refer

to Fig. 5.34 (Bleich -Reference 10).

From Fig. 5.46 we can observe that for values of (b 2/R.t)

less than {4/3) as in Equation (f), the values of a: and ~ are
slightly influenced. The maximum longitudinal compressive stress
.-~------------~~------~~0
as well as the transverse tensile stresses are affected by about 9
~

15 per cent. Neglecting this change has been judged to be

tolerable.
 456 CHAPTERS
. . . .CHAPTER 5 455
tapered and curved hauncQ respectively.
(b) Concentration of Stresses at the Reentrant Compression di~gonal length f or th e
computed using the equation o£ the
Haunch Flange: .Hence the stresses Can be
Due to the variation in cross section within the haunch, beam theory.
the ordinary beam theory relations for the computation_ of
stresses can lead to some error. However the amount of error
depends on the inclination of the haunch. If the haunch is not
too sharp the results _obtained are sufficiently accurate for
design purposes.

In order to clarify the realbehavior, let us refer to

Sections 5.6.5~ 1 and 5.6.6.1 where the neutral axis was
assumed to be located on the center linesofboth the girderand the
cal Location of N.A.
column. In. reality a more accurate method is to use sections
normal to the axis of e-ither the beam or the column as shown in
Fig. 5.35.a. The section modulus is then determined about an axis
Web rNormal flange
through the center of gravity of the section. The resulting
'===""~~=·::s:•=•=-
a::a section cb l Stress Oistrbution
stress in the inner flange is increased by the factor
(1/cos 2~),while the bending stress in the outer flange decreases.
This- behavior is illustrated in Fig •. 5. 35. b. For this section,
l d .J
cc) Effective Section
the neutral axis will be located at about one fifth of the length
of the diagonal from the inside corner for a tapered haunch Fig. 5.35

connection, while for a curved haunch connection (as shown by the

dotted line) the neutral axis is located at one fourth of the 5.6.6.4. The Stiffeners:
diagonal length. The stress. distribution may be considered to . (i) The Diagonal Stiffener:
take the form of a second degree parabola on the tension side and The same procedure, as f or the tapered haunch, will be
· de t erm1.na
. adopted for the · t 1.on
· of the force FB applied on .the
of a triangle on the compression side.
diagonal stiffener.
From this discussion, it can be observed that the
ineffectiveness of the outer flanges may induce high tensile For the computation of . the compressive force F8 as . a
stresses in the web. However this situation can be checked result of the compressive forces in the curved inner flange at
as being a tapered
using the effective cross section shown in Fig. 5.35.-c assuming joint (2), one can treat the curved haunch
the neutral axis to be located at one fifth or one fourth of the one as shown in Fig. 5.36.a.
 CHAPTERS 457
458 CHAPTERS
The force FB is computed by taking the equilibrium of
forces at joint (2) in the horizontal direction. The following
relation can be deduced: {see Fig. S.36.b) (k)

Once the induced force FB is calculated the corresponding

cross sectional area and the required fillet weld length can be
computed.

{ii) The Transverse Stiffeners:

Applying the equilibrium of forces in a direction normal
to the axes of the beam and of the column, we can compute the
induced forces FA and Fe as follows:

M2 .sinf\
= --,-
(a) (b) d .cosJ3
(c) 2 1
(1)
I J J I
Fig. 5.36 M
2 .si~ 2 M2
Fe = I I = --,-1 t~2
d .cosJ3 d2
2 2
,
M2. COS('( + ~1)
= (i) (iii) The Radial Stiffeners:
Radial stiffeners are to be utilized to support the lower
compression flange of the haunch i f the condition of Section
While if one will consider that the diagonal stiffener will 5.6.6.2, (Equation (f)) is not satisfied. This means that the
2
resist the remaining force in shear. the· following can be radial stiffeners. are utilized if (~)exceeds ( 4/3 ).
R.t
computed (see Fig. 5.36.c):
In order to determine the location and the cross section of
. .
d2 these radial stif~eners, we can proceed as follows:
Shear Resistance = Rs =· tan(e + '() .q.twh (j)
(a) Assume to use a radial stiffener at mid-distance
between stiffeners (A) and {B) and another one at mid-distance
Hence taking the equilibrium in the horizontal direction: between stiffeners (B) and (C).
 460 CHAPTERS
. . . CHAPTERS 459
(b) Calculate the bending moments at the location of these
c4
two radial stiffeners say M4 and M5 . Hence calculate the F4 = P4. R . L12
corresponding compression forces, acting normal to the and
curved flange of the haunch (see Fig. 5.37.a): (n)
c5
Fs = P5. R • L23

(c) Refer to the first principles of Section 5.6.6.2 Where:

and use Equation (d) to calculate the transverse bending stress L and L are the arc lengths between 1, 2 and 2, 3
12 23
( f
c. b
3
= _;;_--;;;--
) which will be somewhat greater than the respectively
t 4 R.
allowable bending stress say fall" This step·is to be calculated
twice for both Sections (4-4) and (5-5) (i.e. ft and
4
ftS are to be calculated).

(d) Calculate the percent of increase of these transverse

Web
bending stresses with respect to the allowable one i.e:

ft4 - fall
p4 = F4- Pt.-(,.1..12
fall - R
(mj

fts fall
:::
Ps
fall

(a) (b)
Where : P and P are the percent of stress increase at Sections
4 5
(4-4) and (S-5). Fig. 5.37

(e) Compute the force to be .resiste~ by the radial (f) The corresponding area .of each pair of stiffeners can
stiffeners using equations (a) and (m). Hence the following can be computed using relation (nl in accordance with the allowable
be determined: compressive stress (Fall= 0.58 FY).
. . . . CHAPTERS 461 462 CHAPTERS
appropriates welds to attach together the different steel
P4.C4.L12 .
i.e. components comprising the curved haunch connection.
Ast(4) = R • 0.58F
y
(o) Refer to Example 5.16.

Group (IV) Eave and Apex connections .

5.7. The Portal Frame Connections:
The structural steelwork is most competitive in industrial
It is to be noticed that no need to extend these radial
buildings. Portal frames represent the most widely used form of
stiffeners till the outer flange of the haunch. Their length frames. In addit.ion to the strength and the stability
will correspond to the length required to transmit their forces
requirements the designer ·is obliged to take care about the· cost
by fillet welds to the web of the haunch. The lower edge of
of fabrication and the erection procedure.
these stiffeners must be fitted to the compression flange of the
haunch.
Fig. 5.38, illustrates a typical portal frame where the
field connections are moved to the eaves and apex positions.
5.6.6.5. The stability Requirements:
Due to transportation considerations, field connections are
The curved haunch connection is to be braced laterally at
usually located at positions of high moments. This means that
joints (1), (2) and (3). Hence as for the tapered :haunch
the connections tend to occur at the interface of the column and
relation (b) of Section 5.6.5.2 is to be utilized (i.e. L/b .s
the rafter (eave connections) and also .between the rafter
100 ).
members at the ridge (apex connections).
Where =R (~2 - ~ - a ) =R a (p)

~and a are in·radians.

If the unbraced length L12 or L exceeds this limit, the Extended

23
End- Plate
thickness of the inner, compression flange should be ~ncreased. Eave -Connection
The other alternative would be to increase the inner flange
breadth. In any case, b/t must not exceed 16 in order to
prev~nt the local buckliOg phenomenon.

5.6.6.6. Veld Detailing:

Referring to Fig. 5.7 and 5.27 one can choose the
Fig. 5.38
. . . . CHAPTERS 463
464 CHAPTERS
Generally it is impossible to develop sufficient strength
Configurations (A) and (B) of the flushed and the extended
by means of bolts located within the normal depth of the rafter
section. end plates have been previously analyzed in Sections 5.8:1 and
Hence a ~aunched rafter is usually utilized to
increase the lever arm of the bolt group. 5.8.2 where the plane of connection is vertical. Similar
This wi 11 allow
configurations would result with a horizontal connection by
consequently to use efficiently the rafters.
extending the beam rather than the vertical column. The
vertical plane connection is recommended where this permits
However in the following sections the analyses of the
standardization for single and multi-bays frames.
different eave and apex connections are presented.

5.7.1. ~ve Connections: As has been previously outlined in Section 5. 8.1 the
flushed end plate configuration has the main disadvantage that
Different eave connection configurations are available and
can be classified as follows: the short lever arm of the bolt group will be insufficient to

(a) The welded eave connections. develop the full beam· capacity. While the extended end plate
configuration will accommodate this situation where the
(b) The.bolted end-plate eave connections.
increased lever arm of the bolt group can provide for the common
(c] The splice-plate eave connections. spans the required beam strength. The edge ptirlin (eave purlin)
must be displaced away from the face of the column in order to
5.7.1.1. The Welded Eave Connections: prevent interference with the roof covering material (shown by
The welded eave connections will require field welding the dotted line of Fig. 5. 39. b).
which is rarely utilized in industrial bui"lding constructions.
However~ there exists· different configurations of eave welded Configuration (C) namely the haunched-end-plate eave.
connections as presented in the paragraph below: connection is the most popular one. Fig;· 5.39:c;· illustrates a
typical haunched connection where a short haunch was employed to

As has been previously outlined in Section 5.6 produce an adequate lever arm of the holt group. The haunch
for the
corner connection (nam,ely here eave connection) five different c.onfiguration will consequently reduce the maximum moment in the
rafter and hence its size. The common practice is to make the
configurations were presented. In order to avoid repetition,
one.can refer to Section 5.6.3.1 as well as to example 5. 15 _ haunch at the connection interface approximately twice the depth
of the basic rafter section. For the analysis refer t~ Section

5. 7 · L2. The Bolted End Plate Eave Connections: 5.8.3. where the strength, stability and stiffening requirements
were presented.
The most popul~ eave connection is the bolted end plate
eave connec.tion. F•...g. 5 · 39 s h ows different configurations of
Refer to examples 5.17 and 5.18.
these end-plate eaves connections.
. . . CHAPTERS 465 466 CHAPTERSL
It is to be noticed that due to the greater depth available .
Roof Covering for the haunched end plate type, it is possible to transfer the
---- ---...,.----
~
tension force of the rafter down. The traditional outer row of
. .
. r.-.
---.

bolts can be omitted. Tests have shown that for such a detail
as shown in Fig. 5.39.d, the second row of bolts away from the
. ......., tension flange may approximately reach the same load as the
first row. This usually means that the tension of the rafter
will be spreaded on a greater distance, thus the upper tension
_A
®
lal Flushed End Plate stiffener can be canceled. However small stiffeners (shown
tb1 Extended End Plate
dotted in Fig. 5.39.d) may be necessary to increase the flexural
capacity of the column flanges.

Figs. 5.39.e, f, illustrate a flushed and an extended

end-plate connections having a diagonal plane of con!}ection.
The end plates will act as diagonal stiffeners .. wh.ich seems
apparently to be the most economical configufation. But
unfortunately these types have the main disad~~age· that the
inner corner tend to buckle laterally. Having no upper or side
purlins to attach· the inner corner, we must check this region
(CI Extended Haunched. against the lateral torsional buckling considering the unbraced
End Plate ' · !d~lushed Haunched
·End Plate length equal to twice the distance between this inner corner and
the adjacent upper purlin.

In addition this type of connection is difficult to erect.

Thus it is not recommended to use these two last configurations
due to the and erection difficulties.

Refer to Examples 5.19 and 5.20.

®
1111 Flushed Diagonal
® 5.7.1.3. The Splice Plate Eave Connections:
End Plate. 1fl Extended Diagonal
End Plate Fig. 5.40, illustrates the common eave connection that
makes use of a splice plate. The beam moment is replaced by two
Fig. 5.39
. . . CHAPTER 5 467 468 CHAPTERS
M
opposite· and equal forces ( T = c = db ). Fig. 5.41 shows another configuration of splice plate eave
The beam tension
b connections. The beam tension force is transmitted to the upper
force is transmitted to the upper splice plate "1" via the group splice plate "1" via group of bolts (3) acting in friction.
of H.S.B "3" behaving in fr.iction · Then th 1· s tens·1on'..,.
LOree ·is This tension force is then transmitted to the column section via
transmitted to the column
· section via the ·11et
.r1
~
1·
1nes o~r welds the tension stiffener and the group of H.S.B "3". On the other
"4". r.n.. "1 t
wu1 e he COmpression force "c" W1"11 be t ransmi t ted by hand the beam compression flange will be transmitted to the
bearing to the column web. To prevent the crippling of the lower splice plate "2" via the gr~up of H.S.B "3". The butt weld
column web a s.tiffener opposite to th e b eam compression ·flange attaching the lower splice plate to the column flange will
is to be provided if necessary. transmit the beam compression ·force to the column web. The
cleat web plate "5" will transmit the shearing.force "Q". This
(i) Splice Plate. detail. increases the number plates and of bolts transmiting the
{2) End Plate. moment "M" and hence makes the connection more expensive.
{3) High strength bolts.
(1) Upper splice plate.
(4) Fillet welds connecting
(2) H.S.B transmitting the appli-
the splice plate to the
ed moment"M".
column section.
(3) Welds connecting the splice
{5) High strength bolts
Column
plate to the tension stif-
resisting the shear Q
fen~r.

Fig~ 5.40 (4) Tension stiffener.

(5) Welds connecting the tension
(1)Upper splice plate. stiffener to .the column sec-
{2) Lower splice plate. tion.
(3) H.S.B transmitting the (6) Bracket transmitting the
applied moment "M". shear "Q".
(4) Fillet welds connecting
Fig. 5.42
tension stiffener ·to
column section. Fig. 5.42. illustrates a splice plate configuration where
(5) Cleat plate transmitting the beam tension force is transmitted to the splice plate. "1"
the shear Q. via the group of;.H.S.B"2" acting in friction. Then the tension
; ~~

force is transmitted to the tension stiffener (4) via the fillet

Fig. 5.41
weld lines "3" . The tension stiffener "4" is fillet welded to
 CHAPTERS 469 470 CHAPTERS
the column section by the line o£ welds "5". This
sti££ener can be replaced -by extendin the b .
g eam tens~on ( 1) Splice plate.
Regarding the beam compression force, this configuration (2) H.S.B transmitting the
the transmition by direct contact. 4S.swne~
The lower bracket• .. 6 ., applied moment "M" and
transmit the shearing force "Q" to the column £1 "N" . .
ange.
(3) Fillet welds connecting
The design and ~alysis o£ the c_onnections shown
in FiP,. the splice plate to the
5.40, 5.41 and 5.42 are simple. To avo;d t . .
~ repe itlon refer to: beam section.
Refer to Examples 5.21_and 5.22. (4) Seat angle.

The other alternative is. to extend the be·am. Fig. 5.44

The moment
and shear o£ the column will be transm;tted to
~ the beam via
splice plate "1" and the 5.7.2. The APEX Connections!
. group o£ H.S.B "2" as sown h in
Fig. 5.43'and s.44. The classification o£ tbe apex connections can follow a
Iogic•similar to the'eave connections as given l:lelow:•'
Generally, £or purposes
o£ standardization the designers
prefer to extend . the columns (a) The butt-welded apex· connections.
where £or multi-bay frames the
planes o£ connections will
be v.ertical £or th e · d 1££erent
locations o£ connections. (u) The end-plate apex connections.

(c) The splice-plate apex connections.

{!) Splice plate_
( 2 ) H.S.B . transmitting the 5.7.2.1. The Butt or Fillet Yelded Apex Connections:
applied moment "M". ·As has been mentioned be£ore, the field welding is rarely
(3) Fillet weids connecting utilized. However, i£ this configuration is chosen by the
the splice plat~ to the designer, at tent ion is to be concentrated with regard. to t,he
column section. severe ·situation at· the tension flange weld.
(4) End-plate.
(5) Bolts transmit~ing tQe Fig. 5. 45. a, illustrates the g:i:meral arrangement of a
components o£ "Q" and "N" welded apex connection where a vertical stiffener is provided.
to the beam. This vertical .stiffener is fillet welded at both sides to the
beam webs. The size "s" of this fillet weld must be capable to
Fig. 5.43
transmi.t the induced force "F" :
 471 472 CHAPTERS
. . CHAPTERS

(d)

\lhere: bb = width of the rafter flange.

5~7.2.2. The End-plate Apex ConnectionS:

The performance requirements of the apex connections are
identical to those of the eave connections, that of elastic
strength and stiffening ele~ents. However an additional fact,
Vertical Stiffener
the designer must bear in mind that the deformation occurring
within the apex connection can . produce a magnified downward
deflection relative to the eaves. The control of these· local
deformations are depending on the design details of the
connection in the tension zone.
lbl Fillet ICl Butt
Fig.·.· 5.46.a, ·illustrates· a typical detail of an apex
Fig. 5.45 connection which seems on first appearances to be similar to the
extended end-plate of .Section 5.8.2. However the.similarity of
F = 2 T sino: (a) analysis is true if the ·end plate is thick enough.
where: . Unfortunately. tests. have shown that at ultimate loads, the
Mb resulting bolt load distribution is quite different compared to
T = (b)
~ the elastic analysis previously outlined in Section 5.8.2 in

Hence: which the bolts located beyond the tension flange are
11b coso: sina: . .
constrained frommoving towards the tension flange by the stiff
s = . db (c)
~ • ·<Iw col'!-llliD flange on which the bolts bear while for the
configuration shown in Fig. 5.46.a this movement is not
\lhere: <1w = 0.2 FU = allowable fillet weld stress.
prevented. Initially this type of connections behaves in an
elastic manner producing a similar bolt lo~d distribution to
On the other hand the be~ flanges can be either · fillet
that depicted by the extended end~plate of Section 5.8.2. But
welded to the vertical stiffener as shown in Fig. 5.45. b or butt
welded to it as illustratedln Fig. S.45.c, d .. as the moment increases the more flexible extended portion of
the end'-plate bends are . in double curvature causing a gap to

For the. computation of·. the fillet . weld size "s" of Fig. open up between the end-plates. local to the tension flanges and

5.45.b, we can. apply in the following: hence precautions are to be provided.

~CIIAPTERS 474 CHAPTERS
473
. using . two lower splice
In order to prevent the separation happening between the Fig. 5.47.a shows an apex connection
ten~ion force via a group of ·high
connected end-plates two stiffeners connecting the end plate·s to plates to transfer the
the beam tension flanges can be utilized as shown in Fig. strength bolts (n 1 l where:
5.46.b. By this method part of the tension force in the rafter
(e)
flange is transferred via the stiffening plate to the end-plate
and then to the bolts, hence reducing the flexural action in the
end-plate. Nevertheless, the load still ·has to pass from the
Ybere:
wide tension flange into the thin stiffening plate element and = .the haunch depth ..
then. by double curvature bending of the end-plate into the
bolts. The. weld sizes and thicknei::ls of stiffener are· crucial . res~stance of a H.S.B.
p = the fric t ~on •
s
due:.to extremely large tension forces bei.ng transmitted.

End Plates

(a) End-Plate (b) Yith Stiffener (c) Yith Haunch

Fig. 5.~6. Apex Configurations Yith End Plates a

4...

The best configuration of an apex connection is that shown

in Fig. 5.46.c. The beam tension flange is reinforced by a 1b1 Splice Plate I End -Plates
small haunch usually cut from the . same rolled section as the
The tension force. will pass via the haunch to the
outermost bolts, whose distribution tends: to be elastic as.
previously outlined in Section 5.8.2. a- a
i a1 Tw.o Splice Plates
Refer to Example 5.23, 5.Z4 and 5.25.

Fig. 5.47 . Apex Using S_plic_e Plates

5.7.2.3. The Splice-Plate Apex Connections:
. .• -
These types of connections are rarely utilized, they have b computed using the
The splice plate thickness "t" can e
shown to be less economic than the end-plate configurations . of ·
following relation:
Section 5.7.2.2.
. . . CHAPTERS 475 476 CHAPTERS
Fig. 5.48.a, illustrates a direct butt weld configuration
(f) where the secondary beam tension force is transferred from- the
right secondary beam to the left one via the butt welds. If the
butt weld is of the excellent type along the breadth "b •• of the
Vhere: 1
secondary beam, hence we are sure that the tension f?rce is
Ft = the steel allowable tensile stress.
transmitted. On the other hand the secondary beam compression
force is transferred via the lower butt welds and'the reactions
Regarding the path of the beam compression force "c" the
via the vertical lines of fillet welds"
use of an upper splice plate is not recommended where -the
compressive load can force this splice plate to bend as shown-by
the dotted lines in -Fig._ 5.47.a. The compressive load should Direct fillet weld
preferably be transferred by bearing via two end plates as shown
inFig. 5.47.b.-

Refer to Example 5.26.

Group (V) Beam -to- Beam connections :-

5.8. Continuous_ Grid Beam Connections:
Continuous ~id beam connections will· behave exactly as a • ii .
rigid.beam-to-colunin connection. The connection must be capable 1l
to transmit the reactions of the secondary beams to the main ••
••
-r-,1-
beam and aiso must ensure the development of the moment ==---::..=..-:::-.:J 1-,f
'=¥.=' 1='--------
------
continuity between the two secondary ·beams meeting at the ..l.~L.J
II
connection. ,.•'•'
'
In the following sections a brief presentation of _ the
-common types of connections is provided.
Fig; 5.48. Conti~uity of Beam-To-Beam
by Direct Welding
s. 8.1. Velded Rigid Grid Beam Connections:
Actually it is rare to use field welded coriQections, but if
,Fig. S.48.b shows a direct fillet weld configuration. The
the designer is sure that the -inspection provisions are
sec~ndary beam tension force is transferred to the upper flange
provided, hence 'one of the connections shown in Fig. 5.48 and
of the main beam via three lines of fillet welds (2a +b )
5._49 may be cho~;~en. 1
 CHAPTERS 477 478 CHAPTERS
behaving in concentric shear. The size (s) of ·~hese welds can
T Splice Plate
be chosen equal to the tlange thickness of the $econdary beams.
The reaction are transmitted in a similar way as for the
connection of Fig. S.48.a. It is to be noticed that baqking bars
are provided for the butt welds as shown in Fig. S.48.a and b.
at Angle

Fig. S.49.a shows a common grid connection using an upper

splice plate. Two aspects are to be considered:

(a) The fillet weld lengths connecting the splice plate to

the secondary beam tension flange must be capable' to transfer
the tension force; i.e:
II
I

(a) lbl

(b) The thickness of the splice plate must ensure. the ice Plate
transmition of the tension force:

(b)

~eat Angle
\lhere:
t = the thickness of the splice plate.

ft =the actual steel tensile stress.(< 0.58 F )

. y

One can determine first the required safe thfckness of the

splice plate (t) and then choose (s = t).

A lower seat angle of minimum size ·Can be used as a lcl

backing bar. Fig. 5.49. Continuity of Beam-To-Beam

by Velded Splice Plates
~CHAPTERS 479 480 CHAPTERS
Fig. 5.49. b.
connections using a
illustrates
splice plate.
another configuration of grid
The· tension force of the ,. ~
a
Secondary
Beam.
secondary beam is transmitted to the top plate via a fillet weld
line of length "b " and then to the flange of the main ~eam via

remain unchanged.
1
three fillet weld lines (b + 2a ).
2 2
The princ;iples of design {
b.L.
!'\,{ R,,

Fig. 5.49.c shows a configuration of a splice-plate detail b - b

where the tension force is transmitted via two splice-plates

fillet welded to the corresponding steel . structural elements.
The transmition of forces is indirect for this detail.

Fig. 5.49.d, illustrates a top splice-plate butt welded to

the tension flange of the secondary beam. For butt welds of
excellent type, the tension force is transferred safely from one · la!Oetail.@
Two 'Splice Plates.
side to the other.

5.8~2~: Bolted .:Ri:gid Grid Beam Connections:

Three typical: rigid grid tieam connections ·are illustrated
. in Fig. 5~50: Details (A) and (B) are utilized if coplanar top
flanges are r~quired.

Fig. 5.49.a shows a typical connection where an upper

splice plate is 11sed to transfer the secondary beam tension
force via the group of ordinary bolts "2". Two aspects are to
be analyzed:
tbl Oetai\ ® tel Detail ©. ·
Splice Plate I End -Plate Two. EndPlates
~a) The thickness of the upper splice plate (t) must ensure
the transmition of the tension force using (Ft =0.58 FY) (~) Upper Splice Plate. (2) Group of H.S.B or O.B.
( 3) Framing Angles. (4) Lower Splice Plate.·
(c) (5) End-Plate.
Fig. 5.50. Rigid Grid Beam Connections
 482 .CHAPTERS
. . . CHAPTER 5 481 corresponding·secondary beam dimensions. The transmission of the
Where ft =the actual steel tensile stress.( ~ 0.58 Fy)
·secondary beam vertical reactions are enSured ·by two framing
= the breadth of the splice plate at Section s-s. angles"3" as illustrated in Fig. S.SO.a.
b
s

n = the number of ordinary bolts passing through This. confi~ation is rarely used since the number of bolts
s-s is excessive. In addition the erection and fabrication costs
= 2 bolts as shown in Fig. 5.62.a. are relatively ·high.

lfi = diameter of bolts "d" + 2 nuns. Fig. 5. SO. b, . illu,strates a coplanar top flange connection
where.a·combined splice-plate/end-plate are. used. The required
t = the thickness of the upper spiice plate.
number of hi'gh strength bolts "2" as well as the computation of
(b) the group of bolts (n ordinary bolts) musC transmit the splice-plate thickness will follow eXactly detail (A). Two
1
the tension force: end plates fi,llet welded to ·the secondary beams will ensure the
transfer of the vertical reactions by friction. While the
(d) .secondary beam compression force is transmitted via the end
plates by bearing.

Where: .nl = the total number of ordinary bolts.

I f the secondary beams may be set below ·.the top flange of

R ·.
least
= ·the shear or bearing resistance of one t!Je main beam; the. most economic connection is to utilize
ordinary bolt .or the friction resistance (Ps ). exte1;1ded end plates as shown in Fig. s·.so.c (Detail "C"). The
design Qf the end plates will follow exactly Section 5.8.2.
For ·the transfer of the compression force a lower splice . .
plate is·provided. Opposite to the lower splice plate; the web 5.9. Generai Comm.ents Regarding the Analysis of the Moment End
of the main beam is cut in order ·to permit the extension of. this Plate High-Strength Bolted Connection~:
splice. plate. The lower splice plate · being subjected to a In 1991 two different studies. concerning the flushed and
·compression force, hence the gross area is to be considered. the extended end plate moment connections were conducted in the
This means that if the thickness and the breadth are chosen Steel Division of the Faculty. Of Engineering at Cairo-
equal to the corresponding secondary beam dimensions, no University.· ttu~ first study was . analyzipg .the rigid high
t,.
.t · additional,. cl.ecks are required . strength bolted connections and will be presented in the
folloJi~ parairaphs, While the second .study was a parametric
. Ir:bigh strength. bolts of the friction tyPe are utilized. analysis ;deal.ing with Semi-Rigld connections and will be
the gross area is to be considered for both. the tension and the
p~eserited·J~Chapter 6.
compression zones and hence the breadth "b" and the thickness. . . <<.
In the first research study namely Stress Analysis of
"t" or' .the upper splice plate can be··. chosen. similar to the.
._,,CHAPTERS 483 484 CHAPTERS
Steel . Moment .. Connections > (12) the moment connectionswer~-
(a) The end plate thickness.
~~y2:ed, usi~g ·a ,thr'ee dimensional finite . element approach .. ·.
(b) The location of the sti:ffeners at the compression
Rectangular plate bending elements were utilized having :four
and at the tension beam :flanges.
corners as the primary nodes. Six degrees o:f :f~eedom were
(c) The bolts diameter.
'established at each no<ie, to allow :for space interaction between
(d) The geometrical con:figuration o:f the bolts location .
.:··the· adjacent''elements •. ·' High strength bolts, welds, arid contact
between any two plates were assimilated by linkage elements. The main results o:f this study can be summarized as
These linkage elements w~re joining two nodes by a set o:f linear :follows:
~prings · in the· three space translat•ons.
... and the corresponding
·
Each sti:f:fness spring was deduced for the Prying Force E:ffect:
· :.:;orre~pci·nain.& Iirikage. In :fact a model representing each linkage The prying :forces _were found to genera_te on the vertical

'·element was prop~~~d' in order to estimate a realistic v~lue :for _ side edges of the end plate coinciding with the column :flange.
the siitfness. Hence, these prying :forces are governed by the de:formations o:f
both the column flange and the end plate. Fig. 5.51, illustrates
. eThe·stiff.ness o:f the butt and :fillet welds were computed as a de:formation pattern o:f one o:f the . studied connections where
previously ·outlined in Section 5. 5, while the normal sti:f:fness the lateral deformation o:f the column :flange caused by the bolts
o:( the -~~lt. sh~t (Kx = ~) was computed considering the tension :forces is causing a contact -compressive :i!f~:ne a:t the edge
govef.riing -~ara.Dlete~~: lhe modulus o:f elasticity "E", the total between the column :flange and the end plate (prying edge) and
-~ait· :i~ngih ·i·~:· ::~d''£6~ boli .stress area "~". In order to hence is creating the prying :forces._.
ensur~ 've?. Sitlali'_relat.ive 'displacements betwee.:,. the connected
nodes· iii' ·t:h.;~-~figcil2 M~~-~h.on, Ky. ~ ·and kax namely the shear The prying :force was :found to be unequally distributed over
~H:f:fen7s~!rs ~e.-e,, C:hQsen, very high. the two rows at the neighborhood o:f the beam.tension :flange with
'"'· .........:- .. ,.... ~_ ..
.,,·:; . . / .. .. :... ·:. ~ ;.c~·,;

~h~ greater portion shared by the lower row.

On the other ::::nahd the plate sti:f:fness was computed
cons:id.~'rtirig that'··: <fi~P'irig :forces are induced due_ t:o the The external induced tension :force in these two rows o:f
tlght~nirig; ·'rif'='the, ..b~it~ k~ hence C::ause a. :fit contact between bolts due to an external applied moment can be .estimated as a

~Jcis. Assufulllg th~(the :b.olt head and the nut distribute the ratio of the beam tension flange and the total prying :force. An

~~)'piled f~fce's ·'at ·~ ~~asonable slope to the plates in contact, acceptable share o:f 60 and 40 percent for these two rows can be

th~ sti:ff'n~ss'' bf" fhe plates in contact "K " was easily computed. applied. It was also suggested to calcUlate the prying :force as
Different -b~am.:;t~~coiuuln con~ection/ were analyzed using a percentage of the beam tension force as 20-~d 10 percent :for
the extended'· and · the :flushed . end pl~te con:figurations. The cqnqections prevented or supplied with · stif:feners opposite to
:following parameters were governing the analysis: the beam tension flange respectively.
 CHAPTERS 485
486 CHAPTERS
Plate Thickness:
end plates were categorized to two types according to
·end plate thickness: "thin" and "thick" end plates. The
beam tension force is distributed differently for each category.
In the thin end plate category, the upper two rows of bolts
. adjacent to the beam tension flange share equally the total
flange force. As for the thick end plate connections, the third
row as well as t.h.e two upper rows was sharing the tension fore~:".

End Plate It was fourid that the increase or the end plate thicknP-ss
leads to a corresponding increase in t.he exter·na l tension forces
induced in the outer ·and the third rows while for the inner row
adjacent to the beam tension flange the induced force decreases.
This was attributed to the configuration of the deformed shape
of Fig. 5.51.
· Prying (.dge

Fig. 5.52, illustrates the lnduced principal stresses in an

end plate of Qne of the studied con£igurations. The end plate
thickness was designed using an elastic analysis where the
bending stresses were chosen equal to thP. permissible stress.
Fig. 5.52 showed a concentration of stresses exceeding the
allowable stress at ·the vicinity of the beam tension flange.
Hence, it was suggest.etl for.an approximate analysis to consider
the end plate behaving as a beam simply supported at the outer
two rows.

Ge~me_!.ric;:al CC'nfiguration of Bol~~:

I wtth the
It was suggested to use the maximum number of bolts per row
le~st diameter in order to create a convenient rigidity
at, the bolts location. This will consequently decreasP. the
Fig. 5.51. Deformatio~ Pattern of the End Plate Yith
induced bending str.::sses in the end plate.
the Column Flange (Detail 2)
 487 488 CHAPTERsL..

r l . .
Fillet with web

t;olumn Flange

Beam Location

I
---~-~---
.... I --.,.

. I
O·l~o··z

----$-
Fig. 5.52. Maximum Principal Stresses
. . ;
Fig. 5. 53. Principal Bending Stresses
i1:1 the End Pl;;lte (Detail 1} ·
in Column Flange (Detail 1} ··
 CHAPTERS 489 490 CHAPTERS
Stiffeners Lecation:
E~l3:ll~Ple (5 · 1): .
The study has prooved that . the use of tension Stiffeners
opposite to the beam tension flange reduces ·greatly Design the Welded beam-to-column
. connection· shown in the
Fig. below using butt welds of the excellent type.
force. Hence it was suggested to use these stlffeners ev,en if
the column flange is safe against ·bending. Solution
Fig. 5.53. 'IV - ~ B·f·I-30
Design of Flange 1lelds:
illustrates the contour lines of the principal stresses of the I
Using excellent butt welds
column flange where two stiffeners opposite to the beam flanges
are utilized. the size of welds being equal to
It can be observed that the induced stresses
the flange thickness. thus no
exceed the permissible stress . at the vicinity 'or the beam
compression flange. checks are required.

Design of 1leb 1lelds :

The aim of this discussion is to notif'y that still this
type of connections needs addi tiona! research work. we· possess In order to transmit the shearing force Q = 6.0 tons from

actually in the Steel Division of Calro ·Uriiversity a refined

the web beam to the column flange we can use one of the
•· . following configurations:
mathematical model and a computer program' based on. realistic
steel structural elements' behavior •. 1le do·'believe that the lack
. ; : (l) Framing angles welded to the beam web and bolted to the
of definite d~$J:gn rules can be accoinmodat~<f;~by an ··extensive
column flange.
analysis of a large number of •connections including the
different parameters affecting the behavior~ (ii) Cleat plate bolted to the beam web and.welded to the
column flange.

** ** F()r the design of the different structurrl components.

refer to Chapter 4.

Crippling of the Column Web:

Area of applied force = bb x tb
2
= 30 x 2 = 60 em

Resisting area = twc(tfb + 5k)

2
= 1.2 (2+5x2x2) = 26.4 em

N.B. The notation of the. beam thickness (tfb) is exactely the

same as (tb) ·
 .JI C:HAPTER 5 491
Hence 2 horizontal stiffeners are to be utilized.
492 CHAPTERS

M. 24 X 100.
. Applied shear: ( _ - 85.71 tons;
60- 26.4 ""db 30 21
bst x tst = 2
Resisting force = tfc.d.q. = L2 x 30 x .0.84 = 30.24 tons.
30 - 1.2
::5
2
;:$ 14.4 ems Remaining force= 85.71- 30.24. = .55.47 tons.

Take bst = 14 ems 16.8 1 2

I f diagonal stiffeners are uti~ized:
tst = ~·= . ems

Check of local buckling·bst/tst = 14/1.2 = 11.6 < 25/.r;-

y
55 47
FD -- cos45
· -- 78.45 tons.
Bending of Column Flange: .
To prevent the bending of the column flange ; the column 78.45 . 2
- 28.02 cm .
flange thickness must at least be equal to tbc= 0.4 jbb.tb 2 * 1.4

3. 09 em ( Unsafe )
bst = 14 ems. tst = 2.-0 ·.ems.

Hence use ·2 horizontal stiffeners·· having the same

I£ 2 c()ver plates· of th:l.ckness "t" are utilized:
dimensions as for crippling i.e (bst = 14 ems ; tst = 1.2 em).
55 ..47
t =2 X (30 ~ 4 X 2) X 0.84 = 1.5 ems choose. t = i. 5 ems.
Shear of the Corner Yeb'(Stability):

81-3 t

.[i "
2cms
,. 22cms
1
e . F==--:o.
.,: !
.. I 14cms

! ~
Cover Plates

~ Diagonal Stiffeners

.1,·.•
 CHAPTERS 493 494 CHAPTERS

Example (5.2):
Design the welded connection shown in the figure below
using the following different configurat~ons: Unsafe, hence use 2 horizontal stiffeners whose dimensions
(a) A diagonal stiffener. are those opposite to the comp!'ession beam flange.
(b) A Morris stiffener.
(c) K stiffener. It is to be noticed that the common practice using
Solution stiffeners to prevent the bending of the column flange as those
utilized opposite to the compression flange is an approximate
- Use butt welds of the Q=6·0 t
M=24·0t.m approach.
excellent type to attach the beam
he:
flanges to the column flange.
Fixed
- Use a framing angle config-
Plate
CtJ\umn
uration to transmit the shear Q =
6. 0 t from the beam web to the
column flange. A
.J

- Crippling of column web: Beam

Area transmitting the applied force = 30 x 2 = 60 cm2

Resisting area = 1.5(2+5x2x2.8) = 1.5x30 = 45 em2 .

A-A
Hence use two horizontal stiffeners "B":
The exact analysis must follow the first principles i.e.:
A
st
= 60 - 45 = 7 _5 2
em ;
(B) T
ultimate
= 30 x 2 x 2.4 = 144 tons.

c h oose bst 30 1.5

= --;;;-- :s 14 . 2 5 ems
Resisting forc.e = 0.8 (7 x tf~ x FY + 0.15 bb.tfb.Fy>
Take b st = 14 ems·.
= 0.8 (7 X 2.82 X 2.4 + 0.15 x'3P X 2 X 2.4r
To prevent the local buckling:
, 14 <t. = 122.65 tons.
tst = 16.1 = 0.87 em choo~e tst·= 1.0 em
Remaining force = 144 - 122.65 = 21.35 tons.
Bending of Column Flange:
 CHAl>TERS .495 496 CHAPTERS
38 47 2
21 35
A = • = 13.74 em
st 2 x L4
· : A·st = 2 x · ,_. 4
Hence =.7.62 em ·
2
13.74
= 14 ems ~ = 1.0 em; b /t = 14 < 16
st st O.K •
Choosing bst = 14· ems tst = 1.0 em . will satisfy
exact ultimate analysis. FA = 21.35 tons ·hence FD governs the design.

As portion "A" and 'm" are forming one plate unit, hence
Shear resistance of Corner Web (Stability):
~oose_ for portion "A" the s·ame .dimensionS as "D".
Applied shear = ~ = 24 X 100
= 85.71 tons.
. db (30 - 2) . .
In reality, these values are conservative due to the high
Resisting force = 1.5 x 45 x 0.3!:) x2.4 = 56.7 tons.
value of the remaining tension which was· based· on an ultimate
Remaining force= 85.71 - 56.7 = 29.01 tons.
analysis •.

(a-) Uslng a Compressiv~ Diagonal Stiffener• "D" If allowable stress.values are utilized we get:
. . ::: 21.35 X 1.4 ~ t
29 01 FA . 2.4 12 . 45 ons FD governs the design.
FD = cose
' = 34.82
. . tons. (cose = 0.833)
38.47
= 34.82· = 2 = 13 .. ·74 em2 ..
12.43 cm . 2 X 1.-4
. 2 X 1.4
.
Choose: bst = 14.0
.
ems. .; t st = 13.74
14
= 1 • 0. em .
Take bst = 14 ems ··' t st = 0~ 9 ems.
_bst / t t = 14 / 1 = 14.0 < 16.1 (O.K.)
8
bst / tst - 14/0.9 = 15.55 < 16.1
L· 42·2 ems .i (c) Using a "K" Stiffener ·
(b) Using a tension Diagonal Stiffener
• Based on ultimate stress analysis :-
"MORRIS TYPE" Remaining force to proportion stfffener "A" based on
ultimate stress analysis (opposite to beam tension flange) :-
Use stiffeners "B" as previously
outlined (2 stiffeners 14.0 x 0.9 ems.).
Fst(A) = 21.35 ~cose 2 =_22.47 tons. --~--(a)
Stiffener D is dimensioned · to
resist the remaining shearing force as Remaining Force in Stiffener "B":opposit to beam compression
previously computed. Hence use the flange Bas.ed on Ultimate Approach:
following relation: Remaining compression force = (60 - 45) x 2.4 = 36 tons
4 · ems
,/ '\. '\.
29.01
cose = 38.47 tons. (cose = 0.754) bb.tb twc(tb+~k) f
1 y
1
..I cHAPTERS 497
498 CHAPTER 5 a,.
Example (5.3):
Design the welded beam-to-column connection shown in the
36
FB = cos a = 37.9 tons ------ (b) figure below using a Tee-stub vertical stiffener.
2
Remaining shearing force = 32.53 tons. Solution

F = 29.01 30.52 tons ------ (c)

A cos a
2 lol·2cm

Hence (b) governs the design of stiffeners (A) and (B)

* Based on allowable Stresses:

Remaining shearing force = 29.01 tons.
B-F-1 34
Remaining compression force Md - F .t .(tb+Sk)
b crp we .
s
l..
= 85.71 - 1 .. 8 X 1 .. 5 X (2 + 5 X 2 X 2.8.):::: 4 .. 71 tons.

Remaining Force opposit to beam tension flange = 21.35 X (F IF.)

c y
= 21.35 x (1.4/2.4) = 12.45 tons
Remaining shearing force governs = 29.01 tons (governs the design)
Tee- stub
Stiffi;!Qer
Hence = 30,52 tons.

Hence Ast = 2 30.52

x 1.4 = 10.9 em
2

Choose bst = 14 , tst = 10 · 90 = 0.8 ems.

Sec.s-s
bst / tst = 14/0.8 = 17.5 < 16.1 unsafe ; take tst 0.9 ems

N.B. It is to be noticed that for the ultimate stress

Replace the moment M = 13.5 t.m by two equal and opposite
analysis F was taken equal to F . On the other hand for th~
crp y forces:
computation of the remaining shearing force for both the ultimate 13.5 X 100
F=T=C= (30 - 2)
= 48.2 tons.
and allowable analysis the applied force was equal to (Midb) and
the allowable shear stress was " q = 0. 35 F " . These utilized
y 1. Design of the Tee-Stub ~tiffener: (Refer to Section 5.2.4)
assumptions was due to lack of accurate known behaviour for such
1.1. ·Dimensioning:
type of connections.
bst = 34 - 2 x 2.2 = 29~6 ems.
 ~CHAPTERS 499
500 CHAPTERS
dst = -12 (30 - 1.3) = 14.35 ems.
(48. 2/3). cos45 · · · 2
.h st - 30 + 5 Kst -- 30 + .5 (2 x 2.8) = 58
> ems ft =. <i = .(2.8 x 16)/cos45 = 0 "18· t./cm •

2 2
1.2. Bending Tee-Stub Flange: f . = Jo.18 2 + 3(o.18) .= 0.35 t/cm < 1.1 x 1.4
equl.

:: 0.4 4 0. 7Sx 30 X 2 :: 2.68 ems. Section 2-2:

Choose a Tee-Stub stiffener whose flange is 29.6 X 2.8 and 48.2/3 2 . . 2
q = _ x _ 0.35 t/cm. < 0.84 t/em ·
2 8 16
web 14.3 x 1.5 (use a part of B.LI. No •. = 45)
Fillet Welds
1. 3. Cripp],lng .of Tee-Stub Web:
. 2 2
Area o.f. ?Pplied force= 0.75 x 30 x·2 = 45 em2 . 48.2/3 = 0 456 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm safe
f2-2·= 2.2 x 16 ·
L = 2 + 2 X 2.5 X 2 X 2.8 = 30 ems.
. . 2 ,/ ""'
Resisting area = 1.5 x 30 = 45 em o.k s
max
weld length

2.2. Welds Attaching Tee-Stub Web to Column web·(Sectioh 5.2.3):

M = 0. 75 X 13 .. 5 = 10.125 t.m.
L =tb + 2 x 2.5 k
st
= 30 ems.

Plane 1-1:
I' Beam

. Butt weld Fillet weld

ft =

z
·M
z
2 X~ X 1 · 3
= 12 X (61)/2)
= 1560 cm3
'H)
]()Cmlll====!
·I

2. Design of Welds: (Refer to Section 5.2.2):

= 1012.5 = 0.64 t/em2
Effective length of welds =2 + 5 x 2.8 = 16 ems. ft 1560
. 2
< 0.72 t/cm o.k
2.1. Welds Attaching Tee-Stub Flange to Column Flange:
BUtt Velds «Good Weld» Plane 2-2: twc
2 2 .. ®_
q
2
= 0~64 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm o.k
' - -H<:'--1-.....t
Section 1-1:
(if~
Size of weld = flange thickness = 2.8 ems.
 CHAPTERS 501 502 CHAPTERS

Example 5.4: Section 1-1:

Design the :welde4 beam-to-column connection shown in the (57.7/3) cos45 = 0 _37 t/cm2
ft = q = (2 x 13)/cos45
figure below. Use a vertical Tee-stub stiffener.

Solution
2
fequi = Jo.37 + 3 x (0.37)
2
= 0.546 2
t/cm < 1.4 x 1~1
Fillet tlelds
(i) fJ)

88-"'
2
\ = . :._(5;:,...:7_._7/:-;:3,..::-) = 0.74
r
<1}-, t/cm > 0.72
2 X 13
'-Q) ,/
smax unsafe
hst

Butt weld
-F/3

Fillet weld
L In order to use safe fillet welds the Tee-stub must be
replaced by a portion of a B.F.I N = 32.

1. Dimensions of the Tee-Stub: '

'3. Crippling of Column tleb:
bst = 34 - 2x 2.2 = 29.6 ems. .Area of applied force=
3
4
2
x 2 x 28 = 42 em •
r
dst
1
. ·dst =2 (30 - 1.3) = 14.35 ems. L ------ Resisting area = 1.3 (2.0 + 5 x 2 x 2.2) = 31.2 em
2
Unsafe
-----
hst = 28 + 2 x 2.5 x tfc
. Either we omit this type of configuration or we apply an

= 28 + 5 x 2.2 = 39.0 ems.

bst
.I .allow~ble stress approach as follows:

Take the Tee-stub as a part of a B.F.I. No. = 30 Applied force = 34 X 15 X 100

x ( 28 _ 2 ) = 43.26 tons.

1
Replace the moment by two forces: F = : = ~~0 = 57.7 tons Resisting force = 1. 8 x + 5 X 2 X 2.2)
,/ ,/

I! 2. Welds Attaching Tee-stub Flange to Column Flanges:

Butt Welds « Good Welds»
F
crp

= 56.16 tons> 43.26 safe.

tfc

I Size of butt welds = tst = 2.0 ems.

L =Length of weld= tb + $ tfc = 2 + 5 x 2.2 = 13·cms. 4. Bending of Column Flange:

13
· t fc -> o· · 4 ~4 x 28 x 2 11: 2.59 > 2.3 unsafe.

I
 CHAPTERS 503 S04
This approach is too conservative. if we apply an ~~~u•~Q 111 Example 5.5:
stress design approach we get: Design the connection ()f Example 5.4 using vertical plate
stiffeners.
Applied force = 43.26 tons.
Solution
Resisting force= 0.8 (7 x <1.4 -2
X 2.2 + 0.15 X 28 X 2
F
./ I ./ ./ 1. Dimensions of the Plate Stiffener and the Corresponding Welds:
c tfc bb tb b 5 t = 34 - 2 x 2.2 = 29.6 ems.
=.so.ss:tons.~~6 tons (o.k)
hst = 28 + 5 tfc = 28 + 5 x
N.D. The Tee-stub web is attached to the column web using
fillet welds of minimum size s = 0.4 ems.
2.2 = 39 ems. v -y-- 'B·H 34
5. Shear Resistance of Column Web:
1 :2S
Applied force= 0.75 x 57.7 = 43.275 tons.
Vertical plate stiffener
t Lw:13~ms.
Take tst = tfc = 2.2 ems
28.,.5he =hst ~=15t·m
Resistance= 1.3<x 34 x 0.84
= 37.128 t unsafe.
L_ :2-s
'
~
4 B;F-I 28
10472.3 em
Remaining force = 43.275 - 37.128
'= 6.14 tons 15 X 100 X (39/2) = 0. 926 t/em2
3 X 10472~3
(34-4x2-2)
Use a cover plate of thickness t O.K.

6.14 = (34- 4x2.2) X t X 0.84

Butt Welds «Good Weld»
get t = 0.3 em ; take t = 0.6 em.
Size of butt welds = tst
To be noticed that this approach is somewhat Lw = tb + 5 tfc =2 + 5 x 2.2
conservative. a realistic analjsis must consider
= 13 em ..
that the applied force is F/2 instead of 3 / F •
4
Section ( Butt welds )
(57.7/3) x cos45 0.74
i.e. Applied force= 0.5"x 57.7·= 28.85 tons (tst x 13)~ cos45 - tst
< 34.72 t o.k safe
2
f
equ1
. < 1.1 x 1.4 t/cm
..I. cHAPTERS 505 506 CHAPTERS
Example (5.6}:
Put: f .= 1.1 X 1.4 ;
equi Design the momerit connection shown in the Fig. below. The
.~
tst = 1.0 ems. take 2.2 ems J t -F/3
connection corresponds to configuration "A" of Section 5.4.1.
. dst M = 24.0 t.m. 11, = 10.0 t.
L ·:::.:::..-===.::
Fillet 'Welds Solution
-F/3

=
57.7/3
S X 13
< o. 72 val bst J az
91iD
Butt
weld

Put: f l: = q/) = 0. 72 t/cm .

2 ~® v .!: ~l
I' 2~lcm .·1
Fillet
Get: s_ = .2·.05 CIJlS. weld - -
f
Take s = 2~2 ems. !;::===~ !!!. 22
rs I
~
~

2. c~·ippii.ng .of Column Reb, Bending ·<of Column Flange, Shear ,!

11
Resistance·. of Column Reb: 31 cms
.,
Exactly as Example 5.4.
y - y

/'
Groove 'j's= 2 o
'W eld

/ ,f.
(I .

fl: ---
. ==-=-==--=- !===
;:F.;---
bp=24cms
30 cm

~, Il

X- X

1. Design of the Top Plate:

24 X 100
- Applied force = (JO _
21 = 85.71 tons.
 508 CHAPTER-51,.
CHAPTERS 507
Choose width of top plate b,p = 24 .• 0 ems. The Size of Group of Welds "1" is:

10
s
1
= 0.72 X 2 (22 + 2 X 4
) = 0.227 ems (take s 1 =4 mms.)
Hence, thickness.of top plate "t" is:
p
42
85.71
x = =---=---.,.
22 + 2 X 4
= 0.53 ems (Refer to Table 3.6)
t
p
= 24 X 1.4
= 2.55 ems, take t
p
= 2.6 ems.
The induced torsional moment Mt = 10 x 0.53 = 5.3 t.cm is of
- Use fillet weld lines to attach the top plate to the beam minor effect and hence the induced shear stresses can be neglected.
flange. The size of fillet welds is chosen equal to the beam Also the face of weld joining the welds to the framing angles are
flange s = 2. 0 ems·. safe if the other face of weld is safe.

Applying in the shear stress equation we get "L ": The Size of Group of Welds "2" is:
1
~ = 10 tons. M = 10 (6 - 0.53) = 54.7 t.ems
q = 0.72 ~

.~~-f~®·
Plane (1-1):
L = 17.76 ems 18.0 ems.
1

2. Design of the Framing Ailgles:

10 1
(jf \ tv
Choose 2 < s 60 x 60 x 8 with a height "h" = 30 - 4 x 2 fl = ~~~---~--
X
= =-=-- '(j)
= 22 ems. 2

2
f
eq
= < 0.79 t/cm .

Get s
2
= 0.65 ems. choose s
2
= 7 mms.

Plane (2-2):

= 0 .. 72 lq,2
= ~ ..l..
-2
+ q//

i.e. s = 0.55 ems. , hence the governing size is 7 mms.

2
. . . . CHAPTER 5 509 510
Angles:

1·6
'0·7cm 0·7cm
{a- 2tJ
__[
-i-s
=6- 2x0·8
= 4·4cms
r
ll[
11 I I

5
22cms

3·5

1 1 . 2 0.0565 X (11-3.5-2.5) 2
£t . = f c = "2"".9"'5;;:--x-s-2 = 2. 95 x 0. 7 =·0 • 4 8-tl. t /em f2 = 11 = 0.0256 t/cm

T = 0.484 x 0.7 x 1 (one centimeter height) = 0.339 tons.

Mss = 0.339 (6 - 2 x 0.8) = 1.49 t.cm. T = (0.0565 + 0.0256 ) X 6 X (3.5 + 2.5) = 1.4 tons.
2

If plastification is allowed the thickness of the framing

angles is:
M ; 1.4 x (a - t)/2 = 1.4 x (6 - 0.8)/2 = 3.64 t.cm

t = j1.49 6 = 1.9~
.2.4 X 1\.,
X
ems. > 0.8 ems
t = j. 3.64
2.4
X
X 6
6 = 1.23 ems. (yield is allowed)
one centimeter heig.ht

This value is big~ and conservative.

Hence use 2 < s 120 x 120 x 14

If high strength bolts 10.9 are utilized to attach ·the

Bolts:
framing angles with the column flange, the angle thickness . is
computed as follows: Q
b
= -108 = 1.25 tons < 3.16 o.k.

Use 4 M (10.9)
16 T
ext = 1.4 .tons· < 0.8 x 9.89 O.k.

.f =10 X (6 - 0.53) X 6 = O.OS65 t/cm2

t .2 X 6 X 22 2
, , CHAPTER 5 511 512 CHAPTERS
Example (5. 7):
Solve example 5.6 using configuration "B" of' Section ~. = 1.2
(N + K) t = 0.75 Fy ~ = 10 tons t w. b ems •
5.4.1. w.b

Ref'er also to Section 4~2. 7.2 f'or the design' of' the
bracket. =
H 24.0 t.m , ~ = 10 tons.
Solut.ion Hence getN = 0.63 ems N •
ml.n
= K = 4.0 ems.

:-:_

The width a = N + C = 4.0 + 2.0 = 6.0 ems.

I v Top Plat Y..,.!

":,:· .-I
I
. .
. r-olL <
2 2 2 4-0
B·F·I 30
.~~ ·-u:rii

I lb·ocms
==f2cms
~ sw=0·4cm 2cms
[ &Ocms
a
., ~

~
20·6cms
B:F·I 30 _j
4·
A (b) Stif'f'ener Thickness:
Sec. Y -Y The. stiffener thick~ess t must satisf'y the following
st
conditions:

1. Plate:
The design is exactly as Example 5.6.

- To avoid the local buckling.

2. Crippling of' Column Yeb, Bending of' Column Flange, Stability
of' Corner Yeb:
·a/ tst ~ 16
As Examples 5.1 and 5.2.

Hence t . 1!:: 6 / 16 1!:: 0.375 ems.

3. Design of' the Bracket: st
(a} The Bearing L!'ngth "N":
..I cHAPTERS 513 514 CHAPTERS

(c) Welds Connecting Stiffeners to Column Flange:

Assume b = 0.2 h h = 20 ems s = 0.6 ems.

Hence co1.11pute the following properties of weld lines:

2
Area= 28.8 em

y =·8.88 Cl.llS

Applying in the stress equation:

M = 10 x 4 = 40 t.cm.

Plane (2-2):

10 . 2
- ----==-=:--
q A//- 28.8
= 0. 347· t/cm
l ••

- The shear stress in the. vertical stiffener = shear stress

40 X 11.2 2
in the weld 1224.36
= 0.366 t/cm
i.e. 0.35 X 2.4 X tst X h =2 X 0.72 X S X h .,.,.,1

2 2 2 2
fe = j(0.366) + 3 (0.347) = o.7o3 t/cm < Q.72x1.1 t/em
tst ~ 1.71 s O.K.

Plane (1-1):
If "s" is taken equal to 0.6 ems get tst ~ 1.0 ems. Q = 10 tons will be resisted by shear on the vertical lines.
and by normal stresses on the two horizontal lines.
- Bending stress of stiffeners must be safe.
2
fBi = 0.347 t/em ; Q = 10 tons
~ = 10 tons. , M = 10 (3 - 2) = 10 t.cm.

10 10 X 6 Assume Mt = 40 t.em to be resisted by the vertical lines

fc =6 tst + tst x 62
__4._0__._x_2._0.__-o::- = 0.083 t/em2 (Neglected)
Put f
c
= 1.4 t/cm2 get tst = 2.38 2 X 0.6 X

No need to check this plane 1-1

Hence choose tst = 2.4 ems.
.... CHAPTERS 515 516 CHAPTERS . . .

Example (5.8):,·
Hence: L = 0 _72as..x7.12 x
2
= 29.76 ·ems. Take L. = 30 ems.
Solve Exalliple 5.6 using configuration "C" of Section
5.4.1. The total length of this top plate = 30 + 2 = 32 ems.

Solution Width and Thickness of Top Plate:

All steel structural components of the configuration "c"

Take width of top plate of bracket = 30 - 2 x 2 = 26 ems.
are the same as Example 5.6 except for the lower bracket where
its top plate is.to be designed as follows: Required thickness t = 2685.71
X 1.4
= 2.35 ems ..

Take t = 2.4 ems.

2 The design of the vertical stiffener and the fillet weld
lines connecting this stiffener to the column flange are exactely
as Example 5.7~

A
.J
l=31 ems
r
l
3()-0cms

fi!!:!:!:!!!!!!!!l2:m6c:mms:!!!!!:!!!L_j J
A- A

Length of Bracket Top Plate for the Lower Bracket :-

Transmitted force to top plate of hracket = 85.71 tons.

Take s = 2.0 ems.

. . . CHAPTERS 517 518 CHAPTERSL

Example (5. 9): (A) Tension Side

Design the connection shown in the Fig. below. Refer to 1. Top-Plate:
Section 5.4.2 "Configuration "D".
M = 13.5 t.m. ~ = 6.0 ton13.
Tension force = {241350
_ i.S) = 60.81 tons.

Maximum width = 34 - 2 x 2.2 = 29.6 ems.

Solution
60.81
Thickness = 29.6 X 1.4 = 1.47 ems.
SH 34
Take .1.8 ems as beam.
i v v

,-·
B
., 8
2. Fillet Welds Attaching Top plate to Column Section:

From Section B-B:

·. 3·0! l)M B·F·I 24
= 25.2
Rb I ,-· . L = 34 - 4 X 2.2
1
ems.

I
c
l
~
'c L
2
= 30 - 1.3 - 2 X 2.2
2
= 12.15 ems.
21·Qcms sw :::HI.
-u
L 60 81
= 0.85
14-35
30·1
Stiffener (Thick.::: 2·0cmsl
8 ·F·I 34 il ems
•
s = • J ·
[2 (25.2-+ 2 X 12 .15) X 0.72
ems. Take 9 mms.

A-A 3. Butt Welds Attaching Top Plate to ·Beam Flange:·

Use butt weldsto·connect the t~p plate: to the beam flang~.

No checks .are required for excellent welq. Use 2 backing bars as

$:1·2 shown by dotted lines in Sec~ion B-B.

(B). Compression Side

1. Fillet Welds Attaching the Beam Bottom Flange to the Bracket

Top Plate: Section (C-C)

Take s = 1.6 ems.

B·F· 24

60.81
. L = 2 x 1. 6 x O. 72 = 26. 39 ems. . Take 27. 0 ems.
 520 .CHAPTERs&.
a
1
= 27.0 + ~.0 = 30.0 ems.

Total length= 27.0+3.0cl.earance = 30.0 ems. 30 - 1.3

a = .::.=-=--=-.::...=. = 14. 35 ems.
2
Width = 34 - 2 X 2.2 = 29 .. 6 ems.
30.0 - 27.0
e = - 1.5 ems.
Thickness = 1. 8 ems as beam flange.
s to be taken 1.0 ems {s = 10 mms).
~
3. Fillet Welds ·Attaching· Top Plate of .. Bracket to Column -The bearing length: {N + K) tw.b = 0.75 f
y
Section:
lower face ",. upper face
../ ' '
Total length o:f fillet weld = (2 L ) + (L1 + 2 L )
2 2
~ = 6.0 tons , K = 2 x 1.8 = 3.6 ems , tw.b = 1.1 ems.

= 25.2 + 4 x 12.15 = 73.8"ems.

60;·81
s = -:-=---=c=-= = 1.14 ems. ·Take·· s = 1. 2 ems.
N = -ve hence N i
mn
= K = 3.6 ems. < 27.15 ems. o.k.
·. ·
0.72 X 73.8

4. Bracket Dimensions: - Stiffener thickness t st:

4·0 4·0 ;a: 30.15 / 16 ;a: 1.88 ems.

tst

~i§ntntJ· = 1.0 ems).

;a: 1.77 s ;a: 1.77 ems {where s
tst
X 21:0 Get tst from the normal stress equation
s s ems
. .
f = N + __ · 6;:_:.:..__=
M
b 30.15 tst · --2
t s t X. 30.15

Where: N = 6.0 tons , M = 6 x 1.5 = 9 t.ems ·,

ts~ Put fb = 1.4 t/em2

11,.-1- ·.Hence t = o.2 ems.

~
st
Choose ' t = 2.0 ems.
~--,®
- Velds connecting stiffeners to col:umn web:
\

tD --~ = 6.0 tons , M = 6 ( 2~· 0 + 3) = 99.0 t.cms.

 . . . CHAPTERS 521 522 CHAPTERS . . .

s ;:: 1.0 ems. Example (5. 10):

Design the connection of Example 5. 9 using Configuration
Properties of Fillet Welds: 11
E" of Section_S.4.2.

y = 9.25 ems. M = 13.5 t.m.

2
Area = 48 cm . 1\ = 6.0 tons.

I XX = 2068.33 em4 ZX = 176.03 3.

em . Solution

Plane (1-1) : 1. Design of the Top Plates:

Tension force = 60.81 tons.

Take thickness of top plate = thickness of beam flange

f equ = jo.565 2
+ 3 x 0.125
2
= 0.605 t/cm2 < 0. 79 (o.k) = 1.8 ems.
60 81
Width=
2 X
• .
1.4 X 1.8
= 12.06 ems. take 12.0 ems
Plane (2-2):
No need to check this section {2-2) . it will be ·safe as
mentioned in the previous exampl.~s.

34cms
i

L4=12lcms
21
ems L ·

1. 24cms J
A - A
. ·..lcHAPTERS 523 524 CHAPTERS. . .
Example (5 ~ 11):
(a) Tension Side
Redesign the connection of.Example 5.10 using configuration
"F" of Section 5.4.2.
2. Fillet Velds Attaching Top Plates to Beam Tension Flange:
Refer also to Section 4.2.3. M = 13.5 t.m , ~ = 6.0 tons.
Take s = 1.8 ems.
Solution
60.81
Length of welds= 2 x 0 _72 x 1 • 8 = 23.46 ems. Take 24.0 ems.

Total length = 24 .. 0 + 3 clearance = 27. 0 ems.

1 v v

3. Fillet Velds Attaching Top Plates to.CcilWmi Sectl~ri: ,-·

.a '
B
Total length of welds = 4 (12 .15 + 9. 8) = 87. 8 ems.
r
= [< 30 ; 3 ,.c 15·8011S
L
llhere: L4 1. ) - 2. 2] . = 12.15 ems ..

.~
~ - 'c
L2 = 12 ~ 2.2 = 9.8 ems.

60.81
s = =c--::::----.--~
87.8 X 0.72 = 0. 96 ems. Take s = 10 mms. B·F·I 3lo

.(b) Compression Side A-A

Exac~}Y ru; ExamPle 5. 9.

~
I ==tHems
~Butt welds

B-8
~CHAPTERS 525 526 CHAPTERS . . . .
1. Tension and Compression Sides are to be designed exactly as Plane (2-2):
the tension side of' Example ~hf)~-1B':"'B Section).
·- .:.- _;.,,(. f:; l:-~.... ;.':"). 1
fl.= 2.24 s
2. Design of the Cleat. Plate:
(a) Fillet Weld,s Attaching.Q;J.eat Pl;:ite to the BeaiO :Web:
. ..~. .. .
f = 0. 79 = ! J ~ 1
+ - --= get s = 0.68 ~s •
equ s (5.6) 2 (2.24) 2
Maximum height of fili~{ weld lines = 24 - 4 x 1. 8 =
16.8 ems.
Hence take s = a mms.
s = 16.a6.0X 0.72 = 0.50 ems
'
Take s =6 mms.

(b) Fillet Welds Attaching'Cleat Plate to Column Web: (c) Thickness of Cleat Plate:

~ = 6.0 tons M = 6 x (3 + 4) = 42 t. ems. height = 16.8 ems

width = 7.0 ems
- 6 - 1 2
q//- 2 s x 16.a - 5.6 s t/cm take thi'ckness = 0. a ems.

2 2.
Z
X
= s h = 94.0a s em3 (h =16.8 ems) 3 6 2 2
q.
av
= X
2 x 16.8 x o.a
= 0.67 t/om < 0.84 l/cm o.k.
42
f..L = 94 .. 08 s = 2.24
1
s
t/cm2

42 X 6 2
ft = -----=-
- - 2 = 1.12 t/cm < 1.4 t/cu? o.k.
0.8 X 16.8

Plane (1-1):

s. = 0.66 ems.
 CHAPTERS 527 528 CHAPTERS
Example (5.12):
3
Design the bolted seat angles connection shown ;n t ~. 22 x ( 8 ) = 938.66 cm4
• he Fig. 12
below. Where M = 3.0 t.m and ~ = 5.0 tons.
fta = 64.68 X 4
938 _66 = 0.276 t/cm
2
Solution

(1) Assume that the moment is replaced by two equal

Tb,M ~ [~X 0.276 X 4 X 22] X~ = 3.0 tons.
forces of opposite sence: '\.bolts

F =T ~ C =~
h
= 3 X 100
(22-1. 6) 1.84 + 3.0 = 4.84 tons < 0.8 x 9.89 (O.K.)

= 14.70 tons
(2~ Thickness of Seat Angle:
Group of Bolts (1):

These bolts are subjected

to shear.
M = 14.70 x 2.6

t :· 6 j
X 38. 22
22 x 1. 4
= 38.22

= 2 · 72 ems.
t.cm.

2·6
"

cmsCI . ·L
.
·-~

.. ' .
.

T=14·7

Ex<:;~!;!sive .thickness, h~nce this type ·

Qb = 14~ 7 ·: 1.84 tons.
' of configuration is to be modified as follows:
'\.bolts

Choose H.S.B (10.9) M 16 Add Stiffeners:

Use 80 x 80 x 8
i
I Ps = 3.16 tons; Ti ~ 9.89 tons
I fta <t80x80x8

I
Group of Bolts (2):

T ~ 14.70 tons.
JZ ~ r:l· . . .,~~::
LJ jo 1£1-=·====*====·===·:::::J =
a 1·8
II [ 22-0cms.
.I t O·B
A= 4 X 3.82 X 0.8 + 22 X 1.13 = 37 em .
2

!
I
M = 14.70 x 4.4 = 64.68 t.cm
·I
y~ 22x1.13x0.565+4x3.82x0.8x3.04 ~ _
1 38
ems
14.70
Text, b = - 8- = 1.84 tons
3
'\.bolts I = 22 X 1.13 X (1.38- 1 • 13 ) 2 + 4 X 0.8x( 3 • 82 ) + 4 X 0.8 X
XX 2
II
 530 CHAPTER
..I cHAPTERS 529
- Example (5.13):
3.82 2 Design a beam-to-column·connection using a top and a. bottom
3.82 x (----+1.13-1.38)
2
= 16.5 + 14.86 + 33.7 = 65 cm4
plate. The connection is subjected to:
14.7 ~os
3 c~~
fc = 45°± 14.7 45° (e) (yu,l) M = 20.0 t.m. and 11, = 16.8 tons.

Use ordinary and high strength bolts to at tacli the beam

e = (2.6 /cos 45°)- 1.13 + 1.38 = 3.9 ems flanges to the plates and butt welds to attach the plates to the
column flanges.
Yu = 3.82 + 1.13- 1.38 = 3.57 ems y
1
= 1.38 em
Solution

2
f c = 1.96 t/cm Unsafe
. Ordinary Bolts:
Use ordinary bolts of diameter d = 20 mms. (Grade 4.6}
Still with the use of stiffeners the co~iguration is tinsafe.
2
Naturally if the dimensions of the seat angle and those of the
R = 0.25 X 4 X n ~2 ) = 3.14 tons.
stiffeners are increased we· can reach a safe induced compressive ss

stress i.e. with (200 x 200 x 16). · ·For the computation of the required thickness of the
tension top plate the·holes area must be deducted.
N.B. We don•t·recommend to use this type of configuration for
a rigid Beam-to-Column connection.

(3) Bolts Connecting Beam Web to Framing Angles:

., A
l
6 roup
.1l. = 5. 0 tons.
\J
~
.j....:...... •
5 ~t rb= 16-B tons

~
~ = ~ = 2.5 t < 2
\.bolts
X PS < 2 X 1.69 I
I
I
+- I
I
.
B·F·I 30
~ +- .IH=20·0 tms.
Use 2 H.S.B.(10.9) M to connect the beam web to the framing T-:- . . . .
12 1
angles and 4 bolts to connect the other leg of the framing angle Sec. A- A
...
to the column flange.

Compute the required framing angles thickness as has been

previously outlined in Chapter "4". Tension force -- -a-
M - (30X_100
- 20 = 71.42
2) tons.

n1
=71 · 42
3.14
- 22.7
-
= 24 bolts (6 rows- 4 bolts/row)
. . . CHAPTERS 531 532 CHAPTERS . . .
Assume breadth of plate = width of beam flange = 30.0 ems. · Example (5. 14):

Net width of. top plate ~[ 30 - 4 x (2 + 0.2)] = 21.2 ems

Design the welded corner with bradt.et connection of the two
hinged gable frame shown in the figure below.
71.42
Thickness = ~~--~-= = 2.4 ems.
1.4 X 21.2
Solution
16.8
= 5.35 = 6 bolts (3 bolts at each side).
3.14
1. Geometi:'i.cal Configuration:
For the check of the beam tension flange it is sufficient (a) u~~a bracket whose length is equal to one tenth the span
to deduct only the holes exceeding 15% of the gross flange area. i.e
3
i°0 = 3.0 ms.This length i~ measured on the center line of
the beam from· point "0" which corresponds to the intersection
Area of bolts holes = 4 x 2 x 2.2 = 29 _33 % > 15 % point· of the beam and the co·lumn center lines.
Area gross 30 x 2

Hence only 14.33% of the flange tensile capacity is to be (b) The bracket .is to be cut from the beam rolled s~ction.
:!
deducted, that is to say:
Nel area of beam tension flange= (1 - 0.1433) x 30 x 2 (c) Compute the induced straining actions .using a method of
2
= 51.4 em . structural analysis. The bending moment diagram:is illustrated
71.42 2 2 in figure b.
= 1.389 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm .
51.4

(d) Compute the bending moment at the following-sections:

High Strength Bolts:
Use-high strength bolts (10.9) M (Ps = 3.16 tons). - Section ( 1-1) just before the abrupt change cross
16
n1 = ~~i: =
2
22.6 = 24 bolts (6 rows x 4 bolts). =
section, the corresponding moment M 40.0 t.m will govern the
1
design of the beam outside the bracket.
16.8
= 5.30 use 6 bolts (3 bolts at each side) ..
3.16
- Section (2-2) at mid-length of the bracket where the
The high strength bolts of · the. frid.ion type are induced stresses due to M = 62 t.m are to be less than the
2
pretensioned and hence a clamping force will allow to use the allowable stresses.
gross area.

The required thickness of the top plate=

71.42
= 1.7 ems Section (3' . 3' ) belonging to the beam,• the
1.4 X 30
corresponding moment M = 88.0 t.m will. induce stresses along
3
Hence use t = 2.0 ems as the beam flange.
the vertical section at the beam and the bracket connection to
the column flange.
. . . . CHAPTERS 533 534 . CHAPTERS
-Section (3''- 3'') belonging to the column. the moment
II

M
3
= 84.1 t.m will govern the design. of the beam-column
c below the bracket.

8
2. Strength Requirements:

{I £

(al lay Out

-- ti
i
i
i y
i X

(bi.S·M·D· and Critical Sectio~s

XA=13-14t A..__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1~S:.:::·O:..::m=.s_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-l

®-® ®-®
..I cHAPTERS 535
536 CHAPTER 5 a,.
(a) Beam Cross Section (Section 1-1):
Equation (p) of section 5.11.5.2 may be utilized to check the
M1 = 40 t.m zX = 401.4
X 100
= 2857.1 em
3
safety of the unbraced length against lateral buckling. This
means that:
Choose a B.F.I No. 40

= 40 X 100 2 2 L13
f
c 3030 = 1.32 t/em < 1.4 t/em (o.k) -280 =· 9.33
- b =. .30 . < 100 (o.k)

The bracing structural elements a~ joints· (1) and (3) may be

(b) Beam-Column Cross Section (Section 3'' - 3''}:
chosen a one angle of size (a). Thus equation (j) of ·section
M3 ,, = 84.1 t.m zx =84.1 X 100 _ 3
1. 4 - 6007.1 em 5.11.5.4·may be used for the computation of the angle size (a):
Choose a B.I.B No. 65
(61.8 + 10H2
a 2:: ------:=-=--~- 2:: 5. 07 ems
20
(o.k}
Use one angle 55 x 55 x 6
(c) Mid-Length of Bracket (Section 2-2}:
M2 = 62 t.m The bracing elements are assumed to be inclined 45°as shown
in the figure below.
y~ 32.65 ems I £f 161800 em4
XX

=62x100x32.65 2 ·.
fc 161800 = 1.25 t/cm (o.k}

(d) Bracket End- Sectio~ 3'- 3' Passing along the Beam to
Column Vertical Plane Connection:
M = 88 t.m (1) Beam-Column B.F~r No 65.
3
(2) Bracing Element.
I XX 1.4 X (72.61} 3 2 (3) Si~e Purlin [No 20].
- 12 + 2 X 302.61 X (37.6} ~ 266056 em4

f
c
= 80 x 100 x·39 - 1 29 t/em2 < 1.4 t/em2
266056 - · (o.k}

3. Stability Requirements:
Assuming that adequate bracing is utilized at joints (1} and
(3), thus the unbraced length L
13is equal to 280 ems.
 CHAPTERS 537 538 CHAPTERsL
4. Design and Dimensioning of Stiffeners: 2
A2st A = 75.66 - 57.08 = ·18.58 em

30- 1.7
bst A= = 14.15 ems~ use bst A = 14 ems

18.58
tst A - 2 x 14 = 0.66 em take t 8 t A = 0.7 em

bst A _ 14.0 = 20 > 16.1 unsafe , hence use tst A = 0.9 ems
. tst A - 0. 7

The corresponding size of weld will be governed by the length

of the stiffener ·Lst A• whe~e:

a = 5.8° Lst A = 65 - 4 x 3.2 = 52.2 ems F

1' = 8.2°. crp
~ = 14° =·'¥ + 0
Force resisted by stiffeners A= ch- 57.08 0.75 X 2.4
= 8872.6
X 100
-.=-~- = 121. 2 tons a = 49.6°
X

= 18.456 tons
Tb = cb = 4037.4
X 100 = 106.95 tons 18.456
s = ~--~--~-=--~-=--~~
2 X- 2 X 52.2 X 0.2 X 3.6 = 0.116 em

~='K'+a ../ '\. . '\.

two 2 weld Lst A
stiffeners lines
cos a = 0.995 sin a = 0.101 tan a = 0.1
Take smin = 0.4 em
cos 1' = 0. 989 sin 1' = 0.142 tan 0 = 0.145
cos ~ = 0.97 sin~ = 0.242 tan ~ = 0.25 Stiffeners
The bending. of the column flange opposite to the beam tension
Stiffener (A): flange is to checked for simplicity according to the following
Applied force area = 30 x 2.6 x cos ~ = 75.66 em2 (Eq .. (c) of section 5.3.4):

Resisting area= [c!~ 6~ + 2 x 2.5 x 2 x 3.2Jx 1.7 = 57.08 ems tfc = 0.4 j3o x 2.6 x cos 0 = 3.52 ems > 3.2 ems unsafe

Use 2 stiffeners (A) opposite to the bracket lower flange Hence use two horizontal stiffeners (B) opposite to the beam
tension flange as in the previous paragraph' (i.e. 14 x 0. 9 em).
. . . . CHAPTERS 539 540. CHAPTERS a,.
N.B. 1. The exact required cross sectional areas of stiffeners Morris Type Stiffener: .
{B) can b~ computed using the first principle of the yield line
Horizontal portion force = T - p (first principles)
theory as example 5.2. u u

2. The tension beam flange may be extended to. act as a

T
u
= 30 X 2.6 X 2.4 x.cos e = 186.26 tons

st).ffener.
-2
p
u
= 0.8
'
(7 X 2.4 X 3.2 + 0.15 X 30 X 2.6 X 2.4) = 160 tons

Stiffeners (C):
Hence Horizontal portion force = 26.26 tons
Apply in equation (d) of section 5.11.4
Diagonal portion force = (121.2 - 88.25)/cosr = 68.36 tons
Force resisted by stiffeners (C) =ch sin a
cos,./3
= 121.. 2 X
0. 142
o:-97·
= 17.74 tons I'ems·
40 "I ems
~1-~1

tst c
17.74
-r.:4

·=' 12.67
2 x 14
= 12.67 cm2

:=
0.45 em use
14 ems

1.0 em to preven-t'· 'local

buckling
r
'72.6
ems

L = 17.74 · _
15.39ms take 17 ems·
.:: . ., 'l . :• ·' ·. ; ,~ .. ··~ .
st 2 .X 2 X 0.2 X 3.6 X 0.4 cosr = 0.482
./
2 stiff.
""
2 welds
"" s

As the Morris type is a continuous stiffener the diagonal

. . :
Diagonal Stiffeners (D): -

- ~oriz
portion wi 11 govern it~ dimensioning (i: e. Force = 68. 36 tons)
Force resisted by diagonal stiffeners = FD = chcos 0:

ch = 121. 2 tons Regarding Stiffeners (B) and (C) the previous design remains
unchanged .
Qhoriz = (65- 3.2) x 1.7 x 0.84 = 88.25 tons

cos 0: = 0.635
i.e .. take bst = 14 ems 1.8 ems.

FD = 51.9 tons bst D = 1.4.0 ems

t 51.9
St D = ;:;;----c:---::---=~
2 X 1.4 X 14 = 1. 32 em take t = 1.4 em
 542 CHAPTERS
. . CHAPTERS 541
Example (5.15):
Redesign the different steel components of the gable rigid
frame of example 5.21 using a tappered connection.

Solut.ion 72
t·m
40
t.m
Refer to section 5.11.5.

(1) Geometrical Configuration:

(a) Draw the B.M.D on the center lines of the rafter and the
beam-column. For simplicity the bending moment diagram for the
tapered frame configuration may be taken as for the corner with 92 t.ro
bracket frame configuration.

(b) Assume a tapered haunch of length equal to one tenth the

span (i.e. length= SPAN.= 3.0 ms)~

(c) This tapered haunch length is to be taken on the center

lines of both the rafter and the beam-column as shown in the
figure below.

(d) Draw the bisectrice of the .angle corresponding to the

intersection of the exterior beam-column flange and the upper
900
rafter flange. The induced angle is equal to c ;e). (g) Compute the haunch flange lengths

L
32
= 230 ems L
21
= 234 ems.
(e) From joint (3) belonging to the end beam-column haunch
compose the flange 3-2 whose inclination ~ with respect to the
1 (h) Compute the following moments:
vertical axis is equal to 15°.
M
3
= 52.5 t.m M
1
= 40 t.m
II
the beam-column.
(f) Join joints (2) and (1) to get the haunch flange 1-2 M2 = 80.7 t.m belonging to
whose .inclination (3 2 with respect to the beam axis is 17°.
M2 = 72.0 t.m belonging to the rafter.
 543 544 CHAPTERS

(2) Strength Requirements: Hence:

I :: 558800' cm
4
(a) Section (1-1) belonging to the rafter constant depth: X

M
1
= 40.0 t.m 80.7 X 100 X 54 ' 2
f = 0.78 t/cm < 1.4 (o.k)
c 558800
Z
X
= 401.4
x 100 = 2857.1 em3 choose.a B.F.I No. 40.
(d) Section (2-2) belonging to the rafter:
=72t.m
-- 403030
X 100 2 2 M
f
c
= 1.32 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm (o.k) 2
Neglect the variation of thicknesses
The compression rafter flange just to the left of joint (1) Hence:
4
will be subjected to the following ~ompressive stress: I
X
= 530600 em
1.32 1. 32 ~ 1. 4 t/em2
f
c = cos {32
= f = 72 X 100 X 53
530600
2
= 0.72 t/cin <' 1.4
cos 17° c

Hence no need to increase the haunch flange thickness. (3) Stability Requirements:
Consequently the haunch dimensions may be chosen equal to those L \
12 2
which corresponds to the rafter. b = ~ = 7.8 < 100 (o.k) .,;..

h
Hence: thf = 2.6 ems t
hw
· = 1.4 em bh = 30 ems
230
= 7.66 < 100 (o.k)
30
(b) Section (3-3) belonging to the beam-column constant
depth: = 5 .. 5 (o.k)
= < 16.1
tb 2 2.6
M
3
= 52.5 t.m N = 24.5 tons
X

Choose a B.F.I No. 50 Provided that adequate bracing is utilized at joints (1),
Compute the induced stresses and compare with the (2) and (3) the stability requirements are satisfied.
allowable limits (safe) o.k
=42·6 For the design of the bracing elements refer to equation (j)
{c) Section (2-2) belonging to- of section 5.11.5.4. Choose a one angle section with a leg size
the beam-column: (a) computed as follows:
M
2
= 80.7 t.m:
r
[(50 - 3) + 10] ~2 _ ems
Neglect the .increase of the 20 ;:: 4 03
tapered haunch flange due to the
inclination. Choose a one angle 45 x 45 x 5
 . . . CHAPTERS. 545
546 CHAPTERS
' (4) Dimensioning of Stiffeners:
·'· From equilibrium at E we get:
i
(a) Diagonal Stiffener (D):

72 X 100 72 X 100 cos 5. 8° = 112.63 cos 5. 8° + FD cos 42.1°

(106 - 2.6)
F12 (106 - 2.6) cos /31 = 72.81 tons

Get FD = 58.43 tons

Hence the diagonal stiffener . is to be dimensioned for

FD = 62.85 tons

Choose 14.0 x 1.6 ems

(b) Transverse Stiffeners (A) and (B):

I I 0
F =(M /d ) tan 13 = [ 72.0 / (106-2.6) 1 tan 17
0 st (A) 2 2 · 2
P2 =15
® ® II II

\J Fst (B) =(M2/d2) tan /31 [ 80.7 / (108-2,.6) 1 tan 15•

52-St-m

Choose for stiffeners (A) and (B) (14.0 x 0.9) ems

80.7 X 100
F23 = (108 - 2.6) cos 13
2
- 79.1 tons

FD cos 42.1° + 79.1 x sin 15° = 72.8 cos (17° + 5.8°)

Get FD = 62.85 tons

Shearing force resisted by the haunch. web =

( 106 - 2.6 )
----~-----------
0 0
x 0.84 x 1.4 = 112.63 tons
tan ( 5.8 + 42.1) ,/
q
~CHAPTERS 547
548 CHAPTERS~
Example (5.16):
Design the connection previously outlined in example 5.21
using a cUr-ved hauriched connection.

Solution

1. Ge~metric~l Configuration:
a. For simplicity use the moment diagram of ex. 5.22.

b. The rafter and the beam-column are chosen a B.F.I No. ·40
and No. 50 respectively.

c. Draw the inner faces of' the rafter and the beam-column
(shown by the dotted lines).

d. 'From the intersection point (2'.) of' these inner flange

faces take the lengths (2'-1) and (2'-3) equal to 300 ems.

e~ ,nra.w perpendiculars from ( 1) and (3) to the rafter and to

the beam-column respectively to intersect at the center of the
curved, pap.a;e, (OL,

f. Construct the curved haunch 1-3, where the corresponding

tR=24.5ton
radius R is equal t~ 338 ems.

g. ConstrUct the diagonal stiffener (B) and get its

intersection point (2) with the curved haunch flange. Compute
the moments belonging to the rafter and the column.

h. Get the inclinations a ~ 40.7° and a ~ 43.3°.

1 2
i. Divide and into three regi<ms and get the
corresponding moments where:

- The sections regarding a belong to the beam-column.

2
- The sections regarding a belonging to the rafter.
1
h ~ hb + (1 - cos a) R
. . . CHAPTERS 549 550 CHAPTERS . . . .
2. Strength Requirements:
(a) Section (1-1) -Rafter:
h · = h·· +:
2 b
(1 .. .,.. cos a > R
1
= 40 + (1 :.. cos 43.3} 338 S! 132 ems.
3
M = 37 t.m - B. F. I No .. 40 Z = 3030 cm .. . 3
1 X
lxx= U - X ·~~
32 2 2
x 1.
4
+ 2 x 30 x 2.6 x [(132/2

fl = 373030100 = 1.22
X
t/cm
2
4 2
I
XX
= 890880 cm A = 333.52 cm
Due to the abrupt change in compression flange at joint
(1), a conservative approach is to consider the tapered flange
f2 .( rafter } = 75 x 100 x 66
890880
= O.SS t/cm2
inclination ~l = 0
21.5.

i . h = SO + ( 1 - cos40. T) 338 = 131.8 S! 132

Hence: f
1
(haunch flange) = cos1.22
21.5.
= 1.31 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm
2 2

(o.k)
24.5 78.8 x 100 x 66 = 0 _65 t/cm2
f (beam-column) = 333.52 + 890880
2
(b) Section (3-3) Beam Column: 2
< 1.4 t/em
M
3
= 52.5 t.m Z
X
(B.F.I No. SO) =4530 ems
(d) Sections Corresponding to (a /3) and (2 a /3) Belonging
A =• 255 em
2 1 1
to the Rafter:
43 3
a /3
1
h = 40 + ( 1 - cos _ j ) 338 = 50.66 ems

~2 = 21 4
I
X
= 191040 em
1.25
Hence: f (haunch flange) = = 1.34 t/cm2 < 1.4 t/cm2
3 0
51 100 X 50.66 . 2
cos 21 X
1.28 t/cm (o.k)
(o.k)
101040 X 2

2
(c) Section ( 2-2 ) belonging to the rafter and the (2 a /3) h = 40 + (1- cos
1.
x ~ 3 - 3) 338 = 82 ems
beam-column:
4
Choose for the tension flange, the compression flange and I
X
= 298718 cm
the web of the curved haunch the same dimensions of the rafter.
61 X 100 X 82 2 2
Hence: f
2 = 298718 X 2
= 0.83 t/cm < 1.4 llcm (o.k)

(e) Sections Corresponding to (a /3) and (2 a /3) Belonging

2 2
th = tb = 2.6 ems
to the Beam-Column:
twh = twb = 1.4 em
 551 552 CHAPTERS . . .
"CHAPTERS
S. The Stiffeners:
a: /3 h = 59 + (1 - cos
4
~· 7 ) 338 = 59.43 ems (a) Diagonal Sti££ener:
2
Based on Tension Force

2
A = 231.92 em

£ = 24.5 + 60.4 X 100 X 59.43 = 0.43 . 2

t/em (o.k)
2 231.92 545745 X 2

2 «2/3 h = so + (1 - cos

4
I = 1215420 em
X

A= 270.8 em2 Ft = (75 X 100

132 _ 2 • 6 ) = 57.95 tons

132
24.5 + ;:_7;: .0.: . .3~x~1~0.;,.0,;x=---:8::.,;7,..:·-=2:_ = _34 t/em2 (o.k)
270.8 1215420 X 2
0 Resisting force =
tan 45.8
x t
wh
x (0 6 x 1 4)
• ·
= 151 tons

3. Stability Requirements: 151 tons > 57.95 tons (saf:e)

Arc length 1 ~ 2 = 43 ~ 3180x TI x 338 = 255 ems Based on Compression Force

75 X 100
Arc 1-2
b = 255
30 = 8.5 < 100 (o.k) = (132 - 2.6) cos 21.5
= 62.29 tons

78.8 X 100
40.7 X TI F23 = (132 - 2.6) cos 21 = 65.22 tons
Arc length 2 - 3 = 180
X 338 = 239.9 ems

Arc 2-3 239.9

r = 5.8°
--=-- = ---:3() = 8. 0 < 100 (o.k)
./31 = 21.5°
4~ Cross Bending E££ect: 0
{32 = 21
Apply in equation (£) o£ section 5.11.6.2
e = 0
40
i ,3
1.024 < 1. 33 (o.k) :@c:
I '
.LA...-i.
 553
554 CHAPTERS
Example (5. i7): Rigid Frame Haunched Connection:
Design a rigid frame connection using a haunch. The
connect ion·· is subjected ·to a moment "M" :: 21.0 mt and shear "Q"
Fst (D) = 42.4 tons = 7~50 ton. The axial thrust in .the beam is "N" = -4.3 ton.
The beam is a S. J. B.#. 36 anQ. the column is B. F. I.# (30).
b
·st
= 30 - 1·4
2
= 14.3 ems take bst. =·14.0 ems Solution

42 4 2
A
st
= •
1.4
= 30.3 cm
r 18.0cml

30.3
= 1.08 take
2 X 14

(o.k) for local buckling.

36·73
ems
(b) Transverse Stiffeners and (C):

r 21 = 62.29 tons

62.29 x sin £3
1
Fst (A) = cos (3 = 58.25 tan 21.5° .. 36·06
1 ems hz
= 23.0 tons
r 23 =.65.22 tons

Fst (c) = 65.22 tan (3 2 = 65.22 tan 21°

= 25.0 tons
U4·3cmj
The hat.inch will be a part of a S. I. B.# 36 with a height
equals to (36 - 2 x 1. 95) = 32.10 em.
Choose for stiffeners (A) and (c) 14.0 x 0.9 ems
t1 =1.95/cos « = 1.989 = 2.0 ems; t
2
= 1.95/cosa = 2.19 ems
=2.2 ems.
h 1 = 36/cos « = 36.73 ems h2 = (36 - 2 ~ 1.95)/cosa
= 36 .. 06 ems .
h = 36.73 + 36.06 =72.79 ems.
--~~~TERS .
556 CHAPTERS.,
555
Approximate Analysis: . --3 2
60
High Strength Bolts:
lXX- 2 X .0.4 X i~9 + 2 X 14.3 X 1.8 x(
72 79
· /
8
1. ) +

2 = 27.55 2:.:·::.2-...::1:. :·:_; ~:. . ) ~=

:2: .---.._=
. 21 100 4 3
-Tension = =-=~-=--;.:::..::...~=-
72.79 - ( 2 + 2.~
X
tons. 4 X 4. 55 X 1. 8 X
72 7 9
(.:...: : .· ·: .:. ::...::---· 122821.83
2
' 2

External force on eachbolt = 27455 = 6.88 tons. 2100 X<¥.+ 1.8 )

= 0.653 t/~2 := 0.65 t/cm
2
".'· , '122821.83
2
< 0.72 t/cm o.k .
6.8a._
Required Pretension - - - 8.6 tons.
0 .8 30 595 2
. f B -- 0 . 653 x 38.275
· = 0.521 t/cm .

Use H.S.B. M
20
{8.8), where T = 15.43 x 0.7 = 10.8 tons.
7.5 2
·qn =2 x 0.4 x 60.39.= 0 • 15 t/cm • ·

{1) Velds:
· {a) Fiilet Velds Around the Beam Flanges:

Plane (2-'2): qeq<n> = Jco~520 2 + 3 co.1s1

2
= o.58 vcm · < o. 79
2
vc:m?- <o.t>

M 21 .100 X
·'F,··=
w . ·;.,.ulfqosa:
. = 71.69x·o· .:··99··=-2._9.89
. tons.
Vhere: , ' .

:~d:; ·r· ~1..;+ h2 - 4!55

.:

Ml
nr
--
A~t.S
2·0
:Length of horizontal weld lines= 14.3 + 2{ ( ·~-
14
1. )
3 8 t·B

36.4

. .......... .
- 1:95] =23~4 :ems. · · em •

s = 29_.89 = 1. 77 ems. , Take s· = 1.8 crqs. · ' X

23.4 ~ 0.72
00.39 '
em
{b) Fillet V~lds Around the. Ve.b:. ~
em

Veb vertical lines of weld- 36.73- ~ x 2 + 36.06

2 x 2~2 = 6.0.39 ems.
s = 60 _3;·;· o:·n =O'-i6 ems; T~e s = 0.4 ems.
•'• ": .. ' ~'

I. 18cm
For the exact . ca,lculation of stresses, the fillet welds Sec. 11 - 11
...
around the beam lower flange are. n~gl~ct.ed for::. s;mplicity.
.,. ~HAPTER 5 557 . 558 CHAPTERS . . .
End.Plate Thickness: Check of Prying force in Bolts:

L = 4.8 + 2.0 + 4.8

1 w t4
= 11.6 ems.·
2 30. a
p =
K N 2100 4 3 : Ttotal
T =.d' -: 2 = 70.69
; = 27.55 tons. 3a a
4b (4b + 1) +
\l'here:·
1 2.
d = [ h1 + h2 - /2 (tl. + t2) ] = 70.69 a = 3 . 0 ems. , b = 3. 0 cins ., w = 9 ems A = 2.45 em
·s

P = 0. 017 x 6.·579 = 0. 1i ,tons.

K =
27.55 X 11.6
= 40.0 t.·cm ..
8 ., '. -. !·.!
Total force ca~ried by each bolt· = 6. 579 tt 0. 11 = 6. 68 torls
= 3.1 ems .. ' .'
..
' < 10.8 t o.k.

Take t = 3.5 ems.· 3.0

1.8
L 2.0
1.8
M2 = 6.579 X 3 - 0.33 = 19 .. 4. t.cms .
Exact Analysis:
3.0
, tU.gh-Str,ength Bolts: ... __ J6 X 19.4
t ~~---=- = 3.03 ems. < 3.5 ems o. k.
req 1.4 x 9
·). \.;,.

N·.B.. :The. crippling of col,unm web, the· tension of the

column fl~e and the stability of the corner web are to be
. . .. 2
33.245 checked as:Example 5.1'3.
f2·= 0.099x 42.045 = 0.078 t/cm

Group of H~S.B "1'':

1 0 099 0 078
T ::i '- ( • ; · ) x 8.8 ·x 1.8· = 7.0. tons •
. ext,l:l,M 2

4
Text, b = i~ = 0.43 tons.

Ttotal =7- 0.43 = 6.579 tons < 0.8 x 15.43 x 0.7 (o.k).
. . CHAPTERS 559 560 CHAPTERS
Example (5.18):
s = Take s ::::: 1'. 8' ems •.

Ueld Around Veb:

.r-,-. ·~
...;, q = ----..7----- Yhere h = 70.5 - 4x2.45 - 2x2.6 = 55.5 ems
8-F-1 36
2 X h X S

..,
<"':-
.... with q = 0.72 t/cm
2
Gets= 0.087 , Take s =4 mms •

jg
"
~
.:g
~
- ~Ills

Sec (1-1) (Exact):

....
~
u

"' ....
g Take s ar.ound flanges = 1.8 ems . & s around web = 0.4 ems.
.,
eu
..,
~
..
- _:!!ElliS !XX = 121 (55.5)
3
X 0.4 X 2 + _4 X 11.85 X 1.8 X (32.8 - 0.9)
2

2 4

~
.c:. + 2 x 30 x 1.8 (35.25 + 0.9) = 242860 em .
'
'---'-'

= 4313 X 30.35 :: 0.54 t/cm .

2

= :;::---:~7-;;·'·:-0-"--;;:-. 2
- ·o.14 t/cm .
2 X 60.7 X 0.4
Height of the haunch (h)
11-65
:: 36 ..;; 2 2.4 JM~I-8 = jco~54) 2 2 2
(Safe)~
·CQ.S
X
2 a: = 33. 8 ems.
- - u.s
1·8
feq.B + 3 (0 . .14) = 0.6 t/cm

2
< 0.79 t/cm.

(1) Design of Velds: (Fillet 0.66 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm?. ( safe )
Velds);
Sec (2-2): (2) Design o:t: the H.s~:B:
T M 4313 ( 2-a) Approxima\e::-AD.a]jrsis:
-co_s_a: = d cos a = 7(;:;7-;;:0-.o~--::2""".-4;;-;5"')-c_o...:.sa_
- ' '4313
T= [70. 5 .:. · ·(2'. 45/2):'~ (2. 6/2)] =
63 4
• t
= 64.6 t
Assume we have 2 rows each. 4 bolts
' ' ·. '
=. "]3
63':4 .
Length of welds around
= 30 + 2 x 11.85 T~nsion /bolt = 7.92 tons.
tension flange
l Try M(20) (10.9)· Tail = 15.43 x 0.8 = 12.4 t
= 53.7 ems.
p
s
= 4.93 t
 ~CHAPTERS.· 561
562. CHAPTER

(2-b) Design of End Plate:

. 1 3 . 4
I
X
=
12
(82.0) X 30 = 1378420 em.
tfb
.·.L=3d+2s+-.-
cos «
H 431.3 2
fu = -~- y1 = 13.78420 X
41 • O = 0.128 t/cm .

L = 3 X 2 + 2 X 1.~ + 2.~ = 12.05 ems.•

cos a: M '4313
ft2 = -~- y2 = 1378420 X 32 • 0 = 0 · 1 t/cm2.

M 4313 2
_ TI. _ 63.4
H - 8 -
X 12 .. 05
= 95.49 t/em ft3 = -~- y3 = 1378420 X 20 · 0 = 0. 062 t/em •
8

t I 6 M ;: 16 X 95. 49 . Group (1):

= ~b x 1.4 ~ 30 x 1~4 = 3.7 ems.
T = (0 " 1282 + 0 1
· ) 30 X ?· 04 25 = 7.72 < 15.43 X 0.8 t
ext,b,M
Take t = 3.7 ems. (Safe).

(2):
(2-c) Exact Analysis of H.S.B:
= ( · 1 + · ~ 30
0 0 06 12 025
T
ext, b,H 2
X · = 7.3 t < 15.43 X .0.8 t
(Safe).

(3):

7-8
+ ... ... ...
I

1-:-
3 T =
1
- 0.062 x 30 x
19.0165
= 4.42 t < 15.43 x 0.8 t Safe .

. (.:8 ext,b,M 2
f.-

.o
... • •• I= •
1-
~.45
4-1

12
(3) Check of Shear on Bolts:

+ ••• • -
. 13.016
Q/bolt = 7~ 0 = 1.750 tons < Ps < 4.93 t (Safe) •

~i ·--··'-~-~ :·~ 1 - "

(4) Check the Effect of Force:
. .
.
12
. .

70~~
a = 3.0 ems. b = 3.0 ems.

:[
25·111
i a =

.
I ··I
Il". . w/bolt = 7.5 ems.
b =
..... +... 1-
~= 2.45 em •
2
8

I= 3·7
:[
2-6
~
I -t = 3.8 ems.
3.7
1--
I r
Force/bolt = 8.07 tons

1
!
I
 . . . CHAPTERS 563 564 CHAPTERS

1 Use compression stiffeners:

2 ·30 a b
2
A 66.47 - 50.68
p s
• Tex t ,b,M Aone stiff = 2
3a a w t 2
4b (4b + 1 ) + = 3.95 cm .
30 a~ A
s b - t
bst = fc we = 14 • 3 = 14 · 0

Q/bolt
-I =-
3 X 3 (

ve
3 .
1
2- 30
7. 5 (3.8) 4
X 3 X 9.0

no prying force.
7.5 (3;8) 4
4 X 3.0 4 X 3.0 + 1) + 30 X 3 X 9 X 2.45
X 2.45

l .T
ext,b,M
(1) t st

(2) tst =
= 3.95
1
0 3
14.0 = ·

i63 -
ems.

0.894 ems.

From (1) & (2), take tst = .0. 9 ·ems.

Moment = 8.07 x 3 - 24.21 ton/em
(6) Check Bending of Tension Column Flange:
t. =j24.21x6 = 3~72 ems> 3.7 ems. Min. thickness required to column flange:
p 7.5 X 1.4

t ep = 3. 8 ems.
T a. = tan-1 1
S

(5) Check of Crippling:

If areas are compared: tfc a: 0. 4 j 30 x 2. 4 x 0. 98 = 3. 36 ems. (Unsafe).

k = column fillet length

Use 2 tensioning stiffeners having the same cross section
k =2 tfc =2 x 2.6 = 5.2 ems.
as chosen before (14.3 x 0.9).
I L =2 (2. 5 k + t )
ep + 2.45/cos 2«

Ii L = (2.6 + 2x3.8 + 2x2.Sx5.2)

Resisting area L x t
we
= 36.20 ems. (7) Stability Check of the Corner Yeb:

= 36 . 20.x . Force acting = Thoriz = 63.4 tons

lI = 50.68 ems.
1 .. 4

Resistance = 42.5 x 1.4 x 0.84

I Applied area = Area of beam flange = 49.98 tons.

I = 30 X 2.4 X COS 2«
= 66.47 cm2 ...
Applied area > Resisting area
.I I.
K: Zt1 c
(Unsafe).
Remaining Shear = 63.4 - 49.98 = 13.43 tons.
 . . .CHAPTERS
566 CHAPTERsL
(a) Choose 2 Cover Plates to. Example (5.19):
Resist the Remaining Design the extended end plate moment connection shown in
Force: the figure below.
13.42 = 0.84 X 2 t X (42.5 Solution
- 4 X 2.6)

t = 0.248 ems.
Take t = 0.3 ems. c:::==jfj====f2·4/ sin!l'l/2)
=2-93cm
36
=43·95
(b) Ve Use 2 Diagonal Stiffeners (D) sin 612

Instead of the

F
D
= cos 13 42
·
?f .
= 26.84
Plates:

tons ~{~ Sec. S- S

26;f34 2 L39-9 .1
bst.tst = 1.4 x 2 = 9. 58 ems.

30 1 4
b
st
·= ; · = 14.3 ems
=
N1 -9.177 tons
BH 36 Q 1=2.12tons
Take b
st
= 14.0 ems M,;, 35t.ms

(1) tst = 0.7 ems.

b Straining Actions:
( 2 ) tst = 16.1 = 0.869 ems.
N= Q1 cose / 2 + N sine/ 2
1
= 9.177 tons.·
II From (1) & (2) tst = 0.9 ems. Q = Q1 sin 9/2- N cos 9/2 = 2.121 tons.
1
i
I
Use 2 diagonal stiffeners
(14 X 0.9)
M = 35.0 mt.

II (8) Stiffener {c):

(1) Design of Welds:
- Use butt welds of the excellent type to connect flanges
I = 63,4 X 0.196 = 13.48 to the end plate.
F tons choose 14.0 x 0.9 ems
c 0.92
-Use fillet welds to connect web to the end·plate.
h = 43.95 - 4(2.93) = 32.23 ems
 ..Ji CHAPTER 5 567. 568 CHAPTERS .
2.121 0.045 ems. Neglect . the effect of N (compression).
S = 2' X 32.23 X 0.72
take s smin = 4 mms.
Group (1):
(2) Design of H.S.B: Text,b,M =
(2.a) Approximate Analysis:
30 X 8.765
X :::: 12.72 t < 0.8 x 19.08 tons. O.K.
Tension force = dM = 43.953500
- 2.93 85.324 tons.
Assume we have 2 rows of bolts each4 bolts.
Group (2):
. •. Tension / bolt = 85 · 33 = 10.67 tons. T
ext,b,M
=
1
/
2
x 0.157 x 3o x
18 86
· = 11.1 tons .
Use H.S.B M(22) {10.9) T
all
= 0.8 x 19.08 = 15.26 tons.
< 0.8 x 19.08 tons. O.K.

{2.b) Design of the End Plate:

(3) Check of Shear on Bolts:
tf
L = 3 d:· + -s7in-=e::-/-;;;2:- = 3 X 2.2 + 2.93 2 121
Q /bolt = • = 1.06 tons< P
2 s.
L = 6.6 + 2.93 = 9.53 ems. < 4.93 tons {Safe).

Moment :::: S = 85.324

TL x 9.53 = 101.642 ton. em. (4) Check Effect of Force:
W / bolt = 7.5 ems.
t =
.6 M
p Jb X 1.4 T /bolt= 12.72 tons.
3.811 ems. a = b = 3.3 ems.
let t
p
= 4.0 ems. As = 3.03 , t
p
4.0 ems.

(2.c) Exact .Analysis for H.S.B:

1 --3 1 w t4
IX = 12 X 55.25 X 30ft1 2-
30 a
4 p = T
I
X
= 421635.1 em 3a a ext,b,M
4b (4b + 1 ) +
A
s

Q.= -ve no prying effect.

3500
ft2 = 421635.1 fc

= 0.157.t/em2
.Ji CHAPTER 5 569 570 CHAPTERS
Example (5.20): Use H.S.B. M(22) (10.9)
Repeat the previous example using a flushed end plat.
Tall = 0.8 x 19.08 = 15.26 tons.
Solution

P. - 6.91 tons.
s
(1) Design of Welds:
as before. (2.b) Design of the end Plate:
.T = 3500 / 41.02 = 85.324 tons
(2) Design of the H.S.B:
(2-a) Approximate Analysis: Moment = 85.3~4 ( 2 ·~ 3 + 3.3)

Tension force = =~ d' = 0.85 d = 406.57 t. em

d = 43.95 - 2.93 = 41.02 ems

d' = 0.85 x 41.02 = 35 ems t = 6 X 406.57
ep 30 x 1.4 = 7.62 ems.
• . 3500
Tens1on force = ~ ~ 100 tons.

Assume we have 2 rows of bolts each 4 bolts.

Take t
ep
= .7.7 em

100
Tension / bolt =~ - 12.5 tons. (2.c) Exact Analysis:

Ti = ~~S ~
5
15.6 tons. Ixx = !2 (30} (St. 9s>
3
-· rt--+
++
++
~+
c::m
·- ·--· -·- 1-

4
I
XX
= 350506.97 em + +
Straining Action:
3500 .
M = 35 ..0 m t ::: 350506.97 X 25 " 975
N
1
=- 9.177 tons (comp.) = 0.2594 t/cm .
2
Q
1
= 2.121 tons
(Computed as ~x. 5.19) . 3500
= 350506.97 X lS.09 S
Q N . . 2
= 0.18 t/cm .
a Group (1):
B.f.I· 36
1 . ) X 7.88
Text,b.,M = 2 (0.2594 + 0.18 30
. 4
=12.98 tons < 15.26 tons (Safe)
.JI;cHAPTER s 571 572 CHAPTERS
Group (2): Example (5.21):

Text.b,M = 1/ 2 0.1656 X 30 X 18 · 095

Design the rigid connection shown in the Fig. below.

Solution
= 11.23 tons
< 15.26 tons Safe

(3) Check of Shear on Bolts:

2
Q /bolt= ·~ 21 = 1.06 tons< 6.1 tons (Safe).

Comparing the extended end plate configuration Example 5.19.

ll.r.T. the flushed end plate, we can observe that the thickness
of the end plate is becoming 7.7 ems instead of 5.0 ems, thus .-, Q= 14.0tons Sec. 1 - 1

there are no benefit to use the flushed end plate. ,.

'\ B·f.I. 30
'
M=24.0m.t·
u; inclination.of roof
cosn=0.98
(l.= tan1 115

1- of the H.S.B:
Group (1) :.
= ~-=-
240 0
Tension force'= M
=-::----:::-""""
(30.0 -2.0)
= 85.7143 tons

Assume we have 4 rows each 4 bolts

714
.·. s hear / bolt = 85 16
· = 5. 36 t.oris

Choose H20 ( 10.9 ) where

30.6
P =.4.93 tons . em
.s.
. s.o ~

Group. (2):
2-()4 ~==t==~===ti = 2-0
em
Assume we have 2 rows with 2 bolts each.

shear / bolt !
= 1 = 3. so tons

Choose· M20 ( 10.9 ) where P

s
= 4,93 tons
 573 574 CHAPTER5L
.... CHAPTERS
Example ( 5. 22):
2- Design o:f Welds:
. . Design the rigid corner frame connection shown in {he
- Use k welds to connect the beam :flanges with the end plate.
:figure below.
- Use :fillet welds around the beam web to carry the shear :force. Solution
L.w max = co~ [30 - 4{2)] = ~2.40 ems let i t = 22.0 ems.
1- Design o:f the Top Tie Plate:(C)
PUc)
14 For H.S.B the gross area o:f
s = 2 X 22 X 0.72 ~ 0.43
'.·.•,•
em Use s = 0.5 em.
plate is_utilized •

.3- Design o:f the Splice Plate: 2400

Tension :force = 30 - 2
For H.S.B, the gross area: o:f splice plate is utilized.
= 85.714tons.
A.
gross
= 30 X t t = thickness o:f pia:te PUb)

30 X t X 1.4 = 85.714. t
p
= 3085.714
X 1.40
= 2 . 04 ems

Get t = 2.04 ems let· it.= 2.2_cms. let. it = 2.2 ems. Q =14·0 Tons
B·F·I-30
H =24·o m.t
4- Design o:f Welds Connecting. Splice· Plate w1· th .Co 1 umn: Take the same thickness :for

L = 30 ems plates a, b and c.

1
2- Design o:f H.S.B:
I IT I r
6 6 6 3
30-1.2- 2(2.04) Group (1):
'L2 = 2 l-G
Using 4 rows o:f bolts each 1·2
= 12.36 ems let i t = 12.0 ems L h ..! 4 bolts. 30
L3 = 30.6 - 4(2.04) 85.714 .
em

Q /_bolt = · = 5.36 tons.

= 22~44 ems let i t = 22.6 ems 16
Choose M22 (10.9) P
s
= 6.1 tons
Lw m;:uc = 2 X 22 + 30 + 4(l2)
> 5.36 O.K.
= 122 ems
Group (2):

Ge t s
W = 122S5.714
~=---~--
X 0. 72
= 0.97 em
Assume that the shearing :force Q (14 tons) acts at center line
of the. H. S, B. group (2).

5- · Crippling , . shear resistance. · o:f Using 4 bolts:

corner Wf!b. , as previous examples. 1
Q / bolt = :~ 0 = 3.5 tons.

Choo~e M20 (10.9) P = 4.93 tons > 3.5 t Sa:fe.

s
 ._.CHAPTER 5 575
3- Design of the Cleat Web Plate:
576 CHAPTERS . . .
a- Straining Action: b- Properties of Area:
2
(22)
Q = 14.0 tons Awelds = 2 X 22 X S 2 (welds) =
X
S X
3
2 2·4 2·4
M = 14(2 + 2.4) = 61.6 t.cm ·~ r 1 ,. 2 3
A
w = 44 s em 2
X
= 161.33 s em
i ..
Max. ·height of plate = 30cos
- 2(4)
a.
I
I .. c- Check of Stresses:

(a = tan -1 1/ )
5
= 22 . 44 em .
, ...
I
I
Sec (1-1)

q = 44
_!!_ = 0.318 t/cm2
l+ // s s
b- Check of Shear:
qall
. .
=
0. 84 t/cm
2
qL
= 161.33
61.6
s
= 0.382
s
t/cm2

0.84 = 3/2 X _g__

Area

0.84. = 3/2 X
14
22. t
Get t = 1.136 em Get s = 0.69 em (a)
p
let t
p
= 1..2 em {a) Sec (2-2)
0.318 t / 2
q//= - s - em
c- Check of Bending:
2
F
b
= 1.4 t/em .
fL = -0.382
s-
t/
em
2

M 3
(i~)
= ~ J3
1
1.4
-z- X
2
X
=- t
12 p ·= 80.67 t
p
em
3
fe (0.318)
2
+ (0.382)
2

61.6
1.4 = 80.67 t
Get t
p
= 0.55 em
= 0.79 t/cm
2
Gets= 0.848 em (b)
p
let t = 0.6 em (b)
p
Hence: take s = 0.9 em
From (a) & (b) take t
p
= 1.2 em

s- Check of crippling and shear resistance of corner web as

.! 4- D~sign of Fillet Welds: previous Examples .
'
a- Straining Action:
Q = 14.0 tons M = 61.6 t.cm
 . . . CHAPTERS 577 578 CHAPTERS
Example {5.23):
Sec (2-2}
Design the rigid apex frame connection sh·own in Fig.
s around web = 1.4 em
Solution
s around flanges = 1.8 em

I !_ (32.74) 3 X 1.4 X 2
XX 12
2
+ 30 X 1.8 X 2 X (22.57)

=i2·6S 2

'I
4B4cm 1·4 ems
(2·M:OS«) I
XX
+ 11.65
= 90745. 1
X 1.8
4
em ·
X 4 X (18.12)
==
2 2
( 42·5 kos e>< l 2500
ftA= -I-·- X
(23.47) = 0.647 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm (Safe}

L Sec. s- s
=1Hs (2) Design of H.S.B.:
(2.a) Approximate
XX

An~lysis:

Assume we have 2 rows of 4 bolts each.

i. Tensipn force {Horizontal) = 61.44 t.

{1) Design of the Welds:

)D Force / bolt = 61 844 = 7.68
let s around web = 14 mm
--· Try H.S.B. M (10.9) = 9.9 tons .
Sec {1-1) 16
Tension force (Horizontal)
Tall = 0.8 x 9.89 = 7.91 tons. O.K.
= 43.342500
- 2.65
~

= 61.44 tons.

Length of welds around flange = 30 .+ 2 ( 3 0 - 1.4 ; 2x2.65)

(2.b) Design of the End Plate:
Tension (H.z.)

Moment =8TL
= 61.44

tf
tons.
[ T

=3

[·k
= 30 + 2 x 11.65= 53.3 ems .. L d + 2 s + ~

61.44 / cos a 3 X 1.6 + 2 X 1.8 + 2.65

s required = 53.3 X 0.72 = 1.63 em t . -r
= 11 . OS ems . · •. . Tfcose
. ·.Takes= 1.8 em
 ...,CHAPTERS 579 580 CHAPTERS
{2.c) Exact Analysis for
=j = j6 ~ 84. 864
3
6 M. H.S.B.:
tp b.x 1.4 ~ x 1.4
fc
= 3.4a2 ems· Take t = 3.5 ems
I
XX
= ((54.84) 3 X 30)/12 3.1
2-65
p 4·8
4
(2.c) Exact Analysis for H.S.B.: I
XX
= 412318.05 em

Ixx = ~2 3
(53.44J x30 2500
ftl = 412318.05 27.42
X
= 3a1539.37cm4 . 2 4·6
= 0.1663 t/cm 2.65
4·8
2500 3.0
ft1 = 3a1539 .. 37 26 · 72 2500
X.
ft2·= 41231a.05 X
18 • 295 ft1

2
= 0.1751 t/cm2
= 0. 11093 t/cm

2500
:ft2 = 3a1539.37 x· 18 · 795 =
·Group (1):
T
ext,b,M
= (0.1751+0.1232)
2
X 30 X 7.925
- 4-
=a.a65 .t > 7.91
·Unsafe
Group (2):
(3) Check the Effect of Force:
T = ------,
0.1232 X 18.795 30
. ext,b,M 2
.-----~ x ~ = a.6a > 7.91 Unsafe. a = 3.0 em b P/bolt = 9.49 tons
A
.s
= 2.45 em2 Y/bolt = 7.5 em t =3. 7 em
Use M20 / 10.9
4
1 wt
{2.b) Design of the End Plate: 2
30 a
L =3 d · + 2 s + tf/cose =3 x 2 + 2 x t.a + 2.65 = 12.25 ems p = . T ext, b ,M
3a a
4b (4b + 1) +
M = 61.44
..a:H~
,.,nr ,.
X 12.25 A
a = 94.08 t.cm s

t
=r X 94.0a
a = 3.67 em P = -ve no prying force.

Take t = 3.7 em
 582 CHAPTERS·
CHAPTERS 581
. 2500 ·_.. . . = 31.8 tons
Example (5.24): Tension force (hori:z;ontal) = ( 4J.;:Z3~;~+' 3~ ••"' •2.65) ·
Design a rigid apex frame connection using haunches. The
connection is subjected to Moment = 25.0 m.t. 31.8 / cos a = 0 _84 em
S:::: 0.72 X 53.3
Solution
Sec· (2-2)
s around the web :::': 6 mm

(J = 0.85 d s around the flanges = 10 mm

d = 43.34+38-2.65 = 78.9

!,........__---, :::::2·65 I
XX
= ~
12
1 . 3
(70. 74) X 2 X 0.6
· .
.· 2
-'l·34cm i- 30 X 1.0 X (41.17)

~ ..___,,..._._., =42·65 . ~ 2-~ 11.65 X 1.0 X

2
(37.52) _x 4
4
= 202698. 64 em

M 2500
Sec. S - s ftA =--I- y =. 202698.64
XX.
2
X 41.67 - 0.514 t/cm
The Height of Haunch: .< o. 72
42.5 - 2 X 2.6 37.3 ( 2) Design of the H. S. B.·:
h =
cos a = cos a = 38.04 em
(2.a) Approximate Analysis:
Take h = 38.0 em
= 37. 37 ·'tons
T/COS· o<
(1) Design of Welds:
Sec (1-1) T1~--~~+r~~ T / bolt. =-374•-37 =· · 9 · 34 · t o ns
Use H.S.B. M20 (10.9) where
. . lowerbolt
Length of welds around the tension
=
tonsT/.005 ~---·
c~;:,~-~-rr,
-
T 9.34/~L 8 = 11.68

-
req •

Flange = 30 + 2 [3o - 1.4 ; 2 x 2.65)

(2.b) Design of End Plate: -. --------- . .

= 53 . 3 em t
L = 1. 5 d + s + -c---co_s_a
 CHAPTERS 583 584 CHAPTERS
(3) The Use of Transverse
L = 1.5 X 2 + 1.0 + --~2~·~6~--
2 cos 11.31° Stiffeners:
=
5.326 em

M= ~.L = 31.8 x 5.326 = 169.37 ton em

4.92 ems Take t 5.0 ems

(2.c) Exact A!l~lysis:

I

I
XX
1
= (88.34) 3 X (30)
..
I

F sin 2 0{
... 4 .-·
= 1723503.6 em s
2·65
. ,.
2500
' Horiz.Tension applied force= 37.37 tons.
ft1 = 1723503.6 44.17

= 0.06407 t/cm2
X

$ I $ 38 F ::: 37.37
cos a
= 38. 13 tons.
t.cm
1
2500
ft2 = 1723503.6 X 30 · 52 1 - 2·65
1- Force acting normal to the beam = F
c
= F sin 2 a

= Force in Stiffener (c)

= 0.0443 t/cm
2 20·35

• I • ,_ 1-
I2
F c e: 16.45
. tons.

Group (1):
1
~·
I $ 3
! - 2-65
-- 2
Hence choose 2 stiffeners (c) 14.0 x 0.9 ems to overcome
Text,b,M = 2 (0.06407 + I totally the induced force (F 16.45 tons).
30·0 ems
0 . 0443) x 13.65.x 30
2
= 11.1 tons
< 15.43 x 0.8 = 12.34 tons O.K.

Group (2):
T
ext,b,M
=_!:.X
2
0.0443 X JO X 30.52 = 10.1403 tons< 12.34 tons
Safe
 . . . CHAPTERS 585
~xample (5.25): 586 CHAPTERsL
Design the connection of Example 5.3La using a haunch of No need to continue the design, the number of bolts and
slope 1:2. their configuration is exactly the same as example 5.31. ·only
the end plate will have the following dimensions:
Solution
h = 92,06 ems, b = 30 ems, t = 5.0 ems.

(3). The Transverse "c"!

_i At the abrupt change of the beam cross section the lower
,2-65
flange of the beam will be subjected to the force:

faFm
~~+ _i F = 30.38
cos e
= 33.98 - 34 tons.

lim
,2-65

The component acting normal to the beam flange is:

_i. Applied force =F sin (a. + e) = 34 X 0.11 = 26.25 tons.
'2.91

Hence F(c)= 26.25 tons.

cos e = o.a9
(1} Design of Velds: Use 2 stiffeners 14.0 x 0. 9 ems · , to overcome the total
cos tt = 0.98 induced force F(c} = 26.25 tons.
Take the same size of welds as Example S.31.a.
Comparing examples 5.31 and 5.32, i t is evident that for
Size of welds around the flan~es = tO mms.
apex connections it is sufficient to use a haunch with a
Size of welds around the web = 6 mms. slope 1:2.

(2) Design of H.S.B.:

(2.1} Approximate Analysis:

Horiz. Tension force =

= 30.38 tons ..
·~ CHAI'TER 5 587 588 CHAPTER 5 a,.
Example (5.26): 2500
C a! T _ ( 2 . 65 +2 • 61 = S0.74tons
Design the rigid apex frame connection shown in the figure 42. S / cos a + 10 2
below using haunches, and splice plates.

Solution
s = so. 74/'CO~ a.= 1<. 34~ em .let it
:53.31~~ ·.()... 7~ )·--- ". ·---~ "'•
=.,1. 40.
\'t
,.1
em
-,·::

. . .
(~) Design o£ Splice Plates:
For H.S.B. the gross area o£ the splice plate is utilized.
M = 25.0 t.m.

Total width o£ the 3 plates = 30 + 2(30 - 1.4 - 2 x 2.6)

14.0 t. 2

30 + 2 .;x: 11.7 = 53.40 ems

SO ems t =
53.4
so.74,
1.4
= 0.68 em. ~el:-e Tens~on =·$0.74 tons.
p X
a part from B·F·I 42 tn'J
(1) Design o£ ~elds:
lett - o:scm~
p

(3) Design of H.S;B.~

a- Fillet ~elds Around ~eb: :.
Using:;4 rows each 2 bolts M20
It is designed to transmit the shearing force to the end
50.74 .
plate. Q /~ bolt =
~ =. 6~?4 tons . ; '··

..
1
weld max = 42.5 - 4 X 2.6
--c-o=-s--::a--- a = tan -1 1
S Use M16 (10. 9) ~ere P ·- (doubie shear)i'= 4.93 ~t2
S·,'
J

,:~.

= 32.74 ems t· :,.~:,.s~hons.

~··

Q / bolt < P (Sa£eh',.

s
14
s = 2 x 32.74.x 0.72 = 0 • 296- em let i t = 4 mm.

b- Fillet ~elds Around Comp Flanges: .. s '

The comp force is transmited £rom the £lange to end
plate by contact. For conservative solution let this
transmission be through the welds.
Sec. S - S
1
w max = 30 + 2 (30 - 1.40 - 2 X 2.65)
2
= 53 .. 3 ems '., (2. 6/cosa:)
 CHAPTER 6

SEMI-RIGID CONNECTIONS

Introduction:
In chapters 4 and 5 the ideally flexible and rigid
The fastening elements were
connections have been analyzed.
either subjected to concentric and/or eccentric shear and/or
The behavior was ideal and thus the
flexural moment.
interaction of the structural members and the · stability
phenomenon correspond to the behavior previously outlined in

Volume (1).

inust include the

A ·· realistic · structural analysis
performance of .flexural connections.. The real ·behavior of a
connection will probably influence the straining actions and the
stability of the different structural elements. comprising the

structure under consideration.

In fact, the conventional analysis of steel frames,

considers that the beam-to-column as well as the base
connections are either perfectly hinged (ideal flexible
connection) or perfectly rigid. Although these assumptions are
not· consistent with the actual connection behavior, but their
. ·. •"

use will probably simplify the analysis.

Extensive experimental and theoretical ·res·earch have been

Test
carried out· on beam~to-column and baSe· connections.
results have shown that even the most flexible connections
possess some ability to resist some rotational movement, while
This leads to the
rigid connections have slight flexibility.
recognition of a class of connections termed «semi-Rigid

Connections»,
~CHAPTER6 591 592 CHAPTER()L

6.2 . .The Moment-Rotation Curve:

The maximum strength, the stiffness and the deformation
capacity of a connection can be obtained if its moment~rotation

curve is available. The term rotation is used to des}gnate the

relative rotation .(e) between the elastic lines of the connected
strtictural elements as illustrated in figure 6.1.a.

· Fig. 6.1. b sho.ws the classification · of the connections Type 3 Connection e =a, - e2
regarding the moment-rotation curve. The classification is
(a)
comprising the following three types: Type 2 Connection

Type (1) Corresponds to: Idealy Hinged Connection

The ideally rigid connection where the relative rotation e
0·0 Relative Rotation" e"
is zero (a = 0). while the induced end. moment corresponds to
(b)
the fixing end moment (Mf) of. an ideally fixed structural beam
eiement.
Fig. 6.1. Moment-Rotation Relationship
Type (2) Corresponds to:
} . The
The ideally flexible connection where the end moment is fixing momen t MF a s indicated by the moment
is an intermediate situation where the
zero (Mf=O) while the induced relativ~ rotation e corresponds to semi-rigid connection
degree of restraint
the. beam characteristics (i.e . .span, loading, inertia, ... etc). induced end moment M is depending on the
3
.:. ·~ . (i.e. degree of rigidity) of the connection .
Type (3):
In practice, nevertheless the two previous ideal types .3. Moment-Rotation Curves of Typical connections:
6
exist. A rig:td connection is.. always
.
exerting
'_.' . .
varying ~ ..
degr~es" of For the design o f a Sem].
.
• -ri_gid connection the moment
6 2 and 6.3 show a typical
partial restraint while a flexible connection is to some degree rotation curves are neede_d. F J.gs. ·
r a variety of weided ,and
a moment resistant connection. These -intermediate situations range of moment-rotation curves fo
lead- to what we ~11 «semi -Rigid,~ConnectioQs» •. . bolted connections respectively.

However, a typical rigid connection (Type 1) would carry an The (M-6) curves are generally non-linear over most of the
end moment (M ) about ~0 percent or more of the ·conventional . h' often an initial phase
1 range. However, stiffer connectJ.ons ave .
fixing end moment (~). On the other hand, a typical flexible which can be approximated to a straight line.
connection may have to resist about 20 percent or less of the
. . . CHAPTER6
594 CHAPTER 61.,.
593

Beams-18WF

0 o.oos 0.010 0.015 o.o2o 9 ·

Fig. 6.2. (M-a) Curves for Typical

Welded Connections

Stiff connections such as Tee-stub, extended, end-plate and

fixed base connections are those where the m~ment is resisted by
components carrying axial loads.
The corresponding axial
deformations under service loads are generally small. On the
other hand, flexible connections such as flanges cleats, web
cleats, flexible end-plates and hinged base connections resist
forces by components subjected to bending and thus they possess (h)
higher rotational capacity.
Fig. 6.3; (M-9) Curves for Typical
Bolted Connections
 596 CHAPTER6
.._CHAPTER6 595
The polynomial_ has the form:
6.4. Methods of Prediction of (M-e) Curve:
3
6.4.1. Prediction Using Mathematical Expressions: e = C1 (aM) + C (aM)
2
+ c 3 (aM)S 6.2

Different attempts have been made to describe the (M-e)

curves. the experimental results have been utilized 'to compute where c 1 ,c2 and c3 =curve fitting constants.
mathematical expressions capable to recognize the general a = the standardization factor.
features of the (M-e) curve. The different forms of the (M-e)
curve can be classified as follows: (c) Ramberg and Osgood F'unction:
Ang and Morris (18) replaced the polynomial function
(a) The Linear Representation:
of Frye and Morris by a form of a. function given by Ramberg and
Packer (16) represented the (M-6} curve by the initial
qsgood. The moment rotation expression had tqe following form:.
tangent slope which leads to the notation of the semi-rigid
connection by the connection factor (K ), defined as the angle
. s 6.3
change per unit moment:

where: e and· [a M] are as indicated in Fig. 6.4, while the

M = K
s
.e 0 0

value of n controls the shape of the curve.

i.e. K
s = aM 6.1
aM

This model overestimates the connection stiffness at n =n,

finite rotations. n .= n2
laHJo ~:::::::::----- n = n3
(b) 1be Polynomial Function:
Frye and Morris (17) proposed a polynomial function to
describe the (M-e) curve of several types of connections. The
method of least squares has been utilized to compute the
polynomial constants which were written in terms of
dimensi·onless factors.These constants depend on the size
parameters of the connection.
L---~----~--------~---------9
9o 29o
The main disadvantage of this model is that the first
derivative indicating the connection stiffness, Fig. 6.4. Ramberg-Osgood Function for
may be
discontinuous and/or possibly negative, which is physically Moment-Rotation Curves
impossible.
 . . . . CHAPTER6 597
598 CHAPTER6L
6.5. Behaviour and. Analysis of Nonrotating Supports Structural
Systems with Semi-Rigid Connections: excessive material, while a semi-rigid connection would result
Complexities attendant ~pon finding ahd using the probably in maximum m'onients· ailowing. a reduction in beam
appropriate M-e curves. have made the methods of analysis too material.
cumbersome for routine design. Yhether savings can be achieved
The optimum situation will be that of a semi-rigid
by using semi rigid rather than rigid or flexible connections is
connection permitting a sufficient end rotation to balance end
a question that has never been settled. In the following 2
and mid span moments to wl /16 as shown in Fig. 6.6.
paragraphs an analysis Of ·semi-rigid connections is presented in
j ..
order to understand the general connection behaviour. al ~ t i j t t t t t t t ! i lb
l
Fig. 6.5, illustrates the simplest application which
consists to consider a prismatic uniformly loa,ded beam element - - - · Rigid
framing into columns ·which are so stiff relative to the beam Flexible
that they may be considered nol)rotating. Semi-Rigid

Fig. 6.6. Moment Diagram~

The question which arise now: « 'llhat is the percent of

rigidity of the semi -rigid connection which will allow some
' ))
support rotation to change the end moment .
{a) Configuration {b) {M-e) Curve
to answer this q\lestion the term Rigidity ratio "R" will be
Fig. 6.5'ASemi-Rigid.Connection with used , it is lOOtimes the ratio obtained by dividing the fixed-end
Nonrotating Supports moment into the actual moment capable to minimize the structural
element material~
If the beam is rigidly connected to the vertical columns,
the induced elastic end moment is twice the mid span moJilent In order t.o present an analysis sufficient to extend a
· (· M_ :. I . . wf · wl 2 . J . ·· useful theory for the system, consider as a first approximation
. ·Din ""ID .:: ( 12 ) I ( . 24 · ) . . Si,milarly for · flexib1e
that the {M-0) curve for the connection· is linear as has been
bealn-:to-column connections the_mid span·moment is maximum while previously outlined in equation 6.1. { L e. M = K .0 )
s
the end one is zero. Both extreme situations will lead to
.McHAPTER6 599 600 CHAPTER6 . . .

Using the slope-deflection method, the beam line equation K

s
of ·the beam structural element shown in Fig. 6. 5. a can be R =
written in the following form:
6.8
M = M _ 2Eie 6.4 Hence: K
R 2EI
F L s = t-a·T
where:
It is to be noticed that three different situations arise
according to the following:
MF = the end moment of a beam fixed at both ends.
(a) The Optimum Configuration where the end and mid span
2
For an ideally rigid connection e = 0, thus M = ~· while moments are balanced to ·wi / 16 is corresponding to a rigidity
for an ideally flexible connection M = and hence the end 2 2
0 w1 wl
ratio "R" equal to 0. 75 ( i.e. 0. 75 x
12
= 16
) , while the
rotation can be Gomputed as follows:
connection rigidity K can be computed using equation (6.8) as
s
follows:
e =e s ::: simple beam end slope
6EI
=-r
MF.L
e = 2EI 6.5 (b) The Configuration where the End Moment Governs the
Design:
2
The actual end moment "M" must satisfy equations (6.1) and This means that the end moment is greater than wl /16
(6.4). Eliminating e from these two equations we get: and the corresponding ·rigidity ratio "R" exceeds consequently
0.75.

~ For a given beam element whose· properties are known

M = ---=~ 6.6
{1+2:~ ( i. e. I, Z, L and w) , the corresponding end moment M is:
s

(a)
Using the definition previously utilized for the rigidity
ratio (R), the following relation can be computed: where: Fb = allowable bending stress.

ZX = modulus section.
6.7

Hence equating (M) from equation (6.7) into equation (6.6), Hence, using eqUation 6.7, get the corresponding rigidity

the rigidity ratio (R) can be written in the following form: ratio R:
. ~CHAPTER6 601 602 CHAPTER6L
M force (T) is transmitted to the column flange via a top splice
R = MF (b)
plate, while the ·flange beam compressive force (C) is
2 transmitted via a seat angle. On the other hand the end
where: MF = Uwl . M as computed using equation (a).,
reactions (shearing forces) are transmitted via the· seat angle.
The corresponding
connection stiffeness {k ) can be
s
computed using equation (6. 8). Thus the moment-curve and the
beam line equations will follow equations (6.1) and (6.4)
respectively.

(c) The Configuration where the Mid-Span Moment Governs the

Design:
Using equation (6.7) the mid span moment is:

(S·SI
(c) eccentricity

i.e. - 3
R-2 (d)

Hence: (using Eq. 6. 7) Fig. 6.7

-r-
2EI ( USing
. Eq. .6 . 8) 6.6.2. Flexibility of·the Connection:
In order .to obtain a semi-rigid connection, the top plate
M = Ks .9 (using Eq .6. 1) must . be capable · to elongate such that to provide the
corresponding end beam rotation 9. Fig. 6. 8, illustrates the
Refer to example (6.1).
deformed shape of tile semi-rigid connection. The beam is
assumed to rotate about the top of the seat angle as follows:
6.6. Design of the Steel Components of Welded Semi-Rigid
Connections: h
9 =- 6.9
6.6.1. Configuration: e

Fig. 6. 7, illustrates a typical welded semi-rigid

9 = the angle of rotation.
connection. . The flexural end moment (M) is replaced by two
h the beam height.
equal and opposite forces (T = C = ~- The flange beam tensile
e = the corresponding top plate elongation.
~CHAPTER6 603
604 CHAPTER6
If the assumption of linear connection behaviour is
6.7. Design of Semi-Rigid Connections with Rotating Supports:
satisfied, the top pll:J.te must remain elastic.
The analysis.of a general stru~tural system with semi-i-igid
connections need a matrix approach. This matrix analysis is
Hence: 6.1()
presented in section 6.8.

where: A = cross sectional area of top plate = bt Here, a simple situation is discussed to illustrate some
M aspects of semi-rigid connections incorporated in a symmetrical
T=ii
.... structural system with rotating supports . For purpose of
E = young's modulus.
simplicity consider the following assumptions:
Equating (6.10) in (6.9) to eliminate "e" we get:
(a) The structural beam element AB is symmetrically loaded.

6.11 (b) The semi-rigid connections · at (A) and (B) are

identical.

(c) The upper and lower ends of column sections are assumed
to rotate the same angle.

Fig. 6.9. Case of Rotating Supports

Fig. 6.8 Fig. 6.9, illustrates a part of a structural frame system

with the corresponding properties (Eic ' Eic • Eib) and
1 2
Refer to e~ample (6.2). whose dimensions are (L, h , h ).
1 2
 . . . CHAPTER6. 605 606 CHAPTER6
Fig. 6.10.a shows the slope of the left end of the beam
elastic line . (ab) ~ with respect to the horizontal, while the
slope. of. the coliunn elastic line with respect to the vertical is M
1:1 c • The rot~tion within the semi-rigid connection will be

Applying as has ·been previously outlined in section 6. 5,

the linear moment-rotation curve may be written in the following
·form:

6.1? eb
Cb>
The beam line equation of section 6.5 will remain the same, -!r'ec
e
M>~ )M
only is to be replaced. by ab since it is the total end beam ht
rotation that controls its end moment. Hence:
- 1.....ec
~
l-ee
~Mz
6.13 hz
(d)
_. 1-0c
The actual end moment (M} must satisfy both relations
(6.12) and (6.13) as illustrated in Fig. 6.10.b. Eliminating eb Mz/Elcz
from these two equations we get: (C)

6.14 Fig. 6.10

where:
6.15

The column rotation {e ) can be computed in terms of M and

c
the coltimn properties. Fig. 6. 10. c shows the corresponding I
c1
. M where: K = -·-
cl h
columns (EI) diagrams where ec can be deduced according to the 1

following:
 . .CHAPTER6 607 608
structural systems with . "d
semi-r1g1 connections. In references
Using relation 6.15, the columns moments can be ~ritten in
the following form: [t9], T2o]' [2t], . [22], [23] and [24] the different results
~egarding this program have been published.
= 2EK .e 6.16,
c2 c
In the follow1ng sections a ma t r1·x approach is presented.
From the joint equilibrium as shown ip fig. 6.10.d get:
The analysis is capable to take the effect of rigidity of the
M"' Mel + Mc2
connection into consideration.
M -= 2Eec (Kcl + Kc )
2
Hence: 6. 8. 1 • Definition and Assumptions:
M "' 2Ee [ K
c c 6.17 1. The semi-rigid connection is represented by a
torsiona 1 Spr1·ng having a stiffness "K n as shown in Fig.
s
Eliminating e c from equations (6.14) and.(6.17) we get: 6.11.a.

M = Mf- 2~ Mf/
lis
+ ~1
.c 6.18
where: Ks as has been previously given in Equ. 6.1:

M
Substituting· the value of (K ) of equation 6.8 into
K
s =e 6.1
s
equation (6.18) and solving for (M) we get:.
e = Relative rotat1·on between arms (1-2) and (2 -J) as
illustrated in Fig. 6.ll.a.
v
Refer to examples (6.3) and (6.4). + ve Signs
__ 2 3
1_6''--- 9
6.8. Analysis of Plane Frames with Semi-Rigid Connections using L--+----u
the Matrix Approach:
(a) Idealization of Semi- (b) Sign Convention
In the previous paragraphs simplified methods of analyses
rigid Connections
have been Utilized for symmetrically loaded. structures. However
for more complicated structural systems the matrix approach is
to be utilized. Fig. 6.11

However since 1978 an extensive-program of research work was 2. Regard 1ng

. (U ' V) the connection is assumed to be rigid,
i.e (U, V) just to the left o f nod e .. 2.. are the same as those
conducted by the steel division of the Faculty of Engineering
just to the right.
Cairo University regarding . the analysis of the different
 . . . CHAPTER6 609 610 CHAPTER6L
3. The sign convention for U,V, and a is as ~hown in Fig.
6. u. b.

4. The (M-e) curve of the. semi-rigid connection is (a)

assumed to·be linear (i.e. M = K . e)
s

.5. The rigidity ratio "R" of a connection is computed by

(b l (c I
dividing the actual end moment by the fixed end moment as
previously outlin~d in section 6.5, where:
~¢~ ~V~·O
IdI

6. The stiffness "Ks " is computed according to section Fig. 6.12

(6.5) where:

R 2EI Table 6.1

Ks = 1-R x -r- 6.8

6.8.2. Shape Functions of a Frame Structural Element with

Semi-Rigid Ends:

Ignoring the shear deformations, the differential

1 - R
equation governing the static bending of a uniform structural 3 1 )V
element is: ([)(3- R -R 1
1 2

= 0 6.20 R (1 - R )
2 1
- 3- R1 - R2 e2
The general solution is:

3
¢ (x) =a x + b x2 + c x + d

The corresponding displacements are illustrated in Fig.

6.12. If we define by "R " and "R 2 " the rigidity ratios of the
1
. . J."d connections at both. end s, then the relative rotations
semJ.-rJ.g
~CHAPTER6 611 612 CHAPTER6
e 1 • e 2 and the end displacements v1 , e 1 , e according to ( 19]
2
are as given in table (6.1). .Ps6 (O) .
0·
d <Ps6
li"X
(0) = e1

The shape functions .pi (x) [i = 2, 3, s,. 6J can be computed

.ps6 (L) = 0;
d <Ps6
(IX
(L) = a2
6. 21. d

using the expressions of table 6. 1 and applying the following

boundary conditions:

- Regarding V = 0 Using the above boundary conditions, the shape functions

.. · 1 the boundary conditions are:
are as follows:

6.22.a
.ps2 (L) = 0;

Regarding e1 =0 the boundary conditions are:

6.22.b
d .Ps3
.ps3 (0) = 0·
' ~
(0) =e1
+ 3x
6. 21. b L
d .ps3
.ps3 (L) = 0; (["""X (L) = e2
6.22.c

- Regarding v2 = 1.0 the boundary conditions are:

d .p
.Pss (0) = 0; . sS
(["""X (0) =a 1 6.22.d
d .p " 6. 21. c
ss I

.Pss (L) = 1; (["""X (L) =a

2 6.8.3. The Stiffness Matrix:
To form the stiffness matrix the corresponding stiffness
- Regarding 62 = 1.0 the boundary conditions are: coefficients can be computed using the following relation:
. . . CHAPTER6 613 614 CHAPTER6 . . . .

EA .. EA

r·\~
0 0 0 0
.k •.
l.J
= 6.23
0
12EI 6EI 12EI 6EI
0 -3- 0 12 01 0 -3- 0 12
L L 2°2
where: L

k. . = the stiffness influence coefficient which is 6EI 4EI 6EI 2EI (3

l.J 0 0 - ~0
[sMJ 01 011 L2 1 L
defined as; the force corresponding to coordinate
6x6
"i"due to a unit displacement of coordinate "j". 6.25

EA EA
II 0 0 0 0
e 5 i(X) =the second derivative of the shape function for a L
beam element whose ends are semi-rigid Eq. (6.22).
12EI
0 0 12 - 6EI
-o 0
12EI
-3- 0 12
6EI
- - o
" L2 1 L L2 2
e.(X) =the second derivative of the shape function for a
J
beam element with rigid ends.
6EI 2EI (3 6 EI 4EI
0 02 0 ---0 0 22
E = Material modulus of elasticity. L L2 2 L

1 = Cross-sectional second moment of area. Where the c:onstants (3. 0 1' 02• 0 11' 0 22. 0 12 are as
defined below.

On the other hand the stiffness coeffici·ents associated

(R1). (R2)
with axial deformations in a beam element can be computed as (3 =
follows:

f
1 (R1) (R2)
k ••
l.J
= AE ~~:
l.
(X) / . (X) dx
J
6 .. 24
01 = 02 = 3-R -R
1 2
6.26
0
(R ). (3 - R ) (R J. (3 - R )
1 2 2 1
Hence the stiffness mairix for a beam element whose ends
011 = 0 22 = 3-R -R
1 2
are semi -rigid connections taking· the. axial deformations into
consideration will take the following form:
 615 616 CHAPTER6
Stiffness Matrix in Global Coordinates:
The ·element stiffness matrix previously mentioned in where· [o] and [al are the nodal displacements in local
section 6.8.3 is referenced to the local coordinate axes, while and global coordinates respectively.
the coordinate axes for the whole structure are know~ as global
axes. The transformation between the . global and local Substituting [P] and [o] from Equs. (6.27) and (6.28)
coordinates according to Fig. 6. 13 can be generated using the into the stiffness matrix referred to local axes we get:
classical transformation matrix [T] according to the following:
6.29
6.27

where:

It can be verified that the transformation matrix [T] is an

1
orthogonal matr;ix, that is [T] - = [T]T .

Yg Hence we get:

> - - -...Xg 6.30

i.e.
Zg
where

Fig. 6.13. Frame Element Showing the Nodal Forces in Local

(Xi, Y1 , 2 1 ) and Global (Xg' Yg' Zg) Axes
= the stiffness matrix referenced to the global
system of coordinates.
Where '[P] and [li] are the vectors of the element nodal
.forces in local and glob?l coordinates respectively. 6. 8. 5. · ·
F1x1.ng End Ac t··1.0ns for · a Structural element with
Semi~Rigid Ends:
Similarly we get: The fixing end actions for the structural element with

semi-rigid ends shown in Fig. 6.14 are derived in [2o] and are
6.28 as follows:
. . . . CHAPTER6 617 618 CHAPTER6
where:

1 - R2
= r2 =
2~

a.
1
= 2 r
2
+ 1 a.2 =2 r1 + 1
~

MF( I·
=

lJ MF2 L

xl- ~t-----------~)-x2 6.8.6. Assembly of the Overall Stiffness and .Load Matrices of

t~ ~ the Structure:
For each member of the structure we can partition its

«r~~----------------~~---«~~~~)MF1
-:,-: -xz
global stiffness matrix [sM] as well as its vector of end
displacements and its vector of internal .end actions, into sub
fy2 .. matrices with dimensions equal to the number of degrees of
freedom at each end of the element. Hence equation (6.30) will
Fig. 6.14 become:

MFl = f3 Ci\-1 (4r2 + 1) - i\-2 (2r ))

2
{
~! }
P
2
= [ ~~-::::~ =~-:::~~] ~-21
;
SM (2,1) : SM (2,2)
{ v
}· 6.32

Mf-2 = 13 Ci\-2 (4r 1 + 1) - i\-1 (2r ))

1 where the sub matrix [sM{1,1)] is of dimension (3x3) and the sub

y1 = y1 6{3 -
-: L CMF1 X r X a. + r2 a. )
vectors {t\} and{~1} of dimension (3xl) as there are 3 degrees
1 1 MF2 X X
2 of freedom at each end of the element.
6.31
y2 = y2 + C6{3 -
(MFl x r
1 X 0:.1 + MF2 x r X a.2) For a member connecting the two joints J and K of the
2
struct'ilre, ·the process of expanding its gl()bal s'tiffness matrix to
x1 = x1
the system (overall) stiffness matrix (S] of dimensionequals to
the total number of degrees of freedom in the system, is done by
x2 = xz allocating the different sub matrices in their corresponding
positions referred .to the global number of the whole structure.
This will be in the following form:
 CHAPTER6 619 620 CHAPTER6
{Ru} and {Rr}. are the load vectors at the unrestrained
J K

J
. .
SR (1, 1) •.. SH (1,2) •••
and at the restrained displacements, respectively.

The problem then reduces to the solution of the first set

[S] =
K SM (2,1} ..• SM (2,2) .•.

A simil.ar expansion can be done to assemble the overall

of equations:

[Suu] r u} + [Sur] t r} = {Ru}

{f•} [5~] r}}

or
load vector for each element. Applying for all the elements of 5
the structure, the final overall stiffness matrix and load
[ uu] {"u} = {" 6.34

vector are formed.

in which [suu] is no longer singular and the problem . can be

6.8.7. Boundary Conditions Regarding the Stiffness and Load
Matrices: solved to obtain the unknown vector of free displacements [ru].
The external equilibrium cannot be fulfilled unless • all The second set of equations can be used to calculate the
rig~d body motions are prohibited by ·sufficient. number of reaction components {Rr} such that:
supports, that will ensure equilibrium of the external appiied
loads. The boundary conditions may occur at points of non-zero
6.35
specified displacements (non-homogeneous). The. process of
considering the boundary conditions into the system of
A more practical way of this process of modification can be
equiliprium equations of the whole assemblage can be inserted by
seen by merging the two sets of equations (6.34) and (6.35) in
partitioning the system of equilibrium equations as follows:
the following form:

where: {ru} is the vector of unrestrained or free displacements

This process of modification is done by modifying first the
is that for specified displacements given as: load vector in case we have non-homogeneous boundary conditions.
Hence all elements of the row and column of [s] corresponding to
6.33 that constraint except the element on the diagonal are made
zeros. The diagonal element will be made unity while the
 CHAPTER6 621 622 CHAPTER6
prescribed value of that displacement ·will be inserted in
To find the end forces of the member referred to the
appropriate position of the load vector.
local system of axes, calculate:
6.8.8. Steps of analysis:
The steps involved in analyzing a structure can be
8. Calculate the vector of end-forces of each member
summarized in the following:
corresponding to case (b), as
1. Prohibit all joint displacements and find the system
of fixed end actions at the two ends of each of the
{P}b = [sM] {g}
9. The total end-forces of any of the members:
members of the structure (case a). For each member
formulate the vector of end forces {P}a corresponding {P} = {P}~ + {P}b
to case {a).
{P}a and {P}b should be referred to the same system of
2. Apply the system of end actions with reversed signs at
axes.
the joints of the structure to get case (b).
3. Formulate the global stiffness matrix for each member
6.8.9. Structure of the Computer Program:
of the structure, then assemble the overall stiffness
matrix of the structure.

"f
4. Formulate the load vector {R}from the resultant of all
(START
external forces at the different joints in case (b). . _i . .
The sub vector of {R} corresponding to any of the
ALL DATA ABOUT GEOMETI!ICAL AND~
joints will be the resultant of all end reactions of OADING CONFIGURATIONS FOR THE FRAME,
all members connected at that joint with reversed PROPERTIES OF CROSS SECTIONS, TYPES OF
signs. All elements of {R} are referred to the global JOINTS AND RIGIDITY RATIOS
system of axes. _!
FOR EACH MEMBER CALCULATE THE GLOBAL
5. Modify the stiffness and. load .. matrices corresponding
to the specified values of geometrical constraints.
STIFFNESS MATRIX USING R 1.0 =
+
6. Solve the system of equilibrium equations to get the ASSEMBLE OVERALL STIFFNESS MATRIX AND
displacement vector lr} referred to the global system LOAD VECTOR

7.
of axes.
For any member connecting the two joints J and K
•
I APPLy THE BOUNDARY CONOITONS I
formulate the global vector of end displacements: •
SOLVE THE MATRIX EQUATION TO GET THE

.
DISPLACEMENT OF THE JOINTS
 CHAPTER6 623 624 CHAPTER 6 a,.
..
FOR EACH ELEMENT CALCULATE END FORCES
Example (6.1):
Find the suitable, semi-rigid connection at (A) and (B)
capable to redistribute the end and mid span moments of the over
•
FOR EACH ELEMENT CALCULATE THE GLOSAL
stressed beam element AB whose section is a B.F.I No. 22.

SEMI RIGID STIFFNESS MATRIX

... Consider the following two cases:
ASSEMBLE OVERALL STIFFNESS. MATRIX AND (a) The end moment governs the design.
LOAD VECTOR (b) The mid span moment governs the design .
•
.I APPLy THE BOUNDARY CONDITONS I A
- --
B
~
... I~
I
l
l
SOLVE THE MATRIX EQUATION TO GET THE I I
l
DISPLACEMENT OF THE JOINTS I I

•
I I
I I 6-0
I · 0·8 t/m2 i ms
FOR EACH ELEMENT CALCULATE THE FINAL ! I
I I
END FORCES AT. BOTH ENDS ( N.F. , S.F. , B.M. ) I I

•
~RITE THE END FORCES FOR EACH MEMBER\ I
I
I
I

0
- ~""
I
J~
c
AND DISPLACEMENT. AT EVERY JOINT
~ .l
•
CALCULATE THE STRESS DUE TO BENDING
L=li-Oms

Solution
MOMENT AND NORMAL FORCE FOR
EACH MEMBER
... 1. Analysis as Rigid Connections:
'\ WRITE THE STRESS \
... Y = 0.8 x 3 = 2.4 t/m'
( STOP) -2
MF = MA = 2.4 12X 8 = 12.8 t
.m
The computer program is written in FORTRAN and Yas adapted
3 4
on the V.M.E - 2900 computer of Cairo University. zX = 732 em • I
X
= 8050 em

f = 12. 8 x 100 = 1.75 t/cm2 > 1.4 the beam is over stressed.
** ** c 732

2. Analysis as Semi Rigid Connections (End Moments Governs):

M=z
X
x F
C
= 732 x 1.4 = 1024.8 t.cm
. . CHAPTER6 625 626 CHAPTER6 . . . .
3 1.4 X 732
R = 1024,8
1280
= O. ~ (Eq. 6.7) R = 2.- 1280 = 0.7

Hence: M = 0.8 x 1280 - 1024 t.cm Hence: M 0.7 x 1280 = 896 t.cm

= 1024.8 = 1·4 t/ 2 K = 0.7 x 2 x 2100 x 8050 = 98.6 x 103 t.cm/rad (Eq. 6.8)
f (o.ld s 800
732 em

M = 98.6 x 103 e (Eq. 6.11

Using Eq. (6.8) determine the connection stiffness K :
s
The corresponding end slope e of the semi-rigid connection
K 0.8 2 X 2100 X 8050 =·16·9 X 3
s = 0 ..2 x 800 10 t. cm/rad e --8-9 -
6
~- = 0.0091 radians
3
98.6 X 10
The (M-e) curve is:
2
wL - 896 = 1024 t .em
3 8
M = 169 x 10 6 (Eq. 6.1)
The corresponding beam line equation and the moment curve
The corresponding end slope a of the semi-rigid connection diagrams are as shown in the fig.ure below.
is:'
M 1024
a=r=---~ = 0.006059 rad
S 16c;J X
Mlt-cml
·The mid span moment is: 11.00 IK=0·81
2
1200
10.24 = 8.96 t.m {K::0·71
1>00

The beam line equation is: 800

M = 1280 600
t.cm (Eq. 6.4)
400 H =12.a - 422-62 e
leq. 6·41
(t.m) 200
-3
e (Radians I X 10
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
3. Analysis as a Semi Rigid Connection {Mid span governs): - 8 I Radians I
Using equation {d) of section 6.5 case (c); get (R):
 628 CHAPTER6
..licHAPTER6 627
Example (6.2):
Design the corresponding welded semi-rigid connection of
example 6.1.

Solution

(a) Case of Maximum Moment at the End (R = 0.8):

(1) Top Plate Dimensions:

M = 1024. 8 t. em e = o.oo6os9 I. L
1rl
= 22
f
h = 22 ems ; b ems 22
ms

1024.8
T = 22 = 46.58 tons

Using :for the top plate steel 37 we get:

2
Using steel 52 for the top plate (f = 2. 1 t/em ), the
46.58 2
A = ~- 33.27 em required length (L) is:

Take b = 22 - 2 X 3.5 = 15 ems A=

46.58
= 22.18 2
em (b = 15 ems, t = 1.5 em)

33.27
Hence: t = -ys--- 2.218 ems take t = 2.3 ems L = = 133.89 ems
Applying in Eq. 6.11 get / L: If special steel alloys are utilized for the top plate (f =
2 2
A.E.e.h 6.4 t/cm ), hence the length (L) is reduced as follows:
M

= 205.3 ems (excessive) 46.58

A =
6:4 = 7.27 (b = 10 ems, t = 0.8 em)

The required length is excessive and generally is 2

10 X 0.8 X 2100 X 0.006 X 22
considered impracticable. The alternative is to use high L = = 47.6 ems (take 48 ems)
strength steel :for the top plate.
 .... CHA.PTER6 629 6,30 CHAPTER6L
{2) To compute the .required fillet welds attaching the top plate Weld 1
to the tension oeam flange, proceed as follows:
-~-.
46.58
T = 46.58 tons s = -.•[~2 (~2~0~1-."2~)~+~2~2']no-.~7~2
7 1.04 ems take s = 1.1 ems

Weld
L
2
= 22 - 2x2 = 18 ems s = 1.0 em
Q =R = 2.42x 8 = 9.6 tons
Hence:
M R.e 9.6 x 13.1 =125.76 t.em
L = 23.34 ems (take L 23.34 + 2 x 1.0 ~ 27 ems).
1 1
Choose a seat angle 200x200x20 with fillet welds s = 20 mms

On the other hand the top plate is attached to the column

flange by a butt weld as shown in figure.

weld (1)
1·2
(3) The compression beam flange is attached to a lower seat ems
angle by 3 lines of weld ( s = 1.6 em = beam flange

I thickness).

I: weld lengths = 46.58

= 40.43 ems
we!d(2)

L4 = The transversal weld length = 22 - 2 x 2 = 18 ems

Hence, the longitudinal weld length = L 3 = 40.43 - 18

= 11.2 ems 4
The required angle size (a) is: I = 2666.66 em

a= 11.2 + 1.2 = 12.3 ems 125.76 X 10

= 0.41 t/em2
ft wl. = 2666.66

Hence, choose a seat angle 200 x 200 x 20

9.6 2
q// = 2 = 0.12 t/cm
X 2 X 20
The .seat angle is to be analyzed as has been previously
outlined in section (4.9), while the fillet weld lines attaching f
c
~(0.47) 2 + 3(0.12)
2
= 0.513 tlcm
2

the seat angle leg to the column flange will be subjected to: < 0.79 Safe
.Jl CHAPTER 6 632 . CHAPTER6
(b) Case of' Maximum Moment at Mid span (R = 0.7): Example (6.3):
The ·figure below .shows a part of a f'rame structural system.
M = 896 t.cm ; a = 0.0091
Connections · (Al and (B) are rigid connections. · The ·beam element
Using f'or the top plate steel 52 we get: AB is over stressed.

T = 896
22 = 40.72 tons It . is required to choose
.
a semi -'rigid connection at · (A) and
(B) to rend the beam element saf'e.
40.72 2
A = z:-1 = 19.39 em (b = 15 ems, t = 1.3 em)

X 1.3 X 2100 X 0.0091 X -2

L = 15 896
22 __
201.2 ems (excessive)

Hence if' an alloy of' high strength is utilized f'or the top intensity w = 2.4 t/m'
plate we get: 300
ems as Ex •. (6.1).
BFI 20
~r---~---------1
A = 4~:!2 = 6.36 em
2
(b = 12 ems ; t = 0.6 em)
l. . BOO ems

L = 12 X 0.6 X.2100 X 0.0091 X 222 _

74.3 ems
896 Solution
(Take L = 75 ems)
Kc1
= Kc2 = 3830
300
= 12.76 em
3
B.F.I N = 18
Design the required fillet weld lines connecting the top
= 5950 3 = 20
plate f'lange as case (a). ~- 800 = 7.4375
. em B.F.I N

Similar to case (a) design the seat angle. M£ = 1280 t.em (Ex. 6.1)

For· ideally rigid connection R = 1.0 get:

1
M = 1/1 + (7.4375/2 X 12.76) X M£. = 0.775·x_1280
= 992 t.cm

-2
M . = 2.4 X 8 992 ::: 928 t.cm < 992 t.cm
c.L
 ~HAPTER6 633 634 CHAPTER6

Hence. the end moment governs. the design:

f
= z-
M
-_ 992 _ 2
- 1.66 t/cm > 1.4 t/cm
2
Unsafe
595
X
3
For R = o.-8 ·; K
s
= 127 X 10
The allowable end safe moment is:
M = FC x Z
X
= 1~4 x 595 = 833 t.cm
Hence: M = 58.1 2 X 103 ab

Applying in Eq. (6.19): The beam line equation is:

1
833 : ( 1/R) + 0. 291 X 1280 (Eq. 6.19)
eb = o ·~ M = Mf = 1280 t.cm
.
Hence: ·R = 0.803
M =0 ~ e = 40.9 x 1 0 3 rad"1ans.

Applying in equation 6.8 get K :

; s
Hlt-tml

11.00

Applying equation 6.17 get ec : 1200

1000
833 =2 x E e
c
E Kc = 107184 ec
BOO :rhe Beam Line Eq. 3
ec = 0.00777 radians H =12ao- 31·23,. 10 eb
600

Applying in equation 6 •. 12 get eb 400

833 = 127 x 10
3
(eb - o.00777) 200

eb = 0.~143 radians
o s m ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 1.0 ~
. -3
- 9 (Radians x 10 I
The same result can be obta~ned graphically as follows:

M K
s
(a
b
-e c ) {Eq. ·6.12)

ec = =..-M-=-
2EL K {Eq. 6.17)
c

Eliminating (e ) we get:
c
. . . CHAPTER6
Example (6.4):
635 ;,~
"~~ IC/J.: K =
25.9/138.'.13 0.1875
.636
·"·'~--..;._~-----:----:""'!~....-....---:-------------
=
CHAPTER 6 L
.. b . c
The figure below shows a part of a structural frame,system.
Applying in Eq. 6~'19
The beains are attached to the coluinns by flexible supports.

. 1 .
960 = 1/R + 0.1875 X 1280
It is required to choose the appropriate rigidity ratio
capable to balance the positive and n~gap":e mome.nts.
·Hence: R 0.872

/B·H-28~· ., 960
ec = ~2--x-~
2 10~0~x~1~38
~.~=
13 - 0.00165 radians (Eq. 6.17)

~~~-.v A B-F-I- 28
\B W =~·2·4 t I ,;
K =
s 1
.0.872
0.872 X
2. X 2100 X 20720
800. 74.1 x 10 t.cm/rad
(Eq. 6.8)
300 Ix = 20720 crrd-
cms 1
.t_ 1----....--....--1 960 = 74.1 x 10
3
(eb- o.o0165) (Eq. 6.12)
800cms ..I eb = 0.0146 radians

Solution
Hence use a semi-r1gid connection allowing for an angle of

The beam element being with flexible . connections at both rotation eb = 0.0146 radians.

ends hence:
For the design of the welded semi -_rigid proceed as in
-2
2.4 X 8 example 6.2.
M
c. 8
= 19.2 t.m = 1920 t.cm

Mf = 1280 t.cm

M (+ve) =M (-ve) = 960 t.cm

20720 .. 3•·
~ = 800 = 25.9 em

K
c = 2~~~0 = 69.06 em
3
EKc =2 X 69.06 = 138.12 em3
. . . CHAPTER6 637 638 CHAPTER6L
Example (6.5): Take s = 0.6 em
1. Proportion a ·top and bottom plate connection for a 9
Force per bolt = 3 =3 tons
B.F.I. No. 20 beam framed to very rigid columns. End moment and
reaction are equal to 11.3 t.m and 9.0 t respectively.' Choose 3 bolts M (10.9).

2. Estimate the rigidity ratio of the co~nection designed

in (1) when used to support a load of 2. 25 t/m' on a 8. o ms
span. '
A '4 'l A

--,
1. Design:
Solution

:v
-$-1
__ .J
IL120 x10

<
e.F.I zo

11.3 X 100 1-'

Force in top and bottom plates =
20 ·- 56.5 tons.

Assume to use three fillet weld lines whose size

!15ems Ll
= 1.6 4

l
J
ems (as the beam flange thickness} for the top plate.
s
·1
L
2
= 20 - 2 x 1.6 = 16.8 ems. l:-- 16-8
----
-
ems
---
3L2 -
- .....: -- 20 ems

56.5
= 49.03 ems
0.72:x:1.6 A- A

Henc~: L
1
= 49 · 03 -
16 8
· = 16.11 ems; take L
. 1
= 17 ems. 2. Rigidity Ratio of the Connection:
2.1. The following assumptions are to be considered:
Assuming breadth = 16.8 ems , the thickness of top plate
(a} The rotation will occur about the bottom of the beam.
"tu , can be calculated as
(b) All the co~nection rotation will result from tne
t = -=---_5_6_.5~~ = 2.4 ems
1.4 X 16.8 elongation of the 15 ems unwelded length of the top plate.

2 (c) The behavior is belonging to the perfect elasticity~

Shear stress in web plate = = 0.75 t/cm < 0.84 (o.k)
2
Having M =
AE (h)
----'~-­
e
Thickness of vertical welds = =-~~-==
9
2x12:x:0.72
= 0.515 em L
 _. . . . CHAPTER6 639 640 CHAPTER6
3. Comments:
Yhere:
1. Whether one assumes rotation about· the .·middle or the·.'-':
A = 16.8 x 2.4 = 40.32 em2 bottoin of the beam makes very little difference; the calculated
h = 20 ems; E = 2100 t/cm2 :rigidity ratio varies by only 1. 3 per cent. )_._

L = 15 ems (assumed). . . .! :~/ ~::r

2. It· is 1nteresting to note th<lL• if the fre'e length of..
. the top plate were doubled, that is, increased from 15 to 30
Hence:
3 ;ems,the decrease· in calculated rigidity .would not be large(,
M = 2258 x 10 e (a) ', ..
Assuming rotation about mid-depth we get:

.Beam line for 2.25 t/m' on.8.0 ms span is: 3

M = 1129 x 10 e/2 = 564.5 ;:.-:."·
.e. . (d)
2
M = 2.25 X (8) X 100 2 X 2100 X 5950
9
12 800 Solving· (b~). and·'(d) we;: get:\. ..
.-
"··.

3
M = 1200 - 31.2 x 10 e (b)
M = 11.37. 15 L ems
f'
Solving (a) and (b) we get: ~-· ·..
1137.15
R
.i
-'-7::-o=-o=--'"-·
12 = o. 947·t
e = 0.524 radians
,,.
M = 1183.6 t,cms 3. A similar tested .:specimen b. as shown-: that t-he rigidity
ratio is. 0.91. ·This- means that the designed connection is
R = 1183.6
1200 =
0.986 somewhat ~ore rigid than the tested Joint.

2.2 If the rotation of the connection is ass~ed to occur about

the midheight of the beam, hence we get:
:=:· .:·

3
M = 2258 X
2
10
e = 1129 x 10
3
e (c) ':··•. ·;.

Hence solving (b) and (c) we get:

M = 1167.73 t.cm

R = 1167.73 = 0.973
120.0
 . CHAPTER 7

BEAM, COLUMN AND BEAM-COLUMN SPLICES

7. L Why a Splice is Required ?

The.main reasons regarding the use of a structural element
splice can be presented as follows:
(a) The required structural element length may exceed that

available from the mill.

(b) The structural element section may vary along the
available mill length according to the design considerations.

(c) For erection considerations, the fabricatqr,may.find it

economical to splice the structural element, even. ,when .the
required full length is av<lilable.
',,. :-

7.2. Splice Location:

As a general rule~ a splice is to' be locatedaway·from the
most stressed sections. This.may provide a considerable economy
regarding the splice structural components whose furiction' is' to

satisfy the continuity.

Column as well as truss structural element .splices .. require

The corresponding axial loads do not vary
little attention.
witliin the truss members while for columns the . axial loa,ds
variation is not significant within a particular. ,story.

For- long.continious beams, when splices are· required, they

must be located in regions of low bending moment. where the
structural requirements are not severe.

For beam-columns of a multi-story frame, the splice

location will follow the prescriptions of continious beams.
 644 CHAPTER7
. . . CHAPTER7 643
It is to be noticed that the splice cost is not a linear From the~e. different. opinions, the. third one is utilized,
function with respect to the section capacity percentage. th~ E:C.P. 2001 Clause.9.2.2-~ abo~e.
However, the maximum splice cost OCCUrS as the connection design we Can
strength approaches the section capacity. Hence for the
Hence, to reach a
significant economy, it is recommended to move a splice away to proceed as follows:

a location whose straining ac.tions are even twenty percent less ( i] Compute the .· reqriired fasteners using the maximum
than the maximum stressed section •. strength for tension as well as . for compression axially loaded
Finally, it is always_preferable to locate the splice near members using the allowable stresses (F t and F c).
a section . braced laterally in order to avoid the instability
phenomenon regarding the splice- structural components. · the requ1re
( ii) Compute - • d sp l"ce
1 _plate dimensions so that
. n. ·e·ach· ·splice plate· do not· exceed the
Generally this situation can be achieved easily, otherwise the induced stresse:; 1
special requirements are to be provided in order to satisfy the allowable stresses as prescribed by the E.C.P. 2001.
continuity.
Only if splices are located along a zero structural member,
7.3. Analysis and.Strength Requirements:
the splice design -force must- correspond. to 50 percent of the
7.3._1. Truss Structural Members:
member strength. The zero members may be visualized as a tension
The design of a splice of an axially loaded truss member is
a straight forward matter. The only question that arises is the structural element,

appropri~te magn~tude of the design force for the splice

Refer to Examples 7.1, 7.2, 7.3.
connection.

However regarding this question, diverse recommendations 7.3.2. Column Splices:

are available-which are as presented below: Column splices are ·spl 1·ces in axially loaded compression
(a) The full splice connection is t_o be designed so that i t .• The. applied loads being concentric, no splice is
members.
· f ce is transmit ted
develops the actual stress, but not less than 50 percent of the theoretically required. The compress1on or
effective strength of the member. f~om one structural ~lement to the other by direct contact (i.e ..
(b) The full splice connection shall be designed for the direct bearing) where_ the column_sections could be rested one on
average of the calculated stress, but they shall also be top of each other~ pnforti.l~atety. this situation does not never
designed for not less than 75 percent of the strength of the exist for the following reasons:
member. {a) The load is-never truly axial.
(c) Full splice connections shall have a strength not less (b) The bearing surfaces of the adjacent sections, must be
than that of the member, based on the allowable unit stress in
carefully machined. This will never be perfect.
the member.
 .,.CHAPTER7 645 646 CHAPTER 7

(c) All real columns will resist small bending moment,s- b) For compresssion members
induced from laterally · applled loads whe~e the actual wind
:bracing connections provide generally some eccentricities. N . = Al'g. F
max.c t c

Hence,
the steel components must be sp.liced N - N 7.2
... adequately. we maxc
The required fasteners as well as the splice plates dimensions
should correspond to the maximum strength of the member
= Nmax c
according to the prescriptions of the E.C.P. 2001 as stated in
Clauses 8.7 and 9.2.2.4 as follows . lolhere :
F
c
=,;rhe allowable buckl.ing compr,~~sive. stress.

a) For tension members

(Clause 2.6.4 - E.C.P. 2001}

N
max.c
= Maximum strength of the compression member.
"max:t =A Ft
tn

"wt = N . (A /A )
= The total gross sectional area of the member.
max t wn tn 7.1

Nft N
max t (Afn / Atn) A A
wg' fg
= The gross sectional area of the web· and the
~(lange respectively.

Where :- N N
we' fc
= The maximum strength of the web and the flange
= The· allowable tensile stress (0.58 F ). respectively.
y
Refer to Example 7.4.
N
max.t = Maxi-mum strengt~ of the tension member.

A
. tn = The effective n e t cross sectional area of . the 7.3.3. Beam Splices:
member. Jtist as in truss members (Section 7.3.1), practice varies
with respect to· ti'.e magnitude of the moments and she;ir for which

. Awn ,Afn =The effective net c.ross sectional

... area of the web
a beam splice shpuld. be designed. At one extreme, one might
and the flanges respectively. design the · splic~ to resist the actual · calculated moment and
shear at the point of the splice, even though this may be much
· "wt.' Nf. t = The maximum strength
of t~e web and the flanges less than the full capacity of the section. At the other
respectively. .extreme,. the splice might be designed to develop the full
·..lcHAPTER7 641 648 CHAPTER 7
resistance of the section in both flexu.i-e ancl.shear. even though, . component of . the.· splice is .. designed to achieve the
at the splice location, the actual m(imerit . and shear will not work which the ')material Und~r:fylng t.he spiice plate could do i f .
attain these values. Some .opinions ad.opt a mfddle . situation it was uncut. ))lates on the :flange do the work of the flange,
between these extremes. and plates ovel- the. web do the work of the web according to
partition of moments as given in Equ. 7.3.
In the following paragraphs, the analysis is based on the
maximum bending resistance of the girder section (M . ) and the .In this case, the web splice is to be designed. to resist in
max
actual shearing :force (Qact) at the splice location according to addition to M
. . w a moment
. arising from the local eccentricity (e)
. .
the E.C.P. 2001 · Claus.e 7.5. Accordingly the following of ~he actual shear Qact as well as the actual shearing
expressions can be deduced • force at the location of the splice which means that :-
'
M
max = zX Qw ::::
Qa~t
M
w = Mmax 7.3 I
w
7.4
Mwt = Mmax + Qact . e
It
Mf = Mmax
llhere ·: llhere :-
M = The maximum bending resistanse of the girder
max
. Qw = Qact =~:The actual sh~aring force at splice location.
section.

= The total web moment at C.G~ of the bolts ..

= 0.58 F
y
for noncompact sections.
e = The local eccentricity between the splice location
= 0 .. 64 Fy for. compact sections.
and the C. G ·of the group of bolts (see Fig. 7. 1 ).

= The. elastic modulus section.

Fig. 7.1,.shows a beam splice where the splice flange bolts
are subjected to a concentric shear according to the following :
= The moment of inertia: of the whole sectiori
w·.r.t the neutral·· axis.

Iw. If =.The. moment of inertia of the 1~eb and the flanges Qbf =F /• n
..,: 1
w.r. t .. th~ .neutral axis. respectively. Mf 7.5
F =
·= The maximtim bending resistance of the web and
~
. the flan~~s r'~spectivel.y. where
 . . .CHAPTER7 649 650 CHAPTER7L
Qbf = The shear induced in the flange splice bolts. As the splice moments are usually less than. the section
7

capacity there l.s no-·d.anger to obtain. any overstress Iii. the

\

F Force carried by flanges due to (Mf). ·

section. ,· Thus~/no need to check the state of stresses in the
,.I'
net section whe.:re holes are provided for bolts ins.taliation.
= Distance between C.G. of flanges =h - t
f
Refer to Examples 7:.5, 7.6, and 7.7.
= The·nmnber of bolts inone side of the flange splice.

7.4 .. Beam-Column Splices:

Regarding the web splice bolts they will be subjected to a
concentric shear Q · due to the applied sh i ·· f ·. The design of .a beam-column splice will be .in accordance to
· bw . ear ng orce at spl1ce
the prescriptions previously outlined in Sections 7.3.2 and
location as well as to a shear due to the deduced moment (M ) as
7.3.3.
given by Equs. 7.3 and 7.4. This can be showed according t~ the
following relations
Refer to E:X:ample 7.8.

Qbwl = Qact / n2
of Beam Splices:
M r. 7.6
w 1 Connections: ·
Q
bw.M
'\. = 2
wt l: r. For welded plate girders, and frequently for rol}~d beams,
1
ttre splice may be accomplished by a full-penetration groove
,. "' .-.- -.r· .·; ...
Both Q bwl and Qbw . M'\.
wt are t o ·be added ...,vectorially
· and weld. Splices -.....made entirely in the shop are. nearly always
checked against the shear and b ear1ng
·. groove w~lded. From a design point of view this' tjp~'.<toes not
. resistance for
non-pretensioned bolts or P for H.S.B. ' present any problem, since f~ll:_~'f!n~tration welds are as strong·
s )
as the base material.
:,•, ·, '/ : .

,._ !.!,•,tl_,,._,_., .J.i.•• .. · --·····

Ooly:· som~ practical considerations are t()''bt( 'Pf?c:!-ilf~ed' to
ensure', an:.:~~equate butt-weld spiice connection: . i.~
'I '·• -~,
.:~- ';, _. -~-~--ff· ~-;( ",:·.~ -!'-_-·, <0 ': - ' - • •

(a) 'A staggered loca:tion- ~~· th~.· .flange/web welds is to be

. •..
provided•.as
.- ' : . . . . '· illus.trated
\ . in
. Ffig
.. ...
)·.__,. 7.2.a.
t, -~ . This is hel-p:f1,1]e/f'or- the
welding process but unfortUIJ,ate!~ w~ll be more expensive .
LF~~~==:Jj_F.~
(b) Cope holes are to be utilized ·to facilitate the flange
weldings. These cope holes are not filled.
Fig. 7.1. Beam Splice
 :·v·-:
~"':!· ~ .•

... ~HAPTER7 651 6~2 CHAPTER7L

(c) I t will be of good practice to carry indi;vidual runs of 7. S. 2. Fillet ·We~dedSplice Plate Connections:

weld on the three elements in sequence in order ;f.o balance the Field sp~ices . ar~ · bec~>Jning . more :freque~Uy · all welded.
shrinkage between these elements. Alternative~y. the :flange Though. ·the ult¢' of ·splice plates :fillet welded to the beam
welds are to be completed before carrying out the '~eb welds. . components ins·{.ead of butt-welds will probably overcome the very
costly requirements of good fit which are necessary for

(d) To :facilitate the alignment. a short distance "x" butt-welded connections ..

can
be omitted without weld Prior to assembly and then completed Fig. 7. 2. b, Illustrates a single sp],ice beam connection
a:fter the main welds have been carried out. (see Fig. 7.2.a) where the use of a double-splice plates is not easy. The design
considerations :follow the prescriptions of concentric and
eccentric connections previously outlined in Chapter 3
(volume 3).

The most common bolted splice plate connection shown in

Fig.

I
r:r 7.2.c is that one with high strength bolts of the :friction
) (a) Butt • Welded.
( .• )
II
"
"
II
type. It.s main advantage is that the only existing deformations

" are those which correspond to the plate steel elements. the
(I) Extended End Plate.
"--. f . (b) Fillet Welded Splice.
bolts slip being omit ted·.

Usually a double-splice plates are utilized, this leads to

a considerable economy where the number of bolts is consequently
/

t 'I) l I reduced.

The bolt~ are subjected to a concentric shear(F

to rend the. assumption of uniform .distribution of :forces 'valid.,
= Mf I d),

.. .., "'
it is recommended to achieve the :following considerations:
(e) Flusbed End Plate.
1
( J) (c) Bolted~ (a) Double~sp~ice plates are to be used.

... The. pitch distance

(b) between bolts is to be chosen
...... '
(d) Part Wetded , Part Bolted.
minimum as possible.
(c) In no case, the number of bolts in one row must not
exceed six bolts. otherwise the bolt diameter is to be
increased.
Fig. 7.2
- .._. CHA.PTER7 653 654 CHAPTER7 . . . .
7.5.4. Welded/ Bolted-Splice Plate Connection:
7.6. The Different Types _of Column-Splice Connections:
Fig. 7. 2.d, illustrates at splice~plate '
Cojmection where
Column splice connections are generally straight forward.
half of the splice is fillet welded in the shop, ~hile the other
The absence of tensile forces l!l<lkes the matter easier. The
half is bolted in the site.
forms of column splice connections are generally as for beam
splices. The -different common forms are as presented below.
Generally it is not easy to use a double-plate splices.
Hence the scale of application is limited for rolled beams whose
flange breadth is less than 20 ems. The use of high strerigth
bolts of the friction type is essential to provide adequate
stiffness. The main disadvantage of this type of connections is
the expected damage of the welded splice during tr~nsportation.

7.5.5. The End-Plate Splice Connections:

fig. 7.2. illustrates · a flushed end-plate splice
connection whi'ch can beutilized only when the beam is subjected
ti> m~dest: inornents. ·

END PLATE BUTI' WELD PARTIAL

Fig. 7. 2. f shows an extended end-.plate ~plice ~onnectipn DIFFERENT SECTIONS PENETRATION
where hi~h momen~s of one sign occurs.However, if the beam is
END PLATE lfiTH
subjected to full reversal of moments. a do~bly extended end FilLET lfELD
plate is to be used.

B
-·-- --~-
The behavior, the analysis and the design will follow
exactly the prescriptions previously outlined in chapter 5.
+ + +
+T+
. .
regarding the apex portal frame connections. _
-·-··----

High strength bolts of the frict.ion type are to be

. .\
utilized . The prying force effect is to be computed and _added
. to the applied external tension force induted by the existing
moment.

Fig. 7.3. Different Types of Column-Splice

Connections
 ...lcHAPTER7. 655 656 CHAPTER7~
7. 6. 1. Butt-Velded Splices:. on the other hand if the change in columns size is great, a
1' Fig. 7.3.a shows a full-penetr-ation butt-weld configur-ation division plate as well as packs.ar-e to be provided.
wher-e the upper- column compr-ession for-ce is tr:aiismi t ted totally
to the lower- column by butt-welds. 7.6.3. The End-Plate Column Splice Connections:
Figs 7. 3. f, · g and h shows the. different common end-plate
Fig. 7. 3. b, illustr-ates a par-tial penetr-ation butt weld column splice configurati·ons for low moments, change in columns
configur-ation. A po.r-tion of the axial load is tr-ansmitted by size and high.moments respectively.
bear-ing of the adjacent column sections, while the r-emaining
por-tion via the butt welds. The behavior, analysis and design will follow exactly

Sections 7.3.3 and 7.3.4.

Fig. 7.3:c shows a splice connection at a location wher-e a
change in columns size exists. If ·the exter-ior- face is to be
This connection is generally_locat.ed within the floor slab,
maintained flush, a division plate as well as a stiffener (shown
hence it should not cause any ar-chitectural difficulties.
by the dotted lines) ar-e to be utilized. the lower- column is
shop fillet welded to the. division plate while the upper- column
·is fillet welded in the site. ** **

7:.6.2. Bolted Splice Plate Connections:

Fig. 7. 3.d, :lllustr-ates the most common type of bolted
splice plate connections. I f the columns ar-e only subjected to
compr-essive axial loads, hence the bear-ing between the adjacent
column sections will be sufficient. Only a minimum number of
bolts is to be utilized to connect the splice plates with the
cor-r-esponding coluinn flange to maintain the alignment of the
column elements. However, if the columns are subjected to
moments, the splice plates are designed to transmit the outlined
straining actions of Sections 7. 3; 3 and. 7 •.3.4.

Fig. 7. 3. e shows a bolted splice c6lumn connection at a

location where a change in column size exists. In this
configuration packs ar-e to be. utili;zed.
 CHAPTER7 657 658 CHAPTER7

Example (7.1): Maximum strength of M'ember (A) = F t · Anet

Desigri a field bolted sp.lice for member --{A): at .the marked where:
2
location of the figure below as well as the apex splice regarding Ft = 1.4 t/cm (Case I).
the apex connection. Thickness of gus~et PL •is 8. mms .. ·For field 2
•'' f .•
- (d + 2mm) t] 2 (11.5 - (2+0.2)0.8] = 19.48 em
splices f;.he number of bolts is increased by 15 1.. Us~holts of the 2 (A
g 2
non-pretensioned Grade· ( 4. 6l - d = 20 mms - angles are of st. 37.
For < 75x7Sx8 (A
g
= 11.5 cm ) - d =2 ems

M.S. =Maximum Strength = 1.4 x 19.48 = 27.272 tons

·[:[!
. !.1-s.J 3.o .1 .. · 3.o ! 3.o j 3.o 1 3.o. j 1.5
'.j
(a) Splice Plate (1) -Two plates :-
.a4-ssume that half . the
transmitted from the left side to the right one via. the splice
design force 27; 27.2 tons is

plate ( 1). Hence the required number of Non pretensioned bolts

2 Ls · (Grade 4.6) - (d =·20 mms) is:

Design force of Member (A) =+ 27 ·tons (case (I)) (75 x 75 x 8) IT X (2)

2

2 Ls
R = 0. 25 x 4 x
4
= 3.14 tons .
s.s
Design force of Member (B) =- 25.5 tons (case (I)) (100x100x10) = 0.8
Take edge distance .e 1 =2 d ; a;
Solution
Rb = 0.8 X 3.6 X 2 X 0.8 = 4.608 tons

(1)
27.272 / 2 x 1.15 = 2.49 bolts take n =3 bolts
n1 =
2 x 3.14 . 1
./ '\_ field splice
Two splice plates

Take b :: a - 2t < = 7. 5 - 2 x 0. 8 = 5.9 ems take 6.0 ems

1
27.272 /.2
Splice 11'.111
The thickness of splice PL ( 1 ) t 1 -- 2 X 1.4 X (6.0-2.2) =.1. 28 em

(b) Splice Plate (2) - One plate .

.: ·- ' '"' . . .. - -
t ••~
Ttie other. half of the design force 27. 2T.i t .
I
7.5 x2 +0.8 = 15.8 . _ 27.272
n2 - 2 X 3. 14 X
1 15
•
= 4 • 99
.
bolf;.s take 6 bolts

e 1 = 2d -1 1-- -1 l-e1 =2d

Take b
2
= 13 ems
 CHAPTER 7 659 660 CHAPTER 7
The thickness of splice PL (2) _t 27.272 / 2
2 1.4 x (13 - 2.2x2) = 1.13.cm

l 65 x65 x 11 n1 =4 bolts
(c) Check of Stresses for Member (A) at Bolt Location: -j re =2d
1
(
.A
l
II
2 Ls 75

=2
X 75 X 8 (A< = 11.5 2
em ).
I+ ~ -$- '-$-
II
II
II
••• •. '$-'
<

Anet (11.5 0 · 8 x 2 · 2) 19.48 cm2

f
t.a
= 19.48
27.272 = 1.4 t/cm2 (o.k)

(3) Connection:
(2) Splice of Bottom Member (A) using Splice Angles:
connection hence the
design of the fasteners is based on the actual force.·
Use 2 splice angles 65 x 65 x 11 (A ; .13. 2 cm2 )
Assume half of the force of the upper chord is transmitted
via the gusset plate and that the other hzdf is transmitted via
Use bolts M 16 for the conditi~n a·~- ( 3 d + t).
the splice plate.

Rb = 0.8 x 3.6 x 1.6 x o.8 = 3.68 tons (e = 2 d)

1

n1 = 27.272 / 2
2 x . 2 0 x 1.15 = 3.92 bolts take n 1 =4 bolts 25·5 tons

Check of stresses of splice angles: Gusset ate

Anet =2 (13.2- 2 x 1.8 x 1.1) = 18.48 cm2 Sec. S·S

2
f t.a = __.!:!_
18.48 = 1.46 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm2 (o.k)

While unsafe but it can be accepted where only the excess (a) Splice Plate:
beyoun 15 Y. of the hole areas can be deducted.
Use Non-pretensioned bolts Grade (4.6) - diameter 20 mms
A
net =2 (13~2 X 1.15 - 2 X 1.8 X 1.1) = 22~44 cm2
R
s.s
= 3.14 tons = 6.28 tons
2
f
t.a = 1.2 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm 2 (o.k)
) ;
. . . . CHAPTER7 661 662 CHAPTER?
Example (7.2):
·1\, : : 0. 8 x 3.6 x 2 x 1 = 5. 76 tons (e
1
=
Design the shown bolted connection us.i):lg bolts of the Non-
25.5 / 2 pretensioned type of diameter 20 mms (Grade 4,6).
n1 = 2 x 3 _14 x 1.1S = 2.33 take n
1
=3 bolts Thickness of
gusset plate is 8 mms ~ Angles St.37 .

width of splice plate = b 1 = 10 - 2x1.0 = 8.0 ems

25.5 / 2
thickness of splice plate = -.-.~ ~--~~- = 1.57 ems
1.4 77(8 - 2.2)
X
2<l:SBOx80x10
2... ,
take 1.6 ems 2-f:St)Ox1()0K10

(b) Gusset Plate:

Rs.s = 3.14 tons , Rds = 6.28 tons

i
Sec 2- 2
-
35toos
®

2... i i.,.,
-
4Stals
i
Sec 1 - 1

. f.··
Rb = 0.8 x 3.6 x 2 x 0.8:= 4.608 .tons (e
1
= 2d) Solution

25.5 2
II d
n2 = ~2-x--4~.~6=o=8 = 2.76 bolts take 3 bolts Rd.s= 0.25 x 4 x 2 x - ---
4
= 6.28 tons

. (c) Diagonal Members: 0.8 x·3.6 x 0.8 x 2 = 4.608 tons

The diagonal members. are to be attached: to the gusset

fillet weld lines or ·bolts depending on the design' process Number of bolts required for Member (1) n
1
= !~6~8 = 9.76
the structural system. = 10 bolts > 6 bolts
unsafe
·The weld lines or the-required number of ordinary bolts Alternative
are conq)uted according to the corresponding design force as has The number of bolts required to transmit the D. F. = 45 tons
.been given in chapters (1) ·& '(2). to the. gusset plate being 11 bolts which means that the destance
between the twofar bolts is
.L.
1 = 3d X 9 (spacing) - 27d > 15 d

(L. - 1Sd)
i Then a reduction factor (3L =1 1
200 -< 1.0

(27d - 15d)
(3L =1 -
200 = 0.94
 664 CHAPTER 7
. . . . CHAPTE)l·7 663
Hence Rd.s = 0.94 X 6.28 = 5.9 tons

~ = 0.94 X 4.608 = 4.33 tons

l j
n1 = 45 / 4.33 = 10.4 bolts take 11 bolts.

The dimension of the gusset plate will be huge.

i.
Alternative
;
Use splice plates to transmit part of the force from the
I
right structural member to the left one.

(1) Using Splice Plates (Bolted):

The design force are to be utilised as the splice is not full.

L-y--)~
n1 nt =®
. I Sec. A - A Lower Splice Plate
t Assume half of the largest force is transmit ted via two . . 2
d
upper and a lower splice plates i.e. 45/2 = 22.5 tons. R
s.s
= 0.25 X 4 X IT 4. = 3.14 tons
'
I
. \

(A) Upper Splice Plate (1) :- ~ = 0.8 x 3.6 x 0.8 x 2 = 4.608 tons (e = 2 d)
. 1 . ·.
Assume that both the upper and the lower splice plates will
n = number of bolts attaching each portion of splice
transmit equally half of the largest force. Hence each splice 1
. 5.625
plate will transmit: plates = -·-·-· = L 79
3.14
= 2.0 bolts
22.5
F
upper splice
= F lower splice = - ---- 11.25 tons to the gusset
2 Force transmitted directly from member (1)
45
The upper splice connection being composed of two plates, plate =
2 = 22.50 tons
hence each plate will transmit in single shear a force equal to
11.25/2 = 5.625 tons as shown by the section s-s : n = number of bolts attached to gusset plate (member 1}
2
 . . . CH,APTER7 665 666 CHAPTER7L
22.50 22.50
~.= ~ = 4.608. 4.88 5 bolts

Force transmitted .di~ectly from m.ember (2) to gusse t plate:

.F = 35 - 45/2 =. t:iL.SO tons

(member 2)
............. ---.-.-.
1
I
12.50
4.608
=2 . 7 = 3 bolts;

· ·Assume that hal£ of the transmitted through

Thickness of Splice Plates: the splice angles. Hence the number of bolts required is:

Upper Splice Plates:

45 / 2
Assume b 1 = a- 2t< = 8.0- "
2 x1=6.0 ems n1 =4 x 3.14 = 1.79 = 2.0 bolt.s
i
! number {z
.
plane~Rs.s
Anet:;:;, [6 -·(d + o.2n] t = (6 -2.2lt = 3.8 t 2
em. of single shear
)

4
~ = 4.88
2
n =number of bolts attached to gusset plate (Mem.1) =
A - force of splice plate 5 62 2 2
net - 1.40
= .
1.40 =
4.014
em
.
= 5 bolts

t~1 = 4.014 / 3.8 1.05 em 11 mms n = ntimber of bolts attached to gusset plate (Mem.2) = 12.50 = 2.7
3
~
Lower Splice Plate: = 3 bolts

Take b = 16.8 ems . while conservative

· F through splice = 45 / 2 = 22 · 50 t'ons

.Ane t = [uu~ - 2 Cd ·+ o.21] t :;:; 12.4 t

angle

= force of splice plate f

n.so
= :;:;:--;-:;;:---:-:::---'"...=.::,.....:,---=-...,.,<"- = 1. 43 2
V em 1.4 (O.k).
A
net 1.40 = 2 x
5.62_ 8.028 em 2 . t.a 2 (9.40 - 0.7 x 2.2)
!::!
1.40 -

= 8.028 For al,l cases the edge distance e =2 d

12 _4 = 0.64 em . Take 7 mms 1

Alternative (3) :-

(2) Using Splice Angles: (2< s70 x 70x 7) 1£ the edge distance (e ) is taken (3d)
the coefficient o:
1
regarding the bearing strength of the bolt will be :-
 668 CHAPTER 7
. . . CHAPTER7 667
Example (7. 3):
l = 1.2 X FU X d X t = 1.2 X 3.G X 2.0 X 0.8 = 6.9.12 tons
I.
Design the shown fillet welded truss connection.
n d
2 Gusset PL 8 mms. Maximum s =8 mms.
Rd.s = 0.25 x 4 x 2 x - 4- = 6.28 tons
I
J
The shear strength governs the design.

45
Number of bolts required for Member (1} = -6=-.-=2=8- = 7. 16
Take 8 bolts > 6 bolts unsafe

(Li - 15d)
Use the reduction factor ~L =1 200
< 1.0 Solution

(21d - 15d) Member (1}:

~
L
=1 - 200
= 0 ...97
F1 = D•F X
{a-e)
--a- = 54 · 18 - 38.77 ·tons:
.X 7 10

l
Where Li - 7 spacing =7 x 3d = 21 d
'! The maximum size "s" of weld will be the thickness of the
l R
d.s
= 0.97 x 6.28 = 6.09 tons gusset plate s = 0.8 ems.

Number of bolts of Member (1) - 45 / 6.09 = 7.38 bolts. F1 38.77

Hence use 8 bolts. L1 = s X q
= 2 X 0.8 X 0.72
= 33.65 ems
w
< 70 s {O.K.)
Number of bolts required for Member (2) = 35 / 6.28 = 5.57 bolts. 70 s ·= 70 X 0.80 = 56 ems.
= 6 bolts
(O.K.} no reduction As the· lerigth of fillet weld to connect Member (1) to the
gusset plate is {33.65 + 2s) 35.25 ems will J;"equire a relatively
huge gusset, one of the following two,alternatives can be utilised.

Alternative {1
Use 4 splice plates (welded)·.
Design using the D. F. as splice 1s not full.

Assume that half of the largest force is transmitted

through the splice ~lates of width. 5.0 ems .
 JlcHAPTER7 669 670 CHAPTER7

1
I' =2 19. 38 + 2 X 0.80 = 18 . 40 ems.·
L3 X 0.8 X 0.72

;
I'
;
Member (2):
Force transmitted to gusset plate through·weld lines:
42t

L1 F = 42 - 54
~ = 15.00 tons.
I. Ls
j[ l3
j J
~·
SL I. ll l1
F4 = 15.00
2.34
x--
8 = 4.38 tons.

54
Force/4 splice plates=~= 27.0 tons. (half the largest D.F.) 4.38 + 2 X 0.80 = 5.4ems; (min)
L4 =2 X 0.8 X 0.72
27 0
Force/one splice plate= ·
4.0
= 6.75 tons. 5.66
= 10.61 tons.
F5 = 15.00 X -
8-
Assume thickness of splice plates = 10 mms. (as angles)
·10.61 + 2 x 0.8 = 10.81 ems.
and breadth of splice plates = 5.0 ems. L5 =2 X 0.8 X 0.72

S't ress 1n
. 6 75
sp1"1ce p 1 a t e = b • x t = 56.751.0
X
= 1.35 t/em
2
Alternative (2) ·
Ye can use one lower splice plate as shown:
Safe.
Assume size of fillet weld s = 8 mms. Assume b = 14.0 ems.

6 75 6.75 x 2 __ 6 ~ 0 70 em
• X 0.72 + 2 X 0 . 80 = 7 • 45 ems.
L1 = 2 X 0.80 t* = 14 x 1.40 O. 88 em= • ·

6.75 x 2.0 + 2 x 0.80 = 13.31 ems.

Member (1} - Remaing force transmitted to the gusset plate . LW =2 X 0.80 X 0.72

54
F - = 27.0 tons.

54 2.82 = 7 . 614 tons.

z..teo so"10
X
I
F2 = 2 X 10 \
,.
• '
7.614 35t - -- - ---::.j.E:
-1= - - ::: - -
lbt
L2 = 2 + 2 X 0.80 = 8.20 ems.
X 0.80 X 0.72
® tl ,_b G)
54 7.18
F3 = rx-w= 19.38 tons.
 .,.CHAPTER 7 671 672 CHAPTER7L

19.38
L3 =2 X 0.4 X O. 72 i- 2 X 0.4 = 35.24 ems (embeded). < 70 s

(O.K.)
10.61
L5 =2 X 0.4 X 0.72 + 2 x 0.4 = 19.74 ems (embeded).

This solution is not reeommend.ed as the gusset plate will be

relatively hUge.

f1oot (o.sl
Sec. S- S

Solution

_;_s
7.2 1.2
-
30cms 6.4
-7.2
3.6
1 *300x20

.i
A = 154 ems2 i = 12.9 ems i
y
= 7.65 ems
X

1 = 1 = 800 ems.
X y

---'- = 104.60 > 100

-ly = 800
i 7.65
y
2
F = 7500
2
= 0.686 t/em ·
c (104.60}

2 (O.K.)
100 - 0.65 ton I em < F.e
fe =NA.= 154-
 ~CHAPTER? 673 674 CHAPTER7

The splice being a full splice, the design of the connection

is based on maximum strength.
Rb = 0.8 x 3.6 x 2 x 1.20 = 6. 91 tons Ce 1 = 2d)
Max •. Strength = Fc x At = 0.686 x 154 = 105.644 tons. . 23.32
Number of bolts required = . . 28 x 1.15 = 4. 27 bolts.
6

Aw = 154- 120 = 34 cm2 . Use 5 bolts as shown in figure below.

A
Force carried by web =N x ~ = 105.644. X 34
154 t = -·--~~
2 3 32
=~-~~=~~-r-~~
2x(24·- 3x2.2)x 1.4
= 0.47 ems (see figure below) ··
. At
= 23.32 tons.
Take 2 splice plates 240 x 6 mms.

Force carried by flanges =. 105.64 - 23.32 = 82.324 tons.

')
i
I
v II
ec=2d=4cms
.
Flange Splices: :: _j
. . .
..... ,, ..... n
~

-$- +-n-$-
II ...
., :
. 4 8 3 '4. .

. ..
F/flange =82.324 1 .= 480x 3ooxzo
= 41.16 tons. r !J1=2d
-2-
-+- •ll + • .
11
ii' ~ • ...\ .
I .

Use ordinary bolts d = 20 mms. (Grade 4.6) I

~i=+t}-~~= .
~::::::.:::.

~· •
-==--=--=-.;::_-

I • • ~, .. + ff.
*<.,i
2
.. ~ !: .....
....
24cms t'.... 2 #240><120 X 6
= 0.25. X 4 X { 2 ) .=
·n· ~ ...
3. t4 :tonS . I .
I]
.
L ~ -~~,
'
.
B·F·I· 30
.

Rb = 0.8 x 3.6 x 2 x 2 = 11.52 tons · (e = 2d) TIli li lA 4

1

41.16
Number of bolts req. = - - · X 1.15 = 15.07 bolts
3.14
Use 16.0 bolts

Use 4 rows with 4 bolts .at each row .

41.16
t = (30 - 4x2.2)x 1.4 = 1.38 ems

. ' Take t = 20 Qns as flange column .

!
Web Splices:
Rd . s = 3.14 x 2 = 6,28 tons .
 ~-CHAPTER.? 675
676 CHAPTER?
Example (7.5):
straining Actions at Field Splice: ·
Design the main girder (f.:I:G} o£ a Hoorsystemcgi·vtm·that; ·
32
- The £loor is covered by R.c. slab o£ 10 ems thickness~ M
X
22 X 3 - 2.925 X = 52.65 mt.
- The live loads are taken according to. E.C.P. £or r~~idential
I
buildings. Spacing o£ girders is 6.0 ms. (one way slab).' = 22 - 3 X 2.925 = 13.16 tons.
Design a £ield splice at 3. 0 m £rom the support knowing
that the girder span is 15.0 ms and is braced laterally at As the situation is a £ull splice connection, the design of
intervals o£ 5.0 ms. the fasteners is based On the maximum moment strength and the
actual shearing force.
Solution

10 X 25 X 6 Mmax = Max. Moment = Zx ; ~b = 6030 x 1.4. = 84.42 t.ms.

100
I WC.M = 1000 = 1.50 t/m 200 X 6
vL.L = 1000 = 1.20 t/m
! = Actual shearing £orce = 13.16 tons
Assume the own· weight o£ b~am = 225 kgm/m

.A. Approxi~ate Analysis

wt = 1. so + 1.20 + 0. 225 = 2. 925 t/m
Wt x L2 ,, -2 1. H.S.B. in Field M 20 mms Grade (10.9) -
M = ----=,---- = 2.925 X 15
.X 8. = 82 .. 26 mt .. Friction Type :-
8
wt x t Assume that the moment "Mt" is totally carried by the flange
Q = 2
= 2.925 x 15
2
= 22.0 tons splices and the shear by the web splices.

zX 82.26 X 100
=
1.4 = 5876 em3
req.
. . . . . . . .
Choose B.F.I. # 60, zX = 6030 em3 • t = 1.7 ems,
w t£ = 3.2 ems.
H/d
.
.- . II .
II
. . -
H/d

~bt = ~ = 6030 = 1 • 36 t /em2 • < 1 • 40 t /em2 •· ( o.'k) •

8226 "'
E 6
u t- ~ fl . .

(" . ,, )"~'
... ...be

.
II
at
.0 116.0
"'
II
... li'l
,,
= 22 / 60 x 1. 7 = 0.215 ·t/cm2 . < 0.84 t/cm2
<::> Hmax 1-
(o.k) ':'I
'I
"' I 12 84.42mt J.

Lu = 20 b / ~= 20 x 30 ~= 387 ems
0
.0
t- ll ~
y < II
II
.
SOOcms
'
~

. ":- .
6
. II . . HJd
Lu = {1380 A£/ d.Fy).Cb = U380x30x3.2/60x2.4)1.0 = 920 > SOOcms
H /d . .
I
I
. . ' 2
The section is noncompact ( Fb = L4 t/cm ) 1- 60 ems .I
 . . . CHAPTER7 677 678 CHAPTER 7
1.1. Flange Splices: f- dist
f = 78;96 18 X
8442 -~::.;:_:;_:__:___:__~-~
Flange force due to moment ~~--=-~
(60 :- 3.2) = 148.62 tons. bt 2 X 0.80 X 363 I 12

As H.S.B. of friction type are utilised use gross area . . 2 2

= 0.228 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm (O.K.)

148.62 = =-__:;1:.::3~•.=.16.:___,= = 0.23

(30 + 2Xt2) t . ; t= 1. 96 ems. .q < 0.84 (O.K.)
2 X 0.8 X 36
q-dist

.. 2 . 2 .
2
Take 3 splice plate of thickness 2.0 ems each
f
eq
= j(0.228) 2 + 3(0.23) = 0.46 tlcm < 1.54 tlem (Safe)
one plate 30 X 2.0 ems two plate 12 x 2.0 ems

2. Using Bolts of the non-pretensioned type in Field Splice M 20

148.62 148.62
Ntimber of bolts = = -;:;:2-x-4:;-_--:::9::-;:;3:-- x 1. 15 (~ = 0.4 -Case I) mms - Grade (4.6).
Assuming that all the moment is totally carried by tne flange
= 17.33 bolts. ~ 20 bolts. splices and the shear by tne web splices.
Use 5 rows with 4 bolts / row. or 4 rows x 4 + 2 = 18 bolts A double-plate is to be
utilized to decrease the
(
; l. 2. Web Splice: number of bolts.
Moment due to eccentricity = Mt = 13. 16 x 6 = 78.96 t. em.
2.1. Flange Splices:
Qw = 13.16 tons.
Flange force = 84.42
(60 X 100
.3 . 2 )
F /bolt = -13.16
3 - = 4.40 tons
.j,
= 148.62 tons .
78.96 X 12 (2)2
= 3.29 tons .. R. =2 x o.25 x 4 x rr x - -
2 d.sh. 4 1~120x20
2 X 12
= 6.28 tons

5.49 tons. < 2 X 4.93. = 0.8 X 3.6 X 2 X 3.2 .. 30

Safe (double shear)

= 18.43 tons (e
1
= 2d)
148.62
x 1.15 = 27.2 bolts
6~28
Assume thickness of web splice plates =8 mms.
Use 7 rows witn 4 bolts I row = 28 bolts.
 . . . . CHAPTER? 679 680 CHAPTER7L

(18d - 15d)
In each ·~ow n =7 > 6 (3
L
·= 1 -
200
.- 0.985

148.62
I.
I.
I.
R
. d.s
= 0. 985 X 6.:28 6.186 n = 6.186
x 1.15 = 27.62,bolts
i
Use 4 ~ows in each 7 bolts 28 bolts.

No need to check the safty of. tensile stresses at bolts

1 '*= 300" 28
section as the actual moment is 52.65. t.ms while the design
i;
\: moment is 84.42 t.ms. For the net section deduction of holes >
15 % of flange a~ea is applie~.

148 62
tsplice
= ·
1.40 [1.15(30 + 2 X 1~ - 8 X 2.2]
= 2.38 ems
I 3
84.42 X 100 X 25.8 X 10
plates M =M x-w-
w max It 3
Anet of the 3 spl.ices plates . 180.8 X 10
t = 2.4 cm.s
2.2. Web Splices:
= 1204.66 t . cms.
, Assume the same number and a~~angements of bolts as in the
H.S.B. concept.
M
f
= Mmax M
w
- 84.42 - 12.0466 = 72.373 t.ms.
FR = 5.49 tons < 6.28 tons (Safe)
1. Flange Splice:
Use the same splice plates as in :H.S.B. 72.373x100
Flange force= ( 60 _ 3 _2 ) = 127.41 tons.
(thickness = 8 mms).

Numbe~ of bolts = 127.41 x 1.15 = 14.86 bolts

2 X 4.93.
B. 20 mm G~ade (10. 9)
~ take 16 bolts
F~iction
Use 4 ~ows with 4 bolts at each ~ow.
4
It = 180800 cm (B. F. I. No. 60)
2
A . .
splice plates
= 30 X t + 2 X 11 X t = 52 t em
3
If= 2 [30 X 3.2 /12 + 30 X 3.20 (30 = 155x103 em
4

Thickness t =
4
em

Take t = 1.8 ems

 682 CHAPTER7
681
Assume thickness O:f .:each .splice web plate ( 12 mms}.

. Ua =~3-16 tons

q
•
T
1ir 4-

I
f
II •• $--
4-
4-
• c.R.
48cms 7xs:o=
42cms • 4- 4-

L
~ ~ ~

1
\
~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~ ~ C.R. 2
t/cm2 > 1.40 t/cm •
~fc q
~ ~ ~ ~
1362.58 x.24 = 1 _48

.I 1
. 3
2 X 1. 2 X 48 /12

Increase thickness t = .13 mms

2
ft = 1.36 t/cm
2 2 2 2 2 2
L ri = 4 [ (3) + (9) + (15) + 4 x (6) l = 3600 cm
13.16 ~ 0.105 t/crn2 < 0.84 t/crn.
2
q 2 X 1.3 X 48
Mt = 1204.66 + 13.16 x 12 = 1362.58 t.cm

2 2
F / bolt = 13.16 = 1.645 tons. (shear) f j(1.36) 2 + 3(0.105) = 1.37 t/crn
eq.
"' .2
< 1.1 x 1.40 t/crn (Safe)
~ / bolt = 1362.58 x 21 = 7.94 tons.
Mwt 3600

1362.58 X 6.0
/ bolt = 3600 = 2.27 tonS.

FR = 8 .. 85 tons < 2 x 4.93 tons O.K.

 . . CHAPTER? 683 684 CHAPTER 7
Example (7. 6): the Position of the Field
Design a field splice for the shown beam at 10 ms. from the
(10) 2
. MX 3.288 X 15 X 10 - 3.288 X - -
support. The beani is carrying a uniformly distributed load of 2
3. 288 t/m . Lateral supports at intervals 7. 5 ms.
Q = 3. 288 X (15 - 3) 39.456 tons.
10m
: ' W=3·ZBB t/m case n
120 ems A;''''''''l'"''"''"'"''"~
,. f.s. ·'
2. Flange Splices:
I 30m .J As the splice is a full splice the design is based on the

r! LI SOcms.l
maximum moment strength of the section and the actual shearing
·force.

Beam X-Sec. 3
Solution 1739.2 X 10
Max. Moment Strength = ----~------
64
x 1.4 X 1.2 = 456.54 t.m.
2
M
= 3.288 X (30)
= 369.90 mt.
1
X 8 Mf (Flanges) = 0.884 x 456.54 = 4.03 .. 58 t ... m.
3
J I
1 4
• X ( 120 ) + 2 X. 50 X 4 X (62) 2 = 1739200 cm4 403.58 X 100
X 12 Flange force = ----~~---- = 325.46 tons

369.90 X 100 X 64 2 2
1739200 = 1 · 36 t/cm < 1.4x1.2 t/cm O.K. Number of H.S.B. (10.9) - M22 - Friction type ~ Ps = 6~615 tons
'll 2
j. : 2 X 50 X 4 X (60 + 2) = 153.76 X 104 4
em
325.46. X 1. 15 28.29 bolts- take 30.bolts
n = 2 x 6.615
4
I
w (173.92- 153.76) 10 = 20.16 X 104 em
4
Use 4 rows with 7 bolts / row + 2 bolts.
I
w
-I-= 0.116 ·(t10T20 . .(r
. . ~ro Maximum force carried by flange is to be calculated based on
xt
the gross area as we are using H.S.B of the friction type.
If
-I- = 1 - 0.116 = 0 ... 884 ..
xt. Max. force of flange = SQ X 4 X 1.4 X 1.2
1.4cm 336 tons. > 325.46 tons (O.K.)
Lu = 20 b / ~=
y
20 x 50~= 645 ems < 750cms
Thickness of Splice Plates t (50 X t + 2 X 20 X t)
L
u = (1380 Af / d. Fy). Cb = (1380x50x4/128x2. 4)x1. 0 = 898 > 750cms
t = 3;z5.46
The section is noncompact. (50 + 2 X 20) X 1.4 X 1.2
= 2. is ems take t =2. 2 ems.
 .-IJl CHAPTER 7 685 686 CHAPTER 7

I.
j.
! \ (L. - 15d) 1 :;1:!:500><22 5769.33 x 6 = 1. 8 5> 1.4 x 1.2 unsafe
1 3
{3L = 1 -
200 -< 1.0 2 X 0.8 X {108)

(18d - 15d)
{3L =1 -
200 = 0.985
Use thickness =9 mms = 1. 605 t/cm
2
1 :;I!: 200 ><22
p 0.985 X 6.615 = 6.515
s
39.456 2
= 0.202 t/cm .
325.46 q =2 X0.9 X 108
n = ~_-x~~_~~-
2 6 5 1 5 x 1.15 = 28.7 bolts < 30 bolts
O.K.
2 2
f . = lc1.6o5> + 3{0.202)
eq. ~
3. Web Splice:
,lj;
Use two columns of bolts with 9 bolts at each column. ,. . 2 . 2
' = 1.64 t/cm < 1.1 x 1.2 x 1.40 t/cm . {O.K.)
Hwt = 0.116 x 456.54 x 100 + 39.456 x 12 5769.33 t. C!llS.

-dist Q=~
L -2
r.
1

= 18000 em2 nQ=16.44 ton

106 +
ems
F~ = 15.38 tons.
Ht • t~·· • II

411
1- 6
12
~I: .e. +
•• ·-
1-
1 =1.923 tons. -<&

·A:'· •
12
0~
FM J 11
t ft =~ q-dist
.r2 II 12
39.456 • jf
·r. ,,
II+ 1-
F(Q ) = 2.19 tons . 12
-1- 9 X 2

:r!!: •• 1-
12

.. .. •
>- 1-
FR 15.92 tons. > 2 x 6.93 tons. 12 12

·~·
1-
12
unsafe ;
..&
,, Itt 1-
12
1 Increase number of H.S.B to 10 / column.
.::e. II
1-6

Assume Thickness of Splice Plates = 8 mms.

 . . CHAPTER7 687 688 CHAPTER 7
Example (7.7): Beam-Column Splice
of the Beam Column .(AB):
;; (a) Design the heam.column (AB) ·of the gable frame shown, given .1. Actions:
.that the frame is subjected to the following loads: Q9_
. ;

- Covering material corrugated sheets of intensity 15 kgm/m2 l

~34.0
' M B·O[
max. = 25.84 mt.
Own weight. of steel 40 kgm/m
2

-Live load is to be taken.according to the E.C.P. (2001).

of covered area.
N = 7 .. 80 tons~
ms Al-B ---
1:51 . 4.0
corr.
- Neglect the effect of wind.
o·6s t;m· Elevation
f I I I I I l l I II I I II I I I I I jI I I J
2. Preliminary Design:
(b) Design a field splice in the
column (AB) at a distance 4.0 ms 2
Assume that fbx = 1.20 t/cm .
from the .base.
Solution z = 25.841.20
X 100
= 2153 . 3 em .
3
x"'req.
(1) Loads: ll------f::24~·0:..:::m::..s----!·1
15 2 Choose B.F.I.B. No. (34)
co sa:
+ 40 = 55.075 kgm/m Spacing = 6.0 ms
3. Actual Stresses:
1.50 I / 8
ll
. D.L.
. = 55. 075
1000
X 6 :::: 0 ..33 tonlm' GA = 10 (Hinged)
I / 24.12
=4.523 (I'
c
= 1.50 I )
g
. 2
= 53.33 kgm/m (E.C.P 99) (tana: - 0.10) From the charts get k = 2~50

53.33 X 6
= 0. 32 ton/m' 1
X
= 2.50 X 8 = 20.0 ms. 1
y = 4.00 ms. (Transversal
Bracing)
1 l
X y
11total = 11D.L + 11L.L = 0 • 65 t/m' = 137.93 iy
52.9 f
c = fEx = 0.3942
(2) Straining Actions: Due to Dead Load and Live Load Combined
f 7.80 25.84 X 100 2
ca = 174 = 0.045 2170
= 1.1908 t/cm

4. Equivalency·and Amplification Factor:

CM = 0. 85 (case of sides way permitted)

 CHAPTER7 689 690 CHAPTER 7
A ·= C A 0. 85 X 1. 1288
1 M. 0.045 + 1.190 ~ . 1. o. = 0. 964 < 1. 0
_,- """""M::42·92 F= 4().5Bton.
= 0.960 0.394 L40 F ·
.y
5. Lateral Torsional Buckling: N=7·Slon
(4) Design of the Field Splice:
Part (Ai.B): 1. Straining Actions at . -~ ij) I• $-· .

·+ -$J~ +·
the Field
MAl =- 12.92 mt . .

=-
B.M.D.
M = 12.92 mt N = 7.80 tons
. ::.==!'""'-=-=--=- -
.~·23 ton.
~ 25.84 mt Q = 3~23 tons. ·• • ij) • .

_ MAl _ Use bolts of the pretensioned type

. ... ij)lij)
•• .
(-ve used for the same curvature)
a. - ~ - - 0.5
Grade (4.6)- - M 20 l
l cb = 1.75- 1.05 a.+ o.3 a.
2
= 1.3 34·0cm

= 6 .. 28 tons .
L
u
- 20 b / r;-= y
20 X 30 ~= 387.3 ems < 400 ems
y y

The section is noncompact.

= 9.504 tons
800 X 30 X 2.2 2
FL.T.B. (Al.B) = 400 X 34
x 1.3 = 5.04 t/cm .
> 1.4 O.K. Flange Splices:
l'art {Al-A): The splice is to be designed on the full maximum moment, the
actual shearing force and the actual normal force. Yhile
MAl =- 12.92 mt
conservative because the corresponding stresses will exceed the
allowable stresses (0.58 F. ), the design will be on the safe side.
y
Gb = 1. 75 > 1. 3 {no need to continue)

Max. Moment Strength =z X

x 1.4 = 2170 x 1.4 = 3038 t.cm.

6. Check on Stresses:
2 3 4
If =2 X 30 X 2.2 X (17 - 1.1) = 33.37 X io em
f
0 045
ca = ·
0.394
= 0 1142 < 0;15
•
;.Take Al ~ LOO
3 3 4
F
c I
w = It - If = (36.94 - 33.37) 10 = 3.57 X 10 em
fca fbx x 1.0 3
y-- + F < 1.00 3038 X 33.37 X 10
t.cm.
c be Mf = 4
= 2744.39
36-94 X 1.0
 ..lcHAPTER7 691 692 CHAPTER7
--'!
M
w
= 3038 - 2744.39 293.6 t.cm.
lI Fb ....N 1.88
= =2-x- = ·0 . 2 35 tons.
4,..._...,0-
2
Af =2 x 30 x2.2 = 132 em

312.98 X 9 ·
2 2·· - 6. 5 tons.·
\ A
w = 174 - 132 = 42 em 4
· ·
X
·· 2
(4.24 . + 9.49 }
··

tons.

Nf = 7.8 X 0.759 = 5.92 tons

3.23
-0.404 tons.
2 X 4.0
Nw = 1.88 tons
l
j +· 6.5)~
J 2744 · 39 2
Normal force transmitted by flanges = 34 - 2.2
+ 5 • 92
2
= 89 . 26 F/bolt (resultant);:: (0:235 + (2.17. + 0.404)
tons
= 7.3 tons. > Rd.s ·unsafe
= 89.26
Number of bolts
6.28 x 1.15 = 16.34 bolts take 18 bolts .
Use M20 -'- Grade (5.8)
. . . ..

2
Use 4 rows x 4 bolts per row + 2 bolts Rd .s =2 x 0.25 x 5 x 3.14 x 2 / 4 = 7.85 tons O.K;
30.0cms
Web Splices: Check oo. the Section of the Column At Splice: I' "I
~c::-;::ljl:::::ljo
Try two rows of 4
60 mm. horizontal
bolts at
pitch
60 min: vertical pitch as shown
and 3·0
6·0
1st Solution (Conservative) :-
A
net
= 174
2
123.84 em •
- 8x2.2x2.20 :.. 4x2.2xi.3o
2·2 P 13
·
l
29J.6cms
in Fig. &0 2.2
6·0
3·0
I
x net
= 36940 - 8x2.2x2.2x(15.9)
.· 2 .·
2
.
t
~~ d=i.i~::Jjo
Moment due to shear eccent- 2x2.2x1.30x(9) - 2x2.2x
2 . 4
ricity = 3.23 x 6 = 19.38 t.em. 1.3x(3) = 26636.397 em .

Total Moment carried by web splice = 293.6 + 19.38 N 7.80

= 312_: 98 c .... ~ f
ca =A--
net
123.84 = 0 .063 / 2
t em

. Normal force transmitted to web = 1. 88 toris

 693
M
694 CHAPTER 7
x.y_ 1;2.92 X 100 X 17
f. = -~-- Splice Plates:
bx 26636.397
xnet 1- Flange Spiices:
I
I Try 1 = 300 x. 12 for outer face of flange.
I fca + fbx.CM'A = 0.
1599 + 0.825 X 1.0 0.749.< LOO Safe Try i·=S 120 x 14 for inner fciceof· flange;
Fbc 1.40
The area and inertia of splice plates must replace that of
2nd Solution (Allowed) ..
the section.
Aholes = 8x2. 2x2. 2 + 4x2. 2xl. 30 = 50. 16 cm2. 2
Area of splice plates = 30x1.20 + 2x12x1.40 = 69.60 em
A
A
gross = 174 em
2
A
holes
= 28.8 % > 15 % Inertia about (x-x) of splice plates = 2x30x1.20x(17.6) 2
gross
2 4
The. reduction of holes
+ 4x12x1.4x(14.1 ) = 35662.72 em
• 1 from the section area and inertia
2 . . 2 .
should be done for that exceed only. 15% of area.
Area of flanges replaced = 30x2.2 = 66 em < 69.6 em (O.k)
A =A
net gross ~oles Inertia about (x-x) of flanges = 2 x 30 x 2.2 x (15.9)
2

= 174 X 1.15- 50.• 16 = 149 . 94 em 2 . = 33370.9 4

cm < 35662.72 cm
4
(O.k)
Reduced hole diameter for I 2- \leb Splices:
x net: ·S .
Try 2 = 240 x 10 for web splices.
A!'so I .
x holes.
/ I
x
= 10304 / 36940 = 0.2~9 ~ 0.28 > 0.15 Area of splice plates = 24 x 2 x 1.0 = 48.0 em .
2

3
Inertia about (x-x) of splice plates= 2x{24) x1.0 / 12
I x net = {1.15 0.28) x 36940 = 32137 cm4
4
= 2304 cm
7.80
f
ca = 149.94 = 0.052 t/cm 2
Area of web replaced = 29. 60x1. 30 = 38.48 cm
2
< 48.0 cm
2
Safe

f. = 12.92 X 100 X 17 . . 2 3 4
bx 32137 = 0.683 t/cm • Inertia of web replaced (29.6) x1.30 / 12 - 2809.55 cm

4
>: 2304 em unsafe
= 0 _132 + 0.638 X 1.0 =
1.40 0.62 < 1.00 {Safe) Increase thickness of web splice plates· to 12 mms.

Hence the section of the beam ·column at .the N.B. This procedure has been utilized to overcome the
field splice
is safe against Combined Normal Stresses~ · effect of the normal force.
 CHAPTER 8

CRANE GIRDERS AND BRACKET CONNECTIONS

R8 8.1. Introduction:
In industrial buildings such as factories, workshops, etc.
crane track girders are provided to carry overhead cr;-anes. This
allows to move heavy i terns from one point to another during
assembly, . fabrication, plant maintenance. Generally these
cranes provide the heavy lifting facility in any direction over
the whole area of the building and are operated either by hand
or electrically.

The crane is usually supported on four wheels running on

special rails as illustrated in Fig. 8.1. Each of these rails
is supported on a crane track girder whose design is a part of
the steelwork designer goal.

Fig. 8.1. Crane Girder Structural Components

 ~CHAPTERS 697
698 CHAPTER8L

In order to design a suitable steel crane track girder, the

·crane wheel loads and dfin~nsions should be obtained from the
.manufacturers handbook. However. the following data are' required
·to choose the appropriate section:

(a) Span, crane capacity, weight of crab, weight of crane

and hook load.

(b) Minimum hook approach closed to rails, minimum approach

(i.e. end clearance) and wheel centers.

Once these data· are obtained, the different applied ioads

are combined and hence the. crane wheel loads computed. Fig. 8.2. Crane Loads

\
Alternatively the crane wheel loads may be given directly
J by the crane manufacturer.
(c) Horizontal Loads Ac~ing Transverse to the Rails:
In addition to the vertical loads transfered from the

8.2. Crane Wheel Loads (Refer to Fig. 8.2): wheel loads to the rails, horizontal loads can develop. The

(a) Vertical Static Wheel Loads:
The crane track girders (crane girders) are subjected to
vertical loads from the weight of the crab and the hook load
which may occupy any position on the crane frame up to the
first of th·ese is called the lateral shock (or the surge} and
acts normal to the rails. This lateral shock force covers the
acceleration and braking of the crab when moving along the crane
frame, together with the effect of the non-vertical lifting.

minimum hook approach as shown in fig. 8.1. Hence the vertical

The value of this load is prescribed by lOX of the
load on the near side pair of· wheels can be computed, adding
maximum reaction of the wheel.
half the weight of the crane frame which is divided equally
between the wheels .. (d} The Braking Loads:
The second horizontal load (longitudinal} is the braking
(b) Dynamic Effect (Impact): load of the whole crane, and acts along the crane track girder
The maximum static wheel loads according to E.C.P. 2001 at the level of the top flange.
shall be increased by the following to include the dynamic
effect (impact): According to the prescriptions of the E.C.P. 2001 , the

- For electric overhead cranes 25X. braking or tractive force shall be taken equal to tn of all
wheel loads in the most unfavorable position and shall be
- For hand operated cranes lOX.
 CHAPTERS 699 700 CHAPTERS . . .
assumed acting on all the affected parts of the supporting 8.3. Different Types of Crane Girders:

structure (i.e.· the braking force shall be equ;i"lly distrib~ted The . ·crane-~ girders are subjected · to vertfcal as well·. as

on the total number of vertical columns comprising the steel horizontal ~~~as·as has been previously outlined in Section.8.2.
structure)~ Hence for l.ight crane capacities (say up to 20 tons capacity)
the section ~y consist either of a S. I.B and a channel as shown
in Fig. 8.3.a or .a section of large flange (B.F.l) with or
. . '· ,.·~-. ~·

without 'ari . additional top plate as iHustrated in Fig.

a: 3. b. A b~ilt~up.:.section may be utilized as shown . in Fig.
8.3.c . . Forlieavy cranes a built-up-section with a surge girder
acting as a walkway is illustrated in Fig. 8.3. d provided that
the local buckling is prevented. Box-sections are also used for
heavy cranes.
(a I · (b I (c)
Regarding ·the rail sections, different types are shown in
Fig. 8.3.e. These are not taken into account in computing the
crane girder strength. The size of the rails depends on the
' ,
l crane capacity. A connection arrangement of a rail is
\ illustrated in Fig. 8.3.f.

(e l Refer to Example 8.1.

8.4. of Welded and Bolted Minor Axis Brackets

(d l Fig. 8.4.a and b illust.rate the common configurations of
minor axis welded and bolted brackets respectively.

The design of the differ;-ent steel .structural components is

a straight forward matter if the transmition of the applied
loads from. on~...element to the other is well determined. Fig.
8. 4. c, illustrat~s ~he path of forces where the lateral. shock
(f)
load (surge). is . transmited to the beam column via a lateral
plate support. On the other hand the vertical crane loads as
well as the braking force are transmitted to.the beam-column via
Fig. 8.3 the bracket gusset plates and the cor:responding fasteners.
 701 702 CHAPTERS . . .
connections are generally used for shop attachment while (1) Crane girder cross section
the bolted brackets for f~eld attachment. This typ~ of brackets ·(2) Lateral support.
don~t prrsent ariy difficulty. Where the loads are transmitted {3) Support stiffener.
directly to. 1
the cblumn flanges which provide the minor axis (4) Bracket gusset plate.
bending strength of the column. {5) Beam-column.

{H) (V) & {B.F)

Fig. 8.4.d.. illustrates the stress distribution on the
diagonal cross-section (s -'s )
1 1
of the gusset plate only. 1 Rails
1
Rails
--.
Regarding the buckling of the gusset plate,
should be based on the distance from the bolts to the free edge,
the ratio (a/t)
1
Crane Girder
1
Crane Girder

1
'*]I

while if welded, the corresponding {a) distance should only be Upper Flange
based· from the column near edge. The buckling condition of the
•.•.•. +.+. Lateral
1Support.
Bracket
triangular stiffened seat bracket previously outlined in Section .. ·.
4.2.9 can be utilized. The following modification may be 1
Beam-Coiumn
1
Beam-Column
applied.
1
Base
1
Base

The average stress on the top loaded edge of the gusset 1

Soil
1
Soil
A - A
plate, which would cause buckling of this gusset plate is given
by the following critical buckling stress F (c) Path of Forces-Flow Chart
cr

. . . . • . • 8. 1

l(

. 2
where: IT= 3.14 ; E = 2100 t/cm Jl = 0.3
K = the buckling coefficient.
!fxl (q)
S1 - St
ft' " I
The buckling coefficient K can ~e computed. using the ).
laboratory report No. 319.1 of Lehigh University entitled
«Buckling and Ultimate loads for plate girder web plates under {b) 'Welded Bracket (d) Stress Distribution
o V = Vertical Crane Loads o H - Lateral Shock (Surge)
edge loading» where the following relation has been recommended:
o B.F = Braking Force.

c~>
2
K = 3.2 - 3.o cfil + 1.1 . . . . . . 8. 2 Fig. 8.4 Minor Axis Bracket Connections.
 . . CHAPTERS 703
Using a factor of safety (F. S . = 1. 714), hence the induced
704
8.5. Analysis of Relded Major Axis Column Brackets:
CHAPTER 8 a-.
average stress on the loaded edge ·-is: Fig. 8.5, illustrates a welded bracket composed of ·a
Tee-section where the flange is generally butt welded to the
v
f = X 1. 714 • . . ._ . . . . . 8. 3 column flange while the Tee-stem is fillet welded. Another
av a.
·configuration consists to use an upper flange and a gusset plate
Equating ( 8. 1) and ( 8. 3) with the. corresponding -values of . .attached together by horizontal fillet weld lines.
E, II and ll we. get the following buckling condition:

•. • • ; . . • . ·. 8. 4
I ...... ......
I t is to be noticed. th~t the .analysis given above is valid
-only if the loading can be assumed to be distributed over the
...... ....
...
top edge of the gusset plate. The applied load (V) must be
closer as possible to the column flange. When the applied force
I
moves excessively toward the edge, the above analysis becomes
qualitative. Hence· the approximate pr:ocedure (Method B) of
Section 8.5 can be utilized to determine the safety of the
$ A

gusset plate against buckling. Set. 1

Fig. 8.5
Figs 8.4.a, b show suitable top flanges which prevent the
lateral displacement of the bracket tips (i.e. the lateral Regarding the analysis, the welded bracket shown in Fig.

torsional buckling phenomena). For this situation the 8. 5 can be visualized as a triangular bracket whose exact

corresponding effective lateral unsupported length is (L). In analysis has been previously outlined in section 4.2.9.

the absence of any top flange, the eff'ective unsupported length Regarding the buckling of the gusset plate Equation 8.4 can be

to be adopted is 2 L. qualitatively utilized.

. . However two different approximate analysis can _be adopted,

Regarding the lateral support and. th~ brack~t connections
both are based on the beam stress theory. However the procedure·
the conventional fatigue calculations must be utilized as will
is as given below:
be. given in Section 8.10.
() «
a Approximate Beain Analysis for Stre_sses Method A
»

Refer to Example .8. 2. · In this method it is assumed· that the vertical wheel
loads (V) is transmitted to the column flange as follows:
 707 708 CHAPTERS
In order to ensure a direct transmition of the applied
wheel ·load (V) it is of common pr·actice to use vertical
stiffeners just below the crane girder fitted to the top flange
and fillet welded to the gusset plate.

(b) Approximate Beam Analysis «Method B»:

In this method. the combined stress at the free edge on
the inclined critical section
general stress equation. Referring to Fig.
s 1 - s 1 is computed according to the
8.7 the maximum - '~
induced compressive stresses are as follows~

.I
....
I•
'
·.

= V co sa 6 V cose. e sine 6 V. sine; (a/2+e) cose

. +
t.. a s1ne 2 + -----=--__:..,~:__~=.::_
2
t. (a sine) (a sine) t
Fig. 8.7 ::',

f · = V cote + 6 V.e cote + 6 V (a/ 2 + e) cosB 8.6

Max t.a t.a2 a. t2 {c) The exact Analysis:
The· exact analysis . of triangular· br~ckets has . been
previously outlined in Section 4.2.9. It consists to.use either
f = V · cote (1 + 6 e + 6 (a/ 2 + e) sine)
Max t.a a t the yielding or the buckling conditions whichever is the most
critical as follows:
Yielding:
These maximum compressive stresses must not exceed the
prescribed allowable limits. f = v 0.583 f
< • . • • 8. 7
Max m.a.t- y
Regarding the shear stresses, the vertical gusset plate
: section under the wheel load (V) is of maximum shear stresses
where: m = 1.39-2.2 (~ + 1.27 CfiJ 2 - 0.25 <fiJ 3 . • 8. 8

!and is parabolically distributed. a, h = 'dimensions of the triangular bracket as shown in

Fig. 8.7.
. On the other hand the gusset plate buckling is prevented i f
\either
I
the stability condition of equation 8. 4 is utilized or a ,.~ck.ling Condition:
:strip of width (a sine/4) is assumed to act as a column with pin It is suggested to use either Equation 8. 4 or to assume
ends.
a strip of width (a sine/4) acting as a compression member.
i
I'

~CHAPTERS 709 710 CHAPTER8L

Gen~ral Remarks Regarding the Welded Brackets: -
Fig. B.B, illustrates the three common types of welded
major axis column brackets. For type (1) shown in Fig. 8.8.a i t
is suggested to-compute the maximum induced compressive stvesses
using Method (A) where. the tension force is directly transmitted
to the coltimn flange via the bracket top plate.

Type (2) showri in Fig. S.S.b is the simplest type where

A
the beam theory is directly ·applied along the vertical section •.
Sec.1 • 1
The induced stresses are similar to those previously outlined
using Method (B). 2 ... 1
l
Type (3) shown in Fig. S.S.c is similar to type (2).
•I "r;:;;;;-
~
,

The beam theory is to be applied along the vertical and the I Rolled Section

I low..
inclined sections.

It is generally recommended to use fitted vertical

I
"""'
~
TYPE (2)
""
stiffeners fillet welded to the bracket web to prevent the local I ----o;;-
buckling just below the crane girder section. A I
I
A

Sec .2 - 2
8.6. of Bolted Axis Column Brackets:_
Fig. B. 9, illustrates the three common types of bolted
major axis column brackets. As these brackets are subjected to
fatigue loadings as will be given in Section 8.10 high strength
bolts of the friction type are generally used.

Regarding the analysis it is recommended to apply Method

.(B) previously given in Section 8.5 for the. f~ushed bolted end TYPE(3)
plate shown in Fig. 8.9.a. It is necessary to check the induced (c)

compressive stress along section s 1- s 1 . If. an overstress did

occur then either the bracket height or the gusset plate
thickness had to be increased. However, the induced bending
stresses are conservative. The conservatism arises because no ·Fig. 8.8. Welded Brackets
 ~·.CHAPTERS 711 712
account is taken of the contribution of the top flange and the
CHAPTER sl.-
e~d plate to· bending resistanee:- ·····However,· be<;:ause of· the
'I ~-
influence of shear lag near the discontinuity at the corner and
the coincidence of the; critica1 sec.tion with. this discontinuity,

... . the contribution of the top plate is in fact insignificant.

addition, the induced shear stre:o;l:';es. on the critical
In
section

... •.... s 1 -s1

be checked.
from the tangential compone_nt. of the eccentric load should
A shear check on tile vertical section. adjacent to
I
A the point of applic~tion of the vertical crane load (V) is also
Sec 1- 1
required.

·- If the end plate is extended as shown in Fig. 8.9.b, the

·reasonable analysis should be Method ·(B) previously given in
Section 8.5. The bracket top flange is capable to resist the

... •++
induced tensile force while the gusset plate will be capable to
resist the induced .compression force"

•• •
TYPE(2).
(b)
Extended
.•
.. •
/1. I
Fig.
bolted bracket.
~.9.c, illustrates. an .. ancient
However high strength bolts
traditional ordinary
of the friction
type may be utilized. Regarding the analysis it should be
Sec 1-1'
preferable to apply Method (B). The induced stresses are to be
1 computed considering . only the · gusset plate as the resisting
steel section •
1
.!

8. 7.· Verti~:al Supports for Heavy Cranes:

for. heavy cranes, .separate vertical columns with built-up
or rolled sections are to be utilized to transmit directly the
crane loads to· the soiL . This configuration would be an
;.1ppropriate arrangement for. cranes capacity exceeding 20 tons
Sec. 1 - 1 where the column bracket$ discussed in the previous sections
.i
would probably show overstresses regarding the different steel
COmponents.
Fig. 8.9. Bolted Brackets
.-lfcHAPTER8 713 714 CHAPTERS . . .
connections are either high strength bol_ts of the friction type
.. '·. " or--in-l4~4--t.ent-7·f-illet. weld' lines~ . ~""-'---~-'""-··
;:_·..::·-:- ·:.:_:.-·
8~JF ~t:~hin8 ~fVertical-Suppor'~'~~~:git-d~r Connections:
~U~ll.7 .the crane girders are 'sifupli~ ~pported beams, hence
thti'-_iil(!$t(·,:l~ortant
; --.,-' :·<'. - . - - - desi:ifu:~.:
aspect of the ' . . . i~ : ·-_,_ the assurance
' of the
end rotations which will occur. Even with a small deflection as
-+-iI l-t
I . •
~ ._.
prescribed by the E.C.P. 2001 limitation of (L/800), beam end

... , ....
I
... I r+ rotations of 0.2° will occur repeatedly._

.,., Crane Column

Fig. 8.11. a, illustrates a crane. column vertical support
1 '• -\.__
1 con:(iguration where the end-bearing.; stiffeners .are positioned
. .· ·. . .
L. .J directly over the column flanges. ·The'column c:ap and the bolts
attac:hing this cap to. the crane ~icde_r flange must cbe capable to
resi~t . the induced· uplift which corresponds to · the end beam
rotations. To ensure this transmition a. thin cap is to be
utHized, fn addition the bolts must" .be positioned as far as
possible from the column and· beam web. This will lead to the
adequate required flexibility.

Sec. 1 -1 Fig. 8.11.b shows another alternative where the end-bearing

stiffeners· ·are transmitting the vert,ical crane load to the
column web via additional vertical web column stiffeners, a
Fig. 8.10. Crane Columns for Heavy Cranes
simple additional pack. plate may also be utilized .

The utilized additional crane column is to be either laced . Fig, 8.11.c, iilustrates two . extended. end plates fillet
or battened to the nearest vertical column of the main welded to the crane girders ·wi~h a slot into a recessed keep
structural system. Fig. 8.10, illustrates a crane battened plat~.
column where the batten plates or the lacing bars are to· be 8.9. ·.Beam Lateral Supports:
designed in accordance to the prescriptions · of ·Chapter 3 Crane girder lateral supports are . needed to transmit. the
(Volume 1). These batten plates and lacing bars are required to lateral shock (surge) applied at the cran~ rail level to the
.
provide sufficient stiffness to ensure that the crane column and columns of the main structural systems. The most efficient
the vertical collllllri of the main structural system are acting lateral support ·arrangement is that one which is positioned
compositely. The fasteners of the batten plates and lacing bars
close to the crane rail level.
 CHAPTERS 715 716 CHAPTERS
Fig. 8.12.a. illustrates the most effective restraint
. ,.t lateral configuration where the induced moments due to the
eccentricity are minimum. While if configuration. (B) shown in
Fig. 8.12.b is utilized, the induced moments are important and
.. ' must be taken into account for the design of the lateral support
steel elements. As the lateral support is connected to a
I vertical crane stiffener. it is essential to weld this stiffener
I ·~ to the top flange of the crane girder to minimize as much as
lI i.t ~
(a) sec.1-1 possible the stress concentrations.

Similarly Fig. 8.13 shows the details of a crane column

lateral support.
!•t
It is to be noticed that as with the vertical supports
.''
' ''
•' previously discussed in Section 8. a. the lateral supports must
'' ''
provide accommodations to repeated end .beam rotations. Some

I' designers specify slot ted holes to ensure the required

flexibility but unfortunately these are unlikely to permit
J movement in practice. However for heavy duty installations Fig.
'
i., "' 8.14 shows three configurations. For case (a) link members are
'
~
,_j
(b) sec.1-1 i attached to the upper crane girder flange by pins to transmit

I the lateral shock (surge) to the adjacent columns. tl;lis should

ensure adequate flexibility. While case (b) comprises an upper
!... 1 -,.-._J-,;--v-r steel horizontal plate attached to the upper crane flange and to
~==i
additional secondary beams. This steel plate should transmit
the lateral shock (surge) and may be utilized as a walkway.
Configuration (c) is similar to (b} with the only difference
that secondary beams have been replaced by transverse steel
plates forming a Tee section with the surge horizontal plate.

8.10. Fatigue Stress Computations:

(c) Sec.1-1 The main problem which arise f~r cranes and th~ir

supporting structural elements is the.designer misunderstanding

Fig. 8.11. Detailing of Vertical Crane Support Connections
·Of the crane load history.
 CHAPTERS 717 718 cHAPTERs I,.
' ..
'
·1fF···-·
..
'

II
i;

sec. 2 2·

View2-.!_

~ <
TYPE (A}

(a l

J = [i='

c:::::
i !!=

.A
li
r
VIEW 3-3 VIEW 4-4
i.,.3 4 ... i

View2 -2

TYPE (81

{b)
~C.1-1_
sec. 1 -1

Fig. 8.12. Lateral Supports in Bracket Fig. 8.13. Lateral Support. in Bracket
Connections (Light_Cranes) Conn~ction (Heavy Cranes)
 ,J CHAPTER 8 721 722 CHAPTERS
The classificat.ion of the steel components comprising those·
regarding steel bracket---is-listed in Table (8. 2) a:s ·fol-l~WS0--'-· · Group. 2: ..Welde-.Str-uctural Elements

Note The arrow indicates the location and directi.on of the Description Illustration· Class

stresses for whi~h the stress range is calculate.d_ •.. 1

~·
4.1. Base. metal in members
without attachments, puilt up
plates or shapes connected by {a)-L=::::
Table 8.2 continuous fun· penetration
:::::tl-

c~ J
groove welds or by continuous B
fillet welds carried out from
Croup 1: Non-Welded Details both sides without start stop (b) or-...
positions parallel to the Plate as ·
direction of applied stress. H~n"ider
ge lhhown
an
Description Illustration Class
4.2. Same as (4.1.) with welds B E orE'

·~~
1.1. Base metal with rolled· or having stop - start positions. B'
cleaned surfaces; flame cut ("
edges with a surface roughness A .
less than 25 ?m 4.3. Base metal in members
without attachments, built-up
(c) J .
t .2. Base metal with sheared or plates or shapes connected by
flame. cut edges with a surface continuous full penetration
8

<•lc~J
roughness less than 50 ?m groove welds with backing bars B'
not removed, or by partial
2.1. Base metel at gross section penetration groove· welds parellel
of high strength bolted slip to the direction of applied
resistant (friction) connections, stress.
except axially loaded joints 8
which induee out· of plane 5. Base metal at continuous
bending in connected material. manual longitudinal fillet or full
penetration groove welds carried
out from one side only. A good
2.2. Base metal at net section c
~·
fit between flange and web
of fully tensioned high strength plates is essential and a weld
., bolted bearing type connections 8'
I
preparation at the web edge
such that the root face is
·2.3. Base metal at net section adequate for the achievement of
of other mechanically fastened
joints (ordinary bolts & rivets). - D
regular root penetration.
6. Base metal at zones of

~
3. Base metal at net section of intermittent longitudinal welds
with gap ratio g/h :<;; 2.5 D
eye-bar head or pin plate.

?.. Base metal at zones

E
containing copes in
longitudinally welded T- joints.
~ D

8. Base metal at toe of welds

on girder webs or flanges
adjacent to welded transverse
stiffness.
c~J c
 CHAPTERS 723 724 CHAPTERS

Description Illustration Class. Description Illustration Ciass

11.1. Base metal and weld

9. L Base metal and weld metal metal at transverse full
at full penetration groove penetration groove welded
welded. splices ( weld made D
splices on a backing .bar. The

from both sides ) of parts of
similar cross· sections ground
flush, withgrinding in -the
direction of applied.· stress and
weld soundness established by
radio graphic or ultrasonic
inspection.
I from the edges of the stressed
.i
~
end of the fillet weld of the
--~~ B backing strip is more than 10-
mm from the edges· of the
stressed plate
11.2. Same as ( 11.1) with the
fillet weld less than 10-mm
E
plate.

'·~·J
9.2. Same as (9.1.) but with
reinforcement not removed and c 12.1. Base metal at ends of
less than 0.10 of weld- width:
partial. length welded. cover
plates narrower than the· flange Plate a . .
9.3. Same as (9:2.) with or lrid s sho.,.11
reinforcement more than 0.10 having square or tapered ends, · fliUlge er th~
of weld width. · D with or without. welds across ii:: E or ·E' ·

("~ory
the ends or wider than the
flange. with welds at the. ends.
10.1. Base metal and weld metal Flange thickness < 20-mm E
at full penetration groove
welded splices· (weld made from Flange thickness > 20-mm. · E'
both sides) at .transitions in 12.2 Base metal at ends. of
-) ,
width or thickness, with welds partial length welded cover E
ground to provide slopes no plates· wider than the flange
steeper thim 1 to 2.5 with B'
without end welds. ...
grinding in the direction of ~

i
1.
applied stress, and with weld
soundness established by
radiographic or ultrasonic
-~
- 13. Base metal at axially loaded
members with fillet welded -~
inspection. ··

102. Same as (10.1.) but with

connections.
b < 25-mm

b > 25-mm
-ce;;c:- E
,
E
reinforcement not removed and
c 14. Base metal at members
less than 0.10 of weld width.

10.3. Same as (10.2.) with slopes

· connected with transverse fillet
welds. (biJ- c
more than 1 to 2.5 ·
D 16.1. .Base metal at full
penetration weld in cruciform D

~
joints made of a special quality
10.4. Same as (10,1.) to (10.3.} weld.
but with welds made from one
side only. E' 15.2. Same as (15.1) with partial ,
penetration or fillet welds of E
normal quality.
 CHAPTERS 725 726 CHAPTERS

Description Illustration Class

Description Illustration Class
16. Base metal AT PLUG OR
SLOT WELDS. -~..:::::- E 19.3. Same as ( 19.2.} but
reinforcement not removed
R > 610-mm '
c
17. Base metal and attachment
at fillet welds or partial Groove or fillet weld 610-mm > R > 50-,.mm . c

~-
penetration groove welds 150-mm > R > 50-mm
withmain material subjected to D
longitudinal loading and weld . R > 50-mm
termination ground smooth R
E
R > 50-mm D 19.4. Same as (19.2.) but with
unequal thickness . '
.,
R f 50-mm E
R > 50-mm D
..

~
18. SBase metal at stud- type R < 50-mm:
shear connector attached by E
fillet weld or automatic end c 19.5. Same as (19.4.) but with .
·. :
weld. reinforcement not removed and
for all R /
.E.. . .
:'
19.1. Base metal at details '''••

attached by full penetration " .. ....

-
~ - ~· ' ..
20. Base metal at detail . .
groove welds subject to ·~

longitudinal loading with weld

attached by full penetration .. ··- ·L. '· ·:.•·";
groove welds subject to .-• ..
termination ground smooth. longitudinal loading ..
,• ·,; :~.:-

Weld soundness established by ·. ..

50-mm< a <l2b or 100-mm
-~-·
radiographic or ultrasonic Groove weld D
inspection

~~
R > 610-mm a >12b or 100-mm (b<25-mm) - --...:.· E
B
610-mm· > R > 150-inm c a >12b or 100-mm (b>25.:..mm) E'
R
150-mm > R > 50-mm D
21. Base metal at detail

~-
R < 50-mm attached by fillet welds or
E partial penetration groove
I 19.2. Same as (19.1.) with welds subject to longitudinal
transverse loading, equal loading
thickness, and reinforcement a< 50-mm · c
removed.
R > 610,-mm B I 50-mm< a <12b or 100-mm D
610-mm > R > 150-mm
150-mm > R > 50-mm
c
D
a >12b ·or 100-mm (b.<25-mm)

a >12b or 100-mm (b>25-mm)

~- E
E'
R < 50-mm E
 728 CHAPTER8L
. . CHAPTERS 727
Group · 4: Orthotropic Deck· Br1(!jes
Group 3: Fasteners· (Wefdnmd · bolts)

Description Illustration Class Olustration Class

Description
22.1. Weld metal or full
-~
~ 1(1:£
1- . 29.1. Base metal at continuous
penetration groove welds parallel
·B
. . .;· : '·' .<.·
longitudinal rib with or without 1 I c
c~~,
lo the direction of applied
stress ( weld from· both sides) additional cutout in cross

[YJ li():k .I
girder.( Bending stress range in
·.·.· . - :, 1··.··....
22.2. Same as
(22;L) but with
. __

c
the rib)
weld from one side o~ly. . ·. .... . '
t ~ 12mm
. . : . D
~t:::r:::B-
22.3. Weld metal of pa~I· .. 29.2. Same as (29. L}
penetration transverse groove t > 12mm
\;, 'F
weld based on the efreclive
throa~ area of the weld.

c~J i
30. Base metal at seperate
·longitudinal ribs on each side of
the cross girder. (Bending stress
I
I
I
I
I
v I
I
I
I
I
I
I !
t

~~():h ---~
i
I

E'
range in the rib)

23.1 Weld metal of. continuous

manual or automatic
longitudinal fillet welds
transmitting continuous shear .
:

flow and fillet welded lap joints. ·

23.2 Weld metal of intermittent ·
.
~··' ..
-
,.;
D
31. Base metal at rib joints
made of full penetration weld
with backing plate.( Bending
stress range in the rib)

32.1. Base metal at rib joints

®11 D

~·
longitudhial fillet welds made of full penetration weld
transmitting a continuous shear E without backing plate. All welds

~
now. ground flush lo ·plate surface in
the direction of stress. Slope of 8'
thickness transition < 1:4.
-~~
23.3 Weld metal at fillet. welded
lap joints. {Bending stress range in the
t
E rib)

-~== 32.2. Same as (32.1.) with weld

reinforcement < 0.2
c
t
24. Transversally loaded fillet
E
welds.
25. ·Shear on plug or slot welds. F
33. Base metal at connection of
continuous longitudinal rib to
cross girder. {Equivalent stress
UtM M
E'
range in the cross girder web) .

·~.
26. · Shear· stress on nominal
area of stud-type shear
34.1 .. Weld metal at full
\]/A;
connectors.(Failure in the weld
or heat affected zone.)
. F
penetration weld connecting
v D

r
deck plate to rib section.
27.1. High str(mgth<bolts in ·· .. ·:··· .
.·
single or double shear (filled
boll of bearing type);
·.
c 34.2. Weld metal at fillet weld
E'
connecting deck plate to rib
27.2. Rivets and ordinary bolts section.··
in shear. D
28. Bolts and threaded rods in
tension (on net area) F
 730 CHAPTERS
i . . . CHAPTERS 729 8.4. Allowable Fatigue Stress Range Fsr
Group 5 High Strength Bolts. .of the frict~on type =. for Numb~~ ~f Constant Stress Cycles.
.'' '

'. 5.1 High Strength Bolts subjected to shear fatigue lo<:!-d,ing .

'):
F (t/cm2)
b(IHs (10.9) and (8.8) of th~ fri6hon type
(***) sr
For high strengtii
Detail
1'·. (i.e tightened to th~;~~~nect~d ·plates by a deter~iAi~~',l:to~gUe) and
1 X 10
5 5 X 10
5 2 X 10
6 > 2 X 10
6
l,; Class
subjected to· she<:!-r. ~aUgue loading the aiio~~¥];~ friction Cycles Cycles Cycles
Cycles
resistance (P ) rem~i~· l,Ulchanged as for static loa~:(~~/ :p is to
s ... ·'·'·=··· >,' .:::·· . . "''' ... ·s. 1.68
be determined using T~b}e 2,6 of Chapter (2). 4.30 2.52 1.68
A
2.00 1.26 1.12
B 3.42
5.2 High StrengthBo.it~ .subjected to external. terisiori fatigue B' 2.77 1.62 1.02 0.85

1.45 0.91 0.70

loading :- c 2.48
0.71 0.49
Yhen subjected. to./ tensile fatigue loading, . the ~llowable D 1.92 1.12 J
. •, ~·.
0.89 0.56 6.32
stress range for. High Strength =Bolts. of 'the :frictiQ.n :ctype sha·ll E 1.53
0.69 0.41 0.16
not exceed the following;,:-,. E' 1.11
0.65 0.40 0.25
F 0.72

Table K3.'High Strength .Bolts· (TenSion)·:.

Refer to:
2 . '
Allowable Stress Range. F . O:Jcm 1 .· Example 8.1 (Design of crane girder) .
'J ' Number of Cycles . sr
(N) 8.8 10,9.
Example 8.2 (Minor column Axis-Welded Bracket).
N < 20,000 2.9 3.6'
- Example 8.3 (Minor column Axis-Bolted Bracket).
20,000 < N ~ 500,000 2.6 3.2
'
Example 8.4 (Major Axis column-Yelded Bracket).
500,000 < N 2.0 2.5''
.
Example 8.5 (Major Axis column-Bolted Bracket).
(c) Determine the stress range (***) wh.ich. corrECsponds to
the connection category ( L e. class) using Table (4~ 2} of the Example 8. 6 (Major Axis column-Yelded Bracket).
E.C.P. 2001 or the Table 8.4 as. follows
Example 8. 7 (Major Axis column Bolted Bracket)·
•*** Stress range = the algebric difference between two
extreme values of nominal stresses due to fatigue ,'i~a,(Js. This ** **
may be determined through .standard elastic analysis of the
extremes of a stress history record taken from strain gauges
placed at appropriate locations.
 . . . .C:::HAPTER8 731 732 CHAPTERsL
C. Total Straining Actions:
Design of CraneTr,;ic~G:i,rder
M
x( L.L. + impact 1
Example (8. 1):
Design a crane track girder knowing the following:. Qy = 16 x 1.25 + 0.50 = 20.50 tons.
( L.L. + impact
1- Spacing between frames = 5.0 ms.
Q. = 1. 60 ton. M = 1.60 mt.
X y
2- Reaction of crane girder on either of · the crane track
girders is two concentrated loads 10 tons each, spaced D. Braking Force (B. F.)
2.0 ms apart. B. F. = ( L PL.L. / 7 ) / number of columns. (8 columns)
Design the.crane girder. = ( 10 + 10 ) / ( 7 X 8 ) = 0.357 tons.

Solution
\ (2) Design as Rolled Section (1st Alternative):
(1) Loads: . JY H
MX MX +~y­
_
A. Dead Loads:
z zX / < 1.40 x 1.20 t/cm
2 c:::=<i,:=:::J
Assume the own weight of the crane
fb- + 2
y .
••
·~
X . ,.•.
., track.girder to be 200 kg/rn'. o-zo t/m'
X
-·-·T·-·
. ~
l )i;''''''''''·'''''''A Choose B. F. I. Section (Z ; 3 Z ).
X y ·.
!
M = 0.20
XD.L .
X--
(5)2
8
= 0.625 mt. L S·Ofi'IS. J 20.625x100 + 1.6 X 100 + +
____
y
-----·--
...·-----l~· --- ....
< 1.4x1.2
I
zX !x! Z
! 2 3 X
I
Q
YD.L
= 0.20 X z(5) = 0. SO ton.
3 3
Z
x.req.
= 1799 em . Try B.F.I. # (32) zX = 2020 em
l B. Live Loads:
A. Compactness of section regarding L.T.B . •
20 X 2
M = 2 = 16 mt.
~=
X
x(n) 5 " Lu = 20. b. / ,f;-y = 20x30 / 387.3 ems > 500 ems unsafe

M
y = 0.10 X 16 = 1.60 mt
(lateral shock)
I:
HOms
S·Oms
2·50ms
f'' L
u
=
1380 • Af.
d • F
y
: 1380 X 30 X 2.2
32 X 2.4
1 0
X . 1185. 9 ems ..> 500

l'""' i'
O.K.
3
Qy = 10 + 10 X S = 16 tons.
2·0
A No need to compute the L.T.B. stresses as 1185.9 > 500 ems
I 3·0
·Q
X = 0.1 X 16 = 1.60 ton. 1: S·Oms j The section is noncornpact regarding L.T.B.; F = 0.58 Fy .
bx
. I! ..1
I
CHAPTER 8
Compactness of section regarding Local buckling
733 734

0.625 32250
CHAPTERSL

_: i All---rol-led- sections are fullfH:ing· the width/thickness ratios

0::77 =-I--
f X
i
;l regarding compact sections. In order to avoid repetition the steel
4
'I
I I

j 1 elements
' ·

are
'

compact regarding local buckling. Here the I

X
= 39732 cm
req.
\compactness is governed by the lateral torsional buckling.
I Choose B.F.I. U (36)
! B. Check on Stresses:

20.'625 100 = 2 .· . · 2 D. Web crippling stresses:

1 fbt (Case I) = --:2"'0;;;2"'0~---- X
1. 02 t/ em < 1. 4 t/ em .
The local buckling of the crane girder web is to be
checked at concentrated load locations (i.e. at wheel load_s and
M H
fbt (Case II) = ZX = 20.625 X100 + 160 X 2. . 2 reactions). · If . necessary, vertical stiffeners are to .be
+ =z-/::.,Y--=2 2020. 661 = 1 · 50 t/cm The ·induced crippling
X y introduced to prevent the crippling.
2 s;tresses are to be computed in accordance with Clause 3. 6. 6 of
< 1.4x1.2 t/cm O.K.
the E.C.P. (2001) where the crippling stresses must not exceed

0. 75 Fy.
(O.K.)
(a) At llheel Load: -,
10tors

f
llheel load ~ 10 tons. /
/
'' Rait
2 2 = rail
/
' _l
0.006 t/cm < 0.84 x 1.2. t/clli b
1
height + k /
'
b =·7:5 + 2 X 2~4 f /\4r.f. ___ .45"{'
(O.K.)
1

C. ·Check on Deflection:
I. Zb1 .I
bl = 1Z.3 ems.
M
x (L.L + impact)
16 x 1.25 = 20 mts.
i
10
f
crp =2 X 12.3 X 1.4 ~ms
8 X 20 t ./
lJ
eq. = ---=- 6.40 t/m' = 0.064 t/cm' w
2•
(5)2
I. = 0.29 t/cm < 0.75 F y o.k

4
5 \1 L 4
11.
act.
= 384
=:-::-e~q;-.-=--
E.I
5 X 0.064 X (500)
384 X 2100 X 32250 = 0.77 em. (b) At Reaction Location:
X
R =·20.5 tons .

A =
. 500
= 0.625 em < A Unsafe
b = 15 + k - 15 ~ 2 X 2~4
max. 800 ac~. = 19.8 ems.
 ~CHAPTERS 735
ZX ((} = 238 - 0.50 X 176
736 CHAPTER 8 L
1 4 ~- ~'~;~
2 5 2
f' · = 19 • 8°x. t/cm = 150-cm~-~
crp •
t./. < 0.75 F o.k
w y
Choose channel No. (20)

Generally the web crane girder

Properties of' the Section:
local buckling is s~tisf'ying the
2
crippling stress conditions f'or At = 132 + 32.2 = 164.20 em

1 rolled sections, and hence no need

= 32.20 (42.5x0.50+0.85-2.01}
I.
I
y
·] to do the above computations. 30cms j (132 + 32.2)

= 3.94 ems.
2nd Alternative
2
I
X
= 36970 + 132x(3.94) + 148
Design as a Built up Section: ·
y 2 4
+ 32.2x{16.1S) = 47565.60 cm
.. ~ Channel
[ ::] + [ :;] < 1.40 X 1.20
. My
= I + !2 I
fc~....---t
I
'\. '\. y X[ y (S. I. B)
60 :Y. 40 :Y.
60 Y. 1 4
./ = 1910 + 2 X 1440 =2630 em
[ 20
20.625x100 ;; 0. 6 0
z .
X 1. 4 x 1.2
X
I
z = 2046 em?. Z -- 25.19
X
-- 1888. 27 em3
X total·
Xtension ..
i y tt
z · . = 0. 70 Z . . = 1432 em •
3 •••• s.J.s. 42.5
x (S~.B) xtotal Zx = 18 IX
_
16
= 2619.25 em
3
~. .
70 Y. comp.
. . f.:--.-~ --,_
__ .....__
', ... . .. 1 ) . [
ChoOse S. I.B. No. ·( 42 / . Zy. = 176 cm3 zX = 1740 cm.3 1 I
2 y
/.
I Due to~Hy·
1.
60
zx
100
=o.40. x 1.40. x 1.20
y '\.
i 40 Y. Compactness of' cross section :-

3 Regarding the Lateral Torsional Buckling use Equ. 5. 37 by

z = 238 em. • = !2 zy (S.I.B)
. . .~. zX ([)
ytotal replacing b =4 r
y
•
I cHAPTERS 737
738 CHAPTER 8 a,.
I
y 2630 Example (8.2):
==-=--~~~~
3.2. 2 + 16. 3x2. 3 = 6.14 ems
-· ·- '"ne~a-gn. the required wel<i--leng't:Iis as wen· as the guss-et-·
Ac +Aupper flange of S. I . B
plates ;,f. the-b~acket shown in the figure below to resist . a

20x 4 x 6.14 verUcaf load V = 20. o tons and a lateral shock H = 1. 60 ton.
= = 317.1 ems < 500 ems unsafe
....-r- Th~~~e~~~g.force B.F. 0. 30 tori .
y
Sciitltion
The section is noncompact = 0.58 F ..
y

Pr~liminaryDimensioning:

Check on Stresses:
20.625 X 100 2 . 2 The dimensions of the bracket can be assumed as follows:
1.09 t/cm < 1.40 t/cm
1888.27
. h.e: 1.5 H b ;;;; 2. B
fbc = 20.625 X 100 + 1.60 X 100 = 1.395 t/cm2 < 1.68 t/cm2
2619.25 263
where:
20.50 2 2
qy = = 0.31 t/cm < 0.84 t/cm H, B · = height and flange width of crane girder cross
1.53 X 42.5
(Safe) section.

Lateral Torsional Buckling: t, tfc = gusset plate and column flange thicknesses.

.F = 800 X (16.3
500 X
X
42 .. 5
2.3 + 32.2)
X l . -O = 2.758 t/cm
2
(Safe) The Fatigue Effect ,(Refer to Chapter 4 of the. E.C.P. 2001)
L.T.B.

6
No. of cycles= 2 x 10 (Table 8.1)
Check on Deflection:

Y
eq.
= 0.064 t/cm' Detail Cla~s and, Stress Range .. (Tables 8.2 and 8.4):

4
5 X 0.064 (500)
••• A t.
ac •
= 384 X 2100
X
X 47565.60
= 0.5214 em< 0.56 em Safe
Bracket Component Item no. Class Stress Range (F )
sr·
2
Web crippling stresses: Section (S1 - s1 ) 14 c 0.91 tlcm
Proceed as 1st Alternative, the crippling is safe. E' 2
Fillet weld 23.3 0.41 t/cm
 CHAPTER$ 739 740 CHAPTERsL

·e = 27 cose- 44 sinS= 27 x 0.853 44 X 0.521 0.107 em

M~
X
= (V case x 44 cose - V sine x e)

44·0cms 1S·Ocms

s:F: 0.357 tons

cos e = o.~53 ~~5:---~~~,
f
I sine ,;, 0.521 18·0cms
!

.
:i
-=,r=--=
~ r+J·

-
i
-~--
59-0cms .I
l 30.cms
J t
--2
(1) Check of Stresses: M = 21 (44 X 0.853 0.521 X 0.107) = 671.14 t.cms
X

(A) Check of Stresses Along the Inclined. Section (S - s )

1 1 My = 0.357 X 44 case = 13.4 t.cms I. ( Braking force )
Approximate Method (A):
' The straining actions due to dead loads being of minor N =V·sine = 21 x 0.521 = 10.94 tons
.·.\effect
i
VD.L. = 0. 5 tons . compared to fatigue loads including Q = V case= 2.1 x 0.853 = 17.9 tons
impact ( VL.L. +I = 20.5 tons
. vertical foece is taken equal to 21 tons. The
for simplicity the
max. allowable
total
Mt = 0.357 x 0.107 = 0.0357 t.cm I (neglected) (Braking force )

stress for every component of . the bracket due to the total

Shearing force along vertical section below the vertical force
!loads will. be the value of the allowable stress
' to the corresponding class.
range according
V = 21 tons. l
15
I Straining Actions Along Section Height of the corresponding section = 18 + 36 X
59
= 27.15 ems
i
. .!
Assume that the lateral shock "H" ·is transfered directly to Properties One Gusset Plates .
the upper plate "A". (Section s1 - S ):
1
~CHAPTERS 741 742 CJIAPTERS
Point (A):
t .=.2 ..2 <;Ill$
2·2ons
I =2 X 2.2 x
46.09 3 __
~ 35832 em
4 u-,- = ~X 2~;::6 = 0.132 2
t/cm < 0.84 t/cm
2
( Sec. s1 - s1) .
XX
( 3 21 2
o.k.

x 2.2 = o. 263
I
i t/cm ( vertical section )
I yy ~ 2 X

~ 59261 cm4
46.06 X 2.2 X 17.1 2
I 54cos
46.06cms
e: 2x 2 x 27.15
o.k.

I
p
=I X + I
y
=95093 cm4 X,-o-Jll-1--l-1--llf.,-· I (B) Exact Stress
Yielding:
(Refer to Section 4.11

A= 2 x 2.2 x 46.06 = 202.66 cm2

Check of Stresses:
I,
L. 32+2.2=34.2 J
J a 59
h-54=L09

Use Equation (a) -Section 4.11.

2 3
0.053 2 = 1.39 - 2.2 X 1.09 + 1.27 (1.09) - 0.25 (1.09)

11 :;;: 0.167

r t =
F
v 21
.a.z = 0.91 x. 59 x 0.167 = 2 · 34
.
em
I c
"':,

A·-·+·-·
I
Hence choose t = 2.4
Allowable Stress Range

ems.

Buckling Condition:
J o The Bracket can be.approximated
q
N to the triangQlar shape.
A
Hence: L "' j 592 + 542 - 80 ems a = 44 + 15 = 59 ems
stresses are in t/cm2
59
Point (B): Effect of
h = 54 ems ; cosa = 80 = 0.7375 sin« = 0.675
Bracking Force
"':, Use Equation 8.2 to compute the buckling coefficient (k):
N M M
f
B
=A + Z
X +
Z
y -- 10.94
202.66 +
671.14 X 23.03
35832 +
13.40 X 18.2
k = 3.2- 3.0 (~=) + 1.1 <~!> 2 = 1.236
X y 59261

fB = 0.053 + 0.431 + 0.00411 = 0.488 t/cm2 < 0.91 t/cm2 Substi lute in Equation 8. 4 to get the corresponding
class (C) thickness ( t):
 . . . . CHAPTERS 743
'144
3,------
t = 0.1
- J 211 _X23659 =- 1.0 em
4
•I =•I •+!I :::::·60689.25 em
'. o I£ a strip o£ width (59 sin9}/4 = 9.95 ems ·.p :x · .,.y

is assumed to act as a column , sStr:aining rA&tioJJS :

J 9.95 X t
3
~ Effect 'Of ibEaftiqg :force
i m1n
- = 9.95 X t X 12 = jiz = t~JI2
.N =.05.357 'toos
l
. I

\
i 80 .[;; 277.13 ... = ·.0~357 :-x .(36-+ 'LO ·+ 27}
L/i = X
= :22.cB5 rt.~cm.

Using the Euler buckling equation with (t=2.2cms) we get: • ·=•0..:357 :a: (44 + .20.25r
y
·•= ·22.;;·93 t~cm.

277 13 2 2 2
F = 1.4- 0.000065 c · J = 0.368 t/cm < f .· = 0.488 t/cm
c t 8
Unsafe
!ft:t = ·2rf. X :{'44, + 20.25}
= 1349.•25 t.cm.
Increase t =. 2.4 ems
Q ·= 2LO tims.
y
f = 0.488 x 2.2 = 0.447 t/cm2
B At Point (Al:

277 13 2 2 2 2
F
c
= 1.4- 0.000065 < · >
2.4
= 0.81 t/cm > r
8
= 0.447 t/cm Fsr = 0.4'1 Vcm

R II .y II .x
·I For this exact stress analysis refer to Section 4.11. f =-+~+·_2__
.. I
bt . A lx Iy

(2) Fillet Welds Connecting Bracket to Column (Class E' ): 2o~3~os + 2228! ;2!~o + :z;~;3~o:?~ =u.~s
Assume the size of weld = 1.00 em.
2
A = 54 1.0 + 2.x 27 1.0 108 em
w
X X
qllt
= 1349.25 x 33.75
2 X 60689~25
= 0 • 375. t ,,'cm:z
b2 2
x =
2b + h
- (27) -
-108- 6.75 ems

I =
54 xf.o + 2 X 27 X 1.0 X (27)
2
= 52488 em
2 fprinc. =r0-~35t•J I(~}21+ (0.375}2 = 0.38 f.lcm2
X 12
B~F.. B. F. < 0. 43 t/cul ~e
 ._...CHAPTER 8 745 746 CHAPTERS a,.
At Point (B):
B. F.
__.-__-
.
Example (8.3):
····--···
..,.._'::..., __________________

; . .. ' . Design the bracket sho~ in the figure below to resist a

--o:3s·r 22. 85 x 27. o + 22.93 x 6.75
------------------·-·-·
= 0 _008 t/c~2
total .vertical load V = 21. 0 tons and. H = 1. 60 ton. The
fbt = 2 X 108 + 2 X 52488 2 X 8201.25
breaking force = 0.357 tons. Design the bracket considering the
21.0 2
I.
q ..!- =2 X
_
54.0 X 1 0
= 0.1944 t/cm . fatigue effect of the applied dynamic loads.
1. Q
Solution
. -- .......
~ 1349.25 X 27 2
qMt(x) = 2 X 60689.25 = 0.3 t/cm ~ :~ . .
(1) Preliminary Dimensioning:
The dimensions of the bracket can be assumed as·shown below.
q T 1357.25 X 6.75
Mt(y) = 2 X 60689.25 = 0.075 t/cm
2
The thickness of the bracket is taken equal to the column flange
thickness. Check.Section s1- s1 as in Example (8.2).

2 . ..-:- . -·~' ,_. 2

2 (2) Bolts Connecting Bracket to Column of Grade (10~9)- Friction
(0.3) + (0.1944- 0.075) =-0 ....32-2-- -t.l-cm
Use .H.S.B.'s:Trytwo rows of 5 bolt:s each at 1'08 nun vertical
pitch and )-50 nun horizontal pitch as shown in the figure.

f .
pr1nc.
=I 0. 02081 +
:, ~ :.
B. F. 2
B. F. < 0.41 t/cm
21 tons
Class iK.' CSafeJ B-F-1-36
v v.
r-
Use size of weld = s
0.322
X 1.0 = 0.79' - '1.00 em· ---- +: '
w 0.41
+·
••·
·-·
-··
w =
take s 1.00 em.

{
-"S1\

I t quit clear that the effect of th~' brap~}hg. force is

minor for both the gusset plate and the fillet weld the error is
!•'•
,.
•'•' r•
.54·0cms
•• •.
• ...
-~ 44·0cms
\.

\
I
-,
1&0cms
__j

..
L
less than 2%. Hence no need to take- Its -- effec-t illto h/2

consideration.
:-- ·. -:>:.· 1
L __ _
.. ..+ \
s,
tl.sl 15 h.s
30
B·F·[· 32
 .JI CHAPTER 8
Straining Actions:
747
= 1.544 ton.
748 CHAPTERsL

Mx 0. 357 x (36 + 1-~--~~_> ___==_ __~~_-85 t. em. B.F. (Neglect)

1239 X 21.60
My = 0.357 x (44 + 15) = 21.06 t.cm. B.F. (Neglect) -·2--2 --2
2x4x(7.5 +13.15 + 22.87 }

Mt = 21 x (44 x 15) = 1239 t.cm = 4.45 tons

I Qy = 21.0 tons N = 0.357 ton B.F. (Neglect)

Qtotal = J(4.45+1.0S} 2 +(1.544}?
Properties of Area:
= 5.713 tons.
3
. . IX = 2 X 54 X 30 / 12 = 781320 em4 .
Qb = 5.713 tons.
3
Iy =2 x 30 x 54 / 12 = 243000 cm4 ·
For H.S.B. of the. friction type· behaving in Shear the

T1 (due to Mx) =
22
·~~ 7 ;2~ "
1 60
x<"1Sx 10.80 = 0.1 tons fatigue_phenomena has no effect. The high strength bolts are to

B.F. (Neglect) be checked as in static loads.

T (due to M } = 21.06 X 7.50 x 15 x 10.80 = 0.107 tons. Choose 11. S. B. M 20 Type (1 0. 9}, P = · 5. 877 tons
2 y 243000 s
B.F. (Neglect}
Qb = 5 . .713 < 5.877 tons (O.K .. }

T
ext,M = T1 + T
2
= 0.207 tons.l
2
For H~S.B. (tension}_ F
sr
= 2~50 t/cm Table 8.3
T = 0.357/20 = 0.015 tons
I
ext,N
I ll T =!_T = 0.1 x 0.22 = 0.022 ton. B.F. (Neglect}
10 ext
T
total = o.2o7 + o.o1s = o.22 1 X

ton~ J 0.022
= 0.00 t/cm
2
< 2.5 t/cm
2
(Table 8.3}
2.45
B.F. (Neglect} B.F. (Neglect}

qQ~ = 21/20 = 1.05 ton.

very safe
 . . . . CHAPTERS
Example (8.4):
749
750 CHAPTER 8 a,.
actions due to dead load alone vanish. Thus the maximum
Design Bracket "1" shown in the :figure below considering
allowable stress :for.each p~t of the bracket will be the value
the :fatigue e:f:fect. Neglect the e:f:fect o:f the braking :force "B.F."
of the allowable stress range :for :fatigue e:f:fect.
32-ocms
N.B. For such type, the :fillet welds joining the bracket to the
I n--r------ltnr~~7n.___H
Channel No. f24l
end-plate are critical with respect to fatigue stress range

I S·I·B· (42-SJ
which means that the design o:f the bracket must start
these welds.
with

I
I ST
Fatigue E:ffect:(E.C.P. 2001- Chapter 4):
6
I No. of cycles =2 x 10-

IQ)
rI
Fillet weld 12)

Fillet weld 111

l38·0cms Detail Classes and Stress (Table 8.2 8.3 and 8;

&F,. 32
51
J Bracket Component Item No. Class Stress Range
F
sr
t/cm2

j
1- 44·0cms
Fillet weld (1) 23.3 E' 0.41
I. 60·0 ems
l'
Sec. s1- s1· i4 c 0.91
VD.L. = 1.0 ton
H.S.B. - friction. - - -
~.L. = 0.0 H.S.B. (tension) - 10.9 table - 2.5
8.3
Vtotal : = 21 tons End-Plate 14 c 0.91

'
H = 1.60 ton (transmitted directly to beam-column). Stiffeners - -
I
-
B.F. = 0.30 ton (Neglect its e:f:fect on straining actions). Fillet weld(2) 23.3 E' 0.41

Sec. 52 - 52 1 A ' 1.66

The values of· forces for dead load alone are negligible
_compared to the total forces. \le can assume that the straining
 ..lcHAPTER8 751
752 CHAPTER8 ....
:Preliminary Design of B. F. I. Section:
1 Use B.F.I. D (38)
l)section ·s - Si: nre·- critical stress range . is ···-ffiat{if--fiie y
1 (1) ·Sect-ion {S
1
- s 1) (Class A): ®
i 2 c:=::::t:;::::::l ~
dfillet welds (1) which equals 0.41 t/cm Thus; .in choosing the I
ll
i /B. F. I. section of the bracket, the weld inertia· which resists
f
M
X
= 21 x 44 = 924 cm.t l;
': x____ _
ithe predominant moment (Mx = 21 x 44 = 924 t.cm)· is the main 138crns

c=::j~J
)!factor that governs that choice. Q
y
= 21.0 tons

The fillet weld thickness is chosen to be the maximum

allowable according to specifications. Thus, weld sizes around
Point (A):
L 30·0cms .I
the flanges and web are equal :to the flange and web thicknesses·, Sec. S1- S1
924
respectively. The weld inertia is a ratio of the B.F. I. section fb
Mx
=z = 26SO = 0.344 .t/cm2
X
inertia. 2
< 0.91 t/cm

2 ~·(1.57 ~1.60)- Zx B.F.I Safe (Class A)

x(weld shown in figure below)·
y
MX = 21 X 44 = 924 t.cm
---+--•A Point (B):

B
The most critical point will M.
fb ::; ~ (19-2. 4)
lbe point (B) which is af-fected by Z X · 19

:both normal and shear stresses. r X

I
,Thus, we shall reduce the maximum
l 924 (19-2.4) = 0.301 t/cm
2
!allowable stress by 35% to take
= 2680 X 19

into account shear stresses at (B).

. Q
qQ-1-.= -A-
M web
z-- X
~ 0.41 X 0.65 ~ Z = 3467 cm
3

xw / ~eq~ (weld) 21 2
= (38 - 2 X 2.4) X 1.40 = 0. 4 St t/cm
65 % to take effect of shear at pt. (B)

B.LI ~ 314.6577 =j
= 2208.3 3
2
X
cm3 use B.F.I 38 (2
X
= 2680 cm ) feq. (0.301)
2
+ 3(0.451)
2
= 0.837 t/cm
2
,/
Relation between welds and !-section 2
< 0.91 t/cm

. ·. Safe (Class A)
 ... CHAPTE~8 753 754
.'
.· CI{AfTER. 8:;..
<2r Veld "1" (Class E' ):
Point (A).:
To. e~e safety o£ the :fillet welds uSe weld size . equal
to. the :flange. thickness around. the :flanges . and web thickness . (19 + 2.4) = 0 .• 217 2
.t/cm
aroUnd the web .
2
< o:41t/cm

Approximate Analysis . ·. Safe (Class E')

T =M / d =.924 / (38- 2.4) = 26 tons Point (B):

Lw (around £lange) = 30 + 2 x 11.9 = 53.8.cms fb = 92491195

X 14. 20 ' . 2
= 0.143 .t/cm
q = 26 / (53.8 x 2.4) = 0.2 t/cm
2
21 2
qQ~ = 2 x 28.40 x 1.40 = 0 " 264 t/cm

Sa:fe (Class E')

2 2
. l Exact Analysis ·. · = 0.33 t/cm < 0.41 t/cm

:;o.cms Safe (Class E')

IX = 2 .X (1.4 X
28.4 3
-:n-)
~~r9. (3) High Strength Bolts (see Table 8i3)··: .··

+ 4 X (11.9 X 2.4) (M ». M )

1f·
. X y

M
T.= ~
C(l
· 924
=.(~-.2.~0) = 26.0 tons T

·+ 2 X (30 X 2.4) c=::l

I
I
'
r:=:::=l d~~:::
'92-'cn>S
(Using.four bolts per row)
26
tons
-
T/2

· . · Tbolt = g- = 3·2
FiUet weld t 11

Use H.S.B .. of the (10.9) type (

4 M16 T. = 9.89 tons

= 91195 em 1
. ( ; j~---

756 CHAPTERS
* Due to Homen t "Mx " :

,i on ~e; IH;Jf t ~--ft. t,~e vat.~ 9£ 924 x (47/2) t/·cm2

., in~ in the bolt pretensiqn
f -
1 - 30 X (47) 3 /12
= 0. 08 3
due to the external te~i()n .9D
, . . -
the .. bOlt
- ·- must be . obtained.
. . .,.· .-"
15.1 2
f
2 -- 0 . 083 x - - = 0.054 t/cm
23.50
i.e. Text.b =A T +_A C
T = 0.083 + 0.054 X 8.40·X 7.5
2
= 4.31 tons

AT= 0.10 x 4.3 =· 0.431 ton

i.e. A T e;;
1 .
10 Text,.b =AT 0.431
~ = 1.57 =
0.275 t/cm2

2
< 2.5 t/cm
Approximate design :-
.A simple . .: consist~
. . . . design .. ,. .. to use
·. 2 rows ~ound
2 the tension (Fatigue - Table 8. 3)
nan,ge of 4 bolts each I 1(1,6 U0.9) :.., 1.57 = em
· (B) · Ye Use Two Bolts Per Row:
Tbolt = 26 / ~ = 3.25 to~ 7·0
T
15
= 4.31 x - -
7.50
= 8.62 tons IT 'I 1
3·0t •
l~
(due to MX } ~
.AT= 0.1 x 3.75 = 0.~~ to~ . 5·4
2·4
5.4
T = 8.62 ·tons + +
A fbolt = .0.325 / 1.~7 = 0.2 2
1,/~ . < 2.S Vcm
2 ext,b

=80.80
62
= 10.77 .. •
J
• tons.
(Eat~e - Table
-. - ..-: l.. -1.: . -;· .. . ·>~- :_ :·
8. 3) ·
_.' _--·

Use bolts M20 {10.9)

(.A) I,f Ve Use Four Bolts Per R~: Yhere ( T. =15. 43 tons } .
1
l1'te mOst str~~ bolt sbalJ be bo,lt "1". d,ue to. the IIIOIIlents
H . ·. AT= 0.10 x 8.62 = 0.862 tons.
X
 . . . CHAPTERS 757 758 CHAPTERS

A F'bolt ='!T = 0.862 Take tst.= 1.1 em.

= 0.351 t/cm2
14 30
·
1.1- - 13 < 16 Safe
< 2.5 t/cm
2
(Fatigue - Table 8.3}
(6) Velds o£ Stiffeners (Fillet Veld 2) - Class (E' ):
(4) End-Plate (Class C):
Ve shall get the tension corresponding to the right F
sr
= 0.41 .t/em2
upper two bolts (1 & 2) due to M and M .
X y height of lines (1) = 38 - 4 x 2.4 28.4 ems
M
T = a-
X 924
26.0 tons
£lange = (38 - 2.4) length o£ lines (2) = 15 - 1.4/2 - 2.4 = 11.9 ems

T 12
ems
12[. .{1)

Lines (1 - class E' 3} F - 0.41 t/cm2

\

i. Me = X
8 = 39 t.cm. .(21 ==~~~~----------~------ sr

= J-3=-o=-6-x_x_,0-~-:..,.1-.
The vertical lines are assumed to resist the vertical £orce
Tep = j6
b £ Ml
al.
= 2.91 ems. V = 21 tons.

21
Vhere Fsr = 0.91 t/cm2 (Class C) s = -=--~~~--~~-
2 X 28.4 X 0.41
0.9 ems take s = 1.0 em.

Take Tep = 3.0 ems.

. 2
Lines (2) - class E' (23.3) F = 0.41 t/cm
=====-~=---=-------~----~ sr

(5} Sti££eners - No Fatigue e££ect :-

These weld are resisting the £oree "F" due to the eceentristy

Fone sti££. = V = 21.0 tons

of V = 21 ton where M = 21 x 7.5 = 157.5 t.em

21.0 X 7.5
F = (38 .. 0 ~ 2" X 2.4) = 4.74 tons
Take bst. < 30 ; 1.40 < 14.3 ems

21.0 4.74
= 15 em2 . s = 2 X 11.9 X 0.41
0.48 ems takes = 0.5 ems.

t
st. = 1415_3 = 1.04 em.
 .CHAPTERS 759 760 CHAPTER8L.
8.50 8.50 -
(7) Bolts Group (4): Fsr = 2.5
. 2
t/cm (H.S.B. 10.9 - Table 8.3)
M=H x = 1.60 x ~ - 6.80 t.cm

Class (F):
N =H ± 1.60 ton

1-8~.
MX = B.F. X (0.95. + 42.50)
= 13.035 t.cm
f1 = zM = 6.80
30 X
X (8.50/2)
. 3
(8.5) / 12
4-90
r:ti • 1-1--...;...;..-'~.-.;f---'-""
\," .

Use·Higb Strength Bolts: 2

= 0.0188t/cm

.. .•
·.·\

I £ = 13.035 X 15
I·
: 1 (0.0188) X 30
16.3 X :rcf3/ 12 T
ext,M 2 . 2

= 0. 0053 t/cm
2 x
8 50
· = 0.60 ton~ s.sE. .
ems ·
. .
···_..!_·"'---.
:
~L-~
\ ·.•· .. ,,,
:: ~-----~--~
•·
-
·) .

1 (0.0053) Text,N = no. = 1 ~

N 60
- 0.40 ton
. 1.. 30cms .I
Tbolt.= 2 2 x 16.3 x-15

·-' ... = 0.326 ton Text,M + Text,N · 0. 60 + 0. 40 - L 0 ton

AT= 0.10 X 0.326 = 0.0326 ton 1

AT= 10 ~ext.(M+N) = 0.10 ton

2
_AT
A £bolt - ~- < 2. 5 t/em
2 A fbolt = !T = ~:~~ = 0.12 t/cm < 2.5 t/cm
2
(H.S.B. 10.9-
s Table 8.3)

0.0326
2.5 = 0.013 em
2
- N.B Consequently Group of bolts (5) is safe.
:;I i~ •; ·. :. . . . ; 2
· • ·• Use M12 type (10.9) - A
s
= 0.84 em - P
s
= 1.83 tons (9) Sec. <s2 -

Check on Shear (No fatigue calculations for friction type) • 1-30

0 30
-rr-
.Q = ~ = 0.075 tons < P
s
= 1.83 tons) ·

( 8) _Bo_I_t_s_G.._r......o,-'up....,_(.:_2:...:)---=..an=d:;;;__(.:..:5:...:):._Fsr= 2 • 5 t/em 2 - .Tab 1 e 8. 3 : -

For constructi<m allowance use H.S.B's M12 type (10.9) on
both sides.
a--dis f. q -dist.
 ~ . . .CHAPTERS
762 CHAPTERS
761
I
Example (8.5):
!
'd
I
N = ± 1.60 ton. M = 6.80 t.cm Design Bracket "2'' shown in the figure· below taking the
fatigue effect into consideration...
f N + ~
act. = A . ZX
= 8 • 5 1~~- 30 + 6 X 6.80
1.3 X (8.5) 2
2
= 0.58 t/cm < 1.4 t/cm2 (Static)
2
< 1.68 t/cm (Stress Range)

lb = 32 .- 4 x 2.2 = 23.20 ems.

V = 21.0 tons

i . = iy = fl:Ay = j· 8.5 X (1.3)3 H = 1.60 tons

m1n. J~ 12 x (8.5x1~3)
B.F. 0.357 tons
= 0.·38 em ..
16cms 44 ems

· 60·0 ems
23.20
-·--
i . = 0.380 = 6 1. 82
m1n.

Sec. Sec. Weld Weld O.B. H.S.B Stiff- Weld

Item
s1-s1 s2-s2 (1) (2) (2) (3) ener (3)
1. 40 - 0. 000065

Class
c c E~ E'. D Table
-- E'
(14) (14) 23.3 23.3 27.2 8.3 23.3
2
= 1. 152 t/cm > f Safe F
sr
act .. 0.91 0.91 OA1 0.41 0.71 2.5 -- 0.41
t/cm2

the same stress ranges for bracket ".1" of Ell:: 8. 4 are used
here except for that of . section s1- s1 (steel plate with
transverse fillet weld) which will behave acording to category
2
(C) Item 14 with F = 0. 91 t/cm while in Ex. 8.4 the
.sr
connection was made with bolts and hence the corresponding Class
was (A) •
• j
 CHAPTERS 763
764 CHAPTERS
Preliminary Dimensioning:
First of all. .the . dimensions are determined according to the . 1 .. 3 . 1 . . -3 -3 . -3
J =
3 La t =3 (30 x 2 + 15 x 2 + SO x 1 ) 136.67 t:m4
previous experience as follows:

I• b=30cms
Straining Actions:.
Mx·= 21 x 44 ::= 924 .cm,t
44cms
H=36cms
b Q = 21.0 tons
y

l312H
My

Mt=
=. 0.357
0.357
x 44 = 15.7 cm.t

X (36 + 21.43)
(resi~ted.by upper :flange only)

= .20.;5 em. t (Its effect is

. neglected where the approximation· of Iy is calculated by. taking
the upper falnge only)
b/2 .1
Check on Stresses: point A point B point C point D
The following check of stresses will be done by the M M .x
f=~+-y- +0.348 -0.449· -0.422 --
approximatemethod (A} previously outlined in Section 8.5. I I .
t/cm2 t/cm2
y
t/cm2 t/cm2
X

(1} Vertical Section (S - s }: ~ ~

2
1 1 ---7
0.3 t 0.3 t · o.1sT1 0.15 rl
(Fsr = 0.91. t/cm } Class (C):
Q.Sx:
qQ (web only). = ----
I •b 0.00951 0.4441
y = 15x2x5~+50x1x27+60x1 X
(30x2 + 50x1 +15x2}

= 21.43 ems
Point (A): f prJ.nc.
. =
0 3 48
·
2
+ j [ 0 ·;39] 2 + (0.3} 2 = 0. 52 t/cm2
. 3 SO·Otms < 0.91
I
X
=
2
30x2x(20.43} +1x( ~~ · 5
2
·~
0 49 2 2
+1x50x(S.S7) 2 +1Sx2x Point (B): f . · = 0.449 + ( ] +(0. 3) = 0. 59 t/cm
prJ.nc,
c < 0".91
(53-21. 43) 2 = 66911 em4

I
y =
2 X
~
30
12 = 4500 em
4 Point (C): f .
prJ.nc. = 0.422
2

= 0.471
+

t/cm
J[ 0 -~22
2
< 0. 9.1
r + (0.0095 + 0.15)
2
'~ ;
·',,
. . . CHAPTERS 765 766 CHAPTERs It
J Point (D): q = _o. ~s + o. 444 <. 0.84 t/cm
2
0 K. For section s 3 -s 3 get the new value of :
4
y 19.08 ems, I 68968 cm and A 161.3 em 2
XX
(2) Check of Stresses Along the Inclined Section

14.175 653.5 X 35.63

+
161.3 68968

44.0ems 15ems
It is to· be noted that this stress is less than the
s
corresponding one for Section (S
2
1
-
1~ ,which was equal t? 0.512
t/cm . Stop the computation of stresses for points (A),: ·(c) and
(D).
• 'I
30.0ems

r
19.08ems
It::==w:===·=t- 2JJisin9
=2.71
ems
(3) Exact Analysis of Stresses:
(a) Yielding:
Refer to Section 4.11.

;~
. h=5oems a
h = 1.18
-~
ems·
l 35.63ems
)
Use Equation (a) of Section 4.11 to get the Z coefficient:·
2 . . 3
Z = 1.39-2.2 X 1.18 + 1.27 (1.18) - 0.2~ (1.18) ,
i
J
0.152
59.0ems
Hence: t = F v.a.Z - 21
0.91 x 59 x 0.152
= 2 . 59 em.
sr
Sine 0.675 Cose = 0.7375
Take t = 2.6 em. (very conservative where::<the ,contribution
L
of the upper and lower flanges are cancelled)
Induced Straining Actions are:
M
X
= 15.5 X 32.45 + 14.175 X 10.62 653.5 t.cm.
(b) Buckling Condition:
o The bracket can be approximated to the triangular shape
M
y (Neglect)
shown by the dotted line. Hence:

N = 14.175 tons so
.,,
a = 59 ems h = ems L = 77.33 - 77 ems
\' .'Jl. t<
Qy ;:: 15.5 tons
cose =
59
77.33
0.762 sine ::::
so' = 0.6'~6
77.33
 I cHAPTERS 769
770 CHAPTERS . . . .
= 5.79
2x(15 - 0.5 - 2)x0.41 = 0.56. em ~ s2 = 0.6 ems Straining Actions:
M =
X
2i x 44 = 924 em.t
,, '

I Veld (3): Class E• (23.3) Fsr = 0.41 t/cm2 My =0.357 x 44 = 15.7 em.t.

s = 5. 79 = 1 41 Mt = 0.357 x (36 + 21.43) = 20.5 cm.t

3 2(7.50 - 0.5 - 2)x0.41 . • em ~ s 3 = 1.5 ems

The stiffener thickness is to .be increased.to 1.5 ems also Qy = 21.0 tons ~

(61.Yelds Between Bracket and Column Class (E•) : Check on Stresses: point A point B point C point D
M M .x
The weld section is as shown: ·

=30x2
r ~Mc;s .1
f=~+-y-
I I
X y
+ 0.19
t/cm2
- 0.27
'2
t/cm
- 0.22
t/cm2
+ 0.13
t/cm2
~~gA
A + 13.5x2x2 + 2x46

+ 12x2 + 15x2 = 260 cm2 r

'Y=21·0cms
o. ,
113-5cmsl
2-0
.0
.o
qMt
Mt.r
= r;- 0.0035t o.oos5t 0.0044t 0.0026t

Y -- 260
1 (2x13.5x2x3 + 2x46x1x27 ~-----+IIU--· X
~ (web only} = AQ -- - - 0.228t"' 0.228t"'
+ 12x2x51 + 15x2x55 -
t.6·0cms web

30x2x1) = 21.0 ems ft ft 2 2

f
princ. --z + J (-)2 + (q)2 < 0.35 t/cm
2-0 max.
0
2
'-22
+ 2x46x6 + 12x2x3o- + 15x2x342 . f = 0.19 t/cm < 0.41 t/cm2
p. (A)
= 122350 cm4
f = 0.27 t/cm2 < 0.41 t/cm2
p.(B)
3
30 2 ' 153
IY = 2x2x12 + 2x1x46x1.5 + 2x2x
12 f
p. (C) =
2
0.36 t/cm < 0.4~ t/cm2

1x2x12
33 = 10329 em
4 2
f = 0.30 t/cm < 0.41 t/cm2
p. (D)

I
p
=IX + I
y 132679 cm4 (7) Bolts "3", F
sr
= 2.5 t/cm2 - Table 8.3 •

Use High Strength Bolts (10.9) :-

Mx'= 0~357 x. 36 =· 12;85 .cm.t .. (B. F. ef'f'ect)

 ..__,.CHAPTER 8 771 772 CHAPTERSL

f ·12 · 85 x 6 2 =· ·O
. •-00285·-t/al
. . 0.0155
t t ext,M X 1J.2 X 8 0.82 ton
30 X (30) · 2

1.60
0.00285
X 30 X
15
2 T
ext,N
= = 0.266 ton

= 0.32 tons

l
Total T · = 0. 82 + 0. 266 = 1. 086 ton
f t/cm2 ext.
AT 0.032 tons --~- --;~
AT= 0.1 x 1.086 = 0.1086 ton
·A·= 0.84 em2
J
------ -------.::.::_ 30cms
(M 12)
s 2
- AT < 2 5 t/cm
$ •. Afbolt- A. ·
s
AT < 2.5- t/cm 2
A fbolt -A
s
Ab <
0.1086
2.5
= 0.043 cm2

[As] . = 0.0128 em'?. cho~:>se M 12 (As = 0~84 .em }

2
Use M12 H.s.B: .Type (10.9) where A = 0. 84 2
.CID : .. "
. req s

where: 'T. = 5.3 lons· P = 1 .. 83 tons (Case II) 2

~ s (9} Bolts "2": [category "D", _item 27.2] Fsr = Q.7'1 t/cm
0.357
Qbolt - "4:(} - I· 0. 089 tons <,1. 83 (Safe} (static)
we can use Non-pretensroned bolts for this group;

(8} Bolts "1": F

sr.
= 2~5 t/cni
2
(10.9) - Table 8.3 . Straining Actions:
$ ···- ~' t
H±:
;. .l;'.Mt
$· 1
Use High Strength Bolts:
~t =
1.6 X 18
-2
X 8.8
= 1.64 ton $·
; 8·8
·- r-26·4
LI~s
ft/cm2 2 X 8.8
N = H = 1.60 ton
Mt · ·e-· 8·81
·- 4·4
36
MX = 1.60 x ·= 28.80 t.cm 0 __ ;;:
':N
1.60
= 0 .. 53 ton -,

From the construction condition 1.64 + 0.53 = 2.17 tons·

>- ~ ...
ll J
d < (8.8/3 = 2.9 ems) 2.170 2 2
2
0.54 t/cm < 0.71 t/cm (Fsr}
2 X U(1.6)
28.80 X (26.4/2} ·. - 2 4 safe
f = 3 = o.o1ss vG~D
16 X (26.4} /12
Use Non-pretensioned bolts M16
 773 774 CHAPTERS&.

(10) Section (Si

= 0.91 t/cm
. 2, Class (C) - Item {14) Example (8.6):

N =± 1.60 ton Design Bracket "3" shown in the Fig. below.

I• M = 1.60 x (36/2) = 28.80 cm.t. V 21.0 tons ; H = 1.60 tons ; B.F. 0.357 t<ms
I

lb 44-3.6-0.80-0.70 = 38.90 ems V ton.

. · . Take t 1.0 em.

l)·Ocms·
3
26. 40x(1 ) /12.
_ x .
26 4 1 0
= 0.288 ems

1
l 2 L 100 ><10
\ 134.75

F - --7-5-0-0--~ = 0.413 x 1.2 t/cm

2
Stem
c {134.75

N Mx.y
•·' . fact - A + .-I- = 26 ~ 4:~.o + 28.8x(26.4/2)
3 Sec. S1 - S1
X 1x(26.4) /1

2
= 0.308 < 0.91 t/cm (Saf'e)
W·Otms
2
Also f' t < 0.413 x 1.2 . t/cm (saf'e)
· ac

(11) Fillet Velds, Glass (E'.. ), F

sr
= 0.41 t/cm
--'------~:_
2
Sec. Sec. H.S.B 10.9 H.S.B 10.9 0. B.
Item (2) {3) (4)
Take s ·
w = 1.0 em A
w =1 x 2 x 2.6.4 = 52.80 cm
2 s1-s1 s2-s2 (1)

Ix =2 xl x (26.4)
3
/ 12 = 3066.6 cm
4 Glass B B -- -- D

f' = 1.60 + 28~ 80 x (26,4/2) = 0 _154 t/cm2 < F Safe F t/cm

sr ..
2
1.26 1.26 -- 2.5 0.71
max. 52.80 3066.66 sr
ITEM 2.1 2.1 -- Table 8;'3 27.2
 ~CHAPTERS 775 776 CHAPTERS . . .
Preliminary Dimensioning:
I
.-i Dimensions are chosen SllCh that.: v 21 -
~Ocms
= =----=
.a.Z = 1.26x59x0.17
t
r
1
F
sr
* Bracket total height = 1~ the height of C. T.G.
= 1.66 ems take t = 1.7 ems
*Breadth of top plate= 30 ems; breadth of C.T.G.

* Stem thickness is chosen to satisfy the plate buckling (B) Approximate Analysis Considering 2L100 x10

conditions. Eccentricity: 53·0cms

The section comprising· the gusset
Estimation of Gusset Plate Thickness:
plate and the flange angles are assumed Stem
As has been computed in the previous examples, the exact
to resist the induced straining actions.
analysis of stresses has shown to be the most critical regarding
However this assumption will lead "to a
the gusset plate thickness. Hence it is recommended to start
lower bound solution.
the design using the exact analysis.
Section (S - s ): Category "B" Item (2.1}
(1} Analysis of Bracket Cross Section Class B - Fsr ---........:.......::.:::::_
= 1.26 t/em2 1 1
' [
(A} Exact Analysis: 2
\ Item 2.1 F
sr
= 1.26 t/em
Buckling Condition:
Properties of Area:
a = 59 ems , h = 53 ems,
30x1x0.50 + 2 x 19.2xU + 2.82) + 53x2x27.50
y = (1x30 + 2x19.2 + 2x53.0)
a/h = 1.113
2
k = 3.2-3.0(1.13)+1.1(1.13) = 17.64 ems ..
= 1.21
3
r.
l = 0.131211 _X21 59: 1.075 ems 11
a =t.3cms
Ix = 1x30x17.14
--2

= 51620 em
4
+ 2 [ 177 + 19.20x(13.82) 2] + 53 .+ 2x53x(9.86) 2
2xrz

----="b::ll=--...~0-J l
lake l = 1.1 ems
3 4
. 1x30-+2x [ 177+19.2(1.0+2.82}
Iy = . 2] = 3164 em
12
Yielding:
z= 1.39- 2.2 (1.113) For the calculation of I
y
only the upper flange (30xl.O}
2 and the 2 angles 100x1oOx10 have been taken into consideration.
+ 1. 27 (1.113) - 0.25

X (1.113)
3
=0.17 s = 30 x 1 x (17.66- 0.5 ) =514.8 ems
i

. x(c}
 . . . CHAPTERS 777 778 CHAPTER8L

J =3
1
[ at
3
= 31 (4x1oxt3 '+· 53x_2_. cP 0.23
3
+ 30xi ]
0.503
4 +
= 164.663 cm fprinc (B) =
2 .· 2
Straining Actions: = 0.59 t/cm (comp. l < F
_ sr
(1. 26 t/cm )

For point {C)

M
X
= 21 x 34 = 714 cm.t
proceed for the normal stresses and the shear
torsional stresses as before only add the shear stresses due to
M
y
= 0.357 x 34 = 12.138 cm.t Q = 21 tons.
y -

= 0.357 = 19.15 x 514.8 = 6.0523

Mt x (36 + 17.64) cm.t
qcly = -21
51620 x 4
t/cm2

Qy = 21 tons 2
The principal stresses for point {C) are less than 1.26 t/cm

Point (A): If the vertical section s1 - s1 is. taken ·just at the

attachment with the colUmn flange. Hence the straining action
M M
X - y
fA - y- .y + y- x are:
X y
M
X
= 21 x 44 = 9"24 t.cms
714 12.138 . . 2
=-51620 x 17.64 + 3164 x 15 = 0.292 t/cm M = 0.357 x 44
y
= 15.7 t.cms

Qy = 21 tons ; Mt = 0,357 x (36 + 17.64) = 19.15 t.cms

-I
!

Point (A):

924 X 17. 64 15.7 X 15 . 2

£' . 0. 292 +
princ. (A) - - 2 -
j ~0. 2292)2
+
{0_.116)2
fA=
51620
x.17.64 +
3164
= 0.388 t/cm (o.k)

::;: 0.33 t/cm

2
< 1. 26 t/cm -_
2 = 19.15 X 1 = 0. 116
164.66
Point' (B):
O.K.

M 2
714 -;- 0.42 t/cm ,
fB = y-X ,y = 51620 X 36.36 fprinc. (A)
< 1.26 (o.k)
X
2
-· 0. 503 t/cm
i.J
.Ji CHAPTER 8 781 782 CHAPTERS

The bolts are double shear bolts.

* Due to My :

2
FR /Surface= 14.04 / 2 15.7 X 12,25
62114
= 0.003 t/cm
= 7.02 tons
= 0.1066 + 0.071 x 8.5 x 10 = 7.55 tons
Use H.S.B.'s of diameter 22mms (10.9) type-
. Ps = 7.26 tons 2

(O.K. )
T (due to M ) = 0.003 x 8.5 x 10 = 0.255
2 y
2
(3) Bolt's Gro_up (2) - F = 2.5 t/cm {H.S.B. 10.9) Table 8.3
sr Text. = 7.55 + 0.255 = 7.805 tons
3
I = 20 X 51
-_;;;:...~- = 221085 em
4
X 12 Ti > ~
0.80.
> 9 75 tons
.

Iy = [ 51 X
10
12
3
+ 51 X 10 X 7.25 -2] X 2
Use M20 Where Ti = 15.43 tons
= 62114 cm4
AT= 0.1 x 7.805 = 0.7805 ton
Straining ~ctions:
. 0.7805 = 0.32 t/cm2 <
A F = AT
x-- = 2.45
2.5 t/cm2 (Fsr)
Mx = 21 x 44 = 924 t.cm s
Safe
h
My =0.357 x 44 = 15.7 t.cm Shear Stresses - No Fatigue Calculations :-

Mt = 0.357 X {25.5 + 3 + 36) tons a

= 23.0 t.cm l lfo
a.s
+ I ;t:-FMt ( x)

~ = 21.0 tons = 23 · 0 x 7'- 75 = 0.0546 tons

• . /fMtty)
L r2 a.s
Normal Stresses:

* Due to M .:
X
F
Q
= = 1.75
2f
12
tons
8-5
:Eh·:-
• I •
924 X 25.50 . 2
fl - · 221085 = 0 · 1066 t./cm
FR = j. (1. 75 + 0.0546)
2
+ {0.15)
2
• I•
= 1.81 tons
\1·'~1,.,~1
ems ems
 CHAPTERS 783 784 CHAPTERS

(S) Group (4) of Bolts Class (D) - 27.2 - = 0 .. 71 t/cm )

2
for H20 (10.9) H.S.B's as group (1) (Safe)
Ordinary bolts can be u~ed for this group where:

(4) Group (3) of Bolts: N 1.60 ton

F == 2.5 t/cm
2 Mt = 28.80 t.cm
sr

N == ± 1.60 ton 28.80 X 8.80

1.64 ton
2
2 X (8.80)
= 1.60 ~6 = 28.80 I~
I I s.o I
,_
ft

M X t.cm
~~

* Use High Strength Bolts:

-
60
1.3 - -
- 0.53 ton
-· ..
aMt aN
- 4·4
a.a

f
1 -
- M.y
-~-
28.80,x 13.20 ·.
= 0.016 t/cm
2 Q
total
= 2.17 tons "+. Mt
•
-
-
8·8

H~ X (26.4) 3/12 . - 4·4

, Use ( 3) Non-pretensioned M16

0.016
T
ext,M =-z-x 13.2 X 8.8 = 0.93 ton
2 2
N 1.60
2.170
= 0.54 t/cm < 0.71 t/cm (F
sr
)
T = -6-
ext,N no.of bolts = 0.267 ton
Safe

T
ext,M
+ T
ext,N
< 0.8 Ti

Ti > 1.35 ton

From the construction condition d < 2.93 em

Use H.S.B' s M 12

A T = 0.93 + 0.267 = 0.1197 ton

10

A f AT 0.1197 2
=-A--= 0.84 = 0.142 t/cm < 2.5 t/cm2 (Safe)
s
 785 786 CHAPTERS
. . CHAPTERS
resist the induced straining actions M and N. Hence, the
X
Example (8. 7): approxiiDate.Method (A) can be applied.
Redesign the bracket conriection of the previous examples
44·0cms 15.0
using ·a bolted end plate connection of the following t~es:
ems
(a) an extended end plate. coSe = 0. 763
(b) a flushed end plate.
33.57cms si~ = 0.646
= 12 ems
·~'<J
Choose a convex shape for the gusset plate with d2
and d = 10.17 ems from inclination (e).
1
T
I t is required only to design the vertical support (i.e.
the top flange and the gusset plate) where the other
structural elements remain unchanged.
steel
·,
28.44cms '
12.0cms
_l

Solution T :: 24.5 tons •

C =32.5. tons.

(a) Extended·End Plate

· Trian'gle
V= 21 fons of Forces
li.·Ocms 15.0
ems
4 29
e = 28.44 - ~ = 4.8 ems-::

From triangle of·forces get:

T = 24.8 tons C = 32.5 tons

Top flange bracket connection breadth = 30 ems.

Hence the thickness (t) of the upper flange can be
determined using:

(1) Approximate Analysis Method (A)-Inclined Section (S

1
- s 1 ): 2
F = 0.91 t/cm
sr
2
Class (C) - 14 - = 0.91 t/cm )
24 8
For the extended end plate configuration both . the top t = · = 0.91 CmS take t = 1.0 em
30 X 0.91
'· J flange bracket as well as the gusset plate will contribute to
 CHAPTERS 787 788 CHAPTERS
(b) Flushed End Plate
. The straining actions in . the gusset. plate· along. section
s 1-s 1 neglecting the effect of the braking force are: Vertical Support of Bracket (Inclined Section s1 - s 1):
M = 32.5 x 4.8,= 156 t.cms
X
Apply ··method (B) £or the analysis where only the gusset
N =32.5 tons plate is resisting the applied straining actions.
£ · = 32.5 160.x 6
put Fsr = 0.9i t/em
2
M = 16 x 33.57 + 13.57 x 4.8 = 602.25 t.cms
Max 47.29-t +. t x _ 2
47 29 X

Hence: t = 1.22 ems _take t = 1. 3 em; N = 13.57 tons

Shear stresses under the vertical load V = 21 tons. 13.57 + 602.25 X 6 - - 2

. _. sr = 0.91 t/cm
1 put·F
Max = 47.29 t 2
t X 47.29
3 21- 2
q = ZX 1.3 X 20.46 = 1.18 t/cm > 0.84 t/cili .Unsafe- (static} t = 2.09 ems. Take t = 2.1 ems
Take t (gusset ~late) 1. 9 ems 3 21 2 2 .
q = ZX 47.29 X 2.1 = 0.217 t/cm < 0.84 t/em (o.k)

(2) Exact Analysis

Shear stresses under vertical load .V = 21.0 tons.
BUckling:
a = 59 ems h =50 ems ; alb= 59/SO= 1.18
3 21 2 2
2 q = 2 X 2.1 X 20.46 = 0.733 t/cm < 0.84 t/em
k = 3.2 - 3.0 (1.18) + 1.1 (1.18) = 1.19
The buckling and yielding conditions will be the same as
t = 0.1 J ~\; 59~ 1.07 em. for the extended end plate,

Yielding:_ Hence -choose t = 2.1 ems.

- 2 - 3
z= 1.39 .;_ 2.2 (1.19) + 1.27 (1.19) - 0.25 (1.19) = 0.152

21
t = "0--,.9:::::1;--x-;:S:-;:;9c--x-o::;-;.1"'s=2 = 2.57 ems .

Hence choose t = 2.6 ems

 CHAPTER 9
BASE CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS

9.1. Introduction:
Steel base connections and supports transmit the external
applied loads to tl'!.e concrete foundation and then to the soil.

This chapter deals with the conventional elastic analysis

·of the different types of steel base connections and supports.
Simplifying assumptions are necessa~·in orde~ to rend the
,' ' .~~--.:-:;.:~-··
analysis and design procedures pract;fi'iiiH. Nevertheless, the
approximate methods considered herein are, iri most of the cases,
conservative.

9.2. Main Types of Base Connections:

The main different types of base connections may be ·

1
.j
classified as follows:
{;:1.} The Hinged. base connections shown· in Fig. 9. 1. a. transmit
both the axial and the shear reactions to the foundations
via the different steel components comprising the copnection.

b) The Fixed base connections shown in Fig. 9.1.b. transmit

axial, shear, and moment reactions. Depending on the values
of the moments and the axial comp.ressive reactions, the base
can be either entirely or partially subjected to compressive
normal stresses.

(c) The Pocket base connections illustrated in Fig. 9.1. c. can

be considered either hinged or fixed. Columns are directly
.embeded in the concrete footings.

(d) The Grillage base connections shown in Fig. 9.1.d. are used
either hinged or fixed. These types are mainly used for
heavy axial reactions.
 ~CHAPTER9 791 792 .CHAPTER9~

!i:
·~~·
!l~

(c) Pocket.

(a} Hinged. (b) Fixed.

Double Plate
(d) Grillage

Fig: 9.1 Basic Types of Conventional Base Conn~cti 0 ns.

Fig~. 9.2.a .• b. illustrate the main different types of

. hinged and fixed base connections respectively; In the .
F 1g. 9 .2 Types of Hinged Base Connections .
f.ollowing sections each type will be. analysed. The analysis and
design of the basic conventional types. are bas~ on realistic
assump.tions.
 . . . <;flAPTER 9 793 794 CHAPTER9 . . .
9.3. Semi-Hinged Base Connections:
Base connections whlcn·are not purely hinged are termed as
semi-hinged. The rotation is provided by the amount of the
flexibility provided by the base plate. Generally, the
transmitted moment is small and can be neglected.

9.3.1. Conventional Hinged Base Connection:

9.3.1.1. Different Types:
. I Fig. 9.3, shows three types of conventional hinged base
I connections. Type (A) is the simplest one for arc welded
fabrication and is specially used for small .vertical reactions.
The base plate is first punched for anchor bolts then shop
welded to the column.

'.'

~~I·

I I
I !
.I
t :--
·H-

-H-
--
i
I I

(a) (b) (c)

Fig. 9.4 Types of Conventional Hinged Base Connections.

Fig. 9.3 Types of Fixed Base Connections.

On the other hand, types (B) and (C) are utilized when the
column and the base plate are erected separately. The angles
are welded to the. base plate after erection.·
 . . CHAPTER9 795 796 CHAPTER91r
For all the conventional types, if the end of the colrimn is (a) Dimensioning of the Base Plate:
milled, which implies compi.efe contact between column and base In the pi-eserit method of analysis, it is assumed that .the
plate, there must be just sufficient welding to transmit column axial force "N" will be uniformly transmitted to the base
horizontal shear and to hold all parts securely in place. If the. plate through the indicated shaded area (0.95 d X 0.8 b). The
column is not milled ( L e. in~omplete ~on tact), the connecting applied stress is hence equal to N / (0.95 d X 0.8 b).
weld must be thick enough to safely withstand the compressive Furthermore, the reactive stress applied on the concrete
vertical and.the horizontal reac~ions. foundation is assumed to be uniformly distributed over the base
plate area (B X D). Therefore the actual compressive stress
9.3.1.2. Method of
applied on the concrete footing, f can computed by the
In the following, the simplest conventional hinged base con
following relation:
~onnection "Type A" is analyzed. Fig. 9.5 .. shows a free body
N
diagram indicating·. all the relevant applied loads; the axial f
con.
= -==-"'~,..,-
(BXD)
9.1

compressive load "N" and the horizontal shear "H".

t 1
d
N
., Where B and .D are the breadth .and length of the base plate
resp~.ctively. The induced stress f
must not violate the
v v v con
~b v

I
limits prescribed by the R.C. Code of Practice of 1999.
I
'' :~ '
.'''
I

''' '
l>J: ''
I
n 0.81 ~ n
''
I

~.... : : /~ Base Pl<ite

f .I
I
. I
''
t~ • f f f f.
I

I. 8 .I
M2.2
I f f f ft f f f f Ifcon
-D·

Fig. 9.6 Base Plate.

In order to determine the required plate thickness, further

simplifications are necessary. The overhanged portions of the
Fig. 9. 5. Conventional Hinged Base Connection.
plate having the lengths m in the D-direction and n in the
 . . . CHAPTER9 795 796 CHAPTER9L
For all the conventional types, if the end of the colrimn is (a) _Dimensioning of the Base Plate:
milled, which implies ~ompiete contact between column and base In the present method of- aiialysls, i t is assumed that the
l' plate. there must be just sufficient welding to transmit column axial force "N" will be uniformly transmitted to the base
i horizontal shear and to hold all parts securely in place. If the - plate through the indicated shaded area (0.95 d X 0.8 b). The
column is not -milled (i.e. in~omplete contact), the connecting applied stress is hence equal to N / (0.95 d X 0.8 b).
weld must be thick enough to safely withstand the compressive Furthermore, the reactive stress applied on the concrete
vertical and the horizontal reac~ions. foundation is assumed to be uniformly distributed over the base
plate area (B X D). Therefore the actual compressive stress
9.3.1.2. Method of Analysis:
applied on the concrete footing, f can computed by the
In the following, the simplest conventional hinged base con
following relation:
j:onnection "Type A" is analyzed-~ Fig. 9.5 .. shows a free body
N
diagram indicating- all the relevant applied loads; the axial f
con
= ~:;:,-;..-;;;:-.-
(B X D)
9.1

compressive load "N" and the horizontal shear "H".

d Where B and .D are the breadth and length of the base plate
-N
resp~_ctively. The induced stress f - must not violate the
con
limits prescribed by the R.C. Code of Practice of 1999.

I f t t ft t t t t ltcon

-o- i... 1

Fig. 9.6 Base Plate.

In order to determine the required plate thickness, further

simplifications are necessary. The overhanged portions of the
Fig. 9.5. Conventional Hinged Base Connection.
plate having the lengths m in the D-direction and n in the
 . . . CHAPTER9 797 798 CHAPTER9
B-direction are divided into unit strips. The problem becomes a
one dimensional cantilever lieam . subjected . to a uniformly
distributed load of intensity f
con The induced moments per H/2-+ ID~I!!!:!!I!:======·~-
unit length are:
H/2-+ II T
2
n
Ml-1 = f con 2 Fig. 9. 7
9.2
2 The horizontal shear H istransmitted from the column to
m
M2-2 = f con the base plate via the two side fillet welds, then, to the
footings by anchor bolts. The diameter (d) can be camputed
Where m = (D - 0.95 d) / 2 n = (B- 0.8 b) / 2. from the following shear stress relation:

The optimum solution is to choose m equal ton so that the H

q = ---;; ---- 9.4
2
induced moments M1 _ 1 and M _ are equal in both directions. The 2 (II d /4)
2 2
thickness of the base plate, i;p' .can bedetermined as follows:- Where q = the allowable shear stress in bolt shank taken
2 according to E.C.P. of steel 2001 (clause 6.4.1.).
I = y t
M =f m
2 con 2
It is to be noted that the horizontal reaction H may be
transmitted partially or totally to the foundation by the
·~

lI
l
Hence: t
p
= m j 3 f
.con
Fb
9.3 friction· force " Hf" between the base ·plate and the concrete
according to the following:
Vhere Fb is the allowable bending
of the steel stress
.) material for solid rectangular sections equals (0.72 F ) as given
y
Hf = f:L • N 9.5
by clause 2.6.5.2. E.C.P 2001.
where: I:L = the coefficient of friction between steel and

(b) Design of Anchor Bolts: concrete.

The main function of the anchor bolts is to transmit · the
shear reaction and the upleft force.to the concrete footing. The
design parameters are defined in the following:
d diameter of the bolt.
When the column transmits . only an axial compressive force
the length of the bolt is taken equal to a minimum value of
twenty times the diameter. In cases of uplift forces, the anchor
. . . .
b6~ts must have sufficient embeded length L inside the concrete

L footing in order to transmit the uplift force safely to the

embeded length in concrete footing.
concrete by bond stress, according to the following.criteria of
n numbel' of bolts.
plain reinforcing bars.
 . . CHAPTER9 799
800 CHAPTER 9 a,.
Str~ining Actions ,At C~Iu_mn End
N&H
u
<'
'<
I
t
Normal
Stress
Contact
Vertical Face of ·
Flange Welds
Base Plate
Continuity
Fig. 9. 8 of Welds

Horizontal Face of
Flan.ge Welds
9.6
II
I.
i llhere U = Resultant uplift force.
Bearing
. .,_
(case of D.L. + ILL.) . Stress

qb =Allowable bond stress between

Shank
steel and concrete. Bearing

9. 3.1. 3. Results of Finite Element Analysis and Load

L---------~--~----~----~ Str~s
Transmission Scheme:
( Concrete Footing )
In 1991 a research work (25) was conducted in the Steel
Division of the structural Engineering Department namely «stress N
.
ana1 ys1s of b< ase < connec t•1ons» . A three dimensional finite I
elements program was prepared and utilized. All steel structural ~

elements comprising the base connection as well as the

+I
I
reinforced concrete footing were included in the mathematical
model. The three conventional hinged< base connections (A). (B)
+ l:
I
and (C) shown in Fig. 9.2 as well as the<gusseted type hinged
Sec.1<-1
base connection were analyzed.

Fig. 9.9
 . . . CHAPTER9 801
802 CHAPTER9L
Straining Actions At Column End
N&H Straining ActioP.:sAt Column .End ·
'' N&H
''
'

50% :20 "A. .30%

Shear Shear tress

ertical Face Vertical Face Vertical Face Vertical Face

Vertical Face Vertical Vertical Face Vertical ofWeb of Flange . of Web of Flange
')

i of Flange Face of . of Flange Face of Welds Welds Welds Welds

; Shear or
'

i Welds Welds 1 Welds Welds 1 Normal Stress

Continuity Continuity Continuity
ontinuity Continuity Continuity ,----L---- ~~~---- r---~---- r---~----
Horizontal Face Outstanding ·Vertical Horizontal Horizontal · Horizontal Horizontal
""] Horizontal Face Outstanding
:- il
of Flange Face of ·. Legs of Face of Face of Face of Face of
~Ji of Flange Face of
Welds 1 Welds Welds 1 An les Web Flange Web Flange
Welds Welds Welds Welds Welds
~· l Continuity
l
i)
Horizontal Normal
Shear Shear Shear
. Stress
Normal .Legs of
Stress Angles
Base Plate

Shear Contact

Concrete Footing
Concrete Footing
N

Column End I

•
Sec.1 -1
Sec. 1 -1
Fi!!. 9.10
Fig. 9.11
 803 804 CHAPTER 9
. . . . CHAPTER9
Fig. 9.12 shows a typical gusseted base connection. This
The stress distribution on the reinforced concrete footing,
lyiie may be regarded as seml.::iiinged or fixed. The later wiii be
in the vertical 'stiffeners; in t:he stee':L base plate as well as
considered in a subsequent sections.
the percentage of share of the applied forces regarding each
steel component were deduced.
In the . present · analysis the created. moment due to
Figs. 9. 9, 9.10 and 9.11 show the transmission of forces connection rigidity is small, hence the base connection can be
via the various steel components as well as the percentage of considered as a hinged base connection. As shown in Fig. 9.12,
share of these forces computed from the finite element. analysis. the · column flanges are welded to the base plate by two
horizontal side· fillet welds. Two supporting gusset plates are
For more detailed analyses of the conventional hinged base
attached to the flanges tips by four vertical lines of weld.
connections, the reader may refer to Examples 9.1, 9.2 and 9.3.
· The load is transmit ted from the gusset plate to the base plate
by contact bearing stress if the lower edges of the gussets are
9.3.2. Gusseted-Hinged Base Connection:
milled. Otherwise, horizontal lines of fillet welds are to be
9.3.2.1. Configuration:
provided.

9.3.2.2. Load Transmission Scheme:

Il
l.'
\
Fig. 9.13, illustrates the flow chart of the ·axial load
transmission from the beam column to the concrete fm.indation.

9.3.2.3. Analysis and Dimensioning:

(a) Base Plate:
The determination of the required dimensions of the base
s1. s1 plate will follow the same procedure previously mentioned in the
analysis of the conventional type. The breadth B and ·the length
Regio n (I) R~gion (II} D of the base plate projected area can be calculated using
..- L I
s1 ·····:
"''''
/
.l,ll
,_
=:Jc
st
Equation 9.1 •
itg
t. B : 0
a a' l'.·t= r b j Region (Ill) Regarding the calculation of the plate thickness t ,
p
the

....
,_ problem somewh.it difficult compared to the conventional type.
.__ =:Jc As shown in Fig. 9.13, the plate may be divided into three
I. D
..I regions having each different boundary conditions.

Fig. 9.12 Gusseted Base Connection (Hinged Type).

 . . CHAPTER9 807 808 CHAPTER9L
Table 9.1. Coefficients a , a 2 and a 3 for Analysis of Bending of Where Ma, and ~~ are the induced moments per unit length about
1
Rectangular,. -Plates ...Suppor--ted on---FoUi"-and--Three Sides
the directions a' and b' respectively.
l Plates Supported Plates Supported a' = long side of plate.
I
I on Three Sides
'
on Four Sides
!
b' = short side of plate.
Ratio of Ratio of
Sides
Coefficient
Sides
Coefficient a
1
, a
2
= coefficients depending on the plate aspect
1
ratio (a'/ b ), and are as given in Table 9.1.
i (a' I b') a1 a2 (a / b ) a 3

LO 0.048 0.048 0.5 0.060 a'

l Unit
, ~ 1.1 0.055 0.049 0.6 0.074 .-;-r-
XXXXXXXXKXXX
1.2 0.063 0.050 0.7 0.088

1.3 0.069 0.050 0.8 0.097

1.4. 0.075 0.050 0.9 0.107

><
><
1.5 0.081 0.050 1.0 o.i22 ><kx~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x~x7x~x~x~x~x~x¥x¥x¥x¥x¥x~--L

1.6 0.086 0.049 1.2 0.120

1.7 0.091 0.048 1.4 0.126

l
1.8 0.094 0.048 2.0 0.132

1.9 0.098 0.047 Over 2.0 0.133 I f f f f f f f f f .f f f f f f f Ifcon

2 .. 0 0.100 Q.046
2 Fig. 9.15 Base Plate Region (2) Supported on Four Sides.
OVer 2. 0 0.125 O.Q37. =«3f
. con b .
I f (a/b) < 0.5 If the ratio (a'/ b') exceeds 2, the moment can be determined
. .
Ma=af
· 1 con
b
'2
2
from the simply supported beam formula (Wl /8) with W
2
=f con and
M
3.
= 0.5 f
con
·a 1 b'.

b = length of free edge.

.Mb = a2 f
con a '2 For (a'/b') less than 2, the coefficient a has an average
2
value equal to 0. 05. Since the plate edges are elastically
. . . CHAPTER9 809 810 CHAPTER9 . . . .
restrained as shown in Fig. 9.15, the moments obtained from The thickness of the plate is to be determined using the
Equation 9. 8. a ought to be reduced by about_2_5X... _ The .. maximum maximum .of .M , M , .. and M . Hence:
1 2 3
of Ma, aQd Mb• should be taken in the design of the base plate.
Hence for region (2), the design moment to be considered in the
analysis is: 9.10

9.8.b

Fb being the allowable tensile stress of rectangular steel

sections and equals 0.72 F.
y

The optimum design of the base plate .may be attained by

changing the dimensions a and c in ord.er to obtain equal moment::;
M , M and M •
1 2 3

(b) Plates:
Fig. 9.16 The significant design parameters of the supported gusset
• • J• .•.

plates are the thickness t and the height h as shown in Fig.

g g
The third region of the base plate is supported on three 9.17. The stress analysis of such problem is a complicated
sides only. The critical point at which: the moment should be process. The three dimensional finite element model previously
calculated is the point (of ,;;lt the middle of ''the free edg~. outlined in Section 9.3.1.3 has proved that the following
The induced moment is as given below: assumptions are adequate:

M
-""3
= ex3 · f con . b 2 9.9 (i) The normal force transmitted by the column's web can be
neglected. Fig. 9.17.a shows that the web transmits 20Y. of
Where cx = coefficient given in Table 9.1 depending on the the total normal force irrespective of the percentage of
3
ratio (a/b). contact between stiffeners and base plate.

b = length of free edge. (ii) The problem can be considered as a two dimensional plane
·stress problem if the induced torsional moments are
If (a/b) is less thari 0.5. this third plate region may neglected. The exact solution for a typical configuration
be analyzed as a cantilevered- plate. is given in Fig. 9.17 .b.
CHAPTER9 811 812 CHAPTER9

(iii) The gusset plate may be modeled as a beam with two over
hangings supported at the locations of the vertical welds
Maximum Stres$
In Stllleners
10.711/cm 2J
attaching the column's flanges and the gusset plate (see
Fig. 9.17.c}.
Percent ot Share

-Flanges The effective upward distributed .load for one stiffener is

DDID Stiffeners
IS web equal to. fcon x B / 2 where fcon = N/B.D. Considering the
Maximum Stress
In Stiffeners critical Section s~s. The shear and moment are as given below:
·(11.451/cm•)

N
Qs-s = 2.D . a
9.11.a.
Maximum Stress
In Stiffeners 2
{0.391/cm 2)
M
s-s = N.a
2.D
a
2 = N.a

100% 66% 50%

(a) Pe~J;entage of Share of "N" between

Components of Connection. (COntour Interval 0.051/cm 2 ) a
(b) Principal Stresses In the Stiffeners.

lfttttffttl
Vertical Weld.
llJ'PP' .S.F.0. Distributed ld"" fcon xt = 2 ~0

b/2

~~B.M.D.
B/2

(c) Beam Model.

Fig. 9.18
Fig. 9.17 -Modeling ofthe Gusset Plate.
 CHAPTER9 813 814 CHAPTER9L
A thick plate "G" of cast iron is welded to the lop plate
The corresponding maximum sh~ar and bending stresses are:
and r-ests on · t-he---bot-t-om--one-:- 'fbis ·plate '·concentrate·s· t.be
distributed vertical load along the vertical axis and hence
3 Qs-s Two keeper side plates are
prevents the creation of moments.
q =
2 l g hg welded to the bottom base plate to prevent any possible
9.11. b horizontal displacements.
6M
s-s
fb =
t h2
g g

The values of q and f must not exceed the allowable values

material as prescribed in· the E. C. P. 2001 by Clauses 2. 6. 5 and
2.6.3 respectively

(C) Anchor Bolls:

The design of the anchor bolls is similar to the
conventional hinged base connection.

Refer to Example 9.4 ..

9.4. Ideal-Hinged Base.Conneclions:

The previou~;; hinged base connections will induce acerlain Fig. 9.19 Double-Plate Hinged Base Connection
amount of moments due to the rigidity of the steel components.
In order to minimize such moments, more real hinged base The design of such base configuration is identical to the
connections ought to be employed. In the following types previous conventional types. However, stiffeners which are
maximum possible rotation is provided. subjected to compression forces must satisfy the safety against
normal stresses and local buckling.
9.4.1. Double-Plate Base Connection:
Fig. 9.19 shows a typical ideal-hinged connection with Fig. 9.20 depicts the load transmission scheme for this
.. lop and bottom base plates. The vertical force "N" is type.
i
I transmitted to the lop plate via the diagonal stiffeners which
Refer to Example 9.5.
are.attached to the column web by fillet welds.
 ~CHAPTER9. 815 816 CHAPTER9L
9.4.2. Pin-Hinged Base Connection:
Straining Actions At Column End
. - --j~--& H·:----·-·-· --- -. The pin-hinged coimectton rs. mainly used for cases where- an
uplift axial force exists. A typical configuration is illustrated
in Fig. 9. 2L

The pin is composed of a steel cylindrical body and a head. The

cylinderical body is introduced inside the holes of the hatched
Contact plates with the minimum possible clearance (Ad< 1 mms.). The pin
. l
is maintained by a threaded keeper rod. Regarding the design,
i Shear the pin is sUbjected to shear and bending stresses which govern
Top Plate ·Top Plate the _choice of the diameter d. The clear height "h" and the
thickness of the plates in contact with the pin are determined so
Shear
that the induced bearing stresses are in accordance with the
Contact
l allowable values.
:~.- j
Shear
N

Contact
Friction
Bottom Plate
i
Shear
I c
Pin
Contact
b[
Shear
Base Plate

Contact (a) Typical Pin Connection. (b) Detailed Pin Assembly.

. Bearing
Stress Fig-~ ·9~ 21 Pin-Hinged Base Connection._

The Chart in Fig. 9.22 shows the load transmission scheme.

Refer to Examples 9.6.a and 9.6.b.

Fig. 9.20
... -o- ~- ,.
 . . . CHAPTER9 817 818 CHAPTER9L

I: 9.4.3. Elastomeric Bearings:

An elas-tomer-i:e base connection woul'd--resembie a sandwich
construction. As shown in Fig. 9.23 , the top and bottom base
plates contain in between neoprene or rubber material which can
2
safely transmit loads inducing stresSes up to 100 kg/em

Bearings are either plain or laminated as shown in Fig.

Normal Stress 9.23 The plain type consists of single elastomer layer while
( Butt Weld ) the laminated type consists of elastomer layers restrained at
I
''{ Normal, Shear Stress their interfaces by bonded laminates such as steel. The
( Pla~e 2 ) distortion scheme of neoprene plates is shown· ill Fig .. 9. 23. c
I Shear
Normal and/or Shear Stress This type allow eas~er thermal deformation and easier rotation
Weld 1 of the lower and of the columns.

' • N

Steel Plates
.
'
'

/P.. ,..........
a~·,::.:·,.:,-,.
,?
:·:_:./z
Single Plain Bea·rlng Laminated
Elastomer Elastomer

(a). Base Detail. (b) Types of Bearings.

:D______,/
'-'--'--------<-7

"---~
(1) (2) (3)
Initial Position Deformation Rotation
(c) Distortions of Neoprene Layers.

Fig. 9.23 Elastomeric Hinged Base Connection.

The Chart in Fig. 9.24 shows the load transmission scheme.

Fig~ 9.22
 820 CHAP"fER9
. . . CHAPTER9 819
9.5. Hinged-Base Connection of Columns with Hollow Circular
Straining
.. - Actions
____ N.&HAt Column
..... .End se·ctioris:
Fig. 9. 25 shows a hinged base connection of a circular
hollow column section. The thickness of the base plate is
determined in accordance to Equation 9.3, while the diameter and
length of anchor bolts are governed by the uplift and the
horizontal reactions. If the end of the column is milled, the
Contact
force "N" will be transmitted by contact bearing to the base
I plate. otherwise the circular outside fillet welds will transmit
r
Top Plate the vertical and horizontal reactions to the base plate

Contact N

111111:1

:contact

J!.. mJ~~~~~~lllll
Bottom Plate • I

. Bearing
· Stress

,.; .

Fig. 9.25

9.6. Fixed·Base Connections:

Beam columns are frequently required to earry end moments
"M" induced either by eccentricity of the axial load "N" or by
base · fixity. Fig. 9.26, illustrates a typical fixed base
Fig. 9.24
 , CHAPTER 9 821 822. CHAPTER9L
connection subjected to an axial compressive force "~" and an Table 9.2 gives three possible cases for the stress
end moment "M =N. e" ~ · where-·tl1e eccentricity (e) is
··-·
measured ;-.u"'-"'"' .~.uu.-.;.,..v ...- .. -IR-t..fte-.H.ps.t-:.--t-wo-·cases where" e· :S· D:f6 • the base
from the column neutral axis. as
is entirely subjected to compression stress f
con
The maximum normal stress (f ) on the concrete footing calculated from Equation 9.12. In the third case where e > D/6
con
is given by: Equation 9.12 is no longer valid since the tension side of the
concr~te footing becomes inactive.
f ± (N. e)(D/2) = N 6. (N. e)
con 3 Hi)"± 2
(BD /12) BD In the following sections, each type will be considered
separately and approximate methods of analysis will be developed
f ~ - 6N { ~ ± e) 9.12
con BD2 6 for some conventional configurations.

Where: e =M / N
Table 9~2. Stress Distribution Patterns Over
N Base Plate

. ..' N
Configuration Eccentricity · Stress Distribution
':'Top Plate "e'" "fcon"

e < 0/6 ITII II Ill

Base Entirely
Subjected to
Compression ·
e = D/6

't :.o (CI l u. :.l . u. l lu. .l----LI.LI.JIIIu..~II..Ll.JIII

u.J
1
,NoContact I' Contact Area "i

I !~
Base Partially
Subjected to
e >Dt6
Compression

D
.I
• Tension
Side .
.I. Compression
Side
.I
(a) Constructional Details {b) Str.ess Distribution· "f" !lue to
. ' of base Connection
l "t{" and "M" respectively
T = r·esul tant. tensile force.
Fig. 9.26. A Typical Fixed Base Connection C = resultant compression .force.
Subjected to "N" and "M"
 . . . CHAPTER9 823 824 CHAPTER9
Fig. 9.27, describes the most commonly used types of fixed
I
.l base co'r\.nections: .. -They~' are classified according to the stress
distribution pattern over the base plate.

9.6.1. Base is Entirely Subjected to Compression "e = (M/N} :s

{D/6} .. :
a:::
9.6.1.1. Different Configurations:
[~
El- From the previous discussion, it can be concluded that as
o-c
(.)
~·~ ::;;
long as the end moment M is small, it would be expected that
~~ :co.~
.. 0
O..y r--------------------.·~ § compress-ive stresses are always present between ·the column and
..:;.
Ill
~~
::;; the concrete ·foundation. As given in Fig. 9.27, the main. tyPes
Ill of fixed base connections that are entirely subjected to
c
0
..
c:
;:;
(.)
(I)
c
compressive stresses are classified as follows:

...
0
~ c
j,
c
0 (a) The Bracket Type: In this type as shown in Fig. 9.27.a
c 0
0 (I)
brackets are attached to the outer edges of the column flanges
....
(.) Ill
cu
m by small braces of butt welds . This can be obtained by just
m
... "0
(I)
1:S beveling the edges of the brackets. No beveling is required for
"'
.!:!
LL
....LL0
0
.
a.
Ill
(I)
column flanges. Fillet welds joining the
brackets to the base plate can transmit the induced moment.
column and the

~ c.
~
(b) Side-Plate Type: This .type is shown in Fig. 9.27.b and
a:.. is utilized for columns of nominal flange thickness. The moment
.. "M" and the axial force "N" are transmitted from the flanges to
~ .. =:E
0
(.) the side plates via vertical lines of fillet weld. These
"'-E.,
f en i straining actions are then transmitted to the base plate via the
;: r-------------------_.~
c ...iii
...
UJ

.m.
lower horizontal lines of fillet weld .

(c) Gusseted Type: This type is illustrated in Fig. 9.27.

and is also used for nominal flange thicknesses. Gussets are
attached to the outer edges o.f · the flanges which stiffen the
overhanged portions of the base plate.
 826 CHAPTER9L
..lcHAPTER9 825
9.6.2.1. Different Configurations:
i i
9.6.1.2. Method of Analysis:
' connection-·-l'YJ,e·--for-wllicfi tile- base plate is entirely N
subjected to compression can be analyzed by the same previously
developed methods of the hinged base connections. Tbe dimensions Channel

B and D of the base plate are determined such that the maximum
applied stress fconcalculated by Equation 9.12 does not exceed the
allowable prescribed values. Regarding the c;alculation of the
minimum required thickness of the . base plate, the problem is
somewhat difficult tban that of the hinged types. The
distribution of the stress f over a unit strip of the plate is
con
no longer uniform so some averaging values may be assumed to
I
.L
compute the plate thickness •

-
c:::::.,

•---
-£·:---
I ::::::1

•
--- 8
For more detailed analysis,
following examples:
the ·reader may refer to the
•
c::::::~
I •
!'!::::::>

Example 9.6 Fixed-base connection of the bracket type. D ..1

Example 9.7 Fixed - base connection of the side plate
fig. 9.28. A Detailed Construction of A Typical
type.
Fixed Base Connection Type "A".

Examples 9.8 and 9.9 Fixed-base connection of the gusseted

Type "A": This type is mainly· used for small_ Values of moment M
type.
Fig. 9. 28.' illustrates a typical
and tensile force T.
connection~ As shown, two channels are attached to the column
9.6.2. Base is Partially Subjectedto Compression "e (MIN 2::
flanges by horizontal lines of fillet weld. The channels at
(D/6)":
both sides are not in contact with the base plate. Thus, the
This configuration is termed as the conventional fixed base
resultant compre~sive force "C'! acts on the center line of the
connection. Tension- will be induced over a part of the base and
beam-column compression flange. Vertical stiffeners are held in
then transmitted to the footing via anchor-bolts by bond stress .
the interior of the channels by vertical and horizontal fillet
. -As ·has been previously outlined in Figs. 9.27. (d), (e) and (f),
welds. They tr~smit the tensile. force "T" to th~ anchor bolts
the main types may be classified as type "A", type "B", and
type "C". _via the top flange of the charinel. Fig. 9.29. shows the load

· transmission scheme.
~CHAPTER9 827 828 CHAPTER9L

Left Side Type "B": This type is used for medium values of MandT. The
Right Side
\rarious steel components---of- the"-connection·-·are·-shown in Fig.·····
Beam Column M & N
9.30. Vertical stiffeners are attached to the column·flanges
by vertical lines of fillet weld. The compression force is
transmitted from the flanges to the stiffeners via these
Co,mpression at Right Flange vertical welds and then to the base plate by direct contact.
of Beam Column
C=-M/d-N /2 Tension is transmitted to the top plate via the stiffeners
through the vertical weld lines and then to the bolts by tension
100 % Tranmitted by and then to the footing by bond.
Contact Bearing
Sbear Stress
N

Channel Cross-Section

Bending of Upper Flange· Top Plate !

of Channel Section
Vertical· Stiffener I
B~lts
By Bearing
( ) · Contact Stress
By Bond i
! I
•' ,,..,
-L.._-.!:!
I L
T
N I

I
c::::;:: :::::.
-$- -$-
- f£·:--- ::::Hi

•
c::::::~
I.. -$-
===:t

1.. 0. ..1

Fig. 9. 30. Typical Detailed Construction of

Fig. 9.29. Fixed-Base ConnectionType "A" Type·"B" Fixed Base Connection

Load Transmission Scheme

._.CHAPTER 9 829 830 CHAPTER 9 a.,.
The transmission of forces from the beam-column to the
Left Side
~ightSl4e
· ·foundation is shown- in-Fi:g:··9·.;-3L

Type "C": This type is commonly used for high values of "M" and
Tension at Left Flange "T".. Referring to Fig. 9 .. 32.. , it can be observed that the
of Beam Column Compression at Right Flange
gusset plates have been extended outer far in or:-der to induce
· of Beam Column .
Shear. due to Q & Mt the greatest moment of resistance.

This particular detail uses a pair of channels with a

Shear If no Contact of top plate for the hold-down bolts to transfer the tensile force
Shear due to Q & Mt
Compression
back. and, .in t~rn, back to the beam column.
Flange

Contact between Vertical Shear N

Stiffeners & Top Plate

·.·.· . ( Top ytate ) By Bearing

Bending of Contact Stress
Top Plate

(n~ts )
By Bond
R. C. Footing
N

I
"" ..l..... """""'" ""'"""'"
I :: ~
:: I Ii_ I ;: :: I

" • ..!
II II
' ' ·--- ' II

~·~ r-:·-+
. ---· ~w~ ~·-+
:• "::
I II I
~
II
" ::
:: I
I I
:: I

T I

Fig. 9. 31. Fixed-Base Connection Type "B" Fig. 9.32. A Detailed Construction of the Conventional

Load_Transmissi~n Scheme Type "C" Fixed-Base Connection

 . . . . CHAPTER9 831 832 CHAPTER9 . . .
i 9.6.2.2. Method of Analysis:
i. ~- A Vor:king Loaa -~pproa-cn:
K"d ~- -E'Nect±ve--hmgth-~of··contact bearing between--base
In the :following an analytical method for analyzing a plate and concrete foundation; k is a multiplier
typical partially compressed fixed base connection is presented. factor.
The eccentricity (e) is great enough to cause tension on one
side of the base; e > D / 6.
Effective steel area of bolts subjected to
tension.
d
l' 'I T&C Resultant tensile and compressive forces respec-
AnchorBoHs
tively.
Vertical Stiffeners

f Induced tensile stress in bolts.

:1-: st.
..'•••,
f . Maximum induced compressive· stress on concr·ete
con
footing.

~asi5 Ai:l:!_t_<mp~ions:

1- Both steel and concrete behaves as a linear elastic material

·kd'=3a in which Hook's law applies (L e. stress = yo\tng' s modulus X
strain).
D

2- The theory of ~ending is applicable, where plane sections

Fig. 9. 33. Free Body Diagram of Resultant Loads remain plane after deformation.
Appl'ied to A Fixed Base. Connection
Equilibrium Equations of Vormal Force and Moment:
Referring to Fig .. 9. 33, the following design parameters Equilibrium of normal forces gives:
are defined:

N = C- T . . . . . . . . . . 9. l3.a.
d
Location of the resultant ten~ile force measured
from-the right edge_of the base plat~ Where C .• ;, -~" .Kd B .9~13.b.
"- con

and T--At.f't . . . . . . • . . . . 9.13.c.

R S
..lcHAPTER9 833
834 CHAPTER9L
- Moment balance about the right edge of base plate gives: By assuming trial reasonable values for the parameters

B, D, d a~d Ast' Equations 9.13, 9.14, and 9.15, can be solved

M=N . ~ + (T - ~ C) d . . . 9.14.
for the unknowns k, f , and f t" The tensile force acting on
con s
Stress-Strain Relations: the bolts can then be determined and the required fillet weld
From the assumption of linear strain distribution, the lines of stiffeners can be proportioned. The thickness of the
following relations are obtained: base plate is calculated from the resulting stress distribution
Strain Ratio: f .
con
Est (1-k)
E = -k- Refer to Example 9.10.
con
9.6.2.3. Simple Methods of Analysis:
(a) Type "A": In this type, the supporting channels are not in
contact with the base plate as illustrat~ in Fig. 9.3S.a. The
anchor bolts will transfer the tensile forces by bond to the
foundation, while ·the compressive forces will be transmitted to
(1-k) d' kd' the base plate mainly through the column flange as indicated in
Fig. 9.35.a The end of the beam colwnn is assumed to be
'
milled. The effective bearing length "Kd " can be determined by
Fig. 9.34. Strain Distribution. considering that the centroid of the compressive stress triangle
is coinciding with the colwnn flange center line.
fst Est Est Refer to Example 9.11.
Stress Ratio: -f- = ;:;E---E----
con con con
(b) Type "B": Here the bearing length is determined assuming that
(1-k) the centroid of the stress triangle coincides with the center
Therefore: fst = f con· -k-- .n . . . 9. 15.
line of the side stiffeners as shown in Fig. 3S.b. This assumption
is based on the fact that the end of the beam col1.l111Il is not
Maximum· strains . produced in steel and
milled. Thus the compressive force of the flange is transmitted
concrete respectively.
to the stiffeners via the weld lines and then to the base plate by
E & E Module of.elasticity of steel and concrete
st con contact. In reality this assumption is somewhat imaginary. It is
respectively.
preferable to consider more realistic assumptions as given in the
n Modular ratio ( = Es t I E
con
). following sections.

Refer to Example 9.12.

 835
836 CHAPTER9 . . . .
9.6.2.4. Finite Element Analysis:
-- ·· F.l~nge Center nne
A research work (25) has 'been conducted in the· StructUr-al
Department of Cairo University where the hinged and fixed base
connections have been analyzed. The technique of Finite
Elements has been utilized using a quadrilateral element with
six degrees of freedom. The obtained results have shown that
the compressive stress distribution on concrete footing is
parabolic for a base plate thickness of common practice.

As a case of study Fig. 9.36.a. shows a typical

a
kd' = 3a configuration of a fixed base connection. The shapes of the
d' stress distribution on the concrete footing for different
Bolls under tlnslon
~ flange under compression
thicknesses of base plate are shown in Fig. 9.36. b. As the

oo~~-~.rnr
thickness increases the plate becomes more rigid and the stress
distribution over the.concrete becomes uniform.

The normal base plate thickness used in the practical

design ranges from 2.0 to 4.0 em. For this range the base plate
.(a) Conventional Type "A".
may not be assumed as rigid, and it should be expected that the

l actual stress on the concrete base is somewhat greater than the

calculated one from the conventional method. Base plates with
M
thicknesses of around 1.0 em are flexible while base plates with
IN Center llne.or side
stiffeners

~·''
thicknesses around 6.0 em may be assumed as rigid.
..
.,.'·•
.,'• Ii Regarding the position of the compression force, the
:··
conventional method assumes it to be either under the column

'
compression flange (case of flange column which is only in
T
contact) or at the middle of the stiffener width (case of
partial contact). Table 9.3 gives the exact position as
kd'=3a
obtained from the finite element analysis.
d'
The distance (a) is measured from the right edge of the
( b) Conventional Type "B~.
base plate as shown in Fig. 9.36.a~ It is to be noted that this
distance (a) equals 10 ems as computed by the conventional
Fig: 9. 35. Induced Forces ..
analysis.
 ~CHAPTER9 837 838 CHAPTER9L
Table 9.3
N

Y. of Contact a (em)
' c
i'

Flange lOOY.
14.56
Base Plate ( 700 x 450 x 30 1
I Stiffeners
I 100Y.

c~
(a) Typical Conftguration.
~Flange OY.
14.2
Stiffeners 100Y.
( N =40tons, e=25cms)

Flange 66Y.
60 l 14~6
Stiffeners 66Y. .
40

20 I Flange sox ' 14.74

··~ o.· " .

0.0 I
I
Stiffeners SOY.
____J
Kg/cm2 '---

60
Referiog to Table 9.3, it can be concluded that the
40
percentage of .contact does not affect the position of the
20 compression force. This. may be explained by the fact that the
0.0 distances between the nodes of the . elements are relatively
Kg/cm2 small. ·Thus thP. base plate. redistributes the acting loads o,rer
60. the same are~ almost similarly.

40
Consid.ering the finite elements method as an accurate
20
analysis, H can also be c'oncluded th~t the dimensioning of the
0.0
fi.xed· base connection using the convent.ional method (Type B) is
Kg/cm2
sometimes unsafe to withstand the induced stresses. Hence it is
(b) Stress. Distribution.on Concrete for
Different Base Plate Thickness re~ommended to proceed the dimensiontng using the refjned

Fig. 9.36. Finite ElementAnalysis of approximate analysis of Section 9.6.2.4.1.

Fixed Base Connection.

 840 CHAPTER9L
. . . CHAPTER9 839 bolts are used on two rows.
Three
9.6.2.4.1. Refined Approximate Analysis: a
As a more refined approxill@.tion, the compression :f-orce-
row inside the column flanges.
should be assumed at the centroid of an area comprising the
column compressicn flange and the stiffeners in the compression
side. This assumption gives a value of 14.16 em for the
position of the compression force, which is very close to values
obtained from the finite elements analysis ..

It should be noted that for the case where the compression

flange is in contact only, while the stiffeners are separated
from the base plate, the compression. resultant lies under the
Detail ( 2,
compression flange for both the conventional solution and the Detail ( 1)

finite element analysis.

Refer to Examples 9.13, 9.14, and 9.15.

9.6.2.4.2 Effect of Bolts Position:

Case for Which the Number of-Bolts Exce~ds the Breadth
~olumn Flange:
Detail ( 3)
Three details were chosen to study the effect of bolts
position on the analysis of the f~xed base connections. These Fig. 9. 37 • .Different Bolt Positions of a
Typical Fixed Base Connection
details are shown in Fig. 9.37. The dimensions of each of the
t,hree details were 9'mputed according to the conventional
A finite elements analysis has been proceeded regarding _the
solution. The main characteristics of the three details are as
follows: three details. The roll·. ~wing resuits ,have been obtained.

1- In detail 1, six bolts are used on two rows outside Detail (1 ):

.the column flanges. The first row at the neighborhood of the column flange was
carrying 75Y. of the total tensile force while_the second one was
2- In detail 2, five bolts are used on one row outside
earring 25'Y. Hence due to th_is _unequal distribution of forces,
the column flanges. The column flanges were extended by - be overstressed when using the
the bolts of the first row w1 11
·using edge hutt welded bracket plates, in order to allow a
conventional method of analysis.
convenient breadth to add two additional bolts.
 842 CHAPTER9
. . . CHAPTER9 841
shown in Fig. 9.38.c is to be utilized where a circular top
Detail (2):
-p-late·; vertical sliffener•s-··ana- ierision bolts are transmitting
···--· -1'he--·t-ensi-on force ··was-mai:nl~e1l··oy· "the three 'ceilf;raT-
the applied straining actions to the base. The design of' the
bolts. The central bolt, the two intermediate, and the two
different steel elements will follow the conventional fixed base
'' exterior ones wer.e carrying 28Y., 44Y., and 28Y. of' t.he tensile
i'I, force respectively. Also due to this unequality the central bolt
connection previously outlined in Section 9.6.2.2.
I

becomes unsafe if' designed according to the conventional method.

i.
I I
Detail. (3):
The tension force was equally distributed on the five T r
bolts. Each bolt carries about 20Y. o£ the· tensile force. ! \

I~
I
''
/
I

'I
From the above discussion, it can be concluded that detail I
I
.
I
'' I

'
I I
(3) is the best detail, the stress distribution on bolts being
uniform. On the other hand, one .can also use detail (2) where
the error can be admitted. Detail '(1) is forbidden since the
· dimensions o£ bolts are unsafe.

Refer to Examples 9.16 ~nd 9.17.

Type {C)
Type(A) Type(B)
9.6.3. Fixed Base Connections with Hollow Columns:
(b) With Stiffeners. · (c) With Stiffeners and Top Plate.
9.6.3.1. Columns with Circular Hollow. Sections: (a) Without Stiffeners.
Fig. 9.38 illustrates three configurations of base
Fig. 9.38. Fixed Base Connection with
connections for hollow circular columns. Type (A} shown in Fig.
Hollow Circular Columns
9~38.a is utilized. for small fixed base. moments .. These moments
are Ot.ran~tted to the corresponding bolts and to the base plate
9. 6.. 3. 2. Colwnns with Square Hollow Sections:
via circular lines of fillet welds. . The computation of' the
For box columns, the traditional solution shown in Fig.
induced ·compressive stresses and the· base plate thickness will
9 .. 39.a use vertical stiffeners, a top plate and bolts. The
follow . exactely the procedure previously outlined in Section
other alternative is illustrated ·in Fig.· 9.39.b where the
9.6.1. For moderate · moments, Type (B) illustrated in Fig.
stiffeners are extended so that the top plate has smmetric
9.38.b is recommended, where the applied moments are transmitted
. . . . . .
'
support about the boll center line.
to the base plate via vertical stif-feners directly fillet welded
to the columns. However for relatively high moments, Type (c)
 ...... CHAPTER9 843 844 CHAPTER 91,.
9.7. General Remarks Regarding the Holding-Down Bolts:
9. 7. 1_._ .l'.iJ1D~.BasesJlnde:c-Ax.i,al--Loads: ··
As has been previously outlined in Section 9.3.1.2 if
the horizontal shear reactions are small compared to the axial
loads (say less than 15%), the friction between the base plate
and the reinforced concrete footing should be able to accomodate
this modest · horizontal reactions. Only nominal holding-down
bolts are to be provided to resist any. construction loading.
The best location of these bolts should be close to the column
centre-line.

1- Vertical Column.
c--- ==-:I
-$ 2- BasePlate.
-$' .
c--- ===:~ 3.:. Mortar.
~ -$
4- Bolt.
T c--- ===:I
5- R.C. Footing.
... .
~.
.
(a) (b)

(1} Box Column ; (2) Top Plate

Fig. 9.40. Holding-Down Bolt Detail of
(3) Vertical Stiffeners
a Hinged Base Connection
(4) Base Plate ; (5} Bolt Centre-Line.
The use of holding-down pockets as shown in Fig. 9.40 is
Fig. 9.39. Base Connections of Box Columns recommended to rend the process of erection easy. However. it
is essential that proper attention be paid to the following:
Depending on the magnitucle of the applied moment the
(a) The holding-down pocket is to be cleaned before the
vertical stiffeners are either w~lded directly to the base plate
steel erection. The existance of any foreign materiel can
or stopped short at . the lower. end of the main column
affect seriously the group which can became inefficient to
,cross-section~
support the bolt.
l
i
;._)."
 846 CHAPTER9L
._.CHAPTER 9 845
(b) Good sccess to the pocket must be satisfied to ensu~e
The anchor bolts a~e generally arranged symmet~ically with
respect toJ.h.e.-eo.lumn .£langes.. The-di-amete~- of bolts is ransfing
that it .can be .~~E.Uy__!.i] l e!Lwi.th_compact.ed -:fine·· ooncrete~
20 mms to 76 mms since thicker anchor bolts a~e very difficult
(c) The conc~ete mixtu~e should be cement, sha~p sand, fine to fabricate.
agg~egate and wate~ in propo~tions 1:1~:2:0:5. This
composition would give wo~kable mo~.t~ which can be compacted The bolt tension forces must be transmitted safely to the
into the bolt pocket. conc~ete footings. This can be achieved using one of the
following configurations:
(d) A nominal depth of bedding mo~ta~ of 40 mms is to be

I p~ovided fo~
be used fo~
small base connections and a g~eate~ fig~e should
l~ge~ bases.
(a} J Bolt System:
It will be possible to pack the Fig~ 9.41.a, illustrates a J bolt configuration which is
~educed gap if the top of the conc~ete is 2 ems high. On the usually used fo~ bolt diameter less than 24 mms.
othe~ hand this will allow ext~a bedding if the concrete footing
is low. The· .design of the holding down bolts to. resist static
uplift .fo~ces does not present any particular difficulty. The
(e) The bolts may be cranked · if their diameter do not
anchorage length (L ) may be calculated from conventional
exceed 30 mms. A pocket 150-200 nmis deep is to be p~ovided at 2
criteria of plain reinforcing bars using equation 9.6. If only
the top of the bolt as shown in Fig.·9.40.
a good access is provided to the bolt pocket to ensu~e that it

(f) The bolts should be detailed with an extra extension of can be properly filled with compacted fine concrete the length

SO mms than required to overcome any decrease that should appe~ (L ) c~ sh~e by bond the transmi tion of a portion · of the
1
in the concrete footings. This will allow to use the bolts tension uplift bolt forces. Otherwise the length (L ) is to be
1
without any extension studs. excluded.

(g) For errection purposes, excessive cle~ance between the A common doubtful practice is to wire the J bolts to
bolts and the holes in the base plate is allowed. reinforcement as shown in Fig. 9.41.a. During concreting these
reinforcements ~e disturbed and probably may not work.
9. 7. 2. Holding-Down Bolt Details for Fixed. Base Connecti.ons:
For the computation of the induced bolt tension forces it
{b) Washer Plate System:
is necess~y to investigate the case of loading which gives the
For excessive ancho~age length (Lzl which generally
maximum value of moment with the minimum normal force (i.e. the
corresponds to bolt diameters above 24 mms, the J bolts ~e
case of dead loads with the corresponding critical case of wind
replaced by the washer plate system shown in Fig. 9.41.b.
loading).
 ~CHAPTER9 847 848 CHAPTER9
Vi th this system no account is taken of any bond with the
1'
! grout because.-0£ .i.ts--possible-sh~-~lie tension force is
hence :resisJ.ed by the flexure of the washer plate which may be
I:
designed as a simple canliliver upturned base plate. This means
I
II .db. that the required safe washer-plate thickness can be computed aas
•..f·;·, l;X·;r·.,, . . \;·\~- : '· 1.:
. ... ,
follows:
~ ·._

t=~
L :; ::
·.
•'.

c :~

(a) J Bolt'System. (b} Washer Plate System. T.b

where:
4

Fb = allowable bending stress.

m . m. l==-
9JP~· · ·6 4= c~=~t~=~J b= breadth of the washer plate.
(Refer to equations 9.1, 9.2 and 9.3}

HJJ .EE ··•1*1

1. . b
Solution (1)
.1 . 1. b
Solution (2)
• 1. . 1. · b

Solution (3)
.!
The washer plates may be attached to the bolts either by
direct circular fillet welds or by using a lower nut as shown in
Fig.· 9.41.c. · Alternatively i f the washer plate thickness is
relatively thick, four vertical stiffener:-s may be welded to both
the anchor bolts and the washer plate as shown by solution (3)
(1) Bolt. ·
(cl Detail "A" of Fig. 9. 41. c. The design of this latter solution will follow
(2) Baseplate.
section 9.3.2 regarding the gusseted hinged base connection.
(3) Grout (Mortar}.
(4} Bolt
(c) The Cap System:
(5) Washer Plate.
For larger bolts where · washer piates . are us~ it is
(6} Nut cap;
Important to ensure that the bolts are free for adjustment after
(7) Bar to prevent nut concreting. This can be achieved by the use of a nut cap as
rotation.
(d) Cap System. shown in Fig. 9.41.d. ·

Fig. 41.
 . . . . CHAPTER9 849 850 CHAPTER9L
9.8. Pocket Base COnnections:
F~~: .. 9.42.a shows _.a ... t;ypical --poc-ket base connm:::tion in
wh.ich the beam. column is grouted into a. pocket inside the =·J bF
6--='"M_
concrete foundation. con,b
Depending upon the tranS.mi t~ed straining
i
i: actions. the c~>nnection is regarded either as a hinged or a 9.16

.fixed base connection. Here the fixed type will be considered. h .

m~n

The axial load ••N" is resisted by direct ·bearing and bond where Fcon, b is the allowable compressive. bending stress of

between steel and concrete a shown in Fig. 9.42.b. On the other concrete and b is the breadth of the column flanges.
hand, the end moment "M" is resisted by horizontal pressure
forces acting on column flanges from the concrete foundation The design value of the embeded depth, h, must not be less
(Fig. 9.42.c). than h . as given by Equation 9.16. This depth must also be
checke:~~or bond stress by considering the balance of the
N vertical forces as shown.in Fig. 9.42.b.
N
l

I
J. M Refer to Example9.1S.

9 . 9 . Grillage Base ConnecUon:

Grillage foundation .
~s used 1- n cases of heavily loaded
columns. It is made of two or more sets. of beams with the
1 '
I
tf
I
f
successive ·sets disposed at right angles to each other. The

~· whole system is encased in concrete as shoWn in Fig. 9.43.

I' I I
~ifi
· (a} Poket Base Connection
(b} Axial load Resistance·
Subjected to "N" & "M" (c) Moment Resistance
( Bearing & Bond )
(Bending)

Fig. 9.42. Pocket Base ·Connection

The required embeded depth of the colUion ean be determined

by considering moment equilibrium as shown in Fig. 9.42.c. The
minimum depth is then given by:

. . 9 . 43 .. Grillage Base Connection

F ~g.
 . . . CHAPTER9 851 852 CHAPTER9
In the following the analysis of th.e "11 h" The required safe cross sections of beams are determined l·y
I gr1. age lnged base
I, connectio~-t-i-ng--only -an ·axial loaa lifTS-considered. As
i. considering·-ttre-c<:nn1tln~d stresses due -to· both shear and mome1•t
given in Fig. 9.44.a, the upper beam set is·treated at the most critical sections (1-1) and (2-2) as given in Fig.
as a double
l cantilever beam. It is assumed that the b
1 t d 9.44. b, c. A complete analysis would also consider web buckling
\.'
ase p a ~ istributes
I
\ the Vertical load N uniformly .over its width D. Th 1 and crushing stresses. For more details the reader may refer to
e oad is
then transmitted uniformly to the lower set over the length Las Example 9.19.
indicated in Fig. 9.44.a. The determination of a proper value
:. of the ·length "L" d ... ·· d th
epen s on. e safe transmission of the load 9.10. Main Types of Support Connections:
to the soil.
In the following, some of the commonly used support
For a square grillage: connections will be briefly presented.

L = J (N + G)·/ p
9.17 9. 10. 1. Hinged Supports for Heayy Vertical Reactions:

where G = Total weight of grillage base.

P = Safe bearing pressure on the soil.

1/2(L- D)

(a) Load Diagram.

Type"A"
Type"B"

(b) s~F.D.

Type"C" Type"D"

Fig. 9. 44~ Shear. and Moment Distribution

on the Upper Beam Set ·. Fig. 9.45
 . . . CHAPTER9 853 854 CHAPTER9L
Fig. 9. 46 shows two various types; "A" and "B" in both
Four different configurations are shown in Fig. 9.45.
Configurations · (AJ ·a:nr(B) ·are ·usied I'or types an intermedi~te column rests on the upper flange of a beam
the redistribution of
girder by a base plate welded to the column end. Vertical
the vertical normal forces transmitted by the support to the
foundation over a much larger area. stiffeners are attached to the girder's web to prevent
crippling. They are designed on the vertical load transmitted
Type "C" where rollers
· are provided, from the column to the girder. Types "A" and "B" have two
allows horizontal
displacement' of the supported structure. In type .different configurations of vertical stiffeners as shoWn in Fig.
the
support is ; inclined in order to transmit a 9.46.
significant
horizontal reaction
. ;: .. • ,
9. 10. 3. Hinged Support Allowing for Thermal Deformations:
Generally these types of hinged. supports are used for
girders of bridges.

9.10.2. Hinged Supports of Columns on Beams;

I v ! v

.... ,..
I e r
'

I
...
'~ ' ' .
's
:::i):· .
,. ., :1:
II
1.1

I
i
s
'
s s
'
s 'I'
II
1.1

'I'
II
1,1

·v Type"B"
Type"B"

Fig. 9.47. Beam-Column Connection Allowing

. Horizontal Displacement
'l.f · Sec.S-S Sec.s-s
. '
Two types are shown in Fig. 9. 47. For· type "A". the oval
Fig. 9.46. Hinged. Suppor.ts
. 0 f .· Col
. umns on· Beams holes permit .displacement of the beam · along . x-x . direction a
" :. .
 . . CHAPTER9 855 856 CHAPTER9L
distance 11x from both sides. The vertical reaction R is Rotations of
base plate is used.
In type "B"' only one
transmit t~Q. JIY. .§.hear, __ of minor importance.
such configurations are
Type "B" is used for heavy loads. The support rests on a
steel bracket. It should be noticed that up~ift rea~tions can 9.10.4.2. Fixed Types:
t types for a fixation of a
not be resisted by such a configuration. Fig. 9.49, shows two differen
1 or wall.
beam in a reinforced concrete co umn
9.10.4. Supports of Beams on Masonry Yalls or Concrete Columns: b the two vertical
T "A" the moment is replaced y
Types of these supports·are classified as hinged types and For ype • to the concrete
(F) transmitted by bearing stresses
fixed types. forces
column via a top and a bottom plate.
9.10.4.1. Hinged TYPes: a top. tensile force
nB" the moment is replaced by
As shown in Fig. 9.48, Type "A" has two base plates. The For Type • b chorage steel b o lt s. On
1 - tted to the concrete wall y an .
upper plate is welded to· the beam girder whPe the lower one transm~ · . be transmitted by
\ d the. compressive force ~~~ 11 ...
rests on the masonry and is welded to anchor bolts embeded in h
the other an •
the walls. A vertical stiffener is attached to the beam web in bearing to the concrete wall.

order to safely transmit the vertical reaction R without

',.
crippling. The upper base plate ought to have a compact section
to provide the largest possible rotation of the support.
:~.:-~~r:.
. ..
~:}-;;·.~ ?:~:2
1 I
a:. o

rl"
I
I
IJ 0:
d
I
I
..
c·.. o..
I.
I
I
I
lR )H . .....

<l· I
I
•0" I

Type"B"
Type''A"
Type"A" Type"B" upports .·of Beams on Columns
Fig. 9.49. Fixed S

Simple Support with Two Base .Plates Support. on-Bracket

Fig. 9.48. Hinged Supports of Beams on Ci>luluns or Valls

 . . . CHAPTER9 857 858 CHAPTER9L
Example (9.1): (2) Welds:
.. . ~-:...... ___________
.- . ___:. __ .______ ·-···-- ~·-----------··-~-

Design the hinged base connection of a frame knowing the -A;·-A-ssuming-~€omptete Contac-t--BeTween Co!UIIliland Base Plate:
following: In . this case the total amount of vertical load N goes
R(D.L+LL) = 30 tons H(D.L+L.L) = 3.0 ton directly -from the column section to the foundation by contact
via the base plate. \lhile the horizontal force H is transmitted
The cross section of the column is a B. F. LB. N.o. (30).
from the column to the base plate by welds, then to the
Solution foundation by shear on bolts.

2
I
·I,
Refer to Section 9.3.1.2 Allowable stress of weld, fall = 0.5 ft = 0.70 t/cm .
(1) Base Plate:
Take m = n = 5.0 ems. A . =A
I · .weld{l-1) weld(2-2)
D ~ 0.95
: -.
X 30 + 2 X 5
~~.
~30t =S X b X 2
N
38.50 ems
l = 60 s.
B 0.80 X 30 + 2 X 5
= 34.0 ems ..
Section {1-1) : Assuming s = 0. 40 em . -

f 30 X 1000 0 (minimum weld dimension from E.C.P)

con =·34 x 3S.50
= 22.9 . '2 ..-
r - 2 'm
5 --.
2
.<.50 kg/cm Safe
kg/em
l
:
----+----:
. i . :
- :---
0 Aweld = 60 x 0.40 = 24.0 cm •
Weld line
t

•
..~
B - r- (HJx 30 H= 3.0 ton b
: . ! ' :
M/un~•t "dt -· 22.9 . (5)2
w1 h - 1000 ~- ·-2-

0.,28~2~ t. em -
:--~-t---- : -5
-
q//
3 . - .. · .
=- 24 =_0.125 t/cm
. . - . .2
2

.J sI (}9~ .c 30 s < 0.72 t/cm Safe

Section {2.;.2):
Fb = 0.72 X 204 = 1.728 t/cm2 3
f ,.
.._
= ..
2-~:-----..--;-;::
X 30 X 0.40
{solid rectangular section) - Table 5.6
2 2-
= 0.125 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm
X 0.28625
1.728 = 0.99 em ..
Safe

Base plate is (38.5 x 34 x 1. O)

 ~CHAPTER 9 859 860 CHAPTER9L
B. If we assume no Contact Between the Column & the The base plate thickness is to be increased to 1.1 ems
. Base P-late.:-
Bolts:
Assuming all of the force N N B9lts will transmit the total horizontal force (H) by
will be transmitted to the base
direct shear to the foundation.
plate by fillet welds ( end of
column is not milled ). Hence the 3 (2 bolts)
welds will carry a h~rizo~tal force qbolt = 2'x ~olt
(H) as well as the vertical force N. 2
qall = 0.25 x 4.0 = 1.0 t/cm (singl-e shear)
This means that:
I 3 1.5 em
2
~olt =2 x 1.0 =

R = j (3)
2
+ {30) 2 = 30.15 tons
Use bolts ~ (16 mms)

Section (1!.1): s i= 1. 00 em As the bolt doesn't carqr any tensj,on force, thus its
length is taken as a minimum of. 20 times the. diameter ( i.e.

'· Lbolt = 20 x 1.6 =32 ems)

,, . ... . .. . ·~· .. _._,... }A •:
· .. fj_· ~:~·:x·~~o~ 1.o = 0.50 u~.;? Note: If there is 'a case of loading for which (N = U) is upward
,.
T(Rn.'L+ll.LT), then: This force will be transmitted from the
= 0.502 t/cm
2
< 0.72 x 1.10 t/cm2 column to the base plate by the welds, then the bas~ plate will
transmit the force to the bolts which will transmit i t to the

Take s = 0. 7 ems foundation by bond.

.'
~· ' ., l '

H u u
30 : .·~ = 2 ~olt ' ft bolt =2 ~olt Anchor bolts
2.
qj_ =
2 X 30 X 1.0 = 0.50 t/em /
3
fj_ =
2 X 30 X 1.0
·= 0. OS t/cm2

Tbolt
Lbolt = -=--=-----:=-:..........:.........._ __
IT d x f (all. bond)
unsafe
Use weld of size s = 1 X 0.86
use
0 .. 792 :: 1. 08 em. s = 1.1 ems·
 ..lcHAPTER9 861 862 CHAPTER9L
Example (9.2): (3) Flange Welds (Refer to Fig. 9.9.b):
DeE.tgn a~Ifi:n~d-bas~'"-connection - ·.. ·F-lange welds-catty about·-soY.-·o:r ··the normal forqe ''N~'-ana
JOt
of the conventional type (Type B) to 20% of the shearing force "H".
carry a vertical force (N = 30 tons)
[
and a horizontal reaction (H = 3 Assume size of weld = 1.0 em.
tons). No contact is to be considered
Sec. (1-1):
Solution 0.8 X 30 2
q.L = =3o=--x---::1,-.-=o~x-2"'" = 0 • 40 t/cm
Refer to Section 9. 3.1. 2. and Fig. 9.10 0.2 X 3.0 2
(1) Concrete: 30x1.0x2
= 0.01 t/em

F
concrete = 6() 2
kg/em 0. 70 t/cm
2 2•
< 1.1 x 0. 72 t/cm ·Safe

Amin base plate = 30 X

60
1000
Sec. (2-2):
0.8 X 30 2
= ;:;3-;:;;0-x----:1".--,o~x--;:;:2 = 0.40 t/em
Take m =n = 5.0 ems
0.2 X 3.0 . 2
30 X 1.0 X 2
= 0.01 t/cm
D = 0.95 x 30 + 10 = 38.50 ems
2 2 2 2
B = 0.80 x 30 + 10 = 34.0 ems f
eq
Jco.4> + 3(0.01) =· 0.40 t/cm < 0.72 x 1.1 t/cm
Safe
f
cone
= 3o.x· 1000 = 22 _90 kg/cm2 .J
34 X 38.50 (4) Welds Between Web and Angles (Refer to Fig. 9.9.b):
< 60·kg/cm2 Safe Approximate Analysis .
!M'nk30=24t These welds carry the remaining 20Y. of the normal force and
(2) Base Plate:
80Y. of the shearing•force.
22.9 (5)2
M/unit "'idth = X 1.0 X -2- <D.. jD
1000 0"2x30 :6•0t .
~ ./ )D

•oo·•··~~l I .IIJw'~
\
= 0.286 t.cm !l-lJCl:Oiit~- / Assume that the horizontal weld
\ carries the horizontal force and the

t=·i* J 6 X 0. 286
'm vertical welds carry the vertical
b. Fb = 1.0 X 0. 72 X 2.4 = 0.99 = 1.0 em
forces.
20·0cms

I.
 -~CHAPTER9 863 864 CHAPTER9L

. ...._:·~-S = 4.2
~6 _
· vertn:a:r ·wera o. 72X2x1o q
40 0 40 = 0.375 t/cm~
= 0~30 em
2
s 2.40
= ~- 2 40
-·~-~ = 0.15
40 X 0.40
t/cm
horizontal weld= 0.72x20x2
$ 0.10 em qR = 1(0.15 + 0.375} 2 + (0.15 + 0.111
2
= 0.58 t/cm
2

2
Sec .IS - Sl < 0~72 t/cm S#e

(5} Ancbo~ 8qJ.ts:

1. 6-0t
The anchor bolts carry ,~he hori~ontal 'sh~aring forpe
l .·.
only. ~ .'

~t ~ 20cms J 2
1
q = 0.25 x 4.0 = 1..0 t/em .... -~ :,j
... b.,,·· . .,
1
.l Take the size of welds =4 mms (min.' size) 1.5._. ' 2
= 1.0- 1.5 em

Exact ~lysis Use 2 a,nchor bolts d :::: 16 mms w.itb a length 32 ems.
s = 0.4 em. From table 3.2 get :-

[10)2
x= 2 X 10 + 20
= 2.50 ellis .. ·

= ·{, s~ui
3
1 ~ 6x10x(2oJ 2 + c2o? (10}4 } l

p . ' 12 ' . ' (2x10 + 20} s ·

- 3083 x 0.40 = 1233;3 cm4 .

Mp· = 2.4 X (10 ~ 2.50) _ 18 t. em.

18.x .10
·l_qtorsion - 1233.3

~ . '
18 X: 7.50
qtcirsion = 1233.3 =0;11 t/em2
 . . . CHAPTER9 865 866 CHAPTER9L
Example (9. 3) ~ Length of weld = 2 (30 - 1.20 - 2 - 2) = 49.60 ems.
Design a hinged· -base--e&ftftee-ti-on·--of' the conventionart.ype
(Type C) to carry a vertical force (N = SO tons)· and a
Assume size of weld =7 mms

~ ;
horizontal reaction (H = 3.0 ton)
! ·for Sec. 1-1 :
. j
Solution lOt SO X 0.3
0·3 .)0:9-0t
-
q.l- 49.60 X 0.7 = 0.43 t / em2

Refer to Section 9.3.1.3 and Fig. 9.11

(1) Concrete:
~3-::-:x::--o_.-;:;1:-;=; = o. 0086 t/cm2
fl.:;: 49 . 60 ·X 0.7
. '
J 3
= j·<o.oo86J 2 2
= SO
f con.' 34 x 52
X 10
= 28. 28. 2
rr-"aa. ·
_...
f
eq
+ 3(0.431
. 2
0~744 t/cm2 < 0.792 t/cm

(2) Base Plate:

Use size of weld =1 mms •.
m =1 + 10 ~ 2 = 9.0 ems
for Sec. (2-2):
M/unit width = 28.28 1• 0
.
1000 X
(sl- s1) SO x 0.3 = 0.43 t/cm2
(9)2 52.gcms · 49.60 X 0.7
X -
2- = 1.145 t.cm
. ' q.l
= 49.60
3 x 0. 1
X 0.7
= 0.0086 t/cm2
~
J.
\ 6 X 1.145 . :
t=4~ = . 1. 0 X 0.72 X 2.4 1.99 take t = 2.0 ems . . 2 2
b feq = J(0.43) 2 + 3(0.0086 )2 . = 0.43 t/cm < 0.792 t/cm Safe

= 1.0 (angle)+ 1.0 (base plate)

(4) Web Welds:
Web welds carry 20% of the norma1 f orce and . 90Y. of the
.. . .1 ( 0 0 )
n =~ 3 - .8 x 30 + 2 = 5.0 ems Assume S ;ze of. weld =4 mms.
shearing force. ~

* Vertical Face (V) 8-F-1· 30

= 0.354 t.cm t = 1.1 ails
50 X 0.2 . 2
q.l = 0.4 X 22 X 2
= 0.568 t/cm
(3) Flange Velds:

Flange welds carry 30/. of 3 0.9 2

X
= 0.153 t/cm
the normal f9rce and lOY. of the
sbe.U.:.i.ng force.
 868 CHAPTER9L
..lcHAPTER9 867
Example (9. 4):
..... --·- 2 ·· -Design a· hinged ·ba:se·--~1on-'-or U1e ·c:onventioiia'l. type-
(0.153)
(Type D) to carry a vertical force (N = 100 tons) and a
v v
= o. 588 t/cn? < o. 72. t/eu? · horizontal reaction (H = 3.0 tons).
_., ~m
Safe
Soluti9n
* Horizontal Face (H)

q -
3· x 0 "9 = 0.153 t/cnl
L 30·0cms j Refer to S~ction 9.3.2.1
//~ 0.40 X 22 X 2.0
Sec. S - S 0
100 t
= . 50 X 0.2
. . 2 .--' i-
f
~ 0.4 X 22 X 2~0
= 0.568 t/cm 1-
5
B.F.I.30 126
em
2
feq = J(0.568) 2 + 3(0.153) "" ..i.. 30·0
ems

= 0.626 t/cm
2
·.
< o.i92 t/cm2 J -
[_5
Safe
L .j 30qns .•I
.1.h/3=10cms
.h/3=10cms
(5} Angle Velds:
Angles carry the re~ining SOX of the normal force. The
total length of weld lines =2 x 24 + 4 x 10 = 88 ems.
100 X 1000
:f
con = --;;5:-:::0:--x---::4-;:0_:_ Safe
0.50 X 50
s = 88 x 0.72 =.0.394 em
(2) Flange Velds (Refer to Fig. 9.12):
.. Take s = 4 mms .Flange welds carry. JOY. of the normal force and 25X of the
24cm
shearing force.
:roi
-
·· Then the "horizontal legs of the T
angles will transmit by· contact
II
II
II
* Sec. U-1): (!)... I _..(1)
this 50 r. of normal force to the
II
II· Assume size of weld = 10 mms. at'' i 'jj)
II I I
II
base plate. II 0.30 X 100. 2
= 0.576 t/cm
2 x.26
\
·~. J (6) .Anchor Bolts: as Example .9.2 2
= 0.014 t/cm

'.
;
 ~CHAPTER9 869
870 CHAPTER9

o-so ..m =so t

Q!J::t-~-·.:::·-100x10· = 10 tons.
2.D - 2x50
= 0.99 t/cm
2 . 2
> 0. 792 t/cm Unsafe Use s = 10.X792
0.99
= 1.25 100x10
2
ems MX = 4x50
so t.cm.
• Sec. (2-2):
2
f J_ = 0.443 t/em s = 13 mms Take hst = 20 ems

2 2
f
eq.
= jco.443) 2. + 3(0.011) = o.44 t/em < 0.792 t/em
2
fb = 6 X SO
=
6 X 50
2 = 0.7S
t.h2 1 (20) 12·5 t 12-St
3 X 10 2 'Wt/ itt
. (3) Veb Velds: q =2 X 1 X 20
= 0.75 t/em
Veb welds will carry 20r. of the normal force and 7SY. of the stresses on Stiffener

shearing force. f
eq.
Assume the size of welds =7 mms. Q.21C'\00 :20 t
2 2
= 1.50 t/cm < 1.1 x (0.72x2.4) t/cm
• Vertical Face: (Rectangular solid section)
&0 &0
. 0:2 X 100 . 2
qj_ =2 X ·22 X 0.70: Q. 6 S t/cm (S) Stiffeners Velds (SOY. of N): ~12·50t
Each of these four weld lines
I .I ~~-0

·{til·~
0.7S X 3 2 4·QI
' '; q//: 2 X 22 X 0.70 = 0 · 07 t/em
22·0cms
transmits a vertical force F
l'

2 2
F = w ( 10 + 15 ) = 2Sw tons
0.6S t/cm < 0.72 t/cm Safe . q f til .......
w = O.S x 100 / 2x50 = O.S t/cm' · ~ Wt/nt
. . ·.
Sec. in Stiffener s .s ·
,

* Horizontal Face: F = 2S x O.S = 12.S tons

. . . 2 . 2
f J_ = 0~6S t/cm q. = 0.07 t/cm·
// . 12.SO
sw = .,..,-x--=o:-.=n= = o.aa em < tst. (Safe) s = 10 .nims.
20
25tDns

Take stiffeners 20 x 1. 0 ems

(4) Stiffeners:

'' Stiffeners carry the uplift stress due to the normal force.
...J Assumethickness of stiffeners ~ 1.0 em. (6) Horizontal Velds .for Stiffeners:

Refer to Eq. 9,,11.a. 2S = 0.694 ems

s =SO x0.72
 . . . CHAPTER9 872 CHAPTER9L
871
{7) Base Plate: (Moments are ·Example (9.5):
Calculated for un 1·t width)
Region· fH: Desfgn the pin connection of an arched structure.
. 2
M:::: ~ (4) details of the pin are as shown in the figure.
1000 X z---::: 0.40 t.cm
I
I Solution
Region (II): (ib ®
a= 26.ems b :::: 30 - 1.2
2
+·+-· ·-+-t--
'
N::20t

:.
= 14.4 ems ,,
II

IJ
a / b == 26/14.4 = 1. 8 L1o .JI2 26cms ll.WJ] It
lt
. 2 It
II

Hence use Table 9.1 to get a

1 = 0.094 ' a2 =0.048 n·
,.-r- r-,-

M a'=~ · 2 u. r- ED-
1000 x 0 · 048 x · (26) = 1.62 t. em ....... ""- ..___

M b,- 50 . ..
!•'<!.'",{
·... :c:·'(~·r: ~ ·: :n·: ·:~: .....
.•·":~I
- 1000: X 0.094 X (14.4) 2 :::: 0.97 t.em 1.J [lz![ ks
o.t 0.1
'Region {III): 20 ems

a = 10 ems
= 30 = 10/30 = 0.33 36
b ems ; .a/b a= - - - - + 2 X 4 = 49.57 - 50
sin 60°
Having a/b < 0.5 ' then this Pin Plate:
region is to . be tre.ate~ as a
can t ilever portion. Assume the thickness of pin plate t = 2.0 ems

M
3
=~·
1000 X
UOJ
·~·
2
:; 2.5 t. 'cin
Assume the diameter of pin d = 5.0 ems

~ax =~ 2. 5 t
P
:::: f-6 2.5=..; . ..
x
. 0.72 x·2~4.- ..?.94 ems take t = 3.0 ems
Shear ori Pin:

p q = ~--'-'-2_0_ _-:::. = 0. 51 t/cm2 < 0. 25 x 4 O.K.

2 X
rr x (5
4

=2 2
f 20 = 2.0 t/cm < 0~6 Fu
;... ·.:· b X 5.0

Take edge distance = 1.75 d = 8.75 ems

 874 CHAPTER9
. . . CHAPTER9 873
Height of Pin Plate:
Bend.tng on Pin:
Consider forces Concentrated at the center of each pin
\l 20 "" 0.481 t/cm
plate. 41.57

41.57 1 41.57
z n d3 3.14 ·.1C (5)3 12.26 cm3 M = 0.481 X -2- X 2 X 2
s-s
X = 32 = 32 -

20 = 103.89 t ...Gm
M = "2 X 1.85 = 18.5 t.em

18.5 4
f
b
.
= 12.26 = 1 ·5 t/
em
2
< 0.72 x 2.4 t/cm2 O.K. = ~oo7 em.

Refer to table 5.6 - Solid circular section. ;, ..

zX = 2°07 = 174~52 cm
3
11.5·
. -~

., ...
Stress on Base:
103.89
. ! .. 2·
= 0.595)J./cm < 1.4 O.• K.
m = 8. 75 + 2.5 = 11.25 ems otake m = 11,.5 ems 17fs?
e = 9 cot (60°) = 6.64cms
ItlR
v = 20 sin (60°) = 17.32 tons : I H
N= 20·0 t

H = 20 .·
cos (60 )
0
= 10.0 tons f
2
mllmm 1- Ill 1HIIt1
•.

- 17.32
= 50 17.32 X 6.64
f1 X 20.
± = - 0.0173 ± 0.0138 t/em2
2 20 X (50} 2/6

2
f1 = - 3.5 kg/em < F
con
;

. 2
f2 = - 31.1 kg/em < F
con
 876 CHAPTER9L
..... CHAPTER9 875 2
2 0.0025 t/em
Example (9.6): r = - 0.0475 t/cm f
.2-
=
1 2
. 2 2 (o.k < 60 kg/em )
Design a fixed base connection of the bracket type r =-
47.5 kg/em f = ~ 2.S kg/em
1 2
(Type "1") to support a vertical f9rce N = SO tons, a bending
moment M = 3 mt and a horizontal force H =5 tons. (2) Base Plate:
Region (I): (Cantilever action)
Solution
The cantilever length being 5.0 ems.
2
= 50 + 300 x 15 = o. 041875 t/cm ·
40 X SO 50 X (40) 3/12
. 2
and f = 0. 0475 t/cm
1

The moment here is calculated for lhe whole breadth

I {B = 50 ems)
. . 1
M _ - 0.041875 X ·5 X SO X 2.50 + 2 {0.0475 - 0.041875) X
Region (I) 1 1
M = 3 mts
5 X 50 X J2 X 5 = 28.52 t.cm
N =.SO tons
y
·H = S.O tons
t
1
= f 6 M __ = (F
b Fb . b
= 0.72 F )
y ·~:
...
Free

®
. fixed Fix
t.Ocms j ~ 16cms
= ~ X. 28.52 = 1 . 4 em (1)
This type · i.S most COlllllonly l.lSedfor column bases under ~ioxo. 72x2.4 fiXed
' wM:'ch no tenSion exists.
Region (II): (plate supported on
B . .· . three sides)
i.e. e < 6 or tne resultant is·insidethe core.
Ye shall consider that this
M 300-.. 40
e - N = so.·= ?~·o ems < 6 < 6.66 em region is affected by a uniformly
,_ ..
distributed load with a value
·u) Stresses on Concrete:
nun
f:
1
= _ N + ll.y
A:-T
I equal to
under that region.(i.e. f 4 l
the maximum stress
fz

2
f: . = So + 300.x 20 . [ 50 . . 300 X 13 ]· X 1000 = 3cJ.f)3 ~prcm2
1 40 X SO ,_ -:=3 • • • f4: 40 X 50+ 50 X 403/12
. SO X .40 /12
2
 CHAPTER9 877 878 CHAPTER9L

f ~ 0.04 tonlcm 2 q
3
= -2"
Q 3 7.25
.- X·- k- =.. -2 ,..]!: 2- .11
-. __..
'"tllaX:'

b=26cms a = 24.4 ems alb = 24.4/26 = 0.94 = 0.543 t/cm

2

Use Table 9.1 where a

3
= 0.11 2
f
eq.
= J{1.08) 2 + 3{0.534)
M = 0.11 (26) 2 0.0'4 = 2.97. t.cm
3 X X
2 2
....1..!-tma•.
= 1 .. 43 t/cm < 1.1x0 .. 72x2.4 t/cm 2 sms
2.97 6 X
J
treq. = 1 x 0.72 x 2.4 = 3.21 ems (2) Sec. S - S

(4) Velds to the Base Plate:

From (1) & (2) thickness of the base plate = 3 •6 ems. ' Assume the size of welds is 1 em
around the flanges and the web.

I I .I
{3) Height of Bracket:
The stiffener will withstand the shaded region of stresses.
A
w
= (22 X 2 X 1) + 4{22.4 X 1.0)

2
-~·
+ 2 X 50 X 1 = 233 . 60 em .

~i~
-·-2
Ixw =4 X 22.4 X 1 X 13.5 + 2 X

2
50 X 1 X 15.5
3
22 /12
+ 2 X 1 X
l X

ft+H
4
~------------~~ ---2- = 42129 em

Assuming complete separation between column and base plate.

= 0.0475 + 0.0025 = 0.025 t/cm2
2 This assumption is very conservative.

fl + f1 N M ymax 50 300 X 16 2
F = x 20 x 10 = 7.25 tons 10 f= + = . 233.60+ ·421~
= 0.33 t/cm
2 M = F X~ = 36.24 t.cm . A Aw Ixw
2
< 0. 72 t/cm
Sec. <s 1 - S ): Q = 7.25 tons
1 M = 36.25 t.em
50 300 11 2
fB = 233.60 42129
X
= 0. 292 t/em
t .st = t fc = 2 • o ems ; hst = 10 ems
+

: 36.25 X (h/2) =
3 1.08 t/cm2 qB = rH- = 2 5
X 22.= 0.1136 t/em
2
2 x (h /12) w
 . . . CHAPTER9 879
880 CHAPTER9L

~ ..- x-i>i-!D:C:~ "" :-u + J(:~>2 +H fq~-=--6-;-53-t7cm~ <·Ho:n vem2 Example· (9. 7):
Design a fixed base
, ..

connection of
_
the side plate· type
Safe
"Type 3" to carry a vertical force N = SO tons , a bending
We can reduce the weld size as follows: moment M =3 mt and a horizontal force H =5 tons.

Solution
Aw = 233.6 s em
2

11
4 for weld size "s..
Iw = 42129 s em

.Point (B):
... . o: ,; .•..
~·. ·.·
0.292
fB- - s - q = 0.1136
B s
l..tt'3 1
:100'11$

I
•. J
f .
pr1nc.
- 0.33
s
< 0. 72 t/em2 s req. = 0.417 em

M =.3 mts • •
Point (A):
N = so·tons so
. ems
c - 0.33 2 H = 5tons
~A--s-> 0. 70 t/em s req. = 0.417 em
I• ~ems •
· . take the size of fillet welds =5 mms
Js! 32cms

(4)Bolts :-

As there no tension_ on the. base plate To determine the cantilever distance (a) • we have to
hence the bolts
will transmit only the she·-~-1· ng c
~0•
-c.e H = · 5. 0 tons to the estimate· the diameter · of ·the bolts used first.
cof)crete footing . . . . .

Jbf: bol.ts carry only the horizontal reaction (H).

A. 5 2
~D ::: 2 X 0.25 X 4 :: 2.5 em. * .If: we use:'only two bolts:

Use 2 bolts of diameter. 20 mms .• H s.o 2

A(one bolt) = "'2-x--:0.:-.~9:-:::Sc:.:O = ~2-x_,O-.~9""'8 = 2 .. 55 em

2
II d
2.55 = -4- -7" d = 1.80 Clb
. . . CHAPTER9 881
882 CHAPTER9L
,/ Veld Size
a ->-1:-+--3-d· R~gion (I}_: _ _(C.ant.Hev~~)
2
r1 =0.044 t/cm
* If we Use Four Bolts:
f = 50
=-:---.»
300 X 16
+ _:::...;;__;;____"3.--
H -~ - 5.0 __ 2 3 SO X 42 50 X (42) /12
A 1.27S em
(one bolt) ::: -.----;;:--;:;;n
4 x 0.98 -~ 4.x.0.98 2
£! 0.04 t/cm

d = 1..27 em use d = 14 mms (0.044 - 0~04) X S X S X 2

; ~~
':i ::: (0.04 X 5) X 2.S0 + 2 3

a>., (1· + 3 x 1.4q) < S.20 em~

!'. M = 0.53 t.em
1
.,
Use four bolts d i4 roms
~­-
t = ~-rr-
6 X 0.53 = 1.35 ems
0. 72 X 2.4
b

Region (II)! (supported on three sides)

Assume that this region is Free

l..
uniformly loaded by the value
of the .maximum stress on it
ll
~
u..
® -~
u..
l~ ems

which equals; Fixed _j

SO 300 X 13 I. 30 ems J
1 f3 =SO X 42 +SO X (42)3/12
rv !\I
2
- - 44 kg/em
2
< 60 kg/em
2 = 0.0364 t/cm 13cm

I !
®
I b = 30 ems • a = 24.40 ems
I
j
so
ems ~rr I
I!'!-
(2) Base.Plate: I alb = 24.4/30 ::: 0.81 _ltlllll

The base plate is divided into

,· ,'F ;,: :
Is
two regions as shown. L...:.

'· .;;
M
3
= 0.036 4 X (30)Z X 0.098 ::: 3.21 t.cm
The edges of the both regions
pre considered to- be_ fixed.
~ 6 x 3.21 = 3.33 ems
t=J~ = 1 X 0.72 X 2.4
b
 ~CHAPTER9 883 884 CHAPTER9L
- ( From (1) & {2) use base plate thickness of 3.4 ems.
i Assume hst = 20 ems ; tst = 1.0 ems
N.B. This thickness can be decreased by adding two
,-_- J 6 X 35.7 6 35 7
additional stiffeners to decrease the dimension "b" (see Example -·= X · = 0.72 X 2.4 t/em2
i 2
I 1 (20)
'9.9).

. 'I
\ (3) Height of Vertical Stiffeners: h = 11~13 ems take h 12 ems

f + f
1 2 2 7.14 ' 2
= 0.0239 t/em q = 23 X
X
1 X 12
= 0.89 t/em
2
> 0.84 t/em unsafe

Hence us·e h st = 14 ems = 1.0 ems

44 + 23.9 2
= 2
E! 34 kg/em
{4} Fillet Velds:
F = 0.034 x 10 x 21 = 7.14 tons The following assumptions are to be Considered:
{a) The straining actions {M, N and H) are transmitted from
the beam column to the side plates and to the base plate via the
weld lines (1) and (2), .as shown below. This means that the
1-Qcm existing contact has been neglected.

]· (b) The moment (M) and the normal force (N} are shared by
welds (1} and (2) according to their corresponding areas.

,-

I (1)
f1J" t0
1
• ~m,J ~ +- <2>1
1-

~ ' 30

!
Sec. (S -s ): .. f-(2)

•
C1l
(2)-

(1)
1---:---'
1
M = 7.14 x 5 = 35•70 t~cm

Q = 7. 14 tons:,
JslL1 30cms . llsL
1
 885
.
886 CHAPTER 91, -
..lcHAPTER9 Veld lines (2) and
Hence:
---z
Area of vertical -faces of-weld (2) 4 x 12.4x 1.0 = 49 .. 6 em A = 4x1x12.40 + 2x0.8x50
Where s = 1.0 em w(2.3)
2
2
= 129.6 em
Area of vertical faces of weld (1) - 4 X 14 X 1 56 cm
--2
Force resisted by welds (1) ; 56
I
X =4 X 1 X 12.40 X 12.5
1.129 $ 1.13 w(2,3) --2
Force resisted by welds (2) - 49.6 + 2 X 0.8 X 50 X 16.4

-50 3 100 4
Total compressive force
2
X
28 = 35.7 tons = 29266 em

35.7 My
Hence F (weld (1 )) =1 + 1.13
X 1.13 = 1~.94 tons N
f . = - ...
J- A I
max
w X
w
'
I F (~eld (2)) = 35.7- 18 . 94 = 16.76 tons
- J
. .
= 50 + 300 X 16.80 = 0.56 t/cm
2 - 2
·< 0.72 t/em (o.k)
. . ~.
129.6 ~29266
Check o£ Stresses:

18 9 4 2
Veld (1) q =--- =-·-=-- ----::- = 0.676 t/cm (o .. k)
2 X 14 X 1 Vel.d .lines (4) •
16 76 2
Veld (2) q = =----= -=-·-::---::- = 0.676
2 X 12.4 X 1
t/cni - (o.k)
5 2
q = -x--;::2-;;;:-2-x-.,..._s
-;;;:2 0. 72 t/em

Check of Velds Connecting the Side Plate and - the Beam-Colwnn

to the Base Plate: s = 0.158 em take s = 0.4 em (minimum)

Assumptions:

-_ (a) The straining actions . (11 and N) are transmitted

entirely to the baseplate by the welds (2) and .(3) shown in the
£igt.U-e below.

(b) The horizontal shear is tr:ansmitt_ed by \ilelds (4).

 . . . CHAPTER9 887
888 CHAPTER9L
Example (9.8):
(2) Base Plate:
.Design .. a £ixed... base-eoru~.ect..i..on- .o£ -the convent-i-onal---t-ype
·For the estimatrou of' the base·
(Type "2") to carry a vertical force (N . = SO t) • a bending N
I
I
I
moment (M = 3 mts) and a horizo.ntal force (H = S t) ·
plate thickness, the base plate is
divided into three regions where
Solution the support conditions are varying
;.
'
regarding these regions.
M = 3.0 mts N = SO tons H =S.O tons
For the design of the different

Preliminary Design:
regions it has been assumed that L
1--_ __;;;_s,---_ _J.
the edges are completely fixed.
H 30
a =
3 = = 10 ems Cantilevers S.O ems

A.
N
Region (1): (cantilever} ..
In this region. the base plate
Ulllllllll
fz llllllllill•.
f1
1 acts as a cantilever with· a
l. span Stresses on Concrete
j
equals to 5.0 ems.
The stress distribution under·
L _ _ _ _ _ ___._j this region is trapezoidal with
the shown sh&pe.
.lsll1 3Qcms I!1 sl.. LI 30cms I. j
50 300 X 25
f . - =----;;-;;:;- :!: 3
1 - 50 X 42 42 X (50} /12
r- 2
-5
1= 1 .
£ = 0.041 t/em
2 crrf=~~==~==~==r=t~
1 Q!P.

(1) Stresses on Concrete:

42
ems
• • ~ £
2
= 0.007. t/em
2 30cms

f __ ~ + M (D/2}
1.2- BD- LD3/ f1+f2
12 1=1 f
:-5 av

= [- so + ao0x2s · ]x1ooo
1.. 50 ems .I = 24 Kgs./em2
f1.2 50x42 - 42x(S0)3/ 1 ~ .
24 52
H1-1 = 1000 X 1 *2
2 2
f1 =- 41 kg/em <_ 60 kg/em Safe

2 z·
= 0.3 t.em.
r2 =- 6.7 kg/em $ 7 kg/em
 ..lcHAPTER9 889 890 CHAPTER9L
Region (2): (Supported on Four Sides)
1
i The maximum stress on -this region . ~----~--------
6 M
. -]o - 6 X 2.05
is r .
3
t = b F
b
= 1 X 0. 72 X 2. 4

so 300 X 13 Fixed 2.66 ems (3)

~c:J!J·~
f3 = 50 X 42 +
42 X (50 12
.~ .~ ems
u.. Fixed u.. ·
= 0.033 t/cm2 •
I
1
1
'
I
From (1) • (2) and. (3)

a'
a = 26 ems b = 14.40 ems . f260<ms] The base plate thickness will be 2.7 ems •

(3) Bracket Height:

--,
b
= 1.80 01: ._
1 = 0.094 I
I ' 0.041 t/em
2

-===tl
:::
f1
"2 = 0.048
300 .15
= 5050X
X
f2 +
2 42 3
M ,= 0.033 x (14.4) x 0.094 = 0.64 t.em 42 X (50) /12'
l a

. 2
= 0.034 t/em
2

Mb, = o. 033 x (26) x o. 048. := Lo?: !..·.em •:

F1 = 0.034 X 10 X 21

Region (III): (Supported on Three Sides) ::: 7.14 tons ( Rectangle

. 1
The .. maximum compressive stress F
2
=z (0.041 0.034)x10x21
under this region is equal to,
= 0.735 ton ( Triangle
2
= 41 kg/em =-0.041 t/cm2
·W . "0
f max w w lx 3()cmo
J: ~

b=30ems a = 10 ems
M _ = 7~ 14 x 5 + 0. 735. x
20
= 40.~3 t.em
1 1 3
a 10
b = 30 = 0.33 < 0.5

·{fl~)
Bending: ( take t = 1. 0 em )
H~nce treat this region as a cantilever beam: _· 6 M 2
f = -- 2
= 0.72 x 2.4 t/cm
t h
- q _ f .J.!J_cm
= 2.05 t .. cm h = 11.86 ems take h = 12 ems
Sec. St- St
 891 892 CHAPTER9L

--'-·;·y-- ----=·-- ...M- - - . 300 =5 wns""Tiof each flange)

i. e. F ( 1) - (2} 2 hBFI 2 X: 30

Take h = 14 ems
N(1l = N(2} = 2 = 2S
N
tons
'I
Take the to be 14cms and thickness 1.2cms.
14 X 2 X 0.72 S
2S
= <z- + S)
s = 0.86 em
l,:

(4) Fillet Welds:

Use weld size 9 mms
Welds vertical face :-
to the· Base Plate
The straining actions in the column are . partially * Fillet Welds {2) , (3) and (4) Connected
transmitted to the brackets by fillet welds (1) , where as the horizontal face { s - s )
remaining part. is directly transmitted to the base plate by J(
9cms
= 1.0
fillet welds (2). Asstime weld size em
M ¢ ,.A
-
Assume equal weld size for
all fillet welds:
A
w =1
+ 1
X

X
(SO

(28

so 3
X

X
2) + 1

2) = 192
X (9

em
2
X 4)

-I I- em,
I
I
-
--2
I = 2{1x 12 ) + 2(28x1x1S. 5 )

Sectional Elevation
X
w
93 --2
so
i _j
+ 4x(1x 12 + 1x9x20. 5) em~
L
Where: M( 1 ) = F( 1 ) x ~FI 4
= 49660 em

M Ymax
N
f.L =A- + I
(A) w X
w
If the weld size is "s"

so 300 X 25 2
f.L = 192 +
49660 = 0.41 t/cm
N(1) + F(1) = 14x2sxfall.weld (A)
= 14 X 2 X 0.72 ~
H 5.0 . 2
q{A) =x= 50 X 2 + 9 X 4 = 0.04 t/cm

N(2) + F(2) = 28 x s x fall.weld

.2 . 2
= 0.41 + ~{0.~1)2 + (0.04) = 0.413 t/cm
The areas of welds (1) and _( 2) are equal. . ~rinc. (A)
2 Safe
< 0. 72 ttcm
 . . CHAPTER9 897 89.8 CHAPTER9 .....
l
iI ' ·Assuming the thickness of the gusset plate to be 10 mms, we
;---- ~- = 53.97 X"(7.5} 2
. Mill 1000 X 2 = 1· can aetermJ.net:he- required. height (li-) in order to satisfy tlie
2
allowable compressive stress fc = 1.40 t/em •
I j
t = 1.52 X 6
1.40 = 2.55 ems take \~, = 26 mms h -
-
J1.083.03 x 6
X 0.72 X 2.4
= 16.97 ems take h = ti.o ems

(3) Design of Gusset Plate: (4) Design of Veld Between Gusset and Beam-Column:
The pressure under the base P 1a t e and the load on one Fillet welds (1) and (2) will transmit (F):
I

'·
I
gusset are as shown in figures •. F =3 X 100 + 45 37.5 tons
20 2

u
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
6·01 II
kgm/cnf
l}.i •· r;
10mms 1
Fillet wei
Sec. A-A Sec. B -8
53-97 2
kgm/cm
N1 N2 . - Smms
Fillt't welds

: 39.582 X 15 X 15
A A
,.. . IJW<m'
__!
N1 100o. = 8.91 tons !...

N _ 1 (53.97 - 39.582) X 15 x 15
I..18·0cmsJ
2 - 2 1000

l
X
= 1.62 ton
Critical Section (X- XI socms · b"'"'"l:
At Section (X-~):

~ = 8.91 + 1.62 = 10.54 tons Assume s = 1.0 em

Mx = 8.91 x 7.50 + 1.62 x 10 ~ 83.03 t.cm . ' 2
37.5
q = (18 + 2 X 17). X LO.
= 0.72 t/cm (o. k)
 ·~CHAPTER9. 899 900 CHAPTER9L
Example (9.10):
(S) Design of Fillet Velds Connecting Gussets and Beam-Column to
the.Base Plate: the fixed-base-
_JlesiR:gnJl-'Yl'~W GO~~·· shawn iB -Ei:gure.

Vhere: .N = 18.0 tons, M = 22 mt s. The eros.s section of the

Aw = 1.0 (2 X 50 + 4 X 13.5 + 2 X 18) = 190 cm2 col~ is a B.F.I.B. No. (SS).

4[(1~;.' 13•
2 3 Solution
I"'\. = t. o { xgo) • 13. SxUB. 25 12] ' 2x1Sx( 10. 5) 2
Check of of Stresses on the Base:
= 42848.4 cm4
: = 2~~0 = 122 ems > D/6

X
A
I • 0 • •. Ther:e will be compression over only a part of the base

r -r.
- and tension over the other part.
i
.,
!.
l
j
I
L
. ..
:
1&0ans
_j Exact Solution:
Assumption: All tension is carried

1
:
X

S(fCJiiS·· .
Lu&j by bolts only.

* 1: y = o.o
= :~ .+ ~~~.:
3 25 2
fL = 0.507 t/cm < 0.7 t/cm2 (o.k)
N = C- T
3 2 = 1/2 f kd'B - T (1)
q// = 2 X 50 + 4 X 13.5 = 0.02 t/cm (neglected) c

This horizontal reaction can .be asSUm.ed .transmitted to the *EM= 0 about (o)
base plate via w.elds attaching the web. to the base plate.
I o

N • e = T(d' - D/2) + (N + T)
(6) Anchor bolts . (D/2 - 1/3 kd' )

= T(d' 1/3 kd' ) + N

3.
A. = -=---=-""=="'""-....,~
--., :l X 0.25 X 4 =L 5 em2
fD/2 - 1/3 kd')

choose d ·= 18 mms. · (e + 1/3 kd' - D/2)

T =N X (d' - 1/3 kd' )•
(2)
 901 902 CHAPTER9L
...lcHAPTER9
* From Strain Relation-Ship: Data:
(from approx. solution)
E E
s c B 52 ems D = 95 ems
d' (1 - k) = kd'
f E
e = 122 ems d'= 84 ems
f 2
Es = Es
s c
·r
s
= n A
s
= 3 x 5.6 = 16.80 cm
c
n = 15
3 2
f
s
f
c 2.888 k + 7.6865 k + 1.8869 k - 1.8869 =0 =A
(1-k) =n k By trial and error:
f k
s
f n(1-k) •
c k 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.38 0.37
22mt
(3) A -1.178 -0.55 0.28 0.09 0

Substituting from (2} & (3) into (1) we get; k eo 0.37

I! N _ N (e+1/3 kd'-D/2) From Equation (2)
1 kzd'B · 1 (e+l/3 kd'-D/2)
N= 2 -x-n-·c1-kl"d' c1- 1/3 kl d' (1- 1/3 k)
s T = 20.74 tons II
II
II T
Multiplying by (1 - k} (1 - 1/3 k} we get; From Equation (1) • I

(1-k)(1-1/3k) = ~ n! k 2 (1/3kd'+e-D/2)- !• (1-k)(e-D/2+1/3kd') c = 38.74 tons 2 9 9 2

s
2 X 38.74 X 1000 2
d~ {ce-D/2)+(1/Jd'-e+ fc= 0.37 x 84 x 52 = 48 kg/em

2
D/2)k-1/3k d'} Repeat the previous steps ysing the new va.lues of T, C and f
c

3 1 B (e-D/2)k2- (e-D/2) - d~ (1/3d'-e

1-4/3k = 61 Bd'
nA k + 2 nA d' Note: 1- This method of analysis will require several
s s +D/2)k iterations.

2- There is only a small difference between the exact and

the approximate solutions and hence it is simpler to refer for
the analysis to Example 9.12.
 -:wl CHAPTER 9 903
904 CHAPTER9 . . . .
Fixed Base Plate Connection
Bolts:
·lChanilel Without Contact)
~~~p~e {9.11):
Assume to use Channel No. 40 , b = 11 ems
M 2200 D
e=N=·-;:g-= 122.22 ems >
6 (then tension exists). t 1.40 em (b-t ) : : : 11
w w 1 40 = 9.60 ems

~_:;_:;~_pti~:
The channe1s at both sides are not in contact with the base
plate. This will lead to the folloMing:
(i) Compression (C) is located under the compression flange 55- 1.50 + 1.40 + 9.60/2 = 59.70 ems
of the column.
2200 18 X 26
T = 59 .. 70 5 9 . 70 = 29.01 tons 18 t
(ii) Tension (T) is located at the tension bolt.s.
A = 9.01 2
bolts 0.33 x 4 = 21.97 em

where Ftb =0.33 Fub

[ {4Q) a 1 =59.·70 ems

A 21.97
one bolt ::: = 7.32 em
2
. Stiffener Plate

1 Fillet weld

d ::::: J~ 7.32 X 4 _
3.14 x 0.80- 3.41 ems

~ reduction for threaded shank

Base Plate:
Side View

Compression flange reaction C = 2200 +18 ~

X 59.70
3
47.01 tons
42 [ 3(3x3.3) + 2x1 + 2x2]
ems
=36.0cms
]

3
D= 83 ems 1.50 + 11 + 3 15.50 ems
. , . CHAPTER 9 905 906 CHAPTER9L

3x15.50
G =fc X z··· X 3~.
Channel 140 l

47.01 X 1000 X 2
f
c 3 X 15.50 X 36
2 6.2cms
= 56.16 kg/em. Safe T

In order to determine the

required safe
the base plate take
thickness

1 1
M ~

2
of

:ttH I
9·67 9·67

Welding Between Stiffeners and Channel:

9·67

As shown in figure, the horizontal weld forces (F ) and the

1 ~00 [39.25x( 11
/ 39~2Slx 1
Hi_ 1 =
3
) x36 +(S6.1.6- ~x36x;1 ~2] vertical weld force (F ) combine to resist the 9.67 tons
2
1
acting
with an eccentricity of 6.20 ems.
= 138..4'l4 + 39.772 = 178.25 ton. em
From channel web we get:
i 17S:J' . 25 X 6 9.67
= =2----c=36-;;--.4 0-=-+---:2=--x--::9=-.--,6=) 0.087 t/cm'
t =.J 36 x 0~72 x 2.4 = 4 · 14 ems
7

·Stiffeners:
From Table (3.2) we get:
The load on the bolts is supported by the top fla."lge of the 2
(9.6)
channel No. 40. reinforced by four stiffener plates welded X from channel web =2 x 9. 60 + 36 . 40 = 1.657 em
between t!1e.'chaimel flanges. Each of the two interi9r plates
3 2 3 4
supports a full bolt ioad, i.e. 1 ::: 2 (8x(9.6) + 6x9.6x(36.4) + (36.4) .:_ (9.6) ]
p 12 (2x9.6 + 36.4)
4
= 29.01 = 9 · 67 t
= 21632 cm
Fintermediate ons
stiffener
--7 _ M.y _ 9.67(6.2 - L40)x18.20 = 0.039 t/cm'
q[Mt] - Ip - 21632
9.67 6 2
Astif£~mer - L 40 = ·907 em
Take £nr utiffeners b = 9.60 CIJJS t t = 0.80 em
= H.x = 9.67(6.2
-~-
- 1.40)x(9.6 - 1.657)
21632
= 0.017 t/cm'
p
b/t -- 90.80
• 60 -~ 12 < 16 (safe)
 . . . CHAPTER9 907 908 CHAPTER9L-
Section (2-2):
4.496 .. 2
f t = =3-=-o-=-x:..-=-;;0,::..--=-4-=o 0.375 < 0.72 t/cm (Safe)
i
' ' Using fillets on both sides of stiffeners the reqvired size The shear (9.67 x 3) will be resisted by vertical welds
(s) will be; between web of channel and flange of column.
0.11
s = --~~~~~-- = 0.152 ems
0. 72 X 1.0 3 x 9.67 = 0 _91 t/cm2 (Unsafe)
q[~] =2 X 40 X 0.40 .
Take s =4 mms (minimum size of weld).

As an alternative solution we can assume F1 carrying the

.
Take s1ze o f we ld s = 0O.• 91
72 x 0 . 40 = 0 • 51 em

moment and the force F carrying th~ shear and so we get: s ~ 6 mms
2
It can be noted that we can consider only the horizontal
9.67 X (6.20 - 1.40)
9.67 tons Fl = 1.27 tons lines of weld (i.e. no vertical weld lines between channel and
F2 36.40
I 9.67 2 2
column flange). In such a case: •.
J . =2 = 0.332 t/cm < 0.72· t/cm (Safe)
q[~] X 0.40 X 36.40
Seetion 1-1 :

4.496 2
1.27 2 2 (Safe) 30 X 0.40
= 0.375 t/cm
--'?
= 2 X 0.40 X 9.60 = 0.165 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm
q[Mt]

fl. = 3_04.496
0 40 = 0. 375
x . t/em
2

Yelding Between Channel and Column Flange:

2 2 2
f
eq.
= j(0.375) 2 + 3(0.375) = 0.75 t/cm < 1.1 x 0.72 t/cm
F = 9.67 x 3 x 6.20 = 4.496 tons
3 40
Section
b
(flange of column) 4.496 2
qf"'].
//LQ
30 X 0.40
= 0.375 t.tcm

Section (1-1):
4 496 2
f J.. = -=--=-
30 -=-·~ ~~~
X 0.40
= 0.375 t/cm

2
2
f
eq.
=jco.37SJ 2 + 3(0.375) = 0.75 2
t/cm < 0.72 x 1.1 t/cm
2
0.375 < 0.72 t/cm (Safe)
Safe
...lcHAPTER9 909 910 CHAPTER9
asstunptions, refer to Examples (9.13) and (9.14) where the
Example (9.12):
utilized assumptions are based on'·the finite eiements metho.d.
Design the fixed base connection shown in~figure below.

Pre-dimens.ioning:
Approximate Solution: Having:
AsswDpti ons: h = height of column section.
1- The whole tension force is supported b width of column flange.
by bolts on the tension side.
N::18 t
M::22mt
It is of good practice to start the design by assuming
2- The line of action of the the following dimensions:
compression force lies on the
centerline of the vertical Desb+~b
3
stiffeners.
B = h ~ 2 X !3 h + 2 X
This means that the vertical
(2 4 5 ems)
stiffeners are assumed . to
support the entire resultant Hence:
2 2
compression force " c ". Hence D es 30 +
3 x 30 = 50 ems

the contact between the . beam'" Take D = 52 ems

and the base 11
column flange
c=--- F.:=:::. 1 - .

plate is neg;lected.

·These two assumptions will

c=.-:..-_
)===~
t:.:===•• 30
=
1
J X 55 ::: 18 ems

t==-=-"'"1'

•
-:..oo:;..'::::J
B = 55 + 2 x 18 + 2 x 2 = 95 ems
render the structural system
c:=:-- ----== 1- e = NM =--~
22x100 = 122 ems. D/6 = 95/6 = 15.8 ems.
~---------------------l•- 11
statically determinate. This
( There are tension )
means that we have.two unknowns,
namely either (T and C) or (ft
95-0cms
J
1- Bolts:
and f ) and two equations of
c 18
equilibrium <E M =0 and EY = 0). T = + = 21.14 tons

21.14 2
the ~olts 4 : 16 em ,· use bolts d = 30 mms
The second assumption is somewhat imaginary. In fact, : 0.33 X

flange of the beam-column will transmit the greates,t amount of

Ftb = 0.33 Fub
the resultant compressive for~e., However, this asswDption will . 11 (3)2 ' 2
~olt(stress area) es 0.8 i - - - = 5.6 em ; Ose 3 holts
4
considerably
 . . . CHAPT!ER9 911 912 CHAPTER 9 a,.
2- Vertical Stiffeners: • Sec. (1-1):
L: y :: 0 ~ C =T + N· = 2L 14 + 18.0 = 39.14·tons·-···· . 39-:-14"·-
8 X 1.0 X 25

"C" is transmitted from compression flange through welds to 2

0.196 t/cm
the stiffeners at the compression side and then to the base
plate by bearing. Tension "T" is transmitted through welds and 6 x 352.26 = 0.422 t/cm2
8 X 1.0 X
stiffeners at tension side to the bolts via the top plateand then

{fD~.Q
to the R.C. footing. Assuming that·intermediate stiffeners support
double the load of the edge stiffeners,
f
eq.
j (ft )2 + 3 (q)2

T = 21. 14 tons
2
= (0.422) 2 + 3 (0.196) \

tD
C
=- z--
18 2200 -
~- 39.14 tons~ governing 2
= 0.54 t/cm < 1.1 x 0.72 (o.k)

F stiff = -39.14
3- = 13. 04 tons
ll! Sec.(2-2): ·
2
To prevent buckling of stiffeners T] = 0.196
q[Q// t/cm

b M 2
t < 16 18 < 16 t = 1.20 em q(Mt)l= Z= 0.422 t/cm
-~ t
\
13.04 2 q. = jco.t96l 2 + (0.422>
2
= 0.465 2
t/cm (o.k)
f t = - -..,..~x..__,..,.
1 20 1 8 = .o. 60 t/ em total '

< 1.40 Safe Takes= 1 x 0.54/(0.72x1.1) = 0.68 ems.

I
. .J

3- Vertical Velds: (4} Top Plate:

'e::o.
= 1.0
~e
-v
Assume s em
Fst /2 Fst 1.20 --
Fst Fst/2
Height of stiffeners ~ ~ b ~ b
3 .
tI t t tI
ti
J
( Ls: 2S 25.3
Take L w = 25 c.ms
T = 21.14
:~J
T r~ t· ..j. a .j•
b
a E ~
.j.
1·20
'e=o. --
C = 39.14 tons ~ governing
~
9 $·()emS 9
M
Q = C =39.14 tons T ( A)).,._2 ~
B. M.D.
ems

M = 39.14 X 9 = 352.26 cm.t ~~~

M M3
11 •
 a = 3d~ 3 x 3.0 = 9.0 ems
913
914 CHAPTER 91\,
e = a/2 4.5 ems

e' = 21 (30 - 9 x 2 - 4.5 X 2- 1.2)

= 0 .. 9 em t/'
st
Mil = 127.56 ton.cm

fstiff * If holes of bolts are taken into consideration

M
11
= - -2- x e = 13 ·04 x 4 •.5 = 29.34 ton.cm
• b
· • net
= 52 - 3 x 3.20
·
= 42.40 ems

Take b = 18 + 2 = .20 ems

(20 - 3.2) 2
X tft
z = 6
= 1.4 t/cm2
XX
F as the ·section is not solid rectangular section
b
f =~ = M
(6) Length of Bolts: fbond = 6.0 kg/em
2 T
ta Z bt2
6
T =n IT d Lbolt X fbond
which
t _
-
J16.8
6 29.34
X
1.40 X
are less 21.14x1000 =3 X IT X 3.0 xLbolt X 6.Q
than M
11 L = 125 ems
2
Fb = 1.4 t/cm as the section is not solid rectangular section Generally, the depth of the footing
T:i·1 t.
is not that large, so. we do not usually
Take t = 2.80 ems
use bolts of length more 'than 50 ems.
(5) Base C = 39.14 tons
Bearing Yasher Plate: ·
C =~ fC X 33 X b.
Hence, the suitable choice ·is to'
use a bearing washer plate. It is
• 39.14 X 1000 = .!_2 X f
c
X 3 X 11 X 52
always preferable to considet.- that
this bearing plate is resisting the
f
c
= 45.6. kg/em2 .
< 60 kg/em Safe
2
i11-n I applied tension force.
I t"CiiiS"i
fcl = ~
2
f = 30.41 kg/cm
3 c T = 21 3· 14 = 7.04 ~ 7.1 tons
Assuming that the critical section is at the bolts'
Assume the embeded length:
centerline.
L = 30 ems; C = 2.5 d = 7.5 ems
 CHAPTER9 915 916 CHAPTER9

~,14 X 3 X 30 X 6 1696. kgs _ 1.69 tons

The remaining tension force= 7.1 1.69 5.41 tons

- 0.1 t/cm2
;J

2
(3.75)
M11 = 0.1 X 7.5 X
2
5.27 t.cm

6 X 5.27
t =
J 7.5 X 0.72 X 2.4 = 1.56 em
·•'
Take t (bearing washer plate) =16 mms.
Check o;f·:Stresses regarding the welds attaching the bolt to the
washer ~ari~g plate. '.~.

f . = 0.126 t/cm2
bear1ng
Section~ ( 1-1):

~
Assume s = 1 em
3.75 2'
1,_ ,.1 M1-1 - 0.126 X 7.5 X - 2 - = 6.64 ems

2---~---2 I \
5.41
= 0.985 t/cm
2 17 '1
t = j 6 X 6.64
7.5 X 0.72 X 2.4
1. 75 em t = 18 mms

0.985
Take'·.is = x 1.0 = 1.36 em s 14 mms

.,
Some designers do not liketo transmit part of the tension
force by bond. They consider that the portion of the bolt
embeded in ·the pocket filled with compacted fine concrete is not
capable of transmitting by bond the corresponding Tbolt' Hence,
the bearing washer plate is designed to transmit the total induced
tension force. Thus:
 -
.JI CHAPTER 9 917
918
(g) Recalculate again a more exact tens"ion force regarding
CHAPTER9

Example (9.13): the bolts; and from equilibrium a new resultant compression

Design a fixed base connection to support a bending moment force.

M = 22 m.t and a normal force N = 18.0
-·-';

i
tons.
i (h) Proceed for the analysis of "the different steel
Make use of the results of the finite elements method to
components as for the previous example.
make reasonable assumptions

Solution
Procedure
N.
The following example is based on assumptions which were Pre-dimensioning:
found to be in accordance with the finite elements method Tf = flange beam-column tension force I
B·H·jss
previously outlined in Section 9.6.2.4. These assumptions are: 31 tons

·(a) Get the tension force induced in the beam-column flange Assume that the induced·tension
L SS·Ocll\S J
:_. ~
I Tf =h
M N
2 force in the bolts is:

where: h = height of beam-column-cross section

Tbolt = 0.675 Tf M
(finite elements)
(b) Assume the induced tension force in the bolts = 21 tons
Tbolt == 0.675 Tf. This decrease is a consequent result due to
the increase of the arm.
C = 21 + 18 = 39 tons

21 2
(c) Get a pre-dimensioning of the bolts and the stiffeners -0-=-:.3""'3::--x--:4:-- = 15 • 9 em

on the compression side.. 2.11 12 55-0cms 12 Jl.z

Use bolts d = 30 roms
(d) The compression. resultant :(orce is assumed to be 2 ,-,0
II(3)
= 0.80
f:I
--4-
transmitted to the base plate by both the beam-column flange and ~olt X
: =::!
the corresponding stiffeners.
min +
=---===>
2 30
+
b'~L:-~_:_:________~----4~
= 5.60 em ems
-_-:;.."=.~

(e) Compute the center of gravity of the area of the

compression flange and those stiffeners. 15.9
I +
__"'::..:.::!

No. of bolts = 5.60 10

(f) This center of gravity is assumed to be coincide with 3.0 bolts

the compression resultant force.
 ,....
.

~CHAPTE~9 919 920 CBAPTER9 . . .

Use 3 anchor bolts d 30 mms
No. of stiffeners =
..(St. -44)..
No. of bolts i-_.1 '=-.'LO

(2) Stiffeners: C = 27.7 + 18

f = 39 = 13
st. 3
tons
= 45.70 tons T (

(conservative but allowed for pre-dimensioning

2 Fst. = 27j 70 = 9.20 tons

A
sL
= 13/1.40 = 9.30 em
tension side
..,
i 2
b.s t . X t st. = 9.30 em
Compression force carried by stiffeners at the:
. "d .
bs t. . =tst .x 16 (local buckling cond.) ·
Compress~on s1 e = (2828.80
_8 + 9 0) x 4S.70 = 11.0 tons
.

Take b
st.
'= 12 ems and tst.= 0.80 em Fst. = 311 = 3.70 tons
compression
side
Assumptions:
1- All .the tension· force is supported stiffeners at the tension side govern the design.
3 12-ikms
by th,e boU._s in the tension side.
11· 1 '1 Jo.BOcm f
9.20
= 1.0 t/cm
2
< 1.40 t/cm2
ta = 12 x 0.80 (Safe)
2- The compression resultant lies at j r v
the e.G. of the area comprising 30 (3) V~rtical Velds:
ems fC.G.
the compression flange and the
i Q = 9.20 t l
24·0cms

w
stiffeners taking only half the
H = 9.20 = 55.20
L~~~
area of the edge stiffeners. x 6 t.em

2
Af = 3x30 ~ 90 em Assume the size of weld = 0.60 em.
x = 28.80x6 +
(28.80
90x13.50
+ 90)
= 11.70 ems j_votvoj
A st.= 3x12x0. 80 Sec. (1-1):
2
(1) Anchor Bolts: = 28.8 em T :9·20 t
q·
~
= =-=--9...,.,...2_0-=-~
24 X 2 X 0.60
- 0. 33 t/em2

T = 1 [ 55
6 1. 30 2200 - 18x(-z+O. 30) j
= 27.70 tons
f---t =. 55.20 x 12 = 0 _48 t/em2
3
2 X 0.60 X (24)' /12

f = 27.70 = 1~60. t/cm2 2

use Grade 5.6 (Ftb=0.33x5=1~6S t/cm )
ta 3x5.60
 ..icHAPTER9 921 922 CHAPTER9'. . .

2
0. 73. t/CII! ....
!i ~f~cm
v
2
< 0.72 x 1.1 t/cm (Safe)
!

i l
Sec. (2-2): B·F·I·SS i iII
q
...
= 0.33 t/cm
2
i I
i i !:
! I
q ~ = 0.48 t/cm
2
1
I
!
2 2 2 2
q r =. Jo.32 + 0.48 = 0.58 t/cm < 0.72.t/cm Safe
fc
(
(4) Top Plate: 2ac ac

;
i
M_
1 1
= 9 i 20 x 4.50 = 20.70 t.cm
i

'
l
' fst/2 1·5 r=' c; _ _....._

b
st. = 14 :-- 3.20 = 10.80 ems
fst
4·5 f-
9·0
+ I30cms
1:::::."'::.--~
" t -,

t;l: =
6 X 20.70
= 3.0 ems fst 9·0
f-
+
c=...:-..: fC, =
3x13.7:-s.o " -'·'-'
3 X 13.70 X 44 . 5 0 . :. ··~ ;.
10.8 X 1.40
4·5
1·5
1--
:== +
c:=.::-.: . ---' 2
(5) Stresses on Concrete: = 35.80 kg/em
. 2 112·0
a = 11.70 + 2 = 13.70 ems
~8 ~ s]
c 14·0cms 2 2
1 [35.80 8) + -1 (44.5 - 35.8).
M1-1 = 1000
X (
2 2
X -
3
1/2 f X 3 a X b = C
c c
= 1.331 t.cm/cm'
3
1/2 X 60 X 3 X 13.70 X b - 45.70 X 10

6 X 1.331
b. =40cms t* = = 2.60 ems
m1n. 1 X 1.40

50 ems Take thickness of base plate = 2.60 ems

2 2
f
c
= 44.50 kg/em < 60 kg/em
act. Safe
. . . . CHAPTER9
Example {9.14):
923 \ (2) Stiffeners: C = 45.40
924
tons
CHAPTER9

Redesign the fixed base connection of Example 9.13 assuming - 27:46

--3-
t.hat JOY. of ·the compression., res~ltant is transmitted via the
Tension side= 9 _10 tons '
' 6 6 z
beam-column flange while the remaining JOY. is transmitted via '
the corresponding stiffeners.
II
Compression force supported
Solution by stiffeners at the compression
I
0·7(
0·75
P3C
ac
J
side = O.JO x 45.40 = 1J.62 tons
Pre-dimensioning of the Connection:
1 62
Same as Example {9.1J}. fst. = J; = 4.54 tons N=18t

comp. side I
B.F.I.I55
Assumptions:
1-- The whole tension force is supported by· the bolts in the Stiffeners at the tension side
tension side. are governing;
M•22mt

2- JOY. of the compression force N•18t 9 10 2 2

I · f act.= 12 X• 0.80 = 1.0 t/cm < 1.40 t/cm Safe
resultant is transmitted
through the stiffeners while I (J} Vertical Velds:

~
70Y. througb·the flange.
Q = 9.10 tons

ac
O.JO C X 8 + 0.70 C X 15.50
= ------------,c.-------------
12 I 55-0cms 12 ll.z . M = 9.10. x 6 = 54.60 cm.t r
Assume the size of weld = 0.60 em
I ·M
= 1J.25 Cms Sec. (1~1):.

9.10 .. 2
24·0
L irJ
{1} Anchor Bolts: q·
-1-
= -=2~4-x------,2=--x--=o,...."""6.,.0 = 0.32 t/cm

~
T = 6 1.175 55 + 0. 75)]
.[ 2200 - 18(l
~ = 54.60 X 12 <It_\ ,.W
3
2 X 0.60 X (24} /12 • <D'.

C
= 27.40

= 27.40
tons

+ 18 = 45.40 tons

Almost the same values as theprevious Example {9.13).

f
= 0.475 t/cm

eq.
2

= J(0.475} 2
= 0.72 t/cm
2
+ 3(0.J2)
2

< 0.72 x· 1.1 t/cm

"f ••
9-0

9-0

2 Safe L 12·0 .I
. ·. Proceed as Example (9.1J).
..,. CHAPTER 9 925 926
Sec. (2-2 : Example ( 9. 15):
q// =0.32 t/cm 2
. qL ~ 0.475 t/~~ 2 •"••>•~ •W

Redesign Example (9.12) using the s·ame dimensioning of the

vertical stiffeners and make use of the assumptions of Example
••• q~ =Jo.32 2
+ o.47s
2
o.574 uem2
= (9.14) (L e. 70Y. of compression resultant transmitted by the
. 2
< 0. 72 t/em fstt2
Safe
fst f51
_t~~~+--~~t--~~t
fstf2 ...
beam-column flange while 30Y. by the corresponding stiffeners).

zs h lS Solution
(4} Top Plate: 1.~! l.u 1 9 .1. 9 J 4.s, ll1.o
i.
M1 _1 = 9; 1 X 4.50 = 20.50 t.em • Approximate Dimensioning (as Ex.9.11): I
B.F.ISS
. h 55 I
bst.= 3 - :3- 18.0 ems
b
st.
= 14 3.2 = 10.80 ems I
.N

= bj, = 30
t

·. • t* = j
. . Over hanging part
6 X 20.50
10.8 x 1.40 = 3 · 0 ems
i 3 .I 1a 1!.2
I = 10 ems
i
· (5) Stresses on Concrete: (1) Anchor Bolts:
bact. = SO ems Assumii:':·t.kat' '';70~ of the compression
'·· -. : ;

goes dir~;dtl~ frpm 'tbe flange to the

C = 1/2 f X 3 a X b ·,;
c c base plat-!i~ J?Y contact. The remaining
3 30X istransmitted through stiffeners.
45.40 X 10 = 1/2 X f X 3
c
X 13.25 X 50 p = 1o:s x 0.3 = 3.15 ems

fc = 45.70 kg/em
2
Safe T = 62~ 65 (2200 5
- 18( ; + 1.65)]

(6) Base Plate: T = 2s~so tons

£ = 3 X 13.25 8 X _
· c' 3 x 13.25 45 70 36.50 Use bolts d.= 30 mms Grade 5.6
2
MI-I - 1000
1 [
36.5 X-2---
(8)
+ 1/2 (45.7 - 36.5) X(8)2 X~] Ftb = 0.33 X 5 = 1.65
= 1. 363 em. t/em' 2
IT(3) 2 9
A . /bolt = 0.80 X = 5.60 cm 53.50

=J~x1.363
m~n.
T 0·7C 0·3(
t =260
* 1 x 1.40 · ems No. of bolts
25.50
= 1.65 X 5.60: 2 "76 ~~(9~+~5~~~3~.1~5~-1~~~~~(
=65.65cms ac
Use 3 bolts = 30 mms Grade 5.6
 ...lcHAPTER9 927 928 CHAPTER9&..
(2) Vertical Stiffeners: Sec. {2-2):
'-----£· ---z-
c = 25;5"0 +-ts---=-43:-so· ·tons q
//
= 0.25 t/cm qj_ = 0.57 t/cm

0.30 C = 13.05 tons

qr = j (o.25)
; 2 + (0.57)
2 2
= 0.62 t/cm < 0.72 t/cm
2
Safe
T = 25.50 tons
0.3Cx11 + 0. 7Cx21.50 (4) Top Plate: fst/2
Stiffeners at the ·tension side ac = c fst fst fstl2

are governing. H = 8250 X 4.50 = 19.125 t.cm

t
zs t Zi
t
Zi !U
f
. I
ac = 18.35 ems 1.~j [4.5 .l. . 9 I 9 . .j.4.5

I
25.50
Fst. = - 3- = 8.50 tons b = 20 - 3.20 = 16.80 ems

bst. 6 X 19.125 11cm

b - 18.0 ems · - t - - < •16 tst. = 1.20 em t* = = 2.40 ems N=18t
st. 16.80 X 1.40
st. I
i
~ ·(5) Stresses on Concrete:
C = 1/2 f X 3a X -b
C ·C
i

~{
• J
(3) Vertical Yelds: ·M
3
8.50 tons i(QJ 43.5 X 10 = 1/2 f X 3 X 18.35

H ::!:: 8.50 x 9 = 76.50 t.cm ·

1 X 50
c
2ac
T~ . 2 2
·G{ f
c
= 31.60 kg/em < 60 kg/em
Assume size of weld- 0.70 em 1.50 <D.._ \ JD Safe

Sec.(1-1):
9-0 •GJ (6) Base Plate:

8.50 0 25
q//= "'"2-x--:0"""".-:7;-:;0~x--;::2:-:-4 = ' . t/cm
2
9·0
• =3 X 18.35 - 11
= 25.28 2

76.50 X 12
• fc,
3
x _
18 35
x 31.60 kg/em

fj_ = 3
1.50 \.9·0 19·0 -1 1 [ (11) + 2
1
2
2 X 0.70 X (24) /12 HI-I = 1000 25.28 X --2- X (31.6 - 25.28) X (11) 2 X 32]
2
= 0.57 t/cm
= 1. 78 t. em/em'

f
eq.
= jco.s7l~ + 3(o.2sJ
2
= 0.71
.
t/cm
2 . 2
< 1.1 x 0.72 t/cm t* ~8 = 2 ..80
= ~~O ems
:.: j

Comments Regarding the Different Assumptions:

From the table below, it can be· observed that:
 .,Ji CHAPTER 9 929 930 CHAPTER9
(a) The assumption of Ex. 9.12 that only the vertical
Example .l9 ...16 )_:
stiffeners transmit the total·- resultant ·compressive ·rorce is
Design a fixed base connection to support a bending moment
somewhat imaginary and leads to a conservative base plate
of 38.0 mt and a normal force of 20 tons as shown in the figure
thickness.
below.
Stiffeners Bolt Top Plate f Base Plate Solution
c
2
b ems t ems n d ems t ems kg/em t ems B ems D ems
3.0
2.8 4S.6 3.7 so 95
* Dimensioning of Connection:
Ex 9.12 18 1.2 3
St 37
Tf 3800
= 42.50 - 202 -- 79.41 t ons
3.0
Ex 9.13 12.0 0.8 3
St 44
3.0 44.5 2.6 so 83
Tbolts ~ 0.675 x 79.4~ = 53.60 tons
Ex 9.14 12~0 . 0.8 3 3.0' 3.0 45.7' 2.6 50 83
. St 44
~

3 3.0 C 53.60 + 20 = 73.60 tons

Ex 9.15 18.0 1.2 2.4 31.6 2.8 50 95
I St 44
J
. ···~ ~
~- of:."
·-· •• "!'-'
• A
bolts
= 0.33
53.60
x 1.4
= 40.6 em
2
( Grade 4.6 )
'" .. ,.:.(b).. -Tt~~..,assumption of Ex. 9. 14 that 70X ~f the resultant
compressive force is transmitted through th:e compression flange Use bolts-d = 36 mms
arid 30%
'·1(-\
by the vertical stiffeners, seems' to be the simplest
2 M
1 approximate method. The obtained results are nearly the same as IT{3.6) 2
l Ab = 0.80 X
4
8.17 em
I' for Ex. 9.13 where the assumptions where based on the finite N
min I
elements method.
No. of bolts
40.6
S.O bolts i
8.17 B.f.l. 42.5
Hence for simplicity and for realistic path of forces it is
I
recommended to consider that: 1~ Alternative (Extended Plate):
70% of C is transmitted via beam-column Extend the column flanges and 2.JL 16 .I 42.50cms I 16 ll.2
flange and that the remaining 30% by the corresponding put the five bolts on one row
vertical stiffeners. outside the column flange.
+ 11
--=-==-31-
J For the predimensioning, take T bolts- 0.675 T f and No. of stiffeners = 6.0 + 11
.:-:=~·1-

C =N + Tbolts' w.hile conservative but it can be modified c:.=-=--

+ 11
Fst. = 73 •60 = 14.72 tons
--·::.::::_::31-

+ 11.
when proceeding the analysis. -_-:..::>1-

b X t = 10.50 cm
2 + 11
st. st.
 . . . CHAPTER9 931
bst.= 16 tst. (Local Buckling) 932 CHAPTER9

Stiffeners at tension side govern.

bst.= 16.0 ems and tst.= 1.0 em
12.90 2 2
16 X 1.0
= 0.81 t/cm < 1.40 t/cm Safe
Assumptions:
1- All the tension is supported
(3) Vertical llelds:
by the bolts in the tension
side. This tension is equally 2.6 '' 8 8 2
QT = 12.90 tons

distributed among bolts. '

'
I M 12.90 x 8 = 103.20 t.cm
I
o.7C 0.39 Use weld size = 0.80 em
2- 30 X of the compression force is
c ac
transmitted through t~e stiffeners
while 70X by the flaqge.
* Sec. 1-1 :
,-
o·..:..·3..:..C~x..:..1~0:_+_o;...;;.-='7,.:C-=(-=1-=8_+.::.1::..·3=)
ac=- C
q//=
12.90
28 X 2 X 0.80
=0.29 t/cm2 <f(
at_ 5Z> I

a
c;
= 16.51 ems
103.20 X 14
I
58.40
E H0 = 0.0 f.i =2 3
G) ems

X 0.80 X (28) /12

2
5~ x
42 50 0.49 t/cm
T = [3800 - 20 x ( ; + 1.49)] = 64.30 tons

C = 64.30 + 20 = 84.30 tons J f eq. = J~0.49) 2 + 3(0.29)

2
= 0.70 t/cm
2
-
2
(1) Anchor Bolts: ~ 0.72 x 1.1 t/cm Safe
..J\L ~.A Sec. (2-2):
'
I

5~-~~ 14
2
fact/bolt= = 1.58 t/cm q = 0.29 t/cm
2
q.i = 0. 49 t/cm
2
//
N
. i I
Use 5 bolts d = 36 mms St.(44) i
T B.F.I. 42.5 c
I
(2} Stiffeners: (4) Top Plate:
8.0 42.5cm 1.5
= 645.0
·
30
= 12.90 tons
52.0cm
tension
side fst/2 fst fst fst fst fstf2
t
zs t zs: 11 zs t
(1} t t t
in izs zs
Compression Supported by stiffeners the compression side uo.l 1.5.5 ! 11 I. 11 .,I. 11 .I. 1 5.5 1 !J-70
= 0.30 x'84.30 = 25~30 tons
 "'CHAPTER 9 933 934 CHAPTER9a,
I
12 · 9 X 5.50
:: - 35.5 t.cm
I 2- Example (9.17):
2~d Alternative: (Two Rows of Bolts)
b
st.
= 18 - 3.80 = 14.20 ems Use one row of bolts outside the
column flange and another row inside
6 X 35.5
t* = = 3.40 ems it.
14.20 X 1.40

Assumptions:
(5) Concrete Footing: IJ~cm
:> 1- The whole tension force is
I
transmitted to the bolts in
C :: 1/2 f X 3a X b
c c
3
l i.,I bolts in the tension side .
84.3 X 10 :: 1/2 X 60 X 3 X 16.50
X b .
>
i 1: This tension is
distributed among the bolts.
equally
-_-:..::.::J
m1n.

.. ··. b.· ; = 57 ems take b = 70 ems

m1n.
2- The compression force resultant 8
LJW 2.6
.conci~es with the outer race of r at
3
84.3 X 10 :: 1/2 f X 3 X 16.50 X 70
c the column compression flange.

2 2
f 48.70 kg/em < 60 kg/em Safe 3 X 8 - 2 X 10.60 _ 0.60 em
c a = 5~0
t

(6) Bas·e Plate: 5.8

i-- (1) Anchor Bolts:
> =----='
f
c'
:: 3 X 16.5- 10
3 x 16.5
X
48 _70 58.40
•
---=-= =::1
T:: 1_
43 10
[ 3800- 20 X 422.50]

•
ems
2
- 38.80 kg/em = 78.30 tons

•
.:===:~

2
2
1
[ (10) 1 ---=--==J 78 · 30 ( Grade 5.6 )

•
38.8 --- + Abolts= = 47.45 cm
HI-I = 1000 X
2 2
X
0.33 X 5
::.---=--==, £ ~,
(48.70 - 38.8) X (10) 2 X J2]

•
2 I
Use d = 36 mms, A . = 8.17 em
m1n.
> r- --~-==::1 N
= 2.27 t.cm/cm' 5.8 47 45
I

No. of bolts = · = 6 bolts i

8.17 B.F.I. 42.5
I
····! 6 X 2.27
= 3.20 ems I
1. 0 X 1.40
Use 4 bolts outside column flange ad 42.5 em
43.10cm
and 2 bolts inside it.
T c
 ~CHAPT_E_'R_9__________9_3_5______________________ 936 ~~APTER9L
Sec. (s-s):

17.4
q// = 28 X 2 X 0.80 0.435 t/cm 2 < 0.72 {o.k.)
1 [ 380 0
T = 44.30 20 X 422.50] .
N
!
= 76.20 tons I
B.F.I.42.5

76.20 2 at
fact . =6 x 8.14 = 1.56 t/cm
44.30cm
bolt
< 1.65 t/cm
2
Safe T c L4
T

Use 6 bolts d = 36 mms Grade 5.6

(2) Stiffeners:
14
.1 + +
C = 76.2 + 20 = 96.20 tons 12 fst/2 fst fst f£tl2 fstl2 f$l/2
t (112s: t
96.20
= 17.40
+ + (4) Top Plate:
1.70j\S.S! 11
H

~
l
t
11
D.
f.
I s.s ! 1uo
t
~I
~
.•

tons
12 + + 17.4
x 5.50 ~ 47.85 t.cm
17.40
= 1.08 ,t/cm2 /4
+ + f 5 tl2
16 X 1.0 bst. = 18 - 3. 80 = 14.20 ems
~8cmsJ 1. 16cms J
2
< 1.40 t/cm Safe
. •• t =J 6 X 47. 85 =
* 14.2 X 1.40
The eccentricity of the compression force (C) regarding the
(5) Concrete Footing:
stiffeners has been neglected •

C = 1/2 f
c
X 3a X b
c
(3) Vertical Welds:
Q l = 17.40 tons !=;.,"";;:;-.:.;;:;__~-----;:;;;_:;;: __;;:;_,;;::J:=!11.30
__;;; .
= 76.20 = 96.20
i
M can be neglected.
C

3
+ 20 tons
•
c::.'"'::..--

-$-
+
--=-:::::::~

+
= 0.·80 = 1/2 c=:--
I 96.20 10 f
• 47.48
·:..:-::.. "::I
. ·. Use weld size em X X 3 X 18 X 70
~ j c +
c=-=---
ems

. 2
fc = 50.90,kg/em +
c==--
l 18 I 42.50
 938 CHAPTER9

l Example {9.18}:
Design the base connection of·-'-a- · beam-column· supporting a
3x18 - 8.2 2
X 50.90 43.10 kg/em moment M = 14 mts and a normal force N = 6.0 tons. The
fc' = 3 x 18
beam-column has a B. F. I. B. cross section No. 26.

[ 43.10 X ~ +; X Use the pocket base concept.

(50.9 - 42.42) X (11)

2
X~] Solution

i s 3.00 ~-em
I of B.F.I.B. No.
!

b = 26 ems h=26cms tf = 1.80 em t

w = 1.10 em
t~ =
6 X 3.00
1.0 X 1.40
= 3.58 ems ----'> 3.6 ems.

2 3
A = 121.0 cm Z
X
= 1160 cm

f
N= 6t

~~tf, 31211
I
f ----t----
.1
Determination of the embeded height (h}:

Refer to section 9.8 using eqaution 9.16 get

h=~
J-TT- con

. 5
6 lC 14 X 10 ·
h = 60 x 26 = 73 · 0 ems

Use h = 80 ems.
 . . CUAPTER9 939 940 CHAPTER9&..
Check of Bearing and Bond Stresses:
i Example (9.19):
--...:......-c-onsi:der: ·that ·the· -bond·-wi:-i-1-exist···only- between ·the ·flan-g-e
Design a squar~ b~se connection to support a total verli.car
in compression and half the web. Vhile the bearing will exist
normal force of 200 tons. The column is a B.f.I.B. section No.
between the whole cross sectional area and the concrete.
(40}. Choose the grid base connection concept.

i.e. Area in bond = [26 + 12.45 + 2 ( 26 - 2 X LBO)] 80

2
Solution
2
= 5864 cm

Area-in bearing 121 em

2
~5 N = 200ton

2
f(bondJ
26cms
l
If we assume: fbo.nd = 7 kg/em 1·1t=

f"(b) = 60 kg/em
2
12-45
_l j
cone. -ll--
1.8
I. .I
(26- 2x1.8)
ems
2
The axial force resisted by bond

and bear_ing = 5864 x· 7 + 121 X 60

1000 1000
- ;;
= 41.048 + 7. 26 ::. 48. 3()8 toris > 6. 0 toris (Safe)
* Consider that the approximate weight of gird base .represents
lOY. of the applied vertical force.

i.e. Total load= 1.10 x 200 = 220 tons.

2
* Given the safe bearing pressure on the ground is 2.0 kg/cm •

(a) Base Plate:

Assume to use a square base plate·70 ems x 70 ems.

The pressure under the base plate is:

200 2
v1 = 7=o-=--x-_-=
7.,.
0 = 0.0408 t/cm
 .._.CHAPTER 9 941 942 CHAPTER9L
Section (B-B):
shear o.o
.
u
II

200 3.40 3.40 200 0.70 0.70

. Moment = 3.40 X -2- X - 4 - - 0.70 X -2- X -4-

2 0
= ~ ( 3.40- 0.70) = 67.50 ton.m

70cm W" = 200/0.70 = 285.71 tim"

23
M = 0.0408 x Unit length x 23 x
2 = 10.79 t.cm
70-0.80x30
j~-~·!oi~!o = 6.80 ems
m = = 23 ems
2
j
i t =
~(governs)

.n = 16 ems

{b) Grid Moments

Area of concrete base = 220 = 11 m2.

20

Use a square base 3.40 m x 3.40 m

{c) Upper Set of Beams:
The pressure. on the lower set of beams= w2· = 3.40200 ·
X 3.40
Neglect the effect of concrete acting with the steel beams.

2
17.30 t/0:. Assume to use three beams, then the section· modulus
For the upper set of beams: ..
require4 for each beam is:

. Section (A-Ah z = .67.50 X 100 3

1607:1 cm
X 3 X 1.40
200) ~ (3.40 - 0.70) =· 79.41 tons
Shear -- ( 3.40 2
(Z

Moment = ;~~O x ~ (
3.4° ; 0 70 2
· ) = 53.60 ton.m 79.41
X

2 2
.q =3 x (42.5 - 2 x 2.3) x 1.53 = 0.45 t/cm < 0.84 t/cm
Safe
 944 CHAPTER9
CHAPTER9 943
Be sure that the breadth of the flange of the three S.I.B .. do
The I cross section is checked against web crushing.
not exceed- tile ·oreaat:h-·ot ·the· base plate 1. e. : -
Refer to the following figure:
3b + 2c = 70 ems

c = 70- 3
x 16 · 3
2
= 10.1 ems (o.k.)

70-0cms
l l (d) Lower Set of Beams:

,·7'
L--------
2-3 = 79-20.cms
___ :~v_jK
j
Using ten beams, then

3
482.1 em-

3
Use ten s:I.B. No. (28) (Z = 542 em )
X

k = 2 tf = 2 X 2.3 (b = 11.90 ems h = 28 ems t = 1.01 em tf = 1.52 em)

w
k = 4.60 ems
2 2
= 1.24 t/cm < 1.40 t/cm Safe
t
w = 1.53 em
r 2 2
Crippling stress = f crp q = ~--~~~~--~~--~~~ .- 0.317 t/cm < 0.84 t/cm
Safe
< 1.80 Safe
2 2 2
f
eq.
= j(t.24) + 3(0.317) = 1.35 t/cm < 1.10 x 1.40 Safe
Combined stresses are checked at section (A-A) at the edge
the base plate. The size chosen for- the. t':'o ~ets of beams, will allow
adequate spacing between flanges for placing and compaction of
53.6 X 100 2
f
c 3 x 1740. = 1 .. 02 t/c.m concrete .

2
10 x 11.9 + 9C = 340 cm~_­
q 0.45 t/cm C = 24.55 ems

2
1. 27. tlcm . < 1.10 x 1.40 Safe
 10_. Mer,ritt. Structural Steel D~signers Handl:l<>.c:>.!s. ~...lfc ..:-.Graw:

REFERENCES Hill Book - Company - 1972.

11. Marcus , Basics of Structural Steel Design

.. Reston
Publishing Company - 1977.
1. Tall, Structural Steel Design , The Ronald press company-
New .York-1974.
12. Mourad
• « .
Stress Analysis of Steel Moment Connections
»

M.Sc. Thesis, Cairo University 1991.

2. Stanley. Y~
.
Crawly and RQbert M. Dillon,
Analysis and Design , John Wiley & Sons 1977.
Steei Buildings
13. Hassanei~ «Elastic Plastic Analysis of Welded Connections»,
L
M.Sc. Thesis - Cairo University 1983.
3. Salmon and Johnson, Steel Structures , Design and Behavior -
. «
· Harper & Row Publishers - 1971 - 1989. 14. Bungale S.Taranath Structural Analysis and Design of Tall
Bu1"ld"1ngs» , Mc - Graw - Hill, 1988.
4. M~ Cormac, "struc.tural Steel Design", Harper & Row - 1981 .-
1989. 15. Segue, «Fundamental Structural Steel Design», PYS - Kent
Publishing Company - 1989.
It It

5. L.J. Morris & D.R. PLUM, Structural Steel York Design ,

Nichols Publishing - New York 1988. 16. Morrls, G.A. and Paker, J.A. « Beam-to-Column Connections»
in Steel Frames»Canadian Journal of Civil Engineering,
•• tl

6 .. Graham WOwens & Brian, Structural Steel York Connections , 1987.

Butterworths Publisher - 1989.
17. Fyre, M.J. and Morries, G.A., «Analysis of Flexibility
.. connected Steel ·Frames», Canadian Tournai of Civil
7. William Me Guire, Structural Analysis and Design , Prentice-
!l Engineering, Z. 1975.
: ;Hali ·-:- 19s9~ ·

8. T. J. Macginley.
.. Structural Steel York Calculations and
18. Ang, K.M. and Morris G.A., «Analysis of 3 Dimensional

n
Frames with Flexible Beam to Column Connections» Canadian ·
·netailing· • Bulterworths 1975. Journal of Civil Engineering, 1984.
l·

I 9,. Fisher & Struik,

n.
Guide to Design Criteria for Bolted and 19. Taha,• « .
Behaviour of Steel Frames with Semi -Rigid Joints
Riveted Joints" , 1lilley - Interscience Publieation - 1974 .. under Static and Dynamic Loading», M. Sc. Thesis - Cairo
University 1986.
 :20. AbdeL-Ghaf'.£a~, << Behav-io\:lr---of--51:eel-Trusses with· S~mt=-R1gl0:
Joints under Static and
University - 1987.
Dy~amic Loading», M.Sc. Thesis-Cairo
I
l
:j <

*
21. Sherif Mourad « Stability of Steel Frames with Semi-Rigid
Connections» , M.Sc Thesis - Cairo .University ~ 1987.

22 •
*
Hanan El-Tobgy «Analysis of Steel Frames with Haunched
.I
'' Semi-Rigid Connections», M.Sc. Thesis - Cairo University - ,
1989.

1
j23.
*
Safaar « Parametric
Analysis of High
'
Strength Bolted
Connections» , M.Sc. Thesis - cairo University - 1992.

*
24. Hassan «Non-linear behaviour of steel frames wit,h s.emi-:-.
rigid connections» M.Sc. Cairo University 1994

*
Farouk « Stress Analysis of Steel Base Connections» ;

Thesis - cairo University - 1991.

M.Sc.
tl

~.B. References with (*) were supervised by the author.

I